Title: | 'Amazon Web Services' Security, Identity, & Compliance Services |
Version: | 0.9.0 |
Description: | Interface to 'Amazon Web Services' security, identity, and compliance services, including the 'Identity & Access Management' ('IAM') service for managing access to services and resources, and more https://aws.amazon.com/. |
License: | Apache License (≥ 2.0) |
URL: | https://github.com/paws-r/paws, https://paws-r.r-universe.dev/paws.security.identity |
BugReports: | https://github.com/paws-r/paws/issues |
Imports: | paws.common (≥ 0.8.0) |
Suggests: | testthat |
Encoding: | UTF-8 |
RoxygenNote: | 7.3.2 |
Collate: | 'accessanalyzer_service.R' 'accessanalyzer_interfaces.R' 'accessanalyzer_operations.R' 'account_service.R' 'account_interfaces.R' 'account_operations.R' 'acm_service.R' 'acm_interfaces.R' 'acm_operations.R' 'acmpca_service.R' 'acmpca_interfaces.R' 'acmpca_operations.R' 'cleanroomsml_service.R' 'cleanroomsml_interfaces.R' 'cleanroomsml_operations.R' 'clouddirectory_service.R' 'clouddirectory_interfaces.R' 'clouddirectory_operations.R' 'cloudhsm_service.R' 'cloudhsm_interfaces.R' 'cloudhsm_operations.R' 'cloudhsmv2_service.R' 'cloudhsmv2_interfaces.R' 'cloudhsmv2_operations.R' 'cognitoidentity_service.R' 'cognitoidentity_interfaces.R' 'cognitoidentity_operations.R' 'cognitoidentityprovider_service.R' 'cognitoidentityprovider_interfaces.R' 'cognitoidentityprovider_operations.R' 'cognitosync_service.R' 'cognitosync_interfaces.R' 'cognitosync_operations.R' 'detective_service.R' 'detective_interfaces.R' 'detective_operations.R' 'directoryservice_service.R' 'directoryservice_interfaces.R' 'directoryservice_operations.R' 'fms_service.R' 'fms_interfaces.R' 'fms_operations.R' 'guardduty_service.R' 'guardduty_interfaces.R' 'guardduty_operations.R' 'iam_service.R' 'iam_interfaces.R' 'iam_operations.R' 'iamrolesanywhere_service.R' 'iamrolesanywhere_interfaces.R' 'iamrolesanywhere_operations.R' 'identitystore_service.R' 'identitystore_interfaces.R' 'identitystore_operations.R' 'inspector2_service.R' 'inspector2_interfaces.R' 'inspector2_operations.R' 'inspector_service.R' 'inspector_interfaces.R' 'inspector_operations.R' 'kms_service.R' 'kms_interfaces.R' 'kms_operations.R' 'macie2_service.R' 'macie2_interfaces.R' 'macie2_operations.R' 'pcaconnectorad_service.R' 'pcaconnectorad_interfaces.R' 'pcaconnectorad_operations.R' 'ram_service.R' 'ram_interfaces.R' 'ram_operations.R' 'reexports_paws.common.R' 'secretsmanager_service.R' 'secretsmanager_interfaces.R' 'secretsmanager_operations.R' 'securityhub_service.R' 'securityhub_interfaces.R' 'securityhub_operations.R' 'securitylake_service.R' 'securitylake_interfaces.R' 'securitylake_operations.R' 'shield_service.R' 'shield_interfaces.R' 'shield_operations.R' 'sso_service.R' 'sso_interfaces.R' 'sso_operations.R' 'ssoadmin_service.R' 'ssoadmin_interfaces.R' 'ssoadmin_operations.R' 'ssooidc_service.R' 'ssooidc_interfaces.R' 'ssooidc_operations.R' 'sts_service.R' 'sts_interfaces.R' 'sts_operations.R' 'verifiedpermissions_service.R' 'verifiedpermissions_interfaces.R' 'verifiedpermissions_operations.R' 'waf_service.R' 'waf_interfaces.R' 'waf_operations.R' 'wafregional_service.R' 'wafregional_interfaces.R' 'wafregional_operations.R' 'wafv2_service.R' 'wafv2_interfaces.R' 'wafv2_operations.R' |
NeedsCompilation: | no |
Packaged: | 2025-03-14 09:23:34 UTC; dyfanjones |
Author: | David Kretch [aut], Adam Banker [aut], Dyfan Jones [cre], Amazon.com, Inc. [cph] |
Maintainer: | Dyfan Jones <dyfan.r.jones@gmail.com> |
Repository: | CRAN |
Date/Publication: | 2025-03-14 16:50:02 UTC |
Access Analyzer
Description
Identity and Access Management Access Analyzer helps you to set, verify, and refine your IAM policies by providing a suite of capabilities. Its features include findings for external and unused access, basic and custom policy checks for validating policies, and policy generation to generate fine-grained policies. To start using IAM Access Analyzer to identify external or unused access, you first need to create an analyzer.
External access analyzers help identify potential risks of accessing resources by enabling you to identify any resource policies that grant access to an external principal. It does this by using logic-based reasoning to analyze resource-based policies in your Amazon Web Services environment. An external principal can be another Amazon Web Services account, a root user, an IAM user or role, a federated user, an Amazon Web Services service, or an anonymous user. You can also use IAM Access Analyzer to preview public and cross-account access to your resources before deploying permissions changes.
Unused access analyzers help identify potential identity access risks by enabling you to identify unused IAM roles, unused access keys, unused console passwords, and IAM principals with unused service and action-level permissions.
Beyond findings, IAM Access Analyzer provides basic and custom policy checks to validate IAM policies before deploying permissions changes. You can use policy generation to refine permissions by attaching a policy generated using access activity logged in CloudTrail logs.
This guide describes the IAM Access Analyzer operations that you can call programmatically. For general information about IAM Access Analyzer, see Identity and Access Management Access Analyzer in the IAM User Guide.
Usage
accessanalyzer(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- accessanalyzer( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
apply_archive_rule | Retroactively applies the archive rule to existing findings that meet the archive rule criteria |
cancel_policy_generation | Cancels the requested policy generation |
check_access_not_granted | Checks whether the specified access isn't allowed by a policy |
check_no_new_access | Checks whether new access is allowed for an updated policy when compared to the existing policy |
check_no_public_access | Checks whether a resource policy can grant public access to the specified resource type |
create_access_preview | Creates an access preview that allows you to preview IAM Access Analyzer findings for your resource before deploying resource permissions |
create_analyzer | Creates an analyzer for your account |
create_archive_rule | Creates an archive rule for the specified analyzer |
delete_analyzer | Deletes the specified analyzer |
delete_archive_rule | Deletes the specified archive rule |
generate_finding_recommendation | Creates a recommendation for an unused permissions finding |
get_access_preview | Retrieves information about an access preview for the specified analyzer |
get_analyzed_resource | Retrieves information about a resource that was analyzed |
get_analyzer | Retrieves information about the specified analyzer |
get_archive_rule | Retrieves information about an archive rule |
get_finding | Retrieves information about the specified finding |
get_finding_recommendation | Retrieves information about a finding recommendation for the specified analyzer |
get_findings_statistics | Retrieves a list of aggregated finding statistics for an external access or unused access analyzer |
get_finding_v2 | Retrieves information about the specified finding |
get_generated_policy | Retrieves the policy that was generated using StartPolicyGeneration |
list_access_preview_findings | Retrieves a list of access preview findings generated by the specified access preview |
list_access_previews | Retrieves a list of access previews for the specified analyzer |
list_analyzed_resources | Retrieves a list of resources of the specified type that have been analyzed by the specified analyzer |
list_analyzers | Retrieves a list of analyzers |
list_archive_rules | Retrieves a list of archive rules created for the specified analyzer |
list_findings | Retrieves a list of findings generated by the specified analyzer |
list_findings_v2 | Retrieves a list of findings generated by the specified analyzer |
list_policy_generations | Lists all of the policy generations requested in the last seven days |
list_tags_for_resource | Retrieves a list of tags applied to the specified resource |
start_policy_generation | Starts the policy generation request |
start_resource_scan | Immediately starts a scan of the policies applied to the specified resource |
tag_resource | Adds a tag to the specified resource |
untag_resource | Removes a tag from the specified resource |
update_analyzer | Modifies the configuration of an existing analyzer |
update_archive_rule | Updates the criteria and values for the specified archive rule |
update_findings | Updates the status for the specified findings |
validate_policy | Requests the validation of a policy and returns a list of findings |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- accessanalyzer()
svc$apply_archive_rule(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Retroactively applies the archive rule to existing findings that meet the archive rule criteria
Description
Retroactively applies the archive rule to existing findings that meet the archive rule criteria.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_apply_archive_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_apply_archive_rule(analyzerArn, ruleName, clientToken = NULL)
Arguments
analyzerArn |
[required] The Amazon resource name (ARN) of the analyzer. |
ruleName |
[required] The name of the rule to apply. |
clientToken |
A client token. |
Cancels the requested policy generation
Description
Cancels the requested policy generation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_cancel_policy_generation/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_cancel_policy_generation(jobId)
Arguments
jobId |
[required] The |
Checks whether the specified access isn't allowed by a policy
Description
Checks whether the specified access isn't allowed by a policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_check_access_not_granted/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_check_access_not_granted(policyDocument, access, policyType)
Arguments
policyDocument |
[required] The JSON policy document to use as the content for the policy. |
access |
[required] An access object containing the permissions that shouldn't be granted by the specified policy. If only actions are specified, IAM Access Analyzer checks for access to peform at least one of the actions on any resource in the policy. If only resources are specified, then IAM Access Analyzer checks for access to perform any action on at least one of the resources. If both actions and resources are specified, IAM Access Analyzer checks for access to perform at least one of the specified actions on at least one of the specified resources. |
policyType |
[required] The type of policy. Identity policies grant permissions to IAM principals. Identity policies include managed and inline policies for IAM roles, users, and groups. Resource policies grant permissions on Amazon Web Services resources. Resource policies include trust policies for IAM roles and bucket policies for Amazon S3 buckets. |
Checks whether new access is allowed for an updated policy when compared to the existing policy
Description
Checks whether new access is allowed for an updated policy when compared to the existing policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_check_no_new_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_check_no_new_access(
newPolicyDocument,
existingPolicyDocument,
policyType
)
Arguments
newPolicyDocument |
[required] The JSON policy document to use as the content for the updated policy. |
existingPolicyDocument |
[required] The JSON policy document to use as the content for the existing policy. |
policyType |
[required] The type of policy to compare. Identity policies grant permissions to IAM principals. Identity policies include managed and inline policies for IAM roles, users, and groups. Resource policies grant permissions on Amazon Web Services resources. Resource policies include trust policies for IAM roles and bucket policies for Amazon S3 buckets. You can provide a generic input such as identity policy or resource policy or a specific input such as managed policy or Amazon S3 bucket policy. |
Checks whether a resource policy can grant public access to the specified resource type
Description
Checks whether a resource policy can grant public access to the specified resource type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_check_no_public_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_check_no_public_access(policyDocument, resourceType)
Arguments
policyDocument |
[required] The JSON policy document to evaluate for public access. |
resourceType |
[required] The type of resource to evaluate for public access. For example, to
check for public access to Amazon S3 buckets, you can choose
For resource types not supported as valid values, IAM Access Analyzer will return an error. |
Creates an access preview that allows you to preview IAM Access Analyzer findings for your resource before deploying resource permissions
Description
Creates an access preview that allows you to preview IAM Access Analyzer findings for your resource before deploying resource permissions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_create_access_preview/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_create_access_preview(
analyzerArn,
configurations,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
analyzerArn |
[required] The ARN of the account analyzer
used to generate the access preview. You can only create an access
preview for analyzers with an |
configurations |
[required] Access control configuration for your resource that is used to generate the access preview. The access preview includes findings for external access allowed to the resource with the proposed access control configuration. The configuration must contain exactly one element. |
clientToken |
A client token. |
Creates an analyzer for your account
Description
Creates an analyzer for your account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_create_analyzer/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_create_analyzer(
analyzerName,
type,
archiveRules = NULL,
tags = NULL,
clientToken = NULL,
configuration = NULL
)
Arguments
analyzerName |
[required] The name of the analyzer to create. |
type |
[required] The type of analyzer to create. Only |
archiveRules |
Specifies the archive rules to add for the analyzer. Archive rules automatically archive findings that meet the criteria you define for the rule. |
tags |
An array of key-value pairs to apply to the analyzer. You can use the
set of Unicode letters, digits, whitespace, For the tag key, you can specify a value that is 1 to 128 characters in
length and cannot be prefixed with For the tag value, you can specify a value that is 0 to 256 characters in length. |
clientToken |
A client token. |
configuration |
Specifies the configuration of the analyzer. If the analyzer is an unused access analyzer, the specified scope of unused access is used for the configuration. |
Creates an archive rule for the specified analyzer
Description
Creates an archive rule for the specified analyzer. Archive rules automatically archive new findings that meet the criteria you define when you create the rule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_create_archive_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_create_archive_rule(
analyzerName,
ruleName,
filter,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
analyzerName |
[required] The name of the created analyzer. |
ruleName |
[required] The name of the rule to create. |
filter |
[required] The criteria for the rule. |
clientToken |
A client token. |
Deletes the specified analyzer
Description
Deletes the specified analyzer. When you delete an analyzer, IAM Access Analyzer is disabled for the account or organization in the current or specific Region. All findings that were generated by the analyzer are deleted. You cannot undo this action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_delete_analyzer/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_delete_analyzer(analyzerName, clientToken = NULL)
Arguments
analyzerName |
[required] The name of the analyzer to delete. |
clientToken |
A client token. |
Deletes the specified archive rule
Description
Deletes the specified archive rule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_delete_archive_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_delete_archive_rule(analyzerName, ruleName, clientToken = NULL)
Arguments
analyzerName |
[required] The name of the analyzer that associated with the archive rule to delete. |
ruleName |
[required] The name of the rule to delete. |
clientToken |
A client token. |
Creates a recommendation for an unused permissions finding
Description
Creates a recommendation for an unused permissions finding.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_generate_finding_recommendation/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_generate_finding_recommendation(analyzerArn, id)
Arguments
analyzerArn |
[required] The ARN of the analyzer used to generate the finding recommendation. |
id |
[required] The unique ID for the finding recommendation. |
Retrieves information about an access preview for the specified analyzer
Description
Retrieves information about an access preview for the specified analyzer.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_get_access_preview/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_get_access_preview(accessPreviewId, analyzerArn)
Arguments
accessPreviewId |
[required] The unique ID for the access preview. |
analyzerArn |
[required] The ARN of the analyzer used to generate the access preview. |
Retrieves information about a resource that was analyzed
Description
Retrieves information about a resource that was analyzed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_get_analyzed_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_get_analyzed_resource(analyzerArn, resourceArn)
Arguments
analyzerArn |
[required] The ARN of the analyzer to retrieve information from. |
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource to retrieve information about. |
Retrieves information about the specified analyzer
Description
Retrieves information about the specified analyzer.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_get_analyzer/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_get_analyzer(analyzerName)
Arguments
analyzerName |
[required] The name of the analyzer retrieved. |
Retrieves information about an archive rule
Description
Retrieves information about an archive rule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_get_archive_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_get_archive_rule(analyzerName, ruleName)
Arguments
analyzerName |
[required] The name of the analyzer to retrieve rules from. |
ruleName |
[required] The name of the rule to retrieve. |
Retrieves information about the specified finding
Description
Retrieves information about the specified finding. GetFinding and GetFindingV2 both use access-analyzer:GetFinding
in the Action
element of an IAM policy statement. You must have permission to perform the access-analyzer:GetFinding
action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_get_finding/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_get_finding(analyzerArn, id)
Arguments
analyzerArn |
[required] The ARN of the analyzer that generated the finding. |
id |
[required] The ID of the finding to retrieve. |
Retrieves information about a finding recommendation for the specified analyzer
Description
Retrieves information about a finding recommendation for the specified analyzer.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_get_finding_recommendation/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_get_finding_recommendation(
analyzerArn,
id,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
analyzerArn |
[required] The ARN of the analyzer used to generate the finding recommendation. |
id |
[required] The unique ID for the finding recommendation. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. |
nextToken |
A token used for pagination of results returned. |
Retrieves information about the specified finding
Description
Retrieves information about the specified finding. GetFinding and GetFindingV2 both use access-analyzer:GetFinding
in the Action
element of an IAM policy statement. You must have permission to perform the access-analyzer:GetFinding
action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_get_finding_v2/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_get_finding_v2(
analyzerArn,
id,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
analyzerArn |
[required] The ARN of the analyzer that generated the finding. |
id |
[required] The ID of the finding to retrieve. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. |
nextToken |
A token used for pagination of results returned. |
Retrieves a list of aggregated finding statistics for an external access or unused access analyzer
Description
Retrieves a list of aggregated finding statistics for an external access or unused access analyzer.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_get_findings_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_get_findings_statistics(analyzerArn)
Arguments
analyzerArn |
[required] The ARN of the analyzer used to generate the statistics. |
Retrieves the policy that was generated using StartPolicyGeneration
Description
Retrieves the policy that was generated using start_policy_generation
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_get_generated_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_get_generated_policy(
jobId,
includeResourcePlaceholders = NULL,
includeServiceLevelTemplate = NULL
)
Arguments
jobId |
[required] The |
includeResourcePlaceholders |
The level of detail that you want to generate. You can specify whether to generate policies with placeholders for resource ARNs for actions that support resource level granularity in policies. For example, in the resource section of a policy, you can receive a
placeholder such as |
includeServiceLevelTemplate |
The level of detail that you want to generate. You can specify whether to generate service-level policies. IAM Access Analyzer uses |
Retrieves a list of access preview findings generated by the specified access preview
Description
Retrieves a list of access preview findings generated by the specified access preview.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_list_access_preview_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_list_access_preview_findings(
accessPreviewId,
analyzerArn,
filter = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
accessPreviewId |
[required] The unique ID for the access preview. |
analyzerArn |
[required] The ARN of the analyzer used to generate the access. |
filter |
Criteria to filter the returned findings. |
nextToken |
A token used for pagination of results returned. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. |
Retrieves a list of access previews for the specified analyzer
Description
Retrieves a list of access previews for the specified analyzer.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_list_access_previews/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_list_access_previews(
analyzerArn,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
analyzerArn |
[required] The ARN of the analyzer used to generate the access preview. |
nextToken |
A token used for pagination of results returned. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. |
Retrieves a list of resources of the specified type that have been analyzed by the specified analyzer
Description
Retrieves a list of resources of the specified type that have been analyzed by the specified analyzer.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_list_analyzed_resources/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_list_analyzed_resources(
analyzerArn,
resourceType = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
analyzerArn |
[required] The ARN of the analyzer to retrieve a list of analyzed resources from. |
resourceType |
The type of resource. |
nextToken |
A token used for pagination of results returned. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. |
Retrieves a list of analyzers
Description
Retrieves a list of analyzers.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_list_analyzers/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_list_analyzers(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL, type = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
A token used for pagination of results returned. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. |
type |
The type of analyzer. |
Retrieves a list of archive rules created for the specified analyzer
Description
Retrieves a list of archive rules created for the specified analyzer.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_list_archive_rules/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_list_archive_rules(
analyzerName,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
analyzerName |
[required] The name of the analyzer to retrieve rules from. |
nextToken |
A token used for pagination of results returned. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the request. |
Retrieves a list of findings generated by the specified analyzer
Description
Retrieves a list of findings generated by the specified analyzer. ListFindings and ListFindingsV2 both use access-analyzer:ListFindings
in the Action
element of an IAM policy statement. You must have permission to perform the access-analyzer:ListFindings
action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_list_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_list_findings(
analyzerArn,
filter = NULL,
sort = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
analyzerArn |
[required] The ARN of the analyzer to retrieve findings from. |
filter |
A filter to match for the findings to return. |
sort |
The sort order for the findings returned. |
nextToken |
A token used for pagination of results returned. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. |
Retrieves a list of findings generated by the specified analyzer
Description
Retrieves a list of findings generated by the specified analyzer. ListFindings and ListFindingsV2 both use access-analyzer:ListFindings
in the Action
element of an IAM policy statement. You must have permission to perform the access-analyzer:ListFindings
action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_list_findings_v2/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_list_findings_v2(
analyzerArn,
filter = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
sort = NULL
)
Arguments
analyzerArn |
[required] The ARN of the analyzer to retrieve findings from. |
filter |
A filter to match for the findings to return. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. |
nextToken |
A token used for pagination of results returned. |
sort |
Lists all of the policy generations requested in the last seven days
Description
Lists all of the policy generations requested in the last seven days.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_list_policy_generations/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_list_policy_generations(
principalArn = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
principalArn |
The ARN of the IAM entity (user or role) for which you are generating a
policy. Use this with |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. |
nextToken |
A token used for pagination of results returned. |
Retrieves a list of tags applied to the specified resource
Description
Retrieves a list of tags applied to the specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource to retrieve tags from. |
Starts the policy generation request
Description
Starts the policy generation request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_start_policy_generation/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_start_policy_generation(
policyGenerationDetails,
cloudTrailDetails = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
policyGenerationDetails |
[required] Contains the ARN of the IAM entity (user or role) for which you are generating a policy. |
cloudTrailDetails |
A |
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. Idempotency ensures that an API request completes only once. With an idempotent request, if the original request completes successfully, the subsequent retries with the same client token return the result from the original successful request and they have no additional effect. If you do not specify a client token, one is automatically generated by the Amazon Web Services SDK. |
Immediately starts a scan of the policies applied to the specified resource
Description
Immediately starts a scan of the policies applied to the specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_start_resource_scan/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_start_resource_scan(
analyzerArn,
resourceArn,
resourceOwnerAccount = NULL
)
Arguments
analyzerArn |
[required] The ARN of the analyzer to use to scan the policies applied to the specified resource. |
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource to scan. |
resourceOwnerAccount |
The Amazon Web Services account ID that owns the resource. For most Amazon Web Services resources, the owning account is the account in which the resource was created. |
Adds a tag to the specified resource
Description
Adds a tag to the specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource to add the tag to. |
tags |
[required] The tags to add to the resource. |
Removes a tag from the specified resource
Description
Removes a tag from the specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource to remove the tag from. |
tagKeys |
[required] The key for the tag to add. |
Modifies the configuration of an existing analyzer
Description
Modifies the configuration of an existing analyzer.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_update_analyzer/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_update_analyzer(analyzerName, configuration = NULL)
Arguments
analyzerName |
[required] The name of the analyzer to modify. |
configuration |
Updates the criteria and values for the specified archive rule
Description
Updates the criteria and values for the specified archive rule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_update_archive_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_update_archive_rule(
analyzerName,
ruleName,
filter,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
analyzerName |
[required] The name of the analyzer to update the archive rules for. |
ruleName |
[required] The name of the rule to update. |
filter |
[required] A filter to match for the rules to update. Only rules that match the filter are updated. |
clientToken |
A client token. |
Updates the status for the specified findings
Description
Updates the status for the specified findings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_update_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_update_findings(
analyzerArn,
status,
ids = NULL,
resourceArn = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
analyzerArn |
[required] The ARN of the analyzer that generated the findings to update. |
status |
[required] The state represents the action to take to update the finding Status.
Use |
ids |
The IDs of the findings to update. |
resourceArn |
The ARN of the resource identified in the finding. |
clientToken |
A client token. |
Requests the validation of a policy and returns a list of findings
Description
Requests the validation of a policy and returns a list of findings. The findings help you identify issues and provide actionable recommendations to resolve the issue and enable you to author functional policies that meet security best practices.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/accessanalyzer_validate_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
accessanalyzer_validate_policy(
locale = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
policyDocument,
policyType,
validatePolicyResourceType = NULL
)
Arguments
locale |
The locale to use for localizing the findings. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. |
nextToken |
A token used for pagination of results returned. |
policyDocument |
[required] The JSON policy document to use as the content for the policy. |
policyType |
[required] The type of policy to validate. Identity policies grant permissions to IAM principals. Identity policies include managed and inline policies for IAM roles, users, and groups. Resource policies grant permissions on Amazon Web Services resources. Resource policies include trust policies for IAM roles and bucket policies for Amazon S3 buckets. You can provide a generic input such as identity policy or resource policy or a specific input such as managed policy or Amazon S3 bucket policy. Service control policies (SCPs) are a type of organization policy attached to an Amazon Web Services organization, organizational unit (OU), or an account. |
validatePolicyResourceType |
The type of resource to attach to your resource policy. Specify a value
for the policy validation resource type only if the policy type is
For resource types not supported as valid values, IAM Access Analyzer runs policy checks that apply to all resource policies. For example, to validate a resource policy to attach to a KMS key, do not specify a value for the policy validation resource type and IAM Access Analyzer will run policy checks that apply to all resource policies. |
AWS Account
Description
Operations for Amazon Web Services Account Management
Usage
account(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- account( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
accept_primary_email_update | Accepts the request that originated from StartPrimaryEmailUpdate to update the primary email address (also known as the root user email address) for the specified account |
delete_alternate_contact | Deletes the specified alternate contact from an Amazon Web Services account |
disable_region | Disables (opts-out) a particular Region for an account |
enable_region | Enables (opts-in) a particular Region for an account |
get_alternate_contact | Retrieves the specified alternate contact attached to an Amazon Web Services account |
get_contact_information | Retrieves the primary contact information of an Amazon Web Services account |
get_primary_email | Retrieves the primary email address for the specified account |
get_region_opt_status | Retrieves the opt-in status of a particular Region |
list_regions | Lists all the Regions for a given account and their respective opt-in statuses |
put_alternate_contact | Modifies the specified alternate contact attached to an Amazon Web Services account |
put_contact_information | Updates the primary contact information of an Amazon Web Services account |
start_primary_email_update | Starts the process to update the primary email address for the specified account |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- account()
svc$accept_primary_email_update(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Accepts the request that originated from StartPrimaryEmailUpdate to update the primary email address (also known as the root user email address) for the specified account
Description
Accepts the request that originated from start_primary_email_update
to update the primary email address (also known as the root user email address) for the specified account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/account_accept_primary_email_update/ for full documentation.
Usage
account_accept_primary_email_update(AccountId, Otp, PrimaryEmail)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] Specifies the 12-digit account ID number of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to access or modify with this operation. To use this parameter, the caller must be an identity in the organization's management account or a delegated administrator account. The specified account ID must be a member account in the same organization. The organization must have all features enabled, and the organization must have trusted access enabled for the Account Management service, and optionally a delegated admin account assigned. This operation can only be called from the management account or the delegated administrator account of an organization for a member account. The management account can't specify its own |
Otp |
[required] The OTP code sent to the |
PrimaryEmail |
[required] The new primary email address for use with the specified account. This
must match the |
Deletes the specified alternate contact from an Amazon Web Services account
Description
Deletes the specified alternate contact from an Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/account_delete_alternate_contact/ for full documentation.
Usage
account_delete_alternate_contact(AccountId = NULL, AlternateContactType)
Arguments
AccountId |
Specifies the 12 digit account ID number of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to access or modify with this operation. If you do not specify this parameter, it defaults to the Amazon Web Services account of the identity used to call the operation. To use this parameter, the caller must be an identity in the organization's management account or a delegated administrator account, and the specified account ID must be a member account in the same organization. The organization must have all features enabled, and the organization must have trusted access enabled for the Account Management service, and optionally a delegated admin account assigned. The management account can't specify its own To call this operation on an account that is not a member of an organization, then don't specify this parameter, and call the operation using an identity belonging to the account whose contacts you wish to retrieve or modify. |
AlternateContactType |
[required] Specifies which of the alternate contacts to delete. |
Disables (opts-out) a particular Region for an account
Description
Disables (opts-out) a particular Region for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/account_disable_region/ for full documentation.
Usage
account_disable_region(AccountId = NULL, RegionName)
Arguments
AccountId |
Specifies the 12-digit account ID number of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to access or modify with this operation. If you don't specify this parameter, it defaults to the Amazon Web Services account of the identity used to call the operation. To use this parameter, the caller must be an identity in the organization's management account or a delegated administrator account. The specified account ID must be a member account in the same organization. The organization must have all features enabled, and the organization must have trusted access enabled for the Account Management service, and optionally a delegated admin account assigned. The management account can't specify its own To call this operation on an account that is not a member of an organization, don't specify this parameter. Instead, call the operation using an identity belonging to the account whose contacts you wish to retrieve or modify. |
RegionName |
[required] Specifies the Region-code for a given Region name (for example,
|
Enables (opts-in) a particular Region for an account
Description
Enables (opts-in) a particular Region for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/account_enable_region/ for full documentation.
Usage
account_enable_region(AccountId = NULL, RegionName)
Arguments
AccountId |
Specifies the 12-digit account ID number of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to access or modify with this operation. If you don't specify this parameter, it defaults to the Amazon Web Services account of the identity used to call the operation. To use this parameter, the caller must be an identity in the organization's management account or a delegated administrator account. The specified account ID must be a member account in the same organization. The organization must have all features enabled, and the organization must have trusted access enabled for the Account Management service, and optionally a delegated admin account assigned. The management account can't specify its own To call this operation on an account that is not a member of an organization, don't specify this parameter. Instead, call the operation using an identity belonging to the account whose contacts you wish to retrieve or modify. |
RegionName |
[required] Specifies the Region-code for a given Region name (for example,
|
Retrieves the specified alternate contact attached to an Amazon Web Services account
Description
Retrieves the specified alternate contact attached to an Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/account_get_alternate_contact/ for full documentation.
Usage
account_get_alternate_contact(AccountId = NULL, AlternateContactType)
Arguments
AccountId |
Specifies the 12 digit account ID number of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to access or modify with this operation. If you do not specify this parameter, it defaults to the Amazon Web Services account of the identity used to call the operation. To use this parameter, the caller must be an identity in the organization's management account or a delegated administrator account, and the specified account ID must be a member account in the same organization. The organization must have all features enabled, and the organization must have trusted access enabled for the Account Management service, and optionally a delegated admin account assigned. The management account can't specify its own To call this operation on an account that is not a member of an organization, then don't specify this parameter, and call the operation using an identity belonging to the account whose contacts you wish to retrieve or modify. |
AlternateContactType |
[required] Specifies which alternate contact you want to retrieve. |
Retrieves the primary contact information of an Amazon Web Services account
Description
Retrieves the primary contact information of an Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/account_get_contact_information/ for full documentation.
Usage
account_get_contact_information(AccountId = NULL)
Arguments
AccountId |
Specifies the 12-digit account ID number of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to access or modify with this operation. If you don't specify this parameter, it defaults to the Amazon Web Services account of the identity used to call the operation. To use this parameter, the caller must be an identity in the organization's management account or a delegated administrator account. The specified account ID must be a member account in the same organization. The organization must have all features enabled, and the organization must have trusted access enabled for the Account Management service, and optionally a delegated admin account assigned. The management account can't specify its own To call this operation on an account that is not a member of an organization, don't specify this parameter. Instead, call the operation using an identity belonging to the account whose contacts you wish to retrieve or modify. |
Retrieves the primary email address for the specified account
Description
Retrieves the primary email address for the specified account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/account_get_primary_email/ for full documentation.
Usage
account_get_primary_email(AccountId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] Specifies the 12-digit account ID number of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to access or modify with this operation. To use this parameter, the caller must be an identity in the organization's management account or a delegated administrator account. The specified account ID must be a member account in the same organization. The organization must have all features enabled, and the organization must have trusted access enabled for the Account Management service, and optionally a delegated admin account assigned. This operation can only be called from the management account or the delegated administrator account of an organization for a member account. The management account can't specify its own |
Retrieves the opt-in status of a particular Region
Description
Retrieves the opt-in status of a particular Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/account_get_region_opt_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
account_get_region_opt_status(AccountId = NULL, RegionName)
Arguments
AccountId |
Specifies the 12-digit account ID number of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to access or modify with this operation. If you don't specify this parameter, it defaults to the Amazon Web Services account of the identity used to call the operation. To use this parameter, the caller must be an identity in the organization's management account or a delegated administrator account. The specified account ID must be a member account in the same organization. The organization must have all features enabled, and the organization must have trusted access enabled for the Account Management service, and optionally a delegated admin account assigned. The management account can't specify its own To call this operation on an account that is not a member of an organization, don't specify this parameter. Instead, call the operation using an identity belonging to the account whose contacts you wish to retrieve or modify. |
RegionName |
[required] Specifies the Region-code for a given Region name (for example,
|
Lists all the Regions for a given account and their respective opt-in statuses
Description
Lists all the Regions for a given account and their respective opt-in statuses. Optionally, this list can be filtered by the region-opt-status-contains
parameter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/account_list_regions/ for full documentation.
Usage
account_list_regions(
AccountId = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
RegionOptStatusContains = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
Specifies the 12-digit account ID number of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to access or modify with this operation. If you don't specify this parameter, it defaults to the Amazon Web Services account of the identity used to call the operation. To use this parameter, the caller must be an identity in the organization's management account or a delegated administrator account. The specified account ID must be a member account in the same organization. The organization must have all features enabled, and the organization must have trusted access enabled for the Account Management service, and optionally a delegated admin account assigned. The management account can't specify its own To call this operation on an account that is not a member of an organization, don't specify this parameter. Instead, call the operation using an identity belonging to the account whose contacts you wish to retrieve or modify. |
MaxResults |
The total number of items to return in the command’s output. If the
total number of items available is more than the value specified, a
|
NextToken |
A token used to specify where to start paginating. This is the
|
RegionOptStatusContains |
A list of Region statuses (Enabling, Enabled, Disabling, Disabled, Enabled_by_default) to use to filter the list of Regions for a given account. For example, passing in a value of ENABLING will only return a list of Regions with a Region status of ENABLING. |
Modifies the specified alternate contact attached to an Amazon Web Services account
Description
Modifies the specified alternate contact attached to an Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/account_put_alternate_contact/ for full documentation.
Usage
account_put_alternate_contact(
AccountId = NULL,
AlternateContactType,
EmailAddress,
Name,
PhoneNumber,
Title
)
Arguments
AccountId |
Specifies the 12 digit account ID number of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to access or modify with this operation. If you do not specify this parameter, it defaults to the Amazon Web Services account of the identity used to call the operation. To use this parameter, the caller must be an identity in the organization's management account or a delegated administrator account, and the specified account ID must be a member account in the same organization. The organization must have all features enabled, and the organization must have trusted access enabled for the Account Management service, and optionally a delegated admin account assigned. The management account can't specify its own To call this operation on an account that is not a member of an organization, then don't specify this parameter, and call the operation using an identity belonging to the account whose contacts you wish to retrieve or modify. |
AlternateContactType |
[required] Specifies which alternate contact you want to create or update. |
EmailAddress |
[required] Specifies an email address for the alternate contact. |
Name |
[required] Specifies a name for the alternate contact. |
PhoneNumber |
[required] Specifies a phone number for the alternate contact. |
Title |
[required] Specifies a title for the alternate contact. |
Updates the primary contact information of an Amazon Web Services account
Description
Updates the primary contact information of an Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/account_put_contact_information/ for full documentation.
Usage
account_put_contact_information(AccountId = NULL, ContactInformation)
Arguments
AccountId |
Specifies the 12-digit account ID number of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to access or modify with this operation. If you don't specify this parameter, it defaults to the Amazon Web Services account of the identity used to call the operation. To use this parameter, the caller must be an identity in the organization's management account or a delegated administrator account. The specified account ID must be a member account in the same organization. The organization must have all features enabled, and the organization must have trusted access enabled for the Account Management service, and optionally a delegated admin account assigned. The management account can't specify its own To call this operation on an account that is not a member of an organization, don't specify this parameter. Instead, call the operation using an identity belonging to the account whose contacts you wish to retrieve or modify. |
ContactInformation |
[required] Contains the details of the primary contact information associated with an Amazon Web Services account. |
Starts the process to update the primary email address for the specified account
Description
Starts the process to update the primary email address for the specified account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/account_start_primary_email_update/ for full documentation.
Usage
account_start_primary_email_update(AccountId, PrimaryEmail)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] Specifies the 12-digit account ID number of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to access or modify with this operation. To use this parameter, the caller must be an identity in the organization's management account or a delegated administrator account. The specified account ID must be a member account in the same organization. The organization must have all features enabled, and the organization must have trusted access enabled for the Account Management service, and optionally a delegated admin account assigned. This operation can only be called from the management account or the delegated administrator account of an organization for a member account. The management account can't specify its own |
PrimaryEmail |
[required] The new primary email address (also known as the root user email address) to use in the specified account. |
AWS Certificate Manager
Description
Certificate Manager
You can use Certificate Manager (ACM) to manage SSL/TLS certificates for your Amazon Web Services-based websites and applications. For more information about using ACM, see the Certificate Manager User Guide.
Usage
acm(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- acm( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_tags_to_certificate | Adds one or more tags to an ACM certificate |
delete_certificate | Deletes a certificate and its associated private key |
describe_certificate | Returns detailed metadata about the specified ACM certificate |
export_certificate | Exports a private certificate issued by a private certificate authority (CA) for use anywhere |
get_account_configuration | Returns the account configuration options associated with an Amazon Web Services account |
get_certificate | Retrieves a certificate and its certificate chain |
import_certificate | Imports a certificate into Certificate Manager (ACM) to use with services that are integrated with ACM |
list_certificates | Retrieves a list of certificate ARNs and domain names |
list_tags_for_certificate | Lists the tags that have been applied to the ACM certificate |
put_account_configuration | Adds or modifies account-level configurations in ACM |
remove_tags_from_certificate | Remove one or more tags from an ACM certificate |
renew_certificate | Renews an eligible ACM certificate |
request_certificate | Requests an ACM certificate for use with other Amazon Web Services services |
resend_validation_email | Resends the email that requests domain ownership validation |
update_certificate_options | Updates a certificate |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- acm()
svc$add_tags_to_certificate(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Adds one or more tags to an ACM certificate
Description
Adds one or more tags to an ACM certificate. Tags are labels that you can use to identify and organize your Amazon Web Services resources. Each tag consists of a key
and an optional value
. You specify the certificate on input by its Amazon Resource Name (ARN). You specify the tag by using a key-value pair.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acm_add_tags_to_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
acm_add_tags_to_certificate(CertificateArn, Tags)
Arguments
CertificateArn |
[required] String that contains the ARN of the ACM certificate to which the tag is to be applied. This must be of the form:
For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). |
Tags |
[required] The key-value pair that defines the tag. The tag value is optional. |
Deletes a certificate and its associated private key
Description
Deletes a certificate and its associated private key. If this action succeeds, the certificate no longer appears in the list that can be displayed by calling the list_certificates
action or be retrieved by calling the get_certificate
action. The certificate will not be available for use by Amazon Web Services services integrated with ACM.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acm_delete_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
acm_delete_certificate(CertificateArn)
Arguments
CertificateArn |
[required] String that contains the ARN of the ACM certificate to be deleted. This must be of the form:
For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). |
Returns detailed metadata about the specified ACM certificate
Description
Returns detailed metadata about the specified ACM certificate.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acm_describe_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
acm_describe_certificate(CertificateArn)
Arguments
CertificateArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the ACM certificate. The ARN must have the following form:
For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). |
Exports a private certificate issued by a private certificate authority (CA) for use anywhere
Description
Exports a private certificate issued by a private certificate authority (CA) for use anywhere. The exported file contains the certificate, the certificate chain, and the encrypted private 2048-bit RSA key associated with the public key that is embedded in the certificate. For security, you must assign a passphrase for the private key when exporting it.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acm_export_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
acm_export_certificate(CertificateArn, Passphrase)
Arguments
CertificateArn |
[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the issued certificate. This must be of the form:
|
Passphrase |
[required] Passphrase to associate with the encrypted exported private key. When creating your passphrase, you can use any ASCII character except #, $, or %. If you want to later decrypt the private key, you must have the passphrase. You can use the following OpenSSL command to decrypt a private key. After entering the command, you are prompted for the passphrase.
|
Returns the account configuration options associated with an Amazon Web Services account
Description
Returns the account configuration options associated with an Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acm_get_account_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
acm_get_account_configuration()
Retrieves a certificate and its certificate chain
Description
Retrieves a certificate and its certificate chain. The certificate may be either a public or private certificate issued using the ACM request_certificate
action, or a certificate imported into ACM using the import_certificate
action. The chain consists of the certificate of the issuing CA and the intermediate certificates of any other subordinate CAs. All of the certificates are base64 encoded. You can use OpenSSL to decode the certificates and inspect individual fields.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acm_get_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
acm_get_certificate(CertificateArn)
Arguments
CertificateArn |
[required] String that contains a certificate ARN in the following format:
For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). |
Imports a certificate into Certificate Manager (ACM) to use with services that are integrated with ACM
Description
Imports a certificate into Certificate Manager (ACM) to use with services that are integrated with ACM. Note that integrated services allow only certificate types and keys they support to be associated with their resources. Further, their support differs depending on whether the certificate is imported into IAM or into ACM. For more information, see the documentation for each service. For more information about importing certificates into ACM, see Importing Certificates in the Certificate Manager User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acm_import_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
acm_import_certificate(
CertificateArn = NULL,
Certificate,
PrivateKey,
CertificateChain = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
CertificateArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an imported certificate to replace. To import a new certificate, omit this field. |
Certificate |
[required] The certificate to import. |
PrivateKey |
[required] The private key that matches the public key in the certificate. |
CertificateChain |
The PEM encoded certificate chain. |
Tags |
One or more resource tags to associate with the imported certificate. Note: You cannot apply tags when reimporting a certificate. |
Retrieves a list of certificate ARNs and domain names
Description
Retrieves a list of certificate ARNs and domain names. By default, the API returns RSA_2048 certificates. To return all certificates in the account, include the keyType
filter with the values [RSA_1024, RSA_2048, RSA_3072, RSA_4096, EC_prime256v1, EC_secp384r1, EC_secp521r1]
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acm_list_certificates/ for full documentation.
Usage
acm_list_certificates(
CertificateStatuses = NULL,
Includes = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxItems = NULL,
SortBy = NULL,
SortOrder = NULL
)
Arguments
CertificateStatuses |
Filter the certificate list by status value. |
Includes |
Filter the certificate list. For more information, see the Filters structure. |
NextToken |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only in a subsequent
request after you receive a response with truncated results. Set it to
the value of |
MaxItems |
Use this parameter when paginating results to specify the maximum number
of items to return in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
number you specify, the |
SortBy |
Specifies the field to sort results by. If you specify |
SortOrder |
Specifies the order of sorted results. If you specify |
Lists the tags that have been applied to the ACM certificate
Description
Lists the tags that have been applied to the ACM certificate. Use the certificate's Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to specify the certificate. To add a tag to an ACM certificate, use the add_tags_to_certificate
action. To delete a tag, use the remove_tags_from_certificate
action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acm_list_tags_for_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
acm_list_tags_for_certificate(CertificateArn)
Arguments
CertificateArn |
[required] String that contains the ARN of the ACM certificate for which you want to list the tags. This must have the following form:
For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). |
Adds or modifies account-level configurations in ACM
Description
Adds or modifies account-level configurations in ACM.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acm_put_account_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
acm_put_account_configuration(ExpiryEvents = NULL, IdempotencyToken)
Arguments
ExpiryEvents |
Specifies expiration events associated with an account. |
IdempotencyToken |
[required] Customer-chosen string used to distinguish between calls to
|
Remove one or more tags from an ACM certificate
Description
Remove one or more tags from an ACM certificate. A tag consists of a key-value pair. If you do not specify the value portion of the tag when calling this function, the tag will be removed regardless of value. If you specify a value, the tag is removed only if it is associated with the specified value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acm_remove_tags_from_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
acm_remove_tags_from_certificate(CertificateArn, Tags)
Arguments
CertificateArn |
[required] String that contains the ARN of the ACM Certificate with one or more tags that you want to remove. This must be of the form:
For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). |
Tags |
[required] The key-value pair that defines the tag to remove. |
Renews an eligible ACM certificate
Description
Renews an eligible ACM certificate. At this time, only exported private certificates can be renewed with this operation. In order to renew your Amazon Web Services Private CA certificates with ACM, you must first grant the ACM service principal permission to do so. For more information, see Testing Managed Renewal in the ACM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acm_renew_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
acm_renew_certificate(CertificateArn)
Arguments
CertificateArn |
[required] String that contains the ARN of the ACM certificate to be renewed. This must be of the form:
For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). |
Requests an ACM certificate for use with other Amazon Web Services services
Description
Requests an ACM certificate for use with other Amazon Web Services services. To request an ACM certificate, you must specify a fully qualified domain name (FQDN) in the DomainName
parameter. You can also specify additional FQDNs in the SubjectAlternativeNames
parameter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acm_request_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
acm_request_certificate(
DomainName,
ValidationMethod = NULL,
SubjectAlternativeNames = NULL,
IdempotencyToken = NULL,
DomainValidationOptions = NULL,
Options = NULL,
CertificateAuthorityArn = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
KeyAlgorithm = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] Fully qualified domain name (FQDN), such as www.example.com, that you want to secure with an ACM certificate. Use an asterisk (*) to create a wildcard certificate that protects several sites in the same domain. For example, *.example.com protects www.example.com, site.example.com, and images.example.com. In compliance with RFC 5280, the length of the domain name (technically, the Common Name) that you provide cannot exceed 64 octets (characters), including periods. To add a longer domain name, specify it in the Subject Alternative Name field, which supports names up to 253 octets in length. |
ValidationMethod |
The method you want to use if you are requesting a public certificate to validate that you own or control domain. You can validate with DNS or validate with email. We recommend that you use DNS validation. |
SubjectAlternativeNames |
Additional FQDNs to be included in the Subject Alternative Name
extension of the ACM certificate. For example, add the name
www.example.net to a certificate for which the The maximum length of a SAN DNS name is 253 octets. The name is made up of multiple labels separated by periods. No label can be longer than 63 octets. Consider the following examples:
|
IdempotencyToken |
Customer chosen string that can be used to distinguish between calls to
|
DomainValidationOptions |
The domain name that you want ACM to use to send you emails so that you can validate domain ownership. |
Options |
Currently, you can use this parameter to specify whether to add the certificate to a certificate transparency log. Certificate transparency makes it possible to detect SSL/TLS certificates that have been mistakenly or maliciously issued. Certificates that have not been logged typically produce an error message in a browser. For more information, see Opting Out of Certificate Transparency Logging. |
CertificateAuthorityArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the private certificate authority (CA) that will be used to issue the certificate. If you do not provide an ARN and you are trying to request a private certificate, ACM will attempt to issue a public certificate. For more information about private CAs, see the Amazon Web Services Private Certificate Authority user guide. The ARN must have the following form:
|
Tags |
One or more resource tags to associate with the certificate. |
KeyAlgorithm |
Specifies the algorithm of the public and private key pair that your certificate uses to encrypt data. RSA is the default key algorithm for ACM certificates. Elliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) keys are smaller, offering security comparable to RSA keys but with greater computing efficiency. However, ECDSA is not supported by all network clients. Some Amazon Web Services services may require RSA keys, or only support ECDSA keys of a particular size, while others allow the use of either RSA and ECDSA keys to ensure that compatibility is not broken. Check the requirements for the Amazon Web Services service where you plan to deploy your certificate. For more information about selecting an algorithm, see Key algorithms. Algorithms supported for an ACM certificate request include:
Other listed algorithms are for imported certificates only. When you request a private PKI certificate signed by a CA from Amazon Web Services Private CA, the specified signing algorithm family (RSA or ECDSA) must match the algorithm family of the CA's secret key. Default: RSA_2048 |
Resends the email that requests domain ownership validation
Description
Resends the email that requests domain ownership validation. The domain owner or an authorized representative must approve the ACM certificate before it can be issued. The certificate can be approved by clicking a link in the mail to navigate to the Amazon certificate approval website and then clicking I Approve. However, the validation email can be blocked by spam filters. Therefore, if you do not receive the original mail, you can request that the mail be resent within 72 hours of requesting the ACM certificate. If more than 72 hours have elapsed since your original request or since your last attempt to resend validation mail, you must request a new certificate. For more information about setting up your contact email addresses, see Configure Email for your Domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acm_resend_validation_email/ for full documentation.
Usage
acm_resend_validation_email(CertificateArn, Domain, ValidationDomain)
Arguments
CertificateArn |
[required] String that contains the ARN of the requested certificate. The
certificate ARN is generated and returned by the
|
Domain |
[required] The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the certificate that needs to be validated. |
ValidationDomain |
[required] The base validation domain that will act as the suffix of the email
addresses that are used to send the emails. This must be the same as the
|
Updates a certificate
Description
Updates a certificate. Currently, you can use this function to specify whether to opt in to or out of recording your certificate in a certificate transparency log. For more information, see Opting Out of Certificate Transparency Logging.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acm_update_certificate_options/ for full documentation.
Usage
acm_update_certificate_options(CertificateArn, Options)
Arguments
CertificateArn |
[required] ARN of the requested certificate to update. This must be of the form:
|
Options |
[required] Use to update the options for your certificate. Currently, you can specify whether to add your certificate to a transparency log. Certificate transparency makes it possible to detect SSL/TLS certificates that have been mistakenly or maliciously issued. Certificates that have not been logged typically produce an error message in a browser. |
AWS Certificate Manager Private Certificate Authority
Description
This is the Amazon Web Services Private Certificate Authority API Reference. It provides descriptions, syntax, and usage examples for each of the actions and data types involved in creating and managing a private certificate authority (CA) for your organization.
The documentation for each action shows the API request parameters and the JSON response. Alternatively, you can use one of the Amazon Web Services SDKs to access an API that is tailored to the programming language or platform that you prefer. For more information, see Amazon Web Services SDKs.
Each Amazon Web Services Private CA API operation has a quota that determines the number of times the operation can be called per second. Amazon Web Services Private CA throttles API requests at different rates depending on the operation. Throttling means that Amazon Web Services Private CA rejects an otherwise valid request because the request exceeds the operation's quota for the number of requests per second. When a request is throttled, Amazon Web Services Private CA returns a ThrottlingException error. Amazon Web Services Private CA does not guarantee a minimum request rate for APIs.
To see an up-to-date list of your Amazon Web Services Private CA quotas, or to request a quota increase, log into your Amazon Web Services account and visit the Service Quotas console.
Usage
acmpca(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- acmpca( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_certificate_authority | Creates a root or subordinate private certificate authority (CA) |
create_certificate_authority_audit_report | Creates an audit report that lists every time that your CA private key is used to issue a certificate |
create_permission | Grants one or more permissions on a private CA to the Certificate Manager (ACM) service principal (acm |
delete_certificate_authority | Deletes a private certificate authority (CA) |
delete_permission | Revokes permissions on a private CA granted to the Certificate Manager (ACM) service principal (acm |
delete_policy | Deletes the resource-based policy attached to a private CA |
describe_certificate_authority | Lists information about your private certificate authority (CA) or one that has been shared with you |
describe_certificate_authority_audit_report | Lists information about a specific audit report created by calling the CreateCertificateAuthorityAuditReport action |
get_certificate | Retrieves a certificate from your private CA or one that has been shared with you |
get_certificate_authority_certificate | Retrieves the certificate and certificate chain for your private certificate authority (CA) or one that has been shared with you |
get_certificate_authority_csr | Retrieves the certificate signing request (CSR) for your private certificate authority (CA) |
get_policy | Retrieves the resource-based policy attached to a private CA |
import_certificate_authority_certificate | Imports a signed private CA certificate into Amazon Web Services Private CA |
issue_certificate | Uses your private certificate authority (CA), or one that has been shared with you, to issue a client certificate |
list_certificate_authorities | Lists the private certificate authorities that you created by using the CreateCertificateAuthority action |
list_permissions | List all permissions on a private CA, if any, granted to the Certificate Manager (ACM) service principal (acm |
list_tags | Lists the tags, if any, that are associated with your private CA or one that has been shared with you |
put_policy | Attaches a resource-based policy to a private CA |
restore_certificate_authority | Restores a certificate authority (CA) that is in the DELETED state |
revoke_certificate | Revokes a certificate that was issued inside Amazon Web Services Private CA |
tag_certificate_authority | Adds one or more tags to your private CA |
untag_certificate_authority | Remove one or more tags from your private CA |
update_certificate_authority | Updates the status or configuration of a private certificate authority (CA) |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- acmpca()
svc$create_certificate_authority(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates a root or subordinate private certificate authority (CA)
Description
Creates a root or subordinate private certificate authority (CA). You must specify the CA configuration, an optional configuration for Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) and/or a certificate revocation list (CRL), the CA type, and an optional idempotency token to avoid accidental creation of multiple CAs. The CA configuration specifies the name of the algorithm and key size to be used to create the CA private key, the type of signing algorithm that the CA uses, and X.500 subject information. The OCSP configuration can optionally specify a custom URL for the OCSP responder. The CRL configuration specifies the CRL expiration period in days (the validity period of the CRL), the Amazon S3 bucket that will contain the CRL, and a CNAME alias for the S3 bucket that is included in certificates issued by the CA. If successful, this action returns the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the CA.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_create_certificate_authority/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_create_certificate_authority(
CertificateAuthorityConfiguration,
RevocationConfiguration = NULL,
CertificateAuthorityType,
IdempotencyToken = NULL,
KeyStorageSecurityStandard = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
UsageMode = NULL
)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityConfiguration |
[required] Name and bit size of the private key algorithm, the name of the signing algorithm, and X.500 certificate subject information. |
RevocationConfiguration |
Contains information to enable support for Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP), certificate revocation list (CRL), both protocols, or neither. By default, both certificate validation mechanisms are disabled. The following requirements apply to revocation configurations.
For more information, see the OcspConfiguration and CrlConfiguration types. |
CertificateAuthorityType |
[required] The type of the certificate authority. |
IdempotencyToken |
Custom string that can be used to distinguish between calls to the CreateCertificateAuthority action. Idempotency tokens for CreateCertificateAuthority time out after five minutes. Therefore, if you call CreateCertificateAuthority multiple times with the same idempotency token within five minutes, Amazon Web Services Private CA recognizes that you are requesting only certificate authority and will issue only one. If you change the idempotency token for each call, Amazon Web Services Private CA recognizes that you are requesting multiple certificate authorities. |
KeyStorageSecurityStandard |
Specifies a cryptographic key management compliance standard used for handling CA keys. Default: FIPS_140_2_LEVEL_3_OR_HIGHER Some Amazon Web Services Regions do not support the default. When
creating a CA in these Regions, you must provide
For information about security standard support in various Regions, see Storage and security compliance of Amazon Web Services Private CA private keys. |
Tags |
Key-value pairs that will be attached to the new private CA. You can associate up to 50 tags with a private CA. For information using tags with IAM to manage permissions, see Controlling Access Using IAM Tags. |
UsageMode |
Specifies whether the CA issues general-purpose certificates that typically require a revocation mechanism, or short-lived certificates that may optionally omit revocation because they expire quickly. Short-lived certificate validity is limited to seven days. The default value is GENERAL_PURPOSE. |
Creates an audit report that lists every time that your CA private key is used to issue a certificate
Description
Creates an audit report that lists every time that your CA private key is used to issue a certificate. The issue_certificate
and revoke_certificate
actions use the private key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_create_certificate_authority_audit_report/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_create_certificate_authority_audit_report(
CertificateAuthorityArn,
S3BucketName,
AuditReportResponseFormat
)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the CA to be audited. This is of the form:
|
S3BucketName |
[required] The name of the S3 bucket that will contain the audit report. |
AuditReportResponseFormat |
[required] The format in which to create the report. This can be either JSON or CSV. |
Grants one or more permissions on a private CA to the Certificate Manager (ACM) service principal (acm
Description
Grants one or more permissions on a private CA to the Certificate Manager (ACM) service principal (acm.amazonaws.com
). These permissions allow ACM to issue and renew ACM certificates that reside in the same Amazon Web Services account as the CA.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_create_permission/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_create_permission(
CertificateAuthorityArn,
Principal,
SourceAccount = NULL,
Actions
)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the CA that grants the permissions.
You can find the ARN by calling the
|
Principal |
[required] The Amazon Web Services service or identity that receives the
permission. At this time, the only valid principal is
|
SourceAccount |
The ID of the calling account. |
Actions |
[required] The actions that the specified Amazon Web Services service principal can
use. These include |
Deletes a private certificate authority (CA)
Description
Deletes a private certificate authority (CA). You must provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the private CA that you want to delete. You can find the ARN by calling the list_certificate_authorities
action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_delete_certificate_authority/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_delete_certificate_authority(
CertificateAuthorityArn,
PermanentDeletionTimeInDays = NULL
)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
PermanentDeletionTimeInDays |
The number of days to make a CA restorable after it has been deleted. This can be anywhere from 7 to 30 days, with 30 being the default. |
Revokes permissions on a private CA granted to the Certificate Manager (ACM) service principal (acm
Description
Revokes permissions on a private CA granted to the Certificate Manager (ACM) service principal (acm.amazonaws.com).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_delete_permission/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_delete_permission(
CertificateAuthorityArn,
Principal,
SourceAccount = NULL
)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Number (ARN) of the private CA that issued the
permissions. You can find the CA's ARN by calling the
|
Principal |
[required] The Amazon Web Services service or identity that will have its CA
permissions revoked. At this time, the only valid service principal is
|
SourceAccount |
The Amazon Web Services account that calls this action. |
Deletes the resource-based policy attached to a private CA
Description
Deletes the resource-based policy attached to a private CA. Deletion will remove any access that the policy has granted. If there is no policy attached to the private CA, this action will return successful.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_delete_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_delete_policy(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Number (ARN) of the private CA that will have its
policy deleted. You can find the CA's ARN by calling the
|
Lists information about your private certificate authority (CA) or one that has been shared with you
Description
Lists information about your private certificate authority (CA) or one that has been shared with you. You specify the private CA on input by its ARN (Amazon Resource Name). The output contains the status of your CA. This can be any of the following:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_describe_certificate_authority/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_describe_certificate_authority(CertificateAuthorityArn)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Lists information about a specific audit report created by calling the CreateCertificateAuthorityAuditReport action
Description
Lists information about a specific audit report created by calling the create_certificate_authority_audit_report
action. Audit information is created every time the certificate authority (CA) private key is used. The private key is used when you call the issue_certificate
action or the revoke_certificate
action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_describe_certificate_authority_audit_report/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_describe_certificate_authority_audit_report(
CertificateAuthorityArn,
AuditReportId
)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the private CA. This must be of the form:
|
AuditReportId |
[required] The report ID returned by calling the
|
Retrieves a certificate from your private CA or one that has been shared with you
Description
Retrieves a certificate from your private CA or one that has been shared with you. The ARN of the certificate is returned when you call the issue_certificate
action. You must specify both the ARN of your private CA and the ARN of the issued certificate when calling the GetCertificate action. You can retrieve the certificate if it is in the ISSUED state. You can call the create_certificate_authority_audit_report
action to create a report that contains information about all of the certificates issued and revoked by your private CA.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_get_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_get_certificate(CertificateAuthorityArn, CertificateArn)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
CertificateArn |
[required] The ARN of the issued certificate. The ARN contains the certificate serial number and must be in the following form:
|
Retrieves the certificate and certificate chain for your private certificate authority (CA) or one that has been shared with you
Description
Retrieves the certificate and certificate chain for your private certificate authority (CA) or one that has been shared with you. Both the certificate and the chain are base64 PEM-encoded. The chain does not include the CA certificate. Each certificate in the chain signs the one before it.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_get_certificate_authority_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_get_certificate_authority_certificate(CertificateAuthorityArn)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of your private CA. This is of the form:
|
Retrieves the certificate signing request (CSR) for your private certificate authority (CA)
Description
Retrieves the certificate signing request (CSR) for your private certificate authority (CA). The CSR is created when you call the create_certificate_authority
action. Sign the CSR with your Amazon Web Services Private CA-hosted or on-premises root or subordinate CA. Then import the signed certificate back into Amazon Web Services Private CA by calling the import_certificate_authority_certificate
action. The CSR is returned as a base64 PEM-encoded string.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_get_certificate_authority_csr/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_get_certificate_authority_csr(CertificateAuthorityArn)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called the
|
Retrieves the resource-based policy attached to a private CA
Description
Retrieves the resource-based policy attached to a private CA. If either the private CA resource or the policy cannot be found, this action returns a ResourceNotFoundException
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_get_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_get_policy(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Number (ARN) of the private CA that will have its policy retrieved. You can find the CA's ARN by calling the ListCertificateAuthorities action. </p> |
Imports a signed private CA certificate into Amazon Web Services Private CA
Description
Imports a signed private CA certificate into Amazon Web Services Private CA. This action is used when you are using a chain of trust whose root is located outside Amazon Web Services Private CA. Before you can call this action, the following preparations must in place:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_import_certificate_authority_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_import_certificate_authority_certificate(
CertificateAuthorityArn,
Certificate,
CertificateChain = NULL
)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Certificate |
[required] The PEM-encoded certificate for a private CA. This may be a self-signed certificate in the case of a root CA, or it may be signed by another CA that you control. |
CertificateChain |
A PEM-encoded file that contains all of your certificates, other than the certificate you're importing, chaining up to your root CA. Your Amazon Web Services Private CA-hosted or on-premises root certificate is the last in the chain, and each certificate in the chain signs the one preceding. This parameter must be supplied when you import a subordinate CA. When you import a root CA, there is no chain. |
Uses your private certificate authority (CA), or one that has been shared with you, to issue a client certificate
Description
Uses your private certificate authority (CA), or one that has been shared with you, to issue a client certificate. This action returns the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the certificate. You can retrieve the certificate by calling the get_certificate
action and specifying the ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_issue_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_issue_certificate(
ApiPassthrough = NULL,
CertificateAuthorityArn,
Csr,
SigningAlgorithm,
TemplateArn = NULL,
Validity,
ValidityNotBefore = NULL,
IdempotencyToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ApiPassthrough |
Specifies X.509 certificate information to be included in the issued
certificate. An If conflicting or duplicate certificate information is supplied during certificate issuance, Amazon Web Services Private CA applies order of operation rules to determine what information is used. |
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Csr |
[required] The certificate signing request (CSR) for the certificate you want to issue. As an example, you can use the following OpenSSL command to create the CSR and a 2048 bit RSA private key.
If you have a configuration file, you can then use the following OpenSSL
command. The
Note: A CSR must provide either a subject name or a subject alternative name or the request will be rejected. |
SigningAlgorithm |
[required] The name of the algorithm that will be used to sign the certificate to be issued. This parameter should not be confused with the The specified signing algorithm family (RSA or ECDSA) must match the algorithm family of the CA's secret key. |
TemplateArn |
Specifies a custom configuration template to use when issuing a
certificate. If this parameter is not provided, Amazon Web Services
Private CA defaults to the Note: The CA depth configured on a subordinate CA certificate must not exceed the limit set by its parents in the CA hierarchy. For a list of |
Validity |
[required] Information describing the end of the validity period of the certificate. This parameter sets the “Not After” date for the certificate. Certificate validity is the period of time during which a certificate is valid. Validity can be expressed as an explicit date and time when the certificate expires, or as a span of time after issuance, stated in days, months, or years. For more information, see Validity in RFC 5280. This value is unaffected when The end of the validity period configured on a certificate must not exceed the limit set on its parents in the CA hierarchy. |
ValidityNotBefore |
Information describing the start of the validity period of the certificate. This parameter sets the “Not Before" date for the certificate. By default, when issuing a certificate, Amazon Web Services Private CA
sets the "Not Before" date to the issuance time minus 60 minutes. This
compensates for clock inconsistencies across computer systems. The
Unlike the The |
IdempotencyToken |
Alphanumeric string that can be used to distinguish between calls to the IssueCertificate action. Idempotency tokens for IssueCertificate time out after five minutes. Therefore, if you call IssueCertificate multiple times with the same idempotency token within five minutes, Amazon Web Services Private CA recognizes that you are requesting only one certificate and will issue only one. If you change the idempotency token for each call, Amazon Web Services Private CA recognizes that you are requesting multiple certificates. |
Lists the private certificate authorities that you created by using the CreateCertificateAuthority action
Description
Lists the private certificate authorities that you created by using the create_certificate_authority
action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_list_certificate_authorities/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_list_certificate_authorities(
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
ResourceOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
MaxResults |
Use this parameter when paginating results to specify the maximum number
of items to return in the response on each page. If additional items
exist beyond the number you specify, the Although the maximum value is 1000, the action only returns a maximum of 100 items. |
NextToken |
Use this parameter when paginating results in a subsequent request after
you receive a response with truncated results. Set it to the value of
the |
ResourceOwner |
Use this parameter to filter the returned set of certificate authorities based on their owner. The default is SELF. |
List all permissions on a private CA, if any, granted to the Certificate Manager (ACM) service principal (acm
Description
List all permissions on a private CA, if any, granted to the Certificate Manager (ACM) service principal (acm.amazonaws.com).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_list_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_list_permissions(
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
CertificateAuthorityArn
)
Arguments
MaxResults |
When paginating results, use this parameter to specify the maximum number of items to return in the response. If additional items exist beyond the number you specify, the NextToken element is sent in the response. Use this NextToken value in a subsequent request to retrieve additional items. |
NextToken |
When paginating results, use this parameter in a subsequent request after you receive a response with truncated results. Set it to the value of NextToken from the response you just received. |
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Number (ARN) of the private CA to inspect. You can
find the ARN by calling the
|
Lists the tags, if any, that are associated with your private CA or one that has been shared with you
Description
Lists the tags, if any, that are associated with your private CA or one that has been shared with you. Tags are labels that you can use to identify and organize your CAs. Each tag consists of a key and an optional value. Call the tag_certificate_authority
action to add one or more tags to your CA. Call the untag_certificate_authority
action to remove tags.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_list_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_list_tags(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL, CertificateAuthorityArn)
Arguments
MaxResults |
Use this parameter when paginating results to specify the maximum number of items to return in the response. If additional items exist beyond the number you specify, the NextToken element is sent in the response. Use this NextToken value in a subsequent request to retrieve additional items. |
NextToken |
Use this parameter when paginating results in a subsequent request after you receive a response with truncated results. Set it to the value of NextToken from the response you just received. |
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called the
|
Attaches a resource-based policy to a private CA
Description
Attaches a resource-based policy to a private CA.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_put_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_put_policy(ResourceArn, Policy)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Number (ARN) of the private CA to associate with the
policy. The ARN of the CA can be found by calling the
|
Policy |
[required] The path and file name of a JSON-formatted IAM policy to attach to the
specified private CA resource. If this policy does not contain all
required statements or if it includes any statement that is not allowed,
the |
Restores a certificate authority (CA) that is in the DELETED state
Description
Restores a certificate authority (CA) that is in the DELETED
state. You can restore a CA during the period that you defined in the PermanentDeletionTimeInDays parameter of the delete_certificate_authority
action. Currently, you can specify 7 to 30 days. If you did not specify a PermanentDeletionTimeInDays value, by default you can restore the CA at any time in a 30 day period. You can check the time remaining in the restoration period of a private CA in the DELETED
state by calling the describe_certificate_authority
or list_certificate_authorities
actions. The status of a restored CA is set to its pre-deletion status when the RestoreCertificateAuthority action returns. To change its status to ACTIVE
, call the update_certificate_authority
action. If the private CA was in the PENDING_CERTIFICATE
state at deletion, you must use the import_certificate_authority_certificate
action to import a certificate authority into the private CA before it can be activated. You cannot restore a CA after the restoration period has ended.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_restore_certificate_authority/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_restore_certificate_authority(CertificateAuthorityArn)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called the
|
Revokes a certificate that was issued inside Amazon Web Services Private CA
Description
Revokes a certificate that was issued inside Amazon Web Services Private CA. If you enable a certificate revocation list (CRL) when you create or update your private CA, information about the revoked certificates will be included in the CRL. Amazon Web Services Private CA writes the CRL to an S3 bucket that you specify. A CRL is typically updated approximately 30 minutes after a certificate is revoked. If for any reason the CRL update fails, Amazon Web Services Private CA attempts makes further attempts every 15 minutes. With Amazon CloudWatch, you can create alarms for the metrics CRLGenerated
and MisconfiguredCRLBucket
. For more information, see Supported CloudWatch Metrics.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_revoke_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_revoke_certificate(
CertificateAuthorityArn,
CertificateSerial,
RevocationReason
)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the private CA that issued the certificate to be revoked. This must be of the form:
|
CertificateSerial |
[required] Serial number of the certificate to be revoked. This must be in
hexadecimal format. You can retrieve the serial number by calling
You can also copy the serial number from the console or use the DescribeCertificate action in the Certificate Manager API Reference. |
RevocationReason |
[required] Specifies why you revoked the certificate. |
Adds one or more tags to your private CA
Description
Adds one or more tags to your private CA. Tags are labels that you can use to identify and organize your Amazon Web Services resources. Each tag consists of a key and an optional value. You specify the private CA on input by its Amazon Resource Name (ARN). You specify the tag by using a key-value pair. You can apply a tag to just one private CA if you want to identify a specific characteristic of that CA, or you can apply the same tag to multiple private CAs if you want to filter for a common relationship among those CAs. To remove one or more tags, use the untag_certificate_authority
action. Call the list_tags
action to see what tags are associated with your CA.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_tag_certificate_authority/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_tag_certificate_authority(CertificateAuthorityArn, Tags)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Tags |
[required] List of tags to be associated with the CA. |
Remove one or more tags from your private CA
Description
Remove one or more tags from your private CA. A tag consists of a key-value pair. If you do not specify the value portion of the tag when calling this action, the tag will be removed regardless of value. If you specify a value, the tag is removed only if it is associated with the specified value. To add tags to a private CA, use the tag_certificate_authority
. Call the list_tags
action to see what tags are associated with your CA.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_untag_certificate_authority/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_untag_certificate_authority(CertificateAuthorityArn, Tags)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Tags |
[required] List of tags to be removed from the CA. |
Updates the status or configuration of a private certificate authority (CA)
Description
Updates the status or configuration of a private certificate authority (CA). Your private CA must be in the ACTIVE
or DISABLED
state before you can update it. You can disable a private CA that is in the ACTIVE
state or make a CA that is in the DISABLED
state active again.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/acmpca_update_certificate_authority/ for full documentation.
Usage
acmpca_update_certificate_authority(
CertificateAuthorityArn,
RevocationConfiguration = NULL,
Status = NULL
)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the private CA that issued the certificate to be revoked. This must be of the form:
|
RevocationConfiguration |
Contains information to enable support for Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP), certificate revocation list (CRL), both protocols, or neither. If you don't supply this parameter, existing capibilites remain unchanged. For more information, see the OcspConfiguration and CrlConfiguration types. The following requirements apply to revocation configurations.
If you update the |
Status |
Status of your private CA. |
AWS Clean Rooms ML
Description
Welcome to the Amazon Web Services Clean Rooms ML API Reference.
Amazon Web Services Clean Rooms ML provides a privacy-enhancing method for two parties to identify similar users in their data without the need to share their data with each other. The first party brings the training data to Clean Rooms so that they can create and configure an audience model (lookalike model) and associate it with a collaboration. The second party then brings their seed data to Clean Rooms and generates an audience (lookalike segment) that resembles the training data.
To learn more about Amazon Web Services Clean Rooms ML concepts, procedures, and best practices, see the Clean Rooms User Guide.
To learn more about SQL commands, functions, and conditions supported in Clean Rooms, see the Clean Rooms SQL Reference.
Usage
cleanroomsml(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- cleanroomsml( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
cancel_trained_model | Submits a request to cancel the trained model job |
cancel_trained_model_inference_job | Submits a request to cancel a trained model inference job |
create_audience_model | Defines the information necessary to create an audience model |
create_configured_audience_model | Defines the information necessary to create a configured audience model |
create_configured_model_algorithm | Creates a configured model algorithm using a container image stored in an ECR repository |
create_configured_model_algorithm_association | Associates a configured model algorithm to a collaboration for use by any member of the collaboration |
create_ml_input_channel | Provides the information to create an ML input channel |
create_trained_model | Creates a trained model from an associated configured model algorithm using data from any member of the collaboration |
create_training_dataset | Defines the information necessary to create a training dataset |
delete_audience_generation_job | Deletes the specified audience generation job, and removes all data associated with the job |
delete_audience_model | Specifies an audience model that you want to delete |
delete_configured_audience_model | Deletes the specified configured audience model |
delete_configured_audience_model_policy | Deletes the specified configured audience model policy |
delete_configured_model_algorithm | Deletes a configured model algorithm |
delete_configured_model_algorithm_association | Deletes a configured model algorithm association |
delete_ml_configuration | Deletes a ML modeling configuration |
delete_ml_input_channel_data | Provides the information necessary to delete an ML input channel |
delete_trained_model_output | Deletes the output of a trained model |
delete_training_dataset | Specifies a training dataset that you want to delete |
get_audience_generation_job | Returns information about an audience generation job |
get_audience_model | Returns information about an audience model |
get_collaboration_configured_model_algorithm_association | Returns information about the configured model algorithm association in a collaboration |
get_collaboration_ml_input_channel | Returns information about a specific ML input channel in a collaboration |
get_collaboration_trained_model | Returns information about a trained model in a collaboration |
get_configured_audience_model | Returns information about a specified configured audience model |
get_configured_audience_model_policy | Returns information about a configured audience model policy |
get_configured_model_algorithm | Returns information about a configured model algorithm |
get_configured_model_algorithm_association | Returns information about a configured model algorithm association |
get_ml_configuration | Returns information about a specific ML configuration |
get_ml_input_channel | Returns information about an ML input channel |
get_trained_model | Returns information about a trained model |
get_trained_model_inference_job | Returns information about a trained model inference job |
get_training_dataset | Returns information about a training dataset |
list_audience_export_jobs | Returns a list of the audience export jobs |
list_audience_generation_jobs | Returns a list of audience generation jobs |
list_audience_models | Returns a list of audience models |
list_collaboration_configured_model_algorithm_associations | Returns a list of the configured model algorithm associations in a collaboration |
list_collaboration_ml_input_channels | Returns a list of the ML input channels in a collaboration |
list_collaboration_trained_model_export_jobs | Returns a list of the export jobs for a trained model in a collaboration |
list_collaboration_trained_model_inference_jobs | Returns a list of trained model inference jobs in a specified collaboration |
list_collaboration_trained_models | Returns a list of the trained models in a collaboration |
list_configured_audience_models | Returns a list of the configured audience models |
list_configured_model_algorithm_associations | Returns a list of configured model algorithm associations |
list_configured_model_algorithms | Returns a list of configured model algorithms |
list_ml_input_channels | Returns a list of ML input channels |
list_tags_for_resource | Returns a list of tags for a provided resource |
list_trained_model_inference_jobs | Returns a list of trained model inference jobs that match the request parameters |
list_trained_models | Returns a list of trained models |
list_training_datasets | Returns a list of training datasets |
put_configured_audience_model_policy | Create or update the resource policy for a configured audience model |
put_ml_configuration | Assigns information about an ML configuration |
start_audience_export_job | Export an audience of a specified size after you have generated an audience |
start_audience_generation_job | Information necessary to start the audience generation job |
start_trained_model_export_job | Provides the information necessary to start a trained model export job |
start_trained_model_inference_job | Defines the information necessary to begin a trained model inference job |
tag_resource | Adds metadata tags to a specified resource |
untag_resource | Removes metadata tags from a specified resource |
update_configured_audience_model | Provides the information necessary to update a configured audience model |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- cleanroomsml()
svc$cancel_trained_model(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Submits a request to cancel the trained model job
Description
Submits a request to cancel the trained model job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_cancel_trained_model/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_cancel_trained_model(membershipIdentifier, trainedModelArn)
Arguments
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the trained model job that you want to cancel. |
trainedModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the trained model job that you want to cancel. |
Submits a request to cancel a trained model inference job
Description
Submits a request to cancel a trained model inference job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_cancel_trained_model_inference_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_cancel_trained_model_inference_job(
membershipIdentifier,
trainedModelInferenceJobArn
)
Arguments
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the trained model inference job that you want to cancel. |
trainedModelInferenceJobArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the trained model inference job that you want to cancel. |
Defines the information necessary to create an audience model
Description
Defines the information necessary to create an audience model. An audience model is a machine learning model that Clean Rooms ML trains to measure similarity between users. Clean Rooms ML manages training and storing the audience model. The audience model can be used in multiple calls to the start_audience_generation_job
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_create_audience_model/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_create_audience_model(
trainingDataStartTime = NULL,
trainingDataEndTime = NULL,
name,
trainingDatasetArn,
kmsKeyArn = NULL,
tags = NULL,
description = NULL
)
Arguments
trainingDataStartTime |
The start date and time of the training window. |
trainingDataEndTime |
The end date and time of the training window. |
name |
[required] The name of the audience model resource. |
trainingDatasetArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the training dataset for this audience model. |
kmsKeyArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the KMS key. This key is used to encrypt and decrypt customer-owned data in the trained ML model and the associated data. |
tags |
The optional metadata that you apply to the resource to help you categorize and organize them. Each tag consists of a key and an optional value, both of which you define. The following basic restrictions apply to tags:
|
description |
The description of the audience model. |
Defines the information necessary to create a configured audience model
Description
Defines the information necessary to create a configured audience model.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_create_configured_audience_model/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_create_configured_audience_model(
name,
audienceModelArn,
outputConfig,
description = NULL,
sharedAudienceMetrics,
minMatchingSeedSize = NULL,
audienceSizeConfig = NULL,
tags = NULL,
childResourceTagOnCreatePolicy = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
[required] The name of the configured audience model. |
audienceModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the audience model to use for the configured audience model. |
outputConfig |
[required] Configure the Amazon S3 location and IAM Role for audiences created
using this configured audience model. Each audience will have a unique
location. The IAM Role must have |
description |
The description of the configured audience model. |
sharedAudienceMetrics |
[required] Whether audience metrics are shared. |
minMatchingSeedSize |
The minimum number of users from the seed audience that must match with users in the training data of the audience model. The default value is 500. |
audienceSizeConfig |
Configure the list of output sizes of audiences that can be created
using this configured audience model. A request to
|
tags |
The optional metadata that you apply to the resource to help you categorize and organize them. Each tag consists of a key and an optional value, both of which you define. The following basic restrictions apply to tags:
|
childResourceTagOnCreatePolicy |
Configure how the service tags audience generation jobs created using
this configured audience model. If you specify When the client is in a different account than the configured audience model, the tags from the client are never applied to a resource in the caller's account. |
Creates a configured model algorithm using a container image stored in an ECR repository
Description
Creates a configured model algorithm using a container image stored in an ECR repository.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_create_configured_model_algorithm/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_create_configured_model_algorithm(
name,
description = NULL,
roleArn,
trainingContainerConfig = NULL,
inferenceContainerConfig = NULL,
tags = NULL,
kmsKeyArn = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
[required] The name of the configured model algorithm. |
description |
The description of the configured model algorithm. |
roleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the role that is used to access the repository. |
trainingContainerConfig |
Configuration information for the training container, including entrypoints and arguments. |
inferenceContainerConfig |
Configuration information for the inference container that is used when you run an inference job on a configured model algorithm. |
tags |
The optional metadata that you apply to the resource to help you categorize and organize them. Each tag consists of a key and an optional value, both of which you define. The following basic restrictions apply to tags:
|
kmsKeyArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the KMS key. This key is used to encrypt and decrypt customer-owned data in the configured ML model algorithm and associated data. |
Associates a configured model algorithm to a collaboration for use by any member of the collaboration
Description
Associates a configured model algorithm to a collaboration for use by any member of the collaboration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_create_configured_model_algorithm_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_create_configured_model_algorithm_association(
membershipIdentifier,
configuredModelAlgorithmArn,
name,
description = NULL,
privacyConfiguration = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the member who is associating this configured model algorithm. |
configuredModelAlgorithmArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configured model algorithm that you want to associate. |
name |
[required] The name of the configured model algorithm association. |
description |
The description of the configured model algorithm association. |
privacyConfiguration |
Specifies the privacy configuration information for the configured model algorithm association. This information includes the maximum data size that can be exported. |
tags |
The optional metadata that you apply to the resource to help you categorize and organize them. Each tag consists of a key and an optional value, both of which you define. The following basic restrictions apply to tags:
|
Provides the information to create an ML input channel
Description
Provides the information to create an ML input channel. An ML input channel is the result of a query that can be used for ML modeling.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_create_ml_input_channel/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_create_ml_input_channel(
membershipIdentifier,
configuredModelAlgorithmAssociations,
inputChannel,
name,
retentionInDays,
description = NULL,
kmsKeyArn = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the member that is creating the ML input channel. |
configuredModelAlgorithmAssociations |
[required] The associated configured model algorithms that are necessary to create this ML input channel. |
inputChannel |
[required] The input data that is used to create this ML input channel. |
name |
[required] The name of the ML input channel. |
retentionInDays |
[required] The number of days that the data in the ML input channel is retained. |
description |
The description of the ML input channel. |
kmsKeyArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the KMS key that is used to access the input channel. |
tags |
The optional metadata that you apply to the resource to help you categorize and organize them. Each tag consists of a key and an optional value, both of which you define. The following basic restrictions apply to tags:
|
Creates a trained model from an associated configured model algorithm using data from any member of the collaboration
Description
Creates a trained model from an associated configured model algorithm using data from any member of the collaboration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_create_trained_model/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_create_trained_model(
membershipIdentifier,
name,
configuredModelAlgorithmAssociationArn,
hyperparameters = NULL,
environment = NULL,
resourceConfig,
stoppingCondition = NULL,
dataChannels,
description = NULL,
kmsKeyArn = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the member that is creating the trained model. |
name |
[required] The name of the trained model. |
configuredModelAlgorithmAssociationArn |
[required] The associated configured model algorithm used to train this model. |
hyperparameters |
Algorithm-specific parameters that influence the quality of the model. You set hyperparameters before you start the learning process. |
environment |
The environment variables to set in the Docker container. |
resourceConfig |
[required] Information about the EC2 resources that are used to train this model. |
stoppingCondition |
The criteria that is used to stop model training. |
dataChannels |
[required] Defines the data channels that are used as input for the trained model request. |
description |
The description of the trained model. |
kmsKeyArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the KMS key. This key is used to encrypt and decrypt customer-owned data in the trained ML model and the associated data. |
tags |
The optional metadata that you apply to the resource to help you categorize and organize them. Each tag consists of a key and an optional value, both of which you define. The following basic restrictions apply to tags:
|
Defines the information necessary to create a training dataset
Description
Defines the information necessary to create a training dataset. In Clean Rooms ML, the TrainingDataset
is metadata that points to a Glue table, which is read only during AudienceModel
creation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_create_training_dataset/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_create_training_dataset(
name,
roleArn,
trainingData,
tags = NULL,
description = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
[required] The name of the training dataset. This name must be unique in your account and region. |
roleArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM role that Clean Rooms ML can assume to read the data
referred to in the Passing a role across AWS accounts is not allowed. If you pass a role
that isn't in your account, you get an |
trainingData |
[required] An array of information that lists the Dataset objects, which specifies the dataset type and details on its location and schema. You must provide a role that has read access to these tables. |
tags |
The optional metadata that you apply to the resource to help you categorize and organize them. Each tag consists of a key and an optional value, both of which you define. The following basic restrictions apply to tags:
|
description |
The description of the training dataset. |
Deletes the specified audience generation job, and removes all data associated with the job
Description
Deletes the specified audience generation job, and removes all data associated with the job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_delete_audience_generation_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_delete_audience_generation_job(audienceGenerationJobArn)
Arguments
audienceGenerationJobArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the audience generation job that you want to delete. |
Specifies an audience model that you want to delete
Description
Specifies an audience model that you want to delete. You can't delete an audience model if there are any configured audience models that depend on the audience model.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_delete_audience_model/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_delete_audience_model(audienceModelArn)
Arguments
audienceModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the audience model that you want to delete. |
Deletes the specified configured audience model
Description
Deletes the specified configured audience model. You can't delete a configured audience model if there are any lookalike models that use the configured audience model. If you delete a configured audience model, it will be removed from any collaborations that it is associated to.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_delete_configured_audience_model/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_delete_configured_audience_model(configuredAudienceModelArn)
Arguments
configuredAudienceModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configured audience model that you want to delete. |
Deletes the specified configured audience model policy
Description
Deletes the specified configured audience model policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_delete_configured_audience_model_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_delete_configured_audience_model_policy(
configuredAudienceModelArn
)
Arguments
configuredAudienceModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configured audience model policy that you want to delete. |
Deletes a configured model algorithm
Description
Deletes a configured model algorithm.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_delete_configured_model_algorithm/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_delete_configured_model_algorithm(configuredModelAlgorithmArn)
Arguments
configuredModelAlgorithmArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configured model algorithm that you want to delete. |
Deletes a configured model algorithm association
Description
Deletes a configured model algorithm association.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_delete_configured_model_algorithm_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_delete_configured_model_algorithm_association(
configuredModelAlgorithmAssociationArn,
membershipIdentifier
)
Arguments
configuredModelAlgorithmAssociationArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configured model algorithm association that you want to delete. |
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the member that is deleting the configured model algorithm association. |
Deletes a ML modeling configuration
Description
Deletes a ML modeling configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_delete_ml_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_delete_ml_configuration(membershipIdentifier)
Arguments
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the of the member that is deleting the ML modeling configuration. |
Provides the information necessary to delete an ML input channel
Description
Provides the information necessary to delete an ML input channel.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_delete_ml_input_channel_data/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_delete_ml_input_channel_data(
mlInputChannelArn,
membershipIdentifier
)
Arguments
mlInputChannelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the ML input channel that you want to delete. |
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the membership that contains the ML input channel you want to delete. |
Deletes the output of a trained model
Description
Deletes the output of a trained model.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_delete_trained_model_output/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_delete_trained_model_output(trainedModelArn, membershipIdentifier)
Arguments
trainedModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the trained model whose output you want to delete. |
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the member that is deleting the trained model output. |
Specifies a training dataset that you want to delete
Description
Specifies a training dataset that you want to delete. You can't delete a training dataset if there are any audience models that depend on the training dataset. In Clean Rooms ML, the TrainingDataset
is metadata that points to a Glue table, which is read only during AudienceModel
creation. This action deletes the metadata.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_delete_training_dataset/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_delete_training_dataset(trainingDatasetArn)
Arguments
trainingDatasetArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the training dataset that you want to delete. |
Returns information about an audience generation job
Description
Returns information about an audience generation job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_get_audience_generation_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_get_audience_generation_job(audienceGenerationJobArn)
Arguments
audienceGenerationJobArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the audience generation job that you are interested in. |
Returns information about an audience model
Description
Returns information about an audience model
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_get_audience_model/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_get_audience_model(audienceModelArn)
Arguments
audienceModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the audience model that you are interested in. |
Returns information about the configured model algorithm association in a collaboration
Description
Returns information about the configured model algorithm association in a collaboration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_get_collaboration_configured_model_algorithm_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_get_collaboration_configured_model_algorithm_association(
configuredModelAlgorithmAssociationArn,
collaborationIdentifier
)
Arguments
configuredModelAlgorithmAssociationArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configured model algorithm association that you want to return information about. |
collaborationIdentifier |
[required] The collaboration ID for the collaboration that contains the configured model algorithm association that you want to return information about. |
Returns information about a specific ML input channel in a collaboration
Description
Returns information about a specific ML input channel in a collaboration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_get_collaboration_ml_input_channel/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_get_collaboration_ml_input_channel(
mlInputChannelArn,
collaborationIdentifier
)
Arguments
mlInputChannelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the ML input channel that you want to get. |
collaborationIdentifier |
[required] The collaboration ID of the collaboration that contains the ML input channel that you want to get. |
Returns information about a trained model in a collaboration
Description
Returns information about a trained model in a collaboration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_get_collaboration_trained_model/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_get_collaboration_trained_model(
trainedModelArn,
collaborationIdentifier
)
Arguments
trainedModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the trained model that you want to return information about. |
collaborationIdentifier |
[required] The collaboration ID that contains the trained model that you want to return information about. |
Returns information about a specified configured audience model
Description
Returns information about a specified configured audience model.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_get_configured_audience_model/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_get_configured_audience_model(configuredAudienceModelArn)
Arguments
configuredAudienceModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configured audience model that you are interested in. |
Returns information about a configured audience model policy
Description
Returns information about a configured audience model policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_get_configured_audience_model_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_get_configured_audience_model_policy(configuredAudienceModelArn)
Arguments
configuredAudienceModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configured audience model that you are interested in. |
Returns information about a configured model algorithm
Description
Returns information about a configured model algorithm.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_get_configured_model_algorithm/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_get_configured_model_algorithm(configuredModelAlgorithmArn)
Arguments
configuredModelAlgorithmArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configured model algorithm that you want to return information about. |
Returns information about a configured model algorithm association
Description
Returns information about a configured model algorithm association.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_get_configured_model_algorithm_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_get_configured_model_algorithm_association(
configuredModelAlgorithmAssociationArn,
membershipIdentifier
)
Arguments
configuredModelAlgorithmAssociationArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configured model algorithm association that you want to return information about. |
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the member that created the configured model algorithm association. |
Returns information about a specific ML configuration
Description
Returns information about a specific ML configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_get_ml_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_get_ml_configuration(membershipIdentifier)
Arguments
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the member that owns the ML configuration you want to return information about. |
Returns information about an ML input channel
Description
Returns information about an ML input channel.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_get_ml_input_channel/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_get_ml_input_channel(mlInputChannelArn, membershipIdentifier)
Arguments
mlInputChannelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the ML input channel that you want to get. |
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the membership that contains the ML input channel that you want to get. |
Returns information about a trained model
Description
Returns information about a trained model.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_get_trained_model/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_get_trained_model(trainedModelArn, membershipIdentifier)
Arguments
trainedModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the trained model that you are interested in. |
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the member that created the trained model that you are interested in. |
Returns information about a trained model inference job
Description
Returns information about a trained model inference job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_get_trained_model_inference_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_get_trained_model_inference_job(
membershipIdentifier,
trainedModelInferenceJobArn
)
Arguments
membershipIdentifier |
[required] Provides the membership ID of the membership that contains the trained model inference job that you are interested in. |
trainedModelInferenceJobArn |
[required] Provides the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the trained model inference job that you are interested in. |
Returns information about a training dataset
Description
Returns information about a training dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_get_training_dataset/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_get_training_dataset(trainingDatasetArn)
Arguments
trainingDatasetArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the training dataset that you are interested in. |
Returns a list of the audience export jobs
Description
Returns a list of the audience export jobs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_audience_export_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_audience_export_jobs(
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
audienceGenerationJobArn = NULL
)
Arguments
nextToken |
The token value retrieved from a previous call to access the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum size of the results that is returned per call. |
audienceGenerationJobArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the audience generation job that you are interested in. |
Returns a list of audience generation jobs
Description
Returns a list of audience generation jobs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_audience_generation_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_audience_generation_jobs(
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
configuredAudienceModelArn = NULL,
collaborationId = NULL
)
Arguments
nextToken |
The token value retrieved from a previous call to access the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum size of the results that is returned per call. |
configuredAudienceModelArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configured audience model that was used for the audience generation jobs that you are interested in. |
collaborationId |
The identifier of the collaboration that contains the audience generation jobs that you are interested in. |
Returns a list of audience models
Description
Returns a list of audience models.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_audience_models/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_audience_models(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
The token value retrieved from a previous call to access the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum size of the results that is returned per call. |
Returns a list of the configured model algorithm associations in a collaboration
Description
Returns a list of the configured model algorithm associations in a collaboration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_collaboration_configured_model_algorithm_associations/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_collaboration_configured_model_algorithm_associations(
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
collaborationIdentifier
)
Arguments
nextToken |
The token value retrieved from a previous call to access the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum size of the results that is returned per call. |
collaborationIdentifier |
[required] The collaboration ID of the collaboration that contains the configured model algorithm associations that you are interested in. |
Returns a list of the ML input channels in a collaboration
Description
Returns a list of the ML input channels in a collaboration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_collaboration_ml_input_channels/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_collaboration_ml_input_channels(
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
collaborationIdentifier
)
Arguments
nextToken |
The token value retrieved from a previous call to access the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
collaborationIdentifier |
[required] The collaboration ID of the collaboration that contains the ML input channels that you want to list. |
Returns a list of the export jobs for a trained model in a collaboration
Description
Returns a list of the export jobs for a trained model in a collaboration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_collaboration_trained_model_export_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_collaboration_trained_model_export_jobs(
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
collaborationIdentifier,
trainedModelArn
)
Arguments
nextToken |
The token value retrieved from a previous call to access the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum size of the results that is returned per call. |
collaborationIdentifier |
[required] The collaboration ID of the collaboration that contains the trained model export jobs that you are interested in. |
trainedModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the trained model that was used to create the export jobs that you are interested in. |
Returns a list of trained model inference jobs in a specified collaboration
Description
Returns a list of trained model inference jobs in a specified collaboration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_collaboration_trained_model_inference_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_collaboration_trained_model_inference_jobs(
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
collaborationIdentifier,
trainedModelArn = NULL
)
Arguments
nextToken |
The token value retrieved from a previous call to access the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum size of the results that is returned per call. |
collaborationIdentifier |
[required] The collaboration ID of the collaboration that contains the trained model inference jobs that you are interested in. |
trainedModelArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the trained model that was used to create the trained model inference jobs that you are interested in. |
Returns a list of the trained models in a collaboration
Description
Returns a list of the trained models in a collaboration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_collaboration_trained_models/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_collaboration_trained_models(
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
collaborationIdentifier
)
Arguments
nextToken |
The token value retrieved from a previous call to access the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum size of the results that is returned per call. |
collaborationIdentifier |
[required] The collaboration ID of the collaboration that contains the trained models you are interested in. |
Returns a list of the configured audience models
Description
Returns a list of the configured audience models.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_configured_audience_models/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_configured_audience_models(
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
nextToken |
The token value retrieved from a previous call to access the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum size of the results that is returned per call. |
Returns a list of configured model algorithm associations
Description
Returns a list of configured model algorithm associations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_configured_model_algorithm_associations/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_configured_model_algorithm_associations(
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
membershipIdentifier
)
Arguments
nextToken |
The token value retrieved from a previous call to access the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum size of the results that is returned per call. |
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the member that created the configured model algorithm associations you are interested in. |
Returns a list of configured model algorithms
Description
Returns a list of configured model algorithms.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_configured_model_algorithms/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_configured_model_algorithms(
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
nextToken |
The token value retrieved from a previous call to access the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum size of the results that is returned per call. |
Returns a list of ML input channels
Description
Returns a list of ML input channels.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_ml_input_channels/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_ml_input_channels(
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
membershipIdentifier
)
Arguments
nextToken |
The token value retrieved from a previous call to access the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of ML input channels to return. |
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the membership that contains the ML input channels that you want to list. |
Returns a list of tags for a provided resource
Description
Returns a list of tags for a provided resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you are interested in. |
Returns a list of trained model inference jobs that match the request parameters
Description
Returns a list of trained model inference jobs that match the request parameters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_trained_model_inference_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_trained_model_inference_jobs(
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
membershipIdentifier,
trainedModelArn = NULL
)
Arguments
nextToken |
The token value retrieved from a previous call to access the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum size of the results that is returned per call. |
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership |
trainedModelArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a trained model that was used to create the trained model inference jobs that you are interested in. |
Returns a list of trained models
Description
Returns a list of trained models.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_trained_models/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_trained_models(
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
membershipIdentifier
)
Arguments
nextToken |
The token value retrieved from a previous call to access the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum size of the results that is returned per call. |
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the member that created the trained models you are interested in. |
Returns a list of training datasets
Description
Returns a list of training datasets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_list_training_datasets/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_list_training_datasets(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
The token value retrieved from a previous call to access the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum size of the results that is returned per call. |
Create or update the resource policy for a configured audience model
Description
Create or update the resource policy for a configured audience model.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_put_configured_audience_model_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_put_configured_audience_model_policy(
configuredAudienceModelArn,
configuredAudienceModelPolicy,
previousPolicyHash = NULL,
policyExistenceCondition = NULL
)
Arguments
configuredAudienceModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configured audience model that the resource policy will govern. |
configuredAudienceModelPolicy |
[required] The IAM resource policy. |
previousPolicyHash |
A cryptographic hash of the contents of the policy used to prevent unexpected concurrent modification of the policy. |
policyExistenceCondition |
Use this to prevent unexpected concurrent modification of the policy. |
Assigns information about an ML configuration
Description
Assigns information about an ML configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_put_ml_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_put_ml_configuration(membershipIdentifier, defaultOutputLocation)
Arguments
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the member that is being configured. |
defaultOutputLocation |
[required] The default Amazon S3 location where ML output is stored for the specified member. |
Export an audience of a specified size after you have generated an audience
Description
Export an audience of a specified size after you have generated an audience.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_start_audience_export_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_start_audience_export_job(
name,
audienceGenerationJobArn,
audienceSize,
description = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
[required] The name of the audience export job. |
audienceGenerationJobArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the audience generation job that you want to export. |
audienceSize |
[required] |
description |
The description of the audience export job. |
Information necessary to start the audience generation job
Description
Information necessary to start the audience generation job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_start_audience_generation_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_start_audience_generation_job(
name,
configuredAudienceModelArn,
seedAudience,
includeSeedInOutput = NULL,
collaborationId = NULL,
description = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
[required] The name of the audience generation job. |
configuredAudienceModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configured audience model that is used for this audience generation job. |
seedAudience |
[required] The seed audience that is used to generate the audience. |
includeSeedInOutput |
Whether the seed audience is included in the audience generation output. |
collaborationId |
The identifier of the collaboration that contains the audience generation job. |
description |
The description of the audience generation job. |
tags |
The optional metadata that you apply to the resource to help you categorize and organize them. Each tag consists of a key and an optional value, both of which you define. The following basic restrictions apply to tags:
|
Provides the information necessary to start a trained model export job
Description
Provides the information necessary to start a trained model export job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_start_trained_model_export_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_start_trained_model_export_job(
name,
trainedModelArn,
membershipIdentifier,
outputConfiguration,
description = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
[required] The name of the trained model export job. |
trainedModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the trained model that you want to export. |
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the member that is receiving the exported trained model artifacts. |
outputConfiguration |
[required] The output configuration information for the trained model export job. |
description |
The description of the trained model export job. |
Defines the information necessary to begin a trained model inference job
Description
Defines the information necessary to begin a trained model inference job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_start_trained_model_inference_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_start_trained_model_inference_job(
membershipIdentifier,
name,
trainedModelArn,
configuredModelAlgorithmAssociationArn = NULL,
resourceConfig,
outputConfiguration,
dataSource,
description = NULL,
containerExecutionParameters = NULL,
environment = NULL,
kmsKeyArn = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
membershipIdentifier |
[required] The membership ID of the membership that contains the trained model inference job. |
name |
[required] The name of the trained model inference job. |
trainedModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the trained model that is used for this trained model inference job. |
configuredModelAlgorithmAssociationArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configured model algorithm association that is used for this trained model inference job. |
resourceConfig |
[required] Defines the resource configuration for the trained model inference job. |
outputConfiguration |
[required] Defines the output configuration information for the trained model inference job. |
dataSource |
[required] Defines the data source that is used for the trained model inference job. |
description |
The description of the trained model inference job. |
containerExecutionParameters |
The execution parameters for the container. |
environment |
The environment variables to set in the Docker container. |
kmsKeyArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the KMS key. This key is used to encrypt and decrypt customer-owned data in the ML inference job and associated data. |
tags |
The optional metadata that you apply to the resource to help you categorize and organize them. Each tag consists of a key and an optional value, both of which you define. The following basic restrictions apply to tags:
|
Adds metadata tags to a specified resource
Description
Adds metadata tags to a specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to assign tags. |
tags |
[required] The optional metadata that you apply to the resource to help you categorize and organize them. Each tag consists of a key and an optional value, both of which you define. The following basic restrictions apply to tags:
|
Removes metadata tags from a specified resource
Description
Removes metadata tags from a specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to remove tags from. |
tagKeys |
[required] The key values of tags that you want to remove. |
Provides the information necessary to update a configured audience model
Description
Provides the information necessary to update a configured audience model. Updates that impact audience generation jobs take effect when a new job starts, but do not impact currently running jobs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cleanroomsml_update_configured_audience_model/ for full documentation.
Usage
cleanroomsml_update_configured_audience_model(
configuredAudienceModelArn,
outputConfig = NULL,
audienceModelArn = NULL,
sharedAudienceMetrics = NULL,
minMatchingSeedSize = NULL,
audienceSizeConfig = NULL,
description = NULL
)
Arguments
configuredAudienceModelArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configured audience model that you want to update. |
outputConfig |
The new output configuration. |
audienceModelArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the new audience model that you want to use. |
sharedAudienceMetrics |
The new value for whether to share audience metrics. |
minMatchingSeedSize |
The minimum number of users from the seed audience that must match with users in the training data of the audience model. |
audienceSizeConfig |
The new audience size configuration. |
description |
The new description of the configured audience model. |
Amazon CloudDirectory
Description
Amazon Cloud Directory
Amazon Cloud Directory is a component of the AWS Directory Service that simplifies the development and management of cloud-scale web, mobile, and IoT applications. This guide describes the Cloud Directory operations that you can call programmatically and includes detailed information on data types and errors. For information about Cloud Directory features, see AWS Directory Service and the Amazon Cloud Directory Developer Guide.
Usage
clouddirectory(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- clouddirectory( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_facet_to_object | Adds a new Facet to an object |
apply_schema | Copies the input published schema, at the specified version, into the Directory with the same name and version as that of the published schema |
attach_object | Attaches an existing object to another object |
attach_policy | Attaches a policy object to a regular object |
attach_to_index | Attaches the specified object to the specified index |
attach_typed_link | Attaches a typed link to a specified source and target object |
batch_read | Performs all the read operations in a batch |
batch_write | Performs all the write operations in a batch |
create_directory | Creates a Directory by copying the published schema into the directory |
create_facet | Creates a new Facet in a schema |
create_index | Creates an index object |
create_object | Creates an object in a Directory |
create_schema | Creates a new schema in a development state |
create_typed_link_facet | Creates a TypedLinkFacet |
delete_directory | Deletes a directory |
delete_facet | Deletes a given Facet |
delete_object | Deletes an object and its associated attributes |
delete_schema | Deletes a given schema |
delete_typed_link_facet | Deletes a TypedLinkFacet |
detach_from_index | Detaches the specified object from the specified index |
detach_object | Detaches a given object from the parent object |
detach_policy | Detaches a policy from an object |
detach_typed_link | Detaches a typed link from a specified source and target object |
disable_directory | Disables the specified directory |
enable_directory | Enables the specified directory |
get_applied_schema_version | Returns current applied schema version ARN, including the minor version in use |
get_directory | Retrieves metadata about a directory |
get_facet | Gets details of the Facet, such as facet name, attributes, Rules, or ObjectType |
get_link_attributes | Retrieves attributes that are associated with a typed link |
get_object_attributes | Retrieves attributes within a facet that are associated with an object |
get_object_information | Retrieves metadata about an object |
get_schema_as_json | Retrieves a JSON representation of the schema |
get_typed_link_facet_information | Returns the identity attribute order for a specific TypedLinkFacet |
list_applied_schema_arns | Lists schema major versions applied to a directory |
list_attached_indices | Lists indices attached to the specified object |
list_development_schema_arns | Retrieves each Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of schemas in the development state |
list_directories | Lists directories created within an account |
list_facet_attributes | Retrieves attributes attached to the facet |
list_facet_names | Retrieves the names of facets that exist in a schema |
list_incoming_typed_links | Returns a paginated list of all the incoming TypedLinkSpecifier information for an object |
list_index | Lists objects attached to the specified index |
list_managed_schema_arns | Lists the major version families of each managed schema |
list_object_attributes | Lists all attributes that are associated with an object |
list_object_children | Returns a paginated list of child objects that are associated with a given object |
list_object_parent_paths | Retrieves all available parent paths for any object type such as node, leaf node, policy node, and index node objects |
list_object_parents | Lists parent objects that are associated with a given object in pagination fashion |
list_object_policies | Returns policies attached to an object in pagination fashion |
list_outgoing_typed_links | Returns a paginated list of all the outgoing TypedLinkSpecifier information for an object |
list_policy_attachments | Returns all of the ObjectIdentifiers to which a given policy is attached |
list_published_schema_arns | Lists the major version families of each published schema |
list_tags_for_resource | Returns tags for a resource |
list_typed_link_facet_attributes | Returns a paginated list of all attribute definitions for a particular TypedLinkFacet |
list_typed_link_facet_names | Returns a paginated list of TypedLink facet names for a particular schema |
lookup_policy | Lists all policies from the root of the Directory to the object specified |
publish_schema | Publishes a development schema with a major version and a recommended minor version |
put_schema_from_json | Allows a schema to be updated using JSON upload |
remove_facet_from_object | Removes the specified facet from the specified object |
tag_resource | An API operation for adding tags to a resource |
untag_resource | An API operation for removing tags from a resource |
update_facet | Does the following: |
update_link_attributes | Updates a given typed link’s attributes |
update_object_attributes | Updates a given object's attributes |
update_schema | Updates the schema name with a new name |
update_typed_link_facet | Updates a TypedLinkFacet |
upgrade_applied_schema | Upgrades a single directory in-place using the PublishedSchemaArn with schema updates found in MinorVersion |
upgrade_published_schema | Upgrades a published schema under a new minor version revision using the current contents of DevelopmentSchemaArn |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- clouddirectory()
svc$add_facet_to_object(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Adds a new Facet to an object
Description
Adds a new Facet to an object. An object can have more than one facet applied on it.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_add_facet_to_object/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_add_facet_to_object(
DirectoryArn,
SchemaFacet,
ObjectAttributeList = NULL,
ObjectReference
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory where the object resides. For more information, see arns. |
SchemaFacet |
[required] Identifiers for the facet that you are adding to the object. See SchemaFacet for details. |
ObjectAttributeList |
Attributes on the facet that you are adding to the object. |
ObjectReference |
[required] A reference to the object you are adding the specified facet to. |
Copies the input published schema, at the specified version, into the Directory with the same name and version as that of the published schema
Description
Copies the input published schema, at the specified version, into the Directory with the same name and version as that of the published schema.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_apply_schema/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_apply_schema(PublishedSchemaArn, DirectoryArn)
Arguments
PublishedSchemaArn |
[required] Published schema Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that needs to be copied. For more information, see arns. |
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory into which the schema is copied. For more information, see arns. |
Attaches an existing object to another object
Description
Attaches an existing object to another object. An object can be accessed in two ways:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_attach_object/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_attach_object(
DirectoryArn,
ParentReference,
ChildReference,
LinkName
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory where both objects reside. For more information, see arns. |
ParentReference |
[required] The parent object reference. |
ChildReference |
[required] The child object reference to be attached to the object. |
LinkName |
[required] The link name with which the child object is attached to the parent. |
Attaches a policy object to a regular object
Description
Attaches a policy object to a regular object. An object can have a limited number of attached policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_attach_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_attach_policy(DirectoryArn, PolicyReference, ObjectReference)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory where both objects reside. For more information, see arns. |
PolicyReference |
[required] The reference that is associated with the policy object. |
ObjectReference |
[required] The reference that identifies the object to which the policy will be attached. |
Attaches the specified object to the specified index
Description
Attaches the specified object to the specified index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_attach_to_index/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_attach_to_index(DirectoryArn, IndexReference, TargetReference)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the directory where the object and index exist. |
IndexReference |
[required] A reference to the index that you are attaching the object to. |
TargetReference |
[required] A reference to the object that you are attaching to the index. |
Attaches a typed link to a specified source and target object
Description
Attaches a typed link to a specified source and target object. For more information, see Typed Links.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_attach_typed_link/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_attach_typed_link(
DirectoryArn,
SourceObjectReference,
TargetObjectReference,
TypedLinkFacet,
Attributes
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the directory where you want to attach the typed link. |
SourceObjectReference |
[required] Identifies the source object that the typed link will attach to. |
TargetObjectReference |
[required] Identifies the target object that the typed link will attach to. |
TypedLinkFacet |
[required] Identifies the typed link facet that is associated with the typed link. |
Attributes |
[required] A set of attributes that are associated with the typed link. |
Performs all the read operations in a batch
Description
Performs all the read operations in a batch.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_batch_read/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_batch_read(DirectoryArn, Operations, ConsistencyLevel = NULL)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory. For more information, see arns. |
Operations |
[required] A list of operations that are part of the batch. |
ConsistencyLevel |
Represents the manner and timing in which the successful write or update of an object is reflected in a subsequent read operation of that same object. |
Performs all the write operations in a batch
Description
Performs all the write operations in a batch. Either all the operations succeed or none.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_batch_write/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_batch_write(DirectoryArn, Operations)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory. For more information, see arns. |
Operations |
[required] A list of operations that are part of the batch. |
Creates a Directory by copying the published schema into the directory
Description
Creates a Directory by copying the published schema into the directory. A directory cannot be created without a schema.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_create_directory/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_create_directory(Name, SchemaArn)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the Directory. Should be unique per account, per region. |
SchemaArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the published schema that will be copied into the data Directory. For more information, see arns. |
Creates a new Facet in a schema
Description
Creates a new Facet in a schema. Facet creation is allowed only in development or applied schemas.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_create_facet/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_create_facet(
SchemaArn,
Name,
Attributes = NULL,
ObjectType = NULL,
FacetStyle = NULL
)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The schema ARN in which the new Facet will be created. For more information, see arns. |
Name |
[required] The name of the Facet, which is unique for a given schema. |
Attributes |
The attributes that are associated with the Facet. |
ObjectType |
Specifies whether a given object created from this facet is of type node, leaf node, policy or index.
|
FacetStyle |
There are two different styles that you can define on any given facet,
|
Creates an index object
Description
Creates an index object. See Indexing and search for more information.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_create_index/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_create_index(
DirectoryArn,
OrderedIndexedAttributeList,
IsUnique,
ParentReference = NULL,
LinkName = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The ARN of the directory where the index should be created. |
OrderedIndexedAttributeList |
[required] Specifies the attributes that should be indexed on. Currently only a single attribute is supported. |
IsUnique |
[required] Indicates whether the attribute that is being indexed has unique values or not. |
ParentReference |
A reference to the parent object that contains the index object. |
LinkName |
The name of the link between the parent object and the index object. |
Creates an object in a Directory
Description
Creates an object in a Directory. Additionally attaches the object to a parent, if a parent reference and LinkName
is specified. An object is simply a collection of Facet attributes. You can also use this API call to create a policy object, if the facet from which you create the object is a policy facet.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_create_object/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_create_object(
DirectoryArn,
SchemaFacets,
ObjectAttributeList = NULL,
ParentReference = NULL,
LinkName = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory in which the object will be created. For more information, see arns. |
SchemaFacets |
[required] A list of schema facets to be associated with the object. Do not provide minor version components. See SchemaFacet for details. |
ObjectAttributeList |
The attribute map whose attribute ARN contains the key and attribute value as the map value. |
ParentReference |
If specified, the parent reference to which this object will be attached. |
LinkName |
The name of link that is used to attach this object to a parent. |
Creates a new schema in a development state
Description
Creates a new schema in a development state. A schema can exist in three phases:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_create_schema/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_create_schema(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name that is associated with the schema. This is unique to each account and in each region. |
Creates a TypedLinkFacet
Description
Creates a TypedLinkFacet. For more information, see Typed Links.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_create_typed_link_facet/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_create_typed_link_facet(SchemaArn, Facet)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the schema. For more information, see arns. |
Facet |
[required] Facet structure that is associated with the typed link facet. |
Deletes a directory
Description
Deletes a directory. Only disabled directories can be deleted. A deleted directory cannot be undone. Exercise extreme caution when deleting directories.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_delete_directory/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_delete_directory(DirectoryArn)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The ARN of the directory to delete. |
Deletes a given Facet
Description
Deletes a given Facet. All attributes and Rules that are associated with the facet will be deleted. Only development schema facets are allowed deletion.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_delete_facet/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_delete_facet(SchemaArn, Name)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Facet. For more information, see arns. |
Name |
[required] The name of the facet to delete. |
Deletes an object and its associated attributes
Description
Deletes an object and its associated attributes. Only objects with no children and no parents can be deleted. The maximum number of attributes that can be deleted during an object deletion is 30. For more information, see Amazon Cloud Directory Limits.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_delete_object/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_delete_object(DirectoryArn, ObjectReference)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory where the object resides. For more information, see arns. |
ObjectReference |
[required] A reference that identifies the object. |
Deletes a given schema
Description
Deletes a given schema. Schemas in a development and published state can only be deleted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_delete_schema/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_delete_schema(SchemaArn)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the development schema. For more information, see arns. |
Deletes a TypedLinkFacet
Description
Deletes a TypedLinkFacet. For more information, see Typed Links.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_delete_typed_link_facet/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_delete_typed_link_facet(SchemaArn, Name)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the schema. For more information, see arns. |
Name |
[required] The unique name of the typed link facet. |
Detaches the specified object from the specified index
Description
Detaches the specified object from the specified index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_detach_from_index/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_detach_from_index(DirectoryArn, IndexReference, TargetReference)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the directory the index and object exist in. |
IndexReference |
[required] A reference to the index object. |
TargetReference |
[required] A reference to the object being detached from the index. |
Detaches a given object from the parent object
Description
Detaches a given object from the parent object. The object that is to be detached from the parent is specified by the link name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_detach_object/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_detach_object(DirectoryArn, ParentReference, LinkName)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory where objects reside. For more information, see arns. |
ParentReference |
[required] The parent reference from which the object with the specified link name is detached. |
LinkName |
[required] The link name associated with the object that needs to be detached. |
Detaches a policy from an object
Description
Detaches a policy from an object.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_detach_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_detach_policy(DirectoryArn, PolicyReference, ObjectReference)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory where both objects reside. For more information, see arns. |
PolicyReference |
[required] Reference that identifies the policy object. |
ObjectReference |
[required] Reference that identifies the object whose policy object will be detached. |
Detaches a typed link from a specified source and target object
Description
Detaches a typed link from a specified source and target object. For more information, see Typed Links.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_detach_typed_link/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_detach_typed_link(DirectoryArn, TypedLinkSpecifier)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the directory where you want to detach the typed link. |
TypedLinkSpecifier |
[required] Used to accept a typed link specifier as input. |
Disables the specified directory
Description
Disables the specified directory. Disabled directories cannot be read or written to. Only enabled directories can be disabled. Disabled directories may be reenabled.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_disable_directory/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_disable_directory(DirectoryArn)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The ARN of the directory to disable. |
Enables the specified directory
Description
Enables the specified directory. Only disabled directories can be enabled. Once enabled, the directory can then be read and written to.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_enable_directory/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_enable_directory(DirectoryArn)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The ARN of the directory to enable. |
Returns current applied schema version ARN, including the minor version in use
Description
Returns current applied schema version ARN, including the minor version in use.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_get_applied_schema_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_get_applied_schema_version(SchemaArn)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The ARN of the applied schema. |
Retrieves metadata about a directory
Description
Retrieves metadata about a directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_get_directory/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_get_directory(DirectoryArn)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The ARN of the directory. |
Gets details of the Facet, such as facet name, attributes, Rules, or ObjectType
Description
Gets details of the Facet, such as facet name, attributes, Rules, or ObjectType
. You can call this on all kinds of schema facets – published, development, or applied.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_get_facet/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_get_facet(SchemaArn, Name)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Facet. For more information, see arns. |
Name |
[required] The name of the facet to retrieve. |
Retrieves attributes that are associated with a typed link
Description
Retrieves attributes that are associated with a typed link.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_get_link_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_get_link_attributes(
DirectoryArn,
TypedLinkSpecifier,
AttributeNames,
ConsistencyLevel = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory where the typed link resides. For more information, see arns or Typed Links. |
TypedLinkSpecifier |
[required] Allows a typed link specifier to be accepted as input. |
AttributeNames |
[required] A list of attribute names whose values will be retrieved. |
ConsistencyLevel |
The consistency level at which to retrieve the attributes on a typed link. |
Retrieves attributes within a facet that are associated with an object
Description
Retrieves attributes within a facet that are associated with an object.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_get_object_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_get_object_attributes(
DirectoryArn,
ObjectReference,
ConsistencyLevel = NULL,
SchemaFacet,
AttributeNames
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory where the object resides. |
ObjectReference |
[required] Reference that identifies the object whose attributes will be retrieved. |
ConsistencyLevel |
The consistency level at which to retrieve the attributes on an object. |
SchemaFacet |
[required] Identifier for the facet whose attributes will be retrieved. See SchemaFacet for details. |
AttributeNames |
[required] List of attribute names whose values will be retrieved. |
Retrieves metadata about an object
Description
Retrieves metadata about an object.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_get_object_information/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_get_object_information(
DirectoryArn,
ObjectReference,
ConsistencyLevel = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The ARN of the directory being retrieved. |
ObjectReference |
[required] A reference to the object. |
ConsistencyLevel |
The consistency level at which to retrieve the object information. |
Retrieves a JSON representation of the schema
Description
Retrieves a JSON representation of the schema. See JSON Schema Format for more information.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_get_schema_as_json/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_get_schema_as_json(SchemaArn)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The ARN of the schema to retrieve. |
Returns the identity attribute order for a specific TypedLinkFacet
Description
Returns the identity attribute order for a specific TypedLinkFacet. For more information, see Typed Links.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_get_typed_link_facet_information/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_get_typed_link_facet_information(SchemaArn, Name)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the schema. For more information, see arns. |
Name |
[required] The unique name of the typed link facet. |
Lists schema major versions applied to a directory
Description
Lists schema major versions applied to a directory. If SchemaArn
is provided, lists the minor version.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_applied_schema_arns/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_applied_schema_arns(
DirectoryArn,
SchemaArn = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The ARN of the directory you are listing. |
SchemaArn |
The response for
|
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to retrieve. |
Lists indices attached to the specified object
Description
Lists indices attached to the specified object.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_attached_indices/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_attached_indices(
DirectoryArn,
TargetReference,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ConsistencyLevel = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The ARN of the directory. |
TargetReference |
[required] A reference to the object that has indices attached. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to retrieve. |
ConsistencyLevel |
The consistency level to use for this operation. |
Retrieves each Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of schemas in the development state
Description
Retrieves each Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of schemas in the development state.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_development_schema_arns/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_development_schema_arns(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to retrieve. |
Lists directories created within an account
Description
Lists directories created within an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_directories/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_directories(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
state = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to retrieve. |
state |
The state of the directories in the list. Can be either Enabled, Disabled, or Deleted. |
Retrieves attributes attached to the facet
Description
Retrieves attributes attached to the facet.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_facet_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_facet_attributes(
SchemaArn,
Name,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The ARN of the schema where the facet resides. |
Name |
[required] The name of the facet whose attributes will be retrieved. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to retrieve. |
Retrieves the names of facets that exist in a schema
Description
Retrieves the names of facets that exist in a schema.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_facet_names/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_facet_names(SchemaArn, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to retrieve facet names from. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to retrieve. |
Returns a paginated list of all the incoming TypedLinkSpecifier information for an object
Description
Returns a paginated list of all the incoming TypedLinkSpecifier information for an object. It also supports filtering by typed link facet and identity attributes. For more information, see Typed Links.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_incoming_typed_links/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_incoming_typed_links(
DirectoryArn,
ObjectReference,
FilterAttributeRanges = NULL,
FilterTypedLink = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ConsistencyLevel = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the directory where you want to list the typed links. |
ObjectReference |
[required] Reference that identifies the object whose attributes will be listed. |
FilterAttributeRanges |
Provides range filters for multiple attributes. When providing ranges to typed link selection, any inexact ranges must be specified at the end. Any attributes that do not have a range specified are presumed to match the entire range. |
FilterTypedLink |
Filters are interpreted in the order of the attributes on the typed link facet, not the order in which they are supplied to any API calls. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to retrieve. |
ConsistencyLevel |
The consistency level to execute the request at. |
Lists objects attached to the specified index
Description
Lists objects attached to the specified index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_index/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_index(
DirectoryArn,
RangesOnIndexedValues = NULL,
IndexReference,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
ConsistencyLevel = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The ARN of the directory that the index exists in. |
RangesOnIndexedValues |
Specifies the ranges of indexed values that you want to query. |
IndexReference |
[required] The reference to the index to list. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of objects in a single page to retrieve from the index during a request. For more information, see Amazon Cloud Directory Limits. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
ConsistencyLevel |
The consistency level to execute the request at. |
Lists the major version families of each managed schema
Description
Lists the major version families of each managed schema. If a major version ARN is provided as SchemaArn, the minor version revisions in that family are listed instead.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_managed_schema_arns/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_managed_schema_arns(
SchemaArn = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
The response for ListManagedSchemaArns. When this parameter is used, all minor version ARNs for a major version are listed. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to retrieve. |
Lists all attributes that are associated with an object
Description
Lists all attributes that are associated with an object.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_object_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_object_attributes(
DirectoryArn,
ObjectReference,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ConsistencyLevel = NULL,
FacetFilter = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory where the object resides. For more information, see arns. |
ObjectReference |
[required] The reference that identifies the object whose attributes will be listed. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be retrieved in a single call. This is an approximate number. |
ConsistencyLevel |
Represents the manner and timing in which the successful write or update of an object is reflected in a subsequent read operation of that same object. |
FacetFilter |
Used to filter the list of object attributes that are associated with a certain facet. |
Returns a paginated list of child objects that are associated with a given object
Description
Returns a paginated list of child objects that are associated with a given object.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_object_children/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_object_children(
DirectoryArn,
ObjectReference,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ConsistencyLevel = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory where the object resides. For more information, see arns. |
ObjectReference |
[required] The reference that identifies the object for which child objects are being listed. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be retrieved in a single call. This is an approximate number. |
ConsistencyLevel |
Represents the manner and timing in which the successful write or update of an object is reflected in a subsequent read operation of that same object. |
Retrieves all available parent paths for any object type such as node, leaf node, policy node, and index node objects
Description
Retrieves all available parent paths for any object type such as node, leaf node, policy node, and index node objects. For more information about objects, see Directory Structure.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_object_parent_paths/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_object_parent_paths(
DirectoryArn,
ObjectReference,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The ARN of the directory to which the parent path applies. |
ObjectReference |
[required] The reference that identifies the object whose parent paths are listed. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be retrieved in a single call. This is an approximate number. |
Lists parent objects that are associated with a given object in pagination fashion
Description
Lists parent objects that are associated with a given object in pagination fashion.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_object_parents/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_object_parents(
DirectoryArn,
ObjectReference,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ConsistencyLevel = NULL,
IncludeAllLinksToEachParent = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory where the object resides. For more information, see arns. |
ObjectReference |
[required] The reference that identifies the object for which parent objects are being listed. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be retrieved in a single call. This is an approximate number. |
ConsistencyLevel |
Represents the manner and timing in which the successful write or update of an object is reflected in a subsequent read operation of that same object. |
IncludeAllLinksToEachParent |
When set to True, returns all ListObjectParentsResponse$ParentLinks. There could be multiple links between a parent-child pair. |
Returns policies attached to an object in pagination fashion
Description
Returns policies attached to an object in pagination fashion.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_object_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_object_policies(
DirectoryArn,
ObjectReference,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ConsistencyLevel = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory where objects reside. For more information, see arns. |
ObjectReference |
[required] Reference that identifies the object for which policies will be listed. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be retrieved in a single call. This is an approximate number. |
ConsistencyLevel |
Represents the manner and timing in which the successful write or update of an object is reflected in a subsequent read operation of that same object. |
Returns a paginated list of all the outgoing TypedLinkSpecifier information for an object
Description
Returns a paginated list of all the outgoing TypedLinkSpecifier information for an object. It also supports filtering by typed link facet and identity attributes. For more information, see Typed Links.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_outgoing_typed_links/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_outgoing_typed_links(
DirectoryArn,
ObjectReference,
FilterAttributeRanges = NULL,
FilterTypedLink = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ConsistencyLevel = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the directory where you want to list the typed links. |
ObjectReference |
[required] A reference that identifies the object whose attributes will be listed. |
FilterAttributeRanges |
Provides range filters for multiple attributes. When providing ranges to typed link selection, any inexact ranges must be specified at the end. Any attributes that do not have a range specified are presumed to match the entire range. |
FilterTypedLink |
Filters are interpreted in the order of the attributes defined on the typed link facet, not the order they are supplied to any API calls. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to retrieve. |
ConsistencyLevel |
The consistency level to execute the request at. |
Returns all of the ObjectIdentifiers to which a given policy is attached
Description
Returns all of the ObjectIdentifiers
to which a given policy is attached.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_policy_attachments/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_policy_attachments(
DirectoryArn,
PolicyReference,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ConsistencyLevel = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory where objects reside. For more information, see arns. |
PolicyReference |
[required] The reference that identifies the policy object. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be retrieved in a single call. This is an approximate number. |
ConsistencyLevel |
Represents the manner and timing in which the successful write or update of an object is reflected in a subsequent read operation of that same object. |
Lists the major version families of each published schema
Description
Lists the major version families of each published schema. If a major version ARN is provided as SchemaArn
, the minor version revisions in that family are listed instead.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_published_schema_arns/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_published_schema_arns(
SchemaArn = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
The response for
|
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to retrieve. |
Returns tags for a resource
Description
Returns tags for a resource. Tagging is currently supported only for directories with a limit of 50 tags per directory. All 50 tags are returned for a given directory with this API call.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_tags_for_resource(
ResourceArn,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. Tagging is only supported for directories. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. This is for future use. Currently pagination is not supported for tagging. |
MaxResults |
The |
Returns a paginated list of all attribute definitions for a particular TypedLinkFacet
Description
Returns a paginated list of all attribute definitions for a particular TypedLinkFacet. For more information, see Typed Links.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_typed_link_facet_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_typed_link_facet_attributes(
SchemaArn,
Name,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the schema. For more information, see arns. |
Name |
[required] The unique name of the typed link facet. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to retrieve. |
Returns a paginated list of TypedLink facet names for a particular schema
Description
Returns a paginated list of TypedLink
facet names for a particular schema. For more information, see Typed Links.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_list_typed_link_facet_names/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_list_typed_link_facet_names(
SchemaArn,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the schema. For more information, see arns. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to retrieve. |
Lists all policies from the root of the Directory to the object specified
Description
Lists all policies from the root of the Directory to the object specified. If there are no policies present, an empty list is returned. If policies are present, and if some objects don't have the policies attached, it returns the ObjectIdentifier
for such objects. If policies are present, it returns ObjectIdentifier
, policyId
, and policyType
. Paths that don't lead to the root from the target object are ignored. For more information, see Policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_lookup_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_lookup_policy(
DirectoryArn,
ObjectReference,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory. For more information, see arns. |
ObjectReference |
[required] Reference that identifies the object whose policies will be looked up. |
NextToken |
The token to request the next page of results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be retrieved in a single call. This is an approximate number. |
Publishes a development schema with a major version and a recommended minor version
Description
Publishes a development schema with a major version and a recommended minor version.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_publish_schema/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_publish_schema(
DevelopmentSchemaArn,
Version,
MinorVersion = NULL,
Name = NULL
)
Arguments
DevelopmentSchemaArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the development schema. For more information, see arns. |
Version |
[required] The major version under which the schema will be published. Schemas have both a major and minor version associated with them. |
MinorVersion |
The minor version under which the schema will be published. This parameter is recommended. Schemas have both a major and minor version associated with them. |
Name |
The new name under which the schema will be published. If this is not provided, the development schema is considered. |
Allows a schema to be updated using JSON upload
Description
Allows a schema to be updated using JSON upload. Only available for development schemas. See JSON Schema Format for more information.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_put_schema_from_json/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_put_schema_from_json(SchemaArn, Document)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The ARN of the schema to update. |
Document |
[required] The replacement JSON schema. |
Removes the specified facet from the specified object
Description
Removes the specified facet from the specified object.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_remove_facet_from_object/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_remove_facet_from_object(
DirectoryArn,
SchemaFacet,
ObjectReference
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The ARN of the directory in which the object resides. |
SchemaFacet |
[required] The facet to remove. See SchemaFacet for details. |
ObjectReference |
[required] A reference to the object to remove the facet from. |
An API operation for adding tags to a resource
Description
An API operation for adding tags to a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. Tagging is only supported for directories. |
Tags |
[required] A list of tag key-value pairs. |
An API operation for removing tags from a resource
Description
An API operation for removing tags from a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. Tagging is only supported for directories. |
TagKeys |
[required] Keys of the tag that need to be removed from the resource. |
Does the following:
Description
Does the following:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_update_facet/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_update_facet(
SchemaArn,
Name,
AttributeUpdates = NULL,
ObjectType = NULL
)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Facet. For more information, see arns. |
Name |
[required] The name of the facet. |
AttributeUpdates |
List of attributes that need to be updated in a given schema Facet. Each
attribute is followed by |
ObjectType |
The object type that is associated with the facet. See CreateFacetRequest$ObjectType for more details. |
Updates a given typed link’s attributes
Description
Updates a given typed link’s attributes. Attributes to be updated must not contribute to the typed link’s identity, as defined by its IdentityAttributeOrder
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_update_link_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_update_link_attributes(
DirectoryArn,
TypedLinkSpecifier,
AttributeUpdates
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory where the updated typed link resides. For more information, see arns or Typed Links. |
TypedLinkSpecifier |
[required] Allows a typed link specifier to be accepted as input. |
AttributeUpdates |
[required] The attributes update structure. |
Updates a given object's attributes
Description
Updates a given object's attributes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_update_object_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_update_object_attributes(
DirectoryArn,
ObjectReference,
AttributeUpdates
)
Arguments
DirectoryArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the Directory where the object resides. For more information, see arns. |
ObjectReference |
[required] The reference that identifies the object. |
AttributeUpdates |
[required] The attributes update structure. |
Updates the schema name with a new name
Description
Updates the schema name with a new name. Only development schema names can be updated.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_update_schema/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_update_schema(SchemaArn, Name)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the development schema. For more information, see arns. |
Name |
[required] The name of the schema. |
Updates a TypedLinkFacet
Description
Updates a TypedLinkFacet. For more information, see Typed Links.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_update_typed_link_facet/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_update_typed_link_facet(
SchemaArn,
Name,
AttributeUpdates,
IdentityAttributeOrder
)
Arguments
SchemaArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that is associated with the schema. For more information, see arns. |
Name |
[required] The unique name of the typed link facet. |
AttributeUpdates |
[required] Attributes update structure. |
IdentityAttributeOrder |
[required] The order of identity attributes for the facet, from most significant to least significant. The ability to filter typed links considers the order that the attributes are defined on the typed link facet. When providing ranges to a typed link selection, any inexact ranges must be specified at the end. Any attributes that do not have a range specified are presumed to match the entire range. Filters are interpreted in the order of the attributes on the typed link facet, not the order in which they are supplied to any API calls. For more information about identity attributes, see Typed Links. |
Upgrades a single directory in-place using the PublishedSchemaArn with schema updates found in MinorVersion
Description
Upgrades a single directory in-place using the PublishedSchemaArn
with schema updates found in MinorVersion
. Backwards-compatible minor version upgrades are instantaneously available for readers on all objects in the directory. Note: This is a synchronous API call and upgrades only one schema on a given directory per call. To upgrade multiple directories from one schema, you would need to call this API on each directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_upgrade_applied_schema/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_upgrade_applied_schema(
PublishedSchemaArn,
DirectoryArn,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
PublishedSchemaArn |
[required] The revision of the published schema to upgrade the directory to. |
DirectoryArn |
[required] The ARN for the directory to which the upgraded schema will be applied. |
DryRun |
Used for testing whether the major version schemas are backward compatible or not. If schema compatibility fails, an exception would be thrown else the call would succeed but no changes will be saved. This parameter is optional. |
Upgrades a published schema under a new minor version revision using the current contents of DevelopmentSchemaArn
Description
Upgrades a published schema under a new minor version revision using the current contents of DevelopmentSchemaArn
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/clouddirectory_upgrade_published_schema/ for full documentation.
Usage
clouddirectory_upgrade_published_schema(
DevelopmentSchemaArn,
PublishedSchemaArn,
MinorVersion,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
DevelopmentSchemaArn |
[required] The ARN of the development schema with the changes used for the upgrade. |
PublishedSchemaArn |
[required] The ARN of the published schema to be upgraded. |
MinorVersion |
[required] Identifies the minor version of the published schema that will be created. This parameter is NOT optional. |
DryRun |
Used for testing whether the Development schema provided is backwards compatible, or not, with the publish schema provided by the user to be upgraded. If schema compatibility fails, an exception would be thrown else the call would succeed. This parameter is optional and defaults to false. |
Amazon CloudHSM
Description
AWS CloudHSM Service
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
For information about the current version of AWS CloudHSM, see AWS CloudHSM, the AWS CloudHSM User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM API Reference.
Usage
cloudhsm(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- cloudhsm( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_tags_to_resource | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
create_hapg | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
create_hsm | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
create_luna_client | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
delete_hapg | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
delete_hsm | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
delete_luna_client | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
describe_hapg | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
describe_hsm | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
describe_luna_client | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
get_config | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
list_available_zones | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
list_hapgs | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
list_hsms | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
list_luna_clients | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
list_tags_for_resource | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
modify_hapg | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
modify_hsm | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
modify_luna_client | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
remove_tags_from_resource | This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- cloudhsm()
svc$add_tags_to_resource(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_add_tags_to_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_add_tags_to_resource(ResourceArn, TagList)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the AWS CloudHSM resource to tag. |
TagList |
[required] One or more tags. |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_create_hapg/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_create_hapg(Label)
Arguments
Label |
[required] The label of the new high-availability partition group. |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_create_hsm/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_create_hsm(
SubnetId,
SshKey,
EniIp = NULL,
IamRoleArn,
ExternalId = NULL,
SubscriptionType,
ClientToken = NULL,
SyslogIp = NULL
)
Arguments
SubnetId |
[required] The identifier of the subnet in your VPC in which to place the HSM. |
SshKey |
[required] The SSH public key to install on the HSM. |
EniIp |
The IP address to assign to the HSM's ENI. If an IP address is not specified, an IP address will be randomly chosen from the CIDR range of the subnet. |
IamRoleArn |
[required] The ARN of an IAM role to enable the AWS CloudHSM service to allocate an ENI on your behalf. |
ExternalId |
The external ID from |
SubscriptionType |
[required] |
ClientToken |
A user-defined token to ensure idempotence. Subsequent calls to this operation with the same token will be ignored. |
SyslogIp |
The IP address for the syslog monitoring server. The AWS CloudHSM service only supports one syslog monitoring server. |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_create_luna_client/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_create_luna_client(Label = NULL, Certificate)
Arguments
Label |
The label for the client. |
Certificate |
[required] The contents of a Base64-Encoded X.509 v3 certificate to be installed on the HSMs used by this client. |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_delete_hapg/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_delete_hapg(HapgArn)
Arguments
HapgArn |
[required] The ARN of the high-availability partition group to delete. |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_delete_hsm/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_delete_hsm(HsmArn)
Arguments
HsmArn |
[required] The ARN of the HSM to delete. |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_delete_luna_client/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_delete_luna_client(ClientArn)
Arguments
ClientArn |
[required] The ARN of the client to delete. |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_describe_hapg/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_describe_hapg(HapgArn)
Arguments
HapgArn |
[required] The ARN of the high-availability partition group to describe. |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_describe_hsm/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_describe_hsm(HsmArn = NULL, HsmSerialNumber = NULL)
Arguments
HsmArn |
The ARN of the HSM. Either the |
HsmSerialNumber |
The serial number of the HSM. Either the |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_describe_luna_client/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_describe_luna_client(ClientArn = NULL, CertificateFingerprint = NULL)
Arguments
ClientArn |
The ARN of the client. |
CertificateFingerprint |
The certificate fingerprint. |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_get_config/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_get_config(ClientArn, ClientVersion, HapgList)
Arguments
ClientArn |
[required] The ARN of the client. |
ClientVersion |
[required] The client version. |
HapgList |
[required] A list of ARNs that identify the high-availability partition groups that are associated with the client. |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_list_available_zones/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_list_available_zones()
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_list_hapgs/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_list_hapgs(NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
The |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_list_hsms/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_list_hsms(NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
The |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_list_luna_clients/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_list_luna_clients(NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
The |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the AWS CloudHSM resource. |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_modify_hapg/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_modify_hapg(HapgArn, Label = NULL, PartitionSerialList = NULL)
Arguments
HapgArn |
[required] The ARN of the high-availability partition group to modify. |
Label |
The new label for the high-availability partition group. |
PartitionSerialList |
The list of partition serial numbers to make members of the high-availability partition group. |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_modify_hsm/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_modify_hsm(
HsmArn,
SubnetId = NULL,
EniIp = NULL,
IamRoleArn = NULL,
ExternalId = NULL,
SyslogIp = NULL
)
Arguments
HsmArn |
[required] The ARN of the HSM to modify. |
SubnetId |
The new identifier of the subnet that the HSM is in. The new subnet must be in the same Availability Zone as the current subnet. |
EniIp |
The new IP address for the elastic network interface (ENI) attached to the HSM. If the HSM is moved to a different subnet, and an IP address is not specified, an IP address will be randomly chosen from the CIDR range of the new subnet. |
IamRoleArn |
The new IAM role ARN. |
ExternalId |
The new external ID. |
SyslogIp |
The new IP address for the syslog monitoring server. The AWS CloudHSM service only supports one syslog monitoring server. |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_modify_luna_client/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_modify_luna_client(ClientArn, Certificate)
Arguments
ClientArn |
[required] The ARN of the client. |
Certificate |
[required] The new certificate for the client. |
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic
Description
This is documentation for AWS CloudHSM Classic. For more information, see AWS CloudHSM Classic FAQs, the AWS CloudHSM Classic User Guide, and the AWS CloudHSM Classic API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsm_remove_tags_from_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsm_remove_tags_from_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeyList)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the AWS CloudHSM resource. |
TagKeyList |
[required] The tag key or keys to remove. Specify only the tag key to remove (not the value). To overwrite the
value for an existing tag, use
|
AWS CloudHSM V2
Description
For more information about CloudHSM, see CloudHSM and the CloudHSM User Guide.
Usage
cloudhsmv2(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- cloudhsmv2( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
copy_backup_to_region | Copy an CloudHSM cluster backup to a different region |
create_cluster | Creates a new CloudHSM cluster |
create_hsm | Creates a new hardware security module (HSM) in the specified CloudHSM cluster |
delete_backup | Deletes a specified CloudHSM backup |
delete_cluster | Deletes the specified CloudHSM cluster |
delete_hsm | Deletes the specified HSM |
delete_resource_policy | Deletes an CloudHSM resource policy |
describe_backups | Gets information about backups of CloudHSM clusters |
describe_clusters | Gets information about CloudHSM clusters |
get_resource_policy | Retrieves the resource policy document attached to a given resource |
initialize_cluster | Claims an CloudHSM cluster by submitting the cluster certificate issued by your issuing certificate authority (CA) and the CA's root certificate |
list_tags | Gets a list of tags for the specified CloudHSM cluster |
modify_backup_attributes | Modifies attributes for CloudHSM backup |
modify_cluster | Modifies CloudHSM cluster |
put_resource_policy | Creates or updates an CloudHSM resource policy |
restore_backup | Restores a specified CloudHSM backup that is in the PENDING_DELETION state |
tag_resource | Adds or overwrites one or more tags for the specified CloudHSM cluster |
untag_resource | Removes the specified tag or tags from the specified CloudHSM cluster |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- cloudhsmv2()
svc$copy_backup_to_region(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Copy an CloudHSM cluster backup to a different region
Description
Copy an CloudHSM cluster backup to a different region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_copy_backup_to_region/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_copy_backup_to_region(DestinationRegion, BackupId, TagList = NULL)
Arguments
DestinationRegion |
[required] The AWS region that will contain your copied CloudHSM cluster backup. |
BackupId |
[required] The ID of the backup that will be copied to the destination region. |
TagList |
Tags to apply to the destination backup during creation. If you specify tags, only these tags will be applied to the destination backup. If you do not specify tags, the service copies tags from the source backup to the destination backup. |
Creates a new CloudHSM cluster
Description
Creates a new CloudHSM cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_create_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_create_cluster(
BackupRetentionPolicy = NULL,
HsmType,
SourceBackupId = NULL,
SubnetIds,
NetworkType = NULL,
TagList = NULL,
Mode = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupRetentionPolicy |
A policy that defines how the service retains backups. |
HsmType |
[required] The type of HSM to use in the cluster. The allowed values are
|
SourceBackupId |
The identifier (ID) or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cluster
backup to restore. Use this value to restore the cluster from a backup
instead of creating a new cluster. To find the backup ID or ARN, use
|
SubnetIds |
[required] The identifiers (IDs) of the subnets where you are creating the cluster. You must specify at least one subnet. If you specify multiple subnets, they must meet the following criteria:
|
NetworkType |
The NetworkType to create a cluster with. The allowed values are |
TagList |
Tags to apply to the CloudHSM cluster during creation. |
Mode |
The mode to use in the cluster. The allowed values are |
Creates a new hardware security module (HSM) in the specified CloudHSM cluster
Description
Creates a new hardware security module (HSM) in the specified CloudHSM cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_create_hsm/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_create_hsm(ClusterId, AvailabilityZone, IpAddress = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The identifier (ID) of the HSM's cluster. To find the cluster ID, use
|
AvailabilityZone |
[required] The Availability Zone where you are creating the HSM. To find the
cluster's Availability Zones, use
|
IpAddress |
The HSM's IP address. If you specify an IP address, use an available address from the subnet that maps to the Availability Zone where you are creating the HSM. If you don't specify an IP address, one is chosen for you from that subnet. |
Deletes a specified CloudHSM backup
Description
Deletes a specified CloudHSM backup. A backup can be restored up to 7 days after the DeleteBackup request is made. For more information on restoring a backup, see restore_backup
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_delete_backup/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_delete_backup(BackupId)
Arguments
BackupId |
[required] The ID of the backup to be deleted. To find the ID of a backup, use the
|
Deletes the specified CloudHSM cluster
Description
Deletes the specified CloudHSM cluster. Before you can delete a cluster, you must delete all HSMs in the cluster. To see if the cluster contains any HSMs, use describe_clusters
. To delete an HSM, use delete_hsm
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_delete_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_delete_cluster(ClusterId)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The identifier (ID) of the cluster that you are deleting. To find the
cluster ID, use |
Deletes the specified HSM
Description
Deletes the specified HSM. To specify an HSM, you can use its identifier (ID), the IP address of the HSM's elastic network interface (ENI), or the ID of the HSM's ENI. You need to specify only one of these values. To find these values, use describe_clusters
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_delete_hsm/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_delete_hsm(ClusterId, HsmId = NULL, EniId = NULL, EniIp = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The identifier (ID) of the cluster that contains the HSM that you are deleting. |
HsmId |
The identifier (ID) of the HSM that you are deleting. |
EniId |
The identifier (ID) of the elastic network interface (ENI) of the HSM that you are deleting. |
EniIp |
The IP address of the elastic network interface (ENI) of the HSM that you are deleting. |
Deletes an CloudHSM resource policy
Description
Deletes an CloudHSM resource policy. Deleting a resource policy will result in the resource being unshared and removed from any RAM resource shares. Deleting the resource policy attached to a backup will not impact any clusters created from that backup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_delete_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_delete_resource_policy(ResourceArn = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource from which the policy will be removed. |
Gets information about backups of CloudHSM clusters
Description
Gets information about backups of CloudHSM clusters. Lists either the backups you own or the backups shared with you when the Shared parameter is true.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_describe_backups/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_describe_backups(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
Shared = NULL,
SortAscending = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
The |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of backups to return in the response. When there are
more backups than the number you specify, the response contains a
|
Filters |
One or more filters to limit the items returned in the response. Use the Use the Use the Use the Use the |
Shared |
Describe backups that are shared with you. By default when using this option, the command returns backups that have been shared using a standard Resource Access Manager resource share. In order for a backup that was shared using the PutResourcePolicy command to be returned, the share must be promoted to a standard resource share using the RAM PromoteResourceShareCreatedFromPolicy API operation. For more information about sharing backups, see Working with shared backups in the CloudHSM User Guide. |
SortAscending |
Designates whether or not to sort the return backups by ascending chronological order of generation. |
Gets information about CloudHSM clusters
Description
Gets information about CloudHSM clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_describe_clusters/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_describe_clusters(
Filters = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
Filters |
One or more filters to limit the items returned in the response. Use the Use the Use the |
NextToken |
The |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of clusters to return in the response. When there are
more clusters than the number you specify, the response contains a
|
Retrieves the resource policy document attached to a given resource
Description
Retrieves the resource policy document attached to a given resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_get_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_get_resource_policy(ResourceArn = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to which a policy is attached. |
Claims an CloudHSM cluster by submitting the cluster certificate issued by your issuing certificate authority (CA) and the CA's root certificate
Description
Claims an CloudHSM cluster by submitting the cluster certificate issued by your issuing certificate authority (CA) and the CA's root certificate. Before you can claim a cluster, you must sign the cluster's certificate signing request (CSR) with your issuing CA. To get the cluster's CSR, use describe_clusters
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_initialize_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_initialize_cluster(ClusterId, SignedCert, TrustAnchor)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The identifier (ID) of the cluster that you are claiming. To find the
cluster ID, use |
SignedCert |
[required] The cluster certificate issued (signed) by your issuing certificate authority (CA). The certificate must be in PEM format and can contain a maximum of 5000 characters. |
TrustAnchor |
[required] The issuing certificate of the issuing certificate authority (CA) that issued (signed) the cluster certificate. You must use a self-signed certificate. The certificate used to sign the HSM CSR must be directly available, and thus must be the root certificate. The certificate must be in PEM format and can contain a maximum of 5000 characters. |
Gets a list of tags for the specified CloudHSM cluster
Description
Gets a list of tags for the specified CloudHSM cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_list_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_list_tags(ResourceId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceId |
[required] The cluster identifier (ID) for the cluster whose tags you are getting.
To find the cluster ID, use
|
NextToken |
The |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of tags to return in the response. When there are
more tags than the number you specify, the response contains a
|
Modifies attributes for CloudHSM backup
Description
Modifies attributes for CloudHSM backup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_modify_backup_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_modify_backup_attributes(BackupId, NeverExpires)
Arguments
BackupId |
[required] The identifier (ID) of the backup to modify. To find the ID of a backup,
use the |
NeverExpires |
[required] Specifies whether the service should exempt a backup from the retention
policy for the cluster. |
Modifies CloudHSM cluster
Description
Modifies CloudHSM cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_modify_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_modify_cluster(
HsmType = NULL,
BackupRetentionPolicy = NULL,
ClusterId
)
Arguments
HsmType |
The desired HSM type of the cluster. |
BackupRetentionPolicy |
A policy that defines how the service retains backups. |
ClusterId |
[required] The identifier (ID) of the cluster that you want to modify. To find the
cluster ID, use |
Creates or updates an CloudHSM resource policy
Description
Creates or updates an CloudHSM resource policy. A resource policy helps you to define the IAM entity (for example, an Amazon Web Services account) that can manage your CloudHSM resources. The following resources support CloudHSM resource policies:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_put_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_put_resource_policy(ResourceArn = NULL, Policy = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to which you want to attach a policy. |
Policy |
The policy you want to associate with a resource. For an example policy, see Working with shared backups in the CloudHSM User Guide |
Restores a specified CloudHSM backup that is in the PENDING_DELETION state
Description
Restores a specified CloudHSM backup that is in the PENDING_DELETION
state. For more information on deleting a backup, see delete_backup
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_restore_backup/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_restore_backup(BackupId)
Arguments
BackupId |
[required] The ID of the backup to be restored. To find the ID of a backup, use the
|
Adds or overwrites one or more tags for the specified CloudHSM cluster
Description
Adds or overwrites one or more tags for the specified CloudHSM cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_tag_resource(ResourceId, TagList)
Arguments
ResourceId |
[required] The cluster identifier (ID) for the cluster that you are tagging. To
find the cluster ID, use
|
TagList |
[required] A list of one or more tags. |
Removes the specified tag or tags from the specified CloudHSM cluster
Description
Removes the specified tag or tags from the specified CloudHSM cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudhsmv2_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudhsmv2_untag_resource(ResourceId, TagKeyList)
Arguments
ResourceId |
[required] The cluster identifier (ID) for the cluster whose tags you are removing.
To find the cluster ID, use
|
TagKeyList |
[required] A list of one or more tag keys for the tags that you are removing. Specify only the tag keys, not the tag values. |
Amazon Cognito Identity
Description
Amazon Cognito Federated Identities
Amazon Cognito Federated Identities is a web service that delivers scoped temporary credentials to mobile devices and other untrusted environments. It uniquely identifies a device and supplies the user with a consistent identity over the lifetime of an application.
Using Amazon Cognito Federated Identities, you can enable authentication with one or more third-party identity providers (Facebook, Google, or Login with Amazon) or an Amazon Cognito user pool, and you can also choose to support unauthenticated access from your app. Cognito delivers a unique identifier for each user and acts as an OpenID token provider trusted by AWS Security Token Service (STS) to access temporary, limited-privilege AWS credentials.
For a description of the authentication flow from the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide see Authentication Flow.
For more information see Amazon Cognito Federated Identities.
Usage
cognitoidentity(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- cognitoidentity( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_identity_pool | Creates a new identity pool |
delete_identities | Deletes identities from an identity pool |
delete_identity_pool | Deletes an identity pool |
describe_identity | Returns metadata related to the given identity, including when the identity was created and any associated linked logins |
describe_identity_pool | Gets details about a particular identity pool, including the pool name, ID description, creation date, and current number of users |
get_credentials_for_identity | Returns credentials for the provided identity ID |
get_id | Generates (or retrieves) a Cognito ID |
get_identity_pool_roles | Gets the roles for an identity pool |
get_open_id_token | Gets an OpenID token, using a known Cognito ID |
get_open_id_token_for_developer_identity | Registers (or retrieves) a Cognito IdentityId and an OpenID Connect token for a user authenticated by your backend authentication process |
get_principal_tag_attribute_map | Use GetPrincipalTagAttributeMap to list all mappings between PrincipalTags and user attributes |
list_identities | Lists the identities in an identity pool |
list_identity_pools | Lists all of the Cognito identity pools registered for your account |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists the tags that are assigned to an Amazon Cognito identity pool |
lookup_developer_identity | Retrieves the IdentityID associated with a DeveloperUserIdentifier or the list of DeveloperUserIdentifier values associated with an IdentityId for an existing identity |
merge_developer_identities | Merges two users having different IdentityIds, existing in the same identity pool, and identified by the same developer provider |
set_identity_pool_roles | Sets the roles for an identity pool |
set_principal_tag_attribute_map | You can use this operation to use default (username and clientID) attribute or custom attribute mappings |
tag_resource | Assigns a set of tags to the specified Amazon Cognito identity pool |
unlink_developer_identity | Unlinks a DeveloperUserIdentifier from an existing identity |
unlink_identity | Unlinks a federated identity from an existing account |
untag_resource | Removes the specified tags from the specified Amazon Cognito identity pool |
update_identity_pool | Updates an identity pool |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- cognitoidentity()
svc$create_identity_pool(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates a new identity pool
Description
Creates a new identity pool. The identity pool is a store of user identity information that is specific to your AWS account. The keys for SupportedLoginProviders
are as follows:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_create_identity_pool/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_create_identity_pool(
IdentityPoolName,
AllowUnauthenticatedIdentities,
AllowClassicFlow = NULL,
SupportedLoginProviders = NULL,
DeveloperProviderName = NULL,
OpenIdConnectProviderARNs = NULL,
CognitoIdentityProviders = NULL,
SamlProviderARNs = NULL,
IdentityPoolTags = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityPoolName |
[required] A string that you provide. |
AllowUnauthenticatedIdentities |
[required] TRUE if the identity pool supports unauthenticated logins. |
AllowClassicFlow |
Enables or disables the Basic (Classic) authentication flow. For more information, see Identity Pools (Federated Identities) Authentication Flow in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. |
SupportedLoginProviders |
Optional key:value pairs mapping provider names to provider app IDs. |
DeveloperProviderName |
The "domain" by which Cognito will refer to your users. This name acts
as a placeholder that allows your backend and the Cognito service to
communicate about the developer provider. For the
Once you have set a developer provider name, you cannot change it. Please take care in setting this parameter. |
OpenIdConnectProviderARNs |
The Amazon Resource Names (ARN) of the OpenID Connect providers. |
CognitoIdentityProviders |
An array of Amazon Cognito user pools and their client IDs. |
SamlProviderARNs |
An array of Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) of the SAML provider for your identity pool. |
IdentityPoolTags |
Tags to assign to the identity pool. A tag is a label that you can apply to identity pools to categorize and manage them in different ways, such as by purpose, owner, environment, or other criteria. |
Deletes identities from an identity pool
Description
Deletes identities from an identity pool. You can specify a list of 1-60 identities that you want to delete.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_delete_identities/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_delete_identities(IdentityIdsToDelete)
Arguments
IdentityIdsToDelete |
[required] A list of 1-60 identities that you want to delete. |
Deletes an identity pool
Description
Deletes an identity pool. Once a pool is deleted, users will not be able to authenticate with the pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_delete_identity_pool/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_delete_identity_pool(IdentityPoolId)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] An identity pool ID in the format REGION:GUID. |
Returns metadata related to the given identity, including when the identity was created and any associated linked logins
Description
Returns metadata related to the given identity, including when the identity was created and any associated linked logins.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_describe_identity/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_describe_identity(IdentityId)
Arguments
IdentityId |
[required] A unique identifier in the format REGION:GUID. |
Gets details about a particular identity pool, including the pool name, ID description, creation date, and current number of users
Description
Gets details about a particular identity pool, including the pool name, ID description, creation date, and current number of users.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_describe_identity_pool/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_describe_identity_pool(IdentityPoolId)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] An identity pool ID in the format REGION:GUID. |
Returns credentials for the provided identity ID
Description
Returns credentials for the provided identity ID. Any provided logins will be validated against supported login providers. If the token is for cognito-identity.amazonaws.com, it will be passed through to AWS Security Token Service with the appropriate role for the token.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_get_credentials_for_identity/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_get_credentials_for_identity(
IdentityId,
Logins = NULL,
CustomRoleArn = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityId |
[required] A unique identifier in the format REGION:GUID. |
Logins |
A set of optional name-value pairs that map provider names to provider tokens. The name-value pair will follow the syntax "provider_name": "provider_user_identifier". Logins should not be specified when trying to get credentials for an unauthenticated identity. The Logins parameter is required when using identities associated with
external identity providers such as Facebook. For examples of |
CustomRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the role to be assumed when multiple roles were received in the token from the identity provider. For example, a SAML-based identity provider. This parameter is optional for identity providers that do not support role customization. |
Generates (or retrieves) a Cognito ID
Description
Generates (or retrieves) a Cognito ID. Supplying multiple logins will create an implicit linked account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_get_id/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_get_id(AccountId = NULL, IdentityPoolId, Logins = NULL)
Arguments
AccountId |
A standard AWS account ID (9+ digits). |
IdentityPoolId |
[required] An identity pool ID in the format REGION:GUID. |
Logins |
A set of optional name-value pairs that map provider names to provider
tokens. The available provider names for
|
Gets the roles for an identity pool
Description
Gets the roles for an identity pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_get_identity_pool_roles/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_get_identity_pool_roles(IdentityPoolId)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] An identity pool ID in the format REGION:GUID. |
Gets an OpenID token, using a known Cognito ID
Description
Gets an OpenID token, using a known Cognito ID. This known Cognito ID is returned by get_id
. You can optionally add additional logins for the identity. Supplying multiple logins creates an implicit link.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_get_open_id_token/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_get_open_id_token(IdentityId, Logins = NULL)
Arguments
IdentityId |
[required] A unique identifier in the format REGION:GUID. |
Logins |
A set of optional name-value pairs that map provider names to provider
tokens. When using graph.facebook.com and www.amazon.com, supply the
access_token returned from the provider's authflow. For
accounts.google.com, an Amazon Cognito user pool provider, or any other
OpenID Connect provider, always include the |
Registers (or retrieves) a Cognito IdentityId and an OpenID Connect token for a user authenticated by your backend authentication process
Description
Registers (or retrieves) a Cognito IdentityId
and an OpenID Connect token for a user authenticated by your backend authentication process. Supplying multiple logins will create an implicit linked account. You can only specify one developer provider as part of the Logins
map, which is linked to the identity pool. The developer provider is the "domain" by which Cognito will refer to your users.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_get_open_id_token_for_developer_identity/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_get_open_id_token_for_developer_identity(
IdentityPoolId,
IdentityId = NULL,
Logins,
PrincipalTags = NULL,
TokenDuration = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] An identity pool ID in the format REGION:GUID. |
IdentityId |
A unique identifier in the format REGION:GUID. |
Logins |
[required] A set of optional name-value pairs that map provider names to provider
tokens. Each name-value pair represents a user from a public provider or
developer provider. If the user is from a developer provider, the
name-value pair will follow the syntax
|
PrincipalTags |
Use this operation to configure attribute mappings for custom providers. |
TokenDuration |
The expiration time of the token, in seconds. You can specify a custom expiration time for the token so that you can cache it. If you don't provide an expiration time, the token is valid for 15 minutes. You can exchange the token with Amazon STS for temporary AWS credentials, which are valid for a maximum of one hour. The maximum token duration you can set is 24 hours. You should take care in setting the expiration time for a token, as there are significant security implications: an attacker could use a leaked token to access your AWS resources for the token's duration. Please provide for a small grace period, usually no more than 5 minutes, to account for clock skew. |
Use GetPrincipalTagAttributeMap to list all mappings between PrincipalTags and user attributes
Description
Use get_principal_tag_attribute_map
to list all mappings between PrincipalTags
and user attributes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_get_principal_tag_attribute_map/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_get_principal_tag_attribute_map(
IdentityPoolId,
IdentityProviderName
)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] You can use this operation to get the ID of the Identity Pool you setup attribute mappings for. |
IdentityProviderName |
[required] You can use this operation to get the provider name. |
Lists the identities in an identity pool
Description
Lists the identities in an identity pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_list_identities/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_list_identities(
IdentityPoolId,
MaxResults,
NextToken = NULL,
HideDisabled = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] An identity pool ID in the format REGION:GUID. |
MaxResults |
[required] The maximum number of identities to return. |
NextToken |
A pagination token. |
HideDisabled |
An optional boolean parameter that allows you to hide disabled identities. If omitted, the ListIdentities API will include disabled identities in the response. |
Lists all of the Cognito identity pools registered for your account
Description
Lists all of the Cognito identity pools registered for your account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_list_identity_pools/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_list_identity_pools(MaxResults, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
[required] The maximum number of identities to return. |
NextToken |
A pagination token. |
Lists the tags that are assigned to an Amazon Cognito identity pool
Description
Lists the tags that are assigned to an Amazon Cognito identity pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the identity pool that the tags are assigned to. |
Retrieves the IdentityID associated with a DeveloperUserIdentifier or the list of DeveloperUserIdentifier values associated with an IdentityId for an existing identity
Description
Retrieves the IdentityID
associated with a DeveloperUserIdentifier
or the list of DeveloperUserIdentifier
values associated with an IdentityId
for an existing identity. Either IdentityID
or DeveloperUserIdentifier
must not be null. If you supply only one of these values, the other value will be searched in the database and returned as a part of the response. If you supply both, DeveloperUserIdentifier
will be matched against IdentityID
. If the values are verified against the database, the response returns both values and is the same as the request. Otherwise a ResourceConflictException
is thrown.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_lookup_developer_identity/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_lookup_developer_identity(
IdentityPoolId,
IdentityId = NULL,
DeveloperUserIdentifier = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] An identity pool ID in the format REGION:GUID. |
IdentityId |
A unique identifier in the format REGION:GUID. |
DeveloperUserIdentifier |
A unique ID used by your backend authentication process to identify a user. Typically, a developer identity provider would issue many developer user identifiers, in keeping with the number of users. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of identities to return. |
NextToken |
A pagination token. The first call you make will have |
Merges two users having different IdentityIds, existing in the same identity pool, and identified by the same developer provider
Description
Merges two users having different IdentityId
s, existing in the same identity pool, and identified by the same developer provider. You can use this action to request that discrete users be merged and identified as a single user in the Cognito environment. Cognito associates the given source user (SourceUserIdentifier
) with the IdentityId
of the DestinationUserIdentifier
. Only developer-authenticated users can be merged. If the users to be merged are associated with the same public provider, but as two different users, an exception will be thrown.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_merge_developer_identities/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_merge_developer_identities(
SourceUserIdentifier,
DestinationUserIdentifier,
DeveloperProviderName,
IdentityPoolId
)
Arguments
SourceUserIdentifier |
[required] User identifier for the source user. The value should be a
|
DestinationUserIdentifier |
[required] User identifier for the destination user. The value should be a
|
DeveloperProviderName |
[required] The "domain" by which Cognito will refer to your users. This is a
(pseudo) domain name that you provide while creating an identity pool.
This name acts as a placeholder that allows your backend and the Cognito
service to communicate about the developer provider. For the
|
IdentityPoolId |
[required] An identity pool ID in the format REGION:GUID. |
Sets the roles for an identity pool
Description
Sets the roles for an identity pool. These roles are used when making calls to get_credentials_for_identity
action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_set_identity_pool_roles/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_set_identity_pool_roles(
IdentityPoolId,
Roles,
RoleMappings = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] An identity pool ID in the format REGION:GUID. |
Roles |
[required] The map of roles associated with this pool. For a given role, the key will be either "authenticated" or "unauthenticated" and the value will be the Role ARN. |
RoleMappings |
How users for a specific identity provider are to mapped to roles. This is a string to RoleMapping object map. The string identifies the identity provider, for example, "graph.facebook.com" or "cognito-idp.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/us-east-1_abcdefghi:app_client_id". Up to 25 rules can be specified per identity provider. |
You can use this operation to use default (username and clientID) attribute or custom attribute mappings
Description
You can use this operation to use default (username and clientID) attribute or custom attribute mappings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_set_principal_tag_attribute_map/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_set_principal_tag_attribute_map(
IdentityPoolId,
IdentityProviderName,
UseDefaults = NULL,
PrincipalTags = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] The ID of the Identity Pool you want to set attribute mappings for. |
IdentityProviderName |
[required] The provider name you want to use for attribute mappings. |
UseDefaults |
You can use this operation to use default (username and clientID) attribute mappings. |
PrincipalTags |
You can use this operation to add principal tags. |
Assigns a set of tags to the specified Amazon Cognito identity pool
Description
Assigns a set of tags to the specified Amazon Cognito identity pool. A tag is a label that you can use to categorize and manage identity pools in different ways, such as by purpose, owner, environment, or other criteria.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the identity pool. |
Tags |
[required] The tags to assign to the identity pool. |
Unlinks a DeveloperUserIdentifier from an existing identity
Description
Unlinks a DeveloperUserIdentifier
from an existing identity. Unlinked developer users will be considered new identities next time they are seen. If, for a given Cognito identity, you remove all federated identities as well as the developer user identifier, the Cognito identity becomes inaccessible.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_unlink_developer_identity/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_unlink_developer_identity(
IdentityId,
IdentityPoolId,
DeveloperProviderName,
DeveloperUserIdentifier
)
Arguments
IdentityId |
[required] A unique identifier in the format REGION:GUID. |
IdentityPoolId |
[required] An identity pool ID in the format REGION:GUID. |
DeveloperProviderName |
[required] The "domain" by which Cognito will refer to your users. |
DeveloperUserIdentifier |
[required] A unique ID used by your backend authentication process to identify a user. |
Unlinks a federated identity from an existing account
Description
Unlinks a federated identity from an existing account. Unlinked logins will be considered new identities next time they are seen. Removing the last linked login will make this identity inaccessible.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_unlink_identity/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_unlink_identity(IdentityId, Logins, LoginsToRemove)
Arguments
IdentityId |
[required] A unique identifier in the format REGION:GUID. |
Logins |
[required] A set of optional name-value pairs that map provider names to provider tokens. |
LoginsToRemove |
[required] Provider names to unlink from this identity. |
Removes the specified tags from the specified Amazon Cognito identity pool
Description
Removes the specified tags from the specified Amazon Cognito identity pool. You can use this action up to 5 times per second, per account
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the identity pool. |
TagKeys |
[required] The keys of the tags to remove from the user pool. |
Updates an identity pool
Description
Updates an identity pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentity_update_identity_pool/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentity_update_identity_pool(
IdentityPoolId,
IdentityPoolName,
AllowUnauthenticatedIdentities,
AllowClassicFlow = NULL,
SupportedLoginProviders = NULL,
DeveloperProviderName = NULL,
OpenIdConnectProviderARNs = NULL,
CognitoIdentityProviders = NULL,
SamlProviderARNs = NULL,
IdentityPoolTags = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] An identity pool ID in the format REGION:GUID. |
IdentityPoolName |
[required] A string that you provide. |
AllowUnauthenticatedIdentities |
[required] TRUE if the identity pool supports unauthenticated logins. |
AllowClassicFlow |
Enables or disables the Basic (Classic) authentication flow. For more information, see Identity Pools (Federated Identities) Authentication Flow in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. |
SupportedLoginProviders |
Optional key:value pairs mapping provider names to provider app IDs. |
DeveloperProviderName |
The "domain" by which Cognito will refer to your users. |
OpenIdConnectProviderARNs |
The ARNs of the OpenID Connect providers. |
CognitoIdentityProviders |
A list representing an Amazon Cognito user pool and its client ID. |
SamlProviderARNs |
An array of Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) of the SAML provider for your identity pool. |
IdentityPoolTags |
The tags that are assigned to the identity pool. A tag is a label that you can apply to identity pools to categorize and manage them in different ways, such as by purpose, owner, environment, or other criteria. |
Amazon Cognito Identity Provider
Description
With the Amazon Cognito user pools API, you can configure user pools and authenticate users. To authenticate users from third-party identity providers (IdPs) in this API, you can link IdP users to native user profiles. Learn more about the authentication and authorization of federated users at Adding user pool sign-in through a third party and in the User pool federation endpoints and hosted UI reference.
This API reference provides detailed information about API operations and object types in Amazon Cognito.
Along with resource management operations, the Amazon Cognito user pools API includes classes of operations and authorization models for client-side and server-side authentication of users. You can interact with operations in the Amazon Cognito user pools API as any of the following subjects.
An administrator who wants to configure user pools, app clients, users, groups, or other user pool functions.
A server-side app, like a web application, that wants to use its Amazon Web Services privileges to manage, authenticate, or authorize a user.
A client-side app, like a mobile app, that wants to make unauthenticated requests to manage, authenticate, or authorize a user.
For more information, see Using the Amazon Cognito user pools API and user pool endpoints in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide.
With your Amazon Web Services SDK, you can build the logic to support
operational flows in every use case for this API. You can also make
direct REST API requests to Amazon Cognito user pools service endpoints.
The following links can get you started with the
CognitoIdentityProvider
client in other supported Amazon Web Services
SDKs.
To get started with an Amazon Web Services SDK, see Tools to Build on Amazon Web Services. For example actions and scenarios, see Code examples for Amazon Cognito Identity Provider using Amazon Web Services SDKs.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- cognitoidentityprovider( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_custom_attributes | Adds additional user attributes to the user pool schema |
admin_add_user_to_group | Adds a user to a group |
admin_confirm_sign_up | Confirms user sign-up as an administrator |
admin_create_user | Creates a new user in the specified user pool |
admin_delete_user | Deletes a user profile in your user pool |
admin_delete_user_attributes | Deletes attribute values from a user |
admin_disable_provider_for_user | Prevents the user from signing in with the specified external (SAML or social) identity provider (IdP) |
admin_disable_user | Deactivates a user profile and revokes all access tokens for the user |
admin_enable_user | Activate sign-in for a user profile that previously had sign-in access disabled |
admin_forget_device | Forgets, or deletes, a remembered device from a user's profile |
admin_get_device | Given the device key, returns details for a user' device |
admin_get_user | Given the username, returns details about a user profile in a user pool |
admin_initiate_auth | Starts sign-in for applications with a server-side component, for example a traditional web application |
admin_link_provider_for_user | Links an existing user account in a user pool (DestinationUser) to an identity from an external IdP (SourceUser) based on a specified attribute name and value from the external IdP |
admin_list_devices | Lists a user's registered devices |
admin_list_groups_for_user | Lists the groups that a user belongs to |
admin_list_user_auth_events | Requests a history of user activity and any risks detected as part of Amazon Cognito threat protection |
admin_remove_user_from_group | Given a username and a group name |
admin_reset_user_password | Resets the specified user's password in a user pool |
admin_respond_to_auth_challenge | Some API operations in a user pool generate a challenge, like a prompt for an MFA code, for device authentication that bypasses MFA, or for a custom authentication challenge |
admin_set_user_mfa_preference | Sets the user's multi-factor authentication (MFA) preference, including which MFA options are activated, and if any are preferred |
admin_set_user_password | Sets the specified user's password in a user pool |
admin_set_user_settings | This action is no longer supported |
admin_update_auth_event_feedback | Provides feedback for an authentication event indicating if it was from a valid user |
admin_update_device_status | Updates the status of a user's device so that it is marked as remembered or not remembered for the purpose of device authentication |
admin_update_user_attributes | This action might generate an SMS text message |
admin_user_global_sign_out | Invalidates the identity, access, and refresh tokens that Amazon Cognito issued to a user |
associate_software_token | Begins setup of time-based one-time password (TOTP) multi-factor authentication (MFA) for a user, with a unique private key that Amazon Cognito generates and returns in the API response |
change_password | Changes the password for a specified user in a user pool |
complete_web_authn_registration | Completes registration of a passkey authenticator for the current user |
confirm_device | Confirms a device that a user wants to remember |
confirm_forgot_password | This public API operation accepts a confirmation code that Amazon Cognito sent to a user and accepts a new password for that user |
confirm_sign_up | This public API operation submits a code that Amazon Cognito sent to your user when they signed up in your user pool via the SignUp API operation |
create_group | Creates a new group in the specified user pool |
create_identity_provider | Adds a configuration and trust relationship between a third-party identity provider (IdP) and a user pool |
create_managed_login_branding | Creates a new set of branding settings for a user pool style and associates it with an app client |
create_resource_server | Creates a new OAuth2 |
create_user_import_job | Creates a user import job |
create_user_pool | This action might generate an SMS text message |
create_user_pool_client | Creates an app client in a user pool |
create_user_pool_domain | A user pool domain hosts managed login, an authorization server and web server for authentication in your application |
delete_group | Deletes a group from the specified user pool |
delete_identity_provider | Deletes a user pool identity provider (IdP) |
delete_managed_login_branding | Deletes a managed login branding style |
delete_resource_server | Deletes a resource server |
delete_user | Self-deletes a user profile |
delete_user_attributes | Self-deletes attributes for a user |
delete_user_pool | Deletes a user pool |
delete_user_pool_client | Deletes a user pool app client |
delete_user_pool_domain | Given a user pool ID and domain identifier, deletes a user pool domain |
delete_web_authn_credential | Deletes a registered passkey, or webauthN, authenticator for the currently signed-in user |
describe_identity_provider | Given a user pool ID and identity provider (IdP) name, returns details about the IdP |
describe_managed_login_branding | Given the ID of a managed login branding style, returns detailed information about the style |
describe_managed_login_branding_by_client | Given the ID of a user pool app client, returns detailed information about the style assigned to the app client |
describe_resource_server | Describes a resource server |
describe_risk_configuration | Given an app client or user pool ID where threat protection is configured, describes the risk configuration |
describe_user_import_job | Describes a user import job |
describe_user_pool | Given a user pool ID, returns configuration information |
describe_user_pool_client | Given an app client ID, returns configuration information |
describe_user_pool_domain | Given a user pool domain name, returns information about the domain configuration |
forget_device | Forgets the specified device |
forgot_password | Calling this API causes a message to be sent to the end user with a confirmation code that is required to change the user's password |
get_csv_header | Gets the header information for the comma-separated value (CSV) file to be used as input for the user import job |
get_device | Gets the device |
get_group | Gets a group |
get_identity_provider_by_identifier | Gets the specified IdP |
get_log_delivery_configuration | Gets the logging configuration of a user pool |
get_signing_certificate | This method takes a user pool ID, and returns the signing certificate |
get_ui_customization | Gets the user interface (UI) Customization information for a particular app client's app UI, if any such information exists for the client |
get_user | Gets the user attributes and metadata for a user |
get_user_attribute_verification_code | Generates a user attribute verification code for the specified attribute name |
get_user_auth_factors | Lists the authentication options for the currently signed-in user |
get_user_pool_mfa_config | Gets the user pool multi-factor authentication (MFA) configuration |
global_sign_out | Invalidates the identity, access, and refresh tokens that Amazon Cognito issued to a user |
initiate_auth | Initiates sign-in for a user in the Amazon Cognito user directory |
list_devices | Lists the sign-in devices that Amazon Cognito has registered to the current user |
list_groups | Lists the groups associated with a user pool |
list_identity_providers | Lists information about all IdPs for a user pool |
list_resource_servers | Lists the resource servers for a user pool |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists the tags that are assigned to an Amazon Cognito user pool |
list_user_import_jobs | Lists user import jobs for a user pool |
list_user_pool_clients | Lists the clients that have been created for the specified user pool |
list_user_pools | Lists the user pools associated with an Amazon Web Services account |
list_users | Lists users and their basic details in a user pool |
list_users_in_group | Lists the users in the specified group |
list_web_authn_credentials | Generates a list of the current user's registered passkey, or webauthN, credentials |
resend_confirmation_code | Resends the confirmation (for confirmation of registration) to a specific user in the user pool |
respond_to_auth_challenge | Some API operations in a user pool generate a challenge, like a prompt for an MFA code, for device authentication that bypasses MFA, or for a custom authentication challenge |
revoke_token | Revokes all of the access tokens generated by, and at the same time as, the specified refresh token |
set_log_delivery_configuration | Sets up or modifies the logging configuration of a user pool |
set_risk_configuration | Configures actions on detected risks |
set_ui_customization | Sets the user interface (UI) customization information for a user pool's built-in app UI |
set_user_mfa_preference | Set the user's multi-factor authentication (MFA) method preference, including which MFA factors are activated and if any are preferred |
set_user_pool_mfa_config | Sets the user pool multi-factor authentication (MFA) and passkey configuration |
set_user_settings | This action is no longer supported |
sign_up | Registers the user in the specified user pool and creates a user name, password, and user attributes |
start_user_import_job | Starts the user import |
start_web_authn_registration | Requests credential creation options from your user pool for registration of a passkey authenticator |
stop_user_import_job | Stops the user import job |
tag_resource | Assigns a set of tags to an Amazon Cognito user pool |
untag_resource | Removes the specified tags from an Amazon Cognito user pool |
update_auth_event_feedback | Provides the feedback for an authentication event, whether it was from a valid user or not |
update_device_status | Updates the device status |
update_group | Updates the specified group with the specified attributes |
update_identity_provider | Updates IdP information for a user pool |
update_managed_login_branding | Configures the branding settings for a user pool style |
update_resource_server | Updates the name and scopes of resource server |
update_user_attributes | With this operation, your users can update one or more of their attributes with their own credentials |
update_user_pool | This action might generate an SMS text message |
update_user_pool_client | Updates the specified user pool app client with the specified attributes |
update_user_pool_domain | A user pool domain hosts managed login, an authorization server and web server for authentication in your application |
verify_software_token | Use this API to register a user's entered time-based one-time password (TOTP) code and mark the user's software token MFA status as "verified" if successful |
verify_user_attribute | Verifies the specified user attributes in the user pool |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- cognitoidentityprovider()
svc$add_custom_attributes(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Adds additional user attributes to the user pool schema
Description
Adds additional user attributes to the user pool schema. Custom attributes can be mutable or immutable and have a custom:
or dev:
prefix. For more information, see Custom attributes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_add_custom_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_add_custom_attributes(UserPoolId, CustomAttributes)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to add custom attributes. |
CustomAttributes |
[required] An array of custom attribute names and other properties. Sets the following characteristics: AttributeDataType The expected data type. Can be a string, a number, a date and time, or a boolean. Mutable If true, you can grant app clients write access to the attribute value. If false, the attribute value can only be set up on sign-up or administrator creation of users. Name The attribute name. For an attribute like Required When true, users who sign up or are created must set a value for the attribute. NumberAttributeConstraints The minimum and maximum length of accepted values for a StringAttributeConstraints The minimum and maximum length of accepted values for a DeveloperOnlyAttribute This legacy option creates an attribute with a |
Adds a user to a group
Description
Adds a user to a group. A user who is in a group can present a preferred-role claim to an identity pool, and populates a cognito:groups
claim to their access and identity tokens.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_add_user_to_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_add_user_to_group(
UserPoolId,
Username,
GroupName
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that contains the group that you want to add the user to. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group that you want to add your user to. |
Confirms user sign-up as an administrator
Description
Confirms user sign-up as an administrator. Unlike confirm_sign_up
, your IAM credentials authorize user account confirmation. No confirmation code is required.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_confirm_sign_up/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_confirm_sign_up(
UserPoolId,
Username,
ClientMetadata = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to confirm a user's sign-up request. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
ClientMetadata |
A map of custom key-value pairs that you can provide as input for any custom workflows that this action triggers. If your user pool configuration includes triggers, the
AdminConfirmSignUp API action invokes the Lambda function that is
specified for the post confirmation trigger. When Amazon Cognito
invokes this function, it passes a JSON payload, which the function
receives as input. In this payload, the For more information, see Customizing user pool Workflows with Lambda Triggers in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. When you use the
|
Creates a new user in the specified user pool
Description
Creates a new user in the specified user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_create_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_create_user(
UserPoolId,
Username,
UserAttributes = NULL,
ValidationData = NULL,
TemporaryPassword = NULL,
ForceAliasCreation = NULL,
MessageAction = NULL,
DesiredDeliveryMediums = NULL,
ClientMetadata = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to create a user. |
Username |
[required] The value that you want to set as the username sign-in attribute. The following conditions apply to the username parameter.
|
UserAttributes |
An array of name-value pairs that contain user attributes and attribute
values to be set for the user to be created. You can create a user
without specifying any attributes other than For custom attributes, you must prepend the To send a message inviting the user to sign up, you must specify the user's email address or phone number. You can do this in your call to AdminCreateUser or in the Users tab of the Amazon Cognito console for managing your user pools. You must also provide an email address or phone number when you expect
the user to do passwordless sign-in with an email or SMS OTP. These
attributes must be provided when passwordless options are the only
available, or when you don't submit a In your call to
|
ValidationData |
Temporary user attributes that contribute to the outcomes of your pre sign-up Lambda trigger. This set of key-value pairs are for custom validation of information that you collect from your users but don't need to retain. Your Lambda function can analyze this additional data and act on it. Your function might perform external API operations like logging user attributes and validation data to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. Validation data might also affect the response that your function returns to Amazon Cognito, like automatically confirming the user if they sign up from within your network. For more information about the pre sign-up Lambda trigger, see Pre sign-up Lambda trigger. |
TemporaryPassword |
The user's temporary password. This password must conform to the password policy that you specified when you created the user pool. The exception to the requirement for a password is when your user pool
supports passwordless sign-in with email or SMS OTPs. To create a user
with no password, omit this parameter or submit a blank value. You can
only create a passwordless user when passwordless sign-in is available.
See the SignInPolicyType
property of
The temporary password is valid only once. To complete the Admin Create User flow, the user must enter the temporary password in the sign-in page, along with a new password to be used in all future sign-ins. If you don't specify a value, Amazon Cognito generates one for you unless you have passwordless options active for your user pool. The temporary password can only be used until the user account
expiration limit that you set for your user pool. To reset the account
after that time limit, you must call
|
ForceAliasCreation |
This parameter is used only if the If this parameter is set to If this parameter is set to |
MessageAction |
Set to |
DesiredDeliveryMediums |
Specify |
ClientMetadata |
A map of custom key-value pairs that you can provide as input for any custom workflows that this action triggers. You create custom workflows by assigning Lambda functions to user pool
triggers. When you use the AdminCreateUser API action, Amazon Cognito
invokes the function that is assigned to the pre sign-up trigger. When
Amazon Cognito invokes this function, it passes a JSON payload, which
the function receives as input. This payload contains a For more information, see Customizing user pool Workflows with Lambda Triggers in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. When you use the
|
Deletes a user profile in your user pool
Description
Deletes a user profile in your user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_delete_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_delete_user(UserPoolId, Username)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to delete the user. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
Deletes attribute values from a user
Description
Deletes attribute values from a user. This operation doesn't affect tokens for existing user sessions. The next ID token that the user receives will no longer have this attribute.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_delete_user_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_delete_user_attributes(
UserPoolId,
Username,
UserAttributeNames
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to delete user attributes. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
UserAttributeNames |
[required] An array of strings representing the user attribute names you want to delete. For custom attributes, you must prepend the |
Prevents the user from signing in with the specified external (SAML or social) identity provider (IdP)
Description
Prevents the user from signing in with the specified external (SAML or social) identity provider (IdP). If the user that you want to deactivate is a Amazon Cognito user pools native username + password user, they can't use their password to sign in. If the user to deactivate is a linked external IdP user, any link between that user and an existing user is removed. When the external user signs in again, and the user is no longer attached to the previously linked DestinationUser
, the user must create a new user account. See admin_link_provider_for_user
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_disable_provider_for_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_disable_provider_for_user(UserPoolId, User)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to delete the user's linked identities. |
User |
[required] The user profile that you want to delete a linked identity from. |
Deactivates a user profile and revokes all access tokens for the user
Description
Deactivates a user profile and revokes all access tokens for the user. A deactivated user can't sign in, but still appears in the responses to list_users
API requests.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_disable_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_disable_user(UserPoolId, Username)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to disable the user. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
Activate sign-in for a user profile that previously had sign-in access disabled
Description
Activate sign-in for a user profile that previously had sign-in access disabled.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_enable_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_enable_user(UserPoolId, Username)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to activate sign-in for the user. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
Forgets, or deletes, a remembered device from a user's profile
Description
Forgets, or deletes, a remembered device from a user's profile. After you forget the device, the user can no longer complete device authentication with that device and when applicable, must submit MFA codes again. For more information, see Working with devices.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_forget_device/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_forget_device(UserPoolId, Username, DeviceKey)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where the device owner is a user. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
DeviceKey |
[required] The key ID of the device that you want to delete. You can get device
keys in the response to an
|
Given the device key, returns details for a user' device
Description
Given the device key, returns details for a user' device. For more information, see Working with devices.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_get_device/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_get_device(DeviceKey, UserPoolId, Username)
Arguments
DeviceKey |
[required] The key of the device that you want to delete. You can get device IDs in
the response to an
|
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where the device owner is a user. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
Given the username, returns details about a user profile in a user pool
Description
Given the username, returns details about a user profile in a user pool. This operation contributes to your monthly active user (MAU) count for the purpose of billing. You can specify alias attributes in the Username
parameter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_get_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_get_user(UserPoolId, Username)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to get information about the user. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
Starts sign-in for applications with a server-side component, for example a traditional web application
Description
Starts sign-in for applications with a server-side component, for example a traditional web application. This operation specifies the authentication flow that you'd like to begin. The authentication flow that you specify must be supported in your app client configuration. For more information about authentication flows, see Authentication flows.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_initiate_auth/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_initiate_auth(
UserPoolId,
ClientId,
AuthFlow,
AuthParameters = NULL,
ClientMetadata = NULL,
AnalyticsMetadata = NULL,
ContextData = NULL,
Session = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where the user wants to sign in. |
ClientId |
[required] The ID of the app client where the user wants to sign in. |
AuthFlow |
[required] The authentication flow that you want to initiate. Each
All flows USER_AUTH The entry point for sign-in with passwords, one-time passwords, and WebAuthN authenticators. USER_SRP_AUTH Username-password authentication with the Secure Remote Password (SRP) protocol. For more information, see Use SRP password verification in custom authentication flow. REFRESH_TOKEN_AUTH and REFRESH_TOKEN Provide a valid refresh token and receive new ID and access tokens. For more information, see Using the refresh token. CUSTOM_AUTH Custom authentication with Lambda triggers. For more information, see Custom authentication challenge Lambda triggers. ADMIN_USER_PASSWORD_AUTH Username-password authentication with the password sent directly in the request. For more information, see Admin authentication flow.
|
AuthParameters |
The authentication parameters. These are inputs corresponding to the
For more information about |
ClientMetadata |
A map of custom key-value pairs that you can provide as input for certain custom workflows that this action triggers. You create custom workflows by assigning Lambda functions to user pool triggers. When you use the AdminInitiateAuth API action, Amazon Cognito invokes the Lambda functions that are specified for various triggers. The ClientMetadata value is passed as input to the functions for only the following triggers:
When Amazon Cognito invokes the functions for these triggers, it passes
a JSON payload, which the function receives as input. This payload
contains a When you use the AdminInitiateAuth API action, Amazon Cognito also invokes the functions for the following triggers, but it doesn't provide the ClientMetadata value as input:
For more information, see Customizing user pool Workflows with Lambda Triggers in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. When you use the
|
AnalyticsMetadata |
The analytics metadata for collecting Amazon Pinpoint metrics. |
ContextData |
Contextual data about your user session, such as the device fingerprint, IP address, or location. Amazon Cognito advanced security evaluates the risk of an authentication event based on the context that your app generates and passes to Amazon Cognito when it makes API requests. For more information, see Collecting data for threat protection in applications. |
Session |
The optional session ID from a
|
Links an existing user account in a user pool (DestinationUser) to an identity from an external IdP (SourceUser) based on a specified attribute name and value from the external IdP
Description
Links an existing user account in a user pool (DestinationUser
) to an identity from an external IdP (SourceUser
) based on a specified attribute name and value from the external IdP. This allows you to create a link from the existing user account to an external federated user identity that has not yet been used to sign in. You can then use the federated user identity to sign in as the existing user account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_link_provider_for_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_link_provider_for_user(
UserPoolId,
DestinationUser,
SourceUser
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to link a federated identity. |
DestinationUser |
[required] The existing user in the user pool that you want to assign to the external IdP user account. This user can be a local (Username + Password) Amazon Cognito user pools user or a federated user (for example, a SAML or Facebook user). If the user doesn't exist, Amazon Cognito generates an exception. Amazon Cognito returns this user when the new user (with the linked IdP attribute) signs in. For a native username + password user, the The The All attributes in the DestinationUser profile must be mutable. If you have assigned the user any immutable custom attributes, the operation won't succeed. |
SourceUser |
[required] An external IdP account for a user who doesn't exist yet in the user pool. This user must be a federated user (for example, a SAML or Facebook user), not another native user. If the For OIDC, the The following additional considerations apply to
|
Lists a user's registered devices
Description
Lists a user's registered devices. Remembered devices are used in authentication services where you offer a "Remember me" option for users who you want to permit to sign in without MFA from a trusted device. Users can bypass MFA while your application performs device SRP authentication on the back end. For more information, see Working with devices.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_list_devices/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_list_devices(
UserPoolId,
Username,
Limit = NULL,
PaginationToken = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where the device owner is a user. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
Limit |
The maximum number of devices that you want Amazon Cognito to return in the response. |
PaginationToken |
This API operation returns a limited number of results. The pagination token is an identifier that you can present in an additional API request with the same parameters. When you include the pagination token, Amazon Cognito returns the next set of items after the current list. Subsequent requests return a new pagination token. By use of this token, you can paginate through the full list of items. |
Lists the groups that a user belongs to
Description
Lists the groups that a user belongs to. User pool groups are identifiers that you can reference from the contents of ID and access tokens, and set preferred IAM roles for identity-pool authentication. For more information, see Adding groups to a user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_list_groups_for_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_list_groups_for_user(
Username,
UserPoolId,
Limit = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to view a user's groups. |
Limit |
The maximum number of groups that you want Amazon Cognito to return in the response. |
NextToken |
This API operation returns a limited number of results. The pagination token is an identifier that you can present in an additional API request with the same parameters. When you include the pagination token, Amazon Cognito returns the next set of items after the current list. Subsequent requests return a new pagination token. By use of this token, you can paginate through the full list of items. |
Requests a history of user activity and any risks detected as part of Amazon Cognito threat protection
Description
Requests a history of user activity and any risks detected as part of Amazon Cognito threat protection. For more information, see Viewing user event history.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_list_user_auth_events/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_list_user_auth_events(
UserPoolId,
Username,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The Id of the user pool that contains the user profile with the logged events. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of authentication events to return. Returns 60 events
if you set |
NextToken |
This API operation returns a limited number of results. The pagination token is an identifier that you can present in an additional API request with the same parameters. When you include the pagination token, Amazon Cognito returns the next set of items after the current list. Subsequent requests return a new pagination token. By use of this token, you can paginate through the full list of items. |
Given a username and a group name
Description
Given a username and a group name. removes them from the group. User pool groups are identifiers that you can reference from the contents of ID and access tokens, and set preferred IAM roles for identity-pool authentication. For more information, see Adding groups to a user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_remove_user_from_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_remove_user_from_group(
UserPoolId,
Username,
GroupName
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that contains the group and the user that you want to remove. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group that you want to remove the user from, for example
|
Resets the specified user's password in a user pool
Description
Resets the specified user's password in a user pool. This operation doesn't change the user's password, but sends a password-reset code. This operation is the administrative authentication API equivalent to forgot_password
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_reset_user_password/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_reset_user_password(
UserPoolId,
Username,
ClientMetadata = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to reset the user's password. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
ClientMetadata |
A map of custom key-value pairs that you can provide as input for any custom workflows that this action triggers. You create custom workflows by assigning Lambda functions to user pool
triggers. The
For more information, see Customizing user pool Workflows with Lambda Triggers in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. When you use the
|
Some API operations in a user pool generate a challenge, like a prompt for an MFA code, for device authentication that bypasses MFA, or for a custom authentication challenge
Description
Some API operations in a user pool generate a challenge, like a prompt for an MFA code, for device authentication that bypasses MFA, or for a custom authentication challenge. An admin_respond_to_auth_challenge
API request provides the answer to that challenge, like a code or a secure remote password (SRP). The parameters of a response to an authentication challenge vary with the type of challenge.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_respond_to_auth_challenge/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_respond_to_auth_challenge(
UserPoolId,
ClientId,
ChallengeName,
ChallengeResponses = NULL,
Session = NULL,
AnalyticsMetadata = NULL,
ContextData = NULL,
ClientMetadata = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to respond to an authentication challenge. |
ClientId |
[required] The ID of the app client where you initiated sign-in. |
ChallengeName |
[required] The name of the challenge that you are responding to. You can find more
information about values for |
ChallengeResponses |
The responses to the challenge that you received in the previous request. Each challenge has its own required response parameters. The following examples are partial JSON request bodies that highlight challenge-response parameters. You must provide a SECRET_HASH parameter in all challenge responses to
an app client that has a client secret. Include a SELECT_CHALLENGE
Available challenges are Complete authentication in the
For
SMS_OTP
EMAIL_OTP
SMS_MFA
PASSWORD_VERIFIER This challenge response is part of the SRP flow. Amazon Cognito requires
that your application respond to this challenge within a few seconds.
When the response time exceeds this period, your user pool returns a
Add CUSTOM_CHALLENGE
Add NEW_PASSWORD_REQUIRED
To set any required attributes that
In a SOFTWARE_TOKEN_MFA
DEVICE_SRP_AUTH
DEVICE_PASSWORD_VERIFIER
MFA_SETUP
SELECT_MFA_TYPE
For more information about |
Session |
The session identifier that maintains the state of authentication
requests and challenge responses. If an
|
AnalyticsMetadata |
The analytics metadata for collecting Amazon Pinpoint metrics for
|
ContextData |
Contextual data about your user session, such as the device fingerprint, IP address, or location. Amazon Cognito advanced security evaluates the risk of an authentication event based on the context that your app generates and passes to Amazon Cognito when it makes API requests. For more information, see Collecting data for threat protection in applications. |
ClientMetadata |
A map of custom key-value pairs that you can provide as input for any custom workflows that this action triggers. You create custom workflows by assigning Lambda functions to user pool triggers. When you use the AdminRespondToAuthChallenge API action, Amazon Cognito invokes any functions that you have assigned to the following triggers:
When Amazon Cognito invokes any of these functions, it passes a JSON
payload, which the function receives as input. This payload contains a
For more information, see Customizing user pool Workflows with Lambda Triggers in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. When you use the
|
Sets the user's multi-factor authentication (MFA) preference, including which MFA options are activated, and if any are preferred
Description
Sets the user's multi-factor authentication (MFA) preference, including which MFA options are activated, and if any are preferred. Only one factor can be set as preferred. The preferred MFA factor will be used to authenticate a user if multiple factors are activated. If multiple options are activated and no preference is set, a challenge to choose an MFA option will be returned during sign-in.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_set_user_mfa_preference/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_set_user_mfa_preference(
SMSMfaSettings = NULL,
SoftwareTokenMfaSettings = NULL,
EmailMfaSettings = NULL,
Username,
UserPoolId
)
Arguments
SMSMfaSettings |
User preferences for SMS message MFA. Activates or deactivates SMS MFA and sets it as the preferred MFA method when multiple methods are available. |
SoftwareTokenMfaSettings |
User preferences for time-based one-time password (TOTP) MFA. Activates or deactivates TOTP MFA and sets it as the preferred MFA method when multiple methods are available. |
EmailMfaSettings |
User preferences for email message MFA. Activates or deactivates email MFA and sets it as the preferred MFA method when multiple methods are available. To activate this setting, advanced security features must be active in your user pool. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to set a user's MFA preferences. |
Sets the specified user's password in a user pool
Description
Sets the specified user's password in a user pool. This operation administratively sets a temporary or permanent password for a user. With this operation, you can bypass self-service password changes and permit immediate sign-in with the password that you set. To do this, set Permanent
to true
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_set_user_password/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_set_user_password(
UserPoolId,
Username,
Password,
Permanent = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to set the user's password. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
Password |
[required] The new temporary or permanent password that you want to set for the user. You can't remove the password for a user who already has a password so that they can only sign in with passwordless methods. In this scenario, you must create a new user without a password. |
Permanent |
Set to |
This action is no longer supported
Description
This action is no longer supported. You can use it to configure only SMS MFA. You can't use it to configure time-based one-time password (TOTP) software token MFA. To configure either type of MFA, use admin_set_user_mfa_preference
instead.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_set_user_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_set_user_settings(
UserPoolId,
Username,
MFAOptions
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that contains the user whose options you're setting. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
MFAOptions |
[required] You can use this parameter only to set an SMS configuration that uses SMS for delivery. |
Provides feedback for an authentication event indicating if it was from a valid user
Description
Provides feedback for an authentication event indicating if it was from a valid user. This feedback is used for improving the risk evaluation decision for the user pool as part of Amazon Cognito threat protection. To train the threat-protection model to recognize trusted and untrusted sign-in characteristics, configure threat protection in audit-only mode and provide a mechanism for users or administrators to submit feedback. Your feedback can tell Amazon Cognito that a risk rating was assigned at a level you don't agree with.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_update_auth_event_feedback/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_update_auth_event_feedback(
UserPoolId,
Username,
EventId,
FeedbackValue
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to submit authentication-event feedback. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
EventId |
[required] The authentication event ID. To query authentication events for a user,
see
|
FeedbackValue |
[required] The authentication event feedback value. When you provide a
|
Updates the status of a user's device so that it is marked as remembered or not remembered for the purpose of device authentication
Description
Updates the status of a user's device so that it is marked as remembered or not remembered for the purpose of device authentication. Device authentication is a "remember me" mechanism that silently completes sign-in from trusted devices with a device key instead of a user-provided MFA code. This operation changes the status of a device without deleting it, so you can enable it again later. For more information about device authentication, see Working with devices.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_update_device_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_update_device_status(
UserPoolId,
Username,
DeviceKey,
DeviceRememberedStatus = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to change a user's device status. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
DeviceKey |
[required] The unique identifier, or device key, of the device that you want to update the status for. |
DeviceRememberedStatus |
To enable device authentication with the specified device, set to
|
This action might generate an SMS text message
Description
This action might generate an SMS text message. Starting June 1, 2021, US telecom carriers require you to register an origination phone number before you can send SMS messages to US phone numbers. If you use SMS text messages in Amazon Cognito, you must register a phone number with Amazon Pinpoint. Amazon Cognito uses the registered number automatically. Otherwise, Amazon Cognito users who must receive SMS messages might not be able to sign up, activate their accounts, or sign in.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_update_user_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_update_user_attributes(
UserPoolId,
Username,
UserAttributes,
ClientMetadata = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to update user attributes. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
UserAttributes |
[required] An array of name-value pairs representing user attributes. For custom attributes, you must prepend the If your user pool requires verification before Amazon Cognito updates an attribute value that you specify in this request, Amazon Cognito doesn’t immediately update the value of that attribute. After your user receives and responds to a verification message to verify the new value, Amazon Cognito updates the attribute value. Your user can sign in and receive messages with the original attribute value until they verify the new value. To skip the verification message and update the value of an attribute
that requires verification in the same API request, include the
|
ClientMetadata |
A map of custom key-value pairs that you can provide as input for any custom workflows that this action triggers. You create custom workflows by assigning Lambda functions to user pool
triggers. When you use the AdminUpdateUserAttributes API action, Amazon
Cognito invokes the function that is assigned to the custom message
trigger. When Amazon Cognito invokes this function, it passes a JSON
payload, which the function receives as input. This payload contains a
For more information, see Customizing user pool Workflows with Lambda Triggers in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. When you use the
|
Invalidates the identity, access, and refresh tokens that Amazon Cognito issued to a user
Description
Invalidates the identity, access, and refresh tokens that Amazon Cognito issued to a user. Call this operation with your administrative credentials when your user signs out of your app. This results in the following behavior.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_admin_user_global_sign_out/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_admin_user_global_sign_out(UserPoolId, Username)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to sign out a user. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
Begins setup of time-based one-time password (TOTP) multi-factor authentication (MFA) for a user, with a unique private key that Amazon Cognito generates and returns in the API response
Description
Begins setup of time-based one-time password (TOTP) multi-factor authentication (MFA) for a user, with a unique private key that Amazon Cognito generates and returns in the API response. You can authorize an associate_software_token
request with either the user's access token, or a session string from a challenge response that you received from Amazon Cognito.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_associate_software_token/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_associate_software_token(
AccessToken = NULL,
Session = NULL
)
Arguments
AccessToken |
A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose software token you want to generate. You can provide either an access token or a session ID in the request. |
Session |
The session identifier that maintains the state of authentication
requests and challenge responses. In
|
Changes the password for a specified user in a user pool
Description
Changes the password for a specified user in a user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_change_password/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_change_password(
PreviousPassword = NULL,
ProposedPassword,
AccessToken
)
Arguments
PreviousPassword |
The user's previous password. Required if the user has a password. If the user has no password and only signs in with passwordless authentication options, you can omit this parameter. |
ProposedPassword |
[required] A new password that you prompted the user to enter in your application. |
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose password you want to change. |
Completes registration of a passkey authenticator for the current user
Description
Completes registration of a passkey authenticator for the current user. Your application provides data from a successful registration request with the data from the output of a StartWebAuthnRegistration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_complete_web_authn_registration/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_complete_web_authn_registration(
AccessToken,
Credential
)
Arguments
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose passkey registration you want to complete. |
Credential |
[required] A RegistrationResponseJSON public-key credential response from the user's passkey provider. |
Confirms a device that a user wants to remember
Description
Confirms a device that a user wants to remember. A remembered device is a "Remember me on this device" option for user pools that perform authentication with the device key of a trusted device in the back end, instead of a user-provided MFA code. For more information about device authentication, see Working with user devices in your user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_confirm_device/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_confirm_device(
AccessToken,
DeviceKey,
DeviceSecretVerifierConfig = NULL,
DeviceName = NULL
)
Arguments
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose device you want to confirm. |
DeviceKey |
[required] The unique identifier, or device key, of the device that you want to update the status for. |
DeviceSecretVerifierConfig |
The configuration of the device secret verifier. |
DeviceName |
A friendly name for the device, for example |
This public API operation accepts a confirmation code that Amazon Cognito sent to a user and accepts a new password for that user
Description
This public API operation accepts a confirmation code that Amazon Cognito sent to a user and accepts a new password for that user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_confirm_forgot_password/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_confirm_forgot_password(
ClientId,
SecretHash = NULL,
Username,
ConfirmationCode,
Password,
AnalyticsMetadata = NULL,
UserContextData = NULL,
ClientMetadata = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientId |
[required] The ID of the app client where the user wants to reset their password. This parameter is an identifier of the client application that users are resetting their password from, but this operation resets users' passwords for all app clients in the user pool. |
SecretHash |
A keyed-hash message authentication code (HMAC) calculated using the
secret key of a user pool client and username plus the client ID in the
message. For more information about |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
ConfirmationCode |
[required] The confirmation code that your user pool sent in response to an
|
Password |
[required] The new password that your user wants to set. |
AnalyticsMetadata |
The Amazon Pinpoint analytics metadata for collecting metrics for
|
UserContextData |
Contextual data about your user session, such as the device fingerprint, IP address, or location. Amazon Cognito advanced security evaluates the risk of an authentication event based on the context that your app generates and passes to Amazon Cognito when it makes API requests. For more information, see Collecting data for threat protection in applications. |
ClientMetadata |
A map of custom key-value pairs that you can provide as input for any custom workflows that this action triggers. You create custom workflows by assigning Lambda functions to user pool
triggers. When you use the ConfirmForgotPassword API action, Amazon
Cognito invokes the function that is assigned to the post confirmation
trigger. When Amazon Cognito invokes this function, it passes a JSON
payload, which the function receives as input. This payload contains a
For more information, see Customizing user pool Workflows with Lambda Triggers in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. When you use the
|
This public API operation submits a code that Amazon Cognito sent to your user when they signed up in your user pool via the SignUp API operation
Description
This public API operation submits a code that Amazon Cognito sent to your user when they signed up in your user pool via the sign_up
API operation. After your user enters their code, they confirm ownership of the email address or phone number that they provided, and their user account becomes active. Depending on your user pool configuration, your users will receive their confirmation code in an email or SMS message.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_confirm_sign_up/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_confirm_sign_up(
ClientId,
SecretHash = NULL,
Username,
ConfirmationCode,
ForceAliasCreation = NULL,
AnalyticsMetadata = NULL,
UserContextData = NULL,
ClientMetadata = NULL,
Session = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientId |
[required] The ID of the app client associated with the user pool. |
SecretHash |
A keyed-hash message authentication code (HMAC) calculated using the
secret key of a user pool client and username plus the client ID in the
message. For more information about |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
ConfirmationCode |
[required] The confirmation code that your user pool sent in response to the
|
ForceAliasCreation |
When Say, for example, that an existing user has an If For more information about sign-in aliases, see Customizing sign-in attributes. |
AnalyticsMetadata |
The Amazon Pinpoint analytics metadata for collecting metrics for
|
UserContextData |
Contextual data about your user session, such as the device fingerprint, IP address, or location. Amazon Cognito advanced security evaluates the risk of an authentication event based on the context that your app generates and passes to Amazon Cognito when it makes API requests. For more information, see Collecting data for threat protection in applications. |
ClientMetadata |
A map of custom key-value pairs that you can provide as input for any custom workflows that this action triggers. You create custom workflows by assigning Lambda functions to user pool
triggers. When you use the ConfirmSignUp API action, Amazon Cognito
invokes the function that is assigned to the post confirmation
trigger. When Amazon Cognito invokes this function, it passes a JSON
payload, which the function receives as input. This payload contains a
For more information, see Customizing user pool Workflows with Lambda Triggers in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. When you use the
|
Session |
The optional session ID from a
|
Creates a new group in the specified user pool
Description
Creates a new group in the specified user pool. For more information about user pool groups see Adding groups to a user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_create_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_create_group(
GroupName,
UserPoolId,
Description = NULL,
RoleArn = NULL,
Precedence = NULL
)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] A name for the group. This name must be unique in your user pool. |
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to create a user group. |
Description |
A description of the group that you're creating. |
RoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that you want to
associate with the group. A group role primarily declares a preferred
role for the credentials that you get from an identity pool. Amazon
Cognito ID tokens have a |
Precedence |
A non-negative integer value that specifies the precedence of this group
relative to the other groups that a user can belong to in the user pool.
Zero is the highest precedence value. Groups with lower Two groups can have the same The default |
Adds a configuration and trust relationship between a third-party identity provider (IdP) and a user pool
Description
Adds a configuration and trust relationship between a third-party identity provider (IdP) and a user pool. Amazon Cognito accepts sign-in with third-party identity providers through managed login and OIDC relying-party libraries. For more information, see Third-party IdP sign-in.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_create_identity_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_create_identity_provider(
UserPoolId,
ProviderName,
ProviderType,
ProviderDetails,
AttributeMapping = NULL,
IdpIdentifiers = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The Id of the user pool where you want to create an IdP. |
ProviderName |
[required] The name that you want to assign to the IdP. You can pass the identity
provider name in the |
ProviderType |
[required] The type of IdP that you want to add. Amazon Cognito supports OIDC, SAML 2.0, Login With Amazon, Sign In With Apple, Google, and Facebook IdPs. |
ProviderDetails |
[required] The scopes, URLs, and identifiers for your external identity provider.
The following examples describe the provider detail keys for each IdP
type. These values and their schema are subject to change. Social IdP
OpenID Connect (OIDC) Amazon Cognito accepts the following elements when it can't discover
endpoint URLs from Create or update request:
Describe response:
SAML Create or update request with Metadata URL:
Create or update request with Metadata file:
The value of Describe response:
LoginWithAmazon Create or update request:
Describe response:
Create or update request:
Describe response:
SignInWithApple Create or update request:
Describe response:
Create or update request:
Describe response:
|
AttributeMapping |
A mapping of IdP attributes to standard and custom user pool attributes. Specify a user pool attribute as the key of the key-value pair, and the IdP attribute claim name as the value. |
IdpIdentifiers |
An array of IdP identifiers, for example
|
Creates a new set of branding settings for a user pool style and associates it with an app client
Description
Creates a new set of branding settings for a user pool style and associates it with an app client. This operation is the programmatic option for the creation of a new style in the branding designer.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_create_managed_login_branding/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_create_managed_login_branding(
UserPoolId,
ClientId,
UseCognitoProvidedValues = NULL,
Settings = NULL,
Assets = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to create a new branding style. |
ClientId |
[required] The app client that you want to create the branding style for. Each
style is permanently linked to an app client. To change the style for an
app client, delete the existing style with
|
UseCognitoProvidedValues |
When true, applies the default branding style options. These default options are managed by Amazon Cognito. You can modify them later in the branding designer. When you specify |
Settings |
A JSON file, encoded as a |
Assets |
An array of image files that you want to apply to roles like backgrounds, logos, and icons. Each object must also indicate whether it is for dark mode, light mode, or browser-adaptive mode. |
Creates a new OAuth2
Description
Creates a new OAuth2.0 resource server and defines custom scopes within it. Resource servers are associated with custom scopes and machine-to-machine (M2M) authorization. For more information, see Access control with resource servers.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_create_resource_server/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_create_resource_server(
UserPoolId,
Identifier,
Name,
Scopes = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to create a resource server. |
Identifier |
[required] A unique resource server identifier for the resource server. The
identifier can be an API friendly name like Amazon Cognito represents scopes in the access token in the format
|
Name |
[required] A friendly name for the resource server. |
Scopes |
A list of custom scopes. Each scope is a key-value map with the keys
|
Creates a user import job
Description
Creates a user import job. You can import users into user pools from a comma-separated values (CSV) file without adding Amazon Cognito MAU costs to your Amazon Web Services bill. To generate a template for your import, see get_csv_header
. To learn more about CSV import, see Importing users from a CSV file.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_create_user_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_create_user_import_job(
JobName,
UserPoolId,
CloudWatchLogsRoleArn
)
Arguments
JobName |
[required] A friendly name for the user import job. |
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that you want to import users into. |
CloudWatchLogsRoleArn |
[required] You must specify an IAM role that has permission to log import-job results to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. This parameter is the ARN of that role. |
This action might generate an SMS text message
Description
This action might generate an SMS text message. Starting June 1, 2021, US telecom carriers require you to register an origination phone number before you can send SMS messages to US phone numbers. If you use SMS text messages in Amazon Cognito, you must register a phone number with Amazon Pinpoint. Amazon Cognito uses the registered number automatically. Otherwise, Amazon Cognito users who must receive SMS messages might not be able to sign up, activate their accounts, or sign in.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_create_user_pool/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_create_user_pool(
PoolName,
Policies = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
LambdaConfig = NULL,
AutoVerifiedAttributes = NULL,
AliasAttributes = NULL,
UsernameAttributes = NULL,
SmsVerificationMessage = NULL,
EmailVerificationMessage = NULL,
EmailVerificationSubject = NULL,
VerificationMessageTemplate = NULL,
SmsAuthenticationMessage = NULL,
MfaConfiguration = NULL,
UserAttributeUpdateSettings = NULL,
DeviceConfiguration = NULL,
EmailConfiguration = NULL,
SmsConfiguration = NULL,
UserPoolTags = NULL,
AdminCreateUserConfig = NULL,
Schema = NULL,
UserPoolAddOns = NULL,
UsernameConfiguration = NULL,
AccountRecoverySetting = NULL,
UserPoolTier = NULL
)
Arguments
PoolName |
[required] A friendlhy name for your user pool. |
Policies |
The password policy and sign-in policy in the user pool. The password policy sets options like password complexity requirements and password history. The sign-in policy sets the options available to applications in choice-based authentication. |
DeletionProtection |
When active, When you try to delete a protected user pool in a
|
LambdaConfig |
A collection of user pool Lambda triggers. Amazon Cognito invokes triggers at several possible stages of authentication operations. Triggers can modify the outcome of the operations that invoked them. |
AutoVerifiedAttributes |
The attributes that you want your user pool to automatically verify. Possible values: email, phone_number. For more information see Verifying contact information at sign-up. |
AliasAttributes |
Attributes supported as an alias for this user pool. Possible values: phone_number, email, or preferred_username. For more information about alias attributes, see Customizing sign-in attributes. |
UsernameAttributes |
Specifies whether a user can use an email address or phone number as a username when they sign up. For more information, see Customizing sign-in attributes. |
SmsVerificationMessage |
This parameter is no longer used. See VerificationMessageTemplateType. |
EmailVerificationMessage |
This parameter is no longer used. See VerificationMessageTemplateType. |
EmailVerificationSubject |
This parameter is no longer used. See VerificationMessageTemplateType. |
VerificationMessageTemplate |
The template for the verification message that your user pool delivers to users who set an email address or phone number attribute. Set the email message type that corresponds to your |
SmsAuthenticationMessage |
A string representing the SMS authentication message. |
MfaConfiguration |
Sets multi-factor authentication (MFA) to be on, off, or optional. When
|
UserAttributeUpdateSettings |
The settings for updates to user attributes. These settings include the
property |
DeviceConfiguration |
The device-remembering configuration for a user pool. Device remembering or device tracking is a "Remember me on this device" option for user pools that perform authentication with the device key of a trusted device in the back end, instead of a user-provided MFA code. For more information about device authentication, see Working with user devices in your user pool. A null value indicates that you have deactivated device remembering in your user pool. When you provide a value for any |
EmailConfiguration |
The email configuration of your user pool. The email configuration type sets your preferred sending method, Amazon Web Services Region, and sender for messages from your user pool. |
SmsConfiguration |
The SMS configuration with the settings that your Amazon Cognito user pool must use to send an SMS message from your Amazon Web Services account through Amazon Simple Notification Service. To send SMS messages with Amazon SNS in the Amazon Web Services Region that you want, the Amazon Cognito user pool uses an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role in your Amazon Web Services account. For more information see SMS message settings. |
UserPoolTags |
The tag keys and values to assign to the user pool. A tag is a label that you can use to categorize and manage user pools in different ways, such as by purpose, owner, environment, or other criteria. |
AdminCreateUserConfig |
The configuration for
|
Schema |
An array of attributes for the new user pool. You can add custom attributes and modify the properties of default attributes. The specifications in this parameter set the required attributes in your user pool. For more information, see Working with user attributes. |
UserPoolAddOns |
User pool add-ons. Contains settings for activation of advanced security
features. To log user security information but take no action, set to
For more information, see Adding advanced security to a user pool. |
UsernameConfiguration |
Sets the case sensitivity option for sign-in usernames. When
When This configuration is immutable after you set it. |
AccountRecoverySetting |
The available verified method a user can use to recover their password
when they call
|
UserPoolTier |
The user pool feature plan,
or tier. This parameter determines the eligibility of the user pool for
features like managed login, access-token customization, and threat
protection. Defaults to |
Creates an app client in a user pool
Description
Creates an app client in a user pool. This operation sets basic and advanced configuration options. You can create an app client in the Amazon Cognito console to your preferences and use the output of describe_user_pool_client
to generate requests from that baseline.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_create_user_pool_client/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_create_user_pool_client(
UserPoolId,
ClientName,
GenerateSecret = NULL,
RefreshTokenValidity = NULL,
AccessTokenValidity = NULL,
IdTokenValidity = NULL,
TokenValidityUnits = NULL,
ReadAttributes = NULL,
WriteAttributes = NULL,
ExplicitAuthFlows = NULL,
SupportedIdentityProviders = NULL,
CallbackURLs = NULL,
LogoutURLs = NULL,
DefaultRedirectURI = NULL,
AllowedOAuthFlows = NULL,
AllowedOAuthScopes = NULL,
AllowedOAuthFlowsUserPoolClient = NULL,
AnalyticsConfiguration = NULL,
PreventUserExistenceErrors = NULL,
EnableTokenRevocation = NULL,
EnablePropagateAdditionalUserContextData = NULL,
AuthSessionValidity = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to create an app client. |
ClientName |
[required] A friendly name for the app client that you want to create. |
GenerateSecret |
When |
RefreshTokenValidity |
The refresh token time limit. After this limit expires, your user can't
use their refresh token. To specify the time unit for
For example, when you set The default time unit for If you don't specify otherwise in the configuration of your app client, your refresh tokens are valid for 30 days. |
AccessTokenValidity |
The access token time limit. After this limit expires, your user can't
use their access token. To specify the time unit for
For example, when you set The default time unit for If you don't specify otherwise in the configuration of your app client, your access tokens are valid for one hour. |
IdTokenValidity |
The ID token time limit. After this limit expires, your user can't use
their ID token. To specify the time unit for For example, when you set The default time unit for If you don't specify otherwise in the configuration of your app client, your ID tokens are valid for one hour. |
TokenValidityUnits |
The units that validity times are represented in. The default unit for refresh tokens is days, and the default for ID and access tokens are hours. |
ReadAttributes |
The list of user attributes that you want your app client to have read
access to. After your user authenticates in your app, their access token
authorizes them to read their own attribute value for any attribute in
this list. An example of this kind of activity is when your user selects
a link to view their profile information. Your app makes a
When you don't specify the |
WriteAttributes |
The list of user attributes that you want your app client to have write
access to. After your user authenticates in your app, their access token
authorizes them to set or modify their own attribute value for any
attribute in this list. An example of this kind of activity is when you
present your user with a form to update their profile information and
they change their last name. Your app then makes an
When you don't specify the If your app client allows users to sign in through an IdP, this array must include all attributes that you have mapped to IdP attributes. Amazon Cognito updates mapped attributes when users sign in to your application through an IdP. If your app client does not have write access to a mapped attribute, Amazon Cognito throws an error when it tries to update the attribute. For more information, see Specifying IdP Attribute Mappings for Your user pool. |
ExplicitAuthFlows |
The authentication flows that you want your user pool client to support. For each app client in your user pool, you can sign in your users with any combination of one or more flows, including with a user name and Secure Remote Password (SRP), a user name and password, or a custom authentication process that you define with Lambda functions. If you don't specify a value for Valid values include:
In some environments, you will see the values |
SupportedIdentityProviders |
A list of provider names for the identity providers (IdPs) that are
supported on this client. The following are supported: This setting applies to providers that you can access with managed login.
The removal of |
CallbackURLs |
A list of allowed redirect (callback) URLs for the IdPs. A redirect URI must:
See OAuth 2.0 - Redirection Endpoint. Amazon Cognito requires HTTPS over HTTP except for http://localhost for testing purposes only. App callback URLs such as myapp://example are also supported. |
LogoutURLs |
A list of allowed logout URLs for managed login authentication. For more information, see Logout endpoint. |
DefaultRedirectURI |
The default redirect URI. In app clients with one assigned IdP, replaces
|
AllowedOAuthFlows |
The OAuth grant types that you want your app client to generate. To
create an app client that generates client credentials grants, you must
add code Use a code grant flow, which provides an authorization code as the
response. This code can be exchanged for access tokens with the
implicit Issue the access token (and, optionally, ID token, based on scopes) directly to your user. client_credentials Issue the access token from the |
AllowedOAuthScopes |
The OAuth 2.0 scopes that you want to permit your app client to
authorize. Scopes govern access control to user pool self-service API
operations, user data from the |
AllowedOAuthFlowsUserPoolClient |
Set to
To use OAuth 2.0 features, configure one of these features in the Amazon
Cognito console or set |
AnalyticsConfiguration |
The user pool analytics configuration for collecting metrics and sending them to your Amazon Pinpoint campaign. In Amazon Web Services Regions where Amazon Pinpoint isn't available, user pools might not have access to analytics or might be configurable with campaigns in the US East (N. Virginia) Region. For more information, see Using Amazon Pinpoint analytics. |
PreventUserExistenceErrors |
Errors and responses that you want Amazon Cognito APIs to return during
authentication, account confirmation, and password recovery when the
user doesn't exist in the user pool. When set to Valid values include:
Defaults to |
EnableTokenRevocation |
Activates or deactivates token revocation. For more information about
revoking tokens, see
If you don't include this parameter, token revocation is automatically activated for the new user pool client. |
EnablePropagateAdditionalUserContextData |
Activates the propagation of additional user context data. For more
information about propagation of user context data, see Adding advanced security to a user pool.
If you don’t include this parameter, you can't send device fingerprint
information, including source IP address, to Amazon Cognito advanced
security. You can only activate
|
AuthSessionValidity |
Amazon Cognito creates a session token for each API request in an
authentication flow. |
A user pool domain hosts managed login, an authorization server and web server for authentication in your application
Description
A user pool domain hosts managed login, an authorization server and web server for authentication in your application. This operation creates a new user pool prefix or custom domain and sets the managed login branding version. Set the branding version to 1
for hosted UI (classic) or 2
for managed login. When you choose a custom domain, you must provide an SSL certificate in the US East (N. Virginia) Amazon Web Services Region in your request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_create_user_pool_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_create_user_pool_domain(
Domain,
UserPoolId,
ManagedLoginVersion = NULL,
CustomDomainConfig = NULL
)
Arguments
Domain |
[required] The domain string. For custom domains, this is the fully-qualified
domain name, such as |
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to add a domain. |
ManagedLoginVersion |
The version of managed login branding that you want to apply to your
domain. A value of Managed login requires that your user pool be configured for any
feature plan
other than |
CustomDomainConfig |
The configuration for a custom domain. Configures your domain with an
Certificate Manager certificate in the Provide this parameter only if you want to use a custom domain for your user pool. Otherwise, you can exclude this parameter and use a prefix domain instead. For more information about the hosted domain and custom domains, see Configuring a User Pool Domain. |
Deletes a group from the specified user pool
Description
Deletes a group from the specified user pool. When you delete a group, that group no longer contributes to users' cognito:preferred_group
or cognito:groups
claims, and no longer influence access-control decision that are based on group membership. For more information about user pool groups, see Adding groups to a user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_delete_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_delete_group(GroupName, UserPoolId)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group that you want to delete. |
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to delete the group. |
Deletes a user pool identity provider (IdP)
Description
Deletes a user pool identity provider (IdP). After you delete an IdP, users can no longer sign in to your user pool through that IdP. For more information about user pool IdPs, see Third-party IdP sign-in.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_delete_identity_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_delete_identity_provider(UserPoolId, ProviderName)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to delete the identity provider. |
ProviderName |
[required] The name of the IdP that you want to delete. |
Deletes a managed login branding style
Description
Deletes a managed login branding style. When you delete a style, you delete the branding association for an app client. When an app client doesn't have a style assigned, your managed login pages for that app client are nonfunctional until you create a new style or switch the domain branding version.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_delete_managed_login_branding/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_delete_managed_login_branding(
ManagedLoginBrandingId,
UserPoolId
)
Arguments
ManagedLoginBrandingId |
[required] The ID of the managed login branding style that you want to delete. |
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that contains the managed login branding style that you want to delete. |
Deletes a resource server
Description
Deletes a resource server. After you delete a resource server, users can no longer generate access tokens with scopes that are associate with that resource server.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_delete_resource_server/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_delete_resource_server(UserPoolId, Identifier)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to delete the resource server. |
Identifier |
[required] The identifier of the resource server that you want to delete. |
Self-deletes a user profile
Description
Self-deletes a user profile. A deleted user profile can no longer be used to sign in and can't be restored.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_delete_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_delete_user(AccessToken)
Arguments
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose user profile you want to delete. |
Self-deletes attributes for a user
Description
Self-deletes attributes for a user. For example, your application can submit a request to this operation when a user wants to remove their birthdate
attribute value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_delete_user_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_delete_user_attributes(UserAttributeNames, AccessToken)
Arguments
UserAttributeNames |
[required] An array of strings representing the user attribute names you want to delete. For custom attributes, you must prepend the |
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose attributes you want to delete. |
Deletes a user pool
Description
Deletes a user pool. After you delete a user pool, users can no longer sign in to any associated applications.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_delete_user_pool/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_delete_user_pool(UserPoolId)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that you want to delete. |
Deletes a user pool app client
Description
Deletes a user pool app client. After you delete an app client, users can no longer sign in to the associated application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_delete_user_pool_client/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_delete_user_pool_client(UserPoolId, ClientId)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to delete the client. |
ClientId |
[required] The ID of the user pool app client that you want to delete. |
Given a user pool ID and domain identifier, deletes a user pool domain
Description
Given a user pool ID and domain identifier, deletes a user pool domain. After you delete a user pool domain, your managed login pages and authorization server are no longer available.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_delete_user_pool_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_delete_user_pool_domain(Domain, UserPoolId)
Arguments
Domain |
[required] The domain that you want to delete. For custom domains, this is the
fully-qualified domain name, such as |
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to delete the domain. |
Deletes a registered passkey, or webauthN, authenticator for the currently signed-in user
Description
Deletes a registered passkey, or webauthN, authenticator for the currently signed-in user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_delete_web_authn_credential/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_delete_web_authn_credential(AccessToken, CredentialId)
Arguments
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose passkey credential you want to delete. |
CredentialId |
[required] The unique identifier of the passkey that you want to delete. Look up
registered devices with
|
Given a user pool ID and identity provider (IdP) name, returns details about the IdP
Description
Given a user pool ID and identity provider (IdP) name, returns details about the IdP.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_describe_identity_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_describe_identity_provider(UserPoolId, ProviderName)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that has the IdP that you want to describe.. |
ProviderName |
[required] The name of the IdP that you want to describe. |
Given the ID of a managed login branding style, returns detailed information about the style
Description
Given the ID of a managed login branding style, returns detailed information about the style.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_describe_managed_login_branding/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_describe_managed_login_branding(
UserPoolId,
ManagedLoginBrandingId,
ReturnMergedResources = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that contains the managed login branding style that you want to get information about. |
ManagedLoginBrandingId |
[required] The ID of the managed login branding style that you want to get more information about. |
ReturnMergedResources |
When |
Given the ID of a user pool app client, returns detailed information about the style assigned to the app client
Description
Given the ID of a user pool app client, returns detailed information about the style assigned to the app client.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_describe_managed_login_branding_by_client/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_describe_managed_login_branding_by_client(
UserPoolId,
ClientId,
ReturnMergedResources = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that contains the app client where you want more information about the managed login branding style. |
ClientId |
[required] The app client that's assigned to the branding style that you want more information about. |
ReturnMergedResources |
When |
Describes a resource server
Description
Describes a resource server. For more information about resource servers, see Access control with resource servers.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_describe_resource_server/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_describe_resource_server(UserPoolId, Identifier)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that hosts the resource server. |
Identifier |
[required] A unique resource server identifier for the resource server. The
identifier can be an API friendly name like Amazon Cognito represents scopes in the access token in the format
|
Given an app client or user pool ID where threat protection is configured, describes the risk configuration
Description
Given an app client or user pool ID where threat protection is configured, describes the risk configuration. This operation returns details about adaptive authentication, compromised credentials, and IP-address allow- and denylists. For more information about threat protection, see Threat protection.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_describe_risk_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_describe_risk_configuration(
UserPoolId,
ClientId = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool with the risk configuration that you want to
inspect. You can apply default risk configuration at the user pool level
and further customize it from user pool defaults at the app-client
level. Specify |
ClientId |
The ID of the app client with the risk configuration that you want to
inspect. You can apply default risk configuration at the user pool level
and further customize it from user pool defaults at the app-client
level. Specify |
Describes a user import job
Description
Describes a user import job. For more information about user CSV import, see Importing users from a CSV file.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_describe_user_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_describe_user_import_job(UserPoolId, JobId)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that's associated with the import job. |
JobId |
[required] The Id of the user import job that you want to describe. |
Given a user pool ID, returns configuration information
Description
Given a user pool ID, returns configuration information. This operation is useful when you want to inspect an existing user pool and programmatically replicate the configuration to another user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_describe_user_pool/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_describe_user_pool(UserPoolId)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool you want to describe. |
Given an app client ID, returns configuration information
Description
Given an app client ID, returns configuration information. This operation is useful when you want to inspect an existing app client and programmatically replicate the configuration to another app client. For more information about app clients, see App clients.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_describe_user_pool_client/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_describe_user_pool_client(UserPoolId, ClientId)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that contains the app client you want to describe. |
ClientId |
[required] The ID of the app client that you want to describe. |
Given a user pool domain name, returns information about the domain configuration
Description
Given a user pool domain name, returns information about the domain configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_describe_user_pool_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_describe_user_pool_domain(Domain)
Arguments
Domain |
[required] The domain that you want to describe. For custom domains, this is the
fully-qualified domain name, such as |
Forgets the specified device
Description
Forgets the specified device. For more information about device authentication, see Working with user devices in your user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_forget_device/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_forget_device(AccessToken = NULL, DeviceKey)
Arguments
AccessToken |
A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose registered device you want to forget. |
DeviceKey |
[required] The device key. |
Calling this API causes a message to be sent to the end user with a confirmation code that is required to change the user's password
Description
Calling this API causes a message to be sent to the end user with a confirmation code that is required to change the user's password. For the Username
parameter, you can use the username or user alias. The method used to send the confirmation code is sent according to the specified AccountRecoverySetting. For more information, see Recovering User Accounts in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. To use the confirmation code for resetting the password, call confirm_forgot_password
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_forgot_password/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_forgot_password(
ClientId,
SecretHash = NULL,
UserContextData = NULL,
Username,
AnalyticsMetadata = NULL,
ClientMetadata = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientId |
[required] The ID of the client associated with the user pool. |
SecretHash |
A keyed-hash message authentication code (HMAC) calculated using the
secret key of a user pool client and username plus the client ID in the
message. For more information about |
UserContextData |
Contextual data about your user session, such as the device fingerprint, IP address, or location. Amazon Cognito advanced security evaluates the risk of an authentication event based on the context that your app generates and passes to Amazon Cognito when it makes API requests. For more information, see Collecting data for threat protection in applications. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
AnalyticsMetadata |
The Amazon Pinpoint analytics metadata that contributes to your metrics
for |
ClientMetadata |
A map of custom key-value pairs that you can provide as input for any custom workflows that this action triggers. You create custom workflows by assigning Lambda functions to user pool
triggers. When you use the ForgotPassword API action, Amazon Cognito
invokes any functions that are assigned to the following triggers: pre
sign-up, custom message, and user migration. When Amazon Cognito
invokes any of these functions, it passes a JSON payload, which the
function receives as input. This payload contains a For more information, see Customizing user pool Workflows with Lambda Triggers in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. When you use the
|
Gets the header information for the comma-separated value (CSV) file to be used as input for the user import job
Description
Gets the header information for the comma-separated value (CSV) file to be used as input for the user import job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_get_csv_header/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_get_csv_header(UserPoolId)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that the users are to be imported into. |
Gets the device
Description
Gets the device. For more information about device authentication, see Working with user devices in your user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_get_device/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_get_device(DeviceKey, AccessToken = NULL)
Arguments
DeviceKey |
[required] The device key. |
AccessToken |
A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose device information you want to request. |
Gets a group
Description
Gets a group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_get_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_get_group(GroupName, UserPoolId)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group. |
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool. |
Gets the specified IdP
Description
Gets the specified IdP.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_get_identity_provider_by_identifier/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_get_identity_provider_by_identifier(
UserPoolId,
IdpIdentifier
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The user pool ID. |
IdpIdentifier |
[required] The IdP identifier. |
Gets the logging configuration of a user pool
Description
Gets the logging configuration of a user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_get_log_delivery_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_get_log_delivery_configuration(UserPoolId)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that has the logging configuration that you want to view. |
This method takes a user pool ID, and returns the signing certificate
Description
This method takes a user pool ID, and returns the signing certificate. The issued certificate is valid for 10 years from the date of issue.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_get_signing_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_get_signing_certificate(UserPoolId)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The user pool ID. |
Gets the user interface (UI) Customization information for a particular app client's app UI, if any such information exists for the client
Description
Gets the user interface (UI) Customization information for a particular app client's app UI, if any such information exists for the client. If nothing is set for the particular client, but there is an existing pool level customization (the app clientId
is ALL
), then that information is returned. If nothing is present, then an empty shape is returned.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_get_ui_customization/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_get_ui_customization(UserPoolId, ClientId = NULL)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool. |
ClientId |
The client ID for the client app. |
Gets the user attributes and metadata for a user
Description
Gets the user attributes and metadata for a user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_get_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_get_user(AccessToken)
Arguments
AccessToken |
[required] A non-expired access token for the user whose information you want to query. |
Generates a user attribute verification code for the specified attribute name
Description
Generates a user attribute verification code for the specified attribute name. Sends a message to a user with a code that they must return in a VerifyUserAttribute request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_get_user_attribute_verification_code/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_get_user_attribute_verification_code(
AccessToken,
AttributeName,
ClientMetadata = NULL
)
Arguments
AccessToken |
[required] A non-expired access token for the user whose attribute verification code you want to generate. |
AttributeName |
[required] The attribute name returned by the server response to get the user attribute verification code. |
ClientMetadata |
A map of custom key-value pairs that you can provide as input for any custom workflows that this action triggers. You create custom workflows by assigning Lambda functions to user pool
triggers. When you use the GetUserAttributeVerificationCode API action,
Amazon Cognito invokes the function that is assigned to the custom
message trigger. When Amazon Cognito invokes this function, it passes a
JSON payload, which the function receives as input. This payload
contains a For more information, see Customizing user pool Workflows with Lambda Triggers in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. When you use the
|
Lists the authentication options for the currently signed-in user
Description
Lists the authentication options for the currently signed-in user. Returns the following:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_get_user_auth_factors/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_get_user_auth_factors(AccessToken)
Arguments
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose authentication factors you want to view. |
Gets the user pool multi-factor authentication (MFA) configuration
Description
Gets the user pool multi-factor authentication (MFA) configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_get_user_pool_mfa_config/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_get_user_pool_mfa_config(UserPoolId)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The user pool ID. |
Invalidates the identity, access, and refresh tokens that Amazon Cognito issued to a user
Description
Invalidates the identity, access, and refresh tokens that Amazon Cognito issued to a user. Call this operation when your user signs out of your app. This results in the following behavior.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_global_sign_out/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_global_sign_out(AccessToken)
Arguments
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user who you want to sign out. |
Initiates sign-in for a user in the Amazon Cognito user directory
Description
Initiates sign-in for a user in the Amazon Cognito user directory. You can't sign in a user with a federated IdP with initiate_auth
. For more information, see Adding user pool sign-in through a third party.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_initiate_auth/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_initiate_auth(
AuthFlow,
AuthParameters = NULL,
ClientMetadata = NULL,
ClientId,
AnalyticsMetadata = NULL,
UserContextData = NULL,
Session = NULL
)
Arguments
AuthFlow |
[required] The authentication flow that you want to initiate. Each
All flows USER_AUTH The entry point for sign-in with passwords, one-time passwords, and WebAuthN authenticators. USER_SRP_AUTH Username-password authentication with the Secure Remote Password (SRP) protocol. For more information, see Use SRP password verification in custom authentication flow. REFRESH_TOKEN_AUTH and REFRESH_TOKEN Provide a valid refresh token and receive new ID and access tokens. For more information, see Using the refresh token. CUSTOM_AUTH Custom authentication with Lambda triggers. For more information, see Custom authentication challenge Lambda triggers. USER_PASSWORD_AUTH Username-password authentication with the password sent directly in the request. For more information, see Admin authentication flow.
|
AuthParameters |
The authentication parameters. These are inputs corresponding to the
For more information about |
ClientMetadata |
A map of custom key-value pairs that you can provide as input for certain custom workflows that this action triggers. You create custom workflows by assigning Lambda functions to user pool triggers. When you use the InitiateAuth API action, Amazon Cognito invokes the Lambda functions that are specified for various triggers. The ClientMetadata value is passed as input to the functions for only the following triggers:
When Amazon Cognito invokes the functions for these triggers, it passes
a JSON payload, which the function receives as input. This payload
contains a When you use the InitiateAuth API action, Amazon Cognito also invokes the functions for the following triggers, but it doesn't provide the ClientMetadata value as input:
For more information, see Customizing user pool Workflows with Lambda Triggers in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. When you use the
|
ClientId |
[required] The app client ID. |
AnalyticsMetadata |
The Amazon Pinpoint analytics metadata that contributes to your metrics
for |
UserContextData |
Contextual data about your user session, such as the device fingerprint, IP address, or location. Amazon Cognito advanced security evaluates the risk of an authentication event based on the context that your app generates and passes to Amazon Cognito when it makes API requests. For more information, see Collecting data for threat protection in applications. |
Session |
The optional session ID from a
|
Lists the sign-in devices that Amazon Cognito has registered to the current user
Description
Lists the sign-in devices that Amazon Cognito has registered to the current user. For more information about device authentication, see Working with user devices in your user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_list_devices/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_list_devices(
AccessToken,
Limit = NULL,
PaginationToken = NULL
)
Arguments
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose list of devices you want to view. |
Limit |
The limit of the device request. |
PaginationToken |
This API operation returns a limited number of results. The pagination token is an identifier that you can present in an additional API request with the same parameters. When you include the pagination token, Amazon Cognito returns the next set of items after the current list. Subsequent requests return a new pagination token. By use of this token, you can paginate through the full list of items. |
Lists the groups associated with a user pool
Description
Lists the groups associated with a user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_list_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_list_groups(UserPoolId, Limit = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool. |
Limit |
The limit of the request to list groups. |
NextToken |
An identifier that was returned from the previous call to this operation, which can be used to return the next set of items in the list. |
Lists information about all IdPs for a user pool
Description
Lists information about all IdPs for a user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_list_identity_providers/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_list_identity_providers(
UserPoolId,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The user pool ID. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of IdPs to return. |
NextToken |
A pagination token. |
Lists the resource servers for a user pool
Description
Lists the resource servers for a user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_list_resource_servers/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_list_resource_servers(
UserPoolId,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of resource servers to return. |
NextToken |
A pagination token. |
Lists the tags that are assigned to an Amazon Cognito user pool
Description
Lists the tags that are assigned to an Amazon Cognito user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the user pool that the tags are assigned to. |
Lists user import jobs for a user pool
Description
Lists user import jobs for a user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_list_user_import_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_list_user_import_jobs(
UserPoolId,
MaxResults,
PaginationToken = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that the users are being imported into. |
MaxResults |
[required] The maximum number of import jobs you want the request to return. |
PaginationToken |
This API operation returns a limited number of results. The pagination token is an identifier that you can present in an additional API request with the same parameters. When you include the pagination token, Amazon Cognito returns the next set of items after the current list. Subsequent requests return a new pagination token. By use of this token, you can paginate through the full list of items. |
Lists the clients that have been created for the specified user pool
Description
Lists the clients that have been created for the specified user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_list_user_pool_clients/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_list_user_pool_clients(
UserPoolId,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to list user pool clients. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results you want the request to return when listing the user pool clients. |
NextToken |
An identifier that was returned from the previous call to this operation, which can be used to return the next set of items in the list. |
Lists the user pools associated with an Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists the user pools associated with an Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_list_user_pools/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_list_user_pools(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults)
Arguments
NextToken |
An identifier that was returned from the previous call to this operation, which can be used to return the next set of items in the list. |
MaxResults |
[required] The maximum number of results you want the request to return when listing the user pools. |
Lists users and their basic details in a user pool
Description
Lists users and their basic details in a user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_list_users/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_list_users(
UserPoolId,
AttributesToGet = NULL,
Limit = NULL,
PaginationToken = NULL,
Filter = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool on which the search should be performed. |
AttributesToGet |
A JSON array of user attribute names, for example Use |
Limit |
Maximum number of users to be returned. |
PaginationToken |
This API operation returns a limited number of results. The pagination token is an identifier that you can present in an additional API request with the same parameters. When you include the pagination token, Amazon Cognito returns the next set of items after the current list. Subsequent requests return a new pagination token. By use of this token, you can paginate through the full list of items. |
Filter |
A filter string of the form
If the filter string is empty,
You can only search for the following standard attributes:
Custom attributes aren't searchable. You can also list users with a client-side filter. The server-side
filter matches no more than one attribute. For an advanced search, use a
client-side filter with the For more information about server-side and client-side filtering, see FilteringCLI output in the Command Line Interface User Guide. For more information, see Searching for Users Using the ListUsers API and Examples of Using the ListUsers API in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. |
Lists the users in the specified group
Description
Lists the users in the specified group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_list_users_in_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_list_users_in_group(
UserPoolId,
GroupName,
Limit = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool. |
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group. |
Limit |
The maximum number of users that you want to retrieve before pagination. |
NextToken |
An identifier that was returned from the previous call to this operation, which can be used to return the next set of items in the list. |
Generates a list of the current user's registered passkey, or webauthN, credentials
Description
Generates a list of the current user's registered passkey, or webauthN, credentials.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_list_web_authn_credentials/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_list_web_authn_credentials(
AccessToken,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose registered passkeys you want to list. |
NextToken |
An identifier that was returned from the previous call to this operation, which can be used to return the next set of items in the list. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of the user's passkey credentials that you want to return. |
Resends the confirmation (for confirmation of registration) to a specific user in the user pool
Description
Resends the confirmation (for confirmation of registration) to a specific user in the user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_resend_confirmation_code/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_resend_confirmation_code(
ClientId,
SecretHash = NULL,
UserContextData = NULL,
Username,
AnalyticsMetadata = NULL,
ClientMetadata = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientId |
[required] The ID of the client associated with the user pool. |
SecretHash |
A keyed-hash message authentication code (HMAC) calculated using the
secret key of a user pool client and username plus the client ID in the
message. For more information about |
UserContextData |
Contextual data about your user session, such as the device fingerprint, IP address, or location. Amazon Cognito advanced security evaluates the risk of an authentication event based on the context that your app generates and passes to Amazon Cognito when it makes API requests. For more information, see Collecting data for threat protection in applications. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
AnalyticsMetadata |
The Amazon Pinpoint analytics metadata that contributes to your metrics
for
|
ClientMetadata |
A map of custom key-value pairs that you can provide as input for any custom workflows that this action triggers. You create custom workflows by assigning Lambda functions to user pool
triggers. When you use the ResendConfirmationCode API action, Amazon
Cognito invokes the function that is assigned to the custom message
trigger. When Amazon Cognito invokes this function, it passes a JSON
payload, which the function receives as input. This payload contains a
For more information, see Customizing user pool Workflows with Lambda Triggers in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. When you use the
|
Some API operations in a user pool generate a challenge, like a prompt for an MFA code, for device authentication that bypasses MFA, or for a custom authentication challenge
Description
Some API operations in a user pool generate a challenge, like a prompt for an MFA code, for device authentication that bypasses MFA, or for a custom authentication challenge. A respond_to_auth_challenge
API request provides the answer to that challenge, like a code or a secure remote password (SRP). The parameters of a response to an authentication challenge vary with the type of challenge.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_respond_to_auth_challenge/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_respond_to_auth_challenge(
ClientId,
ChallengeName,
Session = NULL,
ChallengeResponses = NULL,
AnalyticsMetadata = NULL,
UserContextData = NULL,
ClientMetadata = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientId |
[required] The app client ID. |
ChallengeName |
[required] The challenge name. For more information, see
|
Session |
The session that should be passed both ways in challenge-response calls
to the service. If
|
ChallengeResponses |
The responses to the challenge that you received in the previous request. Each challenge has its own required response parameters. The following examples are partial JSON request bodies that highlight challenge-response parameters. You must provide a SECRET_HASH parameter in all challenge responses to
an app client that has a client secret. Include a SELECT_CHALLENGE
Available challenges are Complete authentication in the
For
SMS_OTP
EMAIL_OTP
SMS_MFA
PASSWORD_VERIFIER This challenge response is part of the SRP flow. Amazon Cognito requires
that your application respond to this challenge within a few seconds.
When the response time exceeds this period, your user pool returns a
Add CUSTOM_CHALLENGE
Add NEW_PASSWORD_REQUIRED
To set any required attributes that
In a SOFTWARE_TOKEN_MFA
DEVICE_SRP_AUTH
DEVICE_PASSWORD_VERIFIER
MFA_SETUP
SELECT_MFA_TYPE
For more information about |
AnalyticsMetadata |
The Amazon Pinpoint analytics metadata that contributes to your metrics
for
|
UserContextData |
Contextual data about your user session, such as the device fingerprint, IP address, or location. Amazon Cognito advanced security evaluates the risk of an authentication event based on the context that your app generates and passes to Amazon Cognito when it makes API requests. For more information, see Collecting data for threat protection in applications. |
ClientMetadata |
A map of custom key-value pairs that you can provide as input for any custom workflows that this action triggers. You create custom workflows by assigning Lambda functions to user pool
triggers. When you use the RespondToAuthChallenge API action, Amazon
Cognito invokes any functions that are assigned to the following
triggers: post authentication, pre token generation, define auth
challenge, create auth challenge, and verify auth challenge. When
Amazon Cognito invokes any of these functions, it passes a JSON payload,
which the function receives as input. This payload contains a
For more information, see Customizing user pool Workflows with Lambda Triggers in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. When you use the
|
Revokes all of the access tokens generated by, and at the same time as, the specified refresh token
Description
Revokes all of the access tokens generated by, and at the same time as, the specified refresh token. After a token is revoked, you can't use the revoked token to access Amazon Cognito user APIs, or to authorize access to your resource server.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_revoke_token/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_revoke_token(Token, ClientId, ClientSecret = NULL)
Arguments
Token |
[required] The refresh token that you want to revoke. |
ClientId |
[required] The client ID for the token that you want to revoke. |
ClientSecret |
The secret for the client ID. This is required only if the client ID has a secret. |
Sets up or modifies the logging configuration of a user pool
Description
Sets up or modifies the logging configuration of a user pool. User pools can export user notification logs and advanced security features user activity logs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_set_log_delivery_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_set_log_delivery_configuration(
UserPoolId,
LogConfigurations
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to configure logging. |
LogConfigurations |
[required] A collection of the logging configurations for a user pool. |
Configures actions on detected risks
Description
Configures actions on detected risks. To delete the risk configuration for UserPoolId
or ClientId
, pass null values for all four configuration types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_set_risk_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_set_risk_configuration(
UserPoolId,
ClientId = NULL,
CompromisedCredentialsRiskConfiguration = NULL,
AccountTakeoverRiskConfiguration = NULL,
RiskExceptionConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The user pool ID. |
ClientId |
The app client ID. If Otherwise, |
CompromisedCredentialsRiskConfiguration |
The compromised credentials risk configuration. |
AccountTakeoverRiskConfiguration |
The account takeover risk configuration. |
RiskExceptionConfiguration |
The configuration to override the risk decision. |
Sets the user interface (UI) customization information for a user pool's built-in app UI
Description
Sets the user interface (UI) customization information for a user pool's built-in app UI.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_set_ui_customization/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_set_ui_customization(
UserPoolId,
ClientId = NULL,
CSS = NULL,
ImageFile = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool. |
ClientId |
The client ID for the client app. |
CSS |
The CSS values in the UI customization. |
ImageFile |
The uploaded logo image for the UI customization. |
Set the user's multi-factor authentication (MFA) method preference, including which MFA factors are activated and if any are preferred
Description
Set the user's multi-factor authentication (MFA) method preference, including which MFA factors are activated and if any are preferred. Only one factor can be set as preferred. The preferred MFA factor will be used to authenticate a user if multiple factors are activated. If multiple options are activated and no preference is set, a challenge to choose an MFA option will be returned during sign-in. If an MFA type is activated for a user, the user will be prompted for MFA during all sign-in attempts unless device tracking is turned on and the device has been trusted. If you want MFA to be applied selectively based on the assessed risk level of sign-in attempts, deactivate MFA for users and turn on Adaptive Authentication for the user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_set_user_mfa_preference/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_set_user_mfa_preference(
SMSMfaSettings = NULL,
SoftwareTokenMfaSettings = NULL,
EmailMfaSettings = NULL,
AccessToken
)
Arguments
SMSMfaSettings |
User preferences for SMS message MFA. Activates or deactivates SMS MFA and sets it as the preferred MFA method when multiple methods are available. |
SoftwareTokenMfaSettings |
User preferences for time-based one-time password (TOTP) MFA. Activates or deactivates TOTP MFA and sets it as the preferred MFA method when multiple methods are available. |
EmailMfaSettings |
User preferences for email message MFA. Activates or deactivates email MFA and sets it as the preferred MFA method when multiple methods are available. To activate this setting, advanced security features must be active in your user pool. |
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose MFA preference you want to set. |
Sets the user pool multi-factor authentication (MFA) and passkey configuration
Description
Sets the user pool multi-factor authentication (MFA) and passkey configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_set_user_pool_mfa_config/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_set_user_pool_mfa_config(
UserPoolId,
SmsMfaConfiguration = NULL,
SoftwareTokenMfaConfiguration = NULL,
EmailMfaConfiguration = NULL,
MfaConfiguration = NULL,
WebAuthnConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The user pool ID. |
SmsMfaConfiguration |
Configures user pool SMS messages for MFA. Sets the message template and the SMS message sending configuration for Amazon SNS. |
SoftwareTokenMfaConfiguration |
Configures a user pool for time-based one-time password (TOTP) MFA. Enables or disables TOTP. |
EmailMfaConfiguration |
Configures user pool email messages for MFA. Sets the subject and body of the email message template for MFA messages. To activate this setting, advanced security features must be active in your user pool. |
MfaConfiguration |
The MFA configuration. If you set the MfaConfiguration value to ‘ON’, only users who have set up an MFA factor can sign in. To learn more, see Adding Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) to a user pool. Valid values include:
|
WebAuthnConfiguration |
The configuration of your user pool for passkey, or webauthN, authentication and registration. You can set this configuration independent of the MFA configuration options in this operation. |
This action is no longer supported
Description
This action is no longer supported. You can use it to configure only SMS MFA. You can't use it to configure time-based one-time password (TOTP) software token MFA. To configure either type of MFA, use set_user_mfa_preference
instead.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_set_user_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_set_user_settings(AccessToken, MFAOptions)
Arguments
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose user settings you want to configure. |
MFAOptions |
[required] You can use this parameter only to set an SMS configuration that uses SMS for delivery. |
Registers the user in the specified user pool and creates a user name, password, and user attributes
Description
Registers the user in the specified user pool and creates a user name, password, and user attributes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_sign_up/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_sign_up(
ClientId,
SecretHash = NULL,
Username,
Password = NULL,
UserAttributes = NULL,
ValidationData = NULL,
AnalyticsMetadata = NULL,
UserContextData = NULL,
ClientMetadata = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientId |
[required] The ID of the client associated with the user pool. |
SecretHash |
A keyed-hash message authentication code (HMAC) calculated using the
secret key of a user pool client and username plus the client ID in the
message. For more information about |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to sign up. The value of this parameter is typically a username, but can be any alias attribute in your user pool. |
Password |
The password of the user you want to register. Users can sign up without a password when your user pool supports
passwordless sign-in with email or SMS OTPs. To create a user with no
password, omit this parameter or submit a blank value. You can only
create a passwordless user when passwordless sign-in is available. See
the SignInPolicyType
property of
|
UserAttributes |
An array of name-value pairs representing user attributes. For custom attributes, you must prepend the |
ValidationData |
Temporary user attributes that contribute to the outcomes of your pre sign-up Lambda trigger. This set of key-value pairs are for custom validation of information that you collect from your users but don't need to retain. Your Lambda function can analyze this additional data and act on it. Your function might perform external API operations like logging user attributes and validation data to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. Validation data might also affect the response that your function returns to Amazon Cognito, like automatically confirming the user if they sign up from within your network. For more information about the pre sign-up Lambda trigger, see Pre sign-up Lambda trigger. |
AnalyticsMetadata |
The Amazon Pinpoint analytics metadata that contributes to your metrics
for |
UserContextData |
Contextual data about your user session, such as the device fingerprint, IP address, or location. Amazon Cognito advanced security evaluates the risk of an authentication event based on the context that your app generates and passes to Amazon Cognito when it makes API requests. For more information, see Collecting data for threat protection in applications. |
ClientMetadata |
A map of custom key-value pairs that you can provide as input for any custom workflows that this action triggers. You create custom workflows by assigning Lambda functions to user pool
triggers. When you use the SignUp API action, Amazon Cognito invokes any
functions that are assigned to the following triggers: pre sign-up,
custom message, and post confirmation. When Amazon Cognito invokes
any of these functions, it passes a JSON payload, which the function
receives as input. This payload contains a For more information, see Customizing user pool Workflows with Lambda Triggers in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. When you use the
|
Starts the user import
Description
Starts the user import.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_start_user_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_start_user_import_job(UserPoolId, JobId)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that the users are being imported into. |
JobId |
[required] The job ID for the user import job. |
Requests credential creation options from your user pool for registration of a passkey authenticator
Description
Requests credential creation options from your user pool for registration of a passkey authenticator. Returns information about the user pool, the user profile, and authentication requirements. Users must provide this information in their request to enroll your application with their passkey provider.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_start_web_authn_registration/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_start_web_authn_registration(AccessToken)
Arguments
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose passkey metadata you want to generate. |
Stops the user import job
Description
Stops the user import job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_stop_user_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_stop_user_import_job(UserPoolId, JobId)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that the users are being imported into. |
JobId |
[required] The job ID for the user import job. |
Assigns a set of tags to an Amazon Cognito user pool
Description
Assigns a set of tags to an Amazon Cognito user pool. A tag is a label that you can use to categorize and manage user pools in different ways, such as by purpose, owner, environment, or other criteria.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the user pool to assign the tags to. |
Tags |
[required] The tags to assign to the user pool. |
Removes the specified tags from an Amazon Cognito user pool
Description
Removes the specified tags from an Amazon Cognito user pool. You can use this action up to 5 times per second, per account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the user pool that the tags are assigned to. |
TagKeys |
[required] The keys of the tags to remove from the user pool. |
Provides the feedback for an authentication event, whether it was from a valid user or not
Description
Provides the feedback for an authentication event, whether it was from a valid user or not. This feedback is used for improving the risk evaluation decision for the user pool as part of Amazon Cognito advanced security.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_update_auth_event_feedback/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_update_auth_event_feedback(
UserPoolId,
Username,
EventId,
FeedbackToken,
FeedbackValue
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The user pool ID. |
Username |
[required] The username of the user that you want to query or modify. The value of
this parameter is typically your user's username, but it can be any of
their alias attributes. If |
EventId |
[required] The event ID. |
FeedbackToken |
[required] The feedback token. |
FeedbackValue |
[required] The authentication event feedback value. When you provide a
|
Updates the device status
Description
Updates the device status. For more information about device authentication, see Working with user devices in your user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_update_device_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_update_device_status(
AccessToken,
DeviceKey,
DeviceRememberedStatus = NULL
)
Arguments
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose device status you want to update. |
DeviceKey |
[required] The device key. |
DeviceRememberedStatus |
The status of whether a device is remembered. |
Updates the specified group with the specified attributes
Description
Updates the specified group with the specified attributes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_update_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_update_group(
GroupName,
UserPoolId,
Description = NULL,
RoleArn = NULL,
Precedence = NULL
)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group. |
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool. |
Description |
A string containing the new description of the group. |
RoleArn |
The new role Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the group. This is used for
setting the |
Precedence |
The new precedence value for the group. For more information about this
parameter, see |
Updates IdP information for a user pool
Description
Updates IdP information for a user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_update_identity_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_update_identity_provider(
UserPoolId,
ProviderName,
ProviderDetails = NULL,
AttributeMapping = NULL,
IdpIdentifiers = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The user pool ID. |
ProviderName |
[required] The IdP name. |
ProviderDetails |
The scopes, URLs, and identifiers for your external identity provider.
The following examples describe the provider detail keys for each IdP
type. These values and their schema are subject to change. Social IdP
OpenID Connect (OIDC) Amazon Cognito accepts the following elements when it can't discover
endpoint URLs from Create or update request:
Describe response:
SAML Create or update request with Metadata URL:
Create or update request with Metadata file:
The value of Describe response:
LoginWithAmazon Create or update request:
Describe response:
Create or update request:
Describe response:
SignInWithApple Create or update request:
Describe response:
Create or update request:
Describe response:
|
AttributeMapping |
The IdP attribute mapping to be changed. |
IdpIdentifiers |
A list of IdP identifiers. |
Configures the branding settings for a user pool style
Description
Configures the branding settings for a user pool style. This operation is the programmatic option for the configuration of a style in the branding designer.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_update_managed_login_branding/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_update_managed_login_branding(
UserPoolId = NULL,
ManagedLoginBrandingId = NULL,
UseCognitoProvidedValues = NULL,
Settings = NULL,
Assets = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
The ID of the user pool that contains the managed login branding style that you want to update. |
ManagedLoginBrandingId |
The ID of the managed login branding style that you want to update. |
UseCognitoProvidedValues |
When true, applies the default branding style options. This option reverts to default style options that are managed by Amazon Cognito. You can modify them later in the branding designer. When you specify |
Settings |
A JSON file, encoded as a |
Assets |
An array of image files that you want to apply to roles like backgrounds, logos, and icons. Each object must also indicate whether it is for dark mode, light mode, or browser-adaptive mode. |
Updates the name and scopes of resource server
Description
Updates the name and scopes of resource server. All other fields are read-only.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_update_resource_server/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_update_resource_server(
UserPoolId,
Identifier,
Name,
Scopes = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool. |
Identifier |
[required] A unique resource server identifier for the resource server. The
identifier can be an API friendly name like Amazon Cognito represents scopes in the access token in the format
|
Name |
[required] The name of the resource server. |
Scopes |
The scope values to be set for the resource server. |
With this operation, your users can update one or more of their attributes with their own credentials
Description
With this operation, your users can update one or more of their attributes with their own credentials. You authorize this API request with the user's access token. To delete an attribute from your user, submit the attribute in your API request with a blank value. Custom attribute values in this request must include the custom:
prefix.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_update_user_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_update_user_attributes(
UserAttributes,
AccessToken,
ClientMetadata = NULL
)
Arguments
UserAttributes |
[required] An array of name-value pairs representing user attributes. For custom attributes, you must prepend the If you have set an attribute to require verification before Amazon Cognito updates its value, this request doesn’t immediately update the value of that attribute. After your user receives and responds to a verification message to verify the new value, Amazon Cognito updates the attribute value. Your user can sign in and receive messages with the original attribute value until they verify the new value. |
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose user attributes you want to update. |
ClientMetadata |
A map of custom key-value pairs that you can provide as input for any custom workflows that this action initiates. You create custom workflows by assigning Lambda functions to user pool
triggers. When you use the UpdateUserAttributes API action, Amazon
Cognito invokes the function that is assigned to the custom message
trigger. When Amazon Cognito invokes this function, it passes a JSON
payload, which the function receives as input. This payload contains a
For more information, see Customizing user pool Workflows with Lambda Triggers in the Amazon Cognito Developer Guide. When you use the
|
This action might generate an SMS text message
Description
This action might generate an SMS text message. Starting June 1, 2021, US telecom carriers require you to register an origination phone number before you can send SMS messages to US phone numbers. If you use SMS text messages in Amazon Cognito, you must register a phone number with Amazon Pinpoint. Amazon Cognito uses the registered number automatically. Otherwise, Amazon Cognito users who must receive SMS messages might not be able to sign up, activate their accounts, or sign in.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_update_user_pool/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_update_user_pool(
UserPoolId,
Policies = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
LambdaConfig = NULL,
AutoVerifiedAttributes = NULL,
SmsVerificationMessage = NULL,
EmailVerificationMessage = NULL,
EmailVerificationSubject = NULL,
VerificationMessageTemplate = NULL,
SmsAuthenticationMessage = NULL,
UserAttributeUpdateSettings = NULL,
MfaConfiguration = NULL,
DeviceConfiguration = NULL,
EmailConfiguration = NULL,
SmsConfiguration = NULL,
UserPoolTags = NULL,
AdminCreateUserConfig = NULL,
UserPoolAddOns = NULL,
AccountRecoverySetting = NULL,
PoolName = NULL,
UserPoolTier = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool you want to update. |
Policies |
A container with the policies you want to update in a user pool. |
DeletionProtection |
When active, When you try to delete a protected user pool in a
|
LambdaConfig |
The Lambda configuration information from the request to update the user pool. |
AutoVerifiedAttributes |
The attributes that are automatically verified when Amazon Cognito requests to update user pools. |
SmsVerificationMessage |
This parameter is no longer used. See VerificationMessageTemplateType. |
EmailVerificationMessage |
This parameter is no longer used. See VerificationMessageTemplateType. |
EmailVerificationSubject |
This parameter is no longer used. See VerificationMessageTemplateType. |
VerificationMessageTemplate |
The template for verification messages. |
SmsAuthenticationMessage |
The contents of the SMS authentication message. |
UserAttributeUpdateSettings |
The settings for updates to user attributes. These settings include the
property |
MfaConfiguration |
Possible values include:
|
DeviceConfiguration |
The device-remembering configuration for a user pool. A null value indicates that you have deactivated device remembering in your user pool. When you provide a value for any |
EmailConfiguration |
The email configuration of your user pool. The email configuration type sets your preferred sending method, Amazon Web Services Region, and sender for email invitation and verification messages from your user pool. |
SmsConfiguration |
The SMS configuration with the settings that your Amazon Cognito user pool must use to send an SMS message from your Amazon Web Services account through Amazon Simple Notification Service. To send SMS messages with Amazon SNS in the Amazon Web Services Region that you want, the Amazon Cognito user pool uses an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role in your Amazon Web Services account. |
UserPoolTags |
The tag keys and values to assign to the user pool. A tag is a label that you can use to categorize and manage user pools in different ways, such as by purpose, owner, environment, or other criteria. |
AdminCreateUserConfig |
The configuration for
|
UserPoolAddOns |
User pool add-ons. Contains settings for activation of advanced security
features. To log user security information but take no action, set to
For more information, see Adding advanced security to a user pool. |
AccountRecoverySetting |
The available verified method a user can use to recover their password
when they call
|
PoolName |
The updated name of your user pool. |
UserPoolTier |
The user pool feature plan,
or tier. This parameter determines the eligibility of the user pool for
features like managed login, access-token customization, and threat
protection. Defaults to |
Updates the specified user pool app client with the specified attributes
Description
Updates the specified user pool app client with the specified attributes. You can get a list of the current user pool app client settings using describe_user_pool_client
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_update_user_pool_client/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_update_user_pool_client(
UserPoolId,
ClientId,
ClientName = NULL,
RefreshTokenValidity = NULL,
AccessTokenValidity = NULL,
IdTokenValidity = NULL,
TokenValidityUnits = NULL,
ReadAttributes = NULL,
WriteAttributes = NULL,
ExplicitAuthFlows = NULL,
SupportedIdentityProviders = NULL,
CallbackURLs = NULL,
LogoutURLs = NULL,
DefaultRedirectURI = NULL,
AllowedOAuthFlows = NULL,
AllowedOAuthScopes = NULL,
AllowedOAuthFlowsUserPoolClient = NULL,
AnalyticsConfiguration = NULL,
PreventUserExistenceErrors = NULL,
EnableTokenRevocation = NULL,
EnablePropagateAdditionalUserContextData = NULL,
AuthSessionValidity = NULL
)
Arguments
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool where you want to update the user pool client. |
ClientId |
[required] The ID of the client associated with the user pool. |
ClientName |
The client name from the update user pool client request. |
RefreshTokenValidity |
The refresh token time limit. After this limit expires, your user can't
use their refresh token. To specify the time unit for
For example, when you set The default time unit for If you don't specify otherwise in the configuration of your app client, your refresh tokens are valid for 30 days. |
AccessTokenValidity |
The access token time limit. After this limit expires, your user can't
use their access token. To specify the time unit for
For example, when you set The default time unit for If you don't specify otherwise in the configuration of your app client, your access tokens are valid for one hour. |
IdTokenValidity |
The ID token time limit. After this limit expires, your user can't use
their ID token. To specify the time unit for For example, when you set The default time unit for If you don't specify otherwise in the configuration of your app client, your ID tokens are valid for one hour. |
TokenValidityUnits |
The time units you use when you set the duration of ID, access, and refresh tokens. The default unit for RefreshToken is days, and the default for ID and access tokens is hours. |
ReadAttributes |
The list of user attributes that you want your app client to have read
access to. After your user authenticates in your app, their access token
authorizes them to read their own attribute value for any attribute in
this list. An example of this kind of activity is when your user selects
a link to view their profile information. Your app makes a
When you don't specify the |
WriteAttributes |
The list of user attributes that you want your app client to have write
access to. After your user authenticates in your app, their access token
authorizes them to set or modify their own attribute value for any
attribute in this list. An example of this kind of activity is when you
present your user with a form to update their profile information and
they change their last name. Your app then makes an
When you don't specify the If your app client allows users to sign in through an IdP, this array must include all attributes that you have mapped to IdP attributes. Amazon Cognito updates mapped attributes when users sign in to your application through an IdP. If your app client does not have write access to a mapped attribute, Amazon Cognito throws an error when it tries to update the attribute. For more information, see Specifying IdP Attribute Mappings for Your user pool. |
ExplicitAuthFlows |
The authentication flows that you want your user pool client to support. For each app client in your user pool, you can sign in your users with any combination of one or more flows, including with a user name and Secure Remote Password (SRP), a user name and password, or a custom authentication process that you define with Lambda functions. If you don't specify a value for Valid values include:
In some environments, you will see the values |
SupportedIdentityProviders |
A list of provider names for the identity providers (IdPs) that are
supported on this client. The following are supported: This setting applies to providers that you can access with managed login.
The removal of |
CallbackURLs |
A list of allowed redirect (callback) URLs for the IdPs. A redirect URI must:
See OAuth 2.0 - Redirection Endpoint. Amazon Cognito requires HTTPS over HTTP except for http://localhost for testing purposes only. App callback URLs such as |
LogoutURLs |
A list of allowed logout URLs for the IdPs. |
DefaultRedirectURI |
The default redirect URI. Must be in the A redirect URI must:
See OAuth 2.0 - Redirection Endpoint. Amazon Cognito requires HTTPS over HTTP except for App callback URLs such as |
AllowedOAuthFlows |
The allowed OAuth flows. code Use a code grant flow, which provides an authorization code as the
response. This code can be exchanged for access tokens with the
implicit Issue the access token (and, optionally, ID token, based on scopes) directly to your user. client_credentials Issue the access token from the |
AllowedOAuthScopes |
The allowed OAuth scopes. Possible values provided by OAuth are |
AllowedOAuthFlowsUserPoolClient |
Set to
To use OAuth 2.0 features, configure one of these features in the Amazon
Cognito console or set |
AnalyticsConfiguration |
The Amazon Pinpoint analytics configuration necessary to collect metrics for this user pool. In Amazon Web Services Regions where Amazon Pinpoint isn't available, user pools only support sending events to Amazon Pinpoint projects in us-east-1. In Regions where Amazon Pinpoint is available, user pools support sending events to Amazon Pinpoint projects within that same Region. |
PreventUserExistenceErrors |
Errors and responses that you want Amazon Cognito APIs to return during
authentication, account confirmation, and password recovery when the
user doesn't exist in the user pool. When set to Valid values include:
Defaults to |
EnableTokenRevocation |
Activates or deactivates token revocation. For more information about
revoking tokens, see
|
EnablePropagateAdditionalUserContextData |
Activates the propagation of additional user context data. For more
information about propagation of user context data, see Adding advanced security to a user pool.
If you don’t include this parameter, you can't send device fingerprint
information, including source IP address, to Amazon Cognito advanced
security. You can only activate
|
AuthSessionValidity |
Amazon Cognito creates a session token for each API request in an
authentication flow. |
A user pool domain hosts managed login, an authorization server and web server for authentication in your application
Description
A user pool domain hosts managed login, an authorization server and web server for authentication in your application. This operation updates the branding version for user pool domains between 1
for hosted UI (classic) and 2
for managed login. It also updates the SSL certificate for user pool custom domains.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_update_user_pool_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_update_user_pool_domain(
Domain,
UserPoolId,
ManagedLoginVersion = NULL,
CustomDomainConfig = NULL
)
Arguments
Domain |
[required] The domain name for the custom domain that hosts the sign-up and sign-in
pages for your application. One example might be This string can include only lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens. Don't use a hyphen for the first or last character. Use periods to separate subdomain names. |
UserPoolId |
[required] The ID of the user pool that is associated with the custom domain whose certificate you're updating. |
ManagedLoginVersion |
A version number that indicates the state of managed login for your
domain. Version |
CustomDomainConfig |
The configuration for a custom domain that hosts the sign-up and sign-in pages for your application. Use this object to specify an SSL certificate that is managed by ACM. When you create a custom domain, the passkey RP ID defaults to the
custom domain. If you had a prefix domain active, this will cause
passkey integration for your prefix domain to stop working due to a
mismatch in RP ID. To keep the prefix domain passkey integration
working, you can explicitly set RP ID to the prefix domain. Update the
RP ID in a
|
Use this API to register a user's entered time-based one-time password (TOTP) code and mark the user's software token MFA status as "verified" if successful
Description
Use this API to register a user's entered time-based one-time password (TOTP) code and mark the user's software token MFA status as "verified" if successful. The request takes an access token or a session string, but not both.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_verify_software_token/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_verify_software_token(
AccessToken = NULL,
Session = NULL,
UserCode,
FriendlyDeviceName = NULL
)
Arguments
AccessToken |
A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose software token you want to verify. |
Session |
The session that should be passed both ways in challenge-response calls to the service. |
UserCode |
[required] The one- time password computed using the secret code returned by
|
FriendlyDeviceName |
The friendly device name. |
Verifies the specified user attributes in the user pool
Description
Verifies the specified user attributes in the user pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitoidentityprovider_verify_user_attribute/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitoidentityprovider_verify_user_attribute(AccessToken, AttributeName, Code)
Arguments
AccessToken |
[required] A valid access token that Amazon Cognito issued to the user whose user attributes you want to verify. |
AttributeName |
[required] The attribute name in the request to verify user attributes. |
Code |
[required] The verification code in the request to verify user attributes. |
Amazon Cognito Sync
Description
Amazon Cognito Sync provides an AWS service and client library that enable cross-device syncing of application-related user data. High-level client libraries are available for both iOS and Android. You can use these libraries to persist data locally so that it's available even if the device is offline. Developer credentials don't need to be stored on the mobile device to access the service. You can use Amazon Cognito to obtain a normalized user ID and credentials. User data is persisted in a dataset that can store up to 1 MB of key-value pairs, and you can have up to 20 datasets per user identity.
With Amazon Cognito Sync, the data stored for each identity is accessible only to credentials assigned to that identity. In order to use the Cognito Sync service, you need to make API calls using credentials retrieved with Amazon Cognito Identity service.
If you want to use Cognito Sync in an Android or iOS application, you will probably want to make API calls via the AWS Mobile SDK. To learn more, see the Developer Guide for Android and the Developer Guide for iOS.
Usage
cognitosync(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- cognitosync( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
bulk_publish | Initiates a bulk publish of all existing datasets for an Identity Pool to the configured stream |
delete_dataset | Deletes the specific dataset |
describe_dataset | Gets meta data about a dataset by identity and dataset name |
describe_identity_pool_usage | Gets usage details (for example, data storage) about a particular identity pool |
describe_identity_usage | Gets usage information for an identity, including number of datasets and data usage |
get_bulk_publish_details | Get the status of the last BulkPublish operation for an identity pool |
get_cognito_events | Gets the events and the corresponding Lambda functions associated with an identity pool |
get_identity_pool_configuration | Gets the configuration settings of an identity pool |
list_datasets | Lists datasets for an identity |
list_identity_pool_usage | Gets a list of identity pools registered with Cognito |
list_records | Gets paginated records, optionally changed after a particular sync count for a dataset and identity |
register_device | Registers a device to receive push sync notifications |
set_cognito_events | Sets the AWS Lambda function for a given event type for an identity pool |
set_identity_pool_configuration | Sets the necessary configuration for push sync |
subscribe_to_dataset | Subscribes to receive notifications when a dataset is modified by another device |
unsubscribe_from_dataset | Unsubscribes from receiving notifications when a dataset is modified by another device |
update_records | Posts updates to records and adds and deletes records for a dataset and user |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- cognitosync()
svc$bulk_publish(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Initiates a bulk publish of all existing datasets for an Identity Pool to the configured stream
Description
Initiates a bulk publish of all existing datasets for an Identity Pool to the configured stream. Customers are limited to one successful bulk publish per 24 hours. Bulk publish is an asynchronous request, customers can see the status of the request via the GetBulkPublishDetails operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_bulk_publish/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_bulk_publish(IdentityPoolId)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. GUID generation is unique within a region. |
Deletes the specific dataset
Description
Deletes the specific dataset. The dataset will be deleted permanently, and the action can't be undone. Datasets that this dataset was merged with will no longer report the merge. Any subsequent operation on this dataset will result in a ResourceNotFoundException.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_delete_dataset/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_delete_dataset(IdentityPoolId, IdentityId, DatasetName)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. GUID generation is unique within a region. |
IdentityId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. GUID generation is unique within a region. |
DatasetName |
[required] A string of up to 128 characters. Allowed characters are a-z, A-Z, 0-9, '_' (underscore), '-' (dash), and '.' (dot). |
Gets meta data about a dataset by identity and dataset name
Description
Gets meta data about a dataset by identity and dataset name. With Amazon Cognito Sync, each identity has access only to its own data. Thus, the credentials used to make this API call need to have access to the identity data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_describe_dataset/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_describe_dataset(IdentityPoolId, IdentityId, DatasetName)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. GUID generation is unique within a region. |
IdentityId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. GUID generation is unique within a region. |
DatasetName |
[required] A string of up to 128 characters. Allowed characters are a-z, A-Z, 0-9, '_' (underscore), '-' (dash), and '.' (dot). |
Gets usage details (for example, data storage) about a particular identity pool
Description
Gets usage details (for example, data storage) about a particular identity pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_describe_identity_pool_usage/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_describe_identity_pool_usage(IdentityPoolId)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. GUID generation is unique within a region. |
Gets usage information for an identity, including number of datasets and data usage
Description
Gets usage information for an identity, including number of datasets and data usage.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_describe_identity_usage/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_describe_identity_usage(IdentityPoolId, IdentityId)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. GUID generation is unique within a region. |
IdentityId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. GUID generation is unique within a region. |
Get the status of the last BulkPublish operation for an identity pool
Description
Get the status of the last BulkPublish operation for an identity pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_get_bulk_publish_details/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_get_bulk_publish_details(IdentityPoolId)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. GUID generation is unique within a region. |
Gets the events and the corresponding Lambda functions associated with an identity pool
Description
Gets the events and the corresponding Lambda functions associated with an identity pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_get_cognito_events/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_get_cognito_events(IdentityPoolId)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] The Cognito Identity Pool ID for the request |
Gets the configuration settings of an identity pool
Description
Gets the configuration settings of an identity pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_get_identity_pool_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_get_identity_pool_configuration(IdentityPoolId)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. This is the ID of the pool for which to return a configuration. |
Lists datasets for an identity
Description
Lists datasets for an identity. With Amazon Cognito Sync, each identity has access only to its own data. Thus, the credentials used to make this API call need to have access to the identity data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_list_datasets/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_list_datasets(
IdentityPoolId,
IdentityId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. GUID generation is unique within a region. |
IdentityId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. GUID generation is unique within a region. |
NextToken |
A pagination token for obtaining the next page of results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned. |
Gets a list of identity pools registered with Cognito
Description
Gets a list of identity pools registered with Cognito.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_list_identity_pool_usage/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_list_identity_pool_usage(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
A pagination token for obtaining the next page of results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned. |
Gets paginated records, optionally changed after a particular sync count for a dataset and identity
Description
Gets paginated records, optionally changed after a particular sync count for a dataset and identity. With Amazon Cognito Sync, each identity has access only to its own data. Thus, the credentials used to make this API call need to have access to the identity data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_list_records/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_list_records(
IdentityPoolId,
IdentityId,
DatasetName,
LastSyncCount = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
SyncSessionToken = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. GUID generation is unique within a region. |
IdentityId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. GUID generation is unique within a region. |
DatasetName |
[required] A string of up to 128 characters. Allowed characters are a-z, A-Z, 0-9, '_' (underscore), '-' (dash), and '.' (dot). |
LastSyncCount |
The last server sync count for this record. |
NextToken |
A pagination token for obtaining the next page of results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned. |
SyncSessionToken |
A token containing a session ID, identity ID, and expiration. |
Registers a device to receive push sync notifications
Description
Registers a device to receive push sync notifications.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_register_device/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_register_device(IdentityPoolId, IdentityId, Platform, Token)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. Here, the ID of the pool that the identity belongs to. |
IdentityId |
[required] The unique ID for this identity. |
Platform |
[required] The SNS platform type (e.g. GCM, SDM, APNS, APNS_SANDBOX). |
Token |
[required] The push token. |
Sets the AWS Lambda function for a given event type for an identity pool
Description
Sets the AWS Lambda function for a given event type for an identity pool. This request only updates the key/value pair specified. Other key/values pairs are not updated. To remove a key value pair, pass a empty value for the particular key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_set_cognito_events/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_set_cognito_events(IdentityPoolId, Events)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] The Cognito Identity Pool to use when configuring Cognito Events |
Events |
[required] The events to configure |
Sets the necessary configuration for push sync
Description
Sets the necessary configuration for push sync.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_set_identity_pool_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_set_identity_pool_configuration(
IdentityPoolId,
PushSync = NULL,
CognitoStreams = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. This is the ID of the pool to modify. |
PushSync |
Options to apply to this identity pool for push synchronization. |
CognitoStreams |
Options to apply to this identity pool for Amazon Cognito streams. |
Subscribes to receive notifications when a dataset is modified by another device
Description
Subscribes to receive notifications when a dataset is modified by another device.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_subscribe_to_dataset/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_subscribe_to_dataset(
IdentityPoolId,
IdentityId,
DatasetName,
DeviceId
)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. The ID of the pool to which the identity belongs. |
IdentityId |
[required] Unique ID for this identity. |
DatasetName |
[required] The name of the dataset to subcribe to. |
DeviceId |
[required] The unique ID generated for this device by Cognito. |
Unsubscribes from receiving notifications when a dataset is modified by another device
Description
Unsubscribes from receiving notifications when a dataset is modified by another device.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_unsubscribe_from_dataset/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_unsubscribe_from_dataset(
IdentityPoolId,
IdentityId,
DatasetName,
DeviceId
)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. The ID of the pool to which this identity belongs. |
IdentityId |
[required] Unique ID for this identity. |
DatasetName |
[required] The name of the dataset from which to unsubcribe. |
DeviceId |
[required] The unique ID generated for this device by Cognito. |
Posts updates to records and adds and deletes records for a dataset and user
Description
Posts updates to records and adds and deletes records for a dataset and user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cognitosync_update_records/ for full documentation.
Usage
cognitosync_update_records(
IdentityPoolId,
IdentityId,
DatasetName,
DeviceId = NULL,
RecordPatches = NULL,
SyncSessionToken,
ClientContext = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityPoolId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. GUID generation is unique within a region. |
IdentityId |
[required] A name-spaced GUID (for example, us-east-1:23EC4050-6AEA-7089-A2DD-08002EXAMPLE) created by Amazon Cognito. GUID generation is unique within a region. |
DatasetName |
[required] A string of up to 128 characters. Allowed characters are a-z, A-Z, 0-9, '_' (underscore), '-' (dash), and '.' (dot). |
DeviceId |
The unique ID generated for this device by Cognito. |
RecordPatches |
A list of patch operations. |
SyncSessionToken |
[required] The SyncSessionToken returned by a previous call to ListRecords for this dataset and identity. |
ClientContext |
Intended to supply a device ID that will populate the lastModifiedBy field referenced in other methods. The ClientContext field is not yet implemented. |
Amazon Detective
Description
Detective uses machine learning and purpose-built visualizations to help you to analyze and investigate security issues across your Amazon Web Services (Amazon Web Services) workloads. Detective automatically extracts time-based events such as login attempts, API calls, and network traffic from CloudTrail and Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC) flow logs. It also extracts findings detected by Amazon GuardDuty.
The Detective API primarily supports the creation and management of behavior graphs. A behavior graph contains the extracted data from a set of member accounts, and is created and managed by an administrator account.
To add a member account to the behavior graph, the administrator account sends an invitation to the account. When the account accepts the invitation, it becomes a member account in the behavior graph.
Detective is also integrated with Organizations. The organization management account designates the Detective administrator account for the organization. That account becomes the administrator account for the organization behavior graph. The Detective administrator account is also the delegated administrator account for Detective in Organizations.
The Detective administrator account can enable any organization account as a member account in the organization behavior graph. The organization accounts do not receive invitations. The Detective administrator account can also invite other accounts to the organization behavior graph.
Every behavior graph is specific to a Region. You can only use the API to manage behavior graphs that belong to the Region that is associated with the currently selected endpoint.
The administrator account for a behavior graph can use the Detective API to do the following:
Enable and disable Detective. Enabling Detective creates a new behavior graph.
View the list of member accounts in a behavior graph.
Add member accounts to a behavior graph.
Remove member accounts from a behavior graph.
Apply tags to a behavior graph.
The organization management account can use the Detective API to select the delegated administrator for Detective.
The Detective administrator account for an organization can use the Detective API to do the following:
Perform all of the functions of an administrator account.
Determine whether to automatically enable new organization accounts as member accounts in the organization behavior graph.
An invited member account can use the Detective API to do the following:
View the list of behavior graphs that they are invited to.
Accept an invitation to contribute to a behavior graph.
Decline an invitation to contribute to a behavior graph.
Remove their account from a behavior graph.
All API actions are logged as CloudTrail events. See Logging Detective API Calls with CloudTrail.
We replaced the term "master account" with the term "administrator account". An administrator account is used to centrally manage multiple accounts. In the case of Detective, the administrator account manages the accounts in their behavior graph.
Usage
detective(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- detective( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
accept_invitation | Accepts an invitation for the member account to contribute data to a behavior graph |
batch_get_graph_member_datasources | Gets data source package information for the behavior graph |
batch_get_membership_datasources | Gets information on the data source package history for an account |
create_graph | Creates a new behavior graph for the calling account, and sets that account as the administrator account |
create_members | CreateMembers is used to send invitations to accounts |
delete_graph | Disables the specified behavior graph and queues it to be deleted |
delete_members | Removes the specified member accounts from the behavior graph |
describe_organization_configuration | Returns information about the configuration for the organization behavior graph |
disable_organization_admin_account | Removes the Detective administrator account in the current Region |
disassociate_membership | Removes the member account from the specified behavior graph |
enable_organization_admin_account | Designates the Detective administrator account for the organization in the current Region |
get_investigation | Detective investigations lets you investigate IAM users and IAM roles using indicators of compromise |
get_members | Returns the membership details for specified member accounts for a behavior graph |
list_datasource_packages | Lists data source packages in the behavior graph |
list_graphs | Returns the list of behavior graphs that the calling account is an administrator account of |
list_indicators | Gets the indicators from an investigation |
list_investigations | Detective investigations lets you investigate IAM users and IAM roles using indicators of compromise |
list_invitations | Retrieves the list of open and accepted behavior graph invitations for the member account |
list_members | Retrieves the list of member accounts for a behavior graph |
list_organization_admin_accounts | Returns information about the Detective administrator account for an organization |
list_tags_for_resource | Returns the tag values that are assigned to a behavior graph |
reject_invitation | Rejects an invitation to contribute the account data to a behavior graph |
start_investigation | Detective investigations lets you investigate IAM users and IAM roles using indicators of compromise |
start_monitoring_member | Sends a request to enable data ingest for a member account that has a status of ACCEPTED_BUT_DISABLED |
tag_resource | Applies tag values to a behavior graph |
untag_resource | Removes tags from a behavior graph |
update_datasource_packages | Starts a data source package for the Detective behavior graph |
update_investigation_state | Updates the state of an investigation |
update_organization_configuration | Updates the configuration for the Organizations integration in the current Region |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- detective()
svc$accept_invitation(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Accepts an invitation for the member account to contribute data to a behavior graph
Description
Accepts an invitation for the member account to contribute data to a behavior graph. This operation can only be called by an invited member account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_accept_invitation/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_accept_invitation(GraphArn)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph that the member account is accepting the invitation for. The member account status in the behavior graph must be |
Gets data source package information for the behavior graph
Description
Gets data source package information for the behavior graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_batch_get_graph_member_datasources/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_batch_get_graph_member_datasources(GraphArn, AccountIds)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph. |
AccountIds |
[required] The list of Amazon Web Services accounts to get data source package information on. |
Gets information on the data source package history for an account
Description
Gets information on the data source package history for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_batch_get_membership_datasources/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_batch_get_membership_datasources(GraphArns)
Arguments
GraphArns |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph. |
Creates a new behavior graph for the calling account, and sets that account as the administrator account
Description
Creates a new behavior graph for the calling account, and sets that account as the administrator account. This operation is called by the account that is enabling Detective.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_create_graph/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_create_graph(Tags = NULL)
Arguments
Tags |
The tags to assign to the new behavior graph. You can add up to 50 tags. For each tag, you provide the tag key and the tag value. Each tag key can contain up to 128 characters. Each tag value can contain up to 256 characters. |
CreateMembers is used to send invitations to accounts
Description
create_members
is used to send invitations to accounts. For the organization behavior graph, the Detective administrator account uses create_members
to enable organization accounts as member accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_create_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_create_members(
GraphArn,
Message = NULL,
DisableEmailNotification = NULL,
Accounts
)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph. |
Message |
Customized message text to include in the invitation email message to the invited member accounts. |
DisableEmailNotification |
if set to Organization accounts in the organization behavior graph do not receive email notifications. |
Accounts |
[required] The list of Amazon Web Services accounts to invite or to enable. You can invite or enable up to 50 accounts at a time. For each invited account, the account list contains the account identifier and the Amazon Web Services account root user email address. For organization accounts in the organization behavior graph, the email address is not required. |
Disables the specified behavior graph and queues it to be deleted
Description
Disables the specified behavior graph and queues it to be deleted. This operation removes the behavior graph from each member account's list of behavior graphs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_delete_graph/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_delete_graph(GraphArn)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph to disable. |
Removes the specified member accounts from the behavior graph
Description
Removes the specified member accounts from the behavior graph. The removed accounts no longer contribute data to the behavior graph. This operation can only be called by the administrator account for the behavior graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_delete_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_delete_members(GraphArn, AccountIds)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph to remove members from. |
AccountIds |
[required] The list of Amazon Web Services account identifiers for the member accounts to remove from the behavior graph. You can remove up to 50 member accounts at a time. |
Returns information about the configuration for the organization behavior graph
Description
Returns information about the configuration for the organization behavior graph. Currently indicates whether to automatically enable new organization accounts as member accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_describe_organization_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_describe_organization_configuration(GraphArn)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The ARN of the organization behavior graph. |
Removes the Detective administrator account in the current Region
Description
Removes the Detective administrator account in the current Region. Deletes the organization behavior graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_disable_organization_admin_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_disable_organization_admin_account()
Removes the member account from the specified behavior graph
Description
Removes the member account from the specified behavior graph. This operation can only be called by an invited member account that has the ENABLED
status.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_disassociate_membership/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_disassociate_membership(GraphArn)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph to remove the member account from. The member account's member status in the behavior graph must be
|
Designates the Detective administrator account for the organization in the current Region
Description
Designates the Detective administrator account for the organization in the current Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_enable_organization_admin_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_enable_organization_admin_account(AccountId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account identifier of the account to designate as the Detective administrator account for the organization. |
Detective investigations lets you investigate IAM users and IAM roles using indicators of compromise
Description
Detective investigations lets you investigate IAM users and IAM roles using indicators of compromise. An indicator of compromise (IOC) is an artifact observed in or on a network, system, or environment that can (with a high level of confidence) identify malicious activity or a security incident. get_investigation
returns the investigation results of an investigation for a behavior graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_get_investigation/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_get_investigation(GraphArn, InvestigationId)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the behavior graph. |
InvestigationId |
[required] The investigation ID of the investigation report. |
Returns the membership details for specified member accounts for a behavior graph
Description
Returns the membership details for specified member accounts for a behavior graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_get_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_get_members(GraphArn, AccountIds)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph for which to request the member details. |
AccountIds |
[required] The list of Amazon Web Services account identifiers for the member account for which to return member details. You can request details for up to 50 member accounts at a time. You cannot use |
Lists data source packages in the behavior graph
Description
Lists data source packages in the behavior graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_list_datasource_packages/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_list_datasource_packages(
GraphArn,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph. |
NextToken |
For requests to get the next page of results, the pagination token that was returned with the previous set of results. The initial request does not include a pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
Returns the list of behavior graphs that the calling account is an administrator account of
Description
Returns the list of behavior graphs that the calling account is an administrator account of. This operation can only be called by an administrator account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_list_graphs/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_list_graphs(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
For requests to get the next page of results, the pagination token that was returned with the previous set of results. The initial request does not include a pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of graphs to return at a time. The total must be less than the overall limit on the number of results to return, which is currently 200. |
Gets the indicators from an investigation
Description
Gets the indicators from an investigation. You can use the information from the indicators to determine if an IAM user and/or IAM role is involved in an unusual activity that could indicate malicious behavior and its impact.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_list_indicators/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_list_indicators(
GraphArn,
InvestigationId,
IndicatorType = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the behavior graph. |
InvestigationId |
[required] The investigation ID of the investigation report. |
IndicatorType |
For the list of indicators of compromise that are generated by Detective investigations, see Detective investigations. |
NextToken |
Lists if there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Repeat the call using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged. Each pagination token expires after 24 hours. Using an expired pagination token will return a Validation Exception error. |
MaxResults |
Lists the maximum number of indicators in a page. |
Detective investigations lets you investigate IAM users and IAM roles using indicators of compromise
Description
Detective investigations lets you investigate IAM users and IAM roles using indicators of compromise. An indicator of compromise (IOC) is an artifact observed in or on a network, system, or environment that can (with a high level of confidence) identify malicious activity or a security incident. list_investigations
lists all active Detective investigations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_list_investigations/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_list_investigations(
GraphArn,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
FilterCriteria = NULL,
SortCriteria = NULL
)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the behavior graph. |
NextToken |
Lists if there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Repeat the call using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged. Each pagination token expires after 24 hours. Using an expired pagination token will return a Validation Exception error. |
MaxResults |
Lists the maximum number of investigations in a page. |
FilterCriteria |
Filters the investigation results based on a criteria. |
SortCriteria |
Sorts the investigation results based on a criteria. |
Retrieves the list of open and accepted behavior graph invitations for the member account
Description
Retrieves the list of open and accepted behavior graph invitations for the member account. This operation can only be called by an invited member account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_list_invitations/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_list_invitations(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
For requests to retrieve the next page of results, the pagination token that was returned with the previous page of results. The initial request does not include a pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of behavior graph invitations to return in the response. The total must be less than the overall limit on the number of results to return, which is currently 200. |
Retrieves the list of member accounts for a behavior graph
Description
Retrieves the list of member accounts for a behavior graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_list_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_list_members(GraphArn, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph for which to retrieve the list of member accounts. |
NextToken |
For requests to retrieve the next page of member account results, the pagination token that was returned with the previous page of results. The initial request does not include a pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of member accounts to include in the response. The total must be less than the overall limit on the number of results to return, which is currently 200. |
Returns information about the Detective administrator account for an organization
Description
Returns information about the Detective administrator account for an organization. Can only be called by the organization management account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_list_organization_admin_accounts/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_list_organization_admin_accounts(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
For requests to get the next page of results, the pagination token that was returned with the previous set of results. The initial request does not include a pagination token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
Returns the tag values that are assigned to a behavior graph
Description
Returns the tag values that are assigned to a behavior graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph for which to retrieve the tag values. |
Rejects an invitation to contribute the account data to a behavior graph
Description
Rejects an invitation to contribute the account data to a behavior graph. This operation must be called by an invited member account that has the INVITED
status.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_reject_invitation/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_reject_invitation(GraphArn)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph to reject the invitation to. The member account's current member status in the behavior graph must be
|
Detective investigations lets you investigate IAM users and IAM roles using indicators of compromise
Description
Detective investigations lets you investigate IAM users and IAM roles using indicators of compromise. An indicator of compromise (IOC) is an artifact observed in or on a network, system, or environment that can (with a high level of confidence) identify malicious activity or a security incident. start_investigation
initiates an investigation on an entity in a behavior graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_start_investigation/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_start_investigation(
GraphArn,
EntityArn,
ScopeStartTime,
ScopeEndTime
)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the behavior graph. |
EntityArn |
[required] The unique Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM user and IAM role. |
ScopeStartTime |
[required] The data and time when the investigation began. The value is an UTC
ISO8601 formatted string. For example, |
ScopeEndTime |
[required] The data and time when the investigation ended. The value is an UTC
ISO8601 formatted string. For example, |
Sends a request to enable data ingest for a member account that has a status of ACCEPTED_BUT_DISABLED
Description
Sends a request to enable data ingest for a member account that has a status of ACCEPTED_BUT_DISABLED
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_start_monitoring_member/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_start_monitoring_member(GraphArn, AccountId)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph. |
AccountId |
[required] The account ID of the member account to try to enable. The account must be an invited member account with a status of
|
Applies tag values to a behavior graph
Description
Applies tag values to a behavior graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph to assign the tags to. |
Tags |
[required] The tags to assign to the behavior graph. You can add up to 50 tags. For each tag, you provide the tag key and the tag value. Each tag key can contain up to 128 characters. Each tag value can contain up to 256 characters. |
Removes tags from a behavior graph
Description
Removes tags from a behavior graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph to remove the tags from. |
TagKeys |
[required] The tag keys of the tags to remove from the behavior graph. You can remove up to 50 tags at a time. |
Starts a data source package for the Detective behavior graph
Description
Starts a data source package for the Detective behavior graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_update_datasource_packages/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_update_datasource_packages(GraphArn, DatasourcePackages)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The ARN of the behavior graph. |
DatasourcePackages |
[required] The data source package to start for the behavior graph. |
Updates the state of an investigation
Description
Updates the state of an investigation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_update_investigation_state/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_update_investigation_state(GraphArn, InvestigationId, State)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the behavior graph. |
InvestigationId |
[required] The investigation ID of the investigation report. |
State |
[required] The current state of the investigation. An archived investigation indicates you have completed reviewing the investigation. |
Updates the configuration for the Organizations integration in the current Region
Description
Updates the configuration for the Organizations integration in the current Region. Can only be called by the Detective administrator account for the organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/detective_update_organization_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
detective_update_organization_configuration(GraphArn, AutoEnable = NULL)
Arguments
GraphArn |
[required] The ARN of the organization behavior graph. |
AutoEnable |
Indicates whether to automatically enable new organization accounts as member accounts in the organization behavior graph. |
AWS Directory Service
Description
Directory Service
Directory Service is a web service that makes it easy for you to setup and run directories in the Amazon Web Services cloud, or connect your Amazon Web Services resources with an existing self-managed Microsoft Active Directory. This guide provides detailed information about Directory Service operations, data types, parameters, and errors. For information about Directory Services features, see Directory Service and the Directory Service Administration Guide.
Amazon Web Services provides SDKs that consist of libraries and sample code for various programming languages and platforms (Java, Ruby, .Net, iOS, Android, etc.). The SDKs provide a convenient way to create programmatic access to Directory Service and other Amazon Web Services services. For more information about the Amazon Web Services SDKs, including how to download and install them, see Tools for Amazon Web Services.
Usage
directoryservice(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- directoryservice( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
accept_shared_directory | Accepts a directory sharing request that was sent from the directory owner account |
add_ip_routes | If the DNS server for your self-managed domain uses a publicly addressable IP address, you must add a CIDR address block to correctly route traffic to and from your Microsoft AD on Amazon Web Services |
add_region | Adds two domain controllers in the specified Region for the specified directory |
add_tags_to_resource | Adds or overwrites one or more tags for the specified directory |
cancel_schema_extension | Cancels an in-progress schema extension to a Microsoft AD directory |
connect_directory | Creates an AD Connector to connect to a self-managed directory |
create_alias | Creates an alias for a directory and assigns the alias to the directory |
create_computer | Creates an Active Directory computer object in the specified directory |
create_conditional_forwarder | Creates a conditional forwarder associated with your Amazon Web Services directory |
create_directory | Creates a Simple AD directory |
create_log_subscription | Creates a subscription to forward real-time Directory Service domain controller security logs to the specified Amazon CloudWatch log group in your Amazon Web Services account |
create_microsoft_ad | Creates a Microsoft AD directory in the Amazon Web Services Cloud |
create_snapshot | Creates a snapshot of a Simple AD or Microsoft AD directory in the Amazon Web Services cloud |
create_trust | Directory Service for Microsoft Active Directory allows you to configure trust relationships |
delete_conditional_forwarder | Deletes a conditional forwarder that has been set up for your Amazon Web Services directory |
delete_directory | Deletes an Directory Service directory |
delete_log_subscription | Deletes the specified log subscription |
delete_snapshot | Deletes a directory snapshot |
delete_trust | Deletes an existing trust relationship between your Managed Microsoft AD directory and an external domain |
deregister_certificate | Deletes from the system the certificate that was registered for secure LDAP or client certificate authentication |
deregister_event_topic | Removes the specified directory as a publisher to the specified Amazon SNS topic |
describe_certificate | Displays information about the certificate registered for secure LDAP or client certificate authentication |
describe_client_authentication_settings | Retrieves information about the type of client authentication for the specified directory, if the type is specified |
describe_conditional_forwarders | Obtains information about the conditional forwarders for this account |
describe_directories | Obtains information about the directories that belong to this account |
describe_directory_data_access | Obtains status of directory data access enablement through the Directory Service Data API for the specified directory |
describe_domain_controllers | Provides information about any domain controllers in your directory |
describe_event_topics | Obtains information about which Amazon SNS topics receive status messages from the specified directory |
describe_ldaps_settings | Describes the status of LDAP security for the specified directory |
describe_regions | Provides information about the Regions that are configured for multi-Region replication |
describe_settings | Retrieves information about the configurable settings for the specified directory |
describe_shared_directories | Returns the shared directories in your account |
describe_snapshots | Obtains information about the directory snapshots that belong to this account |
describe_trusts | Obtains information about the trust relationships for this account |
describe_update_directory | Describes the updates of a directory for a particular update type |
disable_client_authentication | Disables alternative client authentication methods for the specified directory |
disable_directory_data_access | Deactivates access to directory data via the Directory Service Data API for the specified directory |
disable_ldaps | Deactivates LDAP secure calls for the specified directory |
disable_radius | Disables multi-factor authentication (MFA) with the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server for an AD Connector or Microsoft AD directory |
disable_sso | Disables single-sign on for a directory |
enable_client_authentication | Enables alternative client authentication methods for the specified directory |
enable_directory_data_access | Enables access to directory data via the Directory Service Data API for the specified directory |
enable_ldaps | Activates the switch for the specific directory to always use LDAP secure calls |
enable_radius | Enables multi-factor authentication (MFA) with the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server for an AD Connector or Microsoft AD directory |
enable_sso | Enables single sign-on for a directory |
get_directory_limits | Obtains directory limit information for the current Region |
get_snapshot_limits | Obtains the manual snapshot limits for a directory |
list_certificates | For the specified directory, lists all the certificates registered for a secure LDAP or client certificate authentication |
list_ip_routes | Lists the address blocks that you have added to a directory |
list_log_subscriptions | Lists the active log subscriptions for the Amazon Web Services account |
list_schema_extensions | Lists all schema extensions applied to a Microsoft AD Directory |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists all tags on a directory |
register_certificate | Registers a certificate for a secure LDAP or client certificate authentication |
register_event_topic | Associates a directory with an Amazon SNS topic |
reject_shared_directory | Rejects a directory sharing request that was sent from the directory owner account |
remove_ip_routes | Removes IP address blocks from a directory |
remove_region | Stops all replication and removes the domain controllers from the specified Region |
remove_tags_from_resource | Removes tags from a directory |
reset_user_password | Resets the password for any user in your Managed Microsoft AD or Simple AD directory |
restore_from_snapshot | Restores a directory using an existing directory snapshot |
share_directory | Shares a specified directory (DirectoryId) in your Amazon Web Services account (directory owner) with another Amazon Web Services account (directory consumer) |
start_schema_extension | Applies a schema extension to a Microsoft AD directory |
unshare_directory | Stops the directory sharing between the directory owner and consumer accounts |
update_conditional_forwarder | Updates a conditional forwarder that has been set up for your Amazon Web Services directory |
update_directory_setup | Updates the directory for a particular update type |
update_number_of_domain_controllers | Adds or removes domain controllers to or from the directory |
update_radius | Updates the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server information for an AD Connector or Microsoft AD directory |
update_settings | Updates the configurable settings for the specified directory |
update_trust | Updates the trust that has been set up between your Managed Microsoft AD directory and an self-managed Active Directory |
verify_trust | Directory Service for Microsoft Active Directory allows you to configure and verify trust relationships |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- directoryservice()
svc$accept_shared_directory(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Accepts a directory sharing request that was sent from the directory owner account
Description
Accepts a directory sharing request that was sent from the directory owner account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_accept_shared_directory/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_accept_shared_directory(SharedDirectoryId)
Arguments
SharedDirectoryId |
[required] Identifier of the shared directory in the directory consumer account. This identifier is different for each directory owner account. |
If the DNS server for your self-managed domain uses a publicly addressable IP address, you must add a CIDR address block to correctly route traffic to and from your Microsoft AD on Amazon Web Services
Description
If the DNS server for your self-managed domain uses a publicly addressable IP address, you must add a CIDR address block to correctly route traffic to and from your Microsoft AD on Amazon Web Services. AddIpRoutes adds this address block. You can also use AddIpRoutes to facilitate routing traffic that uses public IP ranges from your Microsoft AD on Amazon Web Services to a peer VPC.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_add_ip_routes/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_add_ip_routes(
DirectoryId,
IpRoutes,
UpdateSecurityGroupForDirectoryControllers = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] Identifier (ID) of the directory to which to add the address block. |
IpRoutes |
[required] IP address blocks, using CIDR format, of the traffic to route. This is often the IP address block of the DNS server used for your self-managed domain. |
UpdateSecurityGroupForDirectoryControllers |
If set to true, updates the inbound and outbound rules of the security group that has the description: "Amazon Web Services created security group for directory ID directory controllers." Following are the new rules: Inbound:
Outbound:
These security rules impact an internal network interface that is not exposed publicly. |
Adds two domain controllers in the specified Region for the specified directory
Description
Adds two domain controllers in the specified Region for the specified directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_add_region/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_add_region(DirectoryId, RegionName, VPCSettings)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory to which you want to add Region replication. |
RegionName |
[required] The name of the Region where you want to add domain controllers for
replication. For example, |
VPCSettings |
[required] |
Adds or overwrites one or more tags for the specified directory
Description
Adds or overwrites one or more tags for the specified directory. Each directory can have a maximum of 50 tags. Each tag consists of a key and optional value. Tag keys must be unique to each resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_add_tags_to_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_add_tags_to_resource(ResourceId, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceId |
[required] Identifier (ID) for the directory to which to add the tag. |
Tags |
[required] The tags to be assigned to the directory. |
Cancels an in-progress schema extension to a Microsoft AD directory
Description
Cancels an in-progress schema extension to a Microsoft AD directory. Once a schema extension has started replicating to all domain controllers, the task can no longer be canceled. A schema extension can be canceled during any of the following states; Initializing
, CreatingSnapshot
, and UpdatingSchema
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_cancel_schema_extension/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_cancel_schema_extension(DirectoryId, SchemaExtensionId)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory whose schema extension will be canceled. |
SchemaExtensionId |
[required] The identifier of the schema extension that will be canceled. |
Creates an AD Connector to connect to a self-managed directory
Description
Creates an AD Connector to connect to a self-managed directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_connect_directory/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_connect_directory(
Name,
ShortName = NULL,
Password,
Description = NULL,
Size,
ConnectSettings,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The fully qualified name of your self-managed directory, such as
|
ShortName |
The NetBIOS name of your self-managed directory, such as |
Password |
[required] The password for your self-managed user account. |
Description |
A description for the directory. |
Size |
[required] The size of the directory. |
ConnectSettings |
[required] A DirectoryConnectSettings object that contains additional information for the operation. |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to AD Connector. |
Creates an alias for a directory and assigns the alias to the directory
Description
Creates an alias for a directory and assigns the alias to the directory. The alias is used to construct the access URL for the directory, such as http://<alias>.awsapps.com
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_create_alias/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_create_alias(DirectoryId, Alias)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory for which to create the alias. |
Alias |
[required] The requested alias. The alias must be unique amongst all aliases in Amazon Web Services.
This operation throws an |
Creates an Active Directory computer object in the specified directory
Description
Creates an Active Directory computer object in the specified directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_create_computer/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_create_computer(
DirectoryId,
ComputerName,
Password,
OrganizationalUnitDistinguishedName = NULL,
ComputerAttributes = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory in which to create the computer account. |
ComputerName |
[required] The name of the computer account. |
Password |
[required] A one-time password that is used to join the computer to the directory. You should generate a random, strong password to use for this parameter. |
OrganizationalUnitDistinguishedName |
The fully-qualified distinguished name of the organizational unit to place the computer account in. |
ComputerAttributes |
An array of Attribute objects that contain any LDAP attributes to apply to the computer account. |
Creates a conditional forwarder associated with your Amazon Web Services directory
Description
Creates a conditional forwarder associated with your Amazon Web Services directory. Conditional forwarders are required in order to set up a trust relationship with another domain. The conditional forwarder points to the trusted domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_create_conditional_forwarder/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_create_conditional_forwarder(
DirectoryId,
RemoteDomainName,
DnsIpAddrs
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The directory ID of the Amazon Web Services directory for which you are creating the conditional forwarder. |
RemoteDomainName |
[required] The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the remote domain with which you will set up a trust relationship. |
DnsIpAddrs |
[required] The IP addresses of the remote DNS server associated with RemoteDomainName. |
Creates a Simple AD directory
Description
Creates a Simple AD directory. For more information, see Simple Active Directory in the Directory Service Admin Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_create_directory/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_create_directory(
Name,
ShortName = NULL,
Password,
Description = NULL,
Size,
VpcSettings = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The fully qualified name for the directory, such as |
ShortName |
The NetBIOS name of the directory, such as |
Password |
[required] The password for the directory administrator. The directory creation
process creates a directory administrator account with the user name
If you need to change the password for the administrator account, you
can use the
The regex pattern for this string is made up of the following conditions:
AND any 3 of the following password complexity rules required by Active Directory:
For additional information about how Active Directory passwords are enforced, see Password must meet complexity requirements on the Microsoft website. |
Description |
A description for the directory. |
Size |
[required] The size of the directory. |
VpcSettings |
A DirectoryVpcSettings object that contains additional information for the operation. |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the Simple AD directory. |
Creates a subscription to forward real-time Directory Service domain controller security logs to the specified Amazon CloudWatch log group in your Amazon Web Services account
Description
Creates a subscription to forward real-time Directory Service domain controller security logs to the specified Amazon CloudWatch log group in your Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_create_log_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_create_log_subscription(DirectoryId, LogGroupName)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] Identifier of the directory to which you want to subscribe and receive real-time logs to your specified CloudWatch log group. |
LogGroupName |
[required] The name of the CloudWatch log group where the real-time domain controller logs are forwarded. |
Creates a Microsoft AD directory in the Amazon Web Services Cloud
Description
Creates a Microsoft AD directory in the Amazon Web Services Cloud. For more information, see Managed Microsoft AD in the Directory Service Admin Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_create_microsoft_ad/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_create_microsoft_ad(
Name,
ShortName = NULL,
Password,
Description = NULL,
VpcSettings,
Edition = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The fully qualified domain name for the Managed Microsoft AD directory,
such as |
ShortName |
The NetBIOS name for your domain, such as |
Password |
[required] The password for the default administrative user named If you need to change the password for the administrator account, you
can use the
|
Description |
A description for the directory. This label will appear on the Amazon
Web Services console |
VpcSettings |
[required] Contains VPC information for the
|
Edition |
Managed Microsoft AD is available in two editions: |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the Managed Microsoft AD directory. |
Creates a snapshot of a Simple AD or Microsoft AD directory in the Amazon Web Services cloud
Description
Creates a snapshot of a Simple AD or Microsoft AD directory in the Amazon Web Services cloud.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_create_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_create_snapshot(DirectoryId, Name = NULL)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory of which to take a snapshot. |
Name |
The descriptive name to apply to the snapshot. |
Directory Service for Microsoft Active Directory allows you to configure trust relationships
Description
Directory Service for Microsoft Active Directory allows you to configure trust relationships. For example, you can establish a trust between your Managed Microsoft AD directory, and your existing self-managed Microsoft Active Directory. This would allow you to provide users and groups access to resources in either domain, with a single set of credentials.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_create_trust/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_create_trust(
DirectoryId,
RemoteDomainName,
TrustPassword,
TrustDirection,
TrustType = NULL,
ConditionalForwarderIpAddrs = NULL,
SelectiveAuth = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The Directory ID of the Managed Microsoft AD directory for which to establish the trust relationship. |
RemoteDomainName |
[required] The Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of the external domain for which to create the trust relationship. |
TrustPassword |
[required] The trust password. The trust password must be the same password that was used when creating the trust relationship on the external domain. |
TrustDirection |
[required] The direction of the trust relationship. |
TrustType |
The trust relationship type. |
ConditionalForwarderIpAddrs |
The IP addresses of the remote DNS server associated with RemoteDomainName. |
SelectiveAuth |
Optional parameter to enable selective authentication for the trust. |
Deletes a conditional forwarder that has been set up for your Amazon Web Services directory
Description
Deletes a conditional forwarder that has been set up for your Amazon Web Services directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_delete_conditional_forwarder/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_delete_conditional_forwarder(DirectoryId, RemoteDomainName)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The directory ID for which you are deleting the conditional forwarder. |
RemoteDomainName |
[required] The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the remote domain with which you are deleting the conditional forwarder. |
Deletes an Directory Service directory
Description
Deletes an Directory Service directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_delete_directory/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_delete_directory(DirectoryId)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory to delete. |
Deletes the specified log subscription
Description
Deletes the specified log subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_delete_log_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_delete_log_subscription(DirectoryId)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] Identifier of the directory whose log subscription you want to delete. |
Deletes a directory snapshot
Description
Deletes a directory snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_delete_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_delete_snapshot(SnapshotId)
Arguments
SnapshotId |
[required] The identifier of the directory snapshot to be deleted. |
Deletes an existing trust relationship between your Managed Microsoft AD directory and an external domain
Description
Deletes an existing trust relationship between your Managed Microsoft AD directory and an external domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_delete_trust/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_delete_trust(
TrustId,
DeleteAssociatedConditionalForwarder = NULL
)
Arguments
TrustId |
[required] The Trust ID of the trust relationship to be deleted. |
DeleteAssociatedConditionalForwarder |
Delete a conditional forwarder as part of a DeleteTrustRequest. |
Deletes from the system the certificate that was registered for secure LDAP or client certificate authentication
Description
Deletes from the system the certificate that was registered for secure LDAP or client certificate authentication.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_deregister_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_deregister_certificate(DirectoryId, CertificateId)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory. |
CertificateId |
[required] The identifier of the certificate. |
Removes the specified directory as a publisher to the specified Amazon SNS topic
Description
Removes the specified directory as a publisher to the specified Amazon SNS topic.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_deregister_event_topic/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_deregister_event_topic(DirectoryId, TopicName)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The Directory ID to remove as a publisher. This directory will no longer send messages to the specified Amazon SNS topic. |
TopicName |
[required] The name of the Amazon SNS topic from which to remove the directory as a publisher. |
Displays information about the certificate registered for secure LDAP or client certificate authentication
Description
Displays information about the certificate registered for secure LDAP or client certificate authentication.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_describe_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_describe_certificate(DirectoryId, CertificateId)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory. |
CertificateId |
[required] The identifier of the certificate. |
Retrieves information about the type of client authentication for the specified directory, if the type is specified
Description
Retrieves information about the type of client authentication for the specified directory, if the type is specified. If no type is specified, information about all client authentication types that are supported for the specified directory is retrieved. Currently, only SmartCard
is supported.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_describe_client_authentication_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_describe_client_authentication_settings(
DirectoryId,
Type = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory for which to retrieve information. |
Type |
The type of client authentication for which to retrieve information. If no type is specified, a list of all client authentication types that are supported for the specified directory is retrieved. |
NextToken |
The DescribeClientAuthenticationSettingsResult.NextToken value from a
previous call to
|
Limit |
The maximum number of items to return. If this value is zero, the maximum number of items is specified by the limitations of the operation. |
Obtains information about the conditional forwarders for this account
Description
Obtains information about the conditional forwarders for this account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_describe_conditional_forwarders/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_describe_conditional_forwarders(
DirectoryId,
RemoteDomainNames = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The directory ID for which to get the list of associated conditional forwarders. |
RemoteDomainNames |
The fully qualified domain names (FQDN) of the remote domains for which to get the list of associated conditional forwarders. If this member is null, all conditional forwarders are returned. |
Obtains information about the directories that belong to this account
Description
Obtains information about the directories that belong to this account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_describe_directories/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_describe_directories(
DirectoryIds = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryIds |
A list of identifiers of the directories for which to obtain the information. If this member is null, all directories that belong to the current account are returned. An empty list results in an |
NextToken |
The |
Limit |
The maximum number of items to return. If this value is zero, the maximum number of items is specified by the limitations of the operation. |
Obtains status of directory data access enablement through the Directory Service Data API for the specified directory
Description
Obtains status of directory data access enablement through the Directory Service Data API for the specified directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_describe_directory_data_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_describe_directory_data_access(DirectoryId)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The directory identifier. |
Provides information about any domain controllers in your directory
Description
Provides information about any domain controllers in your directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_describe_domain_controllers/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_describe_domain_controllers(
DirectoryId,
DomainControllerIds = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] Identifier of the directory for which to retrieve the domain controller information. |
DomainControllerIds |
A list of identifiers for the domain controllers whose information will be provided. |
NextToken |
The DescribeDomainControllers.NextToken value from a previous call to
|
Limit |
The maximum number of items to return. |
Obtains information about which Amazon SNS topics receive status messages from the specified directory
Description
Obtains information about which Amazon SNS topics receive status messages from the specified directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_describe_event_topics/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_describe_event_topics(DirectoryId = NULL, TopicNames = NULL)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
The Directory ID for which to get the list of associated Amazon SNS topics. If this member is null, associations for all Directory IDs are returned. |
TopicNames |
A list of Amazon SNS topic names for which to obtain the information. If this member is null, all associations for the specified Directory ID are returned. An empty list results in an |
Describes the status of LDAP security for the specified directory
Description
Describes the status of LDAP security for the specified directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_describe_ldaps_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_describe_ldaps_settings(
DirectoryId,
Type = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory. |
Type |
The type of LDAP security to enable. Currently only the value |
NextToken |
The type of next token used for pagination. |
Limit |
Specifies the number of items that should be displayed on one page. |
Provides information about the Regions that are configured for multi-Region replication
Description
Provides information about the Regions that are configured for multi-Region replication.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_describe_regions/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_describe_regions(
DirectoryId,
RegionName = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory. |
RegionName |
The name of the Region. For example, |
NextToken |
The |
Retrieves information about the configurable settings for the specified directory
Description
Retrieves information about the configurable settings for the specified directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_describe_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_describe_settings(
DirectoryId,
Status = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory for which to retrieve information. |
Status |
The status of the directory settings for which to retrieve information. |
NextToken |
The |
Returns the shared directories in your account
Description
Returns the shared directories in your account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_describe_shared_directories/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_describe_shared_directories(
OwnerDirectoryId,
SharedDirectoryIds = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
OwnerDirectoryId |
[required] Returns the identifier of the directory in the directory owner account. |
SharedDirectoryIds |
A list of identifiers of all shared directories in your account. |
NextToken |
The |
Limit |
The number of shared directories to return in the response object. |
Obtains information about the directory snapshots that belong to this account
Description
Obtains information about the directory snapshots that belong to this account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_describe_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_describe_snapshots(
DirectoryId = NULL,
SnapshotIds = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
The identifier of the directory for which to retrieve snapshot information. |
SnapshotIds |
A list of identifiers of the snapshots to obtain the information for. If this member is null or empty, all snapshots are returned using the Limit and NextToken members. |
NextToken |
The DescribeSnapshotsResult.NextToken value from a previous call to
|
Limit |
The maximum number of objects to return. |
Obtains information about the trust relationships for this account
Description
Obtains information about the trust relationships for this account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_describe_trusts/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_describe_trusts(
DirectoryId = NULL,
TrustIds = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
The Directory ID of the Amazon Web Services directory that is a part of the requested trust relationship. |
TrustIds |
A list of identifiers of the trust relationships for which to obtain the information. If this member is null, all trust relationships that belong to the current account are returned. An empty list results in an |
NextToken |
The DescribeTrustsResult.NextToken value from a previous call to
|
Limit |
The maximum number of objects to return. |
Describes the updates of a directory for a particular update type
Description
Describes the updates of a directory for a particular update type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_describe_update_directory/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_describe_update_directory(
DirectoryId,
UpdateType,
RegionName = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The unique identifier of the directory. |
UpdateType |
[required] The type of updates you want to describe for the directory. |
RegionName |
The name of the Region. |
NextToken |
The |
Disables alternative client authentication methods for the specified directory
Description
Disables alternative client authentication methods for the specified directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_disable_client_authentication/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_disable_client_authentication(DirectoryId, Type)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory |
Type |
[required] The type of client authentication to disable. Currently the only
parameter |
Deactivates access to directory data via the Directory Service Data API for the specified directory
Description
Deactivates access to directory data via the Directory Service Data API for the specified directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_disable_directory_data_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_disable_directory_data_access(DirectoryId)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The directory identifier. |
Deactivates LDAP secure calls for the specified directory
Description
Deactivates LDAP secure calls for the specified directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_disable_ldaps/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_disable_ldaps(DirectoryId, Type)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory. |
Type |
[required] The type of LDAP security to enable. Currently only the value |
Disables multi-factor authentication (MFA) with the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server for an AD Connector or Microsoft AD directory
Description
Disables multi-factor authentication (MFA) with the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server for an AD Connector or Microsoft AD directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_disable_radius/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_disable_radius(DirectoryId)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory for which to disable MFA. |
Disables single-sign on for a directory
Description
Disables single-sign on for a directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_disable_sso/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_disable_sso(DirectoryId, UserName = NULL, Password = NULL)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory for which to disable single-sign on. |
UserName |
The username of an alternate account to use to disable single-sign on. This is only used for AD Connector directories. This account must have privileges to remove a service principal name. If the AD Connector service account does not have privileges to remove a service principal name, you can specify an alternate account with the UserName and Password parameters. These credentials are only used to disable single sign-on and are not stored by the service. The AD Connector service account is not changed. |
Password |
The password of an alternate account to use to disable single-sign on. This is only used for AD Connector directories. For more information, see the UserName parameter. |
Enables alternative client authentication methods for the specified directory
Description
Enables alternative client authentication methods for the specified directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_enable_client_authentication/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_enable_client_authentication(DirectoryId, Type)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the specified directory. |
Type |
[required] The type of client authentication to enable. Currently only the value
|
Enables access to directory data via the Directory Service Data API for the specified directory
Description
Enables access to directory data via the Directory Service Data API for the specified directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_enable_directory_data_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_enable_directory_data_access(DirectoryId)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The directory identifier. |
Activates the switch for the specific directory to always use LDAP secure calls
Description
Activates the switch for the specific directory to always use LDAP secure calls.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_enable_ldaps/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_enable_ldaps(DirectoryId, Type)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory. |
Type |
[required] The type of LDAP security to enable. Currently only the value |
Enables multi-factor authentication (MFA) with the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server for an AD Connector or Microsoft AD directory
Description
Enables multi-factor authentication (MFA) with the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server for an AD Connector or Microsoft AD directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_enable_radius/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_enable_radius(DirectoryId, RadiusSettings)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory for which to enable MFA. |
RadiusSettings |
[required] A RadiusSettings object that contains information about the RADIUS server. |
Enables single sign-on for a directory
Description
Enables single sign-on for a directory. Single sign-on allows users in your directory to access certain Amazon Web Services services from a computer joined to the directory without having to enter their credentials separately.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_enable_sso/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_enable_sso(DirectoryId, UserName = NULL, Password = NULL)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory for which to enable single-sign on. |
UserName |
The username of an alternate account to use to enable single-sign on. This is only used for AD Connector directories. This account must have privileges to add a service principal name. If the AD Connector service account does not have privileges to add a service principal name, you can specify an alternate account with the UserName and Password parameters. These credentials are only used to enable single sign-on and are not stored by the service. The AD Connector service account is not changed. |
Password |
The password of an alternate account to use to enable single-sign on. This is only used for AD Connector directories. For more information, see the UserName parameter. |
Obtains directory limit information for the current Region
Description
Obtains directory limit information for the current Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_get_directory_limits/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_get_directory_limits()
Obtains the manual snapshot limits for a directory
Description
Obtains the manual snapshot limits for a directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_get_snapshot_limits/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_get_snapshot_limits(DirectoryId)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] Contains the identifier of the directory to obtain the limits for. |
For the specified directory, lists all the certificates registered for a secure LDAP or client certificate authentication
Description
For the specified directory, lists all the certificates registered for a secure LDAP or client certificate authentication.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_list_certificates/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_list_certificates(DirectoryId, NextToken = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory. |
NextToken |
A token for requesting another page of certificates if the |
Limit |
The number of items that should show up on one page |
Lists the address blocks that you have added to a directory
Description
Lists the address blocks that you have added to a directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_list_ip_routes/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_list_ip_routes(DirectoryId, NextToken = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] Identifier (ID) of the directory for which you want to retrieve the IP addresses. |
NextToken |
The ListIpRoutes.NextToken value from a previous call to
|
Limit |
Maximum number of items to return. If this value is zero, the maximum number of items is specified by the limitations of the operation. |
Lists the active log subscriptions for the Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists the active log subscriptions for the Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_list_log_subscriptions/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_list_log_subscriptions(
DirectoryId = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
If a DirectoryID is provided, lists only the log subscription associated with that directory. If no DirectoryId is provided, lists all log subscriptions associated with your Amazon Web Services account. If there are no log subscriptions for the Amazon Web Services account or the directory, an empty list will be returned. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of items to return. |
Limit |
The maximum number of items returned. |
Lists all schema extensions applied to a Microsoft AD Directory
Description
Lists all schema extensions applied to a Microsoft AD Directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_list_schema_extensions/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_list_schema_extensions(
DirectoryId,
NextToken = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory from which to retrieve the schema extension information. |
NextToken |
The |
Limit |
The maximum number of items to return. |
Lists all tags on a directory
Description
Lists all tags on a directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_list_tags_for_resource(
ResourceId,
NextToken = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceId |
[required] Identifier (ID) of the directory for which you want to retrieve tags. |
NextToken |
Reserved for future use. |
Limit |
Reserved for future use. |
Registers a certificate for a secure LDAP or client certificate authentication
Description
Registers a certificate for a secure LDAP or client certificate authentication.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_register_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_register_certificate(
DirectoryId,
CertificateData,
Type = NULL,
ClientCertAuthSettings = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory. |
CertificateData |
[required] The certificate PEM string that needs to be registered. |
Type |
The function that the registered certificate performs. Valid values
include |
ClientCertAuthSettings |
A |
Associates a directory with an Amazon SNS topic
Description
Associates a directory with an Amazon SNS topic. This establishes the directory as a publisher to the specified Amazon SNS topic. You can then receive email or text (SMS) messages when the status of your directory changes. You get notified if your directory goes from an Active status to an Impaired or Inoperable status. You also receive a notification when the directory returns to an Active status.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_register_event_topic/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_register_event_topic(DirectoryId, TopicName)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The Directory ID that will publish status messages to the Amazon SNS topic. |
TopicName |
[required] The Amazon SNS topic name to which the directory will publish status messages. This Amazon SNS topic must be in the same region as the specified Directory ID. |
Rejects a directory sharing request that was sent from the directory owner account
Description
Rejects a directory sharing request that was sent from the directory owner account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_reject_shared_directory/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_reject_shared_directory(SharedDirectoryId)
Arguments
SharedDirectoryId |
[required] Identifier of the shared directory in the directory consumer account. This identifier is different for each directory owner account. |
Removes IP address blocks from a directory
Description
Removes IP address blocks from a directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_remove_ip_routes/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_remove_ip_routes(DirectoryId, CidrIps)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] Identifier (ID) of the directory from which you want to remove the IP addresses. |
CidrIps |
[required] IP address blocks that you want to remove. |
Stops all replication and removes the domain controllers from the specified Region
Description
Stops all replication and removes the domain controllers from the specified Region. You cannot remove the primary Region with this operation. Instead, use the delete_directory
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_remove_region/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_remove_region(DirectoryId)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory for which you want to remove Region replication. |
Removes tags from a directory
Description
Removes tags from a directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_remove_tags_from_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_remove_tags_from_resource(ResourceId, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceId |
[required] Identifier (ID) of the directory from which to remove the tag. |
TagKeys |
[required] The tag key (name) of the tag to be removed. |
Resets the password for any user in your Managed Microsoft AD or Simple AD directory
Description
Resets the password for any user in your Managed Microsoft AD or Simple AD directory. Disabled users will become enabled and can be authenticated following the API call.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_reset_user_password/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_reset_user_password(DirectoryId, UserName, NewPassword)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] Identifier of the Managed Microsoft AD or Simple AD directory in which the user resides. |
UserName |
[required] The user name of the user whose password will be reset. |
NewPassword |
[required] The new password that will be reset. |
Restores a directory using an existing directory snapshot
Description
Restores a directory using an existing directory snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_restore_from_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_restore_from_snapshot(SnapshotId)
Arguments
SnapshotId |
[required] The identifier of the snapshot to restore from. |
Shares a specified directory (DirectoryId) in your Amazon Web Services account (directory owner) with another Amazon Web Services account (directory consumer)
Description
Shares a specified directory (DirectoryId
) in your Amazon Web Services account (directory owner) with another Amazon Web Services account (directory consumer). With this operation you can use your directory from any Amazon Web Services account and from any Amazon VPC within an Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_share_directory/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_share_directory(
DirectoryId,
ShareNotes = NULL,
ShareTarget,
ShareMethod
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] Identifier of the Managed Microsoft AD directory that you want to share with other Amazon Web Services accounts. |
ShareNotes |
A directory share request that is sent by the directory owner to the directory consumer. The request includes a typed message to help the directory consumer administrator determine whether to approve or reject the share invitation. |
ShareTarget |
[required] Identifier for the directory consumer account with whom the directory is to be shared. |
ShareMethod |
[required] The method used when sharing a directory to determine whether the
directory should be shared within your Amazon Web Services organization
( |
Applies a schema extension to a Microsoft AD directory
Description
Applies a schema extension to a Microsoft AD directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_start_schema_extension/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_start_schema_extension(
DirectoryId,
CreateSnapshotBeforeSchemaExtension,
LdifContent,
Description
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory for which the schema extension will be applied to. |
CreateSnapshotBeforeSchemaExtension |
[required] If true, creates a snapshot of the directory before applying the schema extension. |
LdifContent |
[required] The LDIF file represented as a string. To construct the LdifContent string, precede each line as it would be formatted in an ldif file with \n. See the example request below for more details. The file size can be no larger than 1MB. |
Description |
[required] A description of the schema extension. |
Stops the directory sharing between the directory owner and consumer accounts
Description
Stops the directory sharing between the directory owner and consumer accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_unshare_directory/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_unshare_directory(DirectoryId, UnshareTarget)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the Managed Microsoft AD directory that you want to stop sharing. |
UnshareTarget |
[required] Identifier for the directory consumer account with whom the directory has to be unshared. |
Updates a conditional forwarder that has been set up for your Amazon Web Services directory
Description
Updates a conditional forwarder that has been set up for your Amazon Web Services directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_update_conditional_forwarder/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_update_conditional_forwarder(
DirectoryId,
RemoteDomainName,
DnsIpAddrs
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The directory ID of the Amazon Web Services directory for which to update the conditional forwarder. |
RemoteDomainName |
[required] The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the remote domain with which you will set up a trust relationship. |
DnsIpAddrs |
[required] The updated IP addresses of the remote DNS server associated with the conditional forwarder. |
Updates the directory for a particular update type
Description
Updates the directory for a particular update type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_update_directory_setup/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_update_directory_setup(
DirectoryId,
UpdateType,
OSUpdateSettings = NULL,
CreateSnapshotBeforeUpdate = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory on which you want to perform the update. |
UpdateType |
[required] The type of update that needs to be performed on the directory. For example, OS. |
OSUpdateSettings |
The settings for the OS update that needs to be performed on the directory. |
CreateSnapshotBeforeUpdate |
The boolean that specifies if a snapshot for the directory needs to be taken before updating the directory. |
Adds or removes domain controllers to or from the directory
Description
Adds or removes domain controllers to or from the directory. Based on the difference between current value and new value (provided through this API call), domain controllers will be added or removed. It may take up to 45 minutes for any new domain controllers to become fully active once the requested number of domain controllers is updated. During this time, you cannot make another update request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_update_number_of_domain_controllers/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_update_number_of_domain_controllers(
DirectoryId,
DesiredNumber
)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] Identifier of the directory to which the domain controllers will be added or removed. |
DesiredNumber |
[required] The number of domain controllers desired in the directory. |
Updates the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server information for an AD Connector or Microsoft AD directory
Description
Updates the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server information for an AD Connector or Microsoft AD directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_update_radius/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_update_radius(DirectoryId, RadiusSettings)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory for which to update the RADIUS server information. |
RadiusSettings |
[required] A RadiusSettings object that contains information about the RADIUS server. |
Updates the configurable settings for the specified directory
Description
Updates the configurable settings for the specified directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_update_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_update_settings(DirectoryId, Settings)
Arguments
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the directory for which to update settings. |
Settings |
[required] The list of Setting objects. |
Updates the trust that has been set up between your Managed Microsoft AD directory and an self-managed Active Directory
Description
Updates the trust that has been set up between your Managed Microsoft AD directory and an self-managed Active Directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_update_trust/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_update_trust(TrustId, SelectiveAuth = NULL)
Arguments
TrustId |
[required] Identifier of the trust relationship. |
SelectiveAuth |
Updates selective authentication for the trust. |
Directory Service for Microsoft Active Directory allows you to configure and verify trust relationships
Description
Directory Service for Microsoft Active Directory allows you to configure and verify trust relationships.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/directoryservice_verify_trust/ for full documentation.
Usage
directoryservice_verify_trust(TrustId)
Arguments
TrustId |
[required] The unique Trust ID of the trust relationship to verify. |
Firewall Management Service
Description
This is the Firewall Manager API Reference. This guide is for developers who need detailed information about the Firewall Manager API actions, data types, and errors. For detailed information about Firewall Manager features, see the Firewall Manager Developer Guide.
Some API actions require explicit resource permissions. For information, see the developer guide topic Service roles for Firewall Manager.
Usage
fms(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- fms( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
associate_admin_account | Sets a Firewall Manager default administrator account |
associate_third_party_firewall | Sets the Firewall Manager policy administrator as a tenant administrator of a third-party firewall service |
batch_associate_resource | Associate resources to a Firewall Manager resource set |
batch_disassociate_resource | Disassociates resources from a Firewall Manager resource set |
delete_apps_list | Permanently deletes an Firewall Manager applications list |
delete_notification_channel | Deletes an Firewall Manager association with the IAM role and the Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) topic that is used to record Firewall Manager SNS logs |
delete_policy | Permanently deletes an Firewall Manager policy |
delete_protocols_list | Permanently deletes an Firewall Manager protocols list |
delete_resource_set | Deletes the specified ResourceSet |
disassociate_admin_account | Disassociates an Firewall Manager administrator account |
disassociate_third_party_firewall | Disassociates a Firewall Manager policy administrator from a third-party firewall tenant |
get_admin_account | Returns the Organizations account that is associated with Firewall Manager as the Firewall Manager default administrator |
get_admin_scope | Returns information about the specified account's administrative scope |
get_apps_list | Returns information about the specified Firewall Manager applications list |
get_compliance_detail | Returns detailed compliance information about the specified member account |
get_notification_channel | Information about the Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) topic that is used to record Firewall Manager SNS logs |
get_policy | Returns information about the specified Firewall Manager policy |
get_protection_status | If you created a Shield Advanced policy, returns policy-level attack summary information in the event of a potential DDoS attack |
get_protocols_list | Returns information about the specified Firewall Manager protocols list |
get_resource_set | Gets information about a specific resource set |
get_third_party_firewall_association_status | The onboarding status of a Firewall Manager admin account to third-party firewall vendor tenant |
get_violation_details | Retrieves violations for a resource based on the specified Firewall Manager policy and Amazon Web Services account |
list_admin_accounts_for_organization | Returns a AdminAccounts object that lists the Firewall Manager administrators within the organization that are onboarded to Firewall Manager by AssociateAdminAccount |
list_admins_managing_account | Lists the accounts that are managing the specified Organizations member account |
list_apps_lists | Returns an array of AppsListDataSummary objects |
list_compliance_status | Returns an array of PolicyComplianceStatus objects |
list_discovered_resources | Returns an array of resources in the organization's accounts that are available to be associated with a resource set |
list_member_accounts | Returns a MemberAccounts object that lists the member accounts in the administrator's Amazon Web Services organization |
list_policies | Returns an array of PolicySummary objects |
list_protocols_lists | Returns an array of ProtocolsListDataSummary objects |
list_resource_set_resources | Returns an array of resources that are currently associated to a resource set |
list_resource_sets | Returns an array of ResourceSetSummary objects |
list_tags_for_resource | Retrieves the list of tags for the specified Amazon Web Services resource |
list_third_party_firewall_firewall_policies | Retrieves a list of all of the third-party firewall policies that are associated with the third-party firewall administrator's account |
put_admin_account | Creates or updates an Firewall Manager administrator account |
put_apps_list | Creates an Firewall Manager applications list |
put_notification_channel | Designates the IAM role and Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) topic that Firewall Manager uses to record SNS logs |
put_policy | Creates an Firewall Manager policy |
put_protocols_list | Creates an Firewall Manager protocols list |
put_resource_set | Creates the resource set |
tag_resource | Adds one or more tags to an Amazon Web Services resource |
untag_resource | Removes one or more tags from an Amazon Web Services resource |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- fms()
svc$associate_admin_account(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Sets a Firewall Manager default administrator account
Description
Sets a Firewall Manager default administrator account. The Firewall Manager default administrator account can manage third-party firewalls and has full administrative scope that allows administration of all policy types, accounts, organizational units, and Regions. This account must be a member account of the organization in Organizations whose resources you want to protect.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_associate_admin_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_associate_admin_account(AdminAccount)
Arguments
AdminAccount |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID to associate with Firewall Manager as the Firewall Manager default administrator account. This account must be a member account of the organization in Organizations whose resources you want to protect. For more information about Organizations, see Managing the Amazon Web Services Accounts in Your Organization. |
Sets the Firewall Manager policy administrator as a tenant administrator of a third-party firewall service
Description
Sets the Firewall Manager policy administrator as a tenant administrator of a third-party firewall service. A tenant is an instance of the third-party firewall service that's associated with your Amazon Web Services customer account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_associate_third_party_firewall/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_associate_third_party_firewall(ThirdPartyFirewall)
Arguments
ThirdPartyFirewall |
[required] The name of the third-party firewall vendor. |
Associate resources to a Firewall Manager resource set
Description
Associate resources to a Firewall Manager resource set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_batch_associate_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_batch_associate_resource(ResourceSetIdentifier, Items)
Arguments
ResourceSetIdentifier |
[required] A unique identifier for the resource set, used in a request to refer to the resource set. |
Items |
[required] The uniform resource identifiers (URIs) of resources that should be associated to the resource set. The URIs must be Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). |
Disassociates resources from a Firewall Manager resource set
Description
Disassociates resources from a Firewall Manager resource set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_batch_disassociate_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_batch_disassociate_resource(ResourceSetIdentifier, Items)
Arguments
ResourceSetIdentifier |
[required] A unique identifier for the resource set, used in a request to refer to the resource set. |
Items |
[required] The uniform resource identifiers (URI) of resources that should be disassociated from the resource set. The URIs must be Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). |
Permanently deletes an Firewall Manager applications list
Description
Permanently deletes an Firewall Manager applications list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_delete_apps_list/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_delete_apps_list(ListId)
Arguments
ListId |
[required] The ID of the applications list that you want to delete. You can
retrieve this ID from |
Deletes an Firewall Manager association with the IAM role and the Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) topic that is used to record Firewall Manager SNS logs
Description
Deletes an Firewall Manager association with the IAM role and the Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) topic that is used to record Firewall Manager SNS logs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_delete_notification_channel/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_delete_notification_channel()
Permanently deletes an Firewall Manager policy
Description
Permanently deletes an Firewall Manager policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_delete_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_delete_policy(PolicyId, DeleteAllPolicyResources = NULL)
Arguments
PolicyId |
[required] The ID of the policy that you want to delete. You can retrieve this ID
from |
DeleteAllPolicyResources |
If For WAF and Shield Advanced policies, the cleanup does the following:
For security group policies, the cleanup does the following for each security group in the policy:
For security group common policies, even if set to After the cleanup, in-scope resources are no longer protected by web ACLs in this policy. Protection of out-of-scope resources remains unchanged. Scope is determined by tags that you create and accounts that you associate with the policy. When creating the policy, if you specify that only resources in specific accounts or with specific tags are in scope of the policy, those accounts and resources are handled by the policy. All others are out of scope. If you don't specify tags or accounts, all resources are in scope. |
Permanently deletes an Firewall Manager protocols list
Description
Permanently deletes an Firewall Manager protocols list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_delete_protocols_list/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_delete_protocols_list(ListId)
Arguments
ListId |
[required] The ID of the protocols list that you want to delete. You can retrieve
this ID from |
Deletes the specified ResourceSet
Description
Deletes the specified ResourceSet.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_delete_resource_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_delete_resource_set(Identifier)
Arguments
Identifier |
[required] A unique identifier for the resource set, used in a request to refer to the resource set. |
Disassociates an Firewall Manager administrator account
Description
Disassociates an Firewall Manager administrator account. To set a different account as an Firewall Manager administrator, submit a put_admin_account
request. To set an account as a default administrator account, you must submit an associate_admin_account
request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_disassociate_admin_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_disassociate_admin_account()
Disassociates a Firewall Manager policy administrator from a third-party firewall tenant
Description
Disassociates a Firewall Manager policy administrator from a third-party firewall tenant. When you call disassociate_third_party_firewall
, the third-party firewall vendor deletes all of the firewalls that are associated with the account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_disassociate_third_party_firewall/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_disassociate_third_party_firewall(ThirdPartyFirewall)
Arguments
ThirdPartyFirewall |
[required] The name of the third-party firewall vendor. |
Returns the Organizations account that is associated with Firewall Manager as the Firewall Manager default administrator
Description
Returns the Organizations account that is associated with Firewall Manager as the Firewall Manager default administrator.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_get_admin_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_get_admin_account()
Returns information about the specified account's administrative scope
Description
Returns information about the specified account's administrative scope. The administrative scope defines the resources that an Firewall Manager administrator can manage.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_get_admin_scope/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_get_admin_scope(AdminAccount)
Arguments
AdminAccount |
[required] The administrator account that you want to get the details for. |
Returns information about the specified Firewall Manager applications list
Description
Returns information about the specified Firewall Manager applications list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_get_apps_list/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_get_apps_list(ListId, DefaultList = NULL)
Arguments
ListId |
[required] The ID of the Firewall Manager applications list that you want the details for. |
DefaultList |
Specifies whether the list to retrieve is a default list owned by Firewall Manager. |
Returns detailed compliance information about the specified member account
Description
Returns detailed compliance information about the specified member account. Details include resources that are in and out of compliance with the specified policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_get_compliance_detail/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_get_compliance_detail(PolicyId, MemberAccount)
Arguments
PolicyId |
[required] The ID of the policy that you want to get the details for. |
MemberAccount |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account that owns the resources that you want to get the details for. |
Information about the Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) topic that is used to record Firewall Manager SNS logs
Description
Information about the Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) topic that is used to record Firewall Manager SNS logs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_get_notification_channel/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_get_notification_channel()
Returns information about the specified Firewall Manager policy
Description
Returns information about the specified Firewall Manager policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_get_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_get_policy(PolicyId)
Arguments
PolicyId |
[required] The ID of the Firewall Manager policy that you want the details for. |
If you created a Shield Advanced policy, returns policy-level attack summary information in the event of a potential DDoS attack
Description
If you created a Shield Advanced policy, returns policy-level attack summary information in the event of a potential DDoS attack. Other policy types are currently unsupported.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_get_protection_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_get_protection_status(
PolicyId,
MemberAccountId = NULL,
StartTime = NULL,
EndTime = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
PolicyId |
[required] The ID of the policy for which you want to get the attack information. |
MemberAccountId |
The Amazon Web Services account that is in scope of the policy that you want to get the details for. |
StartTime |
The start of the time period to query for the attacks. This is a
|
EndTime |
The end of the time period to query for the attacks. This is a
|
NextToken |
If you specify a value for |
MaxResults |
Specifies the number of objects that you want Firewall Manager to return
for this request. If you have more objects than the number that you
specify for |
Returns information about the specified Firewall Manager protocols list
Description
Returns information about the specified Firewall Manager protocols list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_get_protocols_list/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_get_protocols_list(ListId, DefaultList = NULL)
Arguments
ListId |
[required] The ID of the Firewall Manager protocols list that you want the details for. |
DefaultList |
Specifies whether the list to retrieve is a default list owned by Firewall Manager. |
Gets information about a specific resource set
Description
Gets information about a specific resource set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_get_resource_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_get_resource_set(Identifier)
Arguments
Identifier |
[required] A unique identifier for the resource set, used in a request to refer to the resource set. |
The onboarding status of a Firewall Manager admin account to third-party firewall vendor tenant
Description
The onboarding status of a Firewall Manager admin account to third-party firewall vendor tenant.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_get_third_party_firewall_association_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_get_third_party_firewall_association_status(ThirdPartyFirewall)
Arguments
ThirdPartyFirewall |
[required] The name of the third-party firewall vendor. |
Retrieves violations for a resource based on the specified Firewall Manager policy and Amazon Web Services account
Description
Retrieves violations for a resource based on the specified Firewall Manager policy and Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_get_violation_details/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_get_violation_details(PolicyId, MemberAccount, ResourceId, ResourceType)
Arguments
PolicyId |
[required] The ID of the Firewall Manager policy that you want the details for. You can get violation details for the following policy types:
|
MemberAccount |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that you want the details for. |
ResourceId |
[required] The ID of the resource that has violations. |
ResourceType |
[required] The resource type. This is in the format shown in the Amazon Web Services Resource Types Reference.
Supported resource types are: |
Returns a AdminAccounts object that lists the Firewall Manager administrators within the organization that are onboarded to Firewall Manager by AssociateAdminAccount
Description
Returns a AdminAccounts
object that lists the Firewall Manager administrators within the organization that are onboarded to Firewall Manager by associate_admin_account
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_list_admin_accounts_for_organization/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_list_admin_accounts_for_organization(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
When you request a list of objects with a |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of objects that you want Firewall Manager to return
for this request. If more objects are available, in the response,
Firewall Manager provides a |
Lists the accounts that are managing the specified Organizations member account
Description
Lists the accounts that are managing the specified Organizations member account. This is useful for any member account so that they can view the accounts who are managing their account. This operation only returns the managing administrators that have the requested account within their AdminScope.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_list_admins_managing_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_list_admins_managing_account(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
When you request a list of objects with a |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of objects that you want Firewall Manager to return
for this request. If more objects are available, in the response,
Firewall Manager provides a |
Returns an array of AppsListDataSummary objects
Description
Returns an array of AppsListDataSummary
objects.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_list_apps_lists/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_list_apps_lists(DefaultLists = NULL, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults)
Arguments
DefaultLists |
Specifies whether the lists to retrieve are default lists owned by Firewall Manager. |
NextToken |
If you specify a value for |
MaxResults |
[required] The maximum number of objects that you want Firewall Manager to return
for this request. If more objects are available, in the response,
Firewall Manager provides a If you don't specify this, Firewall Manager returns all available objects. |
Returns an array of PolicyComplianceStatus objects
Description
Returns an array of PolicyComplianceStatus
objects. Use PolicyComplianceStatus
to get a summary of which member accounts are protected by the specified policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_list_compliance_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_list_compliance_status(PolicyId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
PolicyId |
[required] The ID of the Firewall Manager policy that you want the details for. |
NextToken |
If you specify a value for |
MaxResults |
Specifies the number of |
Returns an array of resources in the organization's accounts that are available to be associated with a resource set
Description
Returns an array of resources in the organization's accounts that are available to be associated with a resource set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_list_discovered_resources/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_list_discovered_resources(
MemberAccountIds,
ResourceType,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
MemberAccountIds |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account IDs to discover resources in. Only one account is supported per request. The account must be a member of your organization. |
ResourceType |
[required] The type of resources to discover. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of objects that you want Firewall Manager to return
for this request. If more objects are available, in the response,
Firewall Manager provides a |
NextToken |
When you request a list of objects with a |
Returns a MemberAccounts object that lists the member accounts in the administrator's Amazon Web Services organization
Description
Returns a MemberAccounts
object that lists the member accounts in the administrator's Amazon Web Services organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_list_member_accounts/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_list_member_accounts(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
If you specify a value for |
MaxResults |
Specifies the number of member account IDs that you want Firewall
Manager to return for this request. If you have more IDs than the number
that you specify for |
Returns an array of PolicySummary objects
Description
Returns an array of PolicySummary
objects.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_list_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_list_policies(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
If you specify a value for |
MaxResults |
Specifies the number of |
Returns an array of ProtocolsListDataSummary objects
Description
Returns an array of ProtocolsListDataSummary
objects.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_list_protocols_lists/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_list_protocols_lists(DefaultLists = NULL, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults)
Arguments
DefaultLists |
Specifies whether the lists to retrieve are default lists owned by Firewall Manager. |
NextToken |
If you specify a value for |
MaxResults |
[required] The maximum number of objects that you want Firewall Manager to return
for this request. If more objects are available, in the response,
Firewall Manager provides a If you don't specify this, Firewall Manager returns all available objects. |
Returns an array of resources that are currently associated to a resource set
Description
Returns an array of resources that are currently associated to a resource set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_list_resource_set_resources/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_list_resource_set_resources(
Identifier,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Identifier |
[required] A unique identifier for the resource set, used in a request to refer to the resource set. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of objects that you want Firewall Manager to return
for this request. If more objects are available, in the response,
Firewall Manager provides a |
NextToken |
When you request a list of objects with a |
Returns an array of ResourceSetSummary objects
Description
Returns an array of ResourceSetSummary
objects.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_list_resource_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_list_resource_sets(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
When you request a list of objects with a |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of objects that you want Firewall Manager to return
for this request. If more objects are available, in the response,
Firewall Manager provides a |
Retrieves the list of tags for the specified Amazon Web Services resource
Description
Retrieves the list of tags for the specified Amazon Web Services resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to return tags for. The Firewall Manager resources that support tagging are policies, applications lists, and protocols lists. |
Retrieves a list of all of the third-party firewall policies that are associated with the third-party firewall administrator's account
Description
Retrieves a list of all of the third-party firewall policies that are associated with the third-party firewall administrator's account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_list_third_party_firewall_firewall_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_list_third_party_firewall_firewall_policies(
ThirdPartyFirewall,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults
)
Arguments
ThirdPartyFirewall |
[required] The name of the third-party firewall vendor. |
NextToken |
If the previous response included a For the value of |
MaxResults |
[required] The maximum number of third-party firewall policies that you want
Firewall Manager to return. If the specified third-party firewall vendor
is associated with more than |
Creates or updates an Firewall Manager administrator account
Description
Creates or updates an Firewall Manager administrator account. The account must be a member of the organization that was onboarded to Firewall Manager by associate_admin_account
. Only the organization's management account can create an Firewall Manager administrator account. When you create an Firewall Manager administrator account, the service checks to see if the account is already a delegated administrator within Organizations. If the account isn't a delegated administrator, Firewall Manager calls Organizations to delegate the account within Organizations. For more information about administrator accounts within Organizations, see Managing the Amazon Web Services Accounts in Your Organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_put_admin_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_put_admin_account(AdminAccount, AdminScope = NULL)
Arguments
AdminAccount |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID to add as an Firewall Manager
administrator account. The account must be a member of the organization
that was onboarded to Firewall Manager by
|
AdminScope |
Configures the resources that the specified Firewall Manager administrator can manage. As a best practice, set the administrative scope according to the principles of least privilege. Only grant the administrator the specific resources or permissions that they need to perform the duties of their role. |
Creates an Firewall Manager applications list
Description
Creates an Firewall Manager applications list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_put_apps_list/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_put_apps_list(AppsList, TagList = NULL)
Arguments
AppsList |
[required] The details of the Firewall Manager applications list to be created. |
TagList |
The tags associated with the resource. |
Designates the IAM role and Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) topic that Firewall Manager uses to record SNS logs
Description
Designates the IAM role and Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) topic that Firewall Manager uses to record SNS logs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_put_notification_channel/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_put_notification_channel(SnsTopicArn, SnsRoleName)
Arguments
SnsTopicArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic that collects notifications from Firewall Manager. |
SnsRoleName |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that allows Amazon SNS to record Firewall Manager activity. |
Creates an Firewall Manager policy
Description
Creates an Firewall Manager policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_put_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_put_policy(Policy, TagList = NULL)
Arguments
Policy |
[required] The details of the Firewall Manager policy to be created. |
TagList |
The tags to add to the Amazon Web Services resource. |
Creates an Firewall Manager protocols list
Description
Creates an Firewall Manager protocols list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_put_protocols_list/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_put_protocols_list(ProtocolsList, TagList = NULL)
Arguments
ProtocolsList |
[required] The details of the Firewall Manager protocols list to be created. |
TagList |
The tags associated with the resource. |
Creates the resource set
Description
Creates the resource set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_put_resource_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_put_resource_set(ResourceSet, TagList = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceSet |
[required] Details about the resource set to be created or updated.\> |
TagList |
Retrieves the tags associated with the specified resource set. Tags are key:value pairs that you can use to categorize and manage your resources, for purposes like billing. For example, you might set the tag key to "customer" and the value to the customer name or ID. You can specify one or more tags to add to each Amazon Web Services resource, up to 50 tags for a resource. |
Adds one or more tags to an Amazon Web Services resource
Description
Adds one or more tags to an Amazon Web Services resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_tag_resource(ResourceArn, TagList)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to return tags for. The Firewall Manager resources that support tagging are policies, applications lists, and protocols lists. |
TagList |
[required] The tags to add to the resource. |
Removes one or more tags from an Amazon Web Services resource
Description
Removes one or more tags from an Amazon Web Services resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fms_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
fms_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to return tags for. The Firewall Manager resources that support tagging are policies, applications lists, and protocols lists. |
TagKeys |
[required] The keys of the tags to remove from the resource. |
Amazon GuardDuty
Description
Amazon GuardDuty is a continuous security monitoring service that analyzes and processes the following foundational data sources - VPC flow logs, Amazon Web Services CloudTrail management event logs, CloudTrail S3 data event logs, EKS audit logs, DNS logs, Amazon EBS volume data, runtime activity belonging to container workloads, such as Amazon EKS, Amazon ECS (including Amazon Web Services Fargate), and Amazon EC2 instances. It uses threat intelligence feeds, such as lists of malicious IPs and domains, and machine learning to identify unexpected, potentially unauthorized, and malicious activity within your Amazon Web Services environment. This can include issues like escalations of privileges, uses of exposed credentials, or communication with malicious IPs, domains, or presence of malware on your Amazon EC2 instances and container workloads. For example, GuardDuty can detect compromised EC2 instances and container workloads serving malware, or mining bitcoin.
GuardDuty also monitors Amazon Web Services account access behavior for signs of compromise, such as unauthorized infrastructure deployments like EC2 instances deployed in a Region that has never been used, or unusual API calls like a password policy change to reduce password strength.
GuardDuty informs you about the status of your Amazon Web Services environment by producing security findings that you can view in the GuardDuty console or through Amazon EventBridge. For more information, see the Amazon GuardDuty User Guide .
Usage
guardduty(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- guardduty( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
accept_administrator_invitation | Accepts the invitation to be a member account and get monitored by a GuardDuty administrator account that sent the invitation |
accept_invitation | Accepts the invitation to be monitored by a GuardDuty administrator account |
archive_findings | Archives GuardDuty findings that are specified by the list of finding IDs |
create_detector | Creates a single GuardDuty detector |
create_filter | Creates a filter using the specified finding criteria |
create_ip_set | Creates a new IPSet, which is called a trusted IP list in the console user interface |
create_malware_protection_plan | Creates a new Malware Protection plan for the protected resource |
create_members | Creates member accounts of the current Amazon Web Services account by specifying a list of Amazon Web Services account IDs |
create_publishing_destination | Creates a publishing destination where you can export your GuardDuty findings |
create_sample_findings | Generates sample findings of types specified by the list of finding types |
create_threat_intel_set | Creates a new ThreatIntelSet |
decline_invitations | Declines invitations sent to the current member account by Amazon Web Services accounts specified by their account IDs |
delete_detector | Deletes an Amazon GuardDuty detector that is specified by the detector ID |
delete_filter | Deletes the filter specified by the filter name |
delete_invitations | Deletes invitations sent to the current member account by Amazon Web Services accounts specified by their account IDs |
delete_ip_set | Deletes the IPSet specified by the ipSetId |
delete_malware_protection_plan | Deletes the Malware Protection plan ID associated with the Malware Protection plan resource |
delete_members | Deletes GuardDuty member accounts (to the current GuardDuty administrator account) specified by the account IDs |
delete_publishing_destination | Deletes the publishing definition with the specified destinationId |
delete_threat_intel_set | Deletes the ThreatIntelSet specified by the ThreatIntelSet ID |
describe_malware_scans | Returns a list of malware scans |
describe_organization_configuration | Returns information about the account selected as the delegated administrator for GuardDuty |
describe_publishing_destination | Returns information about the publishing destination specified by the provided destinationId |
disable_organization_admin_account | Removes the existing GuardDuty delegated administrator of the organization |
disassociate_from_administrator_account | Disassociates the current GuardDuty member account from its administrator account |
disassociate_from_master_account | Disassociates the current GuardDuty member account from its administrator account |
disassociate_members | Disassociates GuardDuty member accounts (from the current administrator account) specified by the account IDs |
enable_organization_admin_account | Designates an Amazon Web Services account within the organization as your GuardDuty delegated administrator |
get_administrator_account | Provides the details of the GuardDuty administrator account associated with the current GuardDuty member account |
get_coverage_statistics | Retrieves aggregated statistics for your account |
get_detector | Retrieves a GuardDuty detector specified by the detectorId |
get_filter | Returns the details of the filter specified by the filter name |
get_findings | Describes Amazon GuardDuty findings specified by finding IDs |
get_findings_statistics | Lists GuardDuty findings statistics for the specified detector ID |
get_invitations_count | Returns the count of all GuardDuty membership invitations that were sent to the current member account except the currently accepted invitation |
get_ip_set | Retrieves the IPSet specified by the ipSetId |
get_malware_protection_plan | Retrieves the Malware Protection plan details associated with a Malware Protection plan ID |
get_malware_scan_settings | Returns the details of the malware scan settings |
get_master_account | Provides the details for the GuardDuty administrator account associated with the current GuardDuty member account |
get_member_detectors | Describes which data sources are enabled for the member account's detector |
get_members | Retrieves GuardDuty member accounts (of the current GuardDuty administrator account) specified by the account IDs |
get_organization_statistics | Retrieves how many active member accounts have each feature enabled within GuardDuty |
get_remaining_free_trial_days | Provides the number of days left for each data source used in the free trial period |
get_threat_intel_set | Retrieves the ThreatIntelSet that is specified by the ThreatIntelSet ID |
get_usage_statistics | Lists Amazon GuardDuty usage statistics over the last 30 days for the specified detector ID |
invite_members | Invites Amazon Web Services accounts to become members of an organization administered by the Amazon Web Services account that invokes this API |
list_coverage | Lists coverage details for your GuardDuty account |
list_detectors | Lists detectorIds of all the existing Amazon GuardDuty detector resources |
list_filters | Returns a paginated list of the current filters |
list_findings | Lists GuardDuty findings for the specified detector ID |
list_invitations | Lists all GuardDuty membership invitations that were sent to the current Amazon Web Services account |
list_ip_sets | Lists the IPSets of the GuardDuty service specified by the detector ID |
list_malware_protection_plans | Lists the Malware Protection plan IDs associated with the protected resources in your Amazon Web Services account |
list_members | Lists details about all member accounts for the current GuardDuty administrator account |
list_organization_admin_accounts | Lists the accounts designated as GuardDuty delegated administrators |
list_publishing_destinations | Returns a list of publishing destinations associated with the specified detectorId |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists tags for a resource |
list_threat_intel_sets | Lists the ThreatIntelSets of the GuardDuty service specified by the detector ID |
start_malware_scan | Initiates the malware scan |
start_monitoring_members | Turns on GuardDuty monitoring of the specified member accounts |
stop_monitoring_members | Stops GuardDuty monitoring for the specified member accounts |
tag_resource | Adds tags to a resource |
unarchive_findings | Unarchives GuardDuty findings specified by the findingIds |
untag_resource | Removes tags from a resource |
update_detector | Updates the GuardDuty detector specified by the detector ID |
update_filter | Updates the filter specified by the filter name |
update_findings_feedback | Marks the specified GuardDuty findings as useful or not useful |
update_ip_set | Updates the IPSet specified by the IPSet ID |
update_malware_protection_plan | Updates an existing Malware Protection plan resource |
update_malware_scan_settings | Updates the malware scan settings |
update_member_detectors | Contains information on member accounts to be updated |
update_organization_configuration | Configures the delegated administrator account with the provided values |
update_publishing_destination | Updates information about the publishing destination specified by the destinationId |
update_threat_intel_set | Updates the ThreatIntelSet specified by the ThreatIntelSet ID |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- guardduty()
svc$accept_administrator_invitation(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Accepts the invitation to be a member account and get monitored by a GuardDuty administrator account that sent the invitation
Description
Accepts the invitation to be a member account and get monitored by a GuardDuty administrator account that sent the invitation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_accept_administrator_invitation/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_accept_administrator_invitation(
DetectorId,
AdministratorId,
InvitationId
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector of the GuardDuty member account. |
AdministratorId |
[required] The account ID of the GuardDuty administrator account whose invitation you're accepting. |
InvitationId |
[required] The value that is used to validate the administrator account to the member account. |
Accepts the invitation to be monitored by a GuardDuty administrator account
Description
Accepts the invitation to be monitored by a GuardDuty administrator account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_accept_invitation/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_accept_invitation(DetectorId, MasterId, InvitationId)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector of the GuardDuty member account. To find the |
MasterId |
[required] The account ID of the GuardDuty administrator account whose invitation you're accepting. |
InvitationId |
[required] The value that is used to validate the administrator account to the member account. |
Archives GuardDuty findings that are specified by the list of finding IDs
Description
Archives GuardDuty findings that are specified by the list of finding IDs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_archive_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_archive_findings(DetectorId, FindingIds)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The ID of the detector that specifies the GuardDuty service whose findings you want to archive. To find the |
FindingIds |
[required] The IDs of the findings that you want to archive. |
Creates a single GuardDuty detector
Description
Creates a single GuardDuty detector. A detector is a resource that represents the GuardDuty service. To start using GuardDuty, you must create a detector in each Region where you enable the service. You can have only one detector per account per Region. All data sources are enabled in a new detector by default.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_create_detector/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_create_detector(
Enable,
ClientToken = NULL,
FindingPublishingFrequency = NULL,
DataSources = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
Features = NULL
)
Arguments
Enable |
[required] A Boolean value that specifies whether the detector is to be enabled. |
ClientToken |
The idempotency token for the create request. |
FindingPublishingFrequency |
A value that specifies how frequently updated findings are exported. |
DataSources |
Describes which data sources will be enabled for the detector. There might be regional differences because some data sources might not be available in all the Amazon Web Services Regions where GuardDuty is presently supported. For more information, see Regions and endpoints. |
Tags |
The tags to be added to a new detector resource. |
Features |
A list of features that will be configured for the detector. |
Creates a filter using the specified finding criteria
Description
Creates a filter using the specified finding criteria. The maximum number of saved filters per Amazon Web Services account per Region is 100. For more information, see Quotas for GuardDuty.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_create_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_create_filter(
DetectorId,
Name,
Description = NULL,
Action = NULL,
Rank = NULL,
FindingCriteria,
ClientToken = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The detector ID associated with the GuardDuty account for which you want to create a filter. To find the |
Name |
[required] The name of the filter. Valid characters include period (.), underscore (_), dash (-), and alphanumeric characters. A whitespace is considered to be an invalid character. |
Description |
The description of the filter. Valid characters include alphanumeric
characters, and special characters such as hyphen, period, colon,
underscore, parentheses ( [ ]: R:%20 |
Action |
Specifies the action that is to be applied to the findings that match the filter. |
Rank |
Specifies the position of the filter in the list of current filters. Also specifies the order in which this filter is applied to the findings. |
FindingCriteria |
[required] Represents the criteria to be used in the filter for querying findings. You can only use the following attributes to query findings:
|
ClientToken |
The idempotency token for the create request. |
Tags |
The tags to be added to a new filter resource. |
Creates a new IPSet, which is called a trusted IP list in the console user interface
Description
Creates a new IPSet, which is called a trusted IP list in the console user interface. An IPSet is a list of IP addresses that are trusted for secure communication with Amazon Web Services infrastructure and applications. GuardDuty doesn't generate findings for IP addresses that are included in IPSets. Only users from the administrator account can use this operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_create_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_create_ip_set(
DetectorId,
Name,
Format,
Location,
Activate,
ClientToken = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector of the GuardDuty account for which you want to create an IPSet. To find the |
Name |
[required] The user-friendly name to identify the IPSet. Allowed characters are alphanumeric, whitespace, dash (-), and underscores (_). |
Format |
[required] The format of the file that contains the IPSet. |
Location |
[required] The URI of the file that contains the IPSet. |
Activate |
[required] A Boolean value that indicates whether GuardDuty is to start using the uploaded IPSet. |
ClientToken |
The idempotency token for the create request. |
Tags |
The tags to be added to a new IP set resource. |
Creates a new Malware Protection plan for the protected resource
Description
Creates a new Malware Protection plan for the protected resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_create_malware_protection_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_create_malware_protection_plan(
ClientToken = NULL,
Role,
ProtectedResource,
Actions = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientToken |
The idempotency token for the create request. |
Role |
[required] Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that has the permissions to scan and add tags to the associated protected resource. |
ProtectedResource |
[required] Information about the protected resource that is associated with the
created Malware Protection plan. Presently, |
Actions |
Information about whether the tags will be added to the S3 object after scanning. |
Tags |
Tags added to the Malware Protection plan resource. |
Creates member accounts of the current Amazon Web Services account by specifying a list of Amazon Web Services account IDs
Description
Creates member accounts of the current Amazon Web Services account by specifying a list of Amazon Web Services account IDs. This step is a prerequisite for managing the associated member accounts either by invitation or through an organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_create_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_create_members(DetectorId, AccountDetails)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector of the GuardDuty account for which you want to associate member accounts. To find the |
AccountDetails |
[required] A list of account ID and email address pairs of the accounts that you want to associate with the GuardDuty administrator account. |
Creates a publishing destination where you can export your GuardDuty findings
Description
Creates a publishing destination where you can export your GuardDuty findings. Before you start exporting the findings, the destination resource must exist.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_create_publishing_destination/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_create_publishing_destination(
DetectorId,
DestinationType,
DestinationProperties,
ClientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The ID of the GuardDuty detector associated with the publishing destination. To find the |
DestinationType |
[required] The type of resource for the publishing destination. Currently only Amazon S3 buckets are supported. |
DestinationProperties |
[required] The properties of the publishing destination, including the ARNs for the destination and the KMS key used for encryption. |
ClientToken |
The idempotency token for the request. |
Generates sample findings of types specified by the list of finding types
Description
Generates sample findings of types specified by the list of finding types. If 'NULL' is specified for findingTypes
, the API generates sample findings of all supported finding types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_create_sample_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_create_sample_findings(DetectorId, FindingTypes = NULL)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The ID of the detector for which you need to create sample findings. To find the |
FindingTypes |
The types of sample findings to generate. |
Creates a new ThreatIntelSet
Description
Creates a new ThreatIntelSet. ThreatIntelSets consist of known malicious IP addresses. GuardDuty generates findings based on ThreatIntelSets. Only users of the administrator account can use this operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_create_threat_intel_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_create_threat_intel_set(
DetectorId,
Name,
Format,
Location,
Activate,
ClientToken = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector of the GuardDuty account for which you
want to create a To find the |
Name |
[required] A user-friendly ThreatIntelSet name displayed in all findings that are generated by activity that involves IP addresses included in this ThreatIntelSet. |
Format |
[required] The format of the file that contains the ThreatIntelSet. |
Location |
[required] The URI of the file that contains the ThreatIntelSet. |
Activate |
[required] A Boolean value that indicates whether GuardDuty is to start using the uploaded ThreatIntelSet. |
ClientToken |
The idempotency token for the create request. |
Tags |
The tags to be added to a new threat list resource. |
Declines invitations sent to the current member account by Amazon Web Services accounts specified by their account IDs
Description
Declines invitations sent to the current member account by Amazon Web Services accounts specified by their account IDs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_decline_invitations/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_decline_invitations(AccountIds)
Arguments
AccountIds |
[required] A list of account IDs of the Amazon Web Services accounts that sent invitations to the current member account that you want to decline invitations from. |
Deletes an Amazon GuardDuty detector that is specified by the detector ID
Description
Deletes an Amazon GuardDuty detector that is specified by the detector ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_delete_detector/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_delete_detector(DetectorId)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector that you want to delete. To find the |
Deletes the filter specified by the filter name
Description
Deletes the filter specified by the filter name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_delete_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_delete_filter(DetectorId, FilterName)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector that is associated with the filter. To find the |
FilterName |
[required] The name of the filter that you want to delete. |
Deletes invitations sent to the current member account by Amazon Web Services accounts specified by their account IDs
Description
Deletes invitations sent to the current member account by Amazon Web Services accounts specified by their account IDs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_delete_invitations/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_delete_invitations(AccountIds)
Arguments
AccountIds |
[required] A list of account IDs of the Amazon Web Services accounts that sent invitations to the current member account that you want to delete invitations from. |
Deletes the IPSet specified by the ipSetId
Description
Deletes the IPSet specified by the ipSetId
. IPSets are called trusted IP lists in the console user interface.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_delete_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_delete_ip_set(DetectorId, IpSetId)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector associated with the IPSet. To find the |
IpSetId |
[required] The unique ID of the IPSet to delete. |
Deletes the Malware Protection plan ID associated with the Malware Protection plan resource
Description
Deletes the Malware Protection plan ID associated with the Malware Protection plan resource. Use this API only when you no longer want to protect the resource associated with this Malware Protection plan ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_delete_malware_protection_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_delete_malware_protection_plan(MalwareProtectionPlanId)
Arguments
MalwareProtectionPlanId |
[required] A unique identifier associated with Malware Protection plan resource. |
Deletes GuardDuty member accounts (to the current GuardDuty administrator account) specified by the account IDs
Description
Deletes GuardDuty member accounts (to the current GuardDuty administrator account) specified by the account IDs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_delete_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_delete_members(DetectorId, AccountIds)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector of the GuardDuty account whose members you want to delete. To find the |
AccountIds |
[required] A list of account IDs of the GuardDuty member accounts that you want to delete. |
Deletes the publishing definition with the specified destinationId
Description
Deletes the publishing definition with the specified destinationId
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_delete_publishing_destination/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_delete_publishing_destination(DetectorId, DestinationId)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector associated with the publishing destination to delete. To find the |
DestinationId |
[required] The ID of the publishing destination to delete. |
Deletes the ThreatIntelSet specified by the ThreatIntelSet ID
Description
Deletes the ThreatIntelSet specified by the ThreatIntelSet ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_delete_threat_intel_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_delete_threat_intel_set(DetectorId, ThreatIntelSetId)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector that is associated with the threatIntelSet. To find the |
ThreatIntelSetId |
[required] The unique ID of the threatIntelSet that you want to delete. |
Returns a list of malware scans
Description
Returns a list of malware scans. Each member account can view the malware scans for their own accounts. An administrator can view the malware scans for all the member accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_describe_malware_scans/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_describe_malware_scans(
DetectorId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
FilterCriteria = NULL,
SortCriteria = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector that the request is associated with. To find the |
NextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the list action. For subsequent calls to the action, fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
MaxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items that you want in the response. The default value is 50. The maximum value is 50. |
FilterCriteria |
Represents the criteria to be used in the filter for describing scan entries. |
SortCriteria |
Represents the criteria used for sorting scan entries. The
|
Returns information about the account selected as the delegated administrator for GuardDuty
Description
Returns information about the account selected as the delegated administrator for GuardDuty.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_describe_organization_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_describe_organization_configuration(
DetectorId,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The detector ID of the delegated administrator for which you need to retrieve the information. To find the |
MaxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items that you want in the response. |
NextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of
this parameter to null on your first call to the list action. For
subsequent calls to the action, fill |
Returns information about the publishing destination specified by the provided destinationId
Description
Returns information about the publishing destination specified by the provided destinationId
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_describe_publishing_destination/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_describe_publishing_destination(DetectorId, DestinationId)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector associated with the publishing destination to retrieve. To find the |
DestinationId |
[required] The ID of the publishing destination to retrieve. |
Removes the existing GuardDuty delegated administrator of the organization
Description
Removes the existing GuardDuty delegated administrator of the organization. Only the organization's management account can run this API operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_disable_organization_admin_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_disable_organization_admin_account(AdminAccountId)
Arguments
AdminAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services Account ID for the organizations account to be disabled as a GuardDuty delegated administrator. |
Disassociates the current GuardDuty member account from its administrator account
Description
Disassociates the current GuardDuty member account from its administrator account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_disassociate_from_administrator_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_disassociate_from_administrator_account(DetectorId)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector of the GuardDuty member account. |
Disassociates the current GuardDuty member account from its administrator account
Description
Disassociates the current GuardDuty member account from its administrator account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_disassociate_from_master_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_disassociate_from_master_account(DetectorId)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector of the GuardDuty member account. |
Disassociates GuardDuty member accounts (from the current administrator account) specified by the account IDs
Description
Disassociates GuardDuty member accounts (from the current administrator account) specified by the account IDs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_disassociate_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_disassociate_members(DetectorId, AccountIds)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector of the GuardDuty account whose members you want to disassociate from the administrator account. |
AccountIds |
[required] A list of account IDs of the GuardDuty member accounts that you want to disassociate from the administrator account. |
Designates an Amazon Web Services account within the organization as your GuardDuty delegated administrator
Description
Designates an Amazon Web Services account within the organization as your GuardDuty delegated administrator. Only the organization's management account can run this API operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_enable_organization_admin_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_enable_organization_admin_account(AdminAccountId)
Arguments
AdminAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the organization account to be enabled as a GuardDuty delegated administrator. |
Provides the details of the GuardDuty administrator account associated with the current GuardDuty member account
Description
Provides the details of the GuardDuty administrator account associated with the current GuardDuty member account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_administrator_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_administrator_account(DetectorId)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector of the GuardDuty member account. |
Retrieves aggregated statistics for your account
Description
Retrieves aggregated statistics for your account. If you are a GuardDuty administrator, you can retrieve the statistics for all the resources associated with the active member accounts in your organization who have enabled Runtime Monitoring and have the GuardDuty security agent running on their resources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_coverage_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_coverage_statistics(
DetectorId,
FilterCriteria = NULL,
StatisticsType
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the GuardDuty detector. To find the |
FilterCriteria |
Represents the criteria used to filter the coverage statistics. |
StatisticsType |
[required] Represents the statistics type used to aggregate the coverage details. |
Retrieves a GuardDuty detector specified by the detectorId
Description
Retrieves a GuardDuty detector specified by the detectorId.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_detector/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_detector(DetectorId)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector that you want to get. To find the |
Returns the details of the filter specified by the filter name
Description
Returns the details of the filter specified by the filter name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_filter(DetectorId, FilterName)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector that is associated with this filter. To find the |
FilterName |
[required] The name of the filter you want to get. |
Describes Amazon GuardDuty findings specified by finding IDs
Description
Describes Amazon GuardDuty findings specified by finding IDs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_findings(DetectorId, FindingIds, SortCriteria = NULL)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The ID of the detector that specifies the GuardDuty service whose findings you want to retrieve. To find the |
FindingIds |
[required] The IDs of the findings that you want to retrieve. |
SortCriteria |
Represents the criteria used for sorting findings. |
Lists GuardDuty findings statistics for the specified detector ID
Description
Lists GuardDuty findings statistics for the specified detector ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_findings_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_findings_statistics(
DetectorId,
FindingStatisticTypes = NULL,
FindingCriteria = NULL,
GroupBy = NULL,
OrderBy = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The ID of the detector whose findings statistics you want to retrieve. To find the |
FindingStatisticTypes |
The types of finding statistics to retrieve. |
FindingCriteria |
Represents the criteria that is used for querying findings. |
GroupBy |
Displays the findings statistics grouped by one of the listed valid values. |
OrderBy |
Displays the sorted findings in the requested order. The default value
of You can use this parameter only with the |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned in the response. The default value is 25. You can use this parameter only with the |
Returns the count of all GuardDuty membership invitations that were sent to the current member account except the currently accepted invitation
Description
Returns the count of all GuardDuty membership invitations that were sent to the current member account except the currently accepted invitation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_invitations_count/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_invitations_count()
Retrieves the IPSet specified by the ipSetId
Description
Retrieves the IPSet specified by the ipSetId
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_ip_set(DetectorId, IpSetId)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector that is associated with the IPSet. To find the |
IpSetId |
[required] The unique ID of the IPSet to retrieve. |
Retrieves the Malware Protection plan details associated with a Malware Protection plan ID
Description
Retrieves the Malware Protection plan details associated with a Malware Protection plan ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_malware_protection_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_malware_protection_plan(MalwareProtectionPlanId)
Arguments
MalwareProtectionPlanId |
[required] A unique identifier associated with Malware Protection plan resource. |
Returns the details of the malware scan settings
Description
Returns the details of the malware scan settings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_malware_scan_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_malware_scan_settings(DetectorId)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector that is associated with this scan. To find the |
Provides the details for the GuardDuty administrator account associated with the current GuardDuty member account
Description
Provides the details for the GuardDuty administrator account associated with the current GuardDuty member account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_master_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_master_account(DetectorId)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector of the GuardDuty member account. To find the |
Describes which data sources are enabled for the member account's detector
Description
Describes which data sources are enabled for the member account's detector.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_member_detectors/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_member_detectors(DetectorId, AccountIds)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The detector ID for the administrator account. To find the |
AccountIds |
[required] A list of member account IDs. |
Retrieves GuardDuty member accounts (of the current GuardDuty administrator account) specified by the account IDs
Description
Retrieves GuardDuty member accounts (of the current GuardDuty administrator account) specified by the account IDs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_members(DetectorId, AccountIds)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector of the GuardDuty account whose members you want to retrieve. To find the |
AccountIds |
[required] A list of account IDs of the GuardDuty member accounts that you want to describe. |
Retrieves how many active member accounts have each feature enabled within GuardDuty
Description
Retrieves how many active member accounts have each feature enabled within GuardDuty. Only a delegated GuardDuty administrator of an organization can run this API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_organization_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_organization_statistics()
Provides the number of days left for each data source used in the free trial period
Description
Provides the number of days left for each data source used in the free trial period.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_remaining_free_trial_days/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_remaining_free_trial_days(DetectorId, AccountIds = NULL)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector of the GuardDuty member account. To find the |
AccountIds |
A list of account identifiers of the GuardDuty member account. |
Retrieves the ThreatIntelSet that is specified by the ThreatIntelSet ID
Description
Retrieves the ThreatIntelSet that is specified by the ThreatIntelSet ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_threat_intel_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_threat_intel_set(DetectorId, ThreatIntelSetId)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector that is associated with the threatIntelSet. To find the |
ThreatIntelSetId |
[required] The unique ID of the threatIntelSet that you want to get. |
Lists Amazon GuardDuty usage statistics over the last 30 days for the specified detector ID
Description
Lists Amazon GuardDuty usage statistics over the last 30 days for the specified detector ID. For newly enabled detectors or data sources, the cost returned will include only the usage so far under 30 days. This may differ from the cost metrics in the console, which project usage over 30 days to provide a monthly cost estimate. For more information, see Understanding How Usage Costs are Calculated.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_get_usage_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_get_usage_statistics(
DetectorId,
UsageStatisticType,
UsageCriteria,
Unit = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The ID of the detector that specifies the GuardDuty service whose usage statistics you want to retrieve. To find the |
UsageStatisticType |
[required] The type of usage statistics to retrieve. |
UsageCriteria |
[required] Represents the criteria used for querying usage. |
Unit |
The currency unit you would like to view your usage statistics in. Current valid values are USD. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. |
NextToken |
A token to use for paginating results that are returned in the response. Set the value of this parameter to null for the first request to a list action. For subsequent calls, use the NextToken value returned from the previous request to continue listing results after the first page. |
Invites Amazon Web Services accounts to become members of an organization administered by the Amazon Web Services account that invokes this API
Description
Invites Amazon Web Services accounts to become members of an organization administered by the Amazon Web Services account that invokes this API. If you are using Amazon Web Services Organizations to manage your GuardDuty environment, this step is not needed. For more information, see Managing accounts with organizations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_invite_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_invite_members(
DetectorId,
AccountIds,
DisableEmailNotification = NULL,
Message = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector of the GuardDuty account with which you want to invite members. To find the |
AccountIds |
[required] A list of account IDs of the accounts that you want to invite to GuardDuty as members. |
DisableEmailNotification |
A Boolean value that specifies whether you want to disable email notification to the accounts that you are inviting to GuardDuty as members. |
Message |
The invitation message that you want to send to the accounts that you're inviting to GuardDuty as members. |
Lists coverage details for your GuardDuty account
Description
Lists coverage details for your GuardDuty account. If you're a GuardDuty administrator, you can retrieve all resources associated with the active member accounts in your organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_list_coverage/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_list_coverage(
DetectorId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
FilterCriteria = NULL,
SortCriteria = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector whose coverage details you want to retrieve. To find the |
NextToken |
A token to use for paginating results that are returned in the response. Set the value of this parameter to null for the first request to a list action. For subsequent calls, use the NextToken value returned from the previous request to continue listing results after the first page. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. |
FilterCriteria |
Represents the criteria used to filter the coverage details. |
SortCriteria |
Represents the criteria used to sort the coverage details. |
Lists detectorIds of all the existing Amazon GuardDuty detector resources
Description
Lists detectorIds of all the existing Amazon GuardDuty detector resources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_list_detectors/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_list_detectors(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items that you want in the response. The default value is 50. The maximum value is 50. |
NextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the list action. For subsequent calls to the action, fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
Returns a paginated list of the current filters
Description
Returns a paginated list of the current filters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_list_filters/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_list_filters(DetectorId, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector that is associated with the filter. To find the |
MaxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items that you want in the response. The default value is 50. The maximum value is 50. |
NextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the list action. For subsequent calls to the action, fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
Lists GuardDuty findings for the specified detector ID
Description
Lists GuardDuty findings for the specified detector ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_list_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_list_findings(
DetectorId,
FindingCriteria = NULL,
SortCriteria = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The ID of the detector that specifies the GuardDuty service whose findings you want to list. To find the |
FindingCriteria |
Represents the criteria used for querying findings. Valid values include:
|
SortCriteria |
Represents the criteria used for sorting findings. |
MaxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items you want in the response. The default value is 50. The maximum value is 50. |
NextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the list action. For subsequent calls to the action, fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
Lists all GuardDuty membership invitations that were sent to the current Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists all GuardDuty membership invitations that were sent to the current Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_list_invitations/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_list_invitations(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items that you want in the response. The default value is 50. The maximum value is 50. |
NextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the list action. For subsequent calls to the action, fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
Lists the IPSets of the GuardDuty service specified by the detector ID
Description
Lists the IPSets of the GuardDuty service specified by the detector ID. If you use this operation from a member account, the IPSets returned are the IPSets from the associated administrator account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_list_ip_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_list_ip_sets(DetectorId, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector that is associated with IPSet. To find the |
MaxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items you want in the response. The default value is 50. The maximum value is 50. |
NextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the list action. For subsequent calls to the action, fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
Lists the Malware Protection plan IDs associated with the protected resources in your Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists the Malware Protection plan IDs associated with the protected resources in your Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_list_malware_protection_plans/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_list_malware_protection_plans(NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of
this parameter to null on your first call to the list action. For
subsequent calls to the action, fill nextToken in the request with the
value of |
Lists details about all member accounts for the current GuardDuty administrator account
Description
Lists details about all member accounts for the current GuardDuty administrator account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_list_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_list_members(
DetectorId,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
OnlyAssociated = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector that is associated with the member. To find the |
MaxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items you want in the response. The default value is 50. The maximum value is 50. |
NextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the list action. For subsequent calls to the action, fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
OnlyAssociated |
Specifies whether to only return associated members or to return all
members (including members who haven't been invited yet or have been
disassociated). Member accounts must have been previously associated
with the GuardDuty administrator account using
|
Lists the accounts designated as GuardDuty delegated administrators
Description
Lists the accounts designated as GuardDuty delegated administrators. Only the organization's management account can run this API operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_list_organization_admin_accounts/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_list_organization_admin_accounts(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. |
NextToken |
A token to use for paginating results that are returned in the response.
Set the value of this parameter to null for the first request to a list
action. For subsequent calls, use the |
Returns a list of publishing destinations associated with the specified detectorId
Description
Returns a list of publishing destinations associated with the specified detectorId
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_list_publishing_destinations/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_list_publishing_destinations(
DetectorId,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The detector ID for which you want to retrieve the publishing destination. To find the |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. |
NextToken |
A token to use for paginating results that are returned in the response.
Set the value of this parameter to null for the first request to a list
action. For subsequent calls, use the |
Lists tags for a resource
Description
Lists tags for a resource. Tagging is currently supported for detectors, finding filters, IP sets, threat intel sets, and publishing destination, with a limit of 50 tags per resource. When invoked, this operation returns all assigned tags for a given resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the given GuardDuty resource. |
Lists the ThreatIntelSets of the GuardDuty service specified by the detector ID
Description
Lists the ThreatIntelSets of the GuardDuty service specified by the detector ID. If you use this operation from a member account, the ThreatIntelSets associated with the administrator account are returned.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_list_threat_intel_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_list_threat_intel_sets(
DetectorId,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector that is associated with the threatIntelSet. To find the |
MaxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items that you want in the response. The default value is 50. The maximum value is 50. |
NextToken |
You can use this parameter to paginate results in the response. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the list action. For subsequent calls to the action, fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
Initiates the malware scan
Description
Initiates the malware scan. Invoking this API will automatically create the Service-linked role in the corresponding account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_start_malware_scan/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_start_malware_scan(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource for which you invoked the API. |
Turns on GuardDuty monitoring of the specified member accounts
Description
Turns on GuardDuty monitoring of the specified member accounts. Use this operation to restart monitoring of accounts that you stopped monitoring with the stop_monitoring_members
operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_start_monitoring_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_start_monitoring_members(DetectorId, AccountIds)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector of the GuardDuty administrator account associated with the member accounts to monitor. To find the |
AccountIds |
[required] A list of account IDs of the GuardDuty member accounts to start monitoring. |
Stops GuardDuty monitoring for the specified member accounts
Description
Stops GuardDuty monitoring for the specified member accounts. Use the start_monitoring_members
operation to restart monitoring for those accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_stop_monitoring_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_stop_monitoring_members(DetectorId, AccountIds)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector associated with the GuardDuty administrator account that is monitoring member accounts. To find the |
AccountIds |
[required] A list of account IDs for the member accounts to stop monitoring. |
Adds tags to a resource
Description
Adds tags to a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the GuardDuty resource to apply a tag to. |
Tags |
[required] The tags to be added to a resource. |
Unarchives GuardDuty findings specified by the findingIds
Description
Unarchives GuardDuty findings specified by the findingIds
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_unarchive_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_unarchive_findings(DetectorId, FindingIds)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The ID of the detector associated with the findings to unarchive. To find the |
FindingIds |
[required] The IDs of the findings to unarchive. |
Removes tags from a resource
Description
Removes tags from a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the resource to remove tags from. |
TagKeys |
[required] The tag keys to remove from the resource. |
Updates the GuardDuty detector specified by the detector ID
Description
Updates the GuardDuty detector specified by the detector ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_update_detector/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_update_detector(
DetectorId,
Enable = NULL,
FindingPublishingFrequency = NULL,
DataSources = NULL,
Features = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector to update. To find the |
Enable |
Specifies whether the detector is enabled or not enabled. |
FindingPublishingFrequency |
An enum value that specifies how frequently findings are exported, such as to CloudWatch Events. |
DataSources |
Describes which data sources will be updated. There might be regional differences because some data sources might not be available in all the Amazon Web Services Regions where GuardDuty is presently supported. For more information, see Regions and endpoints. |
Features |
Provides the features that will be updated for the detector. |
Updates the filter specified by the filter name
Description
Updates the filter specified by the filter name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_update_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_update_filter(
DetectorId,
FilterName,
Description = NULL,
Action = NULL,
Rank = NULL,
FindingCriteria = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector that specifies the GuardDuty service where you want to update a filter. To find the |
FilterName |
[required] The name of the filter. |
Description |
The description of the filter. Valid characters include alphanumeric
characters, and special characters such as hyphen, period, colon,
underscore, parentheses ( [ ]: R:%20 |
Action |
Specifies the action that is to be applied to the findings that match the filter. |
Rank |
Specifies the position of the filter in the list of current filters. Also specifies the order in which this filter is applied to the findings. |
FindingCriteria |
Represents the criteria to be used in the filter for querying findings. |
Marks the specified GuardDuty findings as useful or not useful
Description
Marks the specified GuardDuty findings as useful or not useful.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_update_findings_feedback/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_update_findings_feedback(
DetectorId,
FindingIds,
Feedback,
Comments = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The ID of the detector that is associated with the findings for which you want to update the feedback. To find the |
FindingIds |
[required] The IDs of the findings that you want to mark as useful or not useful. |
Feedback |
[required] The feedback for the finding. |
Comments |
Additional feedback about the GuardDuty findings. |
Updates the IPSet specified by the IPSet ID
Description
Updates the IPSet specified by the IPSet ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_update_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_update_ip_set(
DetectorId,
IpSetId,
Name = NULL,
Location = NULL,
Activate = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The detectorID that specifies the GuardDuty service whose IPSet you want to update. To find the |
IpSetId |
[required] The unique ID that specifies the IPSet that you want to update. |
Name |
The unique ID that specifies the IPSet that you want to update. |
Location |
The updated URI of the file that contains the IPSet. |
Activate |
The updated Boolean value that specifies whether the IPSet is active or not. |
Updates an existing Malware Protection plan resource
Description
Updates an existing Malware Protection plan resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_update_malware_protection_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_update_malware_protection_plan(
MalwareProtectionPlanId,
Role = NULL,
Actions = NULL,
ProtectedResource = NULL
)
Arguments
MalwareProtectionPlanId |
[required] A unique identifier associated with the Malware Protection plan. |
Role |
Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role with permissions to scan and add tags to the associated protected resource. |
Actions |
Information about whether the tags will be added to the S3 object after scanning. |
ProtectedResource |
Information about the protected resource that is associated with the
created Malware Protection plan. Presently, |
Updates the malware scan settings
Description
Updates the malware scan settings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_update_malware_scan_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_update_malware_scan_settings(
DetectorId,
ScanResourceCriteria = NULL,
EbsSnapshotPreservation = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The unique ID of the detector that specifies the GuardDuty service where you want to update scan settings. To find the |
ScanResourceCriteria |
Represents the criteria to be used in the filter for selecting resources to scan. |
EbsSnapshotPreservation |
An enum value representing possible snapshot preservation settings. |
Contains information on member accounts to be updated
Description
Contains information on member accounts to be updated.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_update_member_detectors/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_update_member_detectors(
DetectorId,
AccountIds,
DataSources = NULL,
Features = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The detector ID of the administrator account. To find the |
AccountIds |
[required] A list of member account IDs to be updated. |
DataSources |
Describes which data sources will be updated. |
Features |
A list of features that will be updated for the specified member accounts. |
Configures the delegated administrator account with the provided values
Description
Configures the delegated administrator account with the provided values. You must provide a value for either autoEnableOrganizationMembers
or autoEnable
, but not both.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_update_organization_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_update_organization_configuration(
DetectorId,
AutoEnable = NULL,
DataSources = NULL,
Features = NULL,
AutoEnableOrganizationMembers = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The ID of the detector that configures the delegated administrator. To find the |
AutoEnable |
Represents whether to automatically enable member accounts in the organization. This applies to only new member accounts, not the existing member accounts. When a new account joins the organization, the chosen features will be enabled for them by default. Even though this is still supported, we recommend using
|
DataSources |
Describes which data sources will be updated. |
Features |
A list of features that will be configured for the organization. |
AutoEnableOrganizationMembers |
Indicates the auto-enablement configuration of GuardDuty for the member
accounts in the organization. You must provide a value for either
Use one of the following configuration values for
|
Updates information about the publishing destination specified by the destinationId
Description
Updates information about the publishing destination specified by the destinationId
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_update_publishing_destination/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_update_publishing_destination(
DetectorId,
DestinationId,
DestinationProperties = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The ID of the detector associated with the publishing destinations to update. To find the |
DestinationId |
[required] The ID of the publishing destination to update. |
DestinationProperties |
A |
Updates the ThreatIntelSet specified by the ThreatIntelSet ID
Description
Updates the ThreatIntelSet specified by the ThreatIntelSet ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/guardduty_update_threat_intel_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
guardduty_update_threat_intel_set(
DetectorId,
ThreatIntelSetId,
Name = NULL,
Location = NULL,
Activate = NULL
)
Arguments
DetectorId |
[required] The detectorID that specifies the GuardDuty service whose ThreatIntelSet you want to update. To find the |
ThreatIntelSetId |
[required] The unique ID that specifies the ThreatIntelSet that you want to update. |
Name |
The unique ID that specifies the ThreatIntelSet that you want to update. |
Location |
The updated URI of the file that contains the ThreateIntelSet. |
Activate |
The updated Boolean value that specifies whether the ThreateIntelSet is active or not. |
AWS Identity and Access Management
Description
Identity and Access Management
Identity and Access Management (IAM) is a web service for securely controlling access to Amazon Web Services services. With IAM, you can centrally manage users, security credentials such as access keys, and permissions that control which Amazon Web Services resources users and applications can access. For more information about IAM, see Identity and Access Management (IAM) and the Identity and Access Management User Guide.
Usage
iam(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- iam( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_client_id_to_open_id_connect_provider | Adds a new client ID (also known as audience) to the list of client IDs already registered for the specified IAM OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider resource |
add_role_to_instance_profile | Adds the specified IAM role to the specified instance profile |
add_user_to_group | Adds the specified user to the specified group |
attach_group_policy | Attaches the specified managed policy to the specified IAM group |
attach_role_policy | Attaches the specified managed policy to the specified IAM role |
attach_user_policy | Attaches the specified managed policy to the specified user |
change_password | Changes the password of the IAM user who is calling this operation |
create_access_key | Creates a new Amazon Web Services secret access key and corresponding Amazon Web Services access key ID for the specified user |
create_account_alias | Creates an alias for your Amazon Web Services account |
create_group | Creates a new group |
create_instance_profile | Creates a new instance profile |
create_login_profile | Creates a password for the specified IAM user |
create_open_id_connect_provider | Creates an IAM entity to describe an identity provider (IdP) that supports OpenID Connect (OIDC) |
create_policy | Creates a new managed policy for your Amazon Web Services account |
create_policy_version | Creates a new version of the specified managed policy |
create_role | Creates a new role for your Amazon Web Services account |
create_saml_provider | Creates an IAM resource that describes an identity provider (IdP) that supports SAML 2 |
create_service_linked_role | Creates an IAM role that is linked to a specific Amazon Web Services service |
create_service_specific_credential | Generates a set of credentials consisting of a user name and password that can be used to access the service specified in the request |
create_user | Creates a new IAM user for your Amazon Web Services account |
create_virtual_mfa_device | Creates a new virtual MFA device for the Amazon Web Services account |
deactivate_mfa_device | Deactivates the specified MFA device and removes it from association with the user name for which it was originally enabled |
delete_access_key | Deletes the access key pair associated with the specified IAM user |
delete_account_alias | Deletes the specified Amazon Web Services account alias |
delete_account_password_policy | Deletes the password policy for the Amazon Web Services account |
delete_group | Deletes the specified IAM group |
delete_group_policy | Deletes the specified inline policy that is embedded in the specified IAM group |
delete_instance_profile | Deletes the specified instance profile |
delete_login_profile | Deletes the password for the specified IAM user, For more information, see Managing passwords for IAM users |
delete_open_id_connect_provider | Deletes an OpenID Connect identity provider (IdP) resource object in IAM |
delete_policy | Deletes the specified managed policy |
delete_policy_version | Deletes the specified version from the specified managed policy |
delete_role | Deletes the specified role |
delete_role_permissions_boundary | Deletes the permissions boundary for the specified IAM role |
delete_role_policy | Deletes the specified inline policy that is embedded in the specified IAM role |
delete_saml_provider | Deletes a SAML provider resource in IAM |
delete_server_certificate | Deletes the specified server certificate |
delete_service_linked_role | Submits a service-linked role deletion request and returns a DeletionTaskId, which you can use to check the status of the deletion |
delete_service_specific_credential | Deletes the specified service-specific credential |
delete_signing_certificate | Deletes a signing certificate associated with the specified IAM user |
delete_ssh_public_key | Deletes the specified SSH public key |
delete_user | Deletes the specified IAM user |
delete_user_permissions_boundary | Deletes the permissions boundary for the specified IAM user |
delete_user_policy | Deletes the specified inline policy that is embedded in the specified IAM user |
delete_virtual_mfa_device | Deletes a virtual MFA device |
detach_group_policy | Removes the specified managed policy from the specified IAM group |
detach_role_policy | Removes the specified managed policy from the specified role |
detach_user_policy | Removes the specified managed policy from the specified user |
disable_organizations_root_credentials_management | Disables the management of privileged root user credentials across member accounts in your organization |
disable_organizations_root_sessions | Disables root user sessions for privileged tasks across member accounts in your organization |
enable_mfa_device | Enables the specified MFA device and associates it with the specified IAM user |
enable_organizations_root_credentials_management | Enables the management of privileged root user credentials across member accounts in your organization |
enable_organizations_root_sessions | Allows the management account or delegated administrator to perform privileged tasks on member accounts in your organization |
generate_credential_report | Generates a credential report for the Amazon Web Services account |
generate_organizations_access_report | Generates a report for service last accessed data for Organizations |
generate_service_last_accessed_details | Generates a report that includes details about when an IAM resource (user, group, role, or policy) was last used in an attempt to access Amazon Web Services services |
get_access_key_last_used | Retrieves information about when the specified access key was last used |
get_account_authorization_details | Retrieves information about all IAM users, groups, roles, and policies in your Amazon Web Services account, including their relationships to one another |
get_account_password_policy | Retrieves the password policy for the Amazon Web Services account |
get_account_summary | Retrieves information about IAM entity usage and IAM quotas in the Amazon Web Services account |
get_context_keys_for_custom_policy | Gets a list of all of the context keys referenced in the input policies |
get_context_keys_for_principal_policy | Gets a list of all of the context keys referenced in all the IAM policies that are attached to the specified IAM entity |
get_credential_report | Retrieves a credential report for the Amazon Web Services account |
get_group | Returns a list of IAM users that are in the specified IAM group |
get_group_policy | Retrieves the specified inline policy document that is embedded in the specified IAM group |
get_instance_profile | Retrieves information about the specified instance profile, including the instance profile's path, GUID, ARN, and role |
get_login_profile | Retrieves the user name for the specified IAM user |
get_mfa_device | Retrieves information about an MFA device for a specified user |
get_open_id_connect_provider | Returns information about the specified OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider resource object in IAM |
get_organizations_access_report | Retrieves the service last accessed data report for Organizations that was previously generated using the GenerateOrganizationsAccessReport operation |
get_policy | Retrieves information about the specified managed policy, including the policy's default version and the total number of IAM users, groups, and roles to which the policy is attached |
get_policy_version | Retrieves information about the specified version of the specified managed policy, including the policy document |
get_role | Retrieves information about the specified role, including the role's path, GUID, ARN, and the role's trust policy that grants permission to assume the role |
get_role_policy | Retrieves the specified inline policy document that is embedded with the specified IAM role |
get_saml_provider | Returns the SAML provider metadocument that was uploaded when the IAM SAML provider resource object was created or updated |
get_server_certificate | Retrieves information about the specified server certificate stored in IAM |
get_service_last_accessed_details | Retrieves a service last accessed report that was created using the GenerateServiceLastAccessedDetails operation |
get_service_last_accessed_details_with_entities | After you generate a group or policy report using the GenerateServiceLastAccessedDetails operation, you can use the JobId parameter in GetServiceLastAccessedDetailsWithEntities |
get_service_linked_role_deletion_status | Retrieves the status of your service-linked role deletion |
get_ssh_public_key | Retrieves the specified SSH public key, including metadata about the key |
get_user | Retrieves information about the specified IAM user, including the user's creation date, path, unique ID, and ARN |
get_user_policy | Retrieves the specified inline policy document that is embedded in the specified IAM user |
list_access_keys | Returns information about the access key IDs associated with the specified IAM user |
list_account_aliases | Lists the account alias associated with the Amazon Web Services account (Note: you can have only one) |
list_attached_group_policies | Lists all managed policies that are attached to the specified IAM group |
list_attached_role_policies | Lists all managed policies that are attached to the specified IAM role |
list_attached_user_policies | Lists all managed policies that are attached to the specified IAM user |
list_entities_for_policy | Lists all IAM users, groups, and roles that the specified managed policy is attached to |
list_group_policies | Lists the names of the inline policies that are embedded in the specified IAM group |
list_groups | Lists the IAM groups that have the specified path prefix |
list_groups_for_user | Lists the IAM groups that the specified IAM user belongs to |
list_instance_profiles | Lists the instance profiles that have the specified path prefix |
list_instance_profiles_for_role | Lists the instance profiles that have the specified associated IAM role |
list_instance_profile_tags | Lists the tags that are attached to the specified IAM instance profile |
list_mfa_devices | Lists the MFA devices for an IAM user |
list_mfa_device_tags | Lists the tags that are attached to the specified IAM virtual multi-factor authentication (MFA) device |
list_open_id_connect_providers | Lists information about the IAM OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider resource objects defined in the Amazon Web Services account |
list_open_id_connect_provider_tags | Lists the tags that are attached to the specified OpenID Connect (OIDC)-compatible identity provider |
list_organizations_features | Lists the centralized root access features enabled for your organization |
list_policies | Lists all the managed policies that are available in your Amazon Web Services account, including your own customer-defined managed policies and all Amazon Web Services managed policies |
list_policies_granting_service_access | Retrieves a list of policies that the IAM identity (user, group, or role) can use to access each specified service |
list_policy_tags | Lists the tags that are attached to the specified IAM customer managed policy |
list_policy_versions | Lists information about the versions of the specified managed policy, including the version that is currently set as the policy's default version |
list_role_policies | Lists the names of the inline policies that are embedded in the specified IAM role |
list_roles | Lists the IAM roles that have the specified path prefix |
list_role_tags | Lists the tags that are attached to the specified role |
list_saml_providers | Lists the SAML provider resource objects defined in IAM in the account |
list_saml_provider_tags | Lists the tags that are attached to the specified Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) identity provider |
list_server_certificates | Lists the server certificates stored in IAM that have the specified path prefix |
list_server_certificate_tags | Lists the tags that are attached to the specified IAM server certificate |
list_service_specific_credentials | Returns information about the service-specific credentials associated with the specified IAM user |
list_signing_certificates | Returns information about the signing certificates associated with the specified IAM user |
list_ssh_public_keys | Returns information about the SSH public keys associated with the specified IAM user |
list_user_policies | Lists the names of the inline policies embedded in the specified IAM user |
list_users | Lists the IAM users that have the specified path prefix |
list_user_tags | Lists the tags that are attached to the specified IAM user |
list_virtual_mfa_devices | Lists the virtual MFA devices defined in the Amazon Web Services account by assignment status |
put_group_policy | Adds or updates an inline policy document that is embedded in the specified IAM group |
put_role_permissions_boundary | Adds or updates the policy that is specified as the IAM role's permissions boundary |
put_role_policy | Adds or updates an inline policy document that is embedded in the specified IAM role |
put_user_permissions_boundary | Adds or updates the policy that is specified as the IAM user's permissions boundary |
put_user_policy | Adds or updates an inline policy document that is embedded in the specified IAM user |
remove_client_id_from_open_id_connect_provider | Removes the specified client ID (also known as audience) from the list of client IDs registered for the specified IAM OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider resource object |
remove_role_from_instance_profile | Removes the specified IAM role from the specified Amazon EC2 instance profile |
remove_user_from_group | Removes the specified user from the specified group |
reset_service_specific_credential | Resets the password for a service-specific credential |
resync_mfa_device | Synchronizes the specified MFA device with its IAM resource object on the Amazon Web Services servers |
set_default_policy_version | Sets the specified version of the specified policy as the policy's default (operative) version |
set_security_token_service_preferences | Sets the specified version of the global endpoint token as the token version used for the Amazon Web Services account |
simulate_custom_policy | Simulate how a set of IAM policies and optionally a resource-based policy works with a list of API operations and Amazon Web Services resources to determine the policies' effective permissions |
simulate_principal_policy | Simulate how a set of IAM policies attached to an IAM entity works with a list of API operations and Amazon Web Services resources to determine the policies' effective permissions |
tag_instance_profile | Adds one or more tags to an IAM instance profile |
tag_mfa_device | Adds one or more tags to an IAM virtual multi-factor authentication (MFA) device |
tag_open_id_connect_provider | Adds one or more tags to an OpenID Connect (OIDC)-compatible identity provider |
tag_policy | Adds one or more tags to an IAM customer managed policy |
tag_role | Adds one or more tags to an IAM role |
tag_saml_provider | Adds one or more tags to a Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) identity provider |
tag_server_certificate | Adds one or more tags to an IAM server certificate |
tag_user | Adds one or more tags to an IAM user |
untag_instance_profile | Removes the specified tags from the IAM instance profile |
untag_mfa_device | Removes the specified tags from the IAM virtual multi-factor authentication (MFA) device |
untag_open_id_connect_provider | Removes the specified tags from the specified OpenID Connect (OIDC)-compatible identity provider in IAM |
untag_policy | Removes the specified tags from the customer managed policy |
untag_role | Removes the specified tags from the role |
untag_saml_provider | Removes the specified tags from the specified Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) identity provider in IAM |
untag_server_certificate | Removes the specified tags from the IAM server certificate |
untag_user | Removes the specified tags from the user |
update_access_key | Changes the status of the specified access key from Active to Inactive, or vice versa |
update_account_password_policy | Updates the password policy settings for the Amazon Web Services account |
update_assume_role_policy | Updates the policy that grants an IAM entity permission to assume a role |
update_group | Updates the name and/or the path of the specified IAM group |
update_login_profile | Changes the password for the specified IAM user |
update_open_id_connect_provider_thumbprint | Replaces the existing list of server certificate thumbprints associated with an OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider resource object with a new list of thumbprints |
update_role | Updates the description or maximum session duration setting of a role |
update_role_description | Use UpdateRole instead |
update_saml_provider | Updates the metadata document, SAML encryption settings, and private keys for an existing SAML provider |
update_server_certificate | Updates the name and/or the path of the specified server certificate stored in IAM |
update_service_specific_credential | Sets the status of a service-specific credential to Active or Inactive |
update_signing_certificate | Changes the status of the specified user signing certificate from active to disabled, or vice versa |
update_ssh_public_key | Sets the status of an IAM user's SSH public key to active or inactive |
update_user | Updates the name and/or the path of the specified IAM user |
upload_server_certificate | Uploads a server certificate entity for the Amazon Web Services account |
upload_signing_certificate | Uploads an X |
upload_ssh_public_key | Uploads an SSH public key and associates it with the specified IAM user |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- iam()
# The following add-client-id-to-open-id-connect-provider command adds the
# client ID my-application-ID to the OIDC provider named
# server.example.com:
svc$add_client_id_to_open_id_connect_provider(
ClientID = "my-application-ID",
OpenIDConnectProviderArn = "arn:aws:iam::123456789012:oidc-provider/server.example.com"
)
## End(Not run)
Adds a new client ID (also known as audience) to the list of client IDs already registered for the specified IAM OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider resource
Description
Adds a new client ID (also known as audience) to the list of client IDs already registered for the specified IAM OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_add_client_id_to_open_id_connect_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_add_client_id_to_open_id_connect_provider(
OpenIDConnectProviderArn,
ClientID
)
Arguments
OpenIDConnectProviderArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider
resource to add the client ID to. You can get a list of OIDC provider
ARNs by using the
|
ClientID |
[required] The client ID (also known as audience) to add to the IAM OpenID Connect provider resource. |
Adds the specified IAM role to the specified instance profile
Description
Adds the specified IAM role to the specified instance profile. An instance profile can contain only one role, and this quota cannot be increased. You can remove the existing role and then add a different role to an instance profile. You must then wait for the change to appear across all of Amazon Web Services because of eventual consistency. To force the change, you must disassociate the instance profile and then associate the instance profile, or you can stop your instance and then restart it.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_add_role_to_instance_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_add_role_to_instance_profile(InstanceProfileName, RoleName)
Arguments
InstanceProfileName |
[required] The name of the instance profile to update. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
RoleName |
[required] The name of the role to add. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Adds the specified user to the specified group
Description
Adds the specified user to the specified group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_add_user_to_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_add_user_to_group(GroupName, UserName)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group to update. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
UserName |
[required] The name of the user to add. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Attaches the specified managed policy to the specified IAM group
Description
Attaches the specified managed policy to the specified IAM group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_attach_group_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_attach_group_policy(GroupName, PolicyArn)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) of the group to attach the policy to. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM policy you want to attach. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Attaches the specified managed policy to the specified IAM role
Description
Attaches the specified managed policy to the specified IAM role. When you attach a managed policy to a role, the managed policy becomes part of the role's permission (access) policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_attach_role_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_attach_role_policy(RoleName, PolicyArn)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) of the role to attach the policy to. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM policy you want to attach. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Attaches the specified managed policy to the specified user
Description
Attaches the specified managed policy to the specified user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_attach_user_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_attach_user_policy(UserName, PolicyArn)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) of the IAM user to attach the policy to. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM policy you want to attach. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Changes the password of the IAM user who is calling this operation
Description
Changes the password of the IAM user who is calling this operation. This operation can be performed using the CLI, the Amazon Web Services API, or the My Security Credentials page in the Amazon Web Services Management Console. The Amazon Web Services account root user password is not affected by this operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_change_password/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_change_password(OldPassword, NewPassword)
Arguments
OldPassword |
[required] The IAM user's current password. |
NewPassword |
[required] The new password. The new password must conform to the Amazon Web Services account's password policy, if one exists. The regex pattern that is used to
validate this parameter is a string of characters. That string can
include almost any printable ASCII character from the space ( |
Creates a new Amazon Web Services secret access key and corresponding Amazon Web Services access key ID for the specified user
Description
Creates a new Amazon Web Services secret access key and corresponding Amazon Web Services access key ID for the specified user. The default status for new keys is Active
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_create_access_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_create_access_key(UserName = NULL)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the IAM user that the new key will belong to. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Creates an alias for your Amazon Web Services account
Description
Creates an alias for your Amazon Web Services account. For information about using an Amazon Web Services account alias, see Creating, deleting, and listing an Amazon Web Services account alias in the Amazon Web Services Sign-In User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_create_account_alias/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_create_account_alias(AccountAlias)
Arguments
AccountAlias |
[required] The account alias to create. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of lowercase letters, digits, and dashes. You cannot start or finish with a dash, nor can you have two dashes in a row. |
Creates a new group
Description
Creates a new group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_create_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_create_group(Path = NULL, GroupName)
Arguments
Path |
The path to the group. For more information about paths, see IAM identifiers in the IAM User Guide. This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a slash (/). This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( |
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group to create. Do not include the path in this value. IAM user, group, role, and policy names must be unique within the account. Names are not distinguished by case. For example, you cannot create resources named both "MyResource" and "myresource". |
Creates a new instance profile
Description
Creates a new instance profile. For information about instance profiles, see Using roles for applications on Amazon EC2 in the IAM User Guide, and Instance profiles in the Amazon EC2 User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_create_instance_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_create_instance_profile(InstanceProfileName, Path = NULL, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
InstanceProfileName |
[required] The name of the instance profile to create. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Path |
The path to the instance profile. For more information about paths, see IAM Identifiers in the IAM User Guide. This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a slash (/). This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( |
Tags |
A list of tags that you want to attach to the newly created IAM instance profile. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide. If any one of the tags is invalid or if you exceed the allowed maximum number of tags, then the entire request fails and the resource is not created. |
Creates a password for the specified IAM user
Description
Creates a password for the specified IAM user. A password allows an IAM user to access Amazon Web Services services through the Amazon Web Services Management Console.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_create_login_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_create_login_profile(
UserName = NULL,
Password = NULL,
PasswordResetRequired = NULL
)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the IAM user to create a password for. The user must already exist. This parameter is optional. If no user name is included, it defaults to the principal making the request. When you make this request with root user credentials, you must use an AssumeRoot session to omit the user name. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Password |
The new password for the user. This parameter must be omitted when you make the request with an AssumeRoot session. It is required in all other cases. The regex pattern that is used to
validate this parameter is a string of characters. That string can
include almost any printable ASCII character from the space ( |
PasswordResetRequired |
Specifies whether the user is required to set a new password on next sign-in. |
Creates an IAM entity to describe an identity provider (IdP) that supports OpenID Connect (OIDC)
Description
Creates an IAM entity to describe an identity provider (IdP) that supports OpenID Connect (OIDC).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_create_open_id_connect_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_create_open_id_connect_provider(
Url,
ClientIDList = NULL,
ThumbprintList = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Url |
[required] The URL of the identity provider. The URL must begin with You cannot register the same provider multiple times in a single Amazon Web Services account. If you try to submit a URL that has already been used for an OpenID Connect provider in the Amazon Web Services account, you will get an error. |
ClientIDList |
Provides a list of client IDs, also known as audiences. When a mobile or
web app registers with an OpenID Connect provider, they establish a
value that identifies the application. This is the value that's sent as
the You can register multiple client IDs with the same provider. For example, you might have multiple applications that use the same OIDC provider. You cannot register more than 100 client IDs with a single IAM OIDC provider. There is no defined format for a client ID. The
|
ThumbprintList |
A list of server certificate thumbprints for the OpenID Connect (OIDC) identity provider's server certificates. Typically this list includes only one entry. However, IAM lets you have up to five thumbprints for an OIDC provider. This lets you maintain multiple thumbprints if the identity provider is rotating certificates. This parameter is optional. If it is not included, IAM will retrieve and use the top intermediate certificate authority (CA) thumbprint of the OpenID Connect identity provider server certificate. The server certificate thumbprint is the hex-encoded SHA-1 hash value of the X.509 certificate used by the domain where the OpenID Connect provider makes its keys available. It is always a 40-character string. For example, assume that the OIDC provider is For more information about obtaining the OIDC provider thumbprint, see Obtaining the thumbprint for an OpenID Connect provider in the IAM user Guide. |
Tags |
A list of tags that you want to attach to the new IAM OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide. If any one of the tags is invalid or if you exceed the allowed maximum number of tags, then the entire request fails and the resource is not created. |
Creates a new managed policy for your Amazon Web Services account
Description
Creates a new managed policy for your Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_create_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_create_policy(
PolicyName,
Path = NULL,
PolicyDocument,
Description = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
PolicyName |
[required] The friendly name of the policy. IAM user, group, role, and policy names must be unique within the account. Names are not distinguished by case. For example, you cannot create resources named both "MyResource" and "myresource". |
Path |
The path for the policy. For more information about paths, see IAM identifiers in the IAM User Guide. This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a slash (/). This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( You cannot use an asterisk (*) in the path name. |
PolicyDocument |
[required] The JSON policy document that you want to use as the content for the new policy. You must provide policies in JSON format in IAM. However, for CloudFormation templates formatted in YAML, you can provide the policy in JSON or YAML format. CloudFormation always converts a YAML policy to JSON format before submitting it to IAM. The maximum length of the policy document that you can pass in this operation, including whitespace, is listed below. To view the maximum character counts of a managed policy with no whitespaces, see IAM and STS character quotas. To learn more about JSON policy grammar, see Grammar of the IAM JSON policy language in the IAM User Guide. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
Description |
A friendly description of the policy. Typically used to store information about the permissions defined in the policy. For example, "Grants access to production DynamoDB tables." The policy description is immutable. After a value is assigned, it cannot be changed. |
Tags |
A list of tags that you want to attach to the new IAM customer managed policy. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide. If any one of the tags is invalid or if you exceed the allowed maximum number of tags, then the entire request fails and the resource is not created. |
Creates a new version of the specified managed policy
Description
Creates a new version of the specified managed policy. To update a managed policy, you create a new policy version. A managed policy can have up to five versions. If the policy has five versions, you must delete an existing version using delete_policy_version
before you create a new version.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_create_policy_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_create_policy_version(PolicyArn, PolicyDocument, SetAsDefault = NULL)
Arguments
PolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM policy to which you want to add a new version. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
PolicyDocument |
[required] The JSON policy document that you want to use as the content for this new version of the policy. You must provide policies in JSON format in IAM. However, for CloudFormation templates formatted in YAML, you can provide the policy in JSON or YAML format. CloudFormation always converts a YAML policy to JSON format before submitting it to IAM. The maximum length of the policy document that you can pass in this operation, including whitespace, is listed below. To view the maximum character counts of a managed policy with no whitespaces, see IAM and STS character quotas. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
SetAsDefault |
Specifies whether to set this version as the policy's default version. When this parameter is For more information about managed policy versions, see Versioning for managed policies in the IAM User Guide. |
Creates a new role for your Amazon Web Services account
Description
Creates a new role for your Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_create_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_create_role(
Path = NULL,
RoleName,
AssumeRolePolicyDocument,
Description = NULL,
MaxSessionDuration = NULL,
PermissionsBoundary = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Path |
The path to the role. For more information about paths, see IAM Identifiers in the IAM User Guide. This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a slash (/). This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( |
RoleName |
[required] The name of the role to create. IAM user, group, role, and policy names must be unique within the account. Names are not distinguished by case. For example, you cannot create resources named both "MyResource" and "myresource". This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
AssumeRolePolicyDocument |
[required] The trust relationship policy document that grants an entity permission to assume the role. In IAM, you must provide a JSON policy that has been converted to a string. However, for CloudFormation templates formatted in YAML, you can provide the policy in JSON or YAML format. CloudFormation always converts a YAML policy to JSON format before submitting it to IAM. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
Upon success, the response includes the same trust policy in JSON format. |
Description |
A description of the role. |
MaxSessionDuration |
The maximum session duration (in seconds) that you want to set for the specified role. If you do not specify a value for this setting, the default value of one hour is applied. This setting can have a value from 1 hour to 12 hours. Anyone who assumes the role from the CLI or API can use the
|
PermissionsBoundary |
The ARN of the managed policy that is used to set the permissions boundary for the role. A permissions boundary policy defines the maximum permissions that identity-based policies can grant to an entity, but does not grant permissions. Permissions boundaries do not define the maximum permissions that a resource-based policy can grant to an entity. To learn more, see Permissions boundaries for IAM entities in the IAM User Guide. For more information about policy types, see Policy types in the IAM User Guide. |
Tags |
A list of tags that you want to attach to the new role. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide. If any one of the tags is invalid or if you exceed the allowed maximum number of tags, then the entire request fails and the resource is not created. |
Creates an IAM resource that describes an identity provider (IdP) that supports SAML 2
Description
Creates an IAM resource that describes an identity provider (IdP) that supports SAML 2.0.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_create_saml_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_create_saml_provider(
SAMLMetadataDocument,
Name,
Tags = NULL,
AssertionEncryptionMode = NULL,
AddPrivateKey = NULL
)
Arguments
SAMLMetadataDocument |
[required] An XML document generated by an identity provider (IdP) that supports SAML 2.0. The document includes the issuer's name, expiration information, and keys that can be used to validate the SAML authentication response (assertions) that are received from the IdP. You must generate the metadata document using the identity management software that is used as your organization's IdP. For more information, see About SAML 2.0-based federation in the IAM User Guide |
Name |
[required] The name of the provider to create. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Tags |
A list of tags that you want to attach to the new IAM SAML provider. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide. If any one of the tags is invalid or if you exceed the allowed maximum number of tags, then the entire request fails and the resource is not created. |
AssertionEncryptionMode |
Specifies the encryption setting for the SAML provider. |
AddPrivateKey |
The private key generated from your external identity provider. The private key must be a .pem file that uses AES-GCM or AES-CBC encryption algorithm to decrypt SAML assertions. |
Creates an IAM role that is linked to a specific Amazon Web Services service
Description
Creates an IAM role that is linked to a specific Amazon Web Services service. The service controls the attached policies and when the role can be deleted. This helps ensure that the service is not broken by an unexpectedly changed or deleted role, which could put your Amazon Web Services resources into an unknown state. Allowing the service to control the role helps improve service stability and proper cleanup when a service and its role are no longer needed. For more information, see Using service-linked roles in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_create_service_linked_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_create_service_linked_role(
AWSServiceName,
Description = NULL,
CustomSuffix = NULL
)
Arguments
AWSServiceName |
[required] The service principal for the Amazon Web Services service to which this
role is attached. You use a string similar to a URL but without the
http:// in front. For example: Service principals are unique and case-sensitive. To find the exact service principal for your service-linked role, see Amazon Web Services services that work with IAM in the IAM User Guide. Look for the services that have Yes in the Service-Linked Role column. Choose the Yes link to view the service-linked role documentation for that service. |
Description |
The description of the role. |
CustomSuffix |
A string that you provide, which is combined with the service-provided
prefix to form the complete role name. If you make multiple requests for
the same service, then you must supply a different Some services do not support the |
Generates a set of credentials consisting of a user name and password that can be used to access the service specified in the request
Description
Generates a set of credentials consisting of a user name and password that can be used to access the service specified in the request. These credentials are generated by IAM, and can be used only for the specified service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_create_service_specific_credential/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_create_service_specific_credential(UserName, ServiceName)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the IAM user that is to be associated with the credentials. The new service-specific credentials have the same permissions as the associated user except that they can be used only to access the specified service. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
ServiceName |
[required] The name of the Amazon Web Services service that is to be associated with the credentials. The service you specify here is the only service that can be accessed using these credentials. |
Creates a new IAM user for your Amazon Web Services account
Description
Creates a new IAM user for your Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_create_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_create_user(Path = NULL, UserName, PermissionsBoundary = NULL, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
Path |
The path for the user name. For more information about paths, see IAM identifiers in the IAM User Guide. This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a slash (/). This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( |
UserName |
[required] The name of the user to create. IAM user, group, role, and policy names must be unique within the account. Names are not distinguished by case. For example, you cannot create resources named both "MyResource" and "myresource". |
PermissionsBoundary |
The ARN of the managed policy that is used to set the permissions boundary for the user. A permissions boundary policy defines the maximum permissions that identity-based policies can grant to an entity, but does not grant permissions. Permissions boundaries do not define the maximum permissions that a resource-based policy can grant to an entity. To learn more, see Permissions boundaries for IAM entities in the IAM User Guide. For more information about policy types, see Policy types in the IAM User Guide. |
Tags |
A list of tags that you want to attach to the new user. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide. If any one of the tags is invalid or if you exceed the allowed maximum number of tags, then the entire request fails and the resource is not created. |
Creates a new virtual MFA device for the Amazon Web Services account
Description
Creates a new virtual MFA device for the Amazon Web Services account. After creating the virtual MFA, use enable_mfa_device
to attach the MFA device to an IAM user. For more information about creating and working with virtual MFA devices, see Using a virtual MFA device in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_create_virtual_mfa_device/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_create_virtual_mfa_device(Path = NULL, VirtualMFADeviceName, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
Path |
The path for the virtual MFA device. For more information about paths, see IAM identifiers in the IAM User Guide. This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a slash (/). This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( |
VirtualMFADeviceName |
[required] The name of the virtual MFA device, which must be unique. Use with path to uniquely identify a virtual MFA device. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Tags |
A list of tags that you want to attach to the new IAM virtual MFA device. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide. If any one of the tags is invalid or if you exceed the allowed maximum number of tags, then the entire request fails and the resource is not created. |
Deactivates the specified MFA device and removes it from association with the user name for which it was originally enabled
Description
Deactivates the specified MFA device and removes it from association with the user name for which it was originally enabled.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_deactivate_mfa_device/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_deactivate_mfa_device(UserName = NULL, SerialNumber)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the user whose MFA device you want to deactivate. This parameter is optional. If no user name is included, it defaults to the principal making the request. When you make this request with root user credentials, you must use an AssumeRoot session to omit the user name. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
SerialNumber |
[required] The serial number that uniquely identifies the MFA device. For virtual MFA devices, the serial number is the device ARN. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: =,.@:/- |
Deletes the access key pair associated with the specified IAM user
Description
Deletes the access key pair associated with the specified IAM user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_access_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_access_key(UserName = NULL, AccessKeyId)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the user whose access key pair you want to delete. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
AccessKeyId |
[required] The access key ID for the access key ID and secret access key you want to delete. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that can consist of any upper or lowercased letter or digit. |
Deletes the specified Amazon Web Services account alias
Description
Deletes the specified Amazon Web Services account alias. For information about using an Amazon Web Services account alias, see Creating, deleting, and listing an Amazon Web Services account alias in the Amazon Web Services Sign-In User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_account_alias/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_account_alias(AccountAlias)
Arguments
AccountAlias |
[required] The name of the account alias to delete. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of lowercase letters, digits, and dashes. You cannot start or finish with a dash, nor can you have two dashes in a row. |
Deletes the password policy for the Amazon Web Services account
Description
Deletes the password policy for the Amazon Web Services account. There are no parameters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_account_password_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_account_password_policy()
Deletes the specified IAM group
Description
Deletes the specified IAM group. The group must not contain any users or have any attached policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_group(GroupName)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name of the IAM group to delete. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Deletes the specified inline policy that is embedded in the specified IAM group
Description
Deletes the specified inline policy that is embedded in the specified IAM group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_group_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_group_policy(GroupName, PolicyName)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) identifying the group that the policy is embedded in. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyName |
[required] The name identifying the policy document to delete. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Deletes the specified instance profile
Description
Deletes the specified instance profile. The instance profile must not have an associated role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_instance_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_instance_profile(InstanceProfileName)
Arguments
InstanceProfileName |
[required] The name of the instance profile to delete. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Deletes the password for the specified IAM user, For more information, see Managing passwords for IAM users
Description
Deletes the password for the specified IAM user, For more information, see Managing passwords for IAM users.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_login_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_login_profile(UserName = NULL)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the user whose password you want to delete. This parameter is optional. If no user name is included, it defaults to the principal making the request. When you make this request with root user credentials, you must use an AssumeRoot session to omit the user name. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Deletes an OpenID Connect identity provider (IdP) resource object in IAM
Description
Deletes an OpenID Connect identity provider (IdP) resource object in IAM.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_open_id_connect_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_open_id_connect_provider(OpenIDConnectProviderArn)
Arguments
OpenIDConnectProviderArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM OpenID Connect provider
resource object to delete. You can get a list of OpenID Connect provider
resource ARNs by using the
|
Deletes the specified managed policy
Description
Deletes the specified managed policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_policy(PolicyArn)
Arguments
PolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM policy you want to delete. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Deletes the specified version from the specified managed policy
Description
Deletes the specified version from the specified managed policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_policy_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_policy_version(PolicyArn, VersionId)
Arguments
PolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM policy from which you want to delete a version. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
VersionId |
[required] The policy version to delete. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that consists of the lowercase letter 'v' followed by one or two digits, and optionally followed by a period '.' and a string of letters and digits. For more information about managed policy versions, see Versioning for managed policies in the IAM User Guide. |
Deletes the specified role
Description
Deletes the specified role. Unlike the Amazon Web Services Management Console, when you delete a role programmatically, you must delete the items attached to the role manually, or the deletion fails. For more information, see Deleting an IAM role. Before attempting to delete a role, remove the following attached items:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_role(RoleName)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name of the role to delete. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Deletes the permissions boundary for the specified IAM role
Description
Deletes the permissions boundary for the specified IAM role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_role_permissions_boundary/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_role_permissions_boundary(RoleName)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) of the IAM role from which you want to remove the permissions boundary. |
Deletes the specified inline policy that is embedded in the specified IAM role
Description
Deletes the specified inline policy that is embedded in the specified IAM role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_role_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_role_policy(RoleName, PolicyName)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) identifying the role that the policy is embedded in. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyName |
[required] The name of the inline policy to delete from the specified IAM role. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Deletes a SAML provider resource in IAM
Description
Deletes a SAML provider resource in IAM.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_saml_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_saml_provider(SAMLProviderArn)
Arguments
SAMLProviderArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SAML provider to delete. |
Deletes the specified server certificate
Description
Deletes the specified server certificate.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_server_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_server_certificate(ServerCertificateName)
Arguments
ServerCertificateName |
[required] The name of the server certificate you want to delete. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Submits a service-linked role deletion request and returns a DeletionTaskId, which you can use to check the status of the deletion
Description
Submits a service-linked role deletion request and returns a DeletionTaskId
, which you can use to check the status of the deletion. Before you call this operation, confirm that the role has no active sessions and that any resources used by the role in the linked service are deleted. If you call this operation more than once for the same service-linked role and an earlier deletion task is not complete, then the DeletionTaskId
of the earlier request is returned.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_service_linked_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_service_linked_role(RoleName)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name of the service-linked role to be deleted. |
Deletes the specified service-specific credential
Description
Deletes the specified service-specific credential.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_service_specific_credential/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_service_specific_credential(
UserName = NULL,
ServiceSpecificCredentialId
)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the IAM user associated with the service-specific credential. If this value is not specified, then the operation assumes the user whose credentials are used to call the operation. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
ServiceSpecificCredentialId |
[required] The unique identifier of the service-specific credential. You can get
this value by calling
This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that can consist of any upper or lowercased letter or digit. |
Deletes a signing certificate associated with the specified IAM user
Description
Deletes a signing certificate associated with the specified IAM user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_signing_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_signing_certificate(UserName = NULL, CertificateId)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the user the signing certificate belongs to. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
CertificateId |
[required] The ID of the signing certificate to delete. The format of this parameter, as described by its regex pattern, is a string of characters that can be upper- or lower-cased letters or digits. |
Deletes the specified SSH public key
Description
Deletes the specified SSH public key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_ssh_public_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_ssh_public_key(UserName, SSHPublicKeyId)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the IAM user associated with the SSH public key. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
SSHPublicKeyId |
[required] The unique identifier for the SSH public key. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that can consist of any upper or lowercased letter or digit. |
Deletes the specified IAM user
Description
Deletes the specified IAM user. Unlike the Amazon Web Services Management Console, when you delete a user programmatically, you must delete the items attached to the user manually, or the deletion fails. For more information, see Deleting an IAM user. Before attempting to delete a user, remove the following items:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_user(UserName)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the user to delete. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Deletes the permissions boundary for the specified IAM user
Description
Deletes the permissions boundary for the specified IAM user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_user_permissions_boundary/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_user_permissions_boundary(UserName)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) of the IAM user from which you want to remove the permissions boundary. |
Deletes the specified inline policy that is embedded in the specified IAM user
Description
Deletes the specified inline policy that is embedded in the specified IAM user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_user_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_user_policy(UserName, PolicyName)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) identifying the user that the policy is embedded in. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyName |
[required] The name identifying the policy document to delete. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Deletes a virtual MFA device
Description
Deletes a virtual MFA device.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_delete_virtual_mfa_device/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_delete_virtual_mfa_device(SerialNumber)
Arguments
SerialNumber |
[required] The serial number that uniquely identifies the MFA device. For virtual MFA devices, the serial number is the same as the ARN. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: =,.@:/- |
Removes the specified managed policy from the specified IAM group
Description
Removes the specified managed policy from the specified IAM group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_detach_group_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_detach_group_policy(GroupName, PolicyArn)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) of the IAM group to detach the policy from. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM policy you want to detach. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Removes the specified managed policy from the specified role
Description
Removes the specified managed policy from the specified role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_detach_role_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_detach_role_policy(RoleName, PolicyArn)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) of the IAM role to detach the policy from. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM policy you want to detach. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Removes the specified managed policy from the specified user
Description
Removes the specified managed policy from the specified user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_detach_user_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_detach_user_policy(UserName, PolicyArn)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) of the IAM user to detach the policy from. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM policy you want to detach. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Disables the management of privileged root user credentials across member accounts in your organization
Description
Disables the management of privileged root user credentials across member accounts in your organization. When you disable this feature, the management account and the delegated administrator for IAM can no longer manage root user credentials for member accounts in your organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_disable_organizations_root_credentials_management/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_disable_organizations_root_credentials_management()
Disables root user sessions for privileged tasks across member accounts in your organization
Description
Disables root user sessions for privileged tasks across member accounts in your organization. When you disable this feature, the management account and the delegated administrator for IAM can no longer perform privileged tasks on member accounts in your organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_disable_organizations_root_sessions/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_disable_organizations_root_sessions()
Enables the specified MFA device and associates it with the specified IAM user
Description
Enables the specified MFA device and associates it with the specified IAM user. When enabled, the MFA device is required for every subsequent login by the IAM user associated with the device.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_enable_mfa_device/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_enable_mfa_device(
UserName,
SerialNumber,
AuthenticationCode1,
AuthenticationCode2
)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the IAM user for whom you want to enable the MFA device. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
SerialNumber |
[required] The serial number that uniquely identifies the MFA device. For virtual MFA devices, the serial number is the device ARN. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: =,.@:/- |
AuthenticationCode1 |
[required] An authentication code emitted by the device. The format for this parameter is a string of six digits. Submit your request immediately after generating the authentication codes. If you generate the codes and then wait too long to submit the request, the MFA device successfully associates with the user but the MFA device becomes out of sync. This happens because time-based one-time passwords (TOTP) expire after a short period of time. If this happens, you can resync the device. |
AuthenticationCode2 |
[required] A subsequent authentication code emitted by the device. The format for this parameter is a string of six digits. Submit your request immediately after generating the authentication codes. If you generate the codes and then wait too long to submit the request, the MFA device successfully associates with the user but the MFA device becomes out of sync. This happens because time-based one-time passwords (TOTP) expire after a short period of time. If this happens, you can resync the device. |
Enables the management of privileged root user credentials across member accounts in your organization
Description
Enables the management of privileged root user credentials across member accounts in your organization. When you enable root credentials management for centralized root access, the management account and the delegated administrator for IAM can manage root user credentials for member accounts in your organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_enable_organizations_root_credentials_management/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_enable_organizations_root_credentials_management()
Allows the management account or delegated administrator to perform privileged tasks on member accounts in your organization
Description
Allows the management account or delegated administrator to perform privileged tasks on member accounts in your organization. For more information, see Centrally manage root access for member accounts in the Identity and Access Management User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_enable_organizations_root_sessions/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_enable_organizations_root_sessions()
Generates a credential report for the Amazon Web Services account
Description
Generates a credential report for the Amazon Web Services account. For more information about the credential report, see Getting credential reports in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_generate_credential_report/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_generate_credential_report()
Generates a report for service last accessed data for Organizations
Description
Generates a report for service last accessed data for Organizations. You can generate a report for any entities (organization root, organizational unit, or account) or policies in your organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_generate_organizations_access_report/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_generate_organizations_access_report(
EntityPath,
OrganizationsPolicyId = NULL
)
Arguments
EntityPath |
[required] The path of the Organizations entity (root, OU, or account). You can
build an entity path using the known structure of your organization. For
example, assume that your account ID is |
OrganizationsPolicyId |
The identifier of the Organizations service control policy (SCP). This parameter is optional. This ID is used to generate information about when an account principal that is limited by the SCP attempted to access an Amazon Web Services service. |
Generates a report that includes details about when an IAM resource (user, group, role, or policy) was last used in an attempt to access Amazon Web Services services
Description
Generates a report that includes details about when an IAM resource (user, group, role, or policy) was last used in an attempt to access Amazon Web Services services. Recent activity usually appears within four hours. IAM reports activity for at least the last 400 days, or less if your Region began supporting this feature within the last year. For more information, see Regions where data is tracked. For more information about services and actions for which action last accessed information is displayed, see IAM action last accessed information services and actions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_generate_service_last_accessed_details/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_generate_service_last_accessed_details(Arn, Granularity = NULL)
Arguments
Arn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM resource (user, group, role, or managed policy) used to generate information about when the resource was last used in an attempt to access an Amazon Web Services service. |
Granularity |
The level of detail that you want to generate. You can specify whether you want to generate information about the last attempt to access services or actions. If you specify service-level granularity, this operation generates only service data. If you specify action-level granularity, it generates service and action data. If you don't include this optional parameter, the operation generates service data. |
Retrieves information about when the specified access key was last used
Description
Retrieves information about when the specified access key was last used. The information includes the date and time of last use, along with the Amazon Web Services service and Region that were specified in the last request made with that key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_access_key_last_used/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_access_key_last_used(AccessKeyId)
Arguments
AccessKeyId |
[required] The identifier of an access key. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that can consist of any upper or lowercased letter or digit. |
Retrieves information about all IAM users, groups, roles, and policies in your Amazon Web Services account, including their relationships to one another
Description
Retrieves information about all IAM users, groups, roles, and policies in your Amazon Web Services account, including their relationships to one another. Use this operation to obtain a snapshot of the configuration of IAM permissions (users, groups, roles, and policies) in your account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_account_authorization_details/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_account_authorization_details(
Filter = NULL,
MaxItems = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
Filter |
A list of entity types used to filter the results. Only the entities
that match the types you specify are included in the output. Use the
value The format for this parameter is a comma-separated (if more than one) list of strings. Each string value in the list must be one of the valid values listed below. |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
Retrieves the password policy for the Amazon Web Services account
Description
Retrieves the password policy for the Amazon Web Services account. This tells you the complexity requirements and mandatory rotation periods for the IAM user passwords in your account. For more information about using a password policy, see Managing an IAM password policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_account_password_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_account_password_policy()
Retrieves information about IAM entity usage and IAM quotas in the Amazon Web Services account
Description
Retrieves information about IAM entity usage and IAM quotas in the Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_account_summary/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_account_summary()
Gets a list of all of the context keys referenced in the input policies
Description
Gets a list of all of the context keys referenced in the input policies. The policies are supplied as a list of one or more strings. To get the context keys from policies associated with an IAM user, group, or role, use get_context_keys_for_principal_policy
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_context_keys_for_custom_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_context_keys_for_custom_policy(PolicyInputList)
Arguments
PolicyInputList |
[required] A list of policies for which you want the list of context keys referenced in those policies. Each document is specified as a string containing the complete, valid JSON text of an IAM policy. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
Gets a list of all of the context keys referenced in all the IAM policies that are attached to the specified IAM entity
Description
Gets a list of all of the context keys referenced in all the IAM policies that are attached to the specified IAM entity. The entity can be an IAM user, group, or role. If you specify a user, then the request also includes all of the policies attached to groups that the user is a member of.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_context_keys_for_principal_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_context_keys_for_principal_policy(
PolicySourceArn,
PolicyInputList = NULL
)
Arguments
PolicySourceArn |
[required] The ARN of a user, group, or role whose policies contain the context keys that you want listed. If you specify a user, the list includes context keys that are found in all policies that are attached to the user. The list also includes all groups that the user is a member of. If you pick a group or a role, then it includes only those context keys that are found in policies attached to that entity. Note that all parameters are shown in unencoded form here for clarity, but must be URL encoded to be included as a part of a real HTML request. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
PolicyInputList |
An optional list of additional policies for which you want the list of context keys that are referenced. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
Retrieves a credential report for the Amazon Web Services account
Description
Retrieves a credential report for the Amazon Web Services account. For more information about the credential report, see Getting credential reports in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_credential_report/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_credential_report()
Returns a list of IAM users that are in the specified IAM group
Description
Returns a list of IAM users that are in the specified IAM group. You can paginate the results using the MaxItems
and Marker
parameters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_group(GroupName, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Retrieves the specified inline policy document that is embedded in the specified IAM group
Description
Retrieves the specified inline policy document that is embedded in the specified IAM group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_group_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_group_policy(GroupName, PolicyName)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group the policy is associated with. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyName |
[required] The name of the policy document to get. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Retrieves information about the specified instance profile, including the instance profile's path, GUID, ARN, and role
Description
Retrieves information about the specified instance profile, including the instance profile's path, GUID, ARN, and role. For more information about instance profiles, see Using instance profiles in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_instance_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_instance_profile(InstanceProfileName)
Arguments
InstanceProfileName |
[required] The name of the instance profile to get information about. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Retrieves the user name for the specified IAM user
Description
Retrieves the user name for the specified IAM user. A login profile is created when you create a password for the user to access the Amazon Web Services Management Console. If the user does not exist or does not have a password, the operation returns a 404 (NoSuchEntity
) error.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_login_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_login_profile(UserName = NULL)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the user whose login profile you want to retrieve. This parameter is optional. If no user name is included, it defaults to the principal making the request. When you make this request with root user credentials, you must use an AssumeRoot session to omit the user name. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Retrieves information about an MFA device for a specified user
Description
Retrieves information about an MFA device for a specified user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_mfa_device/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_mfa_device(SerialNumber, UserName = NULL)
Arguments
SerialNumber |
[required] Serial number that uniquely identifies the MFA device. For this API, we only accept FIDO security key ARNs. |
UserName |
The friendly name identifying the user. |
Returns information about the specified OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider resource object in IAM
Description
Returns information about the specified OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider resource object in IAM.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_open_id_connect_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_open_id_connect_provider(OpenIDConnectProviderArn)
Arguments
OpenIDConnectProviderArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the OIDC provider resource object in
IAM to get information for. You can get a list of OIDC provider resource
ARNs by using the
For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Retrieves the service last accessed data report for Organizations that was previously generated using the GenerateOrganizationsAccessReport operation
Description
Retrieves the service last accessed data report for Organizations that was previously generated using the generate_organizations_access_report
operation. This operation retrieves the status of your report job and the report contents.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_organizations_access_report/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_organizations_access_report(
JobId,
MaxItems = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
SortKey = NULL
)
Arguments
JobId |
[required] The identifier of the request generated by the
|
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
SortKey |
The key that is used to sort the results. If you choose the namespace key, the results are returned in alphabetical order. If you choose the time key, the results are sorted numerically by the date and time. |
Retrieves information about the specified managed policy, including the policy's default version and the total number of IAM users, groups, and roles to which the policy is attached
Description
Retrieves information about the specified managed policy, including the policy's default version and the total number of IAM users, groups, and roles to which the policy is attached. To retrieve the list of the specific users, groups, and roles that the policy is attached to, use list_entities_for_policy
. This operation returns metadata about the policy. To retrieve the actual policy document for a specific version of the policy, use get_policy_version
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_policy(PolicyArn)
Arguments
PolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the managed policy that you want information about. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Retrieves information about the specified version of the specified managed policy, including the policy document
Description
Retrieves information about the specified version of the specified managed policy, including the policy document.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_policy_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_policy_version(PolicyArn, VersionId)
Arguments
PolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the managed policy that you want information about. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
VersionId |
[required] Identifies the policy version to retrieve. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that consists of the lowercase letter 'v' followed by one or two digits, and optionally followed by a period '.' and a string of letters and digits. |
Retrieves information about the specified role, including the role's path, GUID, ARN, and the role's trust policy that grants permission to assume the role
Description
Retrieves information about the specified role, including the role's path, GUID, ARN, and the role's trust policy that grants permission to assume the role. For more information about roles, see IAM roles in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_role(RoleName)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name of the IAM role to get information about. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Retrieves the specified inline policy document that is embedded with the specified IAM role
Description
Retrieves the specified inline policy document that is embedded with the specified IAM role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_role_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_role_policy(RoleName, PolicyName)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name of the role associated with the policy. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyName |
[required] The name of the policy document to get. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Returns the SAML provider metadocument that was uploaded when the IAM SAML provider resource object was created or updated
Description
Returns the SAML provider metadocument that was uploaded when the IAM SAML provider resource object was created or updated.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_saml_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_saml_provider(SAMLProviderArn)
Arguments
SAMLProviderArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SAML provider resource object in IAM to get information about. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Retrieves information about the specified server certificate stored in IAM
Description
Retrieves information about the specified server certificate stored in IAM.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_server_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_server_certificate(ServerCertificateName)
Arguments
ServerCertificateName |
[required] The name of the server certificate you want to retrieve information about. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Retrieves a service last accessed report that was created using the GenerateServiceLastAccessedDetails operation
Description
Retrieves a service last accessed report that was created using the generate_service_last_accessed_details
operation. You can use the JobId
parameter in get_service_last_accessed_details
to retrieve the status of your report job. When the report is complete, you can retrieve the generated report. The report includes a list of Amazon Web Services services that the resource (user, group, role, or managed policy) can access.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_service_last_accessed_details/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_service_last_accessed_details(JobId, MaxItems = NULL, Marker = NULL)
Arguments
JobId |
[required] The ID of the request generated by the
|
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
After you generate a group or policy report using the GenerateServiceLastAccessedDetails operation, you can use the JobId parameter in GetServiceLastAccessedDetailsWithEntities
Description
After you generate a group or policy report using the generate_service_last_accessed_details
operation, you can use the JobId
parameter in get_service_last_accessed_details_with_entities
. This operation retrieves the status of your report job and a list of entities that could have used group or policy permissions to access the specified service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_service_last_accessed_details_with_entities/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_service_last_accessed_details_with_entities(
JobId,
ServiceNamespace,
MaxItems = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
JobId |
[required] The ID of the request generated by the
|
ServiceNamespace |
[required] The service namespace for an Amazon Web Services service. Provide the service namespace to learn when the IAM entity last attempted to access the specified service. To learn the service namespace for a service, see Actions, resources, and condition keys for Amazon Web Services services
in the IAM User Guide. Choose the name of the service to view details
for that service. In the first paragraph, find the service prefix. For
example, |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
Retrieves the status of your service-linked role deletion
Description
Retrieves the status of your service-linked role deletion. After you use delete_service_linked_role
to submit a service-linked role for deletion, you can use the DeletionTaskId
parameter in get_service_linked_role_deletion_status
to check the status of the deletion. If the deletion fails, this operation returns the reason that it failed, if that information is returned by the service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_service_linked_role_deletion_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_service_linked_role_deletion_status(DeletionTaskId)
Arguments
DeletionTaskId |
[required] The deletion task identifier. This identifier is returned by the
|
Retrieves the specified SSH public key, including metadata about the key
Description
Retrieves the specified SSH public key, including metadata about the key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_ssh_public_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_ssh_public_key(UserName, SSHPublicKeyId, Encoding)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the IAM user associated with the SSH public key. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
SSHPublicKeyId |
[required] The unique identifier for the SSH public key. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that can consist of any upper or lowercased letter or digit. |
Encoding |
[required] Specifies the public key encoding format to use in the response. To
retrieve the public key in ssh-rsa format, use |
Retrieves information about the specified IAM user, including the user's creation date, path, unique ID, and ARN
Description
Retrieves information about the specified IAM user, including the user's creation date, path, unique ID, and ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_user(UserName = NULL)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the user to get information about. This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to the user making the request. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Retrieves the specified inline policy document that is embedded in the specified IAM user
Description
Retrieves the specified inline policy document that is embedded in the specified IAM user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_get_user_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_get_user_policy(UserName, PolicyName)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the user who the policy is associated with. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyName |
[required] The name of the policy document to get. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Returns information about the access key IDs associated with the specified IAM user
Description
Returns information about the access key IDs associated with the specified IAM user. If there is none, the operation returns an empty list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_access_keys/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_access_keys(UserName = NULL, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the user. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the account alias associated with the Amazon Web Services account (Note: you can have only one)
Description
Lists the account alias associated with the Amazon Web Services account (Note: you can have only one). For information about using an Amazon Web Services account alias, see Creating, deleting, and listing an Amazon Web Services account alias in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_account_aliases/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_account_aliases(Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists all managed policies that are attached to the specified IAM group
Description
Lists all managed policies that are attached to the specified IAM group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_attached_group_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_attached_group_policies(
GroupName,
PathPrefix = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxItems = NULL
)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) of the group to list attached policies for. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PathPrefix |
The path prefix for filtering the results. This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a slash (/), listing all policies. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists all managed policies that are attached to the specified IAM role
Description
Lists all managed policies that are attached to the specified IAM role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_attached_role_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_attached_role_policies(
RoleName,
PathPrefix = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxItems = NULL
)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) of the role to list attached policies for. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PathPrefix |
The path prefix for filtering the results. This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a slash (/), listing all policies. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists all managed policies that are attached to the specified IAM user
Description
Lists all managed policies that are attached to the specified IAM user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_attached_user_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_attached_user_policies(
UserName,
PathPrefix = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxItems = NULL
)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) of the user to list attached policies for. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PathPrefix |
The path prefix for filtering the results. This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a slash (/), listing all policies. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists all IAM users, groups, and roles that the specified managed policy is attached to
Description
Lists all IAM users, groups, and roles that the specified managed policy is attached to.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_entities_for_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_entities_for_policy(
PolicyArn,
EntityFilter = NULL,
PathPrefix = NULL,
PolicyUsageFilter = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxItems = NULL
)
Arguments
PolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM policy for which you want the versions. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
EntityFilter |
The entity type to use for filtering the results. For example, when |
PathPrefix |
The path prefix for filtering the results. This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a slash (/), listing all entities. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( |
PolicyUsageFilter |
The policy usage method to use for filtering the results. To list only permissions policies,
set This parameter is optional. If it is not included, all policies are returned. |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the names of the inline policies that are embedded in the specified IAM group
Description
Lists the names of the inline policies that are embedded in the specified IAM group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_group_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_group_policies(GroupName, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group to list policies for. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the IAM groups that have the specified path prefix
Description
Lists the IAM groups that have the specified path prefix.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_groups(PathPrefix = NULL, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
PathPrefix |
The path prefix for filtering the results. For example, the prefix
This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a
slash (/), listing all groups. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the IAM groups that the specified IAM user belongs to
Description
Lists the IAM groups that the specified IAM user belongs to.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_groups_for_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_groups_for_user(UserName, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the user to list groups for. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified IAM instance profile
Description
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified IAM instance profile. The returned list of tags is sorted by tag key. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_instance_profile_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_instance_profile_tags(
InstanceProfileName,
Marker = NULL,
MaxItems = NULL
)
Arguments
InstanceProfileName |
[required] The name of the IAM instance profile whose tags you want to see. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the instance profiles that have the specified path prefix
Description
Lists the instance profiles that have the specified path prefix. If there are none, the operation returns an empty list. For more information about instance profiles, see Using instance profiles in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_instance_profiles/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_instance_profiles(PathPrefix = NULL, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
PathPrefix |
The path prefix for filtering the results. For example, the prefix
This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a
slash (/), listing all instance profiles. This parameter allows (through
its regex pattern) a string of
characters consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a
string that must begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can
contain any ASCII character from the ! ( |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the instance profiles that have the specified associated IAM role
Description
Lists the instance profiles that have the specified associated IAM role. If there are none, the operation returns an empty list. For more information about instance profiles, go to Using instance profiles in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_instance_profiles_for_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_instance_profiles_for_role(RoleName, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name of the role to list instance profiles for. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified IAM virtual multi-factor authentication (MFA) device
Description
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified IAM virtual multi-factor authentication (MFA) device. The returned list of tags is sorted by tag key. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_mfa_device_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_mfa_device_tags(SerialNumber, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
SerialNumber |
[required] The unique identifier for the IAM virtual MFA device whose tags you want to see. For virtual MFA devices, the serial number is the same as the ARN. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the MFA devices for an IAM user
Description
Lists the MFA devices for an IAM user. If the request includes a IAM user name, then this operation lists all the MFA devices associated with the specified user. If you do not specify a user name, IAM determines the user name implicitly based on the Amazon Web Services access key ID signing the request for this operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_mfa_devices/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_mfa_devices(UserName = NULL, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the user whose MFA devices you want to list. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified OpenID Connect (OIDC)-compatible identity provider
Description
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified OpenID Connect (OIDC)-compatible identity provider. The returned list of tags is sorted by tag key. For more information, see About web identity federation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_open_id_connect_provider_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_open_id_connect_provider_tags(
OpenIDConnectProviderArn,
Marker = NULL,
MaxItems = NULL
)
Arguments
OpenIDConnectProviderArn |
[required] The ARN of the OpenID Connect (OIDC) identity provider whose tags you want to see. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists information about the IAM OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider resource objects defined in the Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists information about the IAM OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider resource objects defined in the Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_open_id_connect_providers/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_open_id_connect_providers()
Lists the centralized root access features enabled for your organization
Description
Lists the centralized root access features enabled for your organization. For more information, see Centrally manage root access for member accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_organizations_features/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_organizations_features()
Lists all the managed policies that are available in your Amazon Web Services account, including your own customer-defined managed policies and all Amazon Web Services managed policies
Description
Lists all the managed policies that are available in your Amazon Web Services account, including your own customer-defined managed policies and all Amazon Web Services managed policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_policies(
Scope = NULL,
OnlyAttached = NULL,
PathPrefix = NULL,
PolicyUsageFilter = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxItems = NULL
)
Arguments
Scope |
The scope to use for filtering the results. To list only Amazon Web Services managed policies, set This parameter is optional. If it is not included, or if it is set to
|
OnlyAttached |
A flag to filter the results to only the attached policies. When |
PathPrefix |
The path prefix for filtering the results. This parameter is optional.
If it is not included, it defaults to a slash (/), listing all policies.
This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( |
PolicyUsageFilter |
The policy usage method to use for filtering the results. To list only permissions policies,
set This parameter is optional. If it is not included, all policies are returned. |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Retrieves a list of policies that the IAM identity (user, group, or role) can use to access each specified service
Description
Retrieves a list of policies that the IAM identity (user, group, or role) can use to access each specified service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_policies_granting_service_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_policies_granting_service_access(
Marker = NULL,
Arn,
ServiceNamespaces
)
Arguments
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
Arn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM identity (user, group, or role) whose policies you want to list. |
ServiceNamespaces |
[required] The service namespace for the Amazon Web Services services whose policies you want to list. To learn the service namespace for a service, see Actions, resources, and condition keys for Amazon Web Services services
in the IAM User Guide. Choose the name of the service to view details
for that service. In the first paragraph, find the service prefix. For
example, |
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified IAM customer managed policy
Description
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified IAM customer managed policy. The returned list of tags is sorted by tag key. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_policy_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_policy_tags(PolicyArn, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
PolicyArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM customer managed policy whose tags you want to see. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists information about the versions of the specified managed policy, including the version that is currently set as the policy's default version
Description
Lists information about the versions of the specified managed policy, including the version that is currently set as the policy's default version.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_policy_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_policy_versions(PolicyArn, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
PolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM policy for which you want the versions. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the names of the inline policies that are embedded in the specified IAM role
Description
Lists the names of the inline policies that are embedded in the specified IAM role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_role_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_role_policies(RoleName, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name of the role to list policies for. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified role
Description
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified role. The returned list of tags is sorted by tag key. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_role_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_role_tags(RoleName, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name of the IAM role for which you want to see the list of tags. This parameter accepts (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that consist of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the IAM roles that have the specified path prefix
Description
Lists the IAM roles that have the specified path prefix. If there are none, the operation returns an empty list. For more information about roles, see IAM roles in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_roles/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_roles(PathPrefix = NULL, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
PathPrefix |
The path prefix for filtering the results. For example, the prefix
This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a
slash (/), listing all roles. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) identity provider
Description
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) identity provider. The returned list of tags is sorted by tag key. For more information, see About SAML 2.0-based federation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_saml_provider_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_saml_provider_tags(SAMLProviderArn, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
SAMLProviderArn |
[required] The ARN of the Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) identity provider whose tags you want to see. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the SAML provider resource objects defined in IAM in the account
Description
Lists the SAML provider resource objects defined in IAM in the account. IAM resource-listing operations return a subset of the available attributes for the resource. For example, this operation does not return tags, even though they are an attribute of the returned object. To view all of the information for a SAML provider, see get_saml_provider
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_saml_providers/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_saml_providers()
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified IAM server certificate
Description
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified IAM server certificate. The returned list of tags is sorted by tag key. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_server_certificate_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_server_certificate_tags(
ServerCertificateName,
Marker = NULL,
MaxItems = NULL
)
Arguments
ServerCertificateName |
[required] The name of the IAM server certificate whose tags you want to see. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the server certificates stored in IAM that have the specified path prefix
Description
Lists the server certificates stored in IAM that have the specified path prefix. If none exist, the operation returns an empty list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_server_certificates/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_server_certificates(PathPrefix = NULL, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
PathPrefix |
The path prefix for filtering the results. For example:
This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a
slash (/), listing all server certificates. This parameter allows
(through its regex pattern) a
string of characters consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself
or a string that must begin and end with forward slashes. In addition,
it can contain any ASCII character from the ! ( |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Returns information about the service-specific credentials associated with the specified IAM user
Description
Returns information about the service-specific credentials associated with the specified IAM user. If none exists, the operation returns an empty list. The service-specific credentials returned by this operation are used only for authenticating the IAM user to a specific service. For more information about using service-specific credentials to authenticate to an Amazon Web Services service, see Set up service-specific credentials in the CodeCommit User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_service_specific_credentials/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_service_specific_credentials(UserName = NULL, ServiceName = NULL)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the user whose service-specific credentials you want information about. If this value is not specified, then the operation assumes the user whose credentials are used to call the operation. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
ServiceName |
Filters the returned results to only those for the specified Amazon Web Services service. If not specified, then Amazon Web Services returns service-specific credentials for all services. |
Returns information about the signing certificates associated with the specified IAM user
Description
Returns information about the signing certificates associated with the specified IAM user. If none exists, the operation returns an empty list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_signing_certificates/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_signing_certificates(UserName = NULL, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the IAM user whose signing certificates you want to examine. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Returns information about the SSH public keys associated with the specified IAM user
Description
Returns information about the SSH public keys associated with the specified IAM user. If none exists, the operation returns an empty list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_ssh_public_keys/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_ssh_public_keys(UserName = NULL, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the IAM user to list SSH public keys for. If none is
specified, the This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the names of the inline policies embedded in the specified IAM user
Description
Lists the names of the inline policies embedded in the specified IAM user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_user_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_user_policies(UserName, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the user to list policies for. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified IAM user
Description
Lists the tags that are attached to the specified IAM user. The returned list of tags is sorted by tag key. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_user_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_user_tags(UserName, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the IAM user whose tags you want to see. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the IAM users that have the specified path prefix
Description
Lists the IAM users that have the specified path prefix. If no path prefix is specified, the operation returns all users in the Amazon Web Services account. If there are none, the operation returns an empty list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_users/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_users(PathPrefix = NULL, Marker = NULL, MaxItems = NULL)
Arguments
PathPrefix |
The path prefix for filtering the results. For example:
This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a
slash (/), listing all user names. This parameter allows (through its
regex pattern) a string of
characters consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a
string that must begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can
contain any ASCII character from the ! ( |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Lists the virtual MFA devices defined in the Amazon Web Services account by assignment status
Description
Lists the virtual MFA devices defined in the Amazon Web Services account by assignment status. If you do not specify an assignment status, the operation returns a list of all virtual MFA devices. Assignment status can be Assigned
, Unassigned
, or Any
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_list_virtual_mfa_devices/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_list_virtual_mfa_devices(
AssignmentStatus = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxItems = NULL
)
Arguments
AssignmentStatus |
The status ( |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Adds or updates an inline policy document that is embedded in the specified IAM group
Description
Adds or updates an inline policy document that is embedded in the specified IAM group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_put_group_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_put_group_policy(GroupName, PolicyName, PolicyDocument)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group to associate the policy with. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@-. |
PolicyName |
[required] The name of the policy document. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyDocument |
[required] The policy document. You must provide policies in JSON format in IAM. However, for CloudFormation templates formatted in YAML, you can provide the policy in JSON or YAML format. CloudFormation always converts a YAML policy to JSON format before submitting it to IAM. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
Adds or updates the policy that is specified as the IAM role's permissions boundary
Description
Adds or updates the policy that is specified as the IAM role's permissions boundary. You can use an Amazon Web Services managed policy or a customer managed policy to set the boundary for a role. Use the boundary to control the maximum permissions that the role can have. Setting a permissions boundary is an advanced feature that can affect the permissions for the role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_put_role_permissions_boundary/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_put_role_permissions_boundary(RoleName, PermissionsBoundary)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) of the IAM role for which you want to set the permissions boundary. |
PermissionsBoundary |
[required] The ARN of the managed policy that is used to set the permissions boundary for the role. A permissions boundary policy defines the maximum permissions that identity-based policies can grant to an entity, but does not grant permissions. Permissions boundaries do not define the maximum permissions that a resource-based policy can grant to an entity. To learn more, see Permissions boundaries for IAM entities in the IAM User Guide. For more information about policy types, see Policy types in the IAM User Guide. |
Adds or updates an inline policy document that is embedded in the specified IAM role
Description
Adds or updates an inline policy document that is embedded in the specified IAM role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_put_role_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_put_role_policy(RoleName, PolicyName, PolicyDocument)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name of the role to associate the policy with. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyName |
[required] The name of the policy document. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyDocument |
[required] The policy document. You must provide policies in JSON format in IAM. However, for CloudFormation templates formatted in YAML, you can provide the policy in JSON or YAML format. CloudFormation always converts a YAML policy to JSON format before submitting it to IAM. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
Adds or updates the policy that is specified as the IAM user's permissions boundary
Description
Adds or updates the policy that is specified as the IAM user's permissions boundary. You can use an Amazon Web Services managed policy or a customer managed policy to set the boundary for a user. Use the boundary to control the maximum permissions that the user can have. Setting a permissions boundary is an advanced feature that can affect the permissions for the user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_put_user_permissions_boundary/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_put_user_permissions_boundary(UserName, PermissionsBoundary)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name (friendly name, not ARN) of the IAM user for which you want to set the permissions boundary. |
PermissionsBoundary |
[required] The ARN of the managed policy that is used to set the permissions boundary for the user. A permissions boundary policy defines the maximum permissions that identity-based policies can grant to an entity, but does not grant permissions. Permissions boundaries do not define the maximum permissions that a resource-based policy can grant to an entity. To learn more, see Permissions boundaries for IAM entities in the IAM User Guide. For more information about policy types, see Policy types in the IAM User Guide. |
Adds or updates an inline policy document that is embedded in the specified IAM user
Description
Adds or updates an inline policy document that is embedded in the specified IAM user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_put_user_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_put_user_policy(UserName, PolicyName, PolicyDocument)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the user to associate the policy with. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyName |
[required] The name of the policy document. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyDocument |
[required] The policy document. You must provide policies in JSON format in IAM. However, for CloudFormation templates formatted in YAML, you can provide the policy in JSON or YAML format. CloudFormation always converts a YAML policy to JSON format before submitting it to IAM. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
Removes the specified client ID (also known as audience) from the list of client IDs registered for the specified IAM OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider resource object
Description
Removes the specified client ID (also known as audience) from the list of client IDs registered for the specified IAM OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider resource object.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_remove_client_id_from_open_id_connect_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_remove_client_id_from_open_id_connect_provider(
OpenIDConnectProviderArn,
ClientID
)
Arguments
OpenIDConnectProviderArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM OIDC provider resource to
remove the client ID from. You can get a list of OIDC provider ARNs by
using the
For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
ClientID |
[required] The client ID (also known as audience) to remove from the IAM OIDC
provider resource. For more information about client IDs, see
|
Removes the specified IAM role from the specified Amazon EC2 instance profile
Description
Removes the specified IAM role from the specified Amazon EC2 instance profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_remove_role_from_instance_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_remove_role_from_instance_profile(InstanceProfileName, RoleName)
Arguments
InstanceProfileName |
[required] The name of the instance profile to update. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
RoleName |
[required] The name of the role to remove. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Removes the specified user from the specified group
Description
Removes the specified user from the specified group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_remove_user_from_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_remove_user_from_group(GroupName, UserName)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group to update. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
UserName |
[required] The name of the user to remove. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Resets the password for a service-specific credential
Description
Resets the password for a service-specific credential. The new password is Amazon Web Services generated and cryptographically strong. It cannot be configured by the user. Resetting the password immediately invalidates the previous password associated with this user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_reset_service_specific_credential/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_reset_service_specific_credential(
UserName = NULL,
ServiceSpecificCredentialId
)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the IAM user associated with the service-specific credential. If this value is not specified, then the operation assumes the user whose credentials are used to call the operation. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
ServiceSpecificCredentialId |
[required] The unique identifier of the service-specific credential. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that can consist of any upper or lowercased letter or digit. |
Synchronizes the specified MFA device with its IAM resource object on the Amazon Web Services servers
Description
Synchronizes the specified MFA device with its IAM resource object on the Amazon Web Services servers.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_resync_mfa_device/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_resync_mfa_device(
UserName,
SerialNumber,
AuthenticationCode1,
AuthenticationCode2
)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the user whose MFA device you want to resynchronize. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
SerialNumber |
[required] Serial number that uniquely identifies the MFA device. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
AuthenticationCode1 |
[required] An authentication code emitted by the device. The format for this parameter is a sequence of six digits. |
AuthenticationCode2 |
[required] A subsequent authentication code emitted by the device. The format for this parameter is a sequence of six digits. |
Sets the specified version of the specified policy as the policy's default (operative) version
Description
Sets the specified version of the specified policy as the policy's default (operative) version.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_set_default_policy_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_set_default_policy_version(PolicyArn, VersionId)
Arguments
PolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM policy whose default version you want to set. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
VersionId |
[required] The version of the policy to set as the default (operative) version. For more information about managed policy versions, see Versioning for managed policies in the IAM User Guide. |
Sets the specified version of the global endpoint token as the token version used for the Amazon Web Services account
Description
Sets the specified version of the global endpoint token as the token version used for the Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_set_security_token_service_preferences/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_set_security_token_service_preferences(GlobalEndpointTokenVersion)
Arguments
GlobalEndpointTokenVersion |
[required] The version of the global endpoint token. Version 1 tokens are valid only in Amazon Web Services Regions that are available by default. These tokens do not work in manually enabled Regions, such as Asia Pacific (Hong Kong). Version 2 tokens are valid in all Regions. However, version 2 tokens are longer and might affect systems where you temporarily store tokens. For information, see Activating and deactivating STS in an Amazon Web Services Region in the IAM User Guide. |
Simulate how a set of IAM policies and optionally a resource-based policy works with a list of API operations and Amazon Web Services resources to determine the policies' effective permissions
Description
Simulate how a set of IAM policies and optionally a resource-based policy works with a list of API operations and Amazon Web Services resources to determine the policies' effective permissions. The policies are provided as strings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_simulate_custom_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_simulate_custom_policy(
PolicyInputList,
PermissionsBoundaryPolicyInputList = NULL,
ActionNames,
ResourceArns = NULL,
ResourcePolicy = NULL,
ResourceOwner = NULL,
CallerArn = NULL,
ContextEntries = NULL,
ResourceHandlingOption = NULL,
MaxItems = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
PolicyInputList |
[required] A list of policy documents to include in the simulation. Each document
is specified as a string containing the complete, valid JSON text of an
IAM policy. Do not include any resource-based policies in this
parameter. Any resource-based policy must be submitted with the
The maximum length of the policy document that you can pass in this operation, including whitespace, is listed below. To view the maximum character counts of a managed policy with no whitespaces, see IAM and STS character quotas. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
PermissionsBoundaryPolicyInputList |
The IAM permissions boundary policy to simulate. The permissions boundary sets the maximum permissions that an IAM entity can have. You can input only one permissions boundary when you pass a policy to this operation. For more information about permissions boundaries, see Permissions boundaries for IAM entities in the IAM User Guide. The policy input is specified as a string that contains the complete, valid JSON text of a permissions boundary policy. The maximum length of the policy document that you can pass in this operation, including whitespace, is listed below. To view the maximum character counts of a managed policy with no whitespaces, see IAM and STS character quotas. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
ActionNames |
[required] A list of names of API operations to evaluate in the simulation. Each
operation is evaluated against each resource. Each operation must
include the service identifier, such as |
ResourceArns |
A list of ARNs of Amazon Web Services resources to include in the
simulation. If this parameter is not provided, then the value defaults
to The simulation does not automatically retrieve policies for the
specified resources. If you want to include a resource policy in the
simulation, then you must include the policy as a string in the
If you include a For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. Simulation of resource-based policies isn't supported for IAM roles. |
ResourcePolicy |
A resource-based policy to include in the simulation provided as a string. Each resource in the simulation is treated as if it had this policy attached. You can include only one resource-based policy in a simulation. The maximum length of the policy document that you can pass in this operation, including whitespace, is listed below. To view the maximum character counts of a managed policy with no whitespaces, see IAM and STS character quotas. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
Simulation of resource-based policies isn't supported for IAM roles. |
ResourceOwner |
An ARN representing the Amazon Web Services account ID that specifies
the owner of any simulated resource that does not identify its owner in
the resource ARN. Examples of resource ARNs include an S3 bucket or
object. If The ARN for an account uses the following syntax:
|
CallerArn |
The ARN of the IAM user that you want to use as the simulated caller of
the API operations. You can specify only the ARN of an IAM user. You cannot specify the ARN of an assumed role, federated user, or a service principal. |
ContextEntries |
A list of context keys and corresponding values for the simulation to use. Whenever a context key is evaluated in one of the simulated IAM permissions policies, the corresponding value is supplied. |
ResourceHandlingOption |
Specifies the type of simulation to run. Different API operations that support resource-based policies require different combinations of resources. By specifying the type of simulation to run, you enable the policy simulator to enforce the presence of the required resources to ensure reliable simulation results. If your simulation does not match one of the following scenarios, then you can omit this parameter. The following list shows each of the supported scenario values and the resources that you must define to run the simulation. Each of the Amazon EC2 scenarios requires that you specify instance, image, and security group resources. If your scenario includes an EBS volume, then you must specify that volume as a resource. If the Amazon EC2 scenario includes VPC, then you must supply the network interface resource. If it includes an IP subnet, then you must specify the subnet resource. For more information on the Amazon EC2 scenario options, see Supported platforms in the Amazon EC2 User Guide.
|
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
Simulate how a set of IAM policies attached to an IAM entity works with a list of API operations and Amazon Web Services resources to determine the policies' effective permissions
Description
Simulate how a set of IAM policies attached to an IAM entity works with a list of API operations and Amazon Web Services resources to determine the policies' effective permissions. The entity can be an IAM user, group, or role. If you specify a user, then the simulation also includes all of the policies that are attached to groups that the user belongs to. You can simulate resources that don't exist in your account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_simulate_principal_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_simulate_principal_policy(
PolicySourceArn,
PolicyInputList = NULL,
PermissionsBoundaryPolicyInputList = NULL,
ActionNames,
ResourceArns = NULL,
ResourcePolicy = NULL,
ResourceOwner = NULL,
CallerArn = NULL,
ContextEntries = NULL,
ResourceHandlingOption = NULL,
MaxItems = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
PolicySourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a user, group, or role whose policies you want to include in the simulation. If you specify a user, group, or role, the simulation includes all policies that are associated with that entity. If you specify a user, the simulation also includes all policies that are attached to any groups the user belongs to. The maximum length of the policy document that you can pass in this operation, including whitespace, is listed below. To view the maximum character counts of a managed policy with no whitespaces, see IAM and STS character quotas. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
PolicyInputList |
An optional list of additional policy documents to include in the simulation. Each document is specified as a string containing the complete, valid JSON text of an IAM policy. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
PermissionsBoundaryPolicyInputList |
The IAM permissions boundary policy to simulate. The permissions boundary sets the maximum permissions that the entity can have. You can input only one permissions boundary when you pass a policy to this operation. An IAM entity can only have one permissions boundary in effect at a time. For example, if a permissions boundary is attached to an entity and you pass in a different permissions boundary policy using this parameter, then the new permissions boundary policy is used for the simulation. For more information about permissions boundaries, see Permissions boundaries for IAM entities in the IAM User Guide. The policy input is specified as a string containing the complete, valid JSON text of a permissions boundary policy. The maximum length of the policy document that you can pass in this operation, including whitespace, is listed below. To view the maximum character counts of a managed policy with no whitespaces, see IAM and STS character quotas. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
ActionNames |
[required] A list of names of API operations to evaluate in the simulation. Each
operation is evaluated for each resource. Each operation must include
the service identifier, such as |
ResourceArns |
A list of ARNs of Amazon Web Services resources to include in the
simulation. If this parameter is not provided, then the value defaults
to The simulation does not automatically retrieve policies for the
specified resources. If you want to include a resource policy in the
simulation, then you must include the policy as a string in the
For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. Simulation of resource-based policies isn't supported for IAM roles. |
ResourcePolicy |
A resource-based policy to include in the simulation provided as a string. Each resource in the simulation is treated as if it had this policy attached. You can include only one resource-based policy in a simulation. The maximum length of the policy document that you can pass in this operation, including whitespace, is listed below. To view the maximum character counts of a managed policy with no whitespaces, see IAM and STS character quotas. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
Simulation of resource-based policies isn't supported for IAM roles. |
ResourceOwner |
An Amazon Web Services account ID that specifies the owner of any
simulated resource that does not identify its owner in the resource ARN.
Examples of resource ARNs include an S3 bucket or object. If
|
CallerArn |
The ARN of the IAM user that you want to specify as the simulated caller
of the API operations. If you do not specify a You can specify only the ARN of an IAM user. You cannot specify the ARN of an assumed role, federated user, or a service principal.
For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
ContextEntries |
A list of context keys and corresponding values for the simulation to use. Whenever a context key is evaluated in one of the simulated IAM permissions policies, the corresponding value is supplied. |
ResourceHandlingOption |
Specifies the type of simulation to run. Different API operations that support resource-based policies require different combinations of resources. By specifying the type of simulation to run, you enable the policy simulator to enforce the presence of the required resources to ensure reliable simulation results. If your simulation does not match one of the following scenarios, then you can omit this parameter. The following list shows each of the supported scenario values and the resources that you must define to run the simulation. Each of the Amazon EC2 scenarios requires that you specify instance, image, and security group resources. If your scenario includes an EBS volume, then you must specify that volume as a resource. If the Amazon EC2 scenario includes VPC, then you must supply the network interface resource. If it includes an IP subnet, then you must specify the subnet resource. For more information on the Amazon EC2 scenario options, see Supported platforms in the Amazon EC2 User Guide.
|
MaxItems |
Use this only when paginating results to indicate the maximum number of
items you want in the response. If additional items exist beyond the
maximum you specify, the If you do not include this parameter, the number of items defaults to
100. Note that IAM might return fewer results, even when there are more
results available. In that case, the |
Marker |
Use this parameter only when paginating results and only after you
receive a response indicating that the results are truncated. Set it to
the value of the |
Adds one or more tags to an IAM instance profile
Description
Adds one or more tags to an IAM instance profile. If a tag with the same key name already exists, then that tag is overwritten with the new value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_tag_instance_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_tag_instance_profile(InstanceProfileName, Tags)
Arguments
InstanceProfileName |
[required] The name of the IAM instance profile to which you want to add tags. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Tags |
[required] The list of tags that you want to attach to the IAM instance profile. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. |
Adds one or more tags to an IAM virtual multi-factor authentication (MFA) device
Description
Adds one or more tags to an IAM virtual multi-factor authentication (MFA) device. If a tag with the same key name already exists, then that tag is overwritten with the new value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_tag_mfa_device/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_tag_mfa_device(SerialNumber, Tags)
Arguments
SerialNumber |
[required] The unique identifier for the IAM virtual MFA device to which you want to add tags. For virtual MFA devices, the serial number is the same as the ARN. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Tags |
[required] The list of tags that you want to attach to the IAM virtual MFA device. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. |
Adds one or more tags to an OpenID Connect (OIDC)-compatible identity provider
Description
Adds one or more tags to an OpenID Connect (OIDC)-compatible identity provider. For more information about these providers, see About web identity federation. If a tag with the same key name already exists, then that tag is overwritten with the new value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_tag_open_id_connect_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_tag_open_id_connect_provider(OpenIDConnectProviderArn, Tags)
Arguments
OpenIDConnectProviderArn |
[required] The ARN of the OIDC identity provider in IAM to which you want to add tags. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Tags |
[required] The list of tags that you want to attach to the OIDC identity provider in IAM. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. |
Adds one or more tags to an IAM customer managed policy
Description
Adds one or more tags to an IAM customer managed policy. If a tag with the same key name already exists, then that tag is overwritten with the new value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_tag_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_tag_policy(PolicyArn, Tags)
Arguments
PolicyArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM customer managed policy to which you want to add tags. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Tags |
[required] The list of tags that you want to attach to the IAM customer managed policy. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. |
Adds one or more tags to an IAM role
Description
Adds one or more tags to an IAM role. The role can be a regular role or a service-linked role. If a tag with the same key name already exists, then that tag is overwritten with the new value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_tag_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_tag_role(RoleName, Tags)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name of the IAM role to which you want to add tags. This parameter accepts (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that consist of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Tags |
[required] The list of tags that you want to attach to the IAM role. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. |
Adds one or more tags to a Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) identity provider
Description
Adds one or more tags to a Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) identity provider. For more information about these providers, see About SAML 2.0-based federation . If a tag with the same key name already exists, then that tag is overwritten with the new value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_tag_saml_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_tag_saml_provider(SAMLProviderArn, Tags)
Arguments
SAMLProviderArn |
[required] The ARN of the SAML identity provider in IAM to which you want to add tags. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Tags |
[required] The list of tags that you want to attach to the SAML identity provider in IAM. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. |
Adds one or more tags to an IAM server certificate
Description
Adds one or more tags to an IAM server certificate. If a tag with the same key name already exists, then that tag is overwritten with the new value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_tag_server_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_tag_server_certificate(ServerCertificateName, Tags)
Arguments
ServerCertificateName |
[required] The name of the IAM server certificate to which you want to add tags. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Tags |
[required] The list of tags that you want to attach to the IAM server certificate. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. |
Adds one or more tags to an IAM user
Description
Adds one or more tags to an IAM user. If a tag with the same key name already exists, then that tag is overwritten with the new value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_tag_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_tag_user(UserName, Tags)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the IAM user to which you want to add tags. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Tags |
[required] The list of tags that you want to attach to the IAM user. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. |
Removes the specified tags from the IAM instance profile
Description
Removes the specified tags from the IAM instance profile. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_untag_instance_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_untag_instance_profile(InstanceProfileName, TagKeys)
Arguments
InstanceProfileName |
[required] The name of the IAM instance profile from which you want to remove tags. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of key names as a simple array of strings. The tags with matching keys are removed from the specified instance profile. |
Removes the specified tags from the IAM virtual multi-factor authentication (MFA) device
Description
Removes the specified tags from the IAM virtual multi-factor authentication (MFA) device. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_untag_mfa_device/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_untag_mfa_device(SerialNumber, TagKeys)
Arguments
SerialNumber |
[required] The unique identifier for the IAM virtual MFA device from which you want to remove tags. For virtual MFA devices, the serial number is the same as the ARN. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of key names as a simple array of strings. The tags with matching keys are removed from the specified instance profile. |
Removes the specified tags from the specified OpenID Connect (OIDC)-compatible identity provider in IAM
Description
Removes the specified tags from the specified OpenID Connect (OIDC)-compatible identity provider in IAM. For more information about OIDC providers, see About web identity federation. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_untag_open_id_connect_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_untag_open_id_connect_provider(OpenIDConnectProviderArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
OpenIDConnectProviderArn |
[required] The ARN of the OIDC provider in IAM from which you want to remove tags. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of key names as a simple array of strings. The tags with matching keys are removed from the specified OIDC provider. |
Removes the specified tags from the customer managed policy
Description
Removes the specified tags from the customer managed policy. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_untag_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_untag_policy(PolicyArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
PolicyArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM customer managed policy from which you want to remove tags. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of key names as a simple array of strings. The tags with matching keys are removed from the specified policy. |
Removes the specified tags from the role
Description
Removes the specified tags from the role. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_untag_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_untag_role(RoleName, TagKeys)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name of the IAM role from which you want to remove tags. This parameter accepts (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that consist of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of key names as a simple array of strings. The tags with matching keys are removed from the specified role. |
Removes the specified tags from the specified Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) identity provider in IAM
Description
Removes the specified tags from the specified Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) identity provider in IAM. For more information about these providers, see About web identity federation. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_untag_saml_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_untag_saml_provider(SAMLProviderArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
SAMLProviderArn |
[required] The ARN of the SAML identity provider in IAM from which you want to remove tags. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of key names as a simple array of strings. The tags with matching keys are removed from the specified SAML identity provider. |
Removes the specified tags from the IAM server certificate
Description
Removes the specified tags from the IAM server certificate. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_untag_server_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_untag_server_certificate(ServerCertificateName, TagKeys)
Arguments
ServerCertificateName |
[required] The name of the IAM server certificate from which you want to remove tags. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of key names as a simple array of strings. The tags with matching keys are removed from the specified IAM server certificate. |
Removes the specified tags from the user
Description
Removes the specified tags from the user. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_untag_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_untag_user(UserName, TagKeys)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the IAM user from which you want to remove tags. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of key names as a simple array of strings. The tags with matching keys are removed from the specified user. |
Changes the status of the specified access key from Active to Inactive, or vice versa
Description
Changes the status of the specified access key from Active to Inactive, or vice versa. This operation can be used to disable a user's key as part of a key rotation workflow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_update_access_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_update_access_key(UserName = NULL, AccessKeyId, Status)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the user whose key you want to update. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
AccessKeyId |
[required] The access key ID of the secret access key you want to update. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that can consist of any upper or lowercased letter or digit. |
Status |
[required] The status you want to assign to the secret access key. |
Updates the password policy settings for the Amazon Web Services account
Description
Updates the password policy settings for the Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_update_account_password_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_update_account_password_policy(
MinimumPasswordLength = NULL,
RequireSymbols = NULL,
RequireNumbers = NULL,
RequireUppercaseCharacters = NULL,
RequireLowercaseCharacters = NULL,
AllowUsersToChangePassword = NULL,
MaxPasswordAge = NULL,
PasswordReusePrevention = NULL,
HardExpiry = NULL
)
Arguments
MinimumPasswordLength |
The minimum number of characters allowed in an IAM user password. If you do not specify a value for this parameter, then the operation
uses the default value of |
RequireSymbols |
Specifies whether IAM user passwords must contain at least one of the following non-alphanumeric characters: ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + - = [ ] { } | ' If you do not specify a value for this parameter, then the operation
uses the default value of |
RequireNumbers |
Specifies whether IAM user passwords must contain at least one numeric character (0 to 9). If you do not specify a value for this parameter, then the operation
uses the default value of |
RequireUppercaseCharacters |
Specifies whether IAM user passwords must contain at least one uppercase character from the ISO basic Latin alphabet (A to Z). If you do not specify a value for this parameter, then the operation
uses the default value of |
RequireLowercaseCharacters |
Specifies whether IAM user passwords must contain at least one lowercase character from the ISO basic Latin alphabet (a to z). If you do not specify a value for this parameter, then the operation
uses the default value of |
AllowUsersToChangePassword |
Allows all IAM users in your account to use the Amazon Web Services Management Console to change their own passwords. For more information, see Permitting IAM users to change their own passwords in the IAM User Guide. If you do not specify a value for this parameter, then the operation
uses the default value of |
MaxPasswordAge |
The number of days that an IAM user password is valid. If you do not specify a value for this parameter, then the operation
uses the default value of |
PasswordReusePrevention |
Specifies the number of previous passwords that IAM users are prevented from reusing. If you do not specify a value for this parameter, then the operation
uses the default value of |
HardExpiry |
Prevents IAM users who are accessing the account via the Amazon Web Services Management Console from setting a new console password after their password has expired. The IAM user cannot access the console until an administrator resets the password. If you do not specify a value for this parameter, then the operation
uses the default value of In the Amazon Web Services Management Console, the custom password
policy option Allow users to change their own password gives IAM
users permissions to |
Updates the policy that grants an IAM entity permission to assume a role
Description
Updates the policy that grants an IAM entity permission to assume a role. This is typically referred to as the "role trust policy". For more information about roles, see Using roles to delegate permissions and federate identities.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_update_assume_role_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_update_assume_role_policy(RoleName, PolicyDocument)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name of the role to update with the new policy. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
PolicyDocument |
[required] The policy that grants an entity permission to assume the role. You must provide policies in JSON format in IAM. However, for CloudFormation templates formatted in YAML, you can provide the policy in JSON or YAML format. CloudFormation always converts a YAML policy to JSON format before submitting it to IAM. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
Updates the name and/or the path of the specified IAM group
Description
Updates the name and/or the path of the specified IAM group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_update_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_update_group(GroupName, NewPath = NULL, NewGroupName = NULL)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] Name of the IAM group to update. If you're changing the name of the group, this is the original name. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
NewPath |
New path for the IAM group. Only include this if changing the group's path. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( |
NewGroupName |
New name for the IAM group. Only include this if changing the group's name. IAM user, group, role, and policy names must be unique within the account. Names are not distinguished by case. For example, you cannot create resources named both "MyResource" and "myresource". |
Changes the password for the specified IAM user
Description
Changes the password for the specified IAM user. You can use the CLI, the Amazon Web Services API, or the Users page in the IAM console to change the password for any IAM user. Use change_password
to change your own password in the My Security Credentials page in the Amazon Web Services Management Console.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_update_login_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_update_login_profile(
UserName,
Password = NULL,
PasswordResetRequired = NULL
)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the user whose password you want to update. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Password |
The new password for the specified IAM user. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
However, the format can be further restricted by the account
administrator by setting a password policy on the Amazon Web Services
account. For more information, see
|
PasswordResetRequired |
Allows this new password to be used only once by requiring the specified IAM user to set a new password on next sign-in. |
Replaces the existing list of server certificate thumbprints associated with an OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider resource object with a new list of thumbprints
Description
Replaces the existing list of server certificate thumbprints associated with an OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider resource object with a new list of thumbprints.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_update_open_id_connect_provider_thumbprint/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_update_open_id_connect_provider_thumbprint(
OpenIDConnectProviderArn,
ThumbprintList
)
Arguments
OpenIDConnectProviderArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM OIDC provider resource object
for which you want to update the thumbprint. You can get a list of OIDC
provider ARNs by using the
For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
ThumbprintList |
[required] A list of certificate thumbprints that are associated with the specified
IAM OpenID Connect provider. For more information, see
|
Updates the description or maximum session duration setting of a role
Description
Updates the description or maximum session duration setting of a role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_update_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_update_role(RoleName, Description = NULL, MaxSessionDuration = NULL)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name of the role that you want to modify. |
Description |
The new description that you want to apply to the specified role. |
MaxSessionDuration |
The maximum session duration (in seconds) that you want to set for the specified role. If you do not specify a value for this setting, the default value of one hour is applied. This setting can have a value from 1 hour to 12 hours. Anyone who assumes the role from the CLI or API can use the
IAM role credentials provided by Amazon EC2 instances assigned to the role are not subject to the specified maximum session duration. |
Use UpdateRole instead
Description
Use update_role
instead.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_update_role_description/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_update_role_description(RoleName, Description)
Arguments
RoleName |
[required] The name of the role that you want to modify. |
Description |
[required] The new description that you want to apply to the specified role. |
Updates the metadata document, SAML encryption settings, and private keys for an existing SAML provider
Description
Updates the metadata document, SAML encryption settings, and private keys for an existing SAML provider. To rotate private keys, add your new private key and then remove the old key in a separate request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_update_saml_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_update_saml_provider(
SAMLMetadataDocument = NULL,
SAMLProviderArn,
AssertionEncryptionMode = NULL,
AddPrivateKey = NULL,
RemovePrivateKey = NULL
)
Arguments
SAMLMetadataDocument |
An XML document generated by an identity provider (IdP) that supports SAML 2.0. The document includes the issuer's name, expiration information, and keys that can be used to validate the SAML authentication response (assertions) that are received from the IdP. You must generate the metadata document using the identity management software that is used as your IdP. |
SAMLProviderArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SAML provider to update. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
AssertionEncryptionMode |
Specifies the encryption setting for the SAML provider. |
AddPrivateKey |
Specifies the new private key from your external identity provider. The private key must be a .pem file that uses AES-GCM or AES-CBC encryption algorithm to decrypt SAML assertions. |
RemovePrivateKey |
The Key ID of the private key to remove. |
Updates the name and/or the path of the specified server certificate stored in IAM
Description
Updates the name and/or the path of the specified server certificate stored in IAM.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_update_server_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_update_server_certificate(
ServerCertificateName,
NewPath = NULL,
NewServerCertificateName = NULL
)
Arguments
ServerCertificateName |
[required] The name of the server certificate that you want to update. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
NewPath |
The new path for the server certificate. Include this only if you are updating the server certificate's path. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( |
NewServerCertificateName |
The new name for the server certificate. Include this only if you are updating the server certificate's name. The name of the certificate cannot contain any spaces. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
Sets the status of a service-specific credential to Active or Inactive
Description
Sets the status of a service-specific credential to Active
or Inactive
. Service-specific credentials that are inactive cannot be used for authentication to the service. This operation can be used to disable a user's service-specific credential as part of a credential rotation work flow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_update_service_specific_credential/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_update_service_specific_credential(
UserName = NULL,
ServiceSpecificCredentialId,
Status
)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the IAM user associated with the service-specific credential. If you do not specify this value, then the operation assumes the user whose credentials are used to call the operation. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
ServiceSpecificCredentialId |
[required] The unique identifier of the service-specific credential. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that can consist of any upper or lowercased letter or digit. |
Status |
[required] The status to be assigned to the service-specific credential. |
Changes the status of the specified user signing certificate from active to disabled, or vice versa
Description
Changes the status of the specified user signing certificate from active to disabled, or vice versa. This operation can be used to disable an IAM user's signing certificate as part of a certificate rotation work flow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_update_signing_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_update_signing_certificate(UserName = NULL, CertificateId, Status)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the IAM user the signing certificate belongs to. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
CertificateId |
[required] The ID of the signing certificate you want to update. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that can consist of any upper or lowercased letter or digit. |
Status |
[required] The status you want to assign to the certificate. |
Sets the status of an IAM user's SSH public key to active or inactive
Description
Sets the status of an IAM user's SSH public key to active or inactive. SSH public keys that are inactive cannot be used for authentication. This operation can be used to disable a user's SSH public key as part of a key rotation work flow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_update_ssh_public_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_update_ssh_public_key(UserName, SSHPublicKeyId, Status)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the IAM user associated with the SSH public key. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
SSHPublicKeyId |
[required] The unique identifier for the SSH public key. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that can consist of any upper or lowercased letter or digit. |
Status |
[required] The status to assign to the SSH public key. |
Updates the name and/or the path of the specified IAM user
Description
Updates the name and/or the path of the specified IAM user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_update_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_update_user(UserName, NewPath = NULL, NewUserName = NULL)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] Name of the user to update. If you're changing the name of the user, this is the original user name. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
NewPath |
New path for the IAM user. Include this parameter only if you're changing the user's path. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( |
NewUserName |
New name for the user. Include this parameter only if you're changing the user's name. IAM user, group, role, and policy names must be unique within the account. Names are not distinguished by case. For example, you cannot create resources named both "MyResource" and "myresource". |
Uploads a server certificate entity for the Amazon Web Services account
Description
Uploads a server certificate entity for the Amazon Web Services account. The server certificate entity includes a public key certificate, a private key, and an optional certificate chain, which should all be PEM-encoded.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_upload_server_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_upload_server_certificate(
Path = NULL,
ServerCertificateName,
CertificateBody,
PrivateKey,
CertificateChain = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Path |
The path for the server certificate. For more information about paths, see IAM identifiers in the IAM User Guide. This parameter is optional. If it is not included, it defaults to a
slash (/). This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters
consisting of either a forward slash (/) by itself or a string that must
begin and end with forward slashes. In addition, it can contain any
ASCII character from the ! ( If you are uploading a server certificate specifically for use with
Amazon CloudFront distributions, you must specify a path using the
|
ServerCertificateName |
[required] The name for the server certificate. Do not include the path in this value. The name of the certificate cannot contain any spaces. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
CertificateBody |
[required] The contents of the public key certificate in PEM-encoded format. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
PrivateKey |
[required] The contents of the private key in PEM-encoded format. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
CertificateChain |
The contents of the certificate chain. This is typically a concatenation of the PEM-encoded public key certificates of the chain. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
Tags |
A list of tags that you want to attach to the new IAM server certificate resource. Each tag consists of a key name and an associated value. For more information about tagging, see Tagging IAM resources in the IAM User Guide. If any one of the tags is invalid or if you exceed the allowed maximum number of tags, then the entire request fails and the resource is not created. |
Uploads an X
Description
Uploads an X.509 signing certificate and associates it with the specified IAM user. Some Amazon Web Services services require you to use certificates to validate requests that are signed with a corresponding private key. When you upload the certificate, its default status is Active
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_upload_signing_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_upload_signing_certificate(UserName = NULL, CertificateBody)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the user the signing certificate is for. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
CertificateBody |
[required] The contents of the signing certificate. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
Uploads an SSH public key and associates it with the specified IAM user
Description
Uploads an SSH public key and associates it with the specified IAM user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iam_upload_ssh_public_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
iam_upload_ssh_public_key(UserName, SSHPublicKeyBody)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the IAM user to associate the SSH public key with. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters consisting of upper and lowercase alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include any of the following characters: _+=,.@- |
SSHPublicKeyBody |
[required] The SSH public key. The public key must be encoded in ssh-rsa format or PEM format. The minimum bit-length of the public key is 2048 bits. For example, you can generate a 2048-bit key, and the resulting PEM file is 1679 bytes long. The regex pattern used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of the following:
|
IAM Roles Anywhere
Description
Identity and Access Management Roles Anywhere provides a secure way for your workloads such as servers, containers, and applications that run outside of Amazon Web Services to obtain temporary Amazon Web Services credentials. Your workloads can use the same IAM policies and roles you have for native Amazon Web Services applications to access Amazon Web Services resources. Using IAM Roles Anywhere eliminates the need to manage long-term credentials for workloads running outside of Amazon Web Services.
To use IAM Roles Anywhere, your workloads must use X.509 certificates issued by their certificate authority (CA). You register the CA with IAM Roles Anywhere as a trust anchor to establish trust between your public key infrastructure (PKI) and IAM Roles Anywhere. If you don't manage your own PKI system, you can use Private Certificate Authority to create a CA and then use that to establish trust with IAM Roles Anywhere.
This guide describes the IAM Roles Anywhere operations that you can call programmatically. For more information about IAM Roles Anywhere, see the IAM Roles Anywhere User Guide.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- iamrolesanywhere( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_profile | Creates a profile, a list of the roles that Roles Anywhere service is trusted to assume |
create_trust_anchor | Creates a trust anchor to establish trust between IAM Roles Anywhere and your certificate authority (CA) |
delete_attribute_mapping | Delete an entry from the attribute mapping rules enforced by a given profile |
delete_crl | Deletes a certificate revocation list (CRL) |
delete_profile | Deletes a profile |
delete_trust_anchor | Deletes a trust anchor |
disable_crl | Disables a certificate revocation list (CRL) |
disable_profile | Disables a profile |
disable_trust_anchor | Disables a trust anchor |
enable_crl | Enables a certificate revocation list (CRL) |
enable_profile | Enables temporary credential requests for a profile |
enable_trust_anchor | Enables a trust anchor |
get_crl | Gets a certificate revocation list (CRL) |
get_profile | Gets a profile |
get_subject | Gets a subject, which associates a certificate identity with authentication attempts |
get_trust_anchor | Gets a trust anchor |
import_crl | Imports the certificate revocation list (CRL) |
list_crls | Lists all certificate revocation lists (CRL) in the authenticated account and Amazon Web Services Region |
list_profiles | Lists all profiles in the authenticated account and Amazon Web Services Region |
list_subjects | Lists the subjects in the authenticated account and Amazon Web Services Region |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists the tags attached to the resource |
list_trust_anchors | Lists the trust anchors in the authenticated account and Amazon Web Services Region |
put_attribute_mapping | Put an entry in the attribute mapping rules that will be enforced by a given profile |
put_notification_settings | Attaches a list of notification settings to a trust anchor |
reset_notification_settings | Resets the custom notification setting to IAM Roles Anywhere default setting |
tag_resource | Attaches tags to a resource |
untag_resource | Removes tags from the resource |
update_crl | Updates the certificate revocation list (CRL) |
update_profile | Updates a profile, a list of the roles that IAM Roles Anywhere service is trusted to assume |
update_trust_anchor | Updates a trust anchor |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- iamrolesanywhere()
svc$create_profile(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates a profile, a list of the roles that Roles Anywhere service is trusted to assume
Description
Creates a profile, a list of the roles that Roles Anywhere service is trusted to assume. You use profiles to intersect permissions with IAM managed policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_create_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_create_profile(
acceptRoleSessionName = NULL,
durationSeconds = NULL,
enabled = NULL,
managedPolicyArns = NULL,
name,
requireInstanceProperties = NULL,
roleArns,
sessionPolicy = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
acceptRoleSessionName |
Used to determine if a custom role session name will be accepted in a temporary credential request. |
durationSeconds |
Used to determine how long sessions vended using this profile are valid
for. See the |
enabled |
Specifies whether the profile is enabled. |
managedPolicyArns |
A list of managed policy ARNs that apply to the vended session credentials. |
name |
[required] The name of the profile. |
requireInstanceProperties |
Specifies whether instance properties are required in temporary credential requests with this profile. |
roleArns |
[required] A list of IAM roles that this profile can assume in a temporary credential request. |
sessionPolicy |
A session policy that applies to the trust boundary of the vended session credentials. |
tags |
The tags to attach to the profile. |
Creates a trust anchor to establish trust between IAM Roles Anywhere and your certificate authority (CA)
Description
Creates a trust anchor to establish trust between IAM Roles Anywhere and your certificate authority (CA). You can define a trust anchor as a reference to an Private Certificate Authority (Private CA) or by uploading a CA certificate. Your Amazon Web Services workloads can authenticate with the trust anchor using certificates issued by the CA in exchange for temporary Amazon Web Services credentials.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_create_trust_anchor/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_create_trust_anchor(
enabled = NULL,
name,
notificationSettings = NULL,
source,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
enabled |
Specifies whether the trust anchor is enabled. |
name |
[required] The name of the trust anchor. |
notificationSettings |
A list of notification settings to be associated to the trust anchor. |
source |
[required] The trust anchor type and its related certificate data. |
tags |
The tags to attach to the trust anchor. |
Delete an entry from the attribute mapping rules enforced by a given profile
Description
Delete an entry from the attribute mapping rules enforced by a given profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_delete_attribute_mapping/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_delete_attribute_mapping(
certificateField,
profileId,
specifiers = NULL
)
Arguments
certificateField |
[required] Fields (x509Subject, x509Issuer and x509SAN) within X.509 certificates. |
profileId |
[required] The unique identifier of the profile. |
specifiers |
A list of specifiers of a certificate field; for example, CN, OU, UID from a Subject. |
Deletes a certificate revocation list (CRL)
Description
Deletes a certificate revocation list (CRL).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_delete_crl/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_delete_crl(crlId)
Arguments
crlId |
[required] The unique identifier of the certificate revocation list (CRL). |
Deletes a profile
Description
Deletes a profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_delete_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_delete_profile(profileId)
Arguments
profileId |
[required] The unique identifier of the profile. |
Deletes a trust anchor
Description
Deletes a trust anchor.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_delete_trust_anchor/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_delete_trust_anchor(trustAnchorId)
Arguments
trustAnchorId |
[required] The unique identifier of the trust anchor. |
Disables a certificate revocation list (CRL)
Description
Disables a certificate revocation list (CRL).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_disable_crl/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_disable_crl(crlId)
Arguments
crlId |
[required] The unique identifier of the certificate revocation list (CRL). |
Disables a profile
Description
Disables a profile. When disabled, temporary credential requests with this profile fail.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_disable_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_disable_profile(profileId)
Arguments
profileId |
[required] The unique identifier of the profile. |
Disables a trust anchor
Description
Disables a trust anchor. When disabled, temporary credential requests specifying this trust anchor are unauthorized.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_disable_trust_anchor/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_disable_trust_anchor(trustAnchorId)
Arguments
trustAnchorId |
[required] The unique identifier of the trust anchor. |
Enables a certificate revocation list (CRL)
Description
Enables a certificate revocation list (CRL). When enabled, certificates stored in the CRL are unauthorized to receive session credentials.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_enable_crl/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_enable_crl(crlId)
Arguments
crlId |
[required] The unique identifier of the certificate revocation list (CRL). |
Enables temporary credential requests for a profile
Description
Enables temporary credential requests for a profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_enable_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_enable_profile(profileId)
Arguments
profileId |
[required] The unique identifier of the profile. |
Enables a trust anchor
Description
Enables a trust anchor. When enabled, certificates in the trust anchor chain are authorized for trust validation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_enable_trust_anchor/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_enable_trust_anchor(trustAnchorId)
Arguments
trustAnchorId |
[required] The unique identifier of the trust anchor. |
Gets a certificate revocation list (CRL)
Description
Gets a certificate revocation list (CRL).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_get_crl/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_get_crl(crlId)
Arguments
crlId |
[required] The unique identifier of the certificate revocation list (CRL). |
Gets a profile
Description
Gets a profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_get_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_get_profile(profileId)
Arguments
profileId |
[required] The unique identifier of the profile. |
Gets a subject, which associates a certificate identity with authentication attempts
Description
Gets a subject, which associates a certificate identity with authentication attempts. The subject stores auditing information such as the status of the last authentication attempt, the certificate data used in the attempt, and the last time the associated identity attempted authentication.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_get_subject/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_get_subject(subjectId)
Arguments
subjectId |
[required] The unique identifier of the subject. |
Gets a trust anchor
Description
Gets a trust anchor.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_get_trust_anchor/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_get_trust_anchor(trustAnchorId)
Arguments
trustAnchorId |
[required] The unique identifier of the trust anchor. |
Imports the certificate revocation list (CRL)
Description
Imports the certificate revocation list (CRL). A CRL is a list of certificates that have been revoked by the issuing certificate Authority (CA).In order to be properly imported, a CRL must be in PEM format. IAM Roles Anywhere validates against the CRL before issuing credentials.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_import_crl/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_import_crl(
crlData,
enabled = NULL,
name,
tags = NULL,
trustAnchorArn
)
Arguments
crlData |
[required] The x509 v3 specified certificate revocation list (CRL). |
enabled |
Specifies whether the certificate revocation list (CRL) is enabled. |
name |
[required] The name of the certificate revocation list (CRL). |
tags |
A list of tags to attach to the certificate revocation list (CRL). |
trustAnchorArn |
[required] The ARN of the TrustAnchor the certificate revocation list (CRL) will provide revocation for. |
Lists all certificate revocation lists (CRL) in the authenticated account and Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Lists all certificate revocation lists (CRL) in the authenticated account and Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_list_crls/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_list_crls(nextToken = NULL, pageSize = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
A token that indicates where the output should continue from, if a previous request did not show all results. To get the next results, make the request again with this value. |
pageSize |
The number of resources in the paginated list. |
Lists all profiles in the authenticated account and Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Lists all profiles in the authenticated account and Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_list_profiles/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_list_profiles(nextToken = NULL, pageSize = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
A token that indicates where the output should continue from, if a previous request did not show all results. To get the next results, make the request again with this value. |
pageSize |
The number of resources in the paginated list. |
Lists the subjects in the authenticated account and Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Lists the subjects in the authenticated account and Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_list_subjects/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_list_subjects(nextToken = NULL, pageSize = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
A token that indicates where the output should continue from, if a previous request did not show all results. To get the next results, make the request again with this value. |
pageSize |
The number of resources in the paginated list. |
Lists the tags attached to the resource
Description
Lists the tags attached to the resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource. |
Lists the trust anchors in the authenticated account and Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Lists the trust anchors in the authenticated account and Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_list_trust_anchors/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_list_trust_anchors(nextToken = NULL, pageSize = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
A token that indicates where the output should continue from, if a previous request did not show all results. To get the next results, make the request again with this value. |
pageSize |
The number of resources in the paginated list. |
Put an entry in the attribute mapping rules that will be enforced by a given profile
Description
Put an entry in the attribute mapping rules that will be enforced by a given profile. A mapping specifies a certificate field and one or more specifiers that have contextual meanings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_put_attribute_mapping/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_put_attribute_mapping(
certificateField,
mappingRules,
profileId
)
Arguments
certificateField |
[required] Fields (x509Subject, x509Issuer and x509SAN) within X.509 certificates. |
mappingRules |
[required] A list of mapping entries for every supported specifier or sub-field. |
profileId |
[required] The unique identifier of the profile. |
Attaches a list of notification settings to a trust anchor
Description
Attaches a list of notification settings to a trust anchor.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_put_notification_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_put_notification_settings(notificationSettings, trustAnchorId)
Arguments
notificationSettings |
[required] A list of notification settings to be associated to the trust anchor. |
trustAnchorId |
[required] The unique identifier of the trust anchor. |
Resets the custom notification setting to IAM Roles Anywhere default setting
Description
Resets the custom notification setting to IAM Roles Anywhere default setting.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_reset_notification_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_reset_notification_settings(
notificationSettingKeys,
trustAnchorId
)
Arguments
notificationSettingKeys |
[required] A list of notification setting keys to reset. A notification setting key includes the event and the channel. |
trustAnchorId |
[required] The unique identifier of the trust anchor. |
Attaches tags to a resource
Description
Attaches tags to a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource. |
tags |
[required] The tags to attach to the resource. |
Removes tags from the resource
Description
Removes tags from the resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource. |
tagKeys |
[required] A list of keys. Tag keys are the unique identifiers of tags. |
Updates the certificate revocation list (CRL)
Description
Updates the certificate revocation list (CRL). A CRL is a list of certificates that have been revoked by the issuing certificate authority (CA). IAM Roles Anywhere validates against the CRL before issuing credentials.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_update_crl/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_update_crl(crlData = NULL, crlId, name = NULL)
Arguments
crlData |
The x509 v3 specified certificate revocation list (CRL). |
crlId |
[required] The unique identifier of the certificate revocation list (CRL). |
name |
The name of the Crl. |
Updates a profile, a list of the roles that IAM Roles Anywhere service is trusted to assume
Description
Updates a profile, a list of the roles that IAM Roles Anywhere service is trusted to assume. You use profiles to intersect permissions with IAM managed policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_update_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_update_profile(
acceptRoleSessionName = NULL,
durationSeconds = NULL,
managedPolicyArns = NULL,
name = NULL,
profileId,
roleArns = NULL,
sessionPolicy = NULL
)
Arguments
acceptRoleSessionName |
Used to determine if a custom role session name will be accepted in a temporary credential request. |
durationSeconds |
Used to determine how long sessions vended using this profile are valid
for. See the |
managedPolicyArns |
A list of managed policy ARNs that apply to the vended session credentials. |
name |
The name of the profile. |
profileId |
[required] The unique identifier of the profile. |
roleArns |
A list of IAM roles that this profile can assume in a temporary credential request. |
sessionPolicy |
A session policy that applies to the trust boundary of the vended session credentials. |
Updates a trust anchor
Description
Updates a trust anchor. You establish trust between IAM Roles Anywhere and your certificate authority (CA) by configuring a trust anchor. You can define a trust anchor as a reference to an Private Certificate Authority (Private CA) or by uploading a CA certificate. Your Amazon Web Services workloads can authenticate with the trust anchor using certificates issued by the CA in exchange for temporary Amazon Web Services credentials.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/iamrolesanywhere_update_trust_anchor/ for full documentation.
Usage
iamrolesanywhere_update_trust_anchor(name = NULL, source = NULL, trustAnchorId)
Arguments
name |
The name of the trust anchor. |
source |
The trust anchor type and its related certificate data. |
trustAnchorId |
[required] The unique identifier of the trust anchor. |
AWS SSO Identity Store
Description
The Identity Store service used by IAM Identity Center provides a single place to retrieve all of your identities (users and groups). For more information, see the IAM Identity Center User Guide.
This reference guide describes the identity store operations that you can call programmatically and includes detailed information about data types and errors.
IAM Identity Center uses the sso
and identitystore
API namespaces.
Usage
identitystore(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- identitystore( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_group | Creates a group within the specified identity store |
create_group_membership | Creates a relationship between a member and a group |
create_user | Creates a user within the specified identity store |
delete_group | Delete a group within an identity store given GroupId |
delete_group_membership | Delete a membership within a group given MembershipId |
delete_user | Deletes a user within an identity store given UserId |
describe_group | Retrieves the group metadata and attributes from GroupId in an identity store |
describe_group_membership | Retrieves membership metadata and attributes from MembershipId in an identity store |
describe_user | Retrieves the user metadata and attributes from the UserId in an identity store |
get_group_id | Retrieves GroupId in an identity store |
get_group_membership_id | Retrieves the MembershipId in an identity store |
get_user_id | Retrieves the UserId in an identity store |
is_member_in_groups | Checks the user's membership in all requested groups and returns if the member exists in all queried groups |
list_group_memberships | For the specified group in the specified identity store, returns the list of all GroupMembership objects and returns results in paginated form |
list_group_memberships_for_member | For the specified member in the specified identity store, returns the list of all GroupMembership objects and returns results in paginated form |
list_groups | Lists all groups in the identity store |
list_users | Lists all users in the identity store |
update_group | For the specified group in the specified identity store, updates the group metadata and attributes |
update_user | For the specified user in the specified identity store, updates the user metadata and attributes |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- identitystore()
svc$create_group(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates a group within the specified identity store
Description
Creates a group within the specified identity store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_create_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_create_group(
IdentityStoreId,
DisplayName = NULL,
Description = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store. |
DisplayName |
A string containing the name of the group. This value is commonly
displayed when the group is referenced. |
Description |
A string containing the description of the group. |
Creates a relationship between a member and a group
Description
Creates a relationship between a member and a group. The following identifiers must be specified: GroupId
, IdentityStoreId
, and MemberId
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_create_group_membership/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_create_group_membership(IdentityStoreId, GroupId, MemberId)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store. |
GroupId |
[required] The identifier for a group in the identity store. |
MemberId |
[required] An object that contains the identifier of a group member. Setting the
|
Creates a user within the specified identity store
Description
Creates a user within the specified identity store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_create_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_create_user(
IdentityStoreId,
UserName = NULL,
Name = NULL,
DisplayName = NULL,
NickName = NULL,
ProfileUrl = NULL,
Emails = NULL,
Addresses = NULL,
PhoneNumbers = NULL,
UserType = NULL,
Title = NULL,
PreferredLanguage = NULL,
Locale = NULL,
Timezone = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store. |
UserName |
A unique string used to identify the user. The length limit is 128
characters. This value can consist of letters, accented characters,
symbols, numbers, and punctuation. This value is specified at the time
the user is created and stored as an attribute of the user object in the
identity store. |
Name |
An object containing the name of the user. |
DisplayName |
A string containing the name of the user. This value is typically formatted for display when the user is referenced. For example, "John Doe." |
NickName |
A string containing an alternate name for the user. |
ProfileUrl |
A string containing a URL that might be associated with the user. |
Emails |
A list of |
Addresses |
A list of |
PhoneNumbers |
A list of |
UserType |
A string indicating the type of user. Possible values are left unspecified. The value can vary based on your specific use case. |
Title |
A string containing the title of the user. Possible values are left unspecified. The value can vary based on your specific use case. |
PreferredLanguage |
A string containing the preferred language of the user. For example, "American English" or "en-us." |
Locale |
A string containing the geographical region or location of the user. |
Timezone |
A string containing the time zone of the user. |
Delete a group within an identity store given GroupId
Description
Delete a group within an identity store given GroupId
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_delete_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_delete_group(IdentityStoreId, GroupId)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store. |
GroupId |
[required] The identifier for a group in the identity store. |
Delete a membership within a group given MembershipId
Description
Delete a membership within a group given MembershipId
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_delete_group_membership/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_delete_group_membership(IdentityStoreId, MembershipId)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store. |
MembershipId |
[required] The identifier for a |
Deletes a user within an identity store given UserId
Description
Deletes a user within an identity store given UserId
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_delete_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_delete_user(IdentityStoreId, UserId)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store. |
UserId |
[required] The identifier for a user in the identity store. |
Retrieves the group metadata and attributes from GroupId in an identity store
Description
Retrieves the group metadata and attributes from GroupId
in an identity store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_describe_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_describe_group(IdentityStoreId, GroupId)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store, such as
|
GroupId |
[required] The identifier for a group in the identity store. |
Retrieves membership metadata and attributes from MembershipId in an identity store
Description
Retrieves membership metadata and attributes from MembershipId
in an identity store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_describe_group_membership/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_describe_group_membership(IdentityStoreId, MembershipId)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store. |
MembershipId |
[required] The identifier for a |
Retrieves the user metadata and attributes from the UserId in an identity store
Description
Retrieves the user metadata and attributes from the UserId
in an identity store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_describe_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_describe_user(IdentityStoreId, UserId)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store, such as
|
UserId |
[required] The identifier for a user in the identity store. |
Retrieves GroupId in an identity store
Description
Retrieves GroupId
in an identity store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_get_group_id/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_get_group_id(IdentityStoreId, AlternateIdentifier)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store. |
AlternateIdentifier |
[required] A unique identifier for a user or group that is not the primary
identifier. This value can be an identifier from an external identity
provider (IdP) that is associated with the user, the group, or a unique
attribute. For the unique attribute, the only valid path is
|
Retrieves the MembershipId in an identity store
Description
Retrieves the MembershipId
in an identity store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_get_group_membership_id/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_get_group_membership_id(IdentityStoreId, GroupId, MemberId)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store. |
GroupId |
[required] The identifier for a group in the identity store. |
MemberId |
[required] An object that contains the identifier of a group member. Setting the
|
Retrieves the UserId in an identity store
Description
Retrieves the UserId
in an identity store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_get_user_id/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_get_user_id(IdentityStoreId, AlternateIdentifier)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store. |
AlternateIdentifier |
[required] A unique identifier for a user or group that is not the primary
identifier. This value can be an identifier from an external identity
provider (IdP) that is associated with the user, the group, or a unique
attribute. For the unique attribute, the only valid paths are |
Checks the user's membership in all requested groups and returns if the member exists in all queried groups
Description
Checks the user's membership in all requested groups and returns if the member exists in all queried groups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_is_member_in_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_is_member_in_groups(IdentityStoreId, MemberId, GroupIds)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store. |
MemberId |
[required] An object containing the identifier of a group member. |
GroupIds |
[required] A list of identifiers for groups in the identity store. |
For the specified group in the specified identity store, returns the list of all GroupMembership objects and returns results in paginated form
Description
For the specified group in the specified identity store, returns the list of all GroupMembership
objects and returns results in paginated form.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_list_group_memberships/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_list_group_memberships(
IdentityStoreId,
GroupId,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store. |
GroupId |
[required] The identifier for a group in the identity store. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. This parameter
is used in all |
NextToken |
The pagination token used for the
|
For the specified member in the specified identity store, returns the list of all GroupMembership objects and returns results in paginated form
Description
For the specified member in the specified identity store, returns the list of all GroupMembership
objects and returns results in paginated form.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_list_group_memberships_for_member/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_list_group_memberships_for_member(
IdentityStoreId,
MemberId,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store. |
MemberId |
[required] An object that contains the identifier of a group member. Setting the
|
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. This parameter
is used in the |
NextToken |
The pagination token used for the
|
Lists all groups in the identity store
Description
Lists all groups in the identity store. Returns a paginated list of complete Group
objects. Filtering for a Group
by the DisplayName
attribute is deprecated. Instead, use the get_group_id
API action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_list_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_list_groups(
IdentityStoreId,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
Filters = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store, such as
|
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. This parameter
is used in the |
NextToken |
The pagination token used for the
|
Filters |
A list of |
Lists all users in the identity store
Description
Lists all users in the identity store. Returns a paginated list of complete User
objects. Filtering for a User
by the UserName
attribute is deprecated. Instead, use the get_user_id
API action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_list_users/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_list_users(
IdentityStoreId,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
Filters = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store, such as
|
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. This parameter
is used in the |
NextToken |
The pagination token used for the
|
Filters |
A list of |
For the specified group in the specified identity store, updates the group metadata and attributes
Description
For the specified group in the specified identity store, updates the group metadata and attributes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_update_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_update_group(IdentityStoreId, GroupId, Operations)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store. |
GroupId |
[required] The identifier for a group in the identity store. |
Operations |
[required] A list of |
For the specified user in the specified identity store, updates the user metadata and attributes
Description
For the specified user in the specified identity store, updates the user metadata and attributes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/identitystore_update_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
identitystore_update_user(IdentityStoreId, UserId, Operations)
Arguments
IdentityStoreId |
[required] The globally unique identifier for the identity store. |
UserId |
[required] The identifier for a user in the identity store. |
Operations |
[required] A list of |
Amazon Inspector
Description
Amazon Inspector enables you to analyze the behavior of your AWS resources and to identify potential security issues. For more information, see Amazon Inspector User Guide.
Usage
inspector(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- inspector( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_attributes_to_findings | Assigns attributes (key and value pairs) to the findings that are specified by the ARNs of the findings |
create_assessment_target | Creates a new assessment target using the ARN of the resource group that is generated by CreateResourceGroup |
create_assessment_template | Creates an assessment template for the assessment target that is specified by the ARN of the assessment target |
create_exclusions_preview | Starts the generation of an exclusions preview for the specified assessment template |
create_resource_group | Creates a resource group using the specified set of tags (key and value pairs) that are used to select the EC2 instances to be included in an Amazon Inspector assessment target |
delete_assessment_run | Deletes the assessment run that is specified by the ARN of the assessment run |
delete_assessment_target | Deletes the assessment target that is specified by the ARN of the assessment target |
delete_assessment_template | Deletes the assessment template that is specified by the ARN of the assessment template |
describe_assessment_runs | Describes the assessment runs that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment runs |
describe_assessment_targets | Describes the assessment targets that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment targets |
describe_assessment_templates | Describes the assessment templates that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment templates |
describe_cross_account_access_role | Describes the IAM role that enables Amazon Inspector to access your AWS account |
describe_exclusions | Describes the exclusions that are specified by the exclusions' ARNs |
describe_findings | Describes the findings that are specified by the ARNs of the findings |
describe_resource_groups | Describes the resource groups that are specified by the ARNs of the resource groups |
describe_rules_packages | Describes the rules packages that are specified by the ARNs of the rules packages |
get_assessment_report | Produces an assessment report that includes detailed and comprehensive results of a specified assessment run |
get_exclusions_preview | Retrieves the exclusions preview (a list of ExclusionPreview objects) specified by the preview token |
get_telemetry_metadata | Information about the data that is collected for the specified assessment run |
list_assessment_run_agents | Lists the agents of the assessment runs that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment runs |
list_assessment_runs | Lists the assessment runs that correspond to the assessment templates that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment templates |
list_assessment_targets | Lists the ARNs of the assessment targets within this AWS account |
list_assessment_templates | Lists the assessment templates that correspond to the assessment targets that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment targets |
list_event_subscriptions | Lists all the event subscriptions for the assessment template that is specified by the ARN of the assessment template |
list_exclusions | List exclusions that are generated by the assessment run |
list_findings | Lists findings that are generated by the assessment runs that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment runs |
list_rules_packages | Lists all available Amazon Inspector rules packages |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists all tags associated with an assessment template |
preview_agents | Previews the agents installed on the EC2 instances that are part of the specified assessment target |
register_cross_account_access_role | Registers the IAM role that grants Amazon Inspector access to AWS Services needed to perform security assessments |
remove_attributes_from_findings | Removes entire attributes (key and value pairs) from the findings that are specified by the ARNs of the findings where an attribute with the specified key exists |
set_tags_for_resource | Sets tags (key and value pairs) to the assessment template that is specified by the ARN of the assessment template |
start_assessment_run | Starts the assessment run specified by the ARN of the assessment template |
stop_assessment_run | Stops the assessment run that is specified by the ARN of the assessment run |
subscribe_to_event | Enables the process of sending Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) notifications about a specified event to a specified SNS topic |
unsubscribe_from_event | Disables the process of sending Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) notifications about a specified event to a specified SNS topic |
update_assessment_target | Updates the assessment target that is specified by the ARN of the assessment target |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- inspector()
# Assigns attributes (key and value pairs) to the findings that are
# specified by the ARNs of the findings.
svc$add_attributes_to_findings(
attributes = list(
list(
key = "Example",
value = "example"
)
),
findingArns = list(
"arn:aws:inspector:us-west-2:123456789012:target/0-0kFIPusq/template/0-..."
)
)
## End(Not run)
Inspector2
Description
Amazon Inspector is a vulnerability discovery service that automates continuous scanning for security vulnerabilities within your Amazon EC2, Amazon ECR, and Amazon Web Services Lambda environments.
Usage
inspector2(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- inspector2( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
associate_member | Associates an Amazon Web Services account with an Amazon Inspector delegated administrator |
batch_get_account_status | Retrieves the Amazon Inspector status of multiple Amazon Web Services accounts within your environment |
batch_get_code_snippet | Retrieves code snippets from findings that Amazon Inspector detected code vulnerabilities in |
batch_get_finding_details | Gets vulnerability details for findings |
batch_get_free_trial_info | Gets free trial status for multiple Amazon Web Services accounts |
batch_get_member_ec_2_deep_inspection_status | Retrieves Amazon Inspector deep inspection activation status of multiple member accounts within your organization |
batch_update_member_ec_2_deep_inspection_status | Activates or deactivates Amazon Inspector deep inspection for the provided member accounts in your organization |
cancel_findings_report | Cancels the given findings report |
cancel_sbom_export | Cancels a software bill of materials (SBOM) report |
create_cis_scan_configuration | Creates a CIS scan configuration |
create_filter | Creates a filter resource using specified filter criteria |
create_findings_report | Creates a finding report |
create_sbom_export | Creates a software bill of materials (SBOM) report |
delete_cis_scan_configuration | Deletes a CIS scan configuration |
delete_filter | Deletes a filter resource |
describe_organization_configuration | Describe Amazon Inspector configuration settings for an Amazon Web Services organization |
disable | Disables Amazon Inspector scans for one or more Amazon Web Services accounts |
disable_delegated_admin_account | Disables the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator for your organization |
disassociate_member | Disassociates a member account from an Amazon Inspector delegated administrator |
enable | Enables Amazon Inspector scans for one or more Amazon Web Services accounts |
enable_delegated_admin_account | Enables the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator for your Organizations organization |
get_cis_scan_report | Retrieves a CIS scan report |
get_cis_scan_result_details | Retrieves CIS scan result details |
get_configuration | Retrieves setting configurations for Inspector scans |
get_delegated_admin_account | Retrieves information about the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator for your organization |
get_ec_2_deep_inspection_configuration | Retrieves the activation status of Amazon Inspector deep inspection and custom paths associated with your account |
get_encryption_key | Gets an encryption key |
get_findings_report_status | Gets the status of a findings report |
get_member | Gets member information for your organization |
get_sbom_export | Gets details of a software bill of materials (SBOM) report |
list_account_permissions | Lists the permissions an account has to configure Amazon Inspector |
list_cis_scan_configurations | Lists CIS scan configurations |
list_cis_scan_results_aggregated_by_checks | Lists scan results aggregated by checks |
list_cis_scan_results_aggregated_by_target_resource | Lists scan results aggregated by a target resource |
list_cis_scans | Returns a CIS scan list |
list_coverage | Lists coverage details for your environment |
list_coverage_statistics | Lists Amazon Inspector coverage statistics for your environment |
list_delegated_admin_accounts | Lists information about the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator of your organization |
list_filters | Lists the filters associated with your account |
list_finding_aggregations | Lists aggregated finding data for your environment based on specific criteria |
list_findings | Lists findings for your environment |
list_members | List members associated with the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator for your organization |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists all tags attached to a given resource |
list_usage_totals | Lists the Amazon Inspector usage totals over the last 30 days |
reset_encryption_key | Resets an encryption key |
search_vulnerabilities | Lists Amazon Inspector coverage details for a specific vulnerability |
send_cis_session_health | Sends a CIS session health |
send_cis_session_telemetry | Sends a CIS session telemetry |
start_cis_session | Starts a CIS session |
stop_cis_session | Stops a CIS session |
tag_resource | Adds tags to a resource |
untag_resource | Removes tags from a resource |
update_cis_scan_configuration | Updates a CIS scan configuration |
update_configuration | Updates setting configurations for your Amazon Inspector account |
update_ec_2_deep_inspection_configuration | Activates, deactivates Amazon Inspector deep inspection, or updates custom paths for your account |
update_encryption_key | Updates an encryption key |
update_filter | Specifies the action that is to be applied to the findings that match the filter |
update_organization_configuration | Updates the configurations for your Amazon Inspector organization |
update_org_ec_2_deep_inspection_configuration | Updates the Amazon Inspector deep inspection custom paths for your organization |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- inspector2()
svc$associate_member(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Associates an Amazon Web Services account with an Amazon Inspector delegated administrator
Description
Associates an Amazon Web Services account with an Amazon Inspector delegated administrator. An HTTP 200 response indicates the association was started but doesn’t indicate whether it completed. You can check if the association completed using list_members
for multiple accounts or GetMembers for a single account. An HTTP 402 response indicates the association failed because the organization size exceeded its limit. For information on limits, see Amazon Inspector quotas.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_associate_member/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_associate_member(accountId)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the member account to be associated. |
Retrieves the Amazon Inspector status of multiple Amazon Web Services accounts within your environment
Description
Retrieves the Amazon Inspector status of multiple Amazon Web Services accounts within your environment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_batch_get_account_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_batch_get_account_status(accountIds = NULL)
Arguments
accountIds |
The 12-digit Amazon Web Services account IDs of the accounts to retrieve Amazon Inspector status for. |
Retrieves code snippets from findings that Amazon Inspector detected code vulnerabilities in
Description
Retrieves code snippets from findings that Amazon Inspector detected code vulnerabilities in.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_batch_get_code_snippet/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_batch_get_code_snippet(findingArns)
Arguments
findingArns |
[required] An array of finding ARNs for the findings you want to retrieve code snippets from. |
Gets vulnerability details for findings
Description
Gets vulnerability details for findings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_batch_get_finding_details/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_batch_get_finding_details(findingArns)
Arguments
findingArns |
[required] A list of finding ARNs. |
Gets free trial status for multiple Amazon Web Services accounts
Description
Gets free trial status for multiple Amazon Web Services accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_batch_get_free_trial_info/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_batch_get_free_trial_info(accountIds)
Arguments
accountIds |
[required] The account IDs to get free trial status for. |
Retrieves Amazon Inspector deep inspection activation status of multiple member accounts within your organization
Description
Retrieves Amazon Inspector deep inspection activation status of multiple member accounts within your organization. You must be the delegated administrator of an organization in Amazon Inspector to use this API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_batch_get_member_ec_2_deep_inspection_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_batch_get_member_ec_2_deep_inspection_status(accountIds = NULL)
Arguments
accountIds |
The unique identifiers for the Amazon Web Services accounts to retrieve Amazon Inspector deep inspection activation status for. </p> |
Activates or deactivates Amazon Inspector deep inspection for the provided member accounts in your organization
Description
Activates or deactivates Amazon Inspector deep inspection for the provided member accounts in your organization. You must be the delegated administrator of an organization in Amazon Inspector to use this API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_batch_update_member_ec_2_deep_inspection_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_batch_update_member_ec_2_deep_inspection_status(accountIds)
Arguments
accountIds |
[required] The unique identifiers for the Amazon Web Services accounts to change Amazon Inspector deep inspection status for. |
Cancels the given findings report
Description
Cancels the given findings report.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_cancel_findings_report/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_cancel_findings_report(reportId)
Arguments
reportId |
[required] The ID of the report to be canceled. |
Cancels a software bill of materials (SBOM) report
Description
Cancels a software bill of materials (SBOM) report.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_cancel_sbom_export/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_cancel_sbom_export(reportId)
Arguments
reportId |
[required] The report ID of the SBOM export to cancel. |
Creates a CIS scan configuration
Description
Creates a CIS scan configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_create_cis_scan_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_create_cis_scan_configuration(
scanName,
schedule,
securityLevel,
tags = NULL,
targets
)
Arguments
scanName |
[required] The scan name for the CIS scan configuration. |
schedule |
[required] The schedule for the CIS scan configuration. |
securityLevel |
[required] The security level for the CIS scan configuration. Security level refers to the Benchmark levels that CIS assigns to a profile. |
tags |
The tags for the CIS scan configuration. |
targets |
[required] The targets for the CIS scan configuration. |
Creates a filter resource using specified filter criteria
Description
Creates a filter resource using specified filter criteria. When the filter action is set to SUPPRESS
this action creates a suppression rule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_create_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_create_filter(
action,
description = NULL,
filterCriteria,
name,
reason = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
action |
[required] Defines the action that is to be applied to the findings that match the filter. |
description |
A description of the filter. |
filterCriteria |
[required] Defines the criteria to be used in the filter for querying findings. |
name |
[required] The name of the filter. Minimum length of 3. Maximum length of 64. Valid characters include alphanumeric characters, dot (.), underscore (_), and dash (-). Spaces are not allowed. |
reason |
The reason for creating the filter. |
tags |
A list of tags for the filter. |
Creates a finding report
Description
Creates a finding report. By default only ACTIVE
findings are returned in the report. To see SUPRESSED
or CLOSED
findings you must specify a value for the findingStatus
filter criteria.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_create_findings_report/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_create_findings_report(
filterCriteria = NULL,
reportFormat,
s3Destination
)
Arguments
filterCriteria |
The filter criteria to apply to the results of the finding report. |
reportFormat |
[required] The format to generate the report in. |
s3Destination |
[required] The Amazon S3 export destination for the report. |
Creates a software bill of materials (SBOM) report
Description
Creates a software bill of materials (SBOM) report.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_create_sbom_export/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_create_sbom_export(
reportFormat,
resourceFilterCriteria = NULL,
s3Destination
)
Arguments
reportFormat |
[required] The output format for the software bill of materials (SBOM) report. |
resourceFilterCriteria |
The resource filter criteria for the software bill of materials (SBOM) report. |
s3Destination |
[required] Contains details of the Amazon S3 bucket and KMS key used to export findings. |
Deletes a CIS scan configuration
Description
Deletes a CIS scan configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_delete_cis_scan_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_delete_cis_scan_configuration(scanConfigurationArn)
Arguments
scanConfigurationArn |
[required] The ARN of the CIS scan configuration. |
Deletes a filter resource
Description
Deletes a filter resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_delete_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_delete_filter(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Number (ARN) of the filter to be deleted. |
Describe Amazon Inspector configuration settings for an Amazon Web Services organization
Description
Describe Amazon Inspector configuration settings for an Amazon Web Services organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_describe_organization_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_describe_organization_configuration()
Disables Amazon Inspector scans for one or more Amazon Web Services accounts
Description
Disables Amazon Inspector scans for one or more Amazon Web Services accounts. Disabling all scan types in an account disables the Amazon Inspector service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_disable/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_disable(accountIds = NULL, resourceTypes = NULL)
Arguments
accountIds |
An array of account IDs you want to disable Amazon Inspector scans for. |
resourceTypes |
The resource scan types you want to disable. |
Disables the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator for your organization
Description
Disables the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator for your organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_disable_delegated_admin_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_disable_delegated_admin_account(delegatedAdminAccountId)
Arguments
delegatedAdminAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the current Amazon Inspector delegated administrator. |
Disassociates a member account from an Amazon Inspector delegated administrator
Description
Disassociates a member account from an Amazon Inspector delegated administrator.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_disassociate_member/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_disassociate_member(accountId)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the member account to disassociate. |
Enables Amazon Inspector scans for one or more Amazon Web Services accounts
Description
Enables Amazon Inspector scans for one or more Amazon Web Services accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_enable/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_enable(accountIds = NULL, clientToken = NULL, resourceTypes)
Arguments
accountIds |
A list of account IDs you want to enable Amazon Inspector scans for. |
clientToken |
The idempotency token for the request. |
resourceTypes |
[required] The resource scan types you want to enable. |
Enables the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator for your Organizations organization
Description
Enables the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator for your Organizations organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_enable_delegated_admin_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_enable_delegated_admin_account(
clientToken = NULL,
delegatedAdminAccountId
)
Arguments
clientToken |
The idempotency token for the request. |
delegatedAdminAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator. |
Retrieves a CIS scan report
Description
Retrieves a CIS scan report.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_get_cis_scan_report/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_get_cis_scan_report(
reportFormat = NULL,
scanArn,
targetAccounts = NULL
)
Arguments
reportFormat |
The format of the report. Valid values are |
scanArn |
[required] The scan ARN. |
targetAccounts |
The target accounts. |
Retrieves CIS scan result details
Description
Retrieves CIS scan result details.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_get_cis_scan_result_details/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_get_cis_scan_result_details(
accountId,
filterCriteria = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
scanArn,
sortBy = NULL,
sortOrder = NULL,
targetResourceId
)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The account ID. |
filterCriteria |
The filter criteria. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of CIS scan result details to be returned in a single page of results. |
nextToken |
The pagination token from a previous request that's used to retrieve the next page of results. |
scanArn |
[required] The scan ARN. |
sortBy |
The sort by order. |
sortOrder |
The sort order. |
targetResourceId |
[required] The target resource ID. |
Retrieves setting configurations for Inspector scans
Description
Retrieves setting configurations for Inspector scans.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_get_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_get_configuration()
Retrieves information about the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator for your organization
Description
Retrieves information about the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator for your organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_get_delegated_admin_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_get_delegated_admin_account()
Retrieves the activation status of Amazon Inspector deep inspection and custom paths associated with your account
Description
Retrieves the activation status of Amazon Inspector deep inspection and custom paths associated with your account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_get_ec_2_deep_inspection_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_get_ec_2_deep_inspection_configuration()
Gets an encryption key
Description
Gets an encryption key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_get_encryption_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_get_encryption_key(resourceType, scanType)
Arguments
resourceType |
[required] The resource type the key encrypts. |
scanType |
[required] The scan type the key encrypts. |
Gets the status of a findings report
Description
Gets the status of a findings report.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_get_findings_report_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_get_findings_report_status(reportId = NULL)
Arguments
reportId |
The ID of the report to retrieve the status of. |
Gets member information for your organization
Description
Gets member information for your organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_get_member/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_get_member(accountId)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the member account to retrieve information on. |
Gets details of a software bill of materials (SBOM) report
Description
Gets details of a software bill of materials (SBOM) report.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_get_sbom_export/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_get_sbom_export(reportId)
Arguments
reportId |
[required] The report ID of the SBOM export to get details for. |
Lists the permissions an account has to configure Amazon Inspector
Description
Lists the permissions an account has to configure Amazon Inspector.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_list_account_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_list_account_permissions(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
service = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of results the response can return. If your request
would return more than the maximum the response will return a
|
nextToken |
A token to use for paginating results that are returned in the response.
Set the value of this parameter to null for the first request to a list
action. If your response returns more than the |
service |
The service scan type to check permissions for. |
Lists CIS scan configurations
Description
Lists CIS scan configurations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_list_cis_scan_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_list_cis_scan_configurations(
filterCriteria = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
sortBy = NULL,
sortOrder = NULL
)
Arguments
filterCriteria |
The CIS scan configuration filter criteria. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of CIS scan configurations to be returned in a single page of results. |
nextToken |
The pagination token from a previous request that's used to retrieve the next page of results. |
sortBy |
The CIS scan configuration sort by order. |
sortOrder |
The CIS scan configuration sort order order. |
Lists scan results aggregated by checks
Description
Lists scan results aggregated by checks.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_list_cis_scan_results_aggregated_by_checks/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_list_cis_scan_results_aggregated_by_checks(
filterCriteria = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
scanArn,
sortBy = NULL,
sortOrder = NULL
)
Arguments
filterCriteria |
The filter criteria. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of scan results aggregated by checks to be returned in a single page of results. |
nextToken |
The pagination token from a previous request that's used to retrieve the next page of results. |
scanArn |
[required] The scan ARN. |
sortBy |
The sort by order. |
sortOrder |
The sort order. |
Lists scan results aggregated by a target resource
Description
Lists scan results aggregated by a target resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_list_cis_scan_results_aggregated_by_target_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_list_cis_scan_results_aggregated_by_target_resource(
filterCriteria = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
scanArn,
sortBy = NULL,
sortOrder = NULL
)
Arguments
filterCriteria |
The filter criteria. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of scan results aggregated by a target resource to be returned in a single page of results. |
nextToken |
The pagination token from a previous request that's used to retrieve the next page of results. |
scanArn |
[required] The scan ARN. |
sortBy |
The sort by order. |
sortOrder |
The sort order. |
Returns a CIS scan list
Description
Returns a CIS scan list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_list_cis_scans/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_list_cis_scans(
detailLevel = NULL,
filterCriteria = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
sortBy = NULL,
sortOrder = NULL
)
Arguments
detailLevel |
The detail applied to the CIS scan. |
filterCriteria |
The CIS scan filter criteria. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned. |
nextToken |
The pagination token from a previous request that's used to retrieve the next page of results. |
sortBy |
The CIS scans sort by order. |
sortOrder |
The CIS scans sort order. |
Lists coverage details for your environment
Description
Lists coverage details for your environment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_list_coverage/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_list_coverage(
filterCriteria = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
filterCriteria |
An object that contains details on the filters to apply to the coverage data for your environment. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results the response can return. If your request
would return more than the maximum the response will return a
|
nextToken |
A token to use for paginating results that are returned in the response.
Set the value of this parameter to null for the first request to a list
action. If your response returns more than the |
Lists Amazon Inspector coverage statistics for your environment
Description
Lists Amazon Inspector coverage statistics for your environment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_list_coverage_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_list_coverage_statistics(
filterCriteria = NULL,
groupBy = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
filterCriteria |
An object that contains details on the filters to apply to the coverage data for your environment. |
groupBy |
The value to group the results by. |
nextToken |
A token to use for paginating results that are returned in the response.
Set the value of this parameter to null for the first request to a list
action. For subsequent calls, use the |
Lists information about the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator of your organization
Description
Lists information about the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator of your organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_list_delegated_admin_accounts/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_list_delegated_admin_accounts(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of results the response can return. If your request
would return more than the maximum the response will return a
|
nextToken |
A token to use for paginating results that are returned in the response.
Set the value of this parameter to null for the first request to a list
action. If your response returns more than the |
Lists the filters associated with your account
Description
Lists the filters associated with your account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_list_filters/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_list_filters(
action = NULL,
arns = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
action |
The action the filter applies to matched findings. |
arns |
The Amazon resource number (ARN) of the filter. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results the response can return. If your request
would return more than the maximum the response will return a
|
nextToken |
A token to use for paginating results that are returned in the response.
Set the value of this parameter to null for the first request to a list
action. If your response returns more than the |
Lists aggregated finding data for your environment based on specific criteria
Description
Lists aggregated finding data for your environment based on specific criteria.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_list_finding_aggregations/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_list_finding_aggregations(
accountIds = NULL,
aggregationRequest = NULL,
aggregationType,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
accountIds |
The Amazon Web Services account IDs to retrieve finding aggregation data for. |
aggregationRequest |
Details of the aggregation request that is used to filter your aggregation results. |
aggregationType |
[required] The type of the aggregation request. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results the response can return. If your request
would return more than the maximum the response will return a
|
nextToken |
A token to use for paginating results that are returned in the response.
Set the value of this parameter to null for the first request to a list
action. If your response returns more than the |
Lists findings for your environment
Description
Lists findings for your environment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_list_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_list_findings(
filterCriteria = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
sortCriteria = NULL
)
Arguments
filterCriteria |
Details on the filters to apply to your finding results. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results the response can return. If your request
would return more than the maximum the response will return a
|
nextToken |
A token to use for paginating results that are returned in the response.
Set the value of this parameter to null for the first request to a list
action. If your response returns more than the |
sortCriteria |
Details on the sort criteria to apply to your finding results. |
List members associated with the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator for your organization
Description
List members associated with the Amazon Inspector delegated administrator for your organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_list_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_list_members(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
onlyAssociated = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of results the response can return. If your request
would return more than the maximum the response will return a
|
nextToken |
A token to use for paginating results that are returned in the response.
Set the value of this parameter to null for the first request to a list
action. If your response returns more than the |
onlyAssociated |
Specifies whether to list only currently associated members if |
Lists all tags attached to a given resource
Description
Lists all tags attached to a given resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon resource number (ARN) of the resource to list tags of. |
Lists the Amazon Inspector usage totals over the last 30 days
Description
Lists the Amazon Inspector usage totals over the last 30 days.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_list_usage_totals/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_list_usage_totals(
accountIds = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
accountIds |
The Amazon Web Services account IDs to retrieve usage totals for. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results the response can return. If your request
would return more than the maximum the response will return a
|
nextToken |
A token to use for paginating results that are returned in the response.
Set the value of this parameter to null for the first request to a list
action. If your response returns more than the |
Resets an encryption key
Description
Resets an encryption key. After the key is reset your resources will be encrypted by an Amazon Web Services owned key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_reset_encryption_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_reset_encryption_key(resourceType, scanType)
Arguments
resourceType |
[required] The resource type the key encrypts. |
scanType |
[required] The scan type the key encrypts. |
Lists Amazon Inspector coverage details for a specific vulnerability
Description
Lists Amazon Inspector coverage details for a specific vulnerability.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_search_vulnerabilities/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_search_vulnerabilities(filterCriteria, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
filterCriteria |
[required] The criteria used to filter the results of a vulnerability search. |
nextToken |
A token to use for paginating results that are returned in the response.
Set the value of this parameter to null for the first request to a list
action. For subsequent calls, use the |
Sends a CIS session health
Description
Sends a CIS session health. This API is used by the Amazon Inspector SSM plugin to communicate with the Amazon Inspector service. The Amazon Inspector SSM plugin calls this API to start a CIS scan session for the scan ID supplied by the service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_send_cis_session_health/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_send_cis_session_health(scanJobId, sessionToken)
Arguments
scanJobId |
[required] A unique identifier for the scan job. |
sessionToken |
[required] The unique token that identifies the CIS session. |
Sends a CIS session telemetry
Description
Sends a CIS session telemetry. This API is used by the Amazon Inspector SSM plugin to communicate with the Amazon Inspector service. The Amazon Inspector SSM plugin calls this API to start a CIS scan session for the scan ID supplied by the service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_send_cis_session_telemetry/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_send_cis_session_telemetry(messages, scanJobId, sessionToken)
Arguments
messages |
[required] The CIS session telemetry messages. |
scanJobId |
[required] A unique identifier for the scan job. |
sessionToken |
[required] The unique token that identifies the CIS session. |
Starts a CIS session
Description
Starts a CIS session. This API is used by the Amazon Inspector SSM plugin to communicate with the Amazon Inspector service. The Amazon Inspector SSM plugin calls this API to start a CIS scan session for the scan ID supplied by the service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_start_cis_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_start_cis_session(message, scanJobId)
Arguments
message |
[required] The start CIS session message. |
scanJobId |
[required] A unique identifier for the scan job. |
Stops a CIS session
Description
Stops a CIS session. This API is used by the Amazon Inspector SSM plugin to communicate with the Amazon Inspector service. The Amazon Inspector SSM plugin calls this API to stop a CIS scan session for the scan ID supplied by the service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_stop_cis_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_stop_cis_session(message, scanJobId, sessionToken)
Arguments
message |
[required] The stop CIS session message. |
scanJobId |
[required] A unique identifier for the scan job. |
sessionToken |
[required] The unique token that identifies the CIS session. |
Adds tags to a resource
Description
Adds tags to a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to apply a tag to. |
tags |
[required] The tags to be added to a resource. |
Removes tags from a resource
Description
Removes tags from a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the resource to remove tags from. |
tagKeys |
[required] The tag keys to remove from the resource. |
Updates a CIS scan configuration
Description
Updates a CIS scan configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_update_cis_scan_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_update_cis_scan_configuration(
scanConfigurationArn,
scanName = NULL,
schedule = NULL,
securityLevel = NULL,
targets = NULL
)
Arguments
scanConfigurationArn |
[required] The CIS scan configuration ARN. |
scanName |
The scan name for the CIS scan configuration. |
schedule |
The schedule for the CIS scan configuration. |
securityLevel |
The security level for the CIS scan configuration. Security level refers to the Benchmark levels that CIS assigns to a profile. |
targets |
The targets for the CIS scan configuration. |
Updates setting configurations for your Amazon Inspector account
Description
Updates setting configurations for your Amazon Inspector account. When you use this API as an Amazon Inspector delegated administrator this updates the setting for all accounts you manage. Member accounts in an organization cannot update this setting.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_update_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_update_configuration(
ec2Configuration = NULL,
ecrConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
ec2Configuration |
Specifies how the Amazon EC2 automated scan will be updated for your environment. |
ecrConfiguration |
Specifies how the ECR automated re-scan will be updated for your environment. |
Activates, deactivates Amazon Inspector deep inspection, or updates custom paths for your account
Description
Activates, deactivates Amazon Inspector deep inspection, or updates custom paths for your account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_update_ec_2_deep_inspection_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_update_ec_2_deep_inspection_configuration(
activateDeepInspection = NULL,
packagePaths = NULL
)
Arguments
activateDeepInspection |
Specify |
packagePaths |
The Amazon Inspector deep inspection custom paths you are adding for your account. |
Updates an encryption key
Description
Updates an encryption key. A ResourceNotFoundException
means that an Amazon Web Services owned key is being used for encryption.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_update_encryption_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_update_encryption_key(kmsKeyId, resourceType, scanType)
Arguments
kmsKeyId |
[required] A KMS key ID for the encryption key. |
resourceType |
[required] The resource type for the encryption key. |
scanType |
[required] The scan type for the encryption key. |
Specifies the action that is to be applied to the findings that match the filter
Description
Specifies the action that is to be applied to the findings that match the filter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_update_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_update_filter(
action = NULL,
description = NULL,
filterArn,
filterCriteria = NULL,
name = NULL,
reason = NULL
)
Arguments
action |
Specifies the action that is to be applied to the findings that match the filter. |
description |
A description of the filter. |
filterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Number (ARN) of the filter to update. |
filterCriteria |
Defines the criteria to be update in the filter. |
name |
The name of the filter. |
reason |
The reason the filter was updated. |
Updates the Amazon Inspector deep inspection custom paths for your organization
Description
Updates the Amazon Inspector deep inspection custom paths for your organization. You must be an Amazon Inspector delegated administrator to use this API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_update_org_ec_2_deep_inspection_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_update_org_ec_2_deep_inspection_configuration(orgPackagePaths)
Arguments
orgPackagePaths |
[required] The Amazon Inspector deep inspection custom paths you are adding for your organization. |
Updates the configurations for your Amazon Inspector organization
Description
Updates the configurations for your Amazon Inspector organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector2_update_organization_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector2_update_organization_configuration(autoEnable)
Arguments
autoEnable |
[required] Defines which scan types are enabled automatically for new members of your Amazon Inspector organization. |
Assigns attributes (key and value pairs) to the findings that are specified by the ARNs of the findings
Description
Assigns attributes (key and value pairs) to the findings that are specified by the ARNs of the findings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_add_attributes_to_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_add_attributes_to_findings(findingArns, attributes)
Arguments
findingArns |
[required] The ARNs that specify the findings that you want to assign attributes to. |
attributes |
[required] The array of attributes that you want to assign to specified findings. |
Creates a new assessment target using the ARN of the resource group that is generated by CreateResourceGroup
Description
Creates a new assessment target using the ARN of the resource group that is generated by create_resource_group
. If resourceGroupArn is not specified, all EC2 instances in the current AWS account and region are included in the assessment target. If the service-linked role isn’t already registered, this action also creates and registers a service-linked role to grant Amazon Inspector access to AWS Services needed to perform security assessments. You can create up to 50 assessment targets per AWS account. You can run up to 500 concurrent agents per AWS account. For more information, see Amazon Inspector Assessment Targets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_create_assessment_target/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_create_assessment_target(
assessmentTargetName,
resourceGroupArn = NULL
)
Arguments
assessmentTargetName |
[required] The user-defined name that identifies the assessment target that you want to create. The name must be unique within the AWS account. |
resourceGroupArn |
The ARN that specifies the resource group that is used to create the assessment target. If resourceGroupArn is not specified, all EC2 instances in the current AWS account and region are included in the assessment target. |
Creates an assessment template for the assessment target that is specified by the ARN of the assessment target
Description
Creates an assessment template for the assessment target that is specified by the ARN of the assessment target. If the service-linked role isn’t already registered, this action also creates and registers a service-linked role to grant Amazon Inspector access to AWS Services needed to perform security assessments.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_create_assessment_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_create_assessment_template(
assessmentTargetArn,
assessmentTemplateName,
durationInSeconds,
rulesPackageArns,
userAttributesForFindings = NULL
)
Arguments
assessmentTargetArn |
[required] The ARN that specifies the assessment target for which you want to create the assessment template. |
assessmentTemplateName |
[required] The user-defined name that identifies the assessment template that you want to create. You can create several assessment templates for an assessment target. The names of the assessment templates that correspond to a particular assessment target must be unique. |
durationInSeconds |
[required] The duration of the assessment run in seconds. |
rulesPackageArns |
[required] The ARNs that specify the rules packages that you want to attach to the assessment template. |
userAttributesForFindings |
The user-defined attributes that are assigned to every finding that is generated by the assessment run that uses this assessment template. An attribute is a key and value pair (an Attribute object). Within an assessment template, each key must be unique. |
Starts the generation of an exclusions preview for the specified assessment template
Description
Starts the generation of an exclusions preview for the specified assessment template. The exclusions preview lists the potential exclusions (ExclusionPreview) that Inspector can detect before it runs the assessment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_create_exclusions_preview/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_create_exclusions_preview(assessmentTemplateArn)
Arguments
assessmentTemplateArn |
[required] The ARN that specifies the assessment template for which you want to create an exclusions preview. |
Creates a resource group using the specified set of tags (key and value pairs) that are used to select the EC2 instances to be included in an Amazon Inspector assessment target
Description
Creates a resource group using the specified set of tags (key and value pairs) that are used to select the EC2 instances to be included in an Amazon Inspector assessment target. The created resource group is then used to create an Amazon Inspector assessment target. For more information, see create_assessment_target
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_create_resource_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_create_resource_group(resourceGroupTags)
Arguments
resourceGroupTags |
[required] A collection of keys and an array of possible values, '[{"key":"key1","values":["Value1","Value2"]},{"key":"Key2","values":["Value3"]}]'. For example,'[{"key":"Name","values":["TestEC2Instance"]}]'. |
Deletes the assessment run that is specified by the ARN of the assessment run
Description
Deletes the assessment run that is specified by the ARN of the assessment run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_delete_assessment_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_delete_assessment_run(assessmentRunArn)
Arguments
assessmentRunArn |
[required] The ARN that specifies the assessment run that you want to delete. |
Deletes the assessment target that is specified by the ARN of the assessment target
Description
Deletes the assessment target that is specified by the ARN of the assessment target.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_delete_assessment_target/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_delete_assessment_target(assessmentTargetArn)
Arguments
assessmentTargetArn |
[required] The ARN that specifies the assessment target that you want to delete. |
Deletes the assessment template that is specified by the ARN of the assessment template
Description
Deletes the assessment template that is specified by the ARN of the assessment template.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_delete_assessment_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_delete_assessment_template(assessmentTemplateArn)
Arguments
assessmentTemplateArn |
[required] The ARN that specifies the assessment template that you want to delete. |
Describes the assessment runs that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment runs
Description
Describes the assessment runs that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment runs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_describe_assessment_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_describe_assessment_runs(assessmentRunArns)
Arguments
assessmentRunArns |
[required] The ARN that specifies the assessment run that you want to describe. |
Describes the assessment targets that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment targets
Description
Describes the assessment targets that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment targets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_describe_assessment_targets/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_describe_assessment_targets(assessmentTargetArns)
Arguments
assessmentTargetArns |
[required] The ARNs that specifies the assessment targets that you want to describe. |
Describes the assessment templates that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment templates
Description
Describes the assessment templates that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment templates.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_describe_assessment_templates/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_describe_assessment_templates(assessmentTemplateArns)
Arguments
assessmentTemplateArns |
[required] |
Describes the IAM role that enables Amazon Inspector to access your AWS account
Description
Describes the IAM role that enables Amazon Inspector to access your AWS account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_describe_cross_account_access_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_describe_cross_account_access_role()
Describes the exclusions that are specified by the exclusions' ARNs
Description
Describes the exclusions that are specified by the exclusions' ARNs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_describe_exclusions/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_describe_exclusions(exclusionArns, locale = NULL)
Arguments
exclusionArns |
[required] The list of ARNs that specify the exclusions that you want to describe. |
locale |
The locale into which you want to translate the exclusion's title, description, and recommendation. |
Describes the findings that are specified by the ARNs of the findings
Description
Describes the findings that are specified by the ARNs of the findings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_describe_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_describe_findings(findingArns, locale = NULL)
Arguments
findingArns |
[required] The ARN that specifies the finding that you want to describe. |
locale |
The locale into which you want to translate a finding description, recommendation, and the short description that identifies the finding. |
Describes the resource groups that are specified by the ARNs of the resource groups
Description
Describes the resource groups that are specified by the ARNs of the resource groups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_describe_resource_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_describe_resource_groups(resourceGroupArns)
Arguments
resourceGroupArns |
[required] The ARN that specifies the resource group that you want to describe. |
Describes the rules packages that are specified by the ARNs of the rules packages
Description
Describes the rules packages that are specified by the ARNs of the rules packages.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_describe_rules_packages/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_describe_rules_packages(rulesPackageArns, locale = NULL)
Arguments
rulesPackageArns |
[required] The ARN that specifies the rules package that you want to describe. |
locale |
The locale that you want to translate a rules package description into. |
Produces an assessment report that includes detailed and comprehensive results of a specified assessment run
Description
Produces an assessment report that includes detailed and comprehensive results of a specified assessment run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_get_assessment_report/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_get_assessment_report(assessmentRunArn, reportFileFormat, reportType)
Arguments
assessmentRunArn |
[required] The ARN that specifies the assessment run for which you want to generate a report. |
reportFileFormat |
[required] Specifies the file format (html or pdf) of the assessment report that you want to generate. |
reportType |
[required] Specifies the type of the assessment report that you want to generate. There are two types of assessment reports: a finding report and a full report. For more information, see Assessment Reports. |
Retrieves the exclusions preview (a list of ExclusionPreview objects) specified by the preview token
Description
Retrieves the exclusions preview (a list of ExclusionPreview objects) specified by the preview token. You can obtain the preview token by running the CreateExclusionsPreview API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_get_exclusions_preview/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_get_exclusions_preview(
assessmentTemplateArn,
previewToken,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
locale = NULL
)
Arguments
assessmentTemplateArn |
[required] The ARN that specifies the assessment template for which the exclusions preview was requested. |
previewToken |
[required] The unique identifier associated of the exclusions preview. |
nextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the GetExclusionsPreviewRequest action. Subsequent calls to the action fill nextToken in the request with the value of nextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
maxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items you want in the response. The default value is 100. The maximum value is 500. |
locale |
The locale into which you want to translate the exclusion's title, description, and recommendation. |
Information about the data that is collected for the specified assessment run
Description
Information about the data that is collected for the specified assessment run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_get_telemetry_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_get_telemetry_metadata(assessmentRunArn)
Arguments
assessmentRunArn |
[required] The ARN that specifies the assessment run that has the telemetry data that you want to obtain. |
Lists the agents of the assessment runs that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment runs
Description
Lists the agents of the assessment runs that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment runs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_list_assessment_run_agents/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_list_assessment_run_agents(
assessmentRunArn,
filter = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
assessmentRunArn |
[required] The ARN that specifies the assessment run whose agents you want to list. |
filter |
You can use this parameter to specify a subset of data to be included in the action's response. For a record to match a filter, all specified filter attributes must match. When multiple values are specified for a filter attribute, any of the values can match. |
nextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the ListAssessmentRunAgents action. Subsequent calls to the action fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
maxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items that you want in the response. The default value is 10. The maximum value is 500. |
Lists the assessment runs that correspond to the assessment templates that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment templates
Description
Lists the assessment runs that correspond to the assessment templates that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment templates.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_list_assessment_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_list_assessment_runs(
assessmentTemplateArns = NULL,
filter = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
assessmentTemplateArns |
The ARNs that specify the assessment templates whose assessment runs you want to list. |
filter |
You can use this parameter to specify a subset of data to be included in the action's response. For a record to match a filter, all specified filter attributes must match. When multiple values are specified for a filter attribute, any of the values can match. |
nextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the ListAssessmentRuns action. Subsequent calls to the action fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
maxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items that you want in the response. The default value is 10. The maximum value is 500. |
Lists the ARNs of the assessment targets within this AWS account
Description
Lists the ARNs of the assessment targets within this AWS account. For more information about assessment targets, see Amazon Inspector Assessment Targets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_list_assessment_targets/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_list_assessment_targets(
filter = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
filter |
You can use this parameter to specify a subset of data to be included in the action's response. For a record to match a filter, all specified filter attributes must match. When multiple values are specified for a filter attribute, any of the values can match. |
nextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the ListAssessmentTargets action. Subsequent calls to the action fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
maxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items you want in the response. The default value is 10. The maximum value is 500. |
Lists the assessment templates that correspond to the assessment targets that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment targets
Description
Lists the assessment templates that correspond to the assessment targets that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment targets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_list_assessment_templates/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_list_assessment_templates(
assessmentTargetArns = NULL,
filter = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
assessmentTargetArns |
A list of ARNs that specifies the assessment targets whose assessment templates you want to list. |
filter |
You can use this parameter to specify a subset of data to be included in the action's response. For a record to match a filter, all specified filter attributes must match. When multiple values are specified for a filter attribute, any of the values can match. |
nextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the ListAssessmentTemplates action. Subsequent calls to the action fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
maxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items you want in the response. The default value is 10. The maximum value is 500. |
Lists all the event subscriptions for the assessment template that is specified by the ARN of the assessment template
Description
Lists all the event subscriptions for the assessment template that is specified by the ARN of the assessment template. For more information, see subscribe_to_event
and unsubscribe_from_event
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_list_event_subscriptions/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_list_event_subscriptions(
resourceArn = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceArn |
The ARN of the assessment template for which you want to list the existing event subscriptions. |
nextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the ListEventSubscriptions action. Subsequent calls to the action fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
maxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items you want in the response. The default value is 10. The maximum value is 500. |
List exclusions that are generated by the assessment run
Description
List exclusions that are generated by the assessment run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_list_exclusions/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_list_exclusions(
assessmentRunArn,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
assessmentRunArn |
[required] The ARN of the assessment run that generated the exclusions that you want to list. |
nextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the ListExclusionsRequest action. Subsequent calls to the action fill nextToken in the request with the value of nextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
maxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items you want in the response. The default value is 100. The maximum value is 500. |
Lists findings that are generated by the assessment runs that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment runs
Description
Lists findings that are generated by the assessment runs that are specified by the ARNs of the assessment runs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_list_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_list_findings(
assessmentRunArns = NULL,
filter = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
assessmentRunArns |
The ARNs of the assessment runs that generate the findings that you want to list. |
filter |
You can use this parameter to specify a subset of data to be included in the action's response. For a record to match a filter, all specified filter attributes must match. When multiple values are specified for a filter attribute, any of the values can match. |
nextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the ListFindings action. Subsequent calls to the action fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
maxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items you want in the response. The default value is 10. The maximum value is 500. |
Lists all available Amazon Inspector rules packages
Description
Lists all available Amazon Inspector rules packages.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_list_rules_packages/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_list_rules_packages(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the ListRulesPackages action. Subsequent calls to the action fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
maxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items you want in the response. The default value is 10. The maximum value is 500. |
Lists all tags associated with an assessment template
Description
Lists all tags associated with an assessment template.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN that specifies the assessment template whose tags you want to list. |
Previews the agents installed on the EC2 instances that are part of the specified assessment target
Description
Previews the agents installed on the EC2 instances that are part of the specified assessment target.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_preview_agents/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_preview_agents(previewAgentsArn, nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)
Arguments
previewAgentsArn |
[required] The ARN of the assessment target whose agents you want to preview. |
nextToken |
You can use this parameter when paginating results. Set the value of this parameter to null on your first call to the PreviewAgents action. Subsequent calls to the action fill nextToken in the request with the value of NextToken from the previous response to continue listing data. |
maxResults |
You can use this parameter to indicate the maximum number of items you want in the response. The default value is 10. The maximum value is 500. |
Registers the IAM role that grants Amazon Inspector access to AWS Services needed to perform security assessments
Description
Registers the IAM role that grants Amazon Inspector access to AWS Services needed to perform security assessments.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_register_cross_account_access_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_register_cross_account_access_role(roleArn)
Arguments
roleArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM role that grants Amazon Inspector access to AWS Services needed to perform security assessments. |
Removes entire attributes (key and value pairs) from the findings that are specified by the ARNs of the findings where an attribute with the specified key exists
Description
Removes entire attributes (key and value pairs) from the findings that are specified by the ARNs of the findings where an attribute with the specified key exists.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_remove_attributes_from_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_remove_attributes_from_findings(findingArns, attributeKeys)
Arguments
findingArns |
[required] The ARNs that specify the findings that you want to remove attributes from. |
attributeKeys |
[required] The array of attribute keys that you want to remove from specified findings. |
Sets tags (key and value pairs) to the assessment template that is specified by the ARN of the assessment template
Description
Sets tags (key and value pairs) to the assessment template that is specified by the ARN of the assessment template.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_set_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_set_tags_for_resource(resourceArn, tags = NULL)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the assessment template that you want to set tags to. |
tags |
A collection of key and value pairs that you want to set to the assessment template. |
Starts the assessment run specified by the ARN of the assessment template
Description
Starts the assessment run specified by the ARN of the assessment template. For this API to function properly, you must not exceed the limit of running up to 500 concurrent agents per AWS account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_start_assessment_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_start_assessment_run(assessmentTemplateArn, assessmentRunName = NULL)
Arguments
assessmentTemplateArn |
[required] The ARN of the assessment template of the assessment run that you want to start. |
assessmentRunName |
You can specify the name for the assessment run. The name must be unique for the assessment template whose ARN is used to start the assessment run. |
Stops the assessment run that is specified by the ARN of the assessment run
Description
Stops the assessment run that is specified by the ARN of the assessment run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_stop_assessment_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_stop_assessment_run(assessmentRunArn, stopAction = NULL)
Arguments
assessmentRunArn |
[required] The ARN of the assessment run that you want to stop. |
stopAction |
An input option that can be set to either START_EVALUATION or SKIP_EVALUATION. START_EVALUATION (the default value), stops the AWS agent from collecting data and begins the results evaluation and the findings generation process. SKIP_EVALUATION cancels the assessment run immediately, after which no findings are generated. |
Enables the process of sending Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) notifications about a specified event to a specified SNS topic
Description
Enables the process of sending Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) notifications about a specified event to a specified SNS topic.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_subscribe_to_event/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_subscribe_to_event(resourceArn, event, topicArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the assessment template that is used during the event for which you want to receive SNS notifications. |
event |
[required] The event for which you want to receive SNS notifications. |
topicArn |
[required] The ARN of the SNS topic to which the SNS notifications are sent. |
Disables the process of sending Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) notifications about a specified event to a specified SNS topic
Description
Disables the process of sending Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) notifications about a specified event to a specified SNS topic.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_unsubscribe_from_event/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_unsubscribe_from_event(resourceArn, event, topicArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the assessment template that is used during the event for which you want to stop receiving SNS notifications. |
event |
[required] The event for which you want to stop receiving SNS notifications. |
topicArn |
[required] The ARN of the SNS topic to which SNS notifications are sent. |
Updates the assessment target that is specified by the ARN of the assessment target
Description
Updates the assessment target that is specified by the ARN of the assessment target.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/inspector_update_assessment_target/ for full documentation.
Usage
inspector_update_assessment_target(
assessmentTargetArn,
assessmentTargetName,
resourceGroupArn = NULL
)
Arguments
assessmentTargetArn |
[required] The ARN of the assessment target that you want to update. |
assessmentTargetName |
[required] The name of the assessment target that you want to update. |
resourceGroupArn |
The ARN of the resource group that is used to specify the new resource group to associate with the assessment target. |
AWS Key Management Service
Description
Key Management Service
Key Management Service (KMS) is an encryption and key management web service. This guide describes the KMS operations that you can call programmatically. For general information about KMS, see the Key Management Service Developer Guide .
KMS has replaced the term customer master key (CMK) with KMS key and KMS key. The concept has not changed. To prevent breaking changes, KMS is keeping some variations of this term.
Amazon Web Services provides SDKs that consist of libraries and sample code for various programming languages and platforms (Java, Ruby, .Net, macOS, Android, etc.). The SDKs provide a convenient way to create programmatic access to KMS and other Amazon Web Services services. For example, the SDKs take care of tasks such as signing requests (see below), managing errors, and retrying requests automatically. For more information about the Amazon Web Services SDKs, including how to download and install them, see Tools for Amazon Web Services.
We recommend that you use the Amazon Web Services SDKs to make programmatic API calls to KMS.
If you need to use FIPS 140-2 validated cryptographic modules when communicating with Amazon Web Services, use the FIPS endpoint in your preferred Amazon Web Services Region. For more information about the available FIPS endpoints, see Service endpoints in the Key Management Service topic of the Amazon Web Services General Reference.
All KMS API calls must be signed and be transmitted using Transport Layer Security (TLS). KMS recommends you always use the latest supported TLS version. Clients must also support cipher suites with Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) such as Ephemeral Diffie-Hellman (DHE) or Elliptic Curve Ephemeral Diffie-Hellman (ECDHE). Most modern systems such as Java 7 and later support these modes.
Signing Requests
Requests must be signed using an access key ID and a secret access key. We strongly recommend that you do not use your Amazon Web Services account root access key ID and secret access key for everyday work. You can use the access key ID and secret access key for an IAM user or you can use the Security Token Service (STS) to generate temporary security credentials and use those to sign requests.
All KMS requests must be signed with Signature Version 4.
Logging API Requests
KMS supports CloudTrail, a service that logs Amazon Web Services API calls and related events for your Amazon Web Services account and delivers them to an Amazon S3 bucket that you specify. By using the information collected by CloudTrail, you can determine what requests were made to KMS, who made the request, when it was made, and so on. To learn more about CloudTrail, including how to turn it on and find your log files, see the CloudTrail User Guide.
Additional Resources
For more information about credentials and request signing, see the following:
-
Amazon Web Services Security Credentials - This topic provides general information about the types of credentials used to access Amazon Web Services.
-
Temporary Security Credentials - This section of the IAM User Guide describes how to create and use temporary security credentials.
-
Signature Version 4 Signing Process - This set of topics walks you through the process of signing a request using an access key ID and a secret access key.
Commonly Used API Operations
Of the API operations discussed in this guide, the following will prove the most useful for most applications. You will likely perform operations other than these, such as creating keys and assigning policies, by using the console.
Usage
kms(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- kms( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
cancel_key_deletion | Cancels the deletion of a KMS key |
connect_custom_key_store | Connects or reconnects a custom key store to its backing key store |
create_alias | Creates a friendly name for a KMS key |
create_custom_key_store | Creates a custom key store backed by a key store that you own and manage |
create_grant | Adds a grant to a KMS key |
create_key | Creates a unique customer managed KMS key in your Amazon Web Services account and Region |
decrypt | Decrypts ciphertext that was encrypted by a KMS key using any of the following operations: |
delete_alias | Deletes the specified alias |
delete_custom_key_store | Deletes a custom key store |
delete_imported_key_material | Deletes key material that was previously imported |
derive_shared_secret | Derives a shared secret using a key agreement algorithm |
describe_custom_key_stores | Gets information about custom key stores in the account and Region |
describe_key | Provides detailed information about a KMS key |
disable_key | Sets the state of a KMS key to disabled |
disable_key_rotation | Disables automatic rotation of the key material of the specified symmetric encryption KMS key |
disconnect_custom_key_store | Disconnects the custom key store from its backing key store |
enable_key | Sets the key state of a KMS key to enabled |
enable_key_rotation | Enables automatic rotation of the key material of the specified symmetric encryption KMS key |
encrypt | Encrypts plaintext of up to 4,096 bytes using a KMS key |
generate_data_key | Returns a unique symmetric data key for use outside of KMS |
generate_data_key_pair | Returns a unique asymmetric data key pair for use outside of KMS |
generate_data_key_pair_without_plaintext | Returns a unique asymmetric data key pair for use outside of KMS |
generate_data_key_without_plaintext | Returns a unique symmetric data key for use outside of KMS |
generate_mac | Generates a hash-based message authentication code (HMAC) for a message using an HMAC KMS key and a MAC algorithm that the key supports |
generate_random | Returns a random byte string that is cryptographically secure |
get_key_policy | Gets a key policy attached to the specified KMS key |
get_key_rotation_status | Provides detailed information about the rotation status for a KMS key, including whether automatic rotation of the key material is enabled for the specified KMS key, the rotation period, and the next scheduled rotation date |
get_parameters_for_import | Returns the public key and an import token you need to import or reimport key material for a KMS key |
get_public_key | Returns the public key of an asymmetric KMS key |
import_key_material | Imports or reimports key material into an existing KMS key that was created without key material |
list_aliases | Gets a list of aliases in the caller's Amazon Web Services account and region |
list_grants | Gets a list of all grants for the specified KMS key |
list_key_policies | Gets the names of the key policies that are attached to a KMS key |
list_key_rotations | Returns information about all completed key material rotations for the specified KMS key |
list_keys | Gets a list of all KMS keys in the caller's Amazon Web Services account and Region |
list_resource_tags | Returns all tags on the specified KMS key |
list_retirable_grants | Returns information about all grants in the Amazon Web Services account and Region that have the specified retiring principal |
put_key_policy | Attaches a key policy to the specified KMS key |
re_encrypt | Decrypts ciphertext and then reencrypts it entirely within KMS |
replicate_key | Replicates a multi-Region key into the specified Region |
retire_grant | Deletes a grant |
revoke_grant | Deletes the specified grant |
rotate_key_on_demand | Immediately initiates rotation of the key material of the specified symmetric encryption KMS key |
schedule_key_deletion | Schedules the deletion of a KMS key |
sign | Creates a digital signature for a message or message digest by using the private key in an asymmetric signing KMS key |
tag_resource | Adds or edits tags on a customer managed key |
untag_resource | Deletes tags from a customer managed key |
update_alias | Associates an existing KMS alias with a different KMS key |
update_custom_key_store | Changes the properties of a custom key store |
update_key_description | Updates the description of a KMS key |
update_primary_region | Changes the primary key of a multi-Region key |
verify | Verifies a digital signature that was generated by the Sign operation |
verify_mac | Verifies the hash-based message authentication code (HMAC) for a specified message, HMAC KMS key, and MAC algorithm |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- kms()
# The following example cancels deletion of the specified KMS key.
svc$cancel_key_deletion(
KeyId = "1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab"
)
## End(Not run)
Cancels the deletion of a KMS key
Description
Cancels the deletion of a KMS key. When this operation succeeds, the key state of the KMS key is Disabled
. To enable the KMS key, use enable_key
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_cancel_key_deletion/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_cancel_key_deletion(KeyId)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies the KMS key whose deletion is being canceled. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Connects or reconnects a custom key store to its backing key store
Description
Connects or reconnects a custom key store to its backing key store. For an CloudHSM key store, connect_custom_key_store
connects the key store to its associated CloudHSM cluster. For an external key store, connect_custom_key_store
connects the key store to the external key store proxy that communicates with your external key manager.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_connect_custom_key_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_connect_custom_key_store(CustomKeyStoreId)
Arguments
CustomKeyStoreId |
[required] Enter the key store ID of the custom key store that you want to connect.
To find the ID of a custom key store, use the
|
Creates a friendly name for a KMS key
Description
Creates a friendly name for a KMS key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_create_alias/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_create_alias(AliasName, TargetKeyId)
Arguments
AliasName |
[required] Specifies the alias name. This value must begin with Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. The |
TargetKeyId |
[required] Associates the alias with the specified customer managed key. The KMS key must be in the same Amazon Web Services Region. A valid key ID is required. If you supply a null or empty string value, this operation returns an error. For help finding the key ID and ARN, see Finding the Key ID and ARN in the Key Management Service Developer Guide . Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Creates a custom key store backed by a key store that you own and manage
Description
Creates a custom key store backed by a key store that you own and manage. When you use a KMS key in a custom key store for a cryptographic operation, the cryptographic operation is actually performed in your key store using your keys. KMS supports CloudHSM key stores backed by an CloudHSM cluster and external key stores backed by an external key store proxy and external key manager outside of Amazon Web Services.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_create_custom_key_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_create_custom_key_store(
CustomKeyStoreName,
CloudHsmClusterId = NULL,
TrustAnchorCertificate = NULL,
KeyStorePassword = NULL,
CustomKeyStoreType = NULL,
XksProxyUriEndpoint = NULL,
XksProxyUriPath = NULL,
XksProxyVpcEndpointServiceName = NULL,
XksProxyAuthenticationCredential = NULL,
XksProxyConnectivity = NULL
)
Arguments
CustomKeyStoreName |
[required] Specifies a friendly name for the custom key store. The name must be unique in your Amazon Web Services account and Region. This parameter is required for all custom key stores. Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. |
CloudHsmClusterId |
Identifies the CloudHSM cluster for an CloudHSM key store. This
parameter is required for custom key stores with Enter the cluster ID of any active CloudHSM cluster that is not already associated with a custom key store. To find the cluster ID, use the DescribeClusters operation. |
TrustAnchorCertificate |
Specifies the certificate for an CloudHSM key store. This parameter is
required for custom key stores with a Enter the content of the trust anchor certificate for the CloudHSM
cluster. This is the content of the |
KeyStorePassword |
Specifies the Enter the password of the The password must be a string of 7 to 32 characters. Its value is case sensitive. This parameter tells KMS the |
CustomKeyStoreType |
Specifies the type of custom key store. The default value is
For a custom key store backed by an CloudHSM cluster, omit the parameter
or enter |
XksProxyUriEndpoint |
Specifies the endpoint that KMS uses to send requests to the external
key store proxy (XKS proxy). This parameter is required for custom key
stores with a The protocol must be HTTPS. KMS communicates on port 443. Do not specify
the port in the For external key stores with For external key stores with The value of this parameter must begin with Uniqueness requirements:
|
XksProxyUriPath |
Specifies the base path to the proxy APIs for this external key store.
To find this value, see the documentation for your external key store
proxy. This parameter is required for all custom key stores with a
The value must start with Uniqueness requirements:
|
XksProxyVpcEndpointServiceName |
Specifies the name of the Amazon VPC endpoint service for interface
endpoints that is used to communicate with your external key store proxy
(XKS proxy). This parameter is required when the value of
The Amazon VPC endpoint service must fulfill all requirements for use with an external key store. Uniqueness requirements:
|
XksProxyAuthenticationCredential |
Specifies an authentication credential for the external key store proxy
(XKS proxy). This parameter is required for all custom key stores with a
The KMS uses this authentication credential to sign requests to the external key store proxy on your behalf. This credential is unrelated to Identity and Access Management (IAM) and Amazon Web Services credentials. This parameter doesn't set or change the authentication credentials on
the XKS proxy. It just tells KMS the credential that you established on
your external key store proxy. If you rotate your proxy authentication
credential, use the
|
XksProxyConnectivity |
Indicates how KMS communicates with the external key store proxy. This
parameter is required for custom key stores with a If the external key store proxy uses a public endpoint, specify
An Amazon VPC endpoint service keeps your communication with KMS in a private address space entirely within Amazon Web Services, but it requires more configuration, including establishing a Amazon VPC with multiple subnets, a VPC endpoint service, a network load balancer, and a verified private DNS name. A public endpoint is simpler to set up, but it might be slower and might not fulfill your security requirements. You might consider testing with a public endpoint, and then establishing a VPC endpoint service for production tasks. Note that this choice does not determine the location of the external key store proxy. Even if you choose a VPC endpoint service, the proxy can be hosted within the VPC or outside of Amazon Web Services such as in your corporate data center. |
Adds a grant to a KMS key
Description
Adds a grant to a KMS key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_create_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_create_grant(
KeyId,
GranteePrincipal,
RetiringPrincipal = NULL,
Operations,
Constraints = NULL,
GrantTokens = NULL,
Name = NULL,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies the KMS key for the grant. The grant gives principals permission to use this KMS key. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. To specify a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, you must use the key ARN. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
GranteePrincipal |
[required] The identity that gets the permissions specified in the grant. To specify the grantee principal, use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an Amazon Web Services principal. Valid principals include Amazon Web Services accounts, IAM users, IAM roles, federated users, and assumed role users. For help with the ARN syntax for a principal, see IAM ARNs in the Identity and Access Management User Guide . |
RetiringPrincipal |
The principal that has permission to use the
To specify the principal, use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an Amazon Web Services principal. Valid principals include Amazon Web Services accounts, IAM users, IAM roles, federated users, and assumed role users. For help with the ARN syntax for a principal, see IAM ARNs in the Identity and Access Management User Guide . The grant determines the retiring principal. Other principals might have
permission to retire the grant or revoke the grant. For details, see
|
Operations |
[required] A list of operations that the grant permits. This list must include only operations that are permitted in a grant.
Also, the operation must be supported on the KMS key. For example, you
cannot create a grant for a symmetric encryption KMS key that allows the
|
Constraints |
Specifies a grant constraint. Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. KMS supports the The encryption context grant constraints are supported only on grant operations
that include an You cannot use an encryption context grant constraint for cryptographic operations with asymmetric KMS keys or HMAC KMS keys. Operations with these keys don't support an encryption context. Each constraint value can include up to 8 encryption context pairs. The encryption context value in each constraint cannot exceed 384 characters. For information about grant constraints, see Using grant constraints in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. For more information about encryption context, see Encryption context in the Key Management Service Developer Guide . |
GrantTokens |
A list of grant tokens. Use a grant token when your permission to call this operation comes from a new grant that has not yet achieved eventual consistency. For more information, see Grant token and Using a grant token in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Name |
A friendly name for the grant. Use this value to prevent the unintended creation of duplicate grants when retrying this request. Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. When this value is absent, all When this value is present, you can retry a
|
DryRun |
Checks if your request will succeed. To learn more about how to use this parameter, see Testing your KMS API calls in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Creates a unique customer managed KMS key in your Amazon Web Services account and Region
Description
Creates a unique customer managed KMS key in your Amazon Web Services account and Region. You can use a KMS key in cryptographic operations, such as encryption and signing. Some Amazon Web Services services let you use KMS keys that you create and manage to protect your service resources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_create_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_create_key(
Policy = NULL,
Description = NULL,
KeyUsage = NULL,
CustomerMasterKeySpec = NULL,
KeySpec = NULL,
Origin = NULL,
CustomKeyStoreId = NULL,
BypassPolicyLockoutSafetyCheck = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
MultiRegion = NULL,
XksKeyId = NULL
)
Arguments
Policy |
The key policy to attach to the KMS key. If you provide a key policy, it must meet the following criteria:
If you do not provide a key policy, KMS attaches a default key policy to the KMS key. For more information, see Default key policy in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. The key policy size quota is 32 kilobytes (32768 bytes). For help writing and formatting a JSON policy document, see the IAM JSON Policy Reference in the Identity and Access Management User Guide . |
Description |
A description of the KMS key. Use a description that helps you decide whether the KMS key is appropriate for a task. The default value is an empty string (no description). Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. To set or change the description after the key is created, use
|
KeyUsage |
Determines the cryptographic operations
for which you can use the KMS key. The default value is
Select only one valid value.
|
CustomerMasterKeySpec |
Instead, use the The |
KeySpec |
Specifies the type of KMS key to create. The default value,
The Amazon Web Services services that are integrated with KMS use symmetric encryption KMS keys to protect your data. These services do not support asymmetric KMS keys or HMAC KMS keys. KMS supports the following key specs for KMS keys:
|
Origin |
The source of the key material for the KMS key. You cannot change the
origin after you create the KMS key. The default is To create a KMS key with no key material
(for imported key material), set this value to To create a KMS key in an CloudHSM key store
and create its key material in the associated CloudHSM cluster, set this
value to To create a KMS key in an external key store,
set this value to |
CustomKeyStoreId |
Creates the KMS key in the specified custom key store. The
This parameter is valid only for symmetric encryption KMS keys in a single Region. You cannot create any other type of KMS key in a custom key store. When you create a KMS key in an CloudHSM key store, KMS generates a
non-exportable 256-bit symmetric key in its associated CloudHSM cluster
and associates it with the KMS key. When you create a KMS key in an
external key store, you must use the |
BypassPolicyLockoutSafetyCheck |
Skips ("bypasses") the key policy lockout safety check. The default value is false. Setting this value to true increases the risk that the KMS key becomes unmanageable. Do not set this value to true indiscriminately. For more information, see Default key policy in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. Use this parameter only when you intend to prevent the principal that is
making the request from making a subsequent
|
Tags |
Assigns one or more tags to the KMS key. Use this parameter to tag the
KMS key when it is created. To tag an existing KMS key, use the
Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. Tagging or untagging a KMS key can allow or deny permission to the KMS key. For details, see ABAC for KMS in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. To use this parameter, you must have kms:TagResource permission in an IAM policy. Each tag consists of a tag key and a tag value. Both the tag key and the tag value are required, but the tag value can be an empty (null) string. You cannot have more than one tag on a KMS key with the same tag key. If you specify an existing tag key with a different tag value, KMS replaces the current tag value with the specified one. When you add tags to an Amazon Web Services resource, Amazon Web Services generates a cost allocation report with usage and costs aggregated by tags. Tags can also be used to control access to a KMS key. For details, see Tagging Keys. |
MultiRegion |
Creates a multi-Region primary key that you can replicate into other Amazon Web Services Regions. You cannot change this value after you create the KMS key. For a multi-Region key, set this parameter to This operation supports multi-Region keys, an KMS feature that lets you create multiple interoperable KMS keys in different Amazon Web Services Regions. Because these KMS keys have the same key ID, key material, and other metadata, you can use them interchangeably to encrypt data in one Amazon Web Services Region and decrypt it in a different Amazon Web Services Region without re-encrypting the data or making a cross-Region call. For more information about multi-Region keys, see Multi-Region keys in KMS in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. This value creates a primary key, not a replica. To create a replica
key, use the You can create a symmetric or asymmetric multi-Region key, and you can create a multi-Region key with imported key material. However, you cannot create a multi-Region key in a custom key store. |
XksKeyId |
Identifies the external key that serves as key material for the KMS key in an external key store. Specify the ID that the external key store proxy uses to refer to the external key. For help, see the documentation for your external key store proxy. This parameter is required for a KMS key with an The external key must be an existing 256-bit AES symmetric encryption
key hosted outside of Amazon Web Services in an external key manager
associated with the external key store specified by the
Each KMS key in an external key store is associated two backing keys. One is key material that KMS generates. The other is the external key specified by this parameter. When you use the KMS key in an external key store to encrypt data, the encryption operation is performed first by KMS using the KMS key material, and then by the external key manager using the specified external key, a process known as double encryption. For details, see Double encryption in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Decrypts ciphertext that was encrypted by a KMS key using any of the following operations:
Description
Decrypts ciphertext that was encrypted by a KMS key using any of the following operations:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_decrypt/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_decrypt(
CiphertextBlob,
EncryptionContext = NULL,
GrantTokens = NULL,
KeyId = NULL,
EncryptionAlgorithm = NULL,
Recipient = NULL,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
CiphertextBlob |
[required] Ciphertext to be decrypted. The blob includes metadata. |
EncryptionContext |
Specifies the encryption context to use when decrypting the data. An encryption context is valid only for cryptographic operations with a symmetric encryption KMS key. The standard asymmetric encryption algorithms and HMAC algorithms that KMS uses do not support an encryption context. An encryption context is a collection of non-secret key-value pairs that represent additional authenticated data. When you use an encryption context to encrypt data, you must specify the same (an exact case-sensitive match) encryption context to decrypt the data. An encryption context is supported only on operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys. On operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys, an encryption context is optional, but it is strongly recommended. For more information, see Encryption context in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
GrantTokens |
A list of grant tokens. Use a grant token when your permission to call this operation comes from a new grant that has not yet achieved eventual consistency. For more information, see Grant token and Using a grant token in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
KeyId |
Specifies the KMS key that KMS uses to decrypt the ciphertext. Enter a key ID of the KMS key that was used to encrypt the ciphertext.
If you identify a different KMS key, the This parameter is required only when the ciphertext was encrypted under an asymmetric KMS key. If you used a symmetric encryption KMS key, KMS can get the KMS key from metadata that it adds to the symmetric ciphertext blob. However, it is always recommended as a best practice. This practice ensures that you use the KMS key that you intend. To specify a KMS key, use its key ID, key ARN, alias name, or alias ARN.
When using an alias name, prefix it with For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
EncryptionAlgorithm |
Specifies the encryption algorithm that will be used to decrypt the
ciphertext. Specify the same algorithm that was used to encrypt the
data. If you specify a different algorithm, the This parameter is required only when the ciphertext was encrypted under
an asymmetric KMS key. The default value, |
Recipient |
A signed attestation document
from an Amazon Web Services Nitro enclave and the encryption algorithm
to use with the enclave's public key. The only valid encryption
algorithm is This parameter only supports attestation documents for Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves. To include this parameter, use the Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves SDK or any Amazon Web Services SDK. When you use this parameter, instead of returning the plaintext data,
KMS encrypts the plaintext data with the public key in the attestation
document, and returns the resulting ciphertext in the
For information about the interaction between KMS and Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves, see How Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves uses KMS in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
DryRun |
Checks if your request will succeed. To learn more about how to use this parameter, see Testing your KMS API calls in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Deletes the specified alias
Description
Deletes the specified alias.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_delete_alias/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_delete_alias(AliasName)
Arguments
AliasName |
[required] The alias to be deleted. The alias name must begin with |
Deletes a custom key store
Description
Deletes a custom key store. This operation does not affect any backing elements of the custom key store. It does not delete the CloudHSM cluster that is associated with an CloudHSM key store, or affect any users or keys in the cluster. For an external key store, it does not affect the external key store proxy, external key manager, or any external keys.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_delete_custom_key_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_delete_custom_key_store(CustomKeyStoreId)
Arguments
CustomKeyStoreId |
[required] Enter the ID of the custom key store you want to delete. To find the ID
of a custom key store, use the
|
Deletes key material that was previously imported
Description
Deletes key material that was previously imported. This operation makes the specified KMS key temporarily unusable. To restore the usability of the KMS key, reimport the same key material. For more information about importing key material into KMS, see Importing Key Material in the Key Management Service Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_delete_imported_key_material/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_delete_imported_key_material(KeyId)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies the KMS key from which you are deleting imported key
material. The Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Derives a shared secret using a key agreement algorithm
Description
Derives a shared secret using a key agreement algorithm.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_derive_shared_secret/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_derive_shared_secret(
KeyId,
KeyAgreementAlgorithm,
PublicKey,
GrantTokens = NULL,
DryRun = NULL,
Recipient = NULL
)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies an asymmetric NIST-recommended ECC or SM2 (China Regions
only) KMS key. KMS uses the private key in the specified key pair to
derive the shared secret. The key usage of the KMS key must be
To specify a KMS key, use its key ID, key ARN, alias name, or alias ARN.
When using an alias name, prefix it with For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
KeyAgreementAlgorithm |
[required] Specifies the key agreement algorithm used to derive the shared secret.
The only valid value is |
PublicKey |
[required] Specifies the public key in your peer's NIST-recommended elliptic curve (ECC) or SM2 (China Regions only) key pair. The public key must be a DER-encoded X.509 public key, also known as
If you use Amazon Web Services CLI version 1,
you must provide the DER-encoded X.509 public key in a file. Otherwise,
the Amazon Web Services CLI Base64-encodes the public key a second time,
resulting in a You can specify the public key as binary data in a file using fileb
( |
GrantTokens |
A list of grant tokens. Use a grant token when your permission to call this operation comes from a new grant that has not yet achieved eventual consistency. For more information, see Grant token and Using a grant token in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
DryRun |
Checks if your request will succeed. To learn more about how to use this parameter, see Testing your KMS API calls in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Recipient |
A signed attestation document
from an Amazon Web Services Nitro enclave and the encryption algorithm
to use with the enclave's public key. The only valid encryption
algorithm is This parameter only supports attestation documents for Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves. To call DeriveSharedSecret for an Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves, use the Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves SDK to generate the attestation document and then use the Recipient parameter from any Amazon Web Services SDK to provide the attestation document for the enclave. When you use this parameter, instead of returning a plaintext copy of
the shared secret, KMS encrypts the plaintext shared secret under the
public key in the attestation document, and returns the resulting
ciphertext in the For information about the interaction between KMS and Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves, see How Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves uses KMS in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Gets information about custom key stores in the account and Region
Description
Gets information about custom key stores in the account and Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_describe_custom_key_stores/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_describe_custom_key_stores(
CustomKeyStoreId = NULL,
CustomKeyStoreName = NULL,
Limit = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
CustomKeyStoreId |
Gets only information about the specified custom key store. Enter the key store ID. By default, this operation gets information about all custom key stores
in the account and Region. To limit the output to a particular custom
key store, provide either the |
CustomKeyStoreName |
Gets only information about the specified custom key store. Enter the friendly name of the custom key store. By default, this operation gets information about all custom key stores
in the account and Region. To limit the output to a particular custom
key store, provide either the |
Limit |
Use this parameter to specify the maximum number of items to return. When this value is present, KMS does not return more than the specified number of items, but it might return fewer. |
Marker |
Use this parameter in a subsequent request after you receive a response
with truncated results. Set it to the value of |
Provides detailed information about a KMS key
Description
Provides detailed information about a KMS key. You can run describe_key
on a customer managed key or an Amazon Web Services managed key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_describe_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_describe_key(KeyId, GrantTokens = NULL)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Describes the specified KMS key. If you specify a predefined Amazon Web Services alias (an Amazon Web
Services alias with no key ID), KMS associates the alias with an Amazon Web Services managed key
and returns its To specify a KMS key, use its key ID, key ARN, alias name, or alias ARN.
When using an alias name, prefix it with For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
GrantTokens |
A list of grant tokens. Use a grant token when your permission to call this operation comes from a new grant that has not yet achieved eventual consistency. For more information, see Grant token and Using a grant token in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Sets the state of a KMS key to disabled
Description
Sets the state of a KMS key to disabled. This change temporarily prevents use of the KMS key for cryptographic operations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_disable_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_disable_key(KeyId)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies the KMS key to disable. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Disables automatic rotation of the key material of the specified symmetric encryption KMS key
Description
Disables automatic rotation of the key material of the specified symmetric encryption KMS key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_disable_key_rotation/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_disable_key_rotation(KeyId)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies a symmetric encryption KMS key. You cannot enable or disable automatic rotation of asymmetric KMS keys, HMAC KMS keys, KMS keys with imported key material, or KMS keys in a custom key store. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Disconnects the custom key store from its backing key store
Description
Disconnects the custom key store from its backing key store. This operation disconnects an CloudHSM key store from its associated CloudHSM cluster or disconnects an external key store from the external key store proxy that communicates with your external key manager.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_disconnect_custom_key_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_disconnect_custom_key_store(CustomKeyStoreId)
Arguments
CustomKeyStoreId |
[required] Enter the ID of the custom key store you want to disconnect. To find the
ID of a custom key store, use the
|
Sets the key state of a KMS key to enabled
Description
Sets the key state of a KMS key to enabled. This allows you to use the KMS key for cryptographic operations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_enable_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_enable_key(KeyId)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies the KMS key to enable. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Enables automatic rotation of the key material of the specified symmetric encryption KMS key
Description
Enables automatic rotation of the key material of the specified symmetric encryption KMS key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_enable_key_rotation/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_enable_key_rotation(KeyId, RotationPeriodInDays = NULL)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies a symmetric encryption KMS key. You cannot enable automatic rotation of asymmetric KMS keys, HMAC KMS keys, KMS keys with imported key material, or KMS keys in a custom key store. To enable or disable automatic rotation of a set of related multi-Region keys, set the property on the primary key. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
RotationPeriodInDays |
Use this parameter to specify a custom period of time between each rotation date. If no value is specified, the default value is 365 days. The rotation period defines the number of days after you enable automatic key rotation that KMS will rotate your key material, and the number of days between each automatic rotation thereafter. You can use the
|
Encrypts plaintext of up to 4,096 bytes using a KMS key
Description
Encrypts plaintext of up to 4,096 bytes using a KMS key. You can use a symmetric or asymmetric KMS key with a KeyUsage
of ENCRYPT_DECRYPT
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_encrypt/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_encrypt(
KeyId,
Plaintext,
EncryptionContext = NULL,
GrantTokens = NULL,
EncryptionAlgorithm = NULL,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies the KMS key to use in the encryption operation. The KMS key
must have a To specify a KMS key, use its key ID, key ARN, alias name, or alias ARN.
When using an alias name, prefix it with For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Plaintext |
[required] Data to be encrypted. |
EncryptionContext |
Specifies the encryption context that will be used to encrypt the data. An encryption context is valid only for cryptographic operations with a symmetric encryption KMS key. The standard asymmetric encryption algorithms and HMAC algorithms that KMS uses do not support an encryption context. Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. An encryption context is a collection of non-secret key-value pairs that represent additional authenticated data. When you use an encryption context to encrypt data, you must specify the same (an exact case-sensitive match) encryption context to decrypt the data. An encryption context is supported only on operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys. On operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys, an encryption context is optional, but it is strongly recommended. For more information, see Encryption context in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
GrantTokens |
A list of grant tokens. Use a grant token when your permission to call this operation comes from a new grant that has not yet achieved eventual consistency. For more information, see Grant token and Using a grant token in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
EncryptionAlgorithm |
Specifies the encryption algorithm that KMS will use to encrypt the plaintext message. The algorithm must be compatible with the KMS key that you specify. This parameter is required only for asymmetric KMS keys. The default
value, The SM2PKE algorithm is only available in China Regions. |
DryRun |
Checks if your request will succeed. To learn more about how to use this parameter, see Testing your KMS API calls in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Returns a unique symmetric data key for use outside of KMS
Description
Returns a unique symmetric data key for use outside of KMS. This operation returns a plaintext copy of the data key and a copy that is encrypted under a symmetric encryption KMS key that you specify. The bytes in the plaintext key are random; they are not related to the caller or the KMS key. You can use the plaintext key to encrypt your data outside of KMS and store the encrypted data key with the encrypted data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_generate_data_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_generate_data_key(
KeyId,
EncryptionContext = NULL,
NumberOfBytes = NULL,
KeySpec = NULL,
GrantTokens = NULL,
Recipient = NULL,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Specifies the symmetric encryption KMS key that encrypts the data key.
You cannot specify an asymmetric KMS key or a KMS key in a custom key
store. To get the type and origin of your KMS key, use the
To specify a KMS key, use its key ID, key ARN, alias name, or alias ARN.
When using an alias name, prefix it with For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
EncryptionContext |
Specifies the encryption context that will be used when encrypting the data key. Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. An encryption context is a collection of non-secret key-value pairs that represent additional authenticated data. When you use an encryption context to encrypt data, you must specify the same (an exact case-sensitive match) encryption context to decrypt the data. An encryption context is supported only on operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys. On operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys, an encryption context is optional, but it is strongly recommended. For more information, see Encryption context in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
NumberOfBytes |
Specifies the length of the data key in bytes. For example, use the
value 64 to generate a 512-bit data key (64 bytes is 512 bits). For
128-bit (16-byte) and 256-bit (32-byte) data keys, use the You must specify either the |
KeySpec |
Specifies the length of the data key. Use You must specify either the |
GrantTokens |
A list of grant tokens. Use a grant token when your permission to call this operation comes from a new grant that has not yet achieved eventual consistency. For more information, see Grant token and Using a grant token in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Recipient |
A signed attestation document
from an Amazon Web Services Nitro enclave and the encryption algorithm
to use with the enclave's public key. The only valid encryption
algorithm is This parameter only supports attestation documents for Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves. To include this parameter, use the Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves SDK or any Amazon Web Services SDK. When you use this parameter, instead of returning the plaintext data
key, KMS encrypts the plaintext data key under the public key in the
attestation document, and returns the resulting ciphertext in the
For information about the interaction between KMS and Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves, see How Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves uses KMS in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
DryRun |
Checks if your request will succeed. To learn more about how to use this parameter, see Testing your KMS API calls in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Returns a unique asymmetric data key pair for use outside of KMS
Description
Returns a unique asymmetric data key pair for use outside of KMS. This operation returns a plaintext public key, a plaintext private key, and a copy of the private key that is encrypted under the symmetric encryption KMS key you specify. You can use the data key pair to perform asymmetric cryptography and implement digital signatures outside of KMS. The bytes in the keys are random; they are not related to the caller or to the KMS key that is used to encrypt the private key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_generate_data_key_pair/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_generate_data_key_pair(
EncryptionContext = NULL,
KeyId,
KeyPairSpec,
GrantTokens = NULL,
Recipient = NULL,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
EncryptionContext |
Specifies the encryption context that will be used when encrypting the private key in the data key pair. Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. An encryption context is a collection of non-secret key-value pairs that represent additional authenticated data. When you use an encryption context to encrypt data, you must specify the same (an exact case-sensitive match) encryption context to decrypt the data. An encryption context is supported only on operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys. On operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys, an encryption context is optional, but it is strongly recommended. For more information, see Encryption context in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
KeyId |
[required] Specifies the symmetric encryption KMS key that encrypts the private key
in the data key pair. You cannot specify an asymmetric KMS key or a KMS
key in a custom key store. To get the type and origin of your KMS key,
use the To specify a KMS key, use its key ID, key ARN, alias name, or alias ARN.
When using an alias name, prefix it with For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
KeyPairSpec |
[required] Determines the type of data key pair that is generated. The KMS rule that restricts the use of asymmetric RSA and SM2 KMS keys to encrypt and decrypt or to sign and verify (but not both), and the rule that permits you to use ECC KMS keys only to sign and verify, are not effective on data key pairs, which are used outside of KMS. The SM2 key spec is only available in China Regions. |
GrantTokens |
A list of grant tokens. Use a grant token when your permission to call this operation comes from a new grant that has not yet achieved eventual consistency. For more information, see Grant token and Using a grant token in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Recipient |
A signed attestation document
from an Amazon Web Services Nitro enclave and the encryption algorithm
to use with the enclave's public key. The only valid encryption
algorithm is This parameter only supports attestation documents for Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves. To call DeriveSharedSecret for an Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves, use the Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves SDK to generate the attestation document and then use the Recipient parameter from any Amazon Web Services SDK to provide the attestation document for the enclave. When you use this parameter, instead of returning a plaintext copy of
the private data key, KMS encrypts the plaintext private data key under
the public key in the attestation document, and returns the resulting
ciphertext in the For information about the interaction between KMS and Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves, see How Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves uses KMS in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
DryRun |
Checks if your request will succeed. To learn more about how to use this parameter, see Testing your KMS API calls in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Returns a unique asymmetric data key pair for use outside of KMS
Description
Returns a unique asymmetric data key pair for use outside of KMS. This operation returns a plaintext public key and a copy of the private key that is encrypted under the symmetric encryption KMS key you specify. Unlike generate_data_key_pair
, this operation does not return a plaintext private key. The bytes in the keys are random; they are not related to the caller or to the KMS key that is used to encrypt the private key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_generate_data_key_pair_without_plaintext/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_generate_data_key_pair_without_plaintext(
EncryptionContext = NULL,
KeyId,
KeyPairSpec,
GrantTokens = NULL,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
EncryptionContext |
Specifies the encryption context that will be used when encrypting the private key in the data key pair. Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. An encryption context is a collection of non-secret key-value pairs that represent additional authenticated data. When you use an encryption context to encrypt data, you must specify the same (an exact case-sensitive match) encryption context to decrypt the data. An encryption context is supported only on operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys. On operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys, an encryption context is optional, but it is strongly recommended. For more information, see Encryption context in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
KeyId |
[required] Specifies the symmetric encryption KMS key that encrypts the private key
in the data key pair. You cannot specify an asymmetric KMS key or a KMS
key in a custom key store. To get the type and origin of your KMS key,
use the To specify a KMS key, use its key ID, key ARN, alias name, or alias ARN.
When using an alias name, prefix it with For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
KeyPairSpec |
[required] Determines the type of data key pair that is generated. The KMS rule that restricts the use of asymmetric RSA and SM2 KMS keys to encrypt and decrypt or to sign and verify (but not both), and the rule that permits you to use ECC KMS keys only to sign and verify, are not effective on data key pairs, which are used outside of KMS. The SM2 key spec is only available in China Regions. |
GrantTokens |
A list of grant tokens. Use a grant token when your permission to call this operation comes from a new grant that has not yet achieved eventual consistency. For more information, see Grant token and Using a grant token in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
DryRun |
Checks if your request will succeed. To learn more about how to use this parameter, see Testing your KMS API calls in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Returns a unique symmetric data key for use outside of KMS
Description
Returns a unique symmetric data key for use outside of KMS. This operation returns a data key that is encrypted under a symmetric encryption KMS key that you specify. The bytes in the key are random; they are not related to the caller or to the KMS key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_generate_data_key_without_plaintext/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_generate_data_key_without_plaintext(
KeyId,
EncryptionContext = NULL,
KeySpec = NULL,
NumberOfBytes = NULL,
GrantTokens = NULL,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Specifies the symmetric encryption KMS key that encrypts the data key.
You cannot specify an asymmetric KMS key or a KMS key in a custom key
store. To get the type and origin of your KMS key, use the
To specify a KMS key, use its key ID, key ARN, alias name, or alias ARN.
When using an alias name, prefix it with For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
EncryptionContext |
Specifies the encryption context that will be used when encrypting the data key. Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. An encryption context is a collection of non-secret key-value pairs that represent additional authenticated data. When you use an encryption context to encrypt data, you must specify the same (an exact case-sensitive match) encryption context to decrypt the data. An encryption context is supported only on operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys. On operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys, an encryption context is optional, but it is strongly recommended. For more information, see Encryption context in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
KeySpec |
The length of the data key. Use |
NumberOfBytes |
The length of the data key in bytes. For example, use the value 64 to
generate a 512-bit data key (64 bytes is 512 bits). For common key
lengths (128-bit and 256-bit symmetric keys), we recommend that you use
the |
GrantTokens |
A list of grant tokens. Use a grant token when your permission to call this operation comes from a new grant that has not yet achieved eventual consistency. For more information, see Grant token and Using a grant token in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
DryRun |
Checks if your request will succeed. To learn more about how to use this parameter, see Testing your KMS API calls in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Generates a hash-based message authentication code (HMAC) for a message using an HMAC KMS key and a MAC algorithm that the key supports
Description
Generates a hash-based message authentication code (HMAC) for a message using an HMAC KMS key and a MAC algorithm that the key supports. HMAC KMS keys and the HMAC algorithms that KMS uses conform to industry standards defined in RFC 2104.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_generate_mac/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_generate_mac(
Message,
KeyId,
MacAlgorithm,
GrantTokens = NULL,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
Message |
[required] The message to be hashed. Specify a message of up to 4,096 bytes.
|
KeyId |
[required] The HMAC KMS key to use in the operation. The MAC algorithm computes the HMAC for the message and the key as described in RFC 2104. To identify an HMAC KMS key, use the |
MacAlgorithm |
[required] The MAC algorithm used in the operation. The algorithm must be compatible with the HMAC KMS key that you specify.
To find the MAC algorithms that your HMAC KMS key supports, use the
|
GrantTokens |
A list of grant tokens. Use a grant token when your permission to call this operation comes from a new grant that has not yet achieved eventual consistency. For more information, see Grant token and Using a grant token in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
DryRun |
Checks if your request will succeed. To learn more about how to use this parameter, see Testing your KMS API calls in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Returns a random byte string that is cryptographically secure
Description
Returns a random byte string that is cryptographically secure.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_generate_random/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_generate_random(
NumberOfBytes = NULL,
CustomKeyStoreId = NULL,
Recipient = NULL
)
Arguments
NumberOfBytes |
The length of the random byte string. This parameter is required. |
CustomKeyStoreId |
Generates the random byte string in the CloudHSM cluster that is
associated with the specified CloudHSM key store. To find the ID of a
custom key store, use the
External key store IDs are not valid for this parameter. If you specify
the ID of an external key store,
|
Recipient |
A signed attestation document
from an Amazon Web Services Nitro enclave and the encryption algorithm
to use with the enclave's public key. The only valid encryption
algorithm is This parameter only supports attestation documents for Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves. To include this parameter, use the Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves SDK or any Amazon Web Services SDK. When you use this parameter, instead of returning plaintext bytes, KMS
encrypts the plaintext bytes under the public key in the attestation
document, and returns the resulting ciphertext in the
For information about the interaction between KMS and Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves, see How Amazon Web Services Nitro Enclaves uses KMS in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Gets a key policy attached to the specified KMS key
Description
Gets a key policy attached to the specified KMS key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_get_key_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_get_key_policy(KeyId, PolicyName = NULL)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Gets the key policy for the specified KMS key. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
PolicyName |
Specifies the name of the key policy. If no policy name is specified,
the default value is |
Provides detailed information about the rotation status for a KMS key, including whether automatic rotation of the key material is enabled for the specified KMS key, the rotation period, and the next scheduled rotation date
Description
Provides detailed information about the rotation status for a KMS key, including whether automatic rotation of the key material is enabled for the specified KMS key, the rotation period, and the next scheduled rotation date.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_get_key_rotation_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_get_key_rotation_status(KeyId)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Gets the rotation status for the specified KMS key. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. To specify a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, you must use the key ARN. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Returns the public key and an import token you need to import or reimport key material for a KMS key
Description
Returns the public key and an import token you need to import or reimport key material for a KMS key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_get_parameters_for_import/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_get_parameters_for_import(KeyId, WrappingAlgorithm, WrappingKeySpec)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] The identifier of the KMS key that will be associated with the imported
key material. The All KMS key types are supported, including multi-Region keys. However, you cannot import key material into a KMS key in a custom key store. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
WrappingAlgorithm |
[required] The algorithm you will use with the RSA public key ( For RSA_AES wrapping algorithms, you encrypt your key material with an AES key that you generate, then encrypt your AES key with the RSA public key from KMS. For RSAES wrapping algorithms, you encrypt your key material directly with the RSA public key from KMS. The wrapping algorithms that you can use depend on the type of key material that you are importing. To import an RSA private key, you must use an RSA_AES wrapping algorithm.
|
WrappingKeySpec |
[required] The type of RSA public key to return in the response. You will use this wrapping key with the specified wrapping algorithm to protect your key material during import. Use the longest RSA wrapping key that is practical. You cannot use an RSA_2048 public key to directly wrap an ECC_NIST_P521 private key. Instead, use an RSA_AES wrapping algorithm or choose a longer RSA public key. |
Returns the public key of an asymmetric KMS key
Description
Returns the public key of an asymmetric KMS key. Unlike the private key of a asymmetric KMS key, which never leaves KMS unencrypted, callers with kms:GetPublicKey
permission can download the public key of an asymmetric KMS key. You can share the public key to allow others to encrypt messages and verify signatures outside of KMS. For information about asymmetric KMS keys, see Asymmetric KMS keys in the Key Management Service Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_get_public_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_get_public_key(KeyId, GrantTokens = NULL)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies the asymmetric KMS key that includes the public key. To specify a KMS key, use its key ID, key ARN, alias name, or alias ARN.
When using an alias name, prefix it with For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
GrantTokens |
A list of grant tokens. Use a grant token when your permission to call this operation comes from a new grant that has not yet achieved eventual consistency. For more information, see Grant token and Using a grant token in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Imports or reimports key material into an existing KMS key that was created without key material
Description
Imports or reimports key material into an existing KMS key that was created without key material. import_key_material
also sets the expiration model and expiration date of the imported key material.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_import_key_material/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_import_key_material(
KeyId,
ImportToken,
EncryptedKeyMaterial,
ValidTo = NULL,
ExpirationModel = NULL
)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] The identifier of the KMS key that will be associated with the imported
key material. This must be the same KMS key specified in the The KMS key can be a symmetric encryption KMS key, HMAC KMS key, asymmetric encryption KMS key, or asymmetric signing KMS key, including a multi-Region key of any supported type. You cannot perform this operation on a KMS key in a custom key store, or on a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
ImportToken |
[required] The import token that you received in the response to a previous
|
EncryptedKeyMaterial |
[required] The encrypted key material to import. The key material must be encrypted
under the public wrapping key that
|
ValidTo |
The date and time when the imported key material expires. This parameter
is required when the value of the The value of this parameter must be a future date and time. The maximum value is 365 days from the request date. When the key material expires, KMS deletes the key material from the KMS key. Without its key material, the KMS key is unusable. To use the KMS key in cryptographic operations, you must reimport the same key material. You cannot change the |
ExpirationModel |
Specifies whether the key material expires. The default is
When the value of You cannot change the |
Gets a list of aliases in the caller's Amazon Web Services account and region
Description
Gets a list of aliases in the caller's Amazon Web Services account and region. For more information about aliases, see create_alias
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_list_aliases/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_list_aliases(KeyId = NULL, Limit = NULL, Marker = NULL)
Arguments
KeyId |
Lists only aliases that are associated with the specified KMS key. Enter a KMS key in your Amazon Web Services account. This parameter is optional. If you omit it,
Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Limit |
Use this parameter to specify the maximum number of items to return. When this value is present, KMS does not return more than the specified number of items, but it might return fewer. This value is optional. If you include a value, it must be between 1 and 100, inclusive. If you do not include a value, it defaults to 50. |
Marker |
Use this parameter in a subsequent request after you receive a response
with truncated results. Set it to the value of |
Gets a list of all grants for the specified KMS key
Description
Gets a list of all grants for the specified KMS key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_list_grants/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_list_grants(
Limit = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
KeyId,
GrantId = NULL,
GranteePrincipal = NULL
)
Arguments
Limit |
Use this parameter to specify the maximum number of items to return. When this value is present, KMS does not return more than the specified number of items, but it might return fewer. This value is optional. If you include a value, it must be between 1 and 100, inclusive. If you do not include a value, it defaults to 50. |
Marker |
Use this parameter in a subsequent request after you receive a response
with truncated results. Set it to the value of |
KeyId |
[required] Returns only grants for the specified KMS key. This parameter is required. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. To specify a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, you must use the key ARN. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
GrantId |
Returns only the grant with the specified grant ID. The grant ID uniquely identifies the grant. |
GranteePrincipal |
Returns only grants where the specified principal is the grantee principal for the grant. |
Gets the names of the key policies that are attached to a KMS key
Description
Gets the names of the key policies that are attached to a KMS key. This operation is designed to get policy names that you can use in a get_key_policy
operation. However, the only valid policy name is default
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_list_key_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_list_key_policies(KeyId, Limit = NULL, Marker = NULL)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Gets the names of key policies for the specified KMS key. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Limit |
Use this parameter to specify the maximum number of items to return. When this value is present, KMS does not return more than the specified number of items, but it might return fewer. This value is optional. If you include a value, it must be between 1 and 1000, inclusive. If you do not include a value, it defaults to 100. Only one policy can be attached to a key. |
Marker |
Use this parameter in a subsequent request after you receive a response
with truncated results. Set it to the value of |
Returns information about all completed key material rotations for the specified KMS key
Description
Returns information about all completed key material rotations for the specified KMS key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_list_key_rotations/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_list_key_rotations(KeyId, Limit = NULL, Marker = NULL)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Gets the key rotations for the specified KMS key. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Limit |
Use this parameter to specify the maximum number of items to return. When this value is present, KMS does not return more than the specified number of items, but it might return fewer. This value is optional. If you include a value, it must be between 1 and 1000, inclusive. If you do not include a value, it defaults to 100. |
Marker |
Use this parameter in a subsequent request after you receive a response
with truncated results. Set it to the value of |
Gets a list of all KMS keys in the caller's Amazon Web Services account and Region
Description
Gets a list of all KMS keys in the caller's Amazon Web Services account and Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_list_keys/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_list_keys(Limit = NULL, Marker = NULL)
Arguments
Limit |
Use this parameter to specify the maximum number of items to return. When this value is present, KMS does not return more than the specified number of items, but it might return fewer. This value is optional. If you include a value, it must be between 1 and 1000, inclusive. If you do not include a value, it defaults to 100. |
Marker |
Use this parameter in a subsequent request after you receive a response
with truncated results. Set it to the value of |
Returns all tags on the specified KMS key
Description
Returns all tags on the specified KMS key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_list_resource_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_list_resource_tags(KeyId, Limit = NULL, Marker = NULL)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Gets tags on the specified KMS key. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Limit |
Use this parameter to specify the maximum number of items to return. When this value is present, KMS does not return more than the specified number of items, but it might return fewer. This value is optional. If you include a value, it must be between 1 and 50, inclusive. If you do not include a value, it defaults to 50. |
Marker |
Use this parameter in a subsequent request after you receive a response
with truncated results. Set it to the value of Do not attempt to construct this value. Use only the value of
|
Returns information about all grants in the Amazon Web Services account and Region that have the specified retiring principal
Description
Returns information about all grants in the Amazon Web Services account and Region that have the specified retiring principal.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_list_retirable_grants/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_list_retirable_grants(Limit = NULL, Marker = NULL, RetiringPrincipal)
Arguments
Limit |
Use this parameter to specify the maximum number of items to return. When this value is present, KMS does not return more than the specified number of items, but it might return fewer. This value is optional. If you include a value, it must be between 1 and 100, inclusive. If you do not include a value, it defaults to 50. |
Marker |
Use this parameter in a subsequent request after you receive a response
with truncated results. Set it to the value of |
RetiringPrincipal |
[required] The retiring principal for which to list grants. Enter a principal in your Amazon Web Services account. To specify the retiring principal, use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an Amazon Web Services principal. Valid principals include Amazon Web Services accounts, IAM users, IAM roles, federated users, and assumed role users. For help with the ARN syntax for a principal, see IAM ARNs in the Identity and Access Management User Guide . |
Attaches a key policy to the specified KMS key
Description
Attaches a key policy to the specified KMS key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_put_key_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_put_key_policy(
KeyId,
PolicyName = NULL,
Policy,
BypassPolicyLockoutSafetyCheck = NULL
)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Sets the key policy on the specified KMS key. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
PolicyName |
The name of the key policy. If no policy name is specified, the default
value is |
Policy |
[required] The key policy to attach to the KMS key. The key policy must meet the following criteria:
A key policy document can include only the following characters:
For information about key policies, see Key policies in KMS in the Key Management Service Developer Guide.For help writing and formatting a JSON policy document, see the IAM JSON Policy Reference in the Identity and Access Management User Guide . |
BypassPolicyLockoutSafetyCheck |
Skips ("bypasses") the key policy lockout safety check. The default value is false. Setting this value to true increases the risk that the KMS key becomes unmanageable. Do not set this value to true indiscriminately. For more information, see Default key policy in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. Use this parameter only when you intend to prevent the principal that is
making the request from making a subsequent
|
Decrypts ciphertext and then reencrypts it entirely within KMS
Description
Decrypts ciphertext and then reencrypts it entirely within KMS. You can use this operation to change the KMS key under which data is encrypted, such as when you manually rotate a KMS key or change the KMS key that protects a ciphertext. You can also use it to reencrypt ciphertext under the same KMS key, such as to change the encryption context of a ciphertext.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_re_encrypt/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_re_encrypt(
CiphertextBlob,
SourceEncryptionContext = NULL,
SourceKeyId = NULL,
DestinationKeyId,
DestinationEncryptionContext = NULL,
SourceEncryptionAlgorithm = NULL,
DestinationEncryptionAlgorithm = NULL,
GrantTokens = NULL,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
CiphertextBlob |
[required] Ciphertext of the data to reencrypt. |
SourceEncryptionContext |
Specifies the encryption context to use to decrypt the ciphertext. Enter the same encryption context that was used to encrypt the ciphertext. An encryption context is a collection of non-secret key-value pairs that represent additional authenticated data. When you use an encryption context to encrypt data, you must specify the same (an exact case-sensitive match) encryption context to decrypt the data. An encryption context is supported only on operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys. On operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys, an encryption context is optional, but it is strongly recommended. For more information, see Encryption context in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
SourceKeyId |
Specifies the KMS key that KMS will use to decrypt the ciphertext before it is re-encrypted. Enter a key ID of the KMS key that was used to encrypt the ciphertext.
If you identify a different KMS key, the This parameter is required only when the ciphertext was encrypted under an asymmetric KMS key. If you used a symmetric encryption KMS key, KMS can get the KMS key from metadata that it adds to the symmetric ciphertext blob. However, it is always recommended as a best practice. This practice ensures that you use the KMS key that you intend. To specify a KMS key, use its key ID, key ARN, alias name, or alias ARN.
When using an alias name, prefix it with For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
DestinationKeyId |
[required] A unique identifier for the KMS key that is used to reencrypt the data.
Specify a symmetric encryption KMS key or an asymmetric KMS key with a
To specify a KMS key, use its key ID, key ARN, alias name, or alias ARN.
When using an alias name, prefix it with For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
DestinationEncryptionContext |
Specifies that encryption context to use when the reencrypting the data. Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. A destination encryption context is valid only when the destination KMS key is a symmetric encryption KMS key. The standard ciphertext format for asymmetric KMS keys does not include fields for metadata. An encryption context is a collection of non-secret key-value pairs that represent additional authenticated data. When you use an encryption context to encrypt data, you must specify the same (an exact case-sensitive match) encryption context to decrypt the data. An encryption context is supported only on operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys. On operations with symmetric encryption KMS keys, an encryption context is optional, but it is strongly recommended. For more information, see Encryption context in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
SourceEncryptionAlgorithm |
Specifies the encryption algorithm that KMS will use to decrypt the
ciphertext before it is reencrypted. The default value,
Specify the same algorithm that was used to encrypt the ciphertext. If you specify a different algorithm, the decrypt attempt fails. This parameter is required only when the ciphertext was encrypted under an asymmetric KMS key. |
DestinationEncryptionAlgorithm |
Specifies the encryption algorithm that KMS will use to reecrypt the
data after it has decrypted it. The default value, This parameter is required only when the destination KMS key is an asymmetric KMS key. |
GrantTokens |
A list of grant tokens. Use a grant token when your permission to call this operation comes from a new grant that has not yet achieved eventual consistency. For more information, see Grant token and Using a grant token in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
DryRun |
Checks if your request will succeed. To learn more about how to use this parameter, see Testing your KMS API calls in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Replicates a multi-Region key into the specified Region
Description
Replicates a multi-Region key into the specified Region. This operation creates a multi-Region replica key based on a multi-Region primary key in a different Region of the same Amazon Web Services partition. You can create multiple replicas of a primary key, but each must be in a different Region. To create a multi-Region primary key, use the create_key
operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_replicate_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_replicate_key(
KeyId,
ReplicaRegion,
Policy = NULL,
BypassPolicyLockoutSafetyCheck = NULL,
Description = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies the multi-Region primary key that is being replicated. To
determine whether a KMS key is a multi-Region primary key, use the
Specify the key ID or key ARN of a multi-Region primary key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
ReplicaRegion |
[required] The Region ID of the Amazon Web Services Region for this replica key. Enter the Region ID, such as HMAC KMS keys are not supported in all Amazon Web Services Regions. If
you try to replicate an HMAC KMS key in an Amazon Web Services Region in
which HMAC keys are not supported, the
The replica must be in a different Amazon Web Services Region than its primary key and other replicas of that primary key, but in the same Amazon Web Services partition. KMS must be available in the replica Region. If the Region is not enabled by default, the Amazon Web Services account must be enabled in the Region. For information about Amazon Web Services partitions, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. For information about enabling and disabling Regions, see Enabling a Region and Disabling a Region in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Policy |
The key policy to attach to the KMS key. This parameter is optional. If you do not provide a key policy, KMS attaches the default key policy to the KMS key. The key policy is not a shared property of multi-Region keys. You can specify the same key policy or a different key policy for each key in a set of related multi-Region keys. KMS does not synchronize this property. If you provide a key policy, it must meet the following criteria:
A key policy document can include only the following characters:
For information about key policies, see Key policies in KMS in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. For help writing and formatting a JSON policy document, see the IAM JSON Policy Reference in the Identity and Access Management User Guide . |
BypassPolicyLockoutSafetyCheck |
Skips ("bypasses") the key policy lockout safety check. The default value is false. Setting this value to true increases the risk that the KMS key becomes unmanageable. Do not set this value to true indiscriminately. For more information, see Default key policy in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. Use this parameter only when you intend to prevent the principal that is
making the request from making a subsequent
|
Description |
A description of the KMS key. The default value is an empty string (no description). Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. The description is not a shared property of multi-Region keys. You can specify the same description or a different description for each key in a set of related multi-Region keys. KMS does not synchronize this property. |
Tags |
Assigns one or more tags to the replica key. Use this parameter to tag
the KMS key when it is created. To tag an existing KMS key, use the
Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. Tagging or untagging a KMS key can allow or deny permission to the KMS key. For details, see ABAC for KMS in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. To use this parameter, you must have kms:TagResource permission in an IAM policy. Tags are not a shared property of multi-Region keys. You can specify the same tags or different tags for each key in a set of related multi-Region keys. KMS does not synchronize this property. Each tag consists of a tag key and a tag value. Both the tag key and the tag value are required, but the tag value can be an empty (null) string. You cannot have more than one tag on a KMS key with the same tag key. If you specify an existing tag key with a different tag value, KMS replaces the current tag value with the specified one. When you add tags to an Amazon Web Services resource, Amazon Web Services generates a cost allocation report with usage and costs aggregated by tags. Tags can also be used to control access to a KMS key. For details, see Tagging Keys. |
Deletes a grant
Description
Deletes a grant. Typically, you retire a grant when you no longer need its permissions. To identify the grant to retire, use a grant token, or both the grant ID and a key identifier (key ID or key ARN) of the KMS key. The create_grant
operation returns both values.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_retire_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_retire_grant(
GrantToken = NULL,
KeyId = NULL,
GrantId = NULL,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
GrantToken |
Identifies the grant to be retired. You can use a grant token to identify a new grant even before it has achieved eventual consistency. Only the |
KeyId |
The key ARN KMS key associated with the grant. To find the key ARN, use
the For example:
|
GrantId |
Identifies the grant to retire. To get the grant ID, use
|
DryRun |
Checks if your request will succeed. To learn more about how to use this parameter, see Testing your KMS API calls in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Deletes the specified grant
Description
Deletes the specified grant. You revoke a grant to terminate the permissions that the grant allows. For more information, see Retiring and revoking grants in the Key Management Service Developer Guide .
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_revoke_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_revoke_grant(KeyId, GrantId, DryRun = NULL)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] A unique identifier for the KMS key associated with the grant. To get
the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. To specify a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, you must use the key ARN. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
GrantId |
[required] Identifies the grant to revoke. To get the grant ID, use
|
DryRun |
Checks if your request will succeed. To learn more about how to use this parameter, see Testing your KMS API calls in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Immediately initiates rotation of the key material of the specified symmetric encryption KMS key
Description
Immediately initiates rotation of the key material of the specified symmetric encryption KMS key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_rotate_key_on_demand/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_rotate_key_on_demand(KeyId)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies a symmetric encryption KMS key. You cannot perform on-demand rotation of asymmetric KMS keys, HMAC KMS keys, KMS keys with imported key material, or KMS keys in a custom key store. To perform on-demand rotation of a set of related multi-Region keys, invoke the on-demand rotation on the primary key. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Schedules the deletion of a KMS key
Description
Schedules the deletion of a KMS key. By default, KMS applies a waiting period of 30 days, but you can specify a waiting period of 7-30 days. When this operation is successful, the key state of the KMS key changes to PendingDeletion
and the key can't be used in any cryptographic operations. It remains in this state for the duration of the waiting period. Before the waiting period ends, you can use cancel_key_deletion
to cancel the deletion of the KMS key. After the waiting period ends, KMS deletes the KMS key, its key material, and all KMS data associated with it, including all aliases that refer to it.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_schedule_key_deletion/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_schedule_key_deletion(KeyId, PendingWindowInDays = NULL)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] The unique identifier of the KMS key to delete. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
PendingWindowInDays |
The waiting period, specified in number of days. After the waiting period ends, KMS deletes the KMS key. If the KMS key is a multi-Region primary key with replica keys, the waiting period begins when the last of its replica keys is deleted. Otherwise, the waiting period begins immediately. This value is optional. If you include a value, it must be between 7 and
30, inclusive. If you do not include a value, it defaults to 30. You can
use the
|
Creates a digital signature for a message or message digest by using the private key in an asymmetric signing KMS key
Description
Creates a digital signature for a message or message digest by using the private key in an asymmetric signing KMS key. To verify the signature, use the verify
operation, or use the public key in the same asymmetric KMS key outside of KMS. For information about asymmetric KMS keys, see Asymmetric KMS keys in the Key Management Service Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_sign/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_sign(
KeyId,
Message,
MessageType = NULL,
GrantTokens = NULL,
SigningAlgorithm,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies an asymmetric KMS key. KMS uses the private key in the
asymmetric KMS key to sign the message. The To specify a KMS key, use its key ID, key ARN, alias name, or alias ARN.
When using an alias name, prefix it with For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Message |
[required] Specifies the message or message digest to sign. Messages can be 0-4096 bytes. To sign a larger message, provide a message digest. If you provide a message digest, use the |
MessageType |
Tells KMS whether the value of the When the value of Use the When the value of You can submit a message digest and omit the The hashing algorithm in that
|
GrantTokens |
A list of grant tokens. Use a grant token when your permission to call this operation comes from a new grant that has not yet achieved eventual consistency. For more information, see Grant token and Using a grant token in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
SigningAlgorithm |
[required] Specifies the signing algorithm to use when signing the message. Choose an algorithm that is compatible with the type and size of the specified asymmetric KMS key. When signing with RSA key pairs, RSASSA-PSS algorithms are preferred. We include RSASSA-PKCS1-v1_5 algorithms for compatibility with existing applications. |
DryRun |
Checks if your request will succeed. To learn more about how to use this parameter, see Testing your KMS API calls in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Adds or edits tags on a customer managed key
Description
Adds or edits tags on a customer managed key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_tag_resource(KeyId, Tags)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies a customer managed key in the account and Region. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Tags |
[required] One or more tags. Each tag consists of a tag key and a tag value. The tag value can be an empty (null) string. Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. You cannot have more than one tag on a KMS key with the same tag key. If you specify an existing tag key with a different tag value, KMS replaces the current tag value with the specified one. |
Deletes tags from a customer managed key
Description
Deletes tags from a customer managed key. To delete a tag, specify the tag key and the KMS key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_untag_resource(KeyId, TagKeys)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies the KMS key from which you are removing tags. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
TagKeys |
[required] One or more tag keys. Specify only the tag keys, not the tag values. |
Associates an existing KMS alias with a different KMS key
Description
Associates an existing KMS alias with a different KMS key. Each alias is associated with only one KMS key at a time, although a KMS key can have multiple aliases. The alias and the KMS key must be in the same Amazon Web Services account and Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_update_alias/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_update_alias(AliasName, TargetKeyId)
Arguments
AliasName |
[required] Identifies the alias that is changing its KMS key. This value must begin
with Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. |
TargetKeyId |
[required] Identifies the customer managed key to associate with the alias. You don't have permission to associate an alias with an Amazon Web Services managed key. The KMS key must be in the same Amazon Web Services account and Region as the alias. Also, the new target KMS key must be the same type as the current target KMS key (both symmetric or both asymmetric or both HMAC) and they must have the same key usage. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
To verify that the alias is mapped to the correct KMS key, use
|
Changes the properties of a custom key store
Description
Changes the properties of a custom key store. You can use this operation to change the properties of an CloudHSM key store or an external key store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_update_custom_key_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_update_custom_key_store(
CustomKeyStoreId,
NewCustomKeyStoreName = NULL,
KeyStorePassword = NULL,
CloudHsmClusterId = NULL,
XksProxyUriEndpoint = NULL,
XksProxyUriPath = NULL,
XksProxyVpcEndpointServiceName = NULL,
XksProxyAuthenticationCredential = NULL,
XksProxyConnectivity = NULL
)
Arguments
CustomKeyStoreId |
[required] Identifies the custom key store that you want to update. Enter the ID of
the custom key store. To find the ID of a custom key store, use the
|
NewCustomKeyStoreName |
Changes the friendly name of the custom key store to the value that you specify. The custom key store name must be unique in the Amazon Web Services account. Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. To change this value, an CloudHSM key store must be disconnected. An external key store can be connected or disconnected. |
KeyStorePassword |
Enter the current password of the This parameter tells KMS the current password of the To change this value, the CloudHSM key store must be disconnected. |
CloudHsmClusterId |
Associates the custom key store with a related CloudHSM cluster. This
parameter is valid only for custom key stores with a
Enter the cluster ID of the cluster that you used to create the custom key store or a cluster that shares a backup history and has the same cluster certificate as the original cluster. You cannot use this parameter to associate a custom key store with an unrelated cluster. In addition, the replacement cluster must fulfill the requirements for a cluster associated with a custom key store. To view the cluster certificate of a cluster, use the DescribeClusters operation. To change this value, the CloudHSM key store must be disconnected. |
XksProxyUriEndpoint |
Changes the URI endpoint that KMS uses to connect to your external key
store proxy (XKS proxy). This parameter is valid only for custom key
stores with a For external key stores with an For external key stores with an The combined To change this value, the external key store must be disconnected. |
XksProxyUriPath |
Changes the base path to the proxy APIs for this external key store. To
find this value, see the documentation for your external key manager and
external key store proxy (XKS proxy). This parameter is valid only for
custom key stores with a The value must start with The combined You can change this value when the external key store is connected or disconnected. |
XksProxyVpcEndpointServiceName |
Changes the name that KMS uses to identify the Amazon VPC endpoint
service for your external key store proxy (XKS proxy). This parameter is
valid when the To change this value, the external key store must be disconnected. |
XksProxyAuthenticationCredential |
Changes the credentials that KMS uses to sign requests to the external
key store proxy (XKS proxy). This parameter is valid only for custom key
stores with a You must specify both the This parameter doesn't establish or change your authentication credentials on the proxy. It just tells KMS the credential that you established with your external key store proxy. For example, if you rotate the credential on your external key store proxy, you can use this parameter to update the credential in KMS. You can change this value when the external key store is connected or disconnected. |
XksProxyConnectivity |
Changes the connectivity setting for the external key store. To indicate
that the external key store proxy uses a Amazon VPC endpoint service to
communicate with KMS, specify If you change the If you change the To change this value, the external key store must be disconnected. |
Updates the description of a KMS key
Description
Updates the description of a KMS key. To see the description of a KMS key, use describe_key
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_update_key_description/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_update_key_description(KeyId, Description)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Updates the description of the specified KMS key. Specify the key ID or key ARN of the KMS key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Description |
[required] New description for the KMS key. Do not include confidential or sensitive information in this field. This field may be displayed in plaintext in CloudTrail logs and other output. |
Changes the primary key of a multi-Region key
Description
Changes the primary key of a multi-Region key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_update_primary_region/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_update_primary_region(KeyId, PrimaryRegion)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies the current primary key. When the operation completes, this KMS key will be a replica key. Specify the key ID or key ARN of a multi-Region primary key. For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
PrimaryRegion |
[required] The Amazon Web Services Region of the new primary key. Enter the Region
ID, such as When the operation completes, the multi-Region key in this Region will be the primary key. |
Verifies a digital signature that was generated by the Sign operation
Description
Verifies a digital signature that was generated by the sign
operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_verify/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_verify(
KeyId,
Message,
MessageType = NULL,
Signature,
SigningAlgorithm,
GrantTokens = NULL,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
KeyId |
[required] Identifies the asymmetric KMS key that will be used to verify the signature. This must be the same KMS key that was used to generate the signature. If you specify a different KMS key, the signature verification fails. To specify a KMS key, use its key ID, key ARN, alias name, or alias ARN.
When using an alias name, prefix it with For example:
To get the key ID and key ARN for a KMS key, use
|
Message |
[required] Specifies the message that was signed. You can submit a raw message of
up to 4096 bytes, or a hash digest of the message. If you submit a
digest, use the If the message specified here is different from the message that was signed, the signature verification fails. A message and its hash digest are considered to be the same message. |
MessageType |
Tells KMS whether the value of the When the value of Use the When the value of You can submit a message digest and omit the The hashing algorithm in that
|
Signature |
[required] The signature that the |
SigningAlgorithm |
[required] The signing algorithm that was used to sign the message. If you submit a different algorithm, the signature verification fails. |
GrantTokens |
A list of grant tokens. Use a grant token when your permission to call this operation comes from a new grant that has not yet achieved eventual consistency. For more information, see Grant token and Using a grant token in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
DryRun |
Checks if your request will succeed. To learn more about how to use this parameter, see Testing your KMS API calls in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Verifies the hash-based message authentication code (HMAC) for a specified message, HMAC KMS key, and MAC algorithm
Description
Verifies the hash-based message authentication code (HMAC) for a specified message, HMAC KMS key, and MAC algorithm. To verify the HMAC, verify_mac
computes an HMAC using the message, HMAC KMS key, and MAC algorithm that you specify, and compares the computed HMAC to the HMAC that you specify. If the HMACs are identical, the verification succeeds; otherwise, it fails. Verification indicates that the message hasn't changed since the HMAC was calculated, and the specified key was used to generate and verify the HMAC.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kms_verify_mac/ for full documentation.
Usage
kms_verify_mac(
Message,
KeyId,
MacAlgorithm,
Mac,
GrantTokens = NULL,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
Message |
[required] The message that will be used in the verification. Enter the same message that was used to generate the HMAC.
|
KeyId |
[required] The KMS key that will be used in the verification. Enter a key ID of the KMS key that was used to generate the HMAC. If you
identify a different KMS key, the |
MacAlgorithm |
[required] The MAC algorithm that will be used in the verification. Enter the same
MAC algorithm that was used to compute the HMAC. This algorithm must be
supported by the HMAC KMS key identified by the |
Mac |
[required] The HMAC to verify. Enter the HMAC that was generated by the
|
GrantTokens |
A list of grant tokens. Use a grant token when your permission to call this operation comes from a new grant that has not yet achieved eventual consistency. For more information, see Grant token and Using a grant token in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
DryRun |
Checks if your request will succeed. To learn more about how to use this parameter, see Testing your KMS API calls in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Amazon Macie 2
Description
Amazon Macie
Usage
macie2(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- macie2( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
accept_invitation | Accepts an Amazon Macie membership invitation that was received from a specific account |
batch_get_custom_data_identifiers | Retrieves information about one or more custom data identifiers |
batch_update_automated_discovery_accounts | Changes the status of automated sensitive data discovery for one or more accounts |
create_allow_list | Creates and defines the settings for an allow list |
create_classification_job | Creates and defines the settings for a classification job |
create_custom_data_identifier | Creates and defines the criteria and other settings for a custom data identifier |
create_findings_filter | Creates and defines the criteria and other settings for a findings filter |
create_invitations | Sends an Amazon Macie membership invitation to one or more accounts |
create_member | Associates an account with an Amazon Macie administrator account |
create_sample_findings | Creates sample findings |
decline_invitations | Declines Amazon Macie membership invitations that were received from specific accounts |
delete_allow_list | Deletes an allow list |
delete_custom_data_identifier | Soft deletes a custom data identifier |
delete_findings_filter | Deletes a findings filter |
delete_invitations | Deletes Amazon Macie membership invitations that were received from specific accounts |
delete_member | Deletes the association between an Amazon Macie administrator account and an account |
describe_buckets | Retrieves (queries) statistical data and other information about one or more S3 buckets that Amazon Macie monitors and analyzes for an account |
describe_classification_job | Retrieves the status and settings for a classification job |
describe_organization_configuration | Retrieves the Amazon Macie configuration settings for an organization in Organizations |
disable_macie | Disables Amazon Macie and deletes all settings and resources for a Macie account |
disable_organization_admin_account | Disables an account as the delegated Amazon Macie administrator account for an organization in Organizations |
disassociate_from_administrator_account | Disassociates a member account from its Amazon Macie administrator account |
disassociate_from_master_account | (Deprecated) Disassociates a member account from its Amazon Macie administrator account |
disassociate_member | Disassociates an Amazon Macie administrator account from a member account |
enable_macie | Enables Amazon Macie and specifies the configuration settings for a Macie account |
enable_organization_admin_account | Designates an account as the delegated Amazon Macie administrator account for an organization in Organizations |
get_administrator_account | Retrieves information about the Amazon Macie administrator account for an account |
get_allow_list | Retrieves the settings and status of an allow list |
get_automated_discovery_configuration | Retrieves the configuration settings and status of automated sensitive data discovery for an organization or standalone account |
get_bucket_statistics | Retrieves (queries) aggregated statistical data about all the S3 buckets that Amazon Macie monitors and analyzes for an account |
get_classification_export_configuration | Retrieves the configuration settings for storing data classification results |
get_classification_scope | Retrieves the classification scope settings for an account |
get_custom_data_identifier | Retrieves the criteria and other settings for a custom data identifier |
get_findings | Retrieves the details of one or more findings |
get_findings_filter | Retrieves the criteria and other settings for a findings filter |
get_findings_publication_configuration | Retrieves the configuration settings for publishing findings to Security Hub |
get_finding_statistics | Retrieves (queries) aggregated statistical data about findings |
get_invitations_count | Retrieves the count of Amazon Macie membership invitations that were received by an account |
get_macie_session | Retrieves the status and configuration settings for an Amazon Macie account |
get_master_account | (Deprecated) Retrieves information about the Amazon Macie administrator account for an account |
get_member | Retrieves information about an account that's associated with an Amazon Macie administrator account |
get_resource_profile | Retrieves (queries) sensitive data discovery statistics and the sensitivity score for an S3 bucket |
get_reveal_configuration | Retrieves the status and configuration settings for retrieving occurrences of sensitive data reported by findings |
get_sensitive_data_occurrences | Retrieves occurrences of sensitive data reported by a finding |
get_sensitive_data_occurrences_availability | Checks whether occurrences of sensitive data can be retrieved for a finding |
get_sensitivity_inspection_template | Retrieves the settings for the sensitivity inspection template for an account |
get_usage_statistics | Retrieves (queries) quotas and aggregated usage data for one or more accounts |
get_usage_totals | Retrieves (queries) aggregated usage data for an account |
list_allow_lists | Retrieves a subset of information about all the allow lists for an account |
list_automated_discovery_accounts | Retrieves the status of automated sensitive data discovery for one or more accounts |
list_classification_jobs | Retrieves a subset of information about one or more classification jobs |
list_classification_scopes | Retrieves a subset of information about the classification scope for an account |
list_custom_data_identifiers | Retrieves a subset of information about the custom data identifiers for an account |
list_findings | Retrieves a subset of information about one or more findings |
list_findings_filters | Retrieves a subset of information about all the findings filters for an account |
list_invitations | Retrieves information about Amazon Macie membership invitations that were received by an account |
list_managed_data_identifiers | Retrieves information about all the managed data identifiers that Amazon Macie currently provides |
list_members | Retrieves information about the accounts that are associated with an Amazon Macie administrator account |
list_organization_admin_accounts | Retrieves information about the delegated Amazon Macie administrator account for an organization in Organizations |
list_resource_profile_artifacts | Retrieves information about objects that Amazon Macie selected from an S3 bucket for automated sensitive data discovery |
list_resource_profile_detections | Retrieves information about the types and amount of sensitive data that Amazon Macie found in an S3 bucket |
list_sensitivity_inspection_templates | Retrieves a subset of information about the sensitivity inspection template for an account |
list_tags_for_resource | Retrieves the tags (keys and values) that are associated with an Amazon Macie resource |
put_classification_export_configuration | Adds or updates the configuration settings for storing data classification results |
put_findings_publication_configuration | Updates the configuration settings for publishing findings to Security Hub |
search_resources | Retrieves (queries) statistical data and other information about Amazon Web Services resources that Amazon Macie monitors and analyzes for an account |
tag_resource | Adds or updates one or more tags (keys and values) that are associated with an Amazon Macie resource |
test_custom_data_identifier | Tests criteria for a custom data identifier |
untag_resource | Removes one or more tags (keys and values) from an Amazon Macie resource |
update_allow_list | Updates the settings for an allow list |
update_automated_discovery_configuration | Changes the configuration settings and status of automated sensitive data discovery for an organization or standalone account |
update_classification_job | Changes the status of a classification job |
update_classification_scope | Updates the classification scope settings for an account |
update_findings_filter | Updates the criteria and other settings for a findings filter |
update_macie_session | Suspends or re-enables Amazon Macie, or updates the configuration settings for a Macie account |
update_member_session | Enables an Amazon Macie administrator to suspend or re-enable Macie for a member account |
update_organization_configuration | Updates the Amazon Macie configuration settings for an organization in Organizations |
update_resource_profile | Updates the sensitivity score for an S3 bucket |
update_resource_profile_detections | Updates the sensitivity scoring settings for an S3 bucket |
update_reveal_configuration | Updates the status and configuration settings for retrieving occurrences of sensitive data reported by findings |
update_sensitivity_inspection_template | Updates the settings for the sensitivity inspection template for an account |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- macie2()
svc$accept_invitation(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Accepts an Amazon Macie membership invitation that was received from a specific account
Description
Accepts an Amazon Macie membership invitation that was received from a specific account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_accept_invitation/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_accept_invitation(
administratorAccountId = NULL,
invitationId,
masterAccount = NULL
)
Arguments
administratorAccountId |
The Amazon Web Services account ID for the account that sent the invitation. |
invitationId |
[required] The unique identifier for the invitation to accept. |
masterAccount |
(Deprecated) The Amazon Web Services account ID for the account that sent the invitation. This property has been replaced by the administratorAccountId property and is retained only for backward compatibility. |
Retrieves information about one or more custom data identifiers
Description
Retrieves information about one or more custom data identifiers.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_batch_get_custom_data_identifiers/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_batch_get_custom_data_identifiers(ids = NULL)
Arguments
ids |
An array of custom data identifier IDs, one for each custom data identifier to retrieve information about. |
Changes the status of automated sensitive data discovery for one or more accounts
Description
Changes the status of automated sensitive data discovery for one or more accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_batch_update_automated_discovery_accounts/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_batch_update_automated_discovery_accounts(accounts = NULL)
Arguments
accounts |
An array of objects, one for each account to change the status of automated sensitive data discovery for. Each object specifies the Amazon Web Services account ID for an account and a new status for that account. |
Creates and defines the settings for an allow list
Description
Creates and defines the settings for an allow list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_create_allow_list/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_create_allow_list(
clientToken,
criteria,
description = NULL,
name,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
[required] A unique, case-sensitive token that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
criteria |
[required] The criteria that specify the text or text pattern to ignore. The criteria can be the location and name of an S3 object that lists specific text to ignore (s3WordsList), or a regular expression (regex) that defines a text pattern to ignore. |
description |
A custom description of the allow list. The description can contain as many as 512 characters. |
name |
[required] A custom name for the allow list. The name can contain as many as 128 characters. |
tags |
A map of key-value pairs that specifies the tags to associate with the allow list. An allow list can have a maximum of 50 tags. Each tag consists of a tag key and an associated tag value. The maximum length of a tag key is 128 characters. The maximum length of a tag value is 256 characters. |
Creates and defines the settings for a classification job
Description
Creates and defines the settings for a classification job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_create_classification_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_create_classification_job(
allowListIds = NULL,
clientToken,
customDataIdentifierIds = NULL,
description = NULL,
initialRun = NULL,
jobType,
managedDataIdentifierIds = NULL,
managedDataIdentifierSelector = NULL,
name,
s3JobDefinition,
samplingPercentage = NULL,
scheduleFrequency = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
allowListIds |
An array of unique identifiers, one for each allow list for the job to use when it analyzes data. |
clientToken |
[required] A unique, case-sensitive token that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
customDataIdentifierIds |
An array of unique identifiers, one for each custom data identifier for the job to use when it analyzes data. To use only managed data identifiers, don't specify a value for this property and specify a value other than NONE for the managedDataIdentifierSelector property. |
description |
A custom description of the job. The description can contain as many as 200 characters. |
initialRun |
For a recurring job, specifies whether to analyze all existing, eligible objects immediately after the job is created (true). To analyze only those objects that are created or changed after you create the job and before the job's first scheduled run, set this value to false. If you configure the job to run only once, don't specify a value for this property. |
jobType |
[required] The schedule for running the job. Valid values are:
|
managedDataIdentifierIds |
An array of unique identifiers, one for each managed data identifier for the job to include (use) or exclude (not use) when it analyzes data. Inclusion or exclusion depends on the managed data identifier selection type that you specify for the job (managedDataIdentifierSelector). To retrieve a list of valid values for this property, use the ListManagedDataIdentifiers operation. |
managedDataIdentifierSelector |
The selection type to apply when determining which managed data identifiers the job uses to analyze data. Valid values are:
If you don't specify a value for this property, the job uses the recommended set of managed data identifiers. If the job is a recurring job and you specify ALL or EXCLUDE, each job run automatically uses new managed data identifiers that are released. If you don't specify a value for this property or you specify RECOMMENDED for a recurring job, each job run automatically uses all the managed data identifiers that are in the recommended set when the run starts. To learn about individual managed data identifiers or determine which ones are in the recommended set, see Using managed data identifiers or Recommended managed data identifiers in the Amazon Macie User Guide. |
name |
[required] A custom name for the job. The name can contain as many as 500 characters. |
s3JobDefinition |
[required] The S3 buckets that contain the objects to analyze, and the scope of that analysis. |
samplingPercentage |
The sampling depth, as a percentage, for the job to apply when processing objects. This value determines the percentage of eligible objects that the job analyzes. If this value is less than 100, Amazon Macie selects the objects to analyze at random, up to the specified percentage, and analyzes all the data in those objects. |
scheduleFrequency |
The recurrence pattern for running the job. To run the job only once, don't specify a value for this property and set the value for the jobType property to ONE_TIME. |
tags |
A map of key-value pairs that specifies the tags to associate with the job. A job can have a maximum of 50 tags. Each tag consists of a tag key and an associated tag value. The maximum length of a tag key is 128 characters. The maximum length of a tag value is 256 characters. |
Creates and defines the criteria and other settings for a custom data identifier
Description
Creates and defines the criteria and other settings for a custom data identifier.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_create_custom_data_identifier/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_create_custom_data_identifier(
clientToken = NULL,
description = NULL,
ignoreWords = NULL,
keywords = NULL,
maximumMatchDistance = NULL,
name,
regex,
severityLevels = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive token that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
description |
A custom description of the custom data identifier. The description can contain as many as 512 characters. We strongly recommend that you avoid including any sensitive data in the description of a custom data identifier. Other users of your account might be able to see this description, depending on the actions that they're allowed to perform in Amazon Macie. |
ignoreWords |
An array that lists specific character sequences (ignore words) to exclude from the results. If the text matched by the regular expression contains any string in this array, Amazon Macie ignores it. The array can contain as many as 10 ignore words. Each ignore word can contain 4-90 UTF-8 characters. Ignore words are case sensitive. |
keywords |
An array that lists specific character sequences (keywords), one of which must precede and be within proximity (maximumMatchDistance) of the regular expression to match. The array can contain as many as 50 keywords. Each keyword can contain 3-90 UTF-8 characters. Keywords aren't case sensitive. |
maximumMatchDistance |
The maximum number of characters that can exist between the end of at least one complete character sequence specified by the keywords array and the end of the text that matches the regex pattern. If a complete keyword precedes all the text that matches the pattern and the keyword is within the specified distance, Amazon Macie includes the result. The distance can be 1-300 characters. The default value is 50. |
name |
[required] A custom name for the custom data identifier. The name can contain as many as 128 characters. We strongly recommend that you avoid including any sensitive data in the name of a custom data identifier. Other users of your account might be able to see this name, depending on the actions that they're allowed to perform in Amazon Macie. |
regex |
[required] The regular expression (regex) that defines the pattern to match. The expression can contain as many as 512 characters. |
severityLevels |
The severity to assign to findings that the custom data identifier produces, based on the number of occurrences of text that match the custom data identifier's detection criteria. You can specify as many as three SeverityLevel objects in this array, one for each severity: LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. If you specify more than one, the occurrences thresholds must be in ascending order by severity, moving from LOW to HIGH. For example, 1 for LOW, 50 for MEDIUM, and 100 for HIGH. If an S3 object contains fewer occurrences than the lowest specified threshold, Amazon Macie doesn't create a finding. If you don't specify any values for this array, Macie creates findings for S3 objects that contain at least one occurrence of text that matches the detection criteria, and Macie assigns the MEDIUM severity to those findings. |
tags |
A map of key-value pairs that specifies the tags to associate with the custom data identifier. A custom data identifier can have a maximum of 50 tags. Each tag consists of a tag key and an associated tag value. The maximum length of a tag key is 128 characters. The maximum length of a tag value is 256 characters. |
Creates and defines the criteria and other settings for a findings filter
Description
Creates and defines the criteria and other settings for a findings filter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_create_findings_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_create_findings_filter(
action,
clientToken = NULL,
description = NULL,
findingCriteria,
name,
position = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
action |
[required] The action to perform on findings that match the filter criteria (findingCriteria). Valid values are: ARCHIVE, suppress (automatically archive) the findings; and, NOOP, don't perform any action on the findings. |
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive token that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
description |
A custom description of the filter. The description can contain as many as 512 characters. We strongly recommend that you avoid including any sensitive data in the description of a filter. Other users of your account might be able to see this description, depending on the actions that they're allowed to perform in Amazon Macie. |
findingCriteria |
[required] The criteria to use to filter findings. |
name |
[required] A custom name for the filter. The name must contain at least 3 characters and can contain as many as 64 characters. We strongly recommend that you avoid including any sensitive data in the name of a filter. Other users of your account might be able to see this name, depending on the actions that they're allowed to perform in Amazon Macie. |
position |
The position of the filter in the list of saved filters on the Amazon Macie console. This value also determines the order in which the filter is applied to findings, relative to other filters that are also applied to the findings. |
tags |
A map of key-value pairs that specifies the tags to associate with the filter. A findings filter can have a maximum of 50 tags. Each tag consists of a tag key and an associated tag value. The maximum length of a tag key is 128 characters. The maximum length of a tag value is 256 characters. |
Sends an Amazon Macie membership invitation to one or more accounts
Description
Sends an Amazon Macie membership invitation to one or more accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_create_invitations/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_create_invitations(
accountIds,
disableEmailNotification = NULL,
message = NULL
)
Arguments
accountIds |
[required] An array that lists Amazon Web Services account IDs, one for each account to send the invitation to. |
disableEmailNotification |
Specifies whether to send the invitation as an email message. If this value is false, Amazon Macie sends the invitation (as an email message) to the email address that you specified for the recipient's account when you associated the account with your account. The default value is false. |
message |
Custom text to include in the email message that contains the invitation. The text can contain as many as 80 alphanumeric characters. |
Associates an account with an Amazon Macie administrator account
Description
Associates an account with an Amazon Macie administrator account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_create_member/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_create_member(account, tags = NULL)
Arguments
account |
[required] The details of the account to associate with the administrator account. |
tags |
A map of key-value pairs that specifies the tags to associate with the account in Amazon Macie. An account can have a maximum of 50 tags. Each tag consists of a tag key and an associated tag value. The maximum length of a tag key is 128 characters. The maximum length of a tag value is 256 characters. |
Creates sample findings
Description
Creates sample findings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_create_sample_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_create_sample_findings(findingTypes = NULL)
Arguments
findingTypes |
An array of finding types, one for each type of sample finding to create. To create a sample of every type of finding that Amazon Macie supports, don't include this array in your request. |
Declines Amazon Macie membership invitations that were received from specific accounts
Description
Declines Amazon Macie membership invitations that were received from specific accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_decline_invitations/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_decline_invitations(accountIds)
Arguments
accountIds |
[required] An array that lists Amazon Web Services account IDs, one for each account that sent an invitation to decline. |
Deletes an allow list
Description
Deletes an allow list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_delete_allow_list/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_delete_allow_list(id, ignoreJobChecks = NULL)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
ignoreJobChecks |
Specifies whether to force deletion of the allow list, even if active classification jobs are configured to use the list. When you try to delete an allow list, Amazon Macie checks for classification jobs that use the list and have a status other than COMPLETE or CANCELLED. By default, Macie rejects your request if any jobs meet these criteria. To skip these checks and delete the list, set this value to true. To delete the list only if no active jobs are configured to use it, set this value to false. |
Soft deletes a custom data identifier
Description
Soft deletes a custom data identifier.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_delete_custom_data_identifier/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_delete_custom_data_identifier(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
Deletes a findings filter
Description
Deletes a findings filter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_delete_findings_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_delete_findings_filter(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
Deletes Amazon Macie membership invitations that were received from specific accounts
Description
Deletes Amazon Macie membership invitations that were received from specific accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_delete_invitations/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_delete_invitations(accountIds)
Arguments
accountIds |
[required] An array that lists Amazon Web Services account IDs, one for each account that sent an invitation to delete. |
Deletes the association between an Amazon Macie administrator account and an account
Description
Deletes the association between an Amazon Macie administrator account and an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_delete_member/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_delete_member(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
Retrieves (queries) statistical data and other information about one or more S3 buckets that Amazon Macie monitors and analyzes for an account
Description
Retrieves (queries) statistical data and other information about one or more S3 buckets that Amazon Macie monitors and analyzes for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_describe_buckets/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_describe_buckets(
criteria = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
sortCriteria = NULL
)
Arguments
criteria |
The criteria to use to filter the query results. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of items to include in each page of the response. The default value is 50. |
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
sortCriteria |
The criteria to use to sort the query results. |
Retrieves the status and settings for a classification job
Description
Retrieves the status and settings for a classification job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_describe_classification_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_describe_classification_job(jobId)
Arguments
jobId |
[required] The unique identifier for the classification job. |
Retrieves the Amazon Macie configuration settings for an organization in Organizations
Description
Retrieves the Amazon Macie configuration settings for an organization in Organizations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_describe_organization_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_describe_organization_configuration()
Disables Amazon Macie and deletes all settings and resources for a Macie account
Description
Disables Amazon Macie and deletes all settings and resources for a Macie account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_disable_macie/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_disable_macie()
Disables an account as the delegated Amazon Macie administrator account for an organization in Organizations
Description
Disables an account as the delegated Amazon Macie administrator account for an organization in Organizations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_disable_organization_admin_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_disable_organization_admin_account(adminAccountId)
Arguments
adminAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the delegated Amazon Macie administrator account. |
Disassociates a member account from its Amazon Macie administrator account
Description
Disassociates a member account from its Amazon Macie administrator account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_disassociate_from_administrator_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_disassociate_from_administrator_account()
(Deprecated) Disassociates a member account from its Amazon Macie administrator account
Description
(Deprecated) Disassociates a member account from its Amazon Macie administrator account. This operation has been replaced by the DisassociateFromAdministratorAccount operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_disassociate_from_master_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_disassociate_from_master_account()
Disassociates an Amazon Macie administrator account from a member account
Description
Disassociates an Amazon Macie administrator account from a member account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_disassociate_member/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_disassociate_member(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
Enables Amazon Macie and specifies the configuration settings for a Macie account
Description
Enables Amazon Macie and specifies the configuration settings for a Macie account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_enable_macie/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_enable_macie(
clientToken = NULL,
findingPublishingFrequency = NULL,
status = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive token that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
findingPublishingFrequency |
Specifies how often to publish updates to policy findings for the account. This includes publishing updates to Security Hub and Amazon EventBridge (formerly Amazon CloudWatch Events). |
status |
Specifies the new status for the account. To enable Amazon Macie and start all Macie activities for the account, set this value to ENABLED. |
Designates an account as the delegated Amazon Macie administrator account for an organization in Organizations
Description
Designates an account as the delegated Amazon Macie administrator account for an organization in Organizations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_enable_organization_admin_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_enable_organization_admin_account(adminAccountId, clientToken = NULL)
Arguments
adminAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the account to designate as the delegated Amazon Macie administrator account for the organization. |
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive token that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
Retrieves information about the Amazon Macie administrator account for an account
Description
Retrieves information about the Amazon Macie administrator account for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_administrator_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_administrator_account()
Retrieves the settings and status of an allow list
Description
Retrieves the settings and status of an allow list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_allow_list/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_allow_list(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
Retrieves the configuration settings and status of automated sensitive data discovery for an organization or standalone account
Description
Retrieves the configuration settings and status of automated sensitive data discovery for an organization or standalone account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_automated_discovery_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_automated_discovery_configuration()
Retrieves (queries) aggregated statistical data about all the S3 buckets that Amazon Macie monitors and analyzes for an account
Description
Retrieves (queries) aggregated statistical data about all the S3 buckets that Amazon Macie monitors and analyzes for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_bucket_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_bucket_statistics(accountId = NULL)
Arguments
accountId |
The unique identifier for the Amazon Web Services account. |
Retrieves the configuration settings for storing data classification results
Description
Retrieves the configuration settings for storing data classification results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_classification_export_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_classification_export_configuration()
Retrieves the classification scope settings for an account
Description
Retrieves the classification scope settings for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_classification_scope/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_classification_scope(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
Retrieves the criteria and other settings for a custom data identifier
Description
Retrieves the criteria and other settings for a custom data identifier.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_custom_data_identifier/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_custom_data_identifier(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
Retrieves (queries) aggregated statistical data about findings
Description
Retrieves (queries) aggregated statistical data about findings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_finding_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_finding_statistics(
findingCriteria = NULL,
groupBy,
size = NULL,
sortCriteria = NULL
)
Arguments
findingCriteria |
The criteria to use to filter the query results. |
groupBy |
[required] The finding property to use to group the query results. Valid values are:
|
size |
The maximum number of items to include in each page of the response. |
sortCriteria |
The criteria to use to sort the query results. |
Retrieves the details of one or more findings
Description
Retrieves the details of one or more findings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_findings(findingIds, sortCriteria = NULL)
Arguments
findingIds |
[required] An array of strings that lists the unique identifiers for the findings to retrieve. You can specify as many as 50 unique identifiers in this array. |
sortCriteria |
The criteria for sorting the results of the request. |
Retrieves the criteria and other settings for a findings filter
Description
Retrieves the criteria and other settings for a findings filter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_findings_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_findings_filter(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
Retrieves the configuration settings for publishing findings to Security Hub
Description
Retrieves the configuration settings for publishing findings to Security Hub.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_findings_publication_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_findings_publication_configuration()
Retrieves the count of Amazon Macie membership invitations that were received by an account
Description
Retrieves the count of Amazon Macie membership invitations that were received by an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_invitations_count/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_invitations_count()
Retrieves the status and configuration settings for an Amazon Macie account
Description
Retrieves the status and configuration settings for an Amazon Macie account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_macie_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_macie_session()
(Deprecated) Retrieves information about the Amazon Macie administrator account for an account
Description
(Deprecated) Retrieves information about the Amazon Macie administrator account for an account. This operation has been replaced by the GetAdministratorAccount operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_master_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_master_account()
Retrieves information about an account that's associated with an Amazon Macie administrator account
Description
Retrieves information about an account that's associated with an Amazon Macie administrator account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_member/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_member(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
Retrieves (queries) sensitive data discovery statistics and the sensitivity score for an S3 bucket
Description
Retrieves (queries) sensitive data discovery statistics and the sensitivity score for an S3 bucket.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_resource_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_resource_profile(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the S3 bucket that the request applies to. |
Retrieves the status and configuration settings for retrieving occurrences of sensitive data reported by findings
Description
Retrieves the status and configuration settings for retrieving occurrences of sensitive data reported by findings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_reveal_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_reveal_configuration()
Retrieves occurrences of sensitive data reported by a finding
Description
Retrieves occurrences of sensitive data reported by a finding.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_sensitive_data_occurrences/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_sensitive_data_occurrences(findingId)
Arguments
findingId |
[required] The unique identifier for the finding. |
Checks whether occurrences of sensitive data can be retrieved for a finding
Description
Checks whether occurrences of sensitive data can be retrieved for a finding.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_sensitive_data_occurrences_availability/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_sensitive_data_occurrences_availability(findingId)
Arguments
findingId |
[required] The unique identifier for the finding. |
Retrieves the settings for the sensitivity inspection template for an account
Description
Retrieves the settings for the sensitivity inspection template for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_sensitivity_inspection_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_sensitivity_inspection_template(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
Retrieves (queries) quotas and aggregated usage data for one or more accounts
Description
Retrieves (queries) quotas and aggregated usage data for one or more accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_usage_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_usage_statistics(
filterBy = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
sortBy = NULL,
timeRange = NULL
)
Arguments
filterBy |
An array of objects, one for each condition to use to filter the query results. If you specify more than one condition, Amazon Macie uses an AND operator to join the conditions. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of items to include in each page of the response. |
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
sortBy |
The criteria to use to sort the query results. |
timeRange |
The inclusive time period to query usage data for. Valid values are: MONTH_TO_DATE, for the current calendar month to date; and, PAST_30_DAYS, for the preceding 30 days. If you don't specify a value, Amazon Macie provides usage data for the preceding 30 days. |
Retrieves (queries) aggregated usage data for an account
Description
Retrieves (queries) aggregated usage data for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_get_usage_totals/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_get_usage_totals(timeRange = NULL)
Arguments
timeRange |
The inclusive time period to retrieve the data for. Valid values are: MONTH_TO_DATE, for the current calendar month to date; and, PAST_30_DAYS, for the preceding 30 days. If you don't specify a value for this parameter, Amazon Macie provides aggregated usage data for the preceding 30 days. |
Retrieves a subset of information about all the allow lists for an account
Description
Retrieves a subset of information about all the allow lists for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_list_allow_lists/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_list_allow_lists(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of items to include in each page of a paginated response. |
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
Retrieves the status of automated sensitive data discovery for one or more accounts
Description
Retrieves the status of automated sensitive data discovery for one or more accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_list_automated_discovery_accounts/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_list_automated_discovery_accounts(
accountIds = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
accountIds |
The Amazon Web Services account ID for each account, for as many as 50 accounts. To retrieve the status for multiple accounts, append the accountIds parameter and argument for each account, separated by an ampersand (&). To retrieve the status for all the accounts in an organization, omit this parameter. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of items to include in each page of a paginated response. |
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
Retrieves a subset of information about one or more classification jobs
Description
Retrieves a subset of information about one or more classification jobs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_list_classification_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_list_classification_jobs(
filterCriteria = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
sortCriteria = NULL
)
Arguments
filterCriteria |
The criteria to use to filter the results. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of items to include in each page of the response. |
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
sortCriteria |
The criteria to use to sort the results. |
Retrieves a subset of information about the classification scope for an account
Description
Retrieves a subset of information about the classification scope for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_list_classification_scopes/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_list_classification_scopes(name = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
name |
The name of the classification scope to retrieve the unique identifier for. |
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
Retrieves a subset of information about the custom data identifiers for an account
Description
Retrieves a subset of information about the custom data identifiers for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_list_custom_data_identifiers/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_list_custom_data_identifiers(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of items to include in each page of the response. |
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
Retrieves a subset of information about one or more findings
Description
Retrieves a subset of information about one or more findings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_list_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_list_findings(
findingCriteria = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
sortCriteria = NULL
)
Arguments
findingCriteria |
The criteria to use to filter the results. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of items to include in each page of the response. |
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
sortCriteria |
The criteria to use to sort the results. |
Retrieves a subset of information about all the findings filters for an account
Description
Retrieves a subset of information about all the findings filters for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_list_findings_filters/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_list_findings_filters(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of items to include in each page of a paginated response. |
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
Retrieves information about Amazon Macie membership invitations that were received by an account
Description
Retrieves information about Amazon Macie membership invitations that were received by an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_list_invitations/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_list_invitations(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of items to include in each page of a paginated response. |
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
Retrieves information about all the managed data identifiers that Amazon Macie currently provides
Description
Retrieves information about all the managed data identifiers that Amazon Macie currently provides.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_list_managed_data_identifiers/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_list_managed_data_identifiers(nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
Retrieves information about the accounts that are associated with an Amazon Macie administrator account
Description
Retrieves information about the accounts that are associated with an Amazon Macie administrator account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_list_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_list_members(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL, onlyAssociated = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of items to include in each page of a paginated response. |
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
onlyAssociated |
Specifies which accounts to include in the response, based on the status of an account's relationship with the administrator account. By default, the response includes only current member accounts. To include all accounts, set this value to false. |
Retrieves information about the delegated Amazon Macie administrator account for an organization in Organizations
Description
Retrieves information about the delegated Amazon Macie administrator account for an organization in Organizations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_list_organization_admin_accounts/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_list_organization_admin_accounts(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of items to include in each page of a paginated response. |
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
Retrieves information about objects that Amazon Macie selected from an S3 bucket for automated sensitive data discovery
Description
Retrieves information about objects that Amazon Macie selected from an S3 bucket for automated sensitive data discovery.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_list_resource_profile_artifacts/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_list_resource_profile_artifacts(nextToken = NULL, resourceArn)
Arguments
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the S3 bucket that the request applies to. |
Retrieves information about the types and amount of sensitive data that Amazon Macie found in an S3 bucket
Description
Retrieves information about the types and amount of sensitive data that Amazon Macie found in an S3 bucket.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_list_resource_profile_detections/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_list_resource_profile_detections(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
resourceArn
)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of items to include in each page of a paginated response. |
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the S3 bucket that the request applies to. |
Retrieves a subset of information about the sensitivity inspection template for an account
Description
Retrieves a subset of information about the sensitivity inspection template for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_list_sensitivity_inspection_templates/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_list_sensitivity_inspection_templates(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of items to include in each page of a paginated response. |
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
Retrieves the tags (keys and values) that are associated with an Amazon Macie resource
Description
Retrieves the tags (keys and values) that are associated with an Amazon Macie resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. |
Adds or updates the configuration settings for storing data classification results
Description
Adds or updates the configuration settings for storing data classification results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_put_classification_export_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_put_classification_export_configuration(configuration)
Arguments
configuration |
[required] The location to store data classification results in, and the encryption settings to use when storing results in that location. |
Updates the configuration settings for publishing findings to Security Hub
Description
Updates the configuration settings for publishing findings to Security Hub.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_put_findings_publication_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_put_findings_publication_configuration(
clientToken = NULL,
securityHubConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive token that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
securityHubConfiguration |
The configuration settings that determine which findings to publish to Security Hub. |
Retrieves (queries) statistical data and other information about Amazon Web Services resources that Amazon Macie monitors and analyzes for an account
Description
Retrieves (queries) statistical data and other information about Amazon Web Services resources that Amazon Macie monitors and analyzes for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_search_resources/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_search_resources(
bucketCriteria = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
sortCriteria = NULL
)
Arguments
bucketCriteria |
The filter conditions that determine which S3 buckets to include or exclude from the query results. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of items to include in each page of the response. The default value is 50. |
nextToken |
The nextToken string that specifies which page of results to return in a paginated response. |
sortCriteria |
The criteria to use to sort the results. |
Adds or updates one or more tags (keys and values) that are associated with an Amazon Macie resource
Description
Adds or updates one or more tags (keys and values) that are associated with an Amazon Macie resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. |
tags |
[required] A map of key-value pairs that specifies the tags to associate with the resource. A resource can have a maximum of 50 tags. Each tag consists of a tag key and an associated tag value. The maximum length of a tag key is 128 characters. The maximum length of a tag value is 256 characters. |
Tests criteria for a custom data identifier
Description
Tests criteria for a custom data identifier.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_test_custom_data_identifier/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_test_custom_data_identifier(
ignoreWords = NULL,
keywords = NULL,
maximumMatchDistance = NULL,
regex,
sampleText
)
Arguments
ignoreWords |
An array that lists specific character sequences (ignore words) to exclude from the results. If the text matched by the regular expression contains any string in this array, Amazon Macie ignores it. The array can contain as many as 10 ignore words. Each ignore word can contain 4-90 UTF-8 characters. Ignore words are case sensitive. |
keywords |
An array that lists specific character sequences (keywords), one of which must precede and be within proximity (maximumMatchDistance) of the regular expression to match. The array can contain as many as 50 keywords. Each keyword can contain 3-90 UTF-8 characters. Keywords aren't case sensitive. |
maximumMatchDistance |
The maximum number of characters that can exist between the end of at least one complete character sequence specified by the keywords array and the end of the text that matches the regex pattern. If a complete keyword precedes all the text that matches the pattern and the keyword is within the specified distance, Amazon Macie includes the result. The distance can be 1-300 characters. The default value is 50. |
regex |
[required] The regular expression (regex) that defines the pattern to match. The expression can contain as many as 512 characters. |
sampleText |
[required] The sample text to inspect by using the custom data identifier. The text can contain as many as 1,000 characters. |
Removes one or more tags (keys and values) from an Amazon Macie resource
Description
Removes one or more tags (keys and values) from an Amazon Macie resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. |
tagKeys |
[required] One or more tags (keys) to remove from the resource. In an HTTP request to remove multiple tags, append the tagKeys parameter and argument for each tag to remove, separated by an ampersand (&). |
Updates the settings for an allow list
Description
Updates the settings for an allow list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_update_allow_list/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_update_allow_list(criteria, description = NULL, id, name)
Arguments
criteria |
[required] The criteria that specify the text or text pattern to ignore. The criteria can be the location and name of an S3 object that lists specific text to ignore (s3WordsList), or a regular expression that defines a text pattern to ignore (regex). You can change a list's underlying criteria, such as the name of the S3 object or the regular expression to use. However, you can't change the type from s3WordsList to regex or the other way around. |
description |
A custom description of the allow list. The description can contain as many as 512 characters. |
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
name |
[required] A custom name for the allow list. The name can contain as many as 128 characters. |
Changes the configuration settings and status of automated sensitive data discovery for an organization or standalone account
Description
Changes the configuration settings and status of automated sensitive data discovery for an organization or standalone account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_update_automated_discovery_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_update_automated_discovery_configuration(
autoEnableOrganizationMembers = NULL,
status
)
Arguments
autoEnableOrganizationMembers |
Specifies whether to automatically enable automated sensitive data discovery for accounts in the organization. Valid values are: ALL (default), enable it for all existing accounts and new member accounts; NEW, enable it only for new member accounts; and, NONE, don't enable it for any accounts. If you specify NEW or NONE, automated sensitive data discovery continues to be enabled for any existing accounts that it's currently enabled for. To enable or disable it for individual member accounts, specify NEW or NONE, and then enable or disable it for each account by using the BatchUpdateAutomatedDiscoveryAccounts operation. |
status |
[required] The new status of automated sensitive data discovery for the organization or account. Valid values are: ENABLED, start or resume all automated sensitive data discovery activities; and, DISABLED, stop performing all automated sensitive data discovery activities. If you specify DISABLED for an administrator account, you also disable automated sensitive data discovery for all member accounts in the organization. |
Changes the status of a classification job
Description
Changes the status of a classification job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_update_classification_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_update_classification_job(jobId, jobStatus)
Arguments
jobId |
[required] The unique identifier for the classification job. |
jobStatus |
[required] The new status for the job. Valid values are:
|
Updates the classification scope settings for an account
Description
Updates the classification scope settings for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_update_classification_scope/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_update_classification_scope(id, s3 = NULL)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
s3 |
The S3 buckets to add or remove from the exclusion list defined by the classification scope. |
Updates the criteria and other settings for a findings filter
Description
Updates the criteria and other settings for a findings filter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_update_findings_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_update_findings_filter(
action = NULL,
clientToken = NULL,
description = NULL,
findingCriteria = NULL,
id,
name = NULL,
position = NULL
)
Arguments
action |
The action to perform on findings that match the filter criteria (findingCriteria). Valid values are: ARCHIVE, suppress (automatically archive) the findings; and, NOOP, don't perform any action on the findings. |
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive token that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
description |
A custom description of the filter. The description can contain as many as 512 characters. We strongly recommend that you avoid including any sensitive data in the description of a filter. Other users of your account might be able to see this description, depending on the actions that they're allowed to perform in Amazon Macie. |
findingCriteria |
The criteria to use to filter findings. |
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
name |
A custom name for the filter. The name must contain at least 3 characters and can contain as many as 64 characters. We strongly recommend that you avoid including any sensitive data in the name of a filter. Other users of your account might be able to see this name, depending on the actions that they're allowed to perform in Amazon Macie. |
position |
The position of the filter in the list of saved filters on the Amazon Macie console. This value also determines the order in which the filter is applied to findings, relative to other filters that are also applied to the findings. |
Suspends or re-enables Amazon Macie, or updates the configuration settings for a Macie account
Description
Suspends or re-enables Amazon Macie, or updates the configuration settings for a Macie account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_update_macie_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_update_macie_session(findingPublishingFrequency = NULL, status = NULL)
Arguments
findingPublishingFrequency |
Specifies how often to publish updates to policy findings for the account. This includes publishing updates to Security Hub and Amazon EventBridge (formerly Amazon CloudWatch Events). |
status |
Specifies a new status for the account. Valid values are: ENABLED, resume all Amazon Macie activities for the account; and, PAUSED, suspend all Macie activities for the account. |
Enables an Amazon Macie administrator to suspend or re-enable Macie for a member account
Description
Enables an Amazon Macie administrator to suspend or re-enable Macie for a member account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_update_member_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_update_member_session(id, status)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
status |
[required] Specifies the new status for the account. Valid values are: ENABLED, resume all Amazon Macie activities for the account; and, PAUSED, suspend all Macie activities for the account. |
Updates the Amazon Macie configuration settings for an organization in Organizations
Description
Updates the Amazon Macie configuration settings for an organization in Organizations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_update_organization_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_update_organization_configuration(autoEnable)
Arguments
autoEnable |
[required] Specifies whether to enable Amazon Macie automatically for accounts that are added to the organization in Organizations. |
Updates the sensitivity score for an S3 bucket
Description
Updates the sensitivity score for an S3 bucket.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_update_resource_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_update_resource_profile(resourceArn, sensitivityScoreOverride = NULL)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the S3 bucket that the request applies to. |
sensitivityScoreOverride |
The new sensitivity score for the bucket. Valid values are: 100, assign the maximum score and apply the Sensitive label to the bucket; and, null (empty), assign a score that Amazon Macie calculates automatically after you submit the request. |
Updates the sensitivity scoring settings for an S3 bucket
Description
Updates the sensitivity scoring settings for an S3 bucket.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_update_resource_profile_detections/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_update_resource_profile_detections(
resourceArn,
suppressDataIdentifiers = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the S3 bucket that the request applies to. |
suppressDataIdentifiers |
An array of objects, one for each custom data identifier or managed data identifier that detected a type of sensitive data to exclude from the bucket's score. To include all sensitive data types in the score, don't specify any values for this array. |
Updates the status and configuration settings for retrieving occurrences of sensitive data reported by findings
Description
Updates the status and configuration settings for retrieving occurrences of sensitive data reported by findings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_update_reveal_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_update_reveal_configuration(
configuration,
retrievalConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
configuration |
[required] The KMS key to use to encrypt the sensitive data, and the status of the configuration for the Amazon Macie account. |
retrievalConfiguration |
The access method and settings to use when retrieving the sensitive data. |
Updates the settings for the sensitivity inspection template for an account
Description
Updates the settings for the sensitivity inspection template for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/macie2_update_sensitivity_inspection_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
macie2_update_sensitivity_inspection_template(
description = NULL,
excludes = NULL,
id,
includes = NULL
)
Arguments
description |
A custom description of the template. The description can contain as many as 200 characters. |
excludes |
The managed data identifiers to explicitly exclude (not use) when performing automated sensitive data discovery. To exclude an allow list or custom data identifier that's currently included by the template, update the values for the SensitivityInspectionTemplateIncludes.allowListIds and SensitivityInspectionTemplateIncludes.customDataIdentifierIds properties, respectively. |
id |
[required] The unique identifier for the Amazon Macie resource that the request applies to. |
includes |
The allow lists, custom data identifiers, and managed data identifiers to explicitly include (use) when performing automated sensitive data discovery. |
PcaConnectorAd
Description
Amazon Web Services Private CA Connector for Active Directory creates a connector between Amazon Web Services Private CA and Active Directory (AD) that enables you to provision security certificates for AD signed by a private CA that you own. For more information, see Amazon Web Services Private CA Connector for Active Directory.
Usage
pcaconnectorad(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- pcaconnectorad( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_connector | Creates a connector between Amazon Web Services Private CA and an Active Directory |
create_directory_registration | Creates a directory registration that authorizes communication between Amazon Web Services Private CA and an Active Directory |
create_service_principal_name | Creates a service principal name (SPN) for the service account in Active Directory |
create_template | Creates an Active Directory compatible certificate template |
create_template_group_access_control_entry | Create a group access control entry |
delete_connector | Deletes a connector for Active Directory |
delete_directory_registration | Deletes a directory registration |
delete_service_principal_name | Deletes the service principal name (SPN) used by a connector to authenticate with your Active Directory |
delete_template | Deletes a template |
delete_template_group_access_control_entry | Deletes a group access control entry |
get_connector | Lists information about your connector |
get_directory_registration | A structure that contains information about your directory registration |
get_service_principal_name | Lists the service principal name that the connector uses to authenticate with Active Directory |
get_template | Retrieves a certificate template that the connector uses to issue certificates from a private CA |
get_template_group_access_control_entry | Retrieves the group access control entries for a template |
list_connectors | Lists the connectors that you created by using the https://docs |
list_directory_registrations | Lists the directory registrations that you created by using the https://docs |
list_service_principal_names | Lists the service principal names that the connector uses to authenticate with Active Directory |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists the tags, if any, that are associated with your resource |
list_template_group_access_control_entries | Lists group access control entries you created |
list_templates | Lists the templates, if any, that are associated with a connector |
tag_resource | Adds one or more tags to your resource |
untag_resource | Removes one or more tags from your resource |
update_template | Update template configuration to define the information included in certificates |
update_template_group_access_control_entry | Update a group access control entry you created using CreateTemplateGroupAccessControlEntry |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- pcaconnectorad()
svc$create_connector(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates a connector between Amazon Web Services Private CA and an Active Directory
Description
Creates a connector between Amazon Web Services Private CA and an Active Directory. You must specify the private CA, directory ID, and security groups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_create_connector/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_create_connector(
CertificateAuthorityArn,
ClientToken = NULL,
DirectoryId,
Tags = NULL,
VpcInformation
)
Arguments
CertificateAuthorityArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the certificate authority being used. |
ClientToken |
Idempotency token. |
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the Active Directory. |
Tags |
Metadata assigned to a connector consisting of a key-value pair. |
VpcInformation |
[required] Security group IDs that describe the inbound and outbound rules. |
Creates a directory registration that authorizes communication between Amazon Web Services Private CA and an Active Directory
Description
Creates a directory registration that authorizes communication between Amazon Web Services Private CA and an Active Directory
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_create_directory_registration/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_create_directory_registration(
ClientToken = NULL,
DirectoryId,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientToken |
Idempotency token. |
DirectoryId |
[required] The identifier of the Active Directory. |
Tags |
Metadata assigned to a directory registration consisting of a key-value pair. |
Creates a service principal name (SPN) for the service account in Active Directory
Description
Creates a service principal name (SPN) for the service account in Active Directory. Kerberos authentication uses SPNs to associate a service instance with a service sign-in account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_create_service_principal_name/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_create_service_principal_name(
ClientToken = NULL,
ConnectorArn,
DirectoryRegistrationArn
)
Arguments
ClientToken |
Idempotency token. |
ConnectorArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
DirectoryRegistrationArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Creates an Active Directory compatible certificate template
Description
Creates an Active Directory compatible certificate template. The connectors issues certificates using these templates based on the requester’s Active Directory group membership.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_create_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_create_template(
ClientToken = NULL,
ConnectorArn,
Definition,
Name,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientToken |
Idempotency token. |
ConnectorArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Definition |
[required] Template configuration to define the information included in certificates. Define certificate validity and renewal periods, certificate request handling and enrollment options, key usage extensions, application policies, and cryptography settings. |
Name |
[required] Name of the template. The template name must be unique. |
Tags |
Metadata assigned to a template consisting of a key-value pair. |
Create a group access control entry
Description
Create a group access control entry. Allow or deny Active Directory groups from enrolling and/or autoenrolling with the template based on the group security identifiers (SIDs).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_create_template_group_access_control_entry/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_create_template_group_access_control_entry(
AccessRights,
ClientToken = NULL,
GroupDisplayName,
GroupSecurityIdentifier,
TemplateArn
)
Arguments
AccessRights |
[required] Allow or deny permissions for an Active Directory group to enroll or autoenroll certificates for a template. |
ClientToken |
Idempotency token. |
GroupDisplayName |
[required] Name of the Active Directory group. This name does not need to match the group name in Active Directory. |
GroupSecurityIdentifier |
[required] Security identifier (SID) of the group object from Active Directory. The SID starts with "S-". |
TemplateArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Deletes a connector for Active Directory
Description
Deletes a connector for Active Directory. You must provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the connector that you want to delete. You can find the ARN by calling the https://docs.aws.amazon.com/pca-connector-ad/latest/APIReference/API_ListConnectors action. Deleting a connector does not deregister your directory with Amazon Web Services Private CA. You can deregister your directory by calling the https://docs.aws.amazon.com/pca-connector-ad/latest/APIReference/API_DeleteDirectoryRegistration action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_delete_connector/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_delete_connector(ConnectorArn)
Arguments
ConnectorArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Deletes a directory registration
Description
Deletes a directory registration. Deleting a directory registration deauthorizes Amazon Web Services Private CA with the directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_delete_directory_registration/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_delete_directory_registration(DirectoryRegistrationArn)
Arguments
DirectoryRegistrationArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Deletes the service principal name (SPN) used by a connector to authenticate with your Active Directory
Description
Deletes the service principal name (SPN) used by a connector to authenticate with your Active Directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_delete_service_principal_name/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_delete_service_principal_name(
ConnectorArn,
DirectoryRegistrationArn
)
Arguments
ConnectorArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
DirectoryRegistrationArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Deletes a template
Description
Deletes a template. Certificates issued using the template are still valid until they are revoked or expired.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_delete_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_delete_template(TemplateArn)
Arguments
TemplateArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Deletes a group access control entry
Description
Deletes a group access control entry.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_delete_template_group_access_control_entry/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_delete_template_group_access_control_entry(
GroupSecurityIdentifier,
TemplateArn
)
Arguments
GroupSecurityIdentifier |
[required] Security identifier (SID) of the group object from Active Directory. The SID starts with "S-". |
TemplateArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Lists information about your connector
Description
Lists information about your connector. You specify the connector on input by its ARN (Amazon Resource Name).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_get_connector/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_get_connector(ConnectorArn)
Arguments
ConnectorArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
A structure that contains information about your directory registration
Description
A structure that contains information about your directory registration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_get_directory_registration/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_get_directory_registration(DirectoryRegistrationArn)
Arguments
DirectoryRegistrationArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Lists the service principal name that the connector uses to authenticate with Active Directory
Description
Lists the service principal name that the connector uses to authenticate with Active Directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_get_service_principal_name/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_get_service_principal_name(
ConnectorArn,
DirectoryRegistrationArn
)
Arguments
ConnectorArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
DirectoryRegistrationArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Retrieves a certificate template that the connector uses to issue certificates from a private CA
Description
Retrieves a certificate template that the connector uses to issue certificates from a private CA.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_get_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_get_template(TemplateArn)
Arguments
TemplateArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Retrieves the group access control entries for a template
Description
Retrieves the group access control entries for a template.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_get_template_group_access_control_entry/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_get_template_group_access_control_entry(
GroupSecurityIdentifier,
TemplateArn
)
Arguments
GroupSecurityIdentifier |
[required] Security identifier (SID) of the group object from Active Directory. The SID starts with "S-". |
TemplateArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Lists the connectors that you created by using the https://docs
Description
Lists the connectors that you created by using the https://docs.aws.amazon.com/pca-connector-ad/latest/APIReference/API_CreateConnector action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_list_connectors/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_list_connectors(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
Use this parameter when paginating results to specify the maximum number
of items to return in the response on each page. If additional items
exist beyond the number you specify, the |
NextToken |
Use this parameter when paginating results in a subsequent request after
you receive a response with truncated results. Set it to the value of
the |
Lists the directory registrations that you created by using the https://docs
Description
Lists the directory registrations that you created by using the https://docs.aws.amazon.com/pca-connector-ad/latest/APIReference/API_CreateDirectoryRegistration action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_list_directory_registrations/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_list_directory_registrations(
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
MaxResults |
Use this parameter when paginating results to specify the maximum number
of items to return in the response on each page. If additional items
exist beyond the number you specify, the |
NextToken |
Use this parameter when paginating results in a subsequent request after
you receive a response with truncated results. Set it to the value of
the |
Lists the service principal names that the connector uses to authenticate with Active Directory
Description
Lists the service principal names that the connector uses to authenticate with Active Directory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_list_service_principal_names/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_list_service_principal_names(
DirectoryRegistrationArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DirectoryRegistrationArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
MaxResults |
Use this parameter when paginating results to specify the maximum number
of items to return in the response on each page. If additional items
exist beyond the number you specify, the |
NextToken |
Use this parameter when paginating results in a subsequent request after
you receive a response with truncated results. Set it to the value of
the |
Lists the tags, if any, that are associated with your resource
Description
Lists the tags, if any, that are associated with your resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you created the resource. |
Lists group access control entries you created
Description
Lists group access control entries you created.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_list_template_group_access_control_entries/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_list_template_group_access_control_entries(
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
TemplateArn
)
Arguments
MaxResults |
Use this parameter when paginating results to specify the maximum number
of items to return in the response on each page. If additional items
exist beyond the number you specify, the |
NextToken |
Use this parameter when paginating results in a subsequent request after
you receive a response with truncated results. Set it to the value of
the |
TemplateArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Lists the templates, if any, that are associated with a connector
Description
Lists the templates, if any, that are associated with a connector.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_list_templates/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_list_templates(
ConnectorArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ConnectorArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
MaxResults |
Use this parameter when paginating results to specify the maximum number
of items to return in the response on each page. If additional items
exist beyond the number you specify, the |
NextToken |
Use this parameter when paginating results in a subsequent request after
you receive a response with truncated results. Set it to the value of
the |
Adds one or more tags to your resource
Description
Adds one or more tags to your resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you created the resource. |
Tags |
[required] Metadata assigned to a directory registration consisting of a key-value pair. |
Removes one or more tags from your resource
Description
Removes one or more tags from your resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you created the resource. |
TagKeys |
[required] Specifies a list of tag keys that you want to remove from the specified resources. |
Update template configuration to define the information included in certificates
Description
Update template configuration to define the information included in certificates.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_update_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_update_template(
Definition = NULL,
ReenrollAllCertificateHolders = NULL,
TemplateArn
)
Arguments
Definition |
Template configuration to define the information included in certificates. Define certificate validity and renewal periods, certificate request handling and enrollment options, key usage extensions, application policies, and cryptography settings. |
ReenrollAllCertificateHolders |
This setting allows the major version of a template to be increased automatically. All members of Active Directory groups that are allowed to enroll with a template will receive a new certificate issued using that template. |
TemplateArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
Update a group access control entry you created using CreateTemplateGroupAccessControlEntry
Description
Update a group access control entry you created using create_template_group_access_control_entry
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/pcaconnectorad_update_template_group_access_control_entry/ for full documentation.
Usage
pcaconnectorad_update_template_group_access_control_entry(
AccessRights = NULL,
GroupDisplayName = NULL,
GroupSecurityIdentifier,
TemplateArn
)
Arguments
AccessRights |
Allow or deny permissions for an Active Directory group to enroll or autoenroll certificates for a template. |
GroupDisplayName |
Name of the Active Directory group. This name does not need to match the group name in Active Directory. |
GroupSecurityIdentifier |
[required] Security identifier (SID) of the group object from Active Directory. The SID starts with "S-". |
TemplateArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that was returned when you called
|
AWS Resource Access Manager
Description
This is the Resource Access Manager API Reference. This documentation provides descriptions and syntax for each of the actions and data types in RAM. RAM is a service that helps you securely share your Amazon Web Services resources to other Amazon Web Services accounts. If you use Organizations to manage your accounts, then you can share your resources with your entire organization or to organizational units (OUs). For supported resource types, you can also share resources with individual Identity and Access Management (IAM) roles and users.
To learn more about RAM, see the following resources:
Usage
ram(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- ram( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
accept_resource_share_invitation | Accepts an invitation to a resource share from another Amazon Web Services account |
associate_resource_share | Adds the specified list of principals and list of resources to a resource share |
associate_resource_share_permission | Adds or replaces the RAM permission for a resource type included in a resource share |
create_permission | Creates a customer managed permission for a specified resource type that you can attach to resource shares |
create_permission_version | Creates a new version of the specified customer managed permission |
create_resource_share | Creates a resource share |
delete_permission | Deletes the specified customer managed permission in the Amazon Web Services Region in which you call this operation |
delete_permission_version | Deletes one version of a customer managed permission |
delete_resource_share | Deletes the specified resource share |
disassociate_resource_share | Removes the specified principals or resources from participating in the specified resource share |
disassociate_resource_share_permission | Removes a managed permission from a resource share |
enable_sharing_with_aws_organization | Enables resource sharing within your organization in Organizations |
get_permission | Retrieves the contents of a managed permission in JSON format |
get_resource_policies | Retrieves the resource policies for the specified resources that you own and have shared |
get_resource_share_associations | Retrieves the lists of resources and principals that associated for resource shares that you own |
get_resource_share_invitations | Retrieves details about invitations that you have received for resource shares |
get_resource_shares | Retrieves details about the resource shares that you own or that are shared with you |
list_pending_invitation_resources | Lists the resources in a resource share that is shared with you but for which the invitation is still PENDING |
list_permission_associations | Lists information about the managed permission and its associations to any resource shares that use this managed permission |
list_permissions | Retrieves a list of available RAM permissions that you can use for the supported resource types |
list_permission_versions | Lists the available versions of the specified RAM permission |
list_principals | Lists the principals that you are sharing resources with or that are sharing resources with you |
list_replace_permission_associations_work | Retrieves the current status of the asynchronous tasks performed by RAM when you perform the ReplacePermissionAssociationsWork operation |
list_resources | Lists the resources that you added to a resource share or the resources that are shared with you |
list_resource_share_permissions | Lists the RAM permissions that are associated with a resource share |
list_resource_types | Lists the resource types that can be shared by RAM |
promote_permission_created_from_policy | When you attach a resource-based policy to a resource, RAM automatically creates a resource share of featureSet=CREATED_FROM_POLICY with a managed permission that has the same IAM permissions as the original resource-based policy |
promote_resource_share_created_from_policy | When you attach a resource-based policy to a resource, RAM automatically creates a resource share of featureSet=CREATED_FROM_POLICY with a managed permission that has the same IAM permissions as the original resource-based policy |
reject_resource_share_invitation | Rejects an invitation to a resource share from another Amazon Web Services account |
replace_permission_associations | Updates all resource shares that use a managed permission to a different managed permission |
set_default_permission_version | Designates the specified version number as the default version for the specified customer managed permission |
tag_resource | Adds the specified tag keys and values to a resource share or managed permission |
untag_resource | Removes the specified tag key and value pairs from the specified resource share or managed permission |
update_resource_share | Modifies some of the properties of the specified resource share |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- ram()
svc$accept_resource_share_invitation(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Accepts an invitation to a resource share from another Amazon Web Services account
Description
Accepts an invitation to a resource share from another Amazon Web Services account. After you accept the invitation, the resources included in the resource share are available to interact with in the relevant Amazon Web Services Management Consoles and tools.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_accept_resource_share_invitation/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_accept_resource_share_invitation(
resourceShareInvitationArn,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceShareInvitationArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the invitation that you want to accept. |
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
Adds the specified list of principals and list of resources to a resource share
Description
Adds the specified list of principals and list of resources to a resource share. Principals that already have access to this resource share immediately receive access to the added resources. Newly added principals immediately receive access to the resources shared in this resource share.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_associate_resource_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_associate_resource_share(
resourceShareArn,
resourceArns = NULL,
principals = NULL,
clientToken = NULL,
sources = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceShareArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource share that you want to add principals or resources to. |
resourceArns |
Specifies a list of Amazon Resource Names (ARNs)
of the resources that you want to share. This can be |
principals |
Specifies a list of principals to whom you want to the resource share.
This can be What the principals can do with the resources in the share is determined
by the RAM permissions that you associate with the resource share. See
You can include the following values:
Not all resource types can be shared with IAM roles and users. For more information, see Sharing with IAM roles and users in the Resource Access Manager User Guide. |
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
sources |
Specifies from which source accounts the service principal has access to the resources in this resource share. |
Adds or replaces the RAM permission for a resource type included in a resource share
Description
Adds or replaces the RAM permission for a resource type included in a resource share. You can have exactly one permission associated with each resource type in the resource share. You can add a new RAM permission only if there are currently no resources of that resource type currently in the resource share.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_associate_resource_share_permission/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_associate_resource_share_permission(
resourceShareArn,
permissionArn,
replace = NULL,
clientToken = NULL,
permissionVersion = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceShareArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource share to which you want to add or replace permissions. |
permissionArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
of the RAM permission to associate with the resource share. To find the
ARN for a permission, use either the
|
replace |
Specifies whether the specified permission should replace the existing
permission associated with the resource share. Use A resource share can have only one permission per resource type. If a
resource share already has a permission for the specified resource type
and you don't set |
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
permissionVersion |
Specifies the version of the RAM permission to associate with the
resource share. You can specify only the version that is currently set
as the default version for the permission. If you also set the You don't need to specify this parameter because the default behavior is to use the version that is currently set as the default version for the permission. This parameter is supported for backwards compatibility. |
Creates a customer managed permission for a specified resource type that you can attach to resource shares
Description
Creates a customer managed permission for a specified resource type that you can attach to resource shares. It is created in the Amazon Web Services Region in which you call the operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_create_permission/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_create_permission(
name,
resourceType,
policyTemplate,
clientToken = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
[required] Specifies the name of the customer managed permission. The name must be unique within the Amazon Web Services Region. |
resourceType |
[required] Specifies the name of the resource type that this customer managed permission applies to. The format is |
policyTemplate |
[required] A string in JSON format string that contains the following elements of a resource-based policy:
This template can't include either the |
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
tags |
Specifies a list of one or more tag key and value pairs to attach to the permission. |
Creates a new version of the specified customer managed permission
Description
Creates a new version of the specified customer managed permission. The new version is automatically set as the default version of the customer managed permission. New resource shares automatically use the default permission. Existing resource shares continue to use their original permission versions, but you can use replace_permission_associations
to update them.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_create_permission_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_create_permission_version(
permissionArn,
policyTemplate,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
permissionArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the customer managed permission you're creating a new version for. |
policyTemplate |
[required] A string in JSON format string that contains the following elements of a resource-based policy:
This template can't include either the |
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
Creates a resource share
Description
Creates a resource share. You can provide a list of the Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) for the resources that you want to share, a list of principals you want to share the resources with, and the permissions to grant those principals.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_create_resource_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_create_resource_share(
name,
resourceArns = NULL,
principals = NULL,
tags = NULL,
allowExternalPrincipals = NULL,
clientToken = NULL,
permissionArns = NULL,
sources = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
[required] Specifies the name of the resource share. |
resourceArns |
Specifies a list of one or more ARNs of the resources to associate with the resource share. |
principals |
Specifies a list of one or more principals to associate with the resource share. You can include the following values:
Not all resource types can be shared with IAM roles and users. For more information, see Sharing with IAM roles and users in the Resource Access Manager User Guide. |
tags |
Specifies one or more tags to attach to the resource share itself. It doesn't attach the tags to the resources associated with the resource share. |
allowExternalPrincipals |
Specifies whether principals outside your organization in Organizations
can be associated with a resource share. A value of |
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
permissionArns |
Specifies the Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) of the RAM permission to associate with the resource share. If you do not specify an ARN for the permission, RAM automatically attaches the default version of the permission for each resource type. You can associate only one permission with each resource type included in the resource share. |
sources |
Specifies from which source accounts the service principal has access to the resources in this resource share. |
Deletes the specified customer managed permission in the Amazon Web Services Region in which you call this operation
Description
Deletes the specified customer managed permission in the Amazon Web Services Region in which you call this operation. You can delete a customer managed permission only if it isn't attached to any resource share. The operation deletes all versions associated with the customer managed permission.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_delete_permission/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_delete_permission(permissionArn, clientToken = NULL)
Arguments
permissionArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the customer managed permission that you want to delete. |
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
Deletes one version of a customer managed permission
Description
Deletes one version of a customer managed permission. The version you specify must not be attached to any resource share and must not be the default version for the permission.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_delete_permission_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_delete_permission_version(
permissionArn,
permissionVersion,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
permissionArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the permission with the version you want to delete. |
permissionVersion |
[required] Specifies the version number to delete. You can't delete the default version for a customer managed permission. You can't delete a version if it's the only version of the permission. You must either first create another version, or delete the permission completely. You can't delete a version if it is attached to any resource shares. If
the version is the default, you must first use
|
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
Deletes the specified resource share
Description
Deletes the specified resource share.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_delete_resource_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_delete_resource_share(resourceShareArn, clientToken = NULL)
Arguments
resourceShareArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource share to delete. |
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
Removes the specified principals or resources from participating in the specified resource share
Description
Removes the specified principals or resources from participating in the specified resource share.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_disassociate_resource_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_disassociate_resource_share(
resourceShareArn,
resourceArns = NULL,
principals = NULL,
clientToken = NULL,
sources = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceShareArn |
[required] Specifies Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource share that you want to remove resources or principals from. |
resourceArns |
Specifies a list of Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) for one or more resources that you want to remove from the resource share. After the operation runs, these resources are no longer shared with principals associated with the resource share. |
principals |
Specifies a list of one or more principals that no longer are to have access to the resources in this resource share. You can include the following values:
Not all resource types can be shared with IAM roles and users. For more information, see Sharing with IAM roles and users in the Resource Access Manager User Guide. |
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
sources |
Specifies from which source accounts the service principal no longer has access to the resources in this resource share. |
Removes a managed permission from a resource share
Description
Removes a managed permission from a resource share. Permission changes take effect immediately. You can remove a managed permission from a resource share only if there are currently no resources of the relevant resource type currently attached to the resource share.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_disassociate_resource_share_permission/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_disassociate_resource_share_permission(
resourceShareArn,
permissionArn,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceShareArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource share that you want to remove the managed permission from. |
permissionArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the managed permission to disassociate from the resource share. Changes to permissions take effect immediately. |
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
Enables resource sharing within your organization in Organizations
Description
Enables resource sharing within your organization in Organizations. This operation creates a service-linked role called AWSServiceRoleForResourceAccessManager
that has the IAM managed policy named AWSResourceAccessManagerServiceRolePolicy attached. This role permits RAM to retrieve information about the organization and its structure. This lets you share resources with all of the accounts in the calling account's organization by specifying the organization ID, or all of the accounts in an organizational unit (OU) by specifying the OU ID. Until you enable sharing within the organization, you can specify only individual Amazon Web Services accounts, or for supported resource types, IAM roles and users.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_enable_sharing_with_aws_organization/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_enable_sharing_with_aws_organization()
Retrieves the contents of a managed permission in JSON format
Description
Retrieves the contents of a managed permission in JSON format.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_get_permission/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_get_permission(permissionArn, permissionVersion = NULL)
Arguments
permissionArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
of the permission whose contents you want to retrieve. To find the ARN
for a permission, use either the
|
permissionVersion |
Specifies the version number of the RAM permission to retrieve. If you don't specify this parameter, the operation retrieves the default version. To see the list of available versions, use
|
Retrieves the resource policies for the specified resources that you own and have shared
Description
Retrieves the resource policies for the specified resources that you own and have shared.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_get_resource_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_get_resource_policies(
resourceArns,
principal = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceArns |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) of the resources whose policies you want to retrieve. |
principal |
Specifies the principal. |
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included on each
page of the response. If you do not include this parameter, it defaults
to a value that is specific to the operation. If additional items exist
beyond the number you specify, the |
Retrieves the lists of resources and principals that associated for resource shares that you own
Description
Retrieves the lists of resources and principals that associated for resource shares that you own.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_get_resource_share_associations/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_get_resource_share_associations(
associationType,
resourceShareArns = NULL,
resourceArn = NULL,
principal = NULL,
associationStatus = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
associationType |
[required] Specifies whether you want to retrieve the associations that involve a specified resource or principal.
|
resourceShareArns |
Specifies a list of Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) of the resource share whose associations you want to retrieve. |
resourceArn |
Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a resource whose resource shares you want to retrieve. You cannot specify this parameter if the association type is
|
principal |
Specifies the ID of the principal whose resource shares you want to retrieve. This can be an Amazon Web Services account ID, an organization ID, an organizational unit ID, or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an individual IAM role or user. You cannot specify this parameter if the association type is |
associationStatus |
Specifies that you want to retrieve only associations that have this status. |
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included on each
page of the response. If you do not include this parameter, it defaults
to a value that is specific to the operation. If additional items exist
beyond the number you specify, the |
Retrieves details about invitations that you have received for resource shares
Description
Retrieves details about invitations that you have received for resource shares.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_get_resource_share_invitations/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_get_resource_share_invitations(
resourceShareInvitationArns = NULL,
resourceShareArns = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceShareInvitationArns |
Specifies the Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) of the resource share invitations you want information about. |
resourceShareArns |
Specifies that you want details about invitations only for the resource shares described by this list of Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) |
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included on each
page of the response. If you do not include this parameter, it defaults
to a value that is specific to the operation. If additional items exist
beyond the number you specify, the |
Retrieves details about the resource shares that you own or that are shared with you
Description
Retrieves details about the resource shares that you own or that are shared with you.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_get_resource_shares/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_get_resource_shares(
resourceShareArns = NULL,
resourceShareStatus = NULL,
resourceOwner,
name = NULL,
tagFilters = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
permissionArn = NULL,
permissionVersion = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceShareArns |
Specifies the Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) of individual resource shares that you want information about. |
resourceShareStatus |
Specifies that you want to retrieve details of only those resource shares that have this status. |
resourceOwner |
[required] Specifies that you want to retrieve details of only those resource shares that match the following:
|
name |
Specifies the name of an individual resource share that you want to retrieve details about. |
tagFilters |
Specifies that you want to retrieve details of only those resource shares that match the specified tag keys and values. |
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included on each
page of the response. If you do not include this parameter, it defaults
to a value that is specific to the operation. If additional items exist
beyond the number you specify, the |
permissionArn |
Specifies that you want to retrieve details of only those resource shares that use the managed permission with this Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
permissionVersion |
Specifies that you want to retrieve details for only those resource shares that use the specified version of the managed permission. |
Lists the resources in a resource share that is shared with you but for which the invitation is still PENDING
Description
Lists the resources in a resource share that is shared with you but for which the invitation is still PENDING
. That means that you haven't accepted or rejected the invitation and the invitation hasn't expired.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_list_pending_invitation_resources/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_list_pending_invitation_resources(
resourceShareInvitationArn,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
resourceRegionScope = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceShareInvitationArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
of the invitation. You can use
|
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included on each
page of the response. If you do not include this parameter, it defaults
to a value that is specific to the operation. If additional items exist
beyond the number you specify, the |
resourceRegionScope |
Specifies that you want the results to include only resources that have the specified scope.
The default value is |
Lists information about the managed permission and its associations to any resource shares that use this managed permission
Description
Lists information about the managed permission and its associations to any resource shares that use this managed permission. This lets you see which resource shares use which versions of the specified managed permission.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_list_permission_associations/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_list_permission_associations(
permissionArn = NULL,
permissionVersion = NULL,
associationStatus = NULL,
resourceType = NULL,
featureSet = NULL,
defaultVersion = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
permissionArn |
Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the managed permission. |
permissionVersion |
Specifies that you want to list only those associations with resource shares that use this version of the managed permission. If you don't provide a value for this parameter, then the operation returns information about associations with resource shares that use any version of the managed permission. |
associationStatus |
Specifies that you want to list only those associations with resource shares that match this status. |
resourceType |
Specifies that you want to list only those associations with resource shares that include at least one resource of this resource type. |
featureSet |
Specifies that you want to list only those associations with resource
shares that have a |
defaultVersion |
When When |
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included on each
page of the response. If you do not include this parameter, it defaults
to a value that is specific to the operation. If additional items exist
beyond the number you specify, the |
Lists the available versions of the specified RAM permission
Description
Lists the available versions of the specified RAM permission.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_list_permission_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_list_permission_versions(
permissionArn,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
permissionArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
of the RAM permission whose versions you want to list. You can use the
|
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included on each
page of the response. If you do not include this parameter, it defaults
to a value that is specific to the operation. If additional items exist
beyond the number you specify, the |
Retrieves a list of available RAM permissions that you can use for the supported resource types
Description
Retrieves a list of available RAM permissions that you can use for the supported resource types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_list_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_list_permissions(
resourceType = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
permissionType = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceType |
Specifies that you want to list only those permissions that apply to the specified resource type. This parameter is not case sensitive. For example, to list only permissions that apply to Amazon EC2 subnets,
specify |
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included on each
page of the response. If you do not include this parameter, it defaults
to a value that is specific to the operation. If additional items exist
beyond the number you specify, the |
permissionType |
Specifies that you want to list only permissions of this type:
If you don't specify this parameter, the default is |
Lists the principals that you are sharing resources with or that are sharing resources with you
Description
Lists the principals that you are sharing resources with or that are sharing resources with you.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_list_principals/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_list_principals(
resourceOwner,
resourceArn = NULL,
principals = NULL,
resourceType = NULL,
resourceShareArns = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceOwner |
[required] Specifies that you want to list information for only resource shares that match the following:
|
resourceArn |
Specifies that you want to list principal information for the resource share with the specified Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
principals |
Specifies that you want to list information for only the listed principals. You can include the following values:
Not all resource types can be shared with IAM roles and users. For more information, see Sharing with IAM roles and users in the Resource Access Manager User Guide. |
resourceType |
Specifies that you want to list information for only principals associated with resource shares that include the specified resource type. For a list of valid values, query the
|
resourceShareArns |
Specifies that you want to list information for only principals associated with the resource shares specified by a list the Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). |
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included on each
page of the response. If you do not include this parameter, it defaults
to a value that is specific to the operation. If additional items exist
beyond the number you specify, the |
Retrieves the current status of the asynchronous tasks performed by RAM when you perform the ReplacePermissionAssociationsWork operation
Description
Retrieves the current status of the asynchronous tasks performed by RAM when you perform the ReplacePermissionAssociationsWork operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_list_replace_permission_associations_work/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_list_replace_permission_associations_work(
workIds = NULL,
status = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
workIds |
A list of IDs. These values come from the |
status |
Specifies that you want to see only the details about requests with a status that matches this value. |
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included on each
page of the response. If you do not include this parameter, it defaults
to a value that is specific to the operation. If additional items exist
beyond the number you specify, the |
Lists the RAM permissions that are associated with a resource share
Description
Lists the RAM permissions that are associated with a resource share.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_list_resource_share_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_list_resource_share_permissions(
resourceShareArn,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceShareArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource share for which you want to retrieve the associated permissions. |
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included on each
page of the response. If you do not include this parameter, it defaults
to a value that is specific to the operation. If additional items exist
beyond the number you specify, the |
Lists the resource types that can be shared by RAM
Description
Lists the resource types that can be shared by RAM.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_list_resource_types/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_list_resource_types(
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
resourceRegionScope = NULL
)
Arguments
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included on each
page of the response. If you do not include this parameter, it defaults
to a value that is specific to the operation. If additional items exist
beyond the number you specify, the |
resourceRegionScope |
Specifies that you want the results to include only resources that have the specified scope.
The default value is |
Lists the resources that you added to a resource share or the resources that are shared with you
Description
Lists the resources that you added to a resource share or the resources that are shared with you.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_list_resources/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_list_resources(
resourceOwner,
principal = NULL,
resourceType = NULL,
resourceArns = NULL,
resourceShareArns = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
resourceRegionScope = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceOwner |
[required] Specifies that you want to list only the resource shares that match the following:
|
principal |
Specifies that you want to list only the resource shares that are associated with the specified principal. |
resourceType |
Specifies that you want to list only the resource shares that include resources of the specified resource type. For valid values, query the
|
resourceArns |
Specifies that you want to list only the resource shares that include resources with the specified Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). |
resourceShareArns |
Specifies that you want to list only resources in the resource shares identified by the specified Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). |
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included on each
page of the response. If you do not include this parameter, it defaults
to a value that is specific to the operation. If additional items exist
beyond the number you specify, the |
resourceRegionScope |
Specifies that you want the results to include only resources that have the specified scope.
The default value is |
When you attach a resource-based policy to a resource, RAM automatically creates a resource share of featureSet=CREATED_FROM_POLICY with a managed permission that has the same IAM permissions as the original resource-based policy
Description
When you attach a resource-based policy to a resource, RAM automatically creates a resource share of featureSet
=CREATED_FROM_POLICY
with a managed permission that has the same IAM permissions as the original resource-based policy. However, this type of managed permission is visible to only the resource share owner, and the associated resource share can't be modified by using RAM.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_promote_permission_created_from_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_promote_permission_created_from_policy(
permissionArn,
name,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
permissionArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
of the |
name |
[required] Specifies a name for the promoted customer managed permission. |
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
When you attach a resource-based policy to a resource, RAM automatically creates a resource share of featureSet=CREATED_FROM_POLICY with a managed permission that has the same IAM permissions as the original resource-based policy
Description
When you attach a resource-based policy to a resource, RAM automatically creates a resource share of featureSet
=CREATED_FROM_POLICY
with a managed permission that has the same IAM permissions as the original resource-based policy. However, this type of managed permission is visible to only the resource share owner, and the associated resource share can't be modified by using RAM.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_promote_resource_share_created_from_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_promote_resource_share_created_from_policy(resourceShareArn)
Arguments
resourceShareArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource share to promote. |
Rejects an invitation to a resource share from another Amazon Web Services account
Description
Rejects an invitation to a resource share from another Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_reject_resource_share_invitation/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_reject_resource_share_invitation(
resourceShareInvitationArn,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceShareInvitationArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the invitation that you want to reject. |
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
Updates all resource shares that use a managed permission to a different managed permission
Description
Updates all resource shares that use a managed permission to a different managed permission. This operation always applies the default version of the target managed permission. You can optionally specify that the update applies to only resource shares that currently use a specified version. This enables you to update to the latest version, without changing the which managed permission is used.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_replace_permission_associations/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_replace_permission_associations(
fromPermissionArn,
fromPermissionVersion = NULL,
toPermissionArn,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
fromPermissionArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the managed permission that you want to replace. |
fromPermissionVersion |
Specifies that you want to updated the permissions for only those resource shares that use the specified version of the managed permission. |
toPermissionArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the managed permission that you want to associate
with resource shares in place of the one specified by The operation always associates the version that is currently the default for the specified managed permission. |
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
Designates the specified version number as the default version for the specified customer managed permission
Description
Designates the specified version number as the default version for the specified customer managed permission. New resource shares automatically use this new default permission. Existing resource shares continue to use their original permission version, but you can use replace_permission_associations
to update them.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_set_default_permission_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_set_default_permission_version(
permissionArn,
permissionVersion,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
permissionArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the customer managed permission whose default version you want to change. |
permissionVersion |
[required] Specifies the version number that you want to designate as the default
for customer managed permission. To see a list of all available version
numbers, use |
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
Adds the specified tag keys and values to a resource share or managed permission
Description
Adds the specified tag keys and values to a resource share or managed permission. If you choose a resource share, the tags are attached to only the resource share, not to the resources that are in the resource share.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_tag_resource(resourceShareArn = NULL, tags, resourceArn = NULL)
Arguments
resourceShareArn |
Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
of the resource share that you want to add tags to. You must specify
either |
tags |
[required] A list of one or more tag key and value pairs. The tag key must be present and not be an empty string. The tag value must be present but can be an empty string. |
resourceArn |
Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
of the managed permission that you want to add tags to. You must specify
either |
Removes the specified tag key and value pairs from the specified resource share or managed permission
Description
Removes the specified tag key and value pairs from the specified resource share or managed permission.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_untag_resource(resourceShareArn = NULL, tagKeys, resourceArn = NULL)
Arguments
resourceShareArn |
Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
of the resource share that you want to remove tags from. The tags are
removed from the resource share, not the resources in the resource
share. You must specify either |
tagKeys |
[required] Specifies a list of one or more tag keys that you want to remove. |
resourceArn |
Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
of the managed permission that you want to remove tags from. You must
specify either |
Modifies some of the properties of the specified resource share
Description
Modifies some of the properties of the specified resource share.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ram_update_resource_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
ram_update_resource_share(
resourceShareArn,
name = NULL,
allowExternalPrincipals = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceShareArn |
[required] Specifies the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource share that you want to modify. |
name |
If specified, the new name that you want to attach to the resource share. |
allowExternalPrincipals |
Specifies whether principals outside your organization in Organizations can be associated with a resource share. |
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
Objects exported from other packages
Description
These objects are imported from other packages. Follow the links below to see their documentation.
- paws.common
config
,credentials
,creds
,list_paginators
,paginate
,paginate_lapply
,paginate_sapply
,paws_stream_parser
AWS Secrets Manager
Description
Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager
Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager provides a service to enable you to store, manage, and retrieve, secrets.
This guide provides descriptions of the Secrets Manager API. For more information about using this service, see the Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager User Guide.
API Version
This version of the Secrets Manager API Reference documents the Secrets Manager API version 2017-10-17.
For a list of endpoints, see Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager endpoints.
Support and Feedback for Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager
We welcome your feedback. Send your comments to awssecretsmanager-feedback@amazon.com, or post your feedback and questions in the Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager Discussion Forum. For more information about the Amazon Web Services Discussion Forums, see Forums Help.
Logging API Requests
Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager supports Amazon Web Services CloudTrail, a service that records Amazon Web Services API calls for your Amazon Web Services account and delivers log files to an Amazon S3 bucket. By using information that's collected by Amazon Web Services CloudTrail, you can determine the requests successfully made to Secrets Manager, who made the request, when it was made, and so on. For more about Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager and support for Amazon Web Services CloudTrail, see Logging Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager Events with Amazon Web Services CloudTrail in the Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager User Guide. To learn more about CloudTrail, including enabling it and find your log files, see the Amazon Web Services CloudTrail User Guide.
Usage
secretsmanager(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- secretsmanager( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
batch_get_secret_value | Retrieves the contents of the encrypted fields SecretString or SecretBinary for up to 20 secrets |
cancel_rotate_secret | Turns off automatic rotation, and if a rotation is currently in progress, cancels the rotation |
create_secret | Creates a new secret |
delete_resource_policy | Deletes the resource-based permission policy attached to the secret |
delete_secret | Deletes a secret and all of its versions |
describe_secret | Retrieves the details of a secret |
get_random_password | Generates a random password |
get_resource_policy | Retrieves the JSON text of the resource-based policy document attached to the secret |
get_secret_value | Retrieves the contents of the encrypted fields SecretString or SecretBinary from the specified version of a secret, whichever contains content |
list_secrets | Lists the secrets that are stored by Secrets Manager in the Amazon Web Services account, not including secrets that are marked for deletion |
list_secret_version_ids | Lists the versions of a secret |
put_resource_policy | Attaches a resource-based permission policy to a secret |
put_secret_value | Creates a new version with a new encrypted secret value and attaches it to the secret |
remove_regions_from_replication | For a secret that is replicated to other Regions, deletes the secret replicas from the Regions you specify |
replicate_secret_to_regions | Replicates the secret to a new Regions |
restore_secret | Cancels the scheduled deletion of a secret by removing the DeletedDate time stamp |
rotate_secret | Configures and starts the asynchronous process of rotating the secret |
stop_replication_to_replica | Removes the link between the replica secret and the primary secret and promotes the replica to a primary secret in the replica Region |
tag_resource | Attaches tags to a secret |
untag_resource | Removes specific tags from a secret |
update_secret | Modifies the details of a secret, including metadata and the secret value |
update_secret_version_stage | Modifies the staging labels attached to a version of a secret |
validate_resource_policy | Validates that a resource policy does not grant a wide range of principals access to your secret |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- secretsmanager()
# The following example shows how to cancel rotation for a secret. The
# operation sets the RotationEnabled field to false and cancels all
# scheduled rotations. To resume scheduled rotations, you must re-enable
# rotation by calling the rotate-secret operation.
svc$cancel_rotate_secret(
SecretId = "MyTestDatabaseSecret"
)
## End(Not run)
Retrieves the contents of the encrypted fields SecretString or SecretBinary for up to 20 secrets
Description
Retrieves the contents of the encrypted fields SecretString
or SecretBinary
for up to 20 secrets. To retrieve a single secret, call get_secret_value
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_batch_get_secret_value/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_batch_get_secret_value(
SecretIdList = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
SecretIdList |
The ARN or names of the secrets to retrieve. You must include |
Filters |
The filters to choose which secrets to retrieve. You must include
|
MaxResults |
The number of results to include in the response. If there are more results available, in the response, Secrets Manager
includes |
NextToken |
A token that indicates where the output should continue from, if a
previous call did not show all results. To get the next results, call
|
Turns off automatic rotation, and if a rotation is currently in progress, cancels the rotation
Description
Turns off automatic rotation, and if a rotation is currently in progress, cancels the rotation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_cancel_rotate_secret/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_cancel_rotate_secret(SecretId)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or name of the secret. For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN. |
Creates a new secret
Description
Creates a new secret. A secret can be a password, a set of credentials such as a user name and password, an OAuth token, or other secret information that you store in an encrypted form in Secrets Manager. The secret also includes the connection information to access a database or other service, which Secrets Manager doesn't encrypt. A secret in Secrets Manager consists of both the protected secret data and the important information needed to manage the secret.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_create_secret/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_create_secret(
Name,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
Description = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
SecretBinary = NULL,
SecretString = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
AddReplicaRegions = NULL,
ForceOverwriteReplicaSecret = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the new secret. The secret name can contain ASCII letters, numbers, and the following characters: /_+=.@- Do not end your secret name with a hyphen followed by six characters. If you do so, you risk confusion and unexpected results when searching for a secret by partial ARN. Secrets Manager automatically adds a hyphen and six random characters after the secret name at the end of the ARN. |
ClientRequestToken |
If you include If you use the Amazon Web Services CLI or one of the Amazon Web Services SDKs to call this operation, then you can leave this parameter empty. The CLI or SDK generates a random UUID for you and includes it as the value for this parameter in the request. If you generate a raw HTTP request to the Secrets Manager service
endpoint, then you must generate a This value helps ensure idempotency. Secrets Manager uses this value to prevent the accidental creation of duplicate versions if there are failures and retries during a rotation. We recommend that you generate a UUID-type value to ensure uniqueness of your versions within the specified secret.
This value becomes the |
Description |
The description of the secret. |
KmsKeyId |
The ARN, key ID, or alias of the KMS key that Secrets Manager uses to
encrypt the secret value in the secret. An alias is always prefixed by
To use a KMS key in a different account, use the key ARN or the alias ARN. If you don't specify this value, then Secrets Manager uses the key
If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account from the
credentials calling the API, then you can't use |
SecretBinary |
The binary data to encrypt and store in the new version of the secret. We recommend that you store your binary data in a file and then pass the contents of the file as a parameter. Either This parameter is not available in the Secrets Manager console. Sensitive: This field contains sensitive information, so the service does not include it in CloudTrail log entries. If you create your own log entries, you must also avoid logging the information in this field. |
SecretString |
The text data to encrypt and store in this new version of the secret. We recommend you use a JSON structure of key/value pairs for your secret value. Either If you create a secret by using the Secrets Manager console then Secrets
Manager puts the protected secret text in only the Sensitive: This field contains sensitive information, so the service does not include it in CloudTrail log entries. If you create your own log entries, you must also avoid logging the information in this field. |
Tags |
A list of tags to attach to the secret. Each tag is a key and value pair of strings in a JSON text string, for example:
Secrets Manager tag key names are case sensitive. A tag with the key "ABC" is a different tag from one with key "abc". If you check tags in permissions policies as part of your security
strategy, then adding or removing a tag can change permissions. If the
completion of this operation would result in you losing your permissions
for this secret, then Secrets Manager blocks the operation and returns
an For information about how to format a JSON parameter for the various command line tool environments, see Using JSON for Parameters. If your command-line tool or SDK requires quotation marks around the parameter, you should use single quotes to avoid confusion with the double quotes required in the JSON text. For tag quotas and naming restrictions, see Service quotas for Tagging in the Amazon Web Services General Reference guide. |
AddReplicaRegions |
A list of Regions and KMS keys to replicate secrets. |
ForceOverwriteReplicaSecret |
Specifies whether to overwrite a secret with the same name in the destination Region. By default, secrets aren't overwritten. |
Deletes the resource-based permission policy attached to the secret
Description
Deletes the resource-based permission policy attached to the secret. To attach a policy to a secret, use put_resource_policy
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_delete_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_delete_resource_policy(SecretId)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or name of the secret to delete the attached resource-based policy for. For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN. |
Deletes a secret and all of its versions
Description
Deletes a secret and all of its versions. You can specify a recovery window during which you can restore the secret. The minimum recovery window is 7 days. The default recovery window is 30 days. Secrets Manager attaches a DeletionDate
stamp to the secret that specifies the end of the recovery window. At the end of the recovery window, Secrets Manager deletes the secret permanently.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_delete_secret/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_delete_secret(
SecretId,
RecoveryWindowInDays = NULL,
ForceDeleteWithoutRecovery = NULL
)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or name of the secret to delete. For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN. |
RecoveryWindowInDays |
The number of days from 7 to 30 that Secrets Manager waits before
permanently deleting the secret. You can't use both this parameter and
|
ForceDeleteWithoutRecovery |
Specifies whether to delete the secret without any recovery window. You
can't use both this parameter and Secrets Manager performs the actual deletion with an asynchronous background process, so there might be a short delay before the secret is permanently deleted. If you delete a secret and then immediately create a secret with the same name, use appropriate back off and retry logic. If you forcibly delete an already deleted or nonexistent secret, the
operation does not return Use this parameter with caution. This parameter causes the operation to
skip the normal recovery window before the permanent deletion that
Secrets Manager would normally impose with the |
Retrieves the details of a secret
Description
Retrieves the details of a secret. It does not include the encrypted secret value. Secrets Manager only returns fields that have a value in the response.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_describe_secret/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_describe_secret(SecretId)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or name of the secret. For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN. |
Generates a random password
Description
Generates a random password. We recommend that you specify the maximum length and include every character type that the system you are generating a password for can support. By default, Secrets Manager uses uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and the following characters in passwords: !\\"#$%&\'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\\]^_\`{|}~
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_get_random_password/ for full documentation.
[\]: R:%5C%5C%5C [https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_get_random_password/]: R:https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_get_random_password/
Usage
secretsmanager_get_random_password(
PasswordLength = NULL,
ExcludeCharacters = NULL,
ExcludeNumbers = NULL,
ExcludePunctuation = NULL,
ExcludeUppercase = NULL,
ExcludeLowercase = NULL,
IncludeSpace = NULL,
RequireEachIncludedType = NULL
)
Arguments
PasswordLength |
The length of the password. If you don't include this parameter, the default length is 32 characters. |
ExcludeCharacters |
A string of the characters that you don't want in the password. |
ExcludeNumbers |
Specifies whether to exclude numbers from the password. If you don't include this switch, the password can contain numbers. |
ExcludePunctuation |
Specifies whether to exclude the following punctuation characters from
the password:
|
ExcludeUppercase |
Specifies whether to exclude uppercase letters from the password. If you don't include this switch, the password can contain uppercase letters. |
ExcludeLowercase |
Specifies whether to exclude lowercase letters from the password. If you don't include this switch, the password can contain lowercase letters. |
IncludeSpace |
Specifies whether to include the space character. If you include this switch, the password can contain space characters. |
RequireEachIncludedType |
Specifies whether to include at least one upper and lowercase letter, one number, and one punctuation. If you don't include this switch, the password contains at least one of every character type. |
Retrieves the JSON text of the resource-based policy document attached to the secret
Description
Retrieves the JSON text of the resource-based policy document attached to the secret. For more information about permissions policies attached to a secret, see Permissions policies attached to a secret.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_get_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_get_resource_policy(SecretId)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or name of the secret to retrieve the attached resource-based policy for. For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN. |
Retrieves the contents of the encrypted fields SecretString or SecretBinary from the specified version of a secret, whichever contains content
Description
Retrieves the contents of the encrypted fields SecretString
or SecretBinary
from the specified version of a secret, whichever contains content.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_get_secret_value/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_get_secret_value(
SecretId,
VersionId = NULL,
VersionStage = NULL
)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or name of the secret to retrieve. To retrieve a secret from another account, you must use an ARN. For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN. |
VersionId |
The unique identifier of the version of the secret to retrieve. If you
include both this parameter and This value is typically a UUID-type value with 32 hexadecimal digits. |
VersionStage |
The staging label of the version of the secret to retrieve. Secrets Manager uses staging labels to keep track of different versions
during the rotation process. If you include both this parameter and
|
Lists the versions of a secret
Description
Lists the versions of a secret. Secrets Manager uses staging labels to indicate the different versions of a secret. For more information, see Secrets Manager concepts: Versions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_list_secret_version_ids/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_list_secret_version_ids(
SecretId,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
IncludeDeprecated = NULL
)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or name of the secret whose versions you want to list. For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN. |
MaxResults |
The number of results to include in the response. If there are more results available, in the response, Secrets Manager
includes |
NextToken |
A token that indicates where the output should continue from, if a
previous call did not show all results. To get the next results, call
|
IncludeDeprecated |
Specifies whether to include versions of secrets that don't have any staging labels attached to them. Versions without staging labels are considered deprecated and are subject to deletion by Secrets Manager. By default, versions without staging labels aren't included. |
Lists the secrets that are stored by Secrets Manager in the Amazon Web Services account, not including secrets that are marked for deletion
Description
Lists the secrets that are stored by Secrets Manager in the Amazon Web Services account, not including secrets that are marked for deletion. To see secrets marked for deletion, use the Secrets Manager console.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_list_secrets/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_list_secrets(
IncludePlannedDeletion = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
SortOrder = NULL
)
Arguments
IncludePlannedDeletion |
Specifies whether to include secrets scheduled for deletion. By default, secrets scheduled for deletion aren't included. |
MaxResults |
The number of results to include in the response. If there are more results available, in the response, Secrets Manager
includes |
NextToken |
A token that indicates where the output should continue from, if a
previous call did not show all results. To get the next results, call
|
Filters |
The filters to apply to the list of secrets. |
SortOrder |
Secrets are listed by |
Attaches a resource-based permission policy to a secret
Description
Attaches a resource-based permission policy to a secret. A resource-based policy is optional. For more information, see Authentication and access control for Secrets Manager
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_put_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_put_resource_policy(
SecretId,
ResourcePolicy,
BlockPublicPolicy = NULL
)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or name of the secret to attach the resource-based policy. For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN. |
ResourcePolicy |
[required] A JSON-formatted string for an Amazon Web Services resource-based policy. For example policies, see Permissions policy examples. |
BlockPublicPolicy |
Specifies whether to block resource-based policies that allow broad access to the secret, for example those that use a wildcard for the principal. By default, public policies aren't blocked. Resource policy validation and the BlockPublicPolicy parameter help protect your resources by preventing public access from being granted through the resource policies that are directly attached to your secrets. In addition to using these features, carefully inspect the following policies to confirm that they do not grant public access:
To review permissions to your secrets, see Determine who has permissions to your secrets. |
Creates a new version with a new encrypted secret value and attaches it to the secret
Description
Creates a new version with a new encrypted secret value and attaches it to the secret. The version can contain a new SecretString
value or a new SecretBinary
value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_put_secret_value/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_put_secret_value(
SecretId,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
SecretBinary = NULL,
SecretString = NULL,
VersionStages = NULL,
RotationToken = NULL
)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or name of the secret to add a new version to. For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN. If the secret doesn't already exist, use
|
ClientRequestToken |
A unique identifier for the new version of the secret. If you use the Amazon Web Services CLI or one of the Amazon Web Services SDKs to call this operation, then you can leave this parameter empty. The CLI or SDK generates a random UUID for you and includes it as the value for this parameter in the request. If you generate a raw HTTP request to the Secrets Manager service
endpoint, then you must generate a This value helps ensure idempotency. Secrets Manager uses this value to prevent the accidental creation of duplicate versions if there are failures and retries during a rotation. We recommend that you generate a UUID-type value to ensure uniqueness of your versions within the specified secret.
This value becomes the |
SecretBinary |
The binary data to encrypt and store in the new version of the secret. To use this parameter in the command-line tools, we recommend that you store your binary data in a file and then pass the contents of the file as a parameter. You must include You can't access this value from the Secrets Manager console. Sensitive: This field contains sensitive information, so the service does not include it in CloudTrail log entries. If you create your own log entries, you must also avoid logging the information in this field. |
SecretString |
The text to encrypt and store in the new version of the secret. You must include We recommend you create the secret string as JSON key/value pairs, as shown in the example. Sensitive: This field contains sensitive information, so the service does not include it in CloudTrail log entries. If you create your own log entries, you must also avoid logging the information in this field. |
VersionStages |
A list of staging labels to attach to this version of the secret. Secrets Manager uses staging labels to track versions of a secret through the rotation process. If you specify a staging label that's already associated with a
different version of the same secret, then Secrets Manager removes the
label from the other version and attaches it to this version. If you
specify If you don't include |
RotationToken |
A unique identifier that indicates the source of the request. For cross-account rotation (when you rotate a secret in one account by using a Lambda rotation function in another account) and the Lambda rotation function assumes an IAM role to call Secrets Manager, Secrets Manager validates the identity with the rotation token. For more information, see How rotation works. Sensitive: This field contains sensitive information, so the service does not include it in CloudTrail log entries. If you create your own log entries, you must also avoid logging the information in this field. |
For a secret that is replicated to other Regions, deletes the secret replicas from the Regions you specify
Description
For a secret that is replicated to other Regions, deletes the secret replicas from the Regions you specify.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_remove_regions_from_replication/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_remove_regions_from_replication(SecretId, RemoveReplicaRegions)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or name of the secret. |
RemoveReplicaRegions |
[required] The Regions of the replicas to remove. |
Replicates the secret to a new Regions
Description
Replicates the secret to a new Regions. See Multi-Region secrets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_replicate_secret_to_regions/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_replicate_secret_to_regions(
SecretId,
AddReplicaRegions,
ForceOverwriteReplicaSecret = NULL
)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or name of the secret to replicate. |
AddReplicaRegions |
[required] A list of Regions in which to replicate the secret. |
ForceOverwriteReplicaSecret |
Specifies whether to overwrite a secret with the same name in the destination Region. By default, secrets aren't overwritten. |
Cancels the scheduled deletion of a secret by removing the DeletedDate time stamp
Description
Cancels the scheduled deletion of a secret by removing the DeletedDate
time stamp. You can access a secret again after it has been restored.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_restore_secret/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_restore_secret(SecretId)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or name of the secret to restore. For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN. |
Configures and starts the asynchronous process of rotating the secret
Description
Configures and starts the asynchronous process of rotating the secret. For information about rotation, see Rotate secrets in the Secrets Manager User Guide. If you include the configuration parameters, the operation sets the values for the secret and then immediately starts a rotation. If you don't include the configuration parameters, the operation starts a rotation with the values already stored in the secret.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_rotate_secret/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_rotate_secret(
SecretId,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
RotationLambdaARN = NULL,
RotationRules = NULL,
RotateImmediately = NULL
)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or name of the secret to rotate. For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN. |
ClientRequestToken |
A unique identifier for the new version of the secret. You only need to specify this value if you implement your own retry logic and you want to ensure that Secrets Manager doesn't attempt to create a secret version twice. If you use the Amazon Web Services CLI or one of the Amazon Web Services SDKs to call this operation, then you can leave this parameter empty. The CLI or SDK generates a random UUID for you and includes it as the value for this parameter in the request. If you generate a raw HTTP request to the Secrets Manager service
endpoint, then you must generate a This value helps ensure idempotency. Secrets Manager uses this value to prevent the accidental creation of duplicate versions if there are failures and retries during a rotation. We recommend that you generate a UUID-type value to ensure uniqueness of your versions within the specified secret. |
RotationLambdaARN |
For secrets that use a Lambda rotation function to rotate, the ARN of the Lambda rotation function. For secrets that use managed rotation, omit this field. For more information, see Managed rotation in the Secrets Manager User Guide. |
RotationRules |
A structure that defines the rotation configuration for this secret. |
RotateImmediately |
Specifies whether to rotate the secret immediately or wait until the next scheduled rotation window. The rotation schedule is defined in RotateSecretRequest$RotationRules. For secrets that use a Lambda rotation function to rotate, if you don't
immediately rotate the secret, Secrets Manager tests the rotation
configuration by running the By default, Secrets Manager rotates the secret immediately. |
Removes the link between the replica secret and the primary secret and promotes the replica to a primary secret in the replica Region
Description
Removes the link between the replica secret and the primary secret and promotes the replica to a primary secret in the replica Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_stop_replication_to_replica/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_stop_replication_to_replica(SecretId)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN of the primary secret. |
Attaches tags to a secret
Description
Attaches tags to a secret. Tags consist of a key name and a value. Tags are part of the secret's metadata. They are not associated with specific versions of the secret. This operation appends tags to the existing list of tags.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_tag_resource(SecretId, Tags)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The identifier for the secret to attach tags to. You can specify either the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) or the friendly name of the secret. For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN. |
Tags |
[required] The tags to attach to the secret as a JSON text string argument. Each
element in the list consists of a For storing multiple values, we recommend that you use a JSON text string argument and specify key/value pairs. For more information, see Specifying parameter values for the Amazon Web Services CLI in the Amazon Web Services CLI User Guide. |
Removes specific tags from a secret
Description
Removes specific tags from a secret.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_untag_resource(SecretId, TagKeys)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or name of the secret. For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN. |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of tag key names to remove from the secret. You don't specify the value. Both the key and its associated value are removed. This parameter requires a JSON text string argument. For storing multiple values, we recommend that you use a JSON text string argument and specify key/value pairs. For more information, see Specifying parameter values for the Amazon Web Services CLI in the Amazon Web Services CLI User Guide. |
Modifies the details of a secret, including metadata and the secret value
Description
Modifies the details of a secret, including metadata and the secret value. To change the secret value, you can also use put_secret_value
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_update_secret/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_update_secret(
SecretId,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
Description = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
SecretBinary = NULL,
SecretString = NULL
)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or name of the secret. For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN. |
ClientRequestToken |
If you include If you use the Amazon Web Services CLI or one of the Amazon Web Services SDKs to call this operation, then you can leave this parameter empty. The CLI or SDK generates a random UUID for you and includes it as the value for this parameter in the request. If you generate a raw HTTP request to the Secrets Manager service
endpoint, then you must generate a This value helps ensure idempotency. Secrets Manager uses this value to prevent the accidental creation of duplicate versions if there are failures and retries during a rotation. We recommend that you generate a UUID-type value to ensure uniqueness of your versions within the specified secret. |
Description |
The description of the secret. |
KmsKeyId |
The ARN, key ID, or alias of the KMS key that Secrets Manager uses to
encrypt new secret versions as well as any existing versions with the
staging labels A key alias is always prefixed by If you set this to an empty string, Secrets Manager uses the Amazon Web
Services managed key You can only use the Amazon Web Services managed key
|
SecretBinary |
The binary data to encrypt and store in the new version of the secret. We recommend that you store your binary data in a file and then pass the contents of the file as a parameter. Either You can't access this parameter in the Secrets Manager console. Sensitive: This field contains sensitive information, so the service does not include it in CloudTrail log entries. If you create your own log entries, you must also avoid logging the information in this field. |
SecretString |
The text data to encrypt and store in the new version of the secret. We recommend you use a JSON structure of key/value pairs for your secret value. Either Sensitive: This field contains sensitive information, so the service does not include it in CloudTrail log entries. If you create your own log entries, you must also avoid logging the information in this field. |
Modifies the staging labels attached to a version of a secret
Description
Modifies the staging labels attached to a version of a secret. Secrets Manager uses staging labels to track a version as it progresses through the secret rotation process. Each staging label can be attached to only one version at a time. To add a staging label to a version when it is already attached to another version, Secrets Manager first removes it from the other version first and then attaches it to this one. For more information about versions and staging labels, see Concepts: Version.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_update_secret_version_stage/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_update_secret_version_stage(
SecretId,
VersionStage,
RemoveFromVersionId = NULL,
MoveToVersionId = NULL
)
Arguments
SecretId |
[required] The ARN or the name of the secret with the version and staging labelsto modify. For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN. |
VersionStage |
[required] The staging label to add to this version. |
RemoveFromVersionId |
The ID of the version that the staging label is to be removed from. If the staging label you are trying to attach to one version is already attached to a different version, then you must include this parameter and specify the version that the label is to be removed from. If the label is attached and you either do not specify this parameter, or the version ID does not match, then the operation fails. |
MoveToVersionId |
The ID of the version to add the staging label to. To remove a label from a version, then do not specify this parameter. If the staging label is already attached to a different version of the
secret, then you must also specify the |
Validates that a resource policy does not grant a wide range of principals access to your secret
Description
Validates that a resource policy does not grant a wide range of principals access to your secret. A resource-based policy is optional for secrets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/secretsmanager_validate_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
secretsmanager_validate_resource_policy(SecretId = NULL, ResourcePolicy)
Arguments
SecretId |
The ARN or name of the secret with the resource-based policy you want to validate. |
ResourcePolicy |
[required] A JSON-formatted string that contains an Amazon Web Services resource-based policy. The policy in the string identifies who can access or manage this secret and its versions. For example policies, see Permissions policy examples. |
AWS SecurityHub
Description
Security Hub provides you with a comprehensive view of your security state in Amazon Web Services and helps you assess your Amazon Web Services environment against security industry standards and best practices.
Security Hub collects security data across Amazon Web Services accounts, Amazon Web Services services, and supported third-party products and helps you analyze your security trends and identify the highest priority security issues.
To help you manage the security state of your organization, Security Hub supports multiple security standards. These include the Amazon Web Services Foundational Security Best Practices (FSBP) standard developed by Amazon Web Services, and external compliance frameworks such as the Center for Internet Security (CIS), the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS), and the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Each standard includes several security controls, each of which represents a security best practice. Security Hub runs checks against security controls and generates control findings to help you assess your compliance against security best practices.
In addition to generating control findings, Security Hub also receives findings from other Amazon Web Services services, such as Amazon GuardDuty and Amazon Inspector, and supported third-party products. This gives you a single pane of glass into a variety of security-related issues. You can also send Security Hub findings to other Amazon Web Services services and supported third-party products.
Security Hub offers automation features that help you triage and remediate security issues. For example, you can use automation rules to automatically update critical findings when a security check fails. You can also leverage the integration with Amazon EventBridge to trigger automatic responses to specific findings.
This guide, the Security Hub API Reference, provides information about the Security Hub API. This includes supported resources, HTTP methods, parameters, and schemas. If you're new to Security Hub, you might find it helpful to also review the Security Hub User Guide . The user guide explains key concepts and provides procedures that demonstrate how to use Security Hub features. It also provides information about topics such as integrating Security Hub with other Amazon Web Services services.
In addition to interacting with Security Hub by making calls to the Security Hub API, you can use a current version of an Amazon Web Services command line tool or SDK. Amazon Web Services provides tools and SDKs that consist of libraries and sample code for various languages and platforms, such as PowerShell, Java, Go, Python, C++, and .NET. These tools and SDKs provide convenient, programmatic access to Security Hub and other Amazon Web Services services . They also handle tasks such as signing requests, managing errors, and retrying requests automatically. For information about installing and using the Amazon Web Services tools and SDKs, see Tools to Build on Amazon Web Services.
With the exception of operations that are related to central configuration, Security Hub API requests are executed only in the Amazon Web Services Region that is currently active or in the specific Amazon Web Services Region that you specify in your request. Any configuration or settings change that results from the operation is applied only to that Region. To make the same change in other Regions, call the same API operation in each Region in which you want to apply the change. When you use central configuration, API requests for enabling Security Hub, standards, and controls are executed in the home Region and all linked Regions. For a list of central configuration operations, see the Central configuration terms and concepts section of the Security Hub User Guide.
The following throttling limits apply to Security Hub API operations.
-
batch_enable_standards
-RateLimit
of 1 request per second.BurstLimit
of 1 request per second. -
get_findings
-RateLimit
of 3 requests per second.BurstLimit
of 6 requests per second. -
batch_import_findings
-RateLimit
of 10 requests per second.BurstLimit
of 30 requests per second. -
batch_update_findings
-RateLimit
of 10 requests per second.BurstLimit
of 30 requests per second. -
update_standards_control
-RateLimit
of 1 request per second.BurstLimit
of 5 requests per second. All other operations -
RateLimit
of 10 requests per second.BurstLimit
of 30 requests per second.
Usage
securityhub(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- securityhub( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
accept_administrator_invitation | We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts |
accept_invitation | This method is deprecated |
batch_delete_automation_rules | Deletes one or more automation rules |
batch_disable_standards | Disables the standards specified by the provided StandardsSubscriptionArns |
batch_enable_standards | Enables the standards specified by the provided StandardsArn |
batch_get_automation_rules | Retrieves a list of details for automation rules based on rule Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) |
batch_get_configuration_policy_associations | Returns associations between an Security Hub configuration and a batch of target accounts, organizational units, or the root |
batch_get_security_controls | Provides details about a batch of security controls for the current Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Web Services Region |
batch_get_standards_control_associations | For a batch of security controls and standards, identifies whether each control is currently enabled or disabled in a standard |
batch_import_findings | Imports security findings generated by a finding provider into Security Hub |
batch_update_automation_rules | Updates one or more automation rules based on rule Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and input parameters |
batch_update_findings | Used by Security Hub customers to update information about their investigation into a finding |
batch_update_standards_control_associations | For a batch of security controls and standards, this operation updates the enablement status of a control in a standard |
create_action_target | Creates a custom action target in Security Hub |
create_automation_rule | Creates an automation rule based on input parameters |
create_configuration_policy | Creates a configuration policy with the defined configuration |
create_finding_aggregator | The aggregation Region is now called the home Region |
create_insight | Creates a custom insight in Security Hub |
create_members | Creates a member association in Security Hub between the specified accounts and the account used to make the request, which is the administrator account |
decline_invitations | We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts |
delete_action_target | Deletes a custom action target from Security Hub |
delete_configuration_policy | Deletes a configuration policy |
delete_finding_aggregator | The aggregation Region is now called the home Region |
delete_insight | Deletes the insight specified by the InsightArn |
delete_invitations | We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts |
delete_members | Deletes the specified member accounts from Security Hub |
describe_action_targets | Returns a list of the custom action targets in Security Hub in your account |
describe_hub | Returns details about the Hub resource in your account, including the HubArn and the time when you enabled Security Hub |
describe_organization_configuration | Returns information about the way your organization is configured in Security Hub |
describe_products | Returns information about product integrations in Security Hub |
describe_standards | Returns a list of the available standards in Security Hub |
describe_standards_controls | Returns a list of security standards controls |
disable_import_findings_for_product | Disables the integration of the specified product with Security Hub |
disable_organization_admin_account | Disables a Security Hub administrator account |
disable_security_hub | Disables Security Hub in your account only in the current Amazon Web Services Region |
disassociate_from_administrator_account | Disassociates the current Security Hub member account from the associated administrator account |
disassociate_from_master_account | This method is deprecated |
disassociate_members | Disassociates the specified member accounts from the associated administrator account |
enable_import_findings_for_product | Enables the integration of a partner product with Security Hub |
enable_organization_admin_account | Designates the Security Hub administrator account for an organization |
enable_security_hub | Enables Security Hub for your account in the current Region or the Region you specify in the request |
get_administrator_account | Provides the details for the Security Hub administrator account for the current member account |
get_configuration_policy | Provides information about a configuration policy |
get_configuration_policy_association | Returns the association between a configuration and a target account, organizational unit, or the root |
get_enabled_standards | Returns a list of the standards that are currently enabled |
get_finding_aggregator | The aggregation Region is now called the home Region |
get_finding_history | Returns history for a Security Hub finding in the last 90 days |
get_findings | Returns a list of findings that match the specified criteria |
get_insight_results | Lists the results of the Security Hub insight specified by the insight ARN |
get_insights | Lists and describes insights for the specified insight ARNs |
get_invitations_count | We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts |
get_master_account | This method is deprecated |
get_members | Returns the details for the Security Hub member accounts for the specified account IDs |
get_security_control_definition | Retrieves the definition of a security control |
invite_members | We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts |
list_automation_rules | A list of automation rules and their metadata for the calling account |
list_configuration_policies | Lists the configuration policies that the Security Hub delegated administrator has created for your organization |
list_configuration_policy_associations | Provides information about the associations for your configuration policies and self-managed behavior |
list_enabled_products_for_import | Lists all findings-generating solutions (products) that you are subscribed to receive findings from in Security Hub |
list_finding_aggregators | If cross-Region aggregation is enabled, then ListFindingAggregators returns the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the finding aggregator |
list_invitations | We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts |
list_members | Lists details about all member accounts for the current Security Hub administrator account |
list_organization_admin_accounts | Lists the Security Hub administrator accounts |
list_security_control_definitions | Lists all of the security controls that apply to a specified standard |
list_standards_control_associations | Specifies whether a control is currently enabled or disabled in each enabled standard in the calling account |
list_tags_for_resource | Returns a list of tags associated with a resource |
start_configuration_policy_association | Associates a target account, organizational unit, or the root with a specified configuration |
start_configuration_policy_disassociation | Disassociates a target account, organizational unit, or the root from a specified configuration |
tag_resource | Adds one or more tags to a resource |
untag_resource | Removes one or more tags from a resource |
update_action_target | Updates the name and description of a custom action target in Security Hub |
update_configuration_policy | Updates a configuration policy |
update_finding_aggregator | The aggregation Region is now called the home Region |
update_findings | UpdateFindings is a deprecated operation |
update_insight | Updates the Security Hub insight identified by the specified insight ARN |
update_organization_configuration | Updates the configuration of your organization in Security Hub |
update_security_control | Updates the properties of a security control |
update_security_hub_configuration | Updates configuration options for Security Hub |
update_standards_control | Used to control whether an individual security standard control is enabled or disabled |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- securityhub()
svc$accept_administrator_invitation(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts
Description
We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts. For information, see Managing Security Hub administrator and member accounts with Organizations in the Security Hub User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_accept_administrator_invitation/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_accept_administrator_invitation(AdministratorId, InvitationId)
Arguments
AdministratorId |
[required] The account ID of the Security Hub administrator account that sent the invitation. |
InvitationId |
[required] The identifier of the invitation sent from the Security Hub administrator account. |
This method is deprecated
Description
This method is deprecated. Instead, use accept_administrator_invitation
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_accept_invitation/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_accept_invitation(MasterId, InvitationId)
Arguments
MasterId |
[required] The account ID of the Security Hub administrator account that sent the invitation. |
InvitationId |
[required] The identifier of the invitation sent from the Security Hub administrator account. |
Deletes one or more automation rules
Description
Deletes one or more automation rules.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_batch_delete_automation_rules/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_batch_delete_automation_rules(AutomationRulesArns)
Arguments
AutomationRulesArns |
[required] A list of Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) for the rules that are to be deleted. |
Disables the standards specified by the provided StandardsSubscriptionArns
Description
Disables the standards specified by the provided StandardsSubscriptionArns
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_batch_disable_standards/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_batch_disable_standards(StandardsSubscriptionArns)
Arguments
StandardsSubscriptionArns |
[required] The ARNs of the standards subscriptions to disable. |
Enables the standards specified by the provided StandardsArn
Description
Enables the standards specified by the provided StandardsArn
. To obtain the ARN for a standard, use the describe_standards
operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_batch_enable_standards/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_batch_enable_standards(StandardsSubscriptionRequests)
Arguments
StandardsSubscriptionRequests |
[required] The list of standards checks to enable. |
Retrieves a list of details for automation rules based on rule Amazon Resource Names (ARNs)
Description
Retrieves a list of details for automation rules based on rule Amazon Resource Names (ARNs).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_batch_get_automation_rules/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_batch_get_automation_rules(AutomationRulesArns)
Arguments
AutomationRulesArns |
[required] A list of rule ARNs to get details for. |
Returns associations between an Security Hub configuration and a batch of target accounts, organizational units, or the root
Description
Returns associations between an Security Hub configuration and a batch of target accounts, organizational units, or the root. Only the Security Hub delegated administrator can invoke this operation from the home Region. A configuration can refer to a configuration policy or to a self-managed configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_batch_get_configuration_policy_associations/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_batch_get_configuration_policy_associations(
ConfigurationPolicyAssociationIdentifiers
)
Arguments
ConfigurationPolicyAssociationIdentifiers |
[required] Specifies one or more target account IDs, organizational unit (OU) IDs, or the root ID to retrieve associations for. |
Provides details about a batch of security controls for the current Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Provides details about a batch of security controls for the current Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_batch_get_security_controls/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_batch_get_security_controls(SecurityControlIds)
Arguments
SecurityControlIds |
[required] A list of security controls (identified with |
For a batch of security controls and standards, identifies whether each control is currently enabled or disabled in a standard
Description
For a batch of security controls and standards, identifies whether each control is currently enabled or disabled in a standard.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_batch_get_standards_control_associations/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_batch_get_standards_control_associations(
StandardsControlAssociationIds
)
Arguments
StandardsControlAssociationIds |
[required] An array with one or more objects that includes a security control
(identified with |
Imports security findings generated by a finding provider into Security Hub
Description
Imports security findings generated by a finding provider into Security Hub. This action is requested by the finding provider to import its findings into Security Hub.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_batch_import_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_batch_import_findings(Findings)
Arguments
Findings |
[required] A list of findings to import. To successfully import a finding, it must follow the Amazon Web Services Security Finding Format. Maximum of 100 findings per request. |
Updates one or more automation rules based on rule Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and input parameters
Description
Updates one or more automation rules based on rule Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and input parameters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_batch_update_automation_rules/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_batch_update_automation_rules(UpdateAutomationRulesRequestItems)
Arguments
UpdateAutomationRulesRequestItems |
[required] An array of ARNs for the rules that are to be updated. Optionally, you
can also include |
Used by Security Hub customers to update information about their investigation into a finding
Description
Used by Security Hub customers to update information about their investigation into a finding. Requested by administrator accounts or member accounts. Administrator accounts can update findings for their account and their member accounts. Member accounts can update findings for their account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_batch_update_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_batch_update_findings(
FindingIdentifiers,
Note = NULL,
Severity = NULL,
VerificationState = NULL,
Confidence = NULL,
Criticality = NULL,
Types = NULL,
UserDefinedFields = NULL,
Workflow = NULL,
RelatedFindings = NULL
)
Arguments
FindingIdentifiers |
[required] The list of findings to update.
For each finding, the list provides the finding identifier and the ARN of the finding provider. |
Note |
|
Severity |
Used to update the finding severity. |
VerificationState |
Indicates the veracity of a finding. The available values for
|
Confidence |
The updated value for the finding confidence. Confidence is defined as the likelihood that a finding accurately identifies the behavior or issue that it was intended to identify. Confidence is scored on a 0-100 basis using a ratio scale, where 0 means zero percent confidence and 100 means 100 percent confidence. |
Criticality |
The updated value for the level of importance assigned to the resources associated with the findings. A score of 0 means that the underlying resources have no criticality, and a score of 100 is reserved for the most critical resources. |
Types |
One or more finding types in the format of namespace/category/classifier that classify a finding. Valid namespace values are as follows.
|
UserDefinedFields |
A list of name/value string pairs associated with the finding. These are custom, user-defined fields added to a finding. |
Workflow |
Used to update the workflow status of a finding. The workflow status indicates the progress of the investigation into the finding. |
RelatedFindings |
A list of findings that are related to the updated findings. |
For a batch of security controls and standards, this operation updates the enablement status of a control in a standard
Description
For a batch of security controls and standards, this operation updates the enablement status of a control in a standard.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_batch_update_standards_control_associations/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_batch_update_standards_control_associations(
StandardsControlAssociationUpdates
)
Arguments
StandardsControlAssociationUpdates |
[required] Updates the enablement status of a security control in a specified standard. |
Creates a custom action target in Security Hub
Description
Creates a custom action target in Security Hub.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_create_action_target/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_create_action_target(Name, Description, Id)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the custom action target. Can contain up to 20 characters. |
Description |
[required] The description for the custom action target. |
Id |
[required] The ID for the custom action target. Can contain up to 20 alphanumeric characters. |
Creates an automation rule based on input parameters
Description
Creates an automation rule based on input parameters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_create_automation_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_create_automation_rule(
Tags = NULL,
RuleStatus = NULL,
RuleOrder,
RuleName,
Description,
IsTerminal = NULL,
Criteria,
Actions
)
Arguments
Tags |
User-defined tags associated with an automation rule. |
RuleStatus |
Whether the rule is active after it is created. If this parameter is
equal to |
RuleOrder |
[required] An integer ranging from 1 to 1000 that represents the order in which the rule action is applied to findings. Security Hub applies rules with lower values for this parameter first. |
RuleName |
[required] The name of the rule. |
Description |
[required] A description of the rule. |
IsTerminal |
Specifies whether a rule is the last to be applied with respect to a finding that matches the rule criteria. This is useful when a finding matches the criteria for multiple rules, and each rule has different actions. If a rule is terminal, Security Hub applies the rule action to a finding that matches the rule criteria and doesn't evaluate other rules for the finding. By default, a rule isn't terminal. |
Criteria |
[required] A set of ASFF finding field attributes and corresponding expected values that Security Hub uses to filter findings. If a rule is enabled and a finding matches the conditions specified in this parameter, Security Hub applies the rule action to the finding. |
Actions |
[required] One or more actions to update finding fields if a finding matches the
conditions specified in |
Creates a configuration policy with the defined configuration
Description
Creates a configuration policy with the defined configuration. Only the Security Hub delegated administrator can invoke this operation from the home Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_create_configuration_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_create_configuration_policy(
Name,
Description = NULL,
ConfigurationPolicy,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the configuration policy. Alphanumeric characters and the
following ASCII characters are permitted: |
Description |
The description of the configuration policy. |
ConfigurationPolicy |
[required] An object that defines how Security Hub is configured. It includes whether Security Hub is enabled or disabled, a list of enabled security standards, a list of enabled or disabled security controls, and a list of custom parameter values for specified controls. If you provide a list of security controls that are enabled in the configuration policy, Security Hub disables all other controls (including newly released controls). If you provide a list of security controls that are disabled in the configuration policy, Security Hub enables all other controls (including newly released controls). |
Tags |
User-defined tags associated with a configuration policy. For more information, see Tagging Security Hub resources in the Security Hub user guide. |
The aggregation Region is now called the home Region
Description
The aggregation Region is now called the home Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_create_finding_aggregator/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_create_finding_aggregator(RegionLinkingMode, Regions = NULL)
Arguments
RegionLinkingMode |
[required] Indicates whether to aggregate findings from all of the available Regions in the current partition. Also determines whether to automatically aggregate findings from new Regions as Security Hub supports them and you opt into them. The selected option also determines how to use the Regions provided in the Regions list. The options are as follows:
|
Regions |
If If An |
Creates a custom insight in Security Hub
Description
Creates a custom insight in Security Hub. An insight is a consolidation of findings that relate to a security issue that requires attention or remediation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_create_insight/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_create_insight(Name, Filters, GroupByAttribute)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the custom insight to create. |
Filters |
[required] One or more attributes used to filter the findings included in the insight. The insight only includes findings that match the criteria defined in the filters. |
GroupByAttribute |
[required] The attribute used to group the findings for the insight. The grouping attribute identifies the type of item that the insight applies to. For example, if an insight is grouped by resource identifier, then the insight produces a list of resource identifiers. |
Creates a member association in Security Hub between the specified accounts and the account used to make the request, which is the administrator account
Description
Creates a member association in Security Hub between the specified accounts and the account used to make the request, which is the administrator account. If you are integrated with Organizations, then the administrator account is designated by the organization management account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_create_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_create_members(AccountDetails)
Arguments
AccountDetails |
[required] The list of accounts to associate with the Security Hub administrator account. For each account, the list includes the account ID and optionally the email address. |
We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts
Description
We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts. For information, see Managing Security Hub administrator and member accounts with Organizations in the Security Hub User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_decline_invitations/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_decline_invitations(AccountIds)
Arguments
AccountIds |
[required] The list of prospective member account IDs for which to decline an invitation. |
Deletes a custom action target from Security Hub
Description
Deletes a custom action target from Security Hub.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_delete_action_target/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_delete_action_target(ActionTargetArn)
Arguments
ActionTargetArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the custom action target to delete. |
Deletes a configuration policy
Description
Deletes a configuration policy. Only the Security Hub delegated administrator can invoke this operation from the home Region. For the deletion to succeed, you must first disassociate a configuration policy from target accounts, organizational units, or the root by invoking the start_configuration_policy_disassociation
operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_delete_configuration_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_delete_configuration_policy(Identifier)
Arguments
Identifier |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) or universally unique identifier (UUID) of the configuration policy. |
The aggregation Region is now called the home Region
Description
The aggregation Region is now called the home Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_delete_finding_aggregator/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_delete_finding_aggregator(FindingAggregatorArn)
Arguments
FindingAggregatorArn |
[required] The ARN of the finding aggregator to delete. To obtain the ARN, use
|
Deletes the insight specified by the InsightArn
Description
Deletes the insight specified by the InsightArn
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_delete_insight/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_delete_insight(InsightArn)
Arguments
InsightArn |
[required] The ARN of the insight to delete. |
We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts
Description
We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts. For information, see Managing Security Hub administrator and member accounts with Organizations in the Security Hub User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_delete_invitations/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_delete_invitations(AccountIds)
Arguments
AccountIds |
[required] The list of member account IDs that received the invitations you want to delete. |
Deletes the specified member accounts from Security Hub
Description
Deletes the specified member accounts from Security Hub.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_delete_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_delete_members(AccountIds)
Arguments
AccountIds |
[required] The list of account IDs for the member accounts to delete. |
Returns a list of the custom action targets in Security Hub in your account
Description
Returns a list of the custom action targets in Security Hub in your account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_describe_action_targets/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_describe_action_targets(
ActionTargetArns = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
ActionTargetArns |
A list of custom action target ARNs for the custom action targets to retrieve. |
NextToken |
The token that is required for pagination. On your first call to the
For subsequent calls to the operation, to continue listing data, set the value of this parameter to the value returned from the previous response. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
Returns details about the Hub resource in your account, including the HubArn and the time when you enabled Security Hub
Description
Returns details about the Hub resource in your account, including the HubArn
and the time when you enabled Security Hub.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_describe_hub/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_describe_hub(HubArn = NULL)
Arguments
HubArn |
The ARN of the Hub resource to retrieve. |
Returns information about the way your organization is configured in Security Hub
Description
Returns information about the way your organization is configured in Security Hub. Only the Security Hub administrator account can invoke this operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_describe_organization_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_describe_organization_configuration()
Returns information about product integrations in Security Hub
Description
Returns information about product integrations in Security Hub.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_describe_products/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_describe_products(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ProductArn = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
The token that is required for pagination. On your first call to the
For subsequent calls to the operation, to continue listing data, set the value of this parameter to the value returned from the previous response. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
ProductArn |
The ARN of the integration to return. |
Returns a list of the available standards in Security Hub
Description
Returns a list of the available standards in Security Hub.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_describe_standards/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_describe_standards(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
The token that is required for pagination. On your first call to the
For subsequent calls to the operation, to continue listing data, set the value of this parameter to the value returned from the previous response. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of standards to return. |
Returns a list of security standards controls
Description
Returns a list of security standards controls.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_describe_standards_controls/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_describe_standards_controls(
StandardsSubscriptionArn,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
StandardsSubscriptionArn |
[required] The ARN of a resource that represents your subscription to a supported
standard. To get the subscription ARNs of the standards you have
enabled, use the
|
NextToken |
The token that is required for pagination. On your first call to the
For subsequent calls to the operation, to continue listing data, set the value of this parameter to the value returned from the previous response. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of security standard controls to return. |
Disables the integration of the specified product with Security Hub
Description
Disables the integration of the specified product with Security Hub. After the integration is disabled, findings from that product are no longer sent to Security Hub.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_disable_import_findings_for_product/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_disable_import_findings_for_product(ProductSubscriptionArn)
Arguments
ProductSubscriptionArn |
[required] The ARN of the integrated product to disable the integration for. |
Disables a Security Hub administrator account
Description
Disables a Security Hub administrator account. Can only be called by the organization management account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_disable_organization_admin_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_disable_organization_admin_account(AdminAccountId)
Arguments
AdminAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account identifier of the Security Hub administrator account. |
Disables Security Hub in your account only in the current Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Disables Security Hub in your account only in the current Amazon Web Services Region. To disable Security Hub in all Regions, you must submit one request per Region where you have enabled Security Hub.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_disable_security_hub/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_disable_security_hub()
Disassociates the current Security Hub member account from the associated administrator account
Description
Disassociates the current Security Hub member account from the associated administrator account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_disassociate_from_administrator_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_disassociate_from_administrator_account()
This method is deprecated
Description
This method is deprecated. Instead, use disassociate_from_administrator_account
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_disassociate_from_master_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_disassociate_from_master_account()
Disassociates the specified member accounts from the associated administrator account
Description
Disassociates the specified member accounts from the associated administrator account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_disassociate_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_disassociate_members(AccountIds)
Arguments
AccountIds |
[required] The account IDs of the member accounts to disassociate from the administrator account. |
Enables the integration of a partner product with Security Hub
Description
Enables the integration of a partner product with Security Hub. Integrated products send findings to Security Hub.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_enable_import_findings_for_product/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_enable_import_findings_for_product(ProductArn)
Arguments
ProductArn |
[required] The ARN of the product to enable the integration for. |
Designates the Security Hub administrator account for an organization
Description
Designates the Security Hub administrator account for an organization. Can only be called by the organization management account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_enable_organization_admin_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_enable_organization_admin_account(AdminAccountId)
Arguments
AdminAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account identifier of the account to designate as the Security Hub administrator account. |
Enables Security Hub for your account in the current Region or the Region you specify in the request
Description
Enables Security Hub for your account in the current Region or the Region you specify in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_enable_security_hub/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_enable_security_hub(
Tags = NULL,
EnableDefaultStandards = NULL,
ControlFindingGenerator = NULL
)
Arguments
Tags |
The tags to add to the hub resource when you enable Security Hub. |
EnableDefaultStandards |
Whether to enable the security standards that Security Hub has
designated as automatically enabled. If you don't provide a value for
|
ControlFindingGenerator |
This field, used when enabling Security Hub, specifies whether the
calling account has consolidated control findings turned on. If the
value for this field is set to If the value for this field is set to The value for this field in a member account matches the value in the
administrator account. For accounts that aren't part of an organization,
the default value of this field is |
Provides the details for the Security Hub administrator account for the current member account
Description
Provides the details for the Security Hub administrator account for the current member account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_get_administrator_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_get_administrator_account()
Provides information about a configuration policy
Description
Provides information about a configuration policy. Only the Security Hub delegated administrator can invoke this operation from the home Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_get_configuration_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_get_configuration_policy(Identifier)
Arguments
Identifier |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) or universally unique identifier (UUID) of the configuration policy. |
Returns the association between a configuration and a target account, organizational unit, or the root
Description
Returns the association between a configuration and a target account, organizational unit, or the root. The configuration can be a configuration policy or self-managed behavior. Only the Security Hub delegated administrator can invoke this operation from the home Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_get_configuration_policy_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_get_configuration_policy_association(Target)
Arguments
Target |
[required] The target account ID, organizational unit ID, or the root ID to retrieve the association for. |
Returns a list of the standards that are currently enabled
Description
Returns a list of the standards that are currently enabled.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_get_enabled_standards/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_get_enabled_standards(
StandardsSubscriptionArns = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
StandardsSubscriptionArns |
The list of the standards subscription ARNs for the standards to retrieve. |
NextToken |
The token that is required for pagination. On your first call to the
For subsequent calls to the operation, to continue listing data, set the value of this parameter to the value returned from the previous response. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. |
The aggregation Region is now called the home Region
Description
The aggregation Region is now called the home Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_get_finding_aggregator/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_get_finding_aggregator(FindingAggregatorArn)
Arguments
FindingAggregatorArn |
[required] The ARN of the finding aggregator to return details for. To obtain the
ARN, use
|
Returns history for a Security Hub finding in the last 90 days
Description
Returns history for a Security Hub finding in the last 90 days. The history includes changes made to any fields in the Amazon Web Services Security Finding Format (ASFF).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_get_finding_history/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_get_finding_history(
FindingIdentifier,
StartTime = NULL,
EndTime = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
FindingIdentifier |
[required] |
StartTime |
A timestamp that indicates the start time of the requested finding history. If you provide values for both For more information about the validation and formatting of timestamp fields in Security Hub, see Timestamps. |
EndTime |
An ISO 8601-formatted timestamp that indicates the end time of the requested finding history. If you provide values for both For more information about the validation and formatting of timestamp fields in Security Hub, see Timestamps. |
NextToken |
A token for pagination purposes. Provide |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned. If you don’t provide it, Security Hub returns up to 100 results of finding history. |
Returns a list of findings that match the specified criteria
Description
Returns a list of findings that match the specified criteria.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_get_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_get_findings(
Filters = NULL,
SortCriteria = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
Filters |
The finding attributes used to define a condition to filter the returned findings. You can filter by up to 10 finding attributes. For each attribute, you can provide up to 20 filter values. Note that in the available filter fields, |
SortCriteria |
The finding attributes used to sort the list of returned findings. |
NextToken |
The token that is required for pagination. On your first call to the
For subsequent calls to the operation, to continue listing data, set the value of this parameter to the value returned from the previous response. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of findings to return. |
Lists the results of the Security Hub insight specified by the insight ARN
Description
Lists the results of the Security Hub insight specified by the insight ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_get_insight_results/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_get_insight_results(InsightArn)
Arguments
InsightArn |
[required] The ARN of the insight for which to return results. |
Lists and describes insights for the specified insight ARNs
Description
Lists and describes insights for the specified insight ARNs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_get_insights/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_get_insights(
InsightArns = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
InsightArns |
The ARNs of the insights to describe. If you don't provide any insight
ARNs, then |
NextToken |
The token that is required for pagination. On your first call to the
For subsequent calls to the operation, to continue listing data, set the value of this parameter to the value returned from the previous response. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to return in the response. |
We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts
Description
We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts. For information, see Managing Security Hub administrator and member accounts with Organizations in the Security Hub User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_get_invitations_count/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_get_invitations_count()
This method is deprecated
Description
This method is deprecated. Instead, use get_administrator_account
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_get_master_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_get_master_account()
Returns the details for the Security Hub member accounts for the specified account IDs
Description
Returns the details for the Security Hub member accounts for the specified account IDs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_get_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_get_members(AccountIds)
Arguments
AccountIds |
[required] The list of account IDs for the Security Hub member accounts to return the details for. |
Retrieves the definition of a security control
Description
Retrieves the definition of a security control. The definition includes the control title, description, Region availability, parameter definitions, and other details.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_get_security_control_definition/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_get_security_control_definition(SecurityControlId)
Arguments
SecurityControlId |
[required] The ID of the security control to retrieve the definition for. This field doesn’t accept an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts
Description
We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts. For information, see Managing Security Hub administrator and member accounts with Organizations in the Security Hub User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_invite_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_invite_members(AccountIds)
Arguments
AccountIds |
[required] The list of account IDs of the Amazon Web Services accounts to invite to Security Hub as members. |
A list of automation rules and their metadata for the calling account
Description
A list of automation rules and their metadata for the calling account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_list_automation_rules/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_list_automation_rules(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
A token to specify where to start paginating the response. This is the
|
MaxResults |
The maximum number of rules to return in the response. This currently ranges from 1 to 100. |
Lists the configuration policies that the Security Hub delegated administrator has created for your organization
Description
Lists the configuration policies that the Security Hub delegated administrator has created for your organization. Only the delegated administrator can invoke this operation from the home Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_list_configuration_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_list_configuration_policies(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
The NextToken value that's returned from a previous paginated
|
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results that's returned by
|
Provides information about the associations for your configuration policies and self-managed behavior
Description
Provides information about the associations for your configuration policies and self-managed behavior. Only the Security Hub delegated administrator can invoke this operation from the home Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_list_configuration_policy_associations/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_list_configuration_policy_associations(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
Filters = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
The |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results that's returned by
|
Filters |
Options for filtering the
|
Lists all findings-generating solutions (products) that you are subscribed to receive findings from in Security Hub
Description
Lists all findings-generating solutions (products) that you are subscribed to receive findings from in Security Hub.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_list_enabled_products_for_import/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_list_enabled_products_for_import(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
The token that is required for pagination. On your first call to the
For subsequent calls to the operation, to continue listing data, set the value of this parameter to the value returned from the previous response. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to return in the response. |
If cross-Region aggregation is enabled, then ListFindingAggregators returns the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the finding aggregator
Description
If cross-Region aggregation is enabled, then list_finding_aggregators
returns the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the finding aggregator. You can run this operation from any Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_list_finding_aggregators/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_list_finding_aggregators(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
The token returned with the previous set of results. Identifies the next set of results to return. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. This operation currently only returns a single result. |
We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts
Description
We recommend using Organizations instead of Security Hub invitations to manage your member accounts. For information, see Managing Security Hub administrator and member accounts with Organizations in the Security Hub User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_list_invitations/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_list_invitations(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to return in the response. |
NextToken |
The token that is required for pagination. On your first call to the
For subsequent calls to the operation, to continue listing data, set the value of this parameter to the value returned from the previous response. |
Lists details about all member accounts for the current Security Hub administrator account
Description
Lists details about all member accounts for the current Security Hub administrator account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_list_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_list_members(
OnlyAssociated = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
OnlyAssociated |
Specifies which member accounts to include in the response based on
their relationship status with the administrator account. The default
value is If If |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to return in the response. |
NextToken |
The token that is required for pagination. On your first call to the
For subsequent calls to the operation, to continue listing data, set the value of this parameter to the value returned from the previous response. |
Lists the Security Hub administrator accounts
Description
Lists the Security Hub administrator accounts. Can only be called by the organization management account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_list_organization_admin_accounts/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_list_organization_admin_accounts(
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to return in the response. |
NextToken |
The token that is required for pagination. On your first call to the
|
Lists all of the security controls that apply to a specified standard
Description
Lists all of the security controls that apply to a specified standard.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_list_security_control_definitions/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_list_security_control_definitions(
StandardsArn = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
StandardsArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the standard that you want to view controls for. |
NextToken |
Optional pagination parameter. |
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that limits the total results of the API response
to the specified number. If this parameter isn't provided in the
request, the results include the first 25 security controls that apply
to the specified standard. The results also include a |
Specifies whether a control is currently enabled or disabled in each enabled standard in the calling account
Description
Specifies whether a control is currently enabled or disabled in each enabled standard in the calling account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_list_standards_control_associations/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_list_standards_control_associations(
SecurityControlId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
SecurityControlId |
[required] The identifier of the control (identified with |
NextToken |
Optional pagination parameter. |
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that limits the total results of the API response
to the specified number. If this parameter isn't provided in the
request, the results include the first 25 standard and control
associations. The results also include a |
Returns a list of tags associated with a resource
Description
Returns a list of tags associated with a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource to retrieve tags for. |
Associates a target account, organizational unit, or the root with a specified configuration
Description
Associates a target account, organizational unit, or the root with a specified configuration. The target can be associated with a configuration policy or self-managed behavior. Only the Security Hub delegated administrator can invoke this operation from the home Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_start_configuration_policy_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_start_configuration_policy_association(
ConfigurationPolicyIdentifier,
Target
)
Arguments
ConfigurationPolicyIdentifier |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a configuration policy, the
universally unique identifier (UUID) of a configuration policy, or a
value of |
Target |
[required] The identifier of the target account, organizational unit, or the root to associate with the specified configuration. |
Disassociates a target account, organizational unit, or the root from a specified configuration
Description
Disassociates a target account, organizational unit, or the root from a specified configuration. When you disassociate a configuration from its target, the target inherits the configuration of the closest parent. If there’s no configuration to inherit, the target retains its settings but becomes a self-managed account. A target can be disassociated from a configuration policy or self-managed behavior. Only the Security Hub delegated administrator can invoke this operation from the home Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_start_configuration_policy_disassociation/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_start_configuration_policy_disassociation(
Target = NULL,
ConfigurationPolicyIdentifier
)
Arguments
Target |
The identifier of the target account, organizational unit, or the root to disassociate from the specified configuration. |
ConfigurationPolicyIdentifier |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a configuration policy, the
universally unique identifier (UUID) of a configuration policy, or a
value of |
Adds one or more tags to a resource
Description
Adds one or more tags to a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource to apply the tags to. |
Tags |
[required] The tags to add to the resource. You can add up to 50 tags at a time. The tag keys can be no longer than 128 characters. The tag values can be no longer than 256 characters. |
Removes one or more tags from a resource
Description
Removes one or more tags from a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource to remove the tags from. |
TagKeys |
[required] The tag keys associated with the tags to remove from the resource. You can remove up to 50 tags at a time. |
Updates the name and description of a custom action target in Security Hub
Description
Updates the name and description of a custom action target in Security Hub.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_update_action_target/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_update_action_target(
ActionTargetArn,
Name = NULL,
Description = NULL
)
Arguments
ActionTargetArn |
[required] The ARN of the custom action target to update. |
Name |
The updated name of the custom action target. |
Description |
The updated description for the custom action target. |
Updates a configuration policy
Description
Updates a configuration policy. Only the Security Hub delegated administrator can invoke this operation from the home Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_update_configuration_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_update_configuration_policy(
Identifier,
Name = NULL,
Description = NULL,
UpdatedReason = NULL,
ConfigurationPolicy = NULL
)
Arguments
Identifier |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) or universally unique identifier (UUID) of the configuration policy. |
Name |
The name of the configuration policy. Alphanumeric characters and the
following ASCII characters are permitted: |
Description |
The description of the configuration policy. |
UpdatedReason |
The reason for updating the configuration policy. |
ConfigurationPolicy |
An object that defines how Security Hub is configured. It includes whether Security Hub is enabled or disabled, a list of enabled security standards, a list of enabled or disabled security controls, and a list of custom parameter values for specified controls. If you provide a list of security controls that are enabled in the configuration policy, Security Hub disables all other controls (including newly released controls). If you provide a list of security controls that are disabled in the configuration policy, Security Hub enables all other controls (including newly released controls). When updating a configuration policy, provide a complete list of standards that you want to enable and a complete list of controls that you want to enable or disable. The updated configuration replaces the current configuration. |
The aggregation Region is now called the home Region
Description
The aggregation Region is now called the home Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_update_finding_aggregator/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_update_finding_aggregator(
FindingAggregatorArn,
RegionLinkingMode,
Regions = NULL
)
Arguments
FindingAggregatorArn |
[required] The ARN of the finding aggregator. To obtain the ARN, use
|
RegionLinkingMode |
[required] Indicates whether to aggregate findings from all of the available Regions in the current partition. Also determines whether to automatically aggregate findings from new Regions as Security Hub supports them and you opt into them. The selected option also determines how to use the Regions provided in the Regions list. The options are as follows:
|
Regions |
If If An |
UpdateFindings is a deprecated operation
Description
update_findings
is a deprecated operation. Instead of update_findings
, use the batch_update_findings
operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_update_findings/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_update_findings(Filters, Note = NULL, RecordState = NULL)
Arguments
Filters |
[required] A collection of attributes that specify which findings you want to update. |
Note |
The updated note for the finding. |
RecordState |
The updated record state for the finding. |
Updates the Security Hub insight identified by the specified insight ARN
Description
Updates the Security Hub insight identified by the specified insight ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_update_insight/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_update_insight(
InsightArn,
Name = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
GroupByAttribute = NULL
)
Arguments
InsightArn |
[required] The ARN of the insight that you want to update. |
Name |
The updated name for the insight. |
Filters |
The updated filters that define this insight. |
GroupByAttribute |
The updated |
Updates the configuration of your organization in Security Hub
Description
Updates the configuration of your organization in Security Hub. Only the Security Hub administrator account can invoke this operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_update_organization_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_update_organization_configuration(
AutoEnable,
AutoEnableStandards = NULL,
OrganizationConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
AutoEnable |
[required] Whether to automatically enable Security Hub in new member accounts when they join the organization. If set to If the |
AutoEnableStandards |
Whether to automatically enable Security Hub default standards in new member accounts when they join the organization. The default value of this parameter is equal to If equal to If the |
OrganizationConfiguration |
Updates the properties of a security control
Description
Updates the properties of a security control.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_update_security_control/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_update_security_control(
SecurityControlId,
Parameters,
LastUpdateReason = NULL
)
Arguments
SecurityControlId |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) or ID of the control to update. |
Parameters |
[required] An object that specifies which security control parameters to update. |
LastUpdateReason |
The most recent reason for updating the properties of the security control. This field accepts alphanumeric characters in addition to white spaces, dashes, and underscores. |
Updates configuration options for Security Hub
Description
Updates configuration options for Security Hub.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_update_security_hub_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_update_security_hub_configuration(
AutoEnableControls = NULL,
ControlFindingGenerator = NULL
)
Arguments
AutoEnableControls |
Whether to automatically enable new controls when they are added to standards that are enabled. By default, this is set to When you automatically enable new controls, you can interact with the
controls in the console and programmatically immediately after release.
However, automatically enabled controls have a temporary default status
of |
ControlFindingGenerator |
Updates whether the calling account has consolidated control findings
turned on. If the value for this field is set to If the value for this field is set to For accounts that are part of an organization, this value can only be updated in the administrator account. |
Used to control whether an individual security standard control is enabled or disabled
Description
Used to control whether an individual security standard control is enabled or disabled.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securityhub_update_standards_control/ for full documentation.
Usage
securityhub_update_standards_control(
StandardsControlArn,
ControlStatus = NULL,
DisabledReason = NULL
)
Arguments
StandardsControlArn |
[required] The ARN of the security standard control to enable or disable. |
ControlStatus |
The updated status of the security standard control. |
DisabledReason |
A description of the reason why you are disabling a security standard control. If you are disabling a control, then this is required. |
Amazon Security Lake
Description
Amazon Security Lake is a fully managed security data lake service. You can use Security Lake to automatically centralize security data from cloud, on-premises, and custom sources into a data lake that's stored in your Amazon Web Services account. Amazon Web Services Organizations is an account management service that lets you consolidate multiple Amazon Web Services accounts into an organization that you create and centrally manage. With Organizations, you can create member accounts and invite existing accounts to join your organization. Security Lake helps you analyze security data for a more complete understanding of your security posture across the entire organization. It can also help you improve the protection of your workloads, applications, and data.
The data lake is backed by Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3) buckets, and you retain ownership over your data.
Amazon Security Lake integrates with CloudTrail, a service that provides a record of actions taken by a user, role, or an Amazon Web Services service. In Security Lake, CloudTrail captures API calls for Security Lake as events. The calls captured include calls from the Security Lake console and code calls to the Security Lake API operations. If you create a trail, you can enable continuous delivery of CloudTrail events to an Amazon S3 bucket, including events for Security Lake. If you don't configure a trail, you can still view the most recent events in the CloudTrail console in Event history. Using the information collected by CloudTrail you can determine the request that was made to Security Lake, the IP address from which the request was made, who made the request, when it was made, and additional details. To learn more about Security Lake information in CloudTrail, see the Amazon Security Lake User Guide.
Security Lake automates the collection of security-related log and event data from integrated Amazon Web Services services and third-party services. It also helps you manage the lifecycle of data with customizable retention and replication settings. Security Lake converts ingested data into Apache Parquet format and a standard open-source schema called the Open Cybersecurity Schema Framework (OCSF).
Other Amazon Web Services services and third-party services can subscribe to the data that's stored in Security Lake for incident response and security data analytics.
Usage
securitylake(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- securitylake( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_aws_log_source | Adds a natively supported Amazon Web Services service as an Amazon Security Lake source |
create_custom_log_source | Adds a third-party custom source in Amazon Security Lake, from the Amazon Web Services Region where you want to create a custom source |
create_data_lake | Initializes an Amazon Security Lake instance with the provided (or default) configuration |
create_data_lake_exception_subscription | Creates the specified notification subscription in Amazon Security Lake for the organization you specify |
create_data_lake_organization_configuration | Automatically enables Amazon Security Lake for new member accounts in your organization |
create_subscriber | Creates a subscriber for accounts that are already enabled in Amazon Security Lake |
create_subscriber_notification | Notifies the subscriber when new data is written to the data lake for the sources that the subscriber consumes in Security Lake |
delete_aws_log_source | Removes a natively supported Amazon Web Services service as an Amazon Security Lake source |
delete_custom_log_source | Removes a custom log source from Amazon Security Lake, to stop sending data from the custom source to Security Lake |
delete_data_lake | When you disable Amazon Security Lake from your account, Security Lake is disabled in all Amazon Web Services Regions and it stops collecting data from your sources |
delete_data_lake_exception_subscription | Deletes the specified notification subscription in Amazon Security Lake for the organization you specify |
delete_data_lake_organization_configuration | Turns off automatic enablement of Amazon Security Lake for member accounts that are added to an organization in Organizations |
delete_subscriber | Deletes the subscription permission and all notification settings for accounts that are already enabled in Amazon Security Lake |
delete_subscriber_notification | Deletes the specified subscription notification in Amazon Security Lake for the organization you specify |
deregister_data_lake_delegated_administrator | Deletes the Amazon Security Lake delegated administrator account for the organization |
get_data_lake_exception_subscription | Retrieves the protocol and endpoint that were provided when subscribing to Amazon SNS topics for exception notifications |
get_data_lake_organization_configuration | Retrieves the configuration that will be automatically set up for accounts added to the organization after the organization has onboarded to Amazon Security Lake |
get_data_lake_sources | Retrieves a snapshot of the current Region, including whether Amazon Security Lake is enabled for those accounts and which sources Security Lake is collecting data from |
get_subscriber | Retrieves the subscription information for the specified subscription ID |
list_data_lake_exceptions | Lists the Amazon Security Lake exceptions that you can use to find the source of problems and fix them |
list_data_lakes | Retrieves the Amazon Security Lake configuration object for the specified Amazon Web Services Regions |
list_log_sources | Retrieves the log sources |
list_subscribers | Lists all subscribers for the specific Amazon Security Lake account ID |
list_tags_for_resource | Retrieves the tags (keys and values) that are associated with an Amazon Security Lake resource: a subscriber, or the data lake configuration for your Amazon Web Services account in a particular Amazon Web Services Region |
register_data_lake_delegated_administrator | Designates the Amazon Security Lake delegated administrator account for the organization |
tag_resource | Adds or updates one or more tags that are associated with an Amazon Security Lake resource: a subscriber, or the data lake configuration for your Amazon Web Services account in a particular Amazon Web Services Region |
untag_resource | Removes one or more tags (keys and values) from an Amazon Security Lake resource: a subscriber, or the data lake configuration for your Amazon Web Services account in a particular Amazon Web Services Region |
update_data_lake | You can use UpdateDataLake to specify where to store your security data, how it should be encrypted at rest and for how long |
update_data_lake_exception_subscription | Updates the specified notification subscription in Amazon Security Lake for the organization you specify |
update_subscriber | Updates an existing subscription for the given Amazon Security Lake account ID |
update_subscriber_notification | Updates an existing notification method for the subscription (SQS or HTTPs endpoint) or switches the notification subscription endpoint for a subscriber |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- securitylake()
svc$create_aws_log_source(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Adds a natively supported Amazon Web Services service as an Amazon Security Lake source
Description
Adds a natively supported Amazon Web Services service as an Amazon Security Lake source. Enables source types for member accounts in required Amazon Web Services Regions, based on the parameters you specify. You can choose any source type in any Region for either accounts that are part of a trusted organization or standalone accounts. Once you add an Amazon Web Services service as a source, Security Lake starts collecting logs and events from it.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_create_aws_log_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_create_aws_log_source(sources)
Arguments
sources |
[required] Specify the natively-supported Amazon Web Services service to add as a source in Security Lake. |
Adds a third-party custom source in Amazon Security Lake, from the Amazon Web Services Region where you want to create a custom source
Description
Adds a third-party custom source in Amazon Security Lake, from the Amazon Web Services Region where you want to create a custom source. Security Lake can collect logs and events from third-party custom sources. After creating the appropriate IAM role to invoke Glue crawler, use this API to add a custom source name in Security Lake. This operation creates a partition in the Amazon S3 bucket for Security Lake as the target location for log files from the custom source. In addition, this operation also creates an associated Glue table and an Glue crawler.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_create_custom_log_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_create_custom_log_source(
configuration,
eventClasses = NULL,
sourceName,
sourceVersion = NULL
)
Arguments
configuration |
[required] The configuration used for the third-party custom source. |
eventClasses |
The Open Cybersecurity Schema Framework (OCSF) event classes which describes the type of data that the custom source will send to Security Lake. For the list of supported event classes, see the Amazon Security Lake User Guide. |
sourceName |
[required] Specify the name for a third-party custom source. This must be a
Regionally unique value. The |
sourceVersion |
Specify the source version for the third-party custom source, to limit log collection to a specific version of custom data source. |
Initializes an Amazon Security Lake instance with the provided (or default) configuration
Description
Initializes an Amazon Security Lake instance with the provided (or default) configuration. You can enable Security Lake in Amazon Web Services Regions with customized settings before enabling log collection in Regions. To specify particular Regions, configure these Regions using the configurations
parameter. If you have already enabled Security Lake in a Region when you call this command, the command will update the Region if you provide new configuration parameters. If you have not already enabled Security Lake in the Region when you call this API, it will set up the data lake in the Region with the specified configurations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_create_data_lake/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_create_data_lake(
configurations,
metaStoreManagerRoleArn,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
configurations |
[required] Specify the Region or Regions that will contribute data to the rollup region. |
metaStoreManagerRoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) used to create and update the Glue table. This table contains partitions generated by the ingestion and normalization of Amazon Web Services log sources and custom sources. |
tags |
An array of objects, one for each tag to associate with the data lake configuration. For each tag, you must specify both a tag key and a tag value. A tag value cannot be null, but it can be an empty string. |
Creates the specified notification subscription in Amazon Security Lake for the organization you specify
Description
Creates the specified notification subscription in Amazon Security Lake for the organization you specify. The notification subscription is created for exceptions that cannot be resolved by Security Lake automatically.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_create_data_lake_exception_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_create_data_lake_exception_subscription(
exceptionTimeToLive = NULL,
notificationEndpoint,
subscriptionProtocol
)
Arguments
exceptionTimeToLive |
The expiration period and time-to-live (TTL). It is the duration of time until which the exception message remains. |
notificationEndpoint |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account where you want to receive exception notifications. |
subscriptionProtocol |
[required] The subscription protocol to which exception notifications are posted. |
Automatically enables Amazon Security Lake for new member accounts in your organization
Description
Automatically enables Amazon Security Lake for new member accounts in your organization. Security Lake is not automatically enabled for any existing member accounts in your organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_create_data_lake_organization_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_create_data_lake_organization_configuration(
autoEnableNewAccount = NULL
)
Arguments
autoEnableNewAccount |
Enable Security Lake with the specified configuration settings, to begin collecting security data for new accounts in your organization. |
Creates a subscriber for accounts that are already enabled in Amazon Security Lake
Description
Creates a subscriber for accounts that are already enabled in Amazon Security Lake. You can create a subscriber with access to data in the current Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_create_subscriber/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_create_subscriber(
accessTypes = NULL,
sources,
subscriberDescription = NULL,
subscriberIdentity,
subscriberName,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
accessTypes |
The Amazon S3 or Lake Formation access type. |
sources |
[required] The supported Amazon Web Services services from which logs and events are collected. Security Lake supports log and event collection for natively supported Amazon Web Services services. |
subscriberDescription |
The description for your subscriber account in Security Lake. |
subscriberIdentity |
[required] The Amazon Web Services identity used to access your data. |
subscriberName |
[required] The name of your Security Lake subscriber account. |
tags |
An array of objects, one for each tag to associate with the subscriber. For each tag, you must specify both a tag key and a tag value. A tag value cannot be null, but it can be an empty string. |
Notifies the subscriber when new data is written to the data lake for the sources that the subscriber consumes in Security Lake
Description
Notifies the subscriber when new data is written to the data lake for the sources that the subscriber consumes in Security Lake. You can create only one subscriber notification per subscriber.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_create_subscriber_notification/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_create_subscriber_notification(configuration, subscriberId)
Arguments
configuration |
[required] Specify the configuration using which you want to create the subscriber notification. |
subscriberId |
[required] The subscriber ID for the notification subscription. |
Removes a natively supported Amazon Web Services service as an Amazon Security Lake source
Description
Removes a natively supported Amazon Web Services service as an Amazon Security Lake source. You can remove a source for one or more Regions. When you remove the source, Security Lake stops collecting data from that source in the specified Regions and accounts, and subscribers can no longer consume new data from the source. However, subscribers can still consume data that Security Lake collected from the source before removal.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_delete_aws_log_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_delete_aws_log_source(sources)
Arguments
sources |
[required] Specify the natively-supported Amazon Web Services service to remove as a source in Security Lake. |
Removes a custom log source from Amazon Security Lake, to stop sending data from the custom source to Security Lake
Description
Removes a custom log source from Amazon Security Lake, to stop sending data from the custom source to Security Lake.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_delete_custom_log_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_delete_custom_log_source(sourceName, sourceVersion = NULL)
Arguments
sourceName |
[required] The source name of custom log source that you want to delete. |
sourceVersion |
The source version for the third-party custom source. You can limit the custom source removal to the specified source version. |
When you disable Amazon Security Lake from your account, Security Lake is disabled in all Amazon Web Services Regions and it stops collecting data from your sources
Description
When you disable Amazon Security Lake from your account, Security Lake is disabled in all Amazon Web Services Regions and it stops collecting data from your sources. Also, this API automatically takes steps to remove the account from Security Lake. However, Security Lake retains all of your existing settings and the resources that it created in your Amazon Web Services account in the current Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_delete_data_lake/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_delete_data_lake(regions)
Arguments
regions |
[required] The list of Regions where Security Lake is enabled. |
Deletes the specified notification subscription in Amazon Security Lake for the organization you specify
Description
Deletes the specified notification subscription in Amazon Security Lake for the organization you specify.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_delete_data_lake_exception_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_delete_data_lake_exception_subscription()
Turns off automatic enablement of Amazon Security Lake for member accounts that are added to an organization in Organizations
Description
Turns off automatic enablement of Amazon Security Lake for member accounts that are added to an organization in Organizations. Only the delegated Security Lake administrator for an organization can perform this operation. If the delegated Security Lake administrator performs this operation, new member accounts won't automatically contribute data to the data lake.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_delete_data_lake_organization_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_delete_data_lake_organization_configuration(
autoEnableNewAccount = NULL
)
Arguments
autoEnableNewAccount |
Turns off automatic enablement of Security Lake for member accounts that are added to an organization. |
Deletes the subscription permission and all notification settings for accounts that are already enabled in Amazon Security Lake
Description
Deletes the subscription permission and all notification settings for accounts that are already enabled in Amazon Security Lake. When you run delete_subscriber
, the subscriber will no longer consume data from Security Lake and the subscriber is removed. This operation deletes the subscriber and removes access to data in the current Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_delete_subscriber/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_delete_subscriber(subscriberId)
Arguments
subscriberId |
[required] A value created by Security Lake that uniquely identifies your
|
Deletes the specified subscription notification in Amazon Security Lake for the organization you specify
Description
Deletes the specified subscription notification in Amazon Security Lake for the organization you specify.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_delete_subscriber_notification/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_delete_subscriber_notification(subscriberId)
Arguments
subscriberId |
[required] The ID of the Security Lake subscriber account. |
Deletes the Amazon Security Lake delegated administrator account for the organization
Description
Deletes the Amazon Security Lake delegated administrator account for the organization. This API can only be called by the organization management account. The organization management account cannot be the delegated administrator account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_deregister_data_lake_delegated_administrator/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_deregister_data_lake_delegated_administrator()
Retrieves the protocol and endpoint that were provided when subscribing to Amazon SNS topics for exception notifications
Description
Retrieves the protocol and endpoint that were provided when subscribing to Amazon SNS topics for exception notifications.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_get_data_lake_exception_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_get_data_lake_exception_subscription()
Retrieves the configuration that will be automatically set up for accounts added to the organization after the organization has onboarded to Amazon Security Lake
Description
Retrieves the configuration that will be automatically set up for accounts added to the organization after the organization has onboarded to Amazon Security Lake. This API does not take input parameters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_get_data_lake_organization_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_get_data_lake_organization_configuration()
Retrieves a snapshot of the current Region, including whether Amazon Security Lake is enabled for those accounts and which sources Security Lake is collecting data from
Description
Retrieves a snapshot of the current Region, including whether Amazon Security Lake is enabled for those accounts and which sources Security Lake is collecting data from.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_get_data_lake_sources/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_get_data_lake_sources(
accounts = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
accounts |
The Amazon Web Services account ID for which a static snapshot of the current Amazon Web Services Region, including enabled accounts and log sources, is retrieved. |
maxResults |
The maximum limit of accounts for which the static snapshot of the current Region, including enabled accounts and log sources, is retrieved. |
nextToken |
Lists if there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Repeat the call using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged. Each pagination token expires after 24 hours. Using an expired pagination token will return an HTTP 400 InvalidToken error. |
Retrieves the subscription information for the specified subscription ID
Description
Retrieves the subscription information for the specified subscription ID. You can get information about a specific subscriber.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_get_subscriber/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_get_subscriber(subscriberId)
Arguments
subscriberId |
[required] A value created by Amazon Security Lake that uniquely identifies your
|
Lists the Amazon Security Lake exceptions that you can use to find the source of problems and fix them
Description
Lists the Amazon Security Lake exceptions that you can use to find the source of problems and fix them.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_list_data_lake_exceptions/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_list_data_lake_exceptions(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
regions = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
Lists the maximum number of failures in Security Lake. |
nextToken |
Lists if there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Repeat the call using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged. Each pagination token expires after 24 hours. Using an expired pagination token will return an HTTP 400 InvalidToken error. |
regions |
The Amazon Web Services Regions from which exceptions are retrieved. |
Retrieves the Amazon Security Lake configuration object for the specified Amazon Web Services Regions
Description
Retrieves the Amazon Security Lake configuration object for the specified Amazon Web Services Regions. You can use this operation to determine whether Security Lake is enabled for a Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_list_data_lakes/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_list_data_lakes(regions = NULL)
Arguments
regions |
The list of Regions where Security Lake is enabled. |
Retrieves the log sources
Description
Retrieves the log sources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_list_log_sources/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_list_log_sources(
accounts = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
regions = NULL,
sources = NULL
)
Arguments
accounts |
The list of Amazon Web Services accounts for which log sources are displayed. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of accounts for which the log sources are displayed. |
nextToken |
If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. You can repeat the call using the returned token to retrieve the next page. |
regions |
The list of Regions for which log sources are displayed. |
sources |
The list of sources for which log sources are displayed. |
Lists all subscribers for the specific Amazon Security Lake account ID
Description
Lists all subscribers for the specific Amazon Security Lake account ID. You can retrieve a list of subscriptions associated with a specific organization or Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_list_subscribers/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_list_subscribers(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of accounts for which the configuration is displayed. |
nextToken |
If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. You can repeat the call using the returned token to retrieve the next page. |
Retrieves the tags (keys and values) that are associated with an Amazon Security Lake resource: a subscriber, or the data lake configuration for your Amazon Web Services account in a particular Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Retrieves the tags (keys and values) that are associated with an Amazon Security Lake resource: a subscriber, or the data lake configuration for your Amazon Web Services account in a particular Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Security Lake resource for which you want to retrieve the tags. |
Designates the Amazon Security Lake delegated administrator account for the organization
Description
Designates the Amazon Security Lake delegated administrator account for the organization. This API can only be called by the organization management account. The organization management account cannot be the delegated administrator account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_register_data_lake_delegated_administrator/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_register_data_lake_delegated_administrator(accountId)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Security Lake delegated administrator. |
Adds or updates one or more tags that are associated with an Amazon Security Lake resource: a subscriber, or the data lake configuration for your Amazon Web Services account in a particular Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Adds or updates one or more tags that are associated with an Amazon Security Lake resource: a subscriber, or the data lake configuration for your Amazon Web Services account in a particular Amazon Web Services Region. A tag is a label that you can define and associate with Amazon Web Services resources. Each tag consists of a required tag key and an associated tag value. A tag key is a general label that acts as a category for a more specific tag value. A tag value acts as a descriptor for a tag key. Tags can help you identify, categorize, and manage resources in different ways, such as by owner, environment, or other criteria. For more information, see Tagging Amazon Security Lake resources in the Amazon Security Lake User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Security Lake resource to add or update the tags for. |
tags |
[required] An array of objects, one for each tag (key and value) to associate with the Amazon Security Lake resource. For each tag, you must specify both a tag key and a tag value. A tag value cannot be null, but it can be an empty string. |
Removes one or more tags (keys and values) from an Amazon Security Lake resource: a subscriber, or the data lake configuration for your Amazon Web Services account in a particular Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Removes one or more tags (keys and values) from an Amazon Security Lake resource: a subscriber, or the data lake configuration for your Amazon Web Services account in a particular Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Security Lake resource to remove one or more tags from. |
tagKeys |
[required] A list of one or more tag keys. For each value in the list, specify the tag key for a tag to remove from the Amazon Security Lake resource. |
You can use UpdateDataLake to specify where to store your security data, how it should be encrypted at rest and for how long
Description
You can use update_data_lake
to specify where to store your security data, how it should be encrypted at rest and for how long. You can add a Rollup Region to consolidate data from multiple Amazon Web Services Regions, replace default encryption (SSE-S3) with Customer Manged Key, or specify transition and expiration actions through storage Lifecycle management. The update_data_lake
API works as an "upsert" operation that performs an insert if the specified item or record does not exist, or an update if it already exists. Security Lake securely stores your data at rest using Amazon Web Services encryption solutions. For more details, see Data protection in Amazon Security Lake.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_update_data_lake/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_update_data_lake(configurations, metaStoreManagerRoleArn = NULL)
Arguments
configurations |
[required] Specifies the Region or Regions that will contribute data to the rollup region. |
metaStoreManagerRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) used to create and update the Glue table. This table contains partitions generated by the ingestion and normalization of Amazon Web Services log sources and custom sources. |
Updates the specified notification subscription in Amazon Security Lake for the organization you specify
Description
Updates the specified notification subscription in Amazon Security Lake for the organization you specify.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_update_data_lake_exception_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_update_data_lake_exception_subscription(
exceptionTimeToLive = NULL,
notificationEndpoint,
subscriptionProtocol
)
Arguments
exceptionTimeToLive |
The time-to-live (TTL) for the exception message to remain. It is the duration of time until which the exception message remains. |
notificationEndpoint |
[required] The account that is subscribed to receive exception notifications. |
subscriptionProtocol |
[required] The subscription protocol to which exception messages are posted. |
Updates an existing subscription for the given Amazon Security Lake account ID
Description
Updates an existing subscription for the given Amazon Security Lake account ID. You can update a subscriber by changing the sources that the subscriber consumes data from.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_update_subscriber/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_update_subscriber(
sources = NULL,
subscriberDescription = NULL,
subscriberId,
subscriberIdentity = NULL,
subscriberName = NULL
)
Arguments
sources |
The supported Amazon Web Services services from which logs and events are collected. For the list of supported Amazon Web Services services, see the Amazon Security Lake User Guide. |
subscriberDescription |
The description of the Security Lake account subscriber. |
subscriberId |
[required] A value created by Security Lake that uniquely identifies your subscription. |
subscriberIdentity |
The Amazon Web Services identity used to access your data. |
subscriberName |
The name of the Security Lake account subscriber. |
Updates an existing notification method for the subscription (SQS or HTTPs endpoint) or switches the notification subscription endpoint for a subscriber
Description
Updates an existing notification method for the subscription (SQS or HTTPs endpoint) or switches the notification subscription endpoint for a subscriber.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/securitylake_update_subscriber_notification/ for full documentation.
Usage
securitylake_update_subscriber_notification(configuration, subscriberId)
Arguments
configuration |
[required] The configuration for subscriber notification. |
subscriberId |
[required] The subscription ID for which the subscription notification is specified. |
AWS Shield
Description
Shield Advanced
This is the Shield Advanced API Reference. This guide is for developers who need detailed information about the Shield Advanced API actions, data types, and errors. For detailed information about WAF and Shield Advanced features and an overview of how to use the WAF and Shield Advanced APIs, see the WAF and Shield Developer Guide.
Usage
shield(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- shield( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
associate_drt_log_bucket | Authorizes the Shield Response Team (SRT) to access the specified Amazon S3 bucket containing log data such as Application Load Balancer access logs, CloudFront logs, or logs from third party sources |
associate_drt_role | Authorizes the Shield Response Team (SRT) using the specified role, to access your Amazon Web Services account to assist with DDoS attack mitigation during potential attacks |
associate_health_check | Adds health-based detection to the Shield Advanced protection for a resource |
associate_proactive_engagement_details | Initializes proactive engagement and sets the list of contacts for the Shield Response Team (SRT) to use |
create_protection | Enables Shield Advanced for a specific Amazon Web Services resource |
create_protection_group | Creates a grouping of protected resources so they can be handled as a collective |
create_subscription | Activates Shield Advanced for an account |
delete_protection | Deletes an Shield Advanced Protection |
delete_protection_group | Removes the specified protection group |
delete_subscription | Removes Shield Advanced from an account |
describe_attack | Describes the details of a DDoS attack |
describe_attack_statistics | Provides information about the number and type of attacks Shield has detected in the last year for all resources that belong to your account, regardless of whether you've defined Shield protections for them |
describe_drt_access | Returns the current role and list of Amazon S3 log buckets used by the Shield Response Team (SRT) to access your Amazon Web Services account while assisting with attack mitigation |
describe_emergency_contact_settings | A list of email addresses and phone numbers that the Shield Response Team (SRT) can use to contact you if you have proactive engagement enabled, for escalations to the SRT and to initiate proactive customer support |
describe_protection | Lists the details of a Protection object |
describe_protection_group | Returns the specification for the specified protection group |
describe_subscription | Provides details about the Shield Advanced subscription for an account |
disable_application_layer_automatic_response | Disable the Shield Advanced automatic application layer DDoS mitigation feature for the protected resource |
disable_proactive_engagement | Removes authorization from the Shield Response Team (SRT) to notify contacts about escalations to the SRT and to initiate proactive customer support |
disassociate_drt_log_bucket | Removes the Shield Response Team's (SRT) access to the specified Amazon S3 bucket containing the logs that you shared previously |
disassociate_drt_role | Removes the Shield Response Team's (SRT) access to your Amazon Web Services account |
disassociate_health_check | Removes health-based detection from the Shield Advanced protection for a resource |
enable_application_layer_automatic_response | Enable the Shield Advanced automatic application layer DDoS mitigation for the protected resource |
enable_proactive_engagement | Authorizes the Shield Response Team (SRT) to use email and phone to notify contacts about escalations to the SRT and to initiate proactive customer support |
get_subscription_state | Returns the SubscriptionState, either Active or Inactive |
list_attacks | Returns all ongoing DDoS attacks or all DDoS attacks during a specified time period |
list_protection_groups | Retrieves ProtectionGroup objects for the account |
list_protections | Retrieves Protection objects for the account |
list_resources_in_protection_group | Retrieves the resources that are included in the protection group |
list_tags_for_resource | Gets information about Amazon Web Services tags for a specified Amazon Resource Name (ARN) in Shield |
tag_resource | Adds or updates tags for a resource in Shield |
untag_resource | Removes tags from a resource in Shield |
update_application_layer_automatic_response | Updates an existing Shield Advanced automatic application layer DDoS mitigation configuration for the specified resource |
update_emergency_contact_settings | Updates the details of the list of email addresses and phone numbers that the Shield Response Team (SRT) can use to contact you if you have proactive engagement enabled, for escalations to the SRT and to initiate proactive customer support |
update_protection_group | Updates an existing protection group |
update_subscription | Updates the details of an existing subscription |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- shield()
svc$associate_drt_log_bucket(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Authorizes the Shield Response Team (SRT) to access the specified Amazon S3 bucket containing log data such as Application Load Balancer access logs, CloudFront logs, or logs from third party sources
Description
Authorizes the Shield Response Team (SRT) to access the specified Amazon S3 bucket containing log data such as Application Load Balancer access logs, CloudFront logs, or logs from third party sources. You can associate up to 10 Amazon S3 buckets with your subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_associate_drt_log_bucket/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_associate_drt_log_bucket(LogBucket)
Arguments
LogBucket |
[required] The Amazon S3 bucket that contains the logs that you want to share. |
Authorizes the Shield Response Team (SRT) using the specified role, to access your Amazon Web Services account to assist with DDoS attack mitigation during potential attacks
Description
Authorizes the Shield Response Team (SRT) using the specified role, to access your Amazon Web Services account to assist with DDoS attack mitigation during potential attacks. This enables the SRT to inspect your WAF configuration and create or update WAF rules and web ACLs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_associate_drt_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_associate_drt_role(RoleArn)
Arguments
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the role the SRT will use to access your Amazon Web Services account. Prior to making the |
Adds health-based detection to the Shield Advanced protection for a resource
Description
Adds health-based detection to the Shield Advanced protection for a resource. Shield Advanced health-based detection uses the health of your Amazon Web Services resource to improve responsiveness and accuracy in attack detection and response.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_associate_health_check/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_associate_health_check(ProtectionId, HealthCheckArn)
Arguments
ProtectionId |
[required] The unique identifier (ID) for the Protection object to add the health check association to. |
HealthCheckArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the health check to associate with the protection. |
Initializes proactive engagement and sets the list of contacts for the Shield Response Team (SRT) to use
Description
Initializes proactive engagement and sets the list of contacts for the Shield Response Team (SRT) to use. You must provide at least one phone number in the emergency contact list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_associate_proactive_engagement_details/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_associate_proactive_engagement_details(EmergencyContactList)
Arguments
EmergencyContactList |
[required] A list of email addresses and phone numbers that the Shield Response Team (SRT) can use to contact you for escalations to the SRT and to initiate proactive customer support. To enable proactive engagement, the contact list must include at least one phone number. The contacts that you provide here replace any contacts that were
already defined. If you already have contacts defined and want to use
them, retrieve the list using
|
Enables Shield Advanced for a specific Amazon Web Services resource
Description
Enables Shield Advanced for a specific Amazon Web Services resource. The resource can be an Amazon CloudFront distribution, Amazon Route 53 hosted zone, Global Accelerator standard accelerator, Elastic IP Address, Application Load Balancer, or a Classic Load Balancer. You can protect Amazon EC2 instances and Network Load Balancers by association with protected Amazon EC2 Elastic IP addresses.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_create_protection/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_create_protection(Name, ResourceArn, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] Friendly name for the |
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN (Amazon Resource Name) of the resource to be protected. The ARN should be in one of the following formats:
|
Tags |
One or more tag key-value pairs for the Protection object that is created. |
Creates a grouping of protected resources so they can be handled as a collective
Description
Creates a grouping of protected resources so they can be handled as a collective. This resource grouping improves the accuracy of detection and reduces false positives.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_create_protection_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_create_protection_group(
ProtectionGroupId,
Aggregation,
Pattern,
ResourceType = NULL,
Members = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ProtectionGroupId |
[required] The name of the protection group. You use this to identify the protection group in lists and to manage the protection group, for example to update, delete, or describe it. |
Aggregation |
[required] Defines how Shield combines resource data for the group in order to detect, mitigate, and report events.
|
Pattern |
[required] The criteria to use to choose the protected resources for inclusion in the group. You can include all resources that have protections, provide a list of resource Amazon Resource Names (ARNs), or include all resources of a specified resource type. |
ResourceType |
The resource type to include in the protection group. All protected
resources of this type are included in the protection group. Newly
protected resources of this type are automatically added to the group.
You must set this when you set |
Members |
The Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) of the resources to include in the
protection group. You must set this when you set |
Tags |
One or more tag key-value pairs for the protection group. |
Activates Shield Advanced for an account
Description
Activates Shield Advanced for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_create_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_create_subscription()
Deletes an Shield Advanced Protection
Description
Deletes an Shield Advanced Protection.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_delete_protection/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_delete_protection(ProtectionId)
Arguments
ProtectionId |
[required] The unique identifier (ID) for the Protection object to be deleted. |
Removes the specified protection group
Description
Removes the specified protection group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_delete_protection_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_delete_protection_group(ProtectionGroupId)
Arguments
ProtectionGroupId |
[required] The name of the protection group. You use this to identify the protection group in lists and to manage the protection group, for example to update, delete, or describe it. |
Removes Shield Advanced from an account
Description
Removes Shield Advanced from an account. Shield Advanced requires a 1-year subscription commitment. You cannot delete a subscription prior to the completion of that commitment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_delete_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_delete_subscription()
Describes the details of a DDoS attack
Description
Describes the details of a DDoS attack.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_describe_attack/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_describe_attack(AttackId)
Arguments
AttackId |
[required] The unique identifier (ID) for the attack. |
Provides information about the number and type of attacks Shield has detected in the last year for all resources that belong to your account, regardless of whether you've defined Shield protections for them
Description
Provides information about the number and type of attacks Shield has detected in the last year for all resources that belong to your account, regardless of whether you've defined Shield protections for them. This operation is available to Shield customers as well as to Shield Advanced customers.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_describe_attack_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_describe_attack_statistics()
Returns the current role and list of Amazon S3 log buckets used by the Shield Response Team (SRT) to access your Amazon Web Services account while assisting with attack mitigation
Description
Returns the current role and list of Amazon S3 log buckets used by the Shield Response Team (SRT) to access your Amazon Web Services account while assisting with attack mitigation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_describe_drt_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_describe_drt_access()
A list of email addresses and phone numbers that the Shield Response Team (SRT) can use to contact you if you have proactive engagement enabled, for escalations to the SRT and to initiate proactive customer support
Description
A list of email addresses and phone numbers that the Shield Response Team (SRT) can use to contact you if you have proactive engagement enabled, for escalations to the SRT and to initiate proactive customer support.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_describe_emergency_contact_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_describe_emergency_contact_settings()
Lists the details of a Protection object
Description
Lists the details of a Protection object.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_describe_protection/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_describe_protection(ProtectionId = NULL, ResourceArn = NULL)
Arguments
ProtectionId |
The unique identifier (ID) for the Protection object to describe. You
must provide either the |
ResourceArn |
The ARN (Amazon Resource Name) of the protected Amazon Web Services
resource. You must provide either the |
Returns the specification for the specified protection group
Description
Returns the specification for the specified protection group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_describe_protection_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_describe_protection_group(ProtectionGroupId)
Arguments
ProtectionGroupId |
[required] The name of the protection group. You use this to identify the protection group in lists and to manage the protection group, for example to update, delete, or describe it. |
Provides details about the Shield Advanced subscription for an account
Description
Provides details about the Shield Advanced subscription for an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_describe_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_describe_subscription()
Disable the Shield Advanced automatic application layer DDoS mitigation feature for the protected resource
Description
Disable the Shield Advanced automatic application layer DDoS mitigation feature for the protected resource. This stops Shield Advanced from creating, verifying, and applying WAF rules for attacks that it detects for the resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_disable_application_layer_automatic_response/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_disable_application_layer_automatic_response(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN (Amazon Resource Name) of the protected resource. |
Removes authorization from the Shield Response Team (SRT) to notify contacts about escalations to the SRT and to initiate proactive customer support
Description
Removes authorization from the Shield Response Team (SRT) to notify contacts about escalations to the SRT and to initiate proactive customer support.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_disable_proactive_engagement/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_disable_proactive_engagement()
Removes the Shield Response Team's (SRT) access to the specified Amazon S3 bucket containing the logs that you shared previously
Description
Removes the Shield Response Team's (SRT) access to the specified Amazon S3 bucket containing the logs that you shared previously.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_disassociate_drt_log_bucket/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_disassociate_drt_log_bucket(LogBucket)
Arguments
LogBucket |
[required] The Amazon S3 bucket that contains the logs that you want to share. |
Removes the Shield Response Team's (SRT) access to your Amazon Web Services account
Description
Removes the Shield Response Team's (SRT) access to your Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_disassociate_drt_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_disassociate_drt_role()
Removes health-based detection from the Shield Advanced protection for a resource
Description
Removes health-based detection from the Shield Advanced protection for a resource. Shield Advanced health-based detection uses the health of your Amazon Web Services resource to improve responsiveness and accuracy in attack detection and response.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_disassociate_health_check/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_disassociate_health_check(ProtectionId, HealthCheckArn)
Arguments
ProtectionId |
[required] The unique identifier (ID) for the Protection object to remove the health check association from. |
HealthCheckArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the health check that is associated with the protection. |
Enable the Shield Advanced automatic application layer DDoS mitigation for the protected resource
Description
Enable the Shield Advanced automatic application layer DDoS mitigation for the protected resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_enable_application_layer_automatic_response/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_enable_application_layer_automatic_response(ResourceArn, Action)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN (Amazon Resource Name) of the protected resource. |
Action |
[required] Specifies the action setting that Shield Advanced should use in the WAF rules that it creates on behalf of the protected resource in response to DDoS attacks. You specify this as part of the configuration for the automatic application layer DDoS mitigation feature, when you enable or update automatic mitigation. Shield Advanced creates the WAF rules in a Shield Advanced-managed rule group, inside the web ACL that you have associated with the resource. |
Authorizes the Shield Response Team (SRT) to use email and phone to notify contacts about escalations to the SRT and to initiate proactive customer support
Description
Authorizes the Shield Response Team (SRT) to use email and phone to notify contacts about escalations to the SRT and to initiate proactive customer support.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_enable_proactive_engagement/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_enable_proactive_engagement()
Returns the SubscriptionState, either Active or Inactive
Description
Returns the SubscriptionState
, either Active
or Inactive
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_get_subscription_state/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_get_subscription_state()
Returns all ongoing DDoS attacks or all DDoS attacks during a specified time period
Description
Returns all ongoing DDoS attacks or all DDoS attacks during a specified time period.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_list_attacks/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_list_attacks(
ResourceArns = NULL,
StartTime = NULL,
EndTime = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceArns |
The ARNs (Amazon Resource Names) of the resources that were attacked. If you leave this blank, all applicable resources for this account will be included. |
StartTime |
The start of the time period for the attacks. This is a |
EndTime |
The end of the time period for the attacks. This is a |
NextToken |
When you request a list of objects from Shield Advanced, if the response
does not include all of the remaining available objects, Shield Advanced
includes a You can indicate the maximum number of objects that you want Shield
Advanced to return for a single call with the Whenever more objects remain that Shield Advanced has not yet returned
to you, the response will include a On your first call to a list operation, leave this setting empty. |
MaxResults |
The greatest number of objects that you want Shield Advanced to return
to the list request. Shield Advanced might return fewer objects than you
indicate in this setting, even if more objects are available. If there
are more objects remaining, Shield Advanced will always also return a
The default setting is 20. |
Retrieves ProtectionGroup objects for the account
Description
Retrieves ProtectionGroup objects for the account. You can retrieve all protection groups or you can provide filtering criteria and retrieve just the subset of protection groups that match the criteria.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_list_protection_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_list_protection_groups(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
InclusionFilters = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
When you request a list of objects from Shield Advanced, if the response
does not include all of the remaining available objects, Shield Advanced
includes a You can indicate the maximum number of objects that you want Shield
Advanced to return for a single call with the Whenever more objects remain that Shield Advanced has not yet returned
to you, the response will include a On your first call to a list operation, leave this setting empty. |
MaxResults |
The greatest number of objects that you want Shield Advanced to return
to the list request. Shield Advanced might return fewer objects than you
indicate in this setting, even if more objects are available. If there
are more objects remaining, Shield Advanced will always also return a
The default setting is 20. |
InclusionFilters |
Narrows the set of protection groups that the call retrieves. You can retrieve a single protection group by its name and you can retrieve all protection groups that are configured with specific pattern or aggregation settings. You can provide up to one criteria per filter type. Shield Advanced returns the protection groups that exactly match all of the search criteria that you provide. |
Retrieves Protection objects for the account
Description
Retrieves Protection objects for the account. You can retrieve all protections or you can provide filtering criteria and retrieve just the subset of protections that match the criteria.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_list_protections/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_list_protections(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
InclusionFilters = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
When you request a list of objects from Shield Advanced, if the response
does not include all of the remaining available objects, Shield Advanced
includes a You can indicate the maximum number of objects that you want Shield
Advanced to return for a single call with the Whenever more objects remain that Shield Advanced has not yet returned
to you, the response will include a On your first call to a list operation, leave this setting empty. |
MaxResults |
The greatest number of objects that you want Shield Advanced to return
to the list request. Shield Advanced might return fewer objects than you
indicate in this setting, even if more objects are available. If there
are more objects remaining, Shield Advanced will always also return a
The default setting is 20. |
InclusionFilters |
Narrows the set of protections that the call retrieves. You can retrieve a single protection by providing its name or the ARN (Amazon Resource Name) of its protected resource. You can also retrieve all protections for a specific resource type. You can provide up to one criteria per filter type. Shield Advanced returns protections that exactly match all of the filter criteria that you provide. |
Retrieves the resources that are included in the protection group
Description
Retrieves the resources that are included in the protection group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_list_resources_in_protection_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_list_resources_in_protection_group(
ProtectionGroupId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
ProtectionGroupId |
[required] The name of the protection group. You use this to identify the protection group in lists and to manage the protection group, for example to update, delete, or describe it. |
NextToken |
When you request a list of objects from Shield Advanced, if the response
does not include all of the remaining available objects, Shield Advanced
includes a You can indicate the maximum number of objects that you want Shield
Advanced to return for a single call with the Whenever more objects remain that Shield Advanced has not yet returned
to you, the response will include a On your first call to a list operation, leave this setting empty. |
MaxResults |
The greatest number of objects that you want Shield Advanced to return
to the list request. Shield Advanced might return fewer objects than you
indicate in this setting, even if more objects are available. If there
are more objects remaining, Shield Advanced will always also return a
The default setting is 20. |
Gets information about Amazon Web Services tags for a specified Amazon Resource Name (ARN) in Shield
Description
Gets information about Amazon Web Services tags for a specified Amazon Resource Name (ARN) in Shield.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceARN)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to get tags for. |
Adds or updates tags for a resource in Shield
Description
Adds or updates tags for a resource in Shield.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to add or update tags for. |
Tags |
[required] The tags that you want to modify or add to the resource. |
Removes tags from a resource in Shield
Description
Removes tags from a resource in Shield.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to remove tags from. |
TagKeys |
[required] The tag key for each tag that you want to remove from the resource. |
Updates an existing Shield Advanced automatic application layer DDoS mitigation configuration for the specified resource
Description
Updates an existing Shield Advanced automatic application layer DDoS mitigation configuration for the specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_update_application_layer_automatic_response/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_update_application_layer_automatic_response(ResourceArn, Action)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN (Amazon Resource Name) of the resource. |
Action |
[required] Specifies the action setting that Shield Advanced should use in the WAF rules that it creates on behalf of the protected resource in response to DDoS attacks. You specify this as part of the configuration for the automatic application layer DDoS mitigation feature, when you enable or update automatic mitigation. Shield Advanced creates the WAF rules in a Shield Advanced-managed rule group, inside the web ACL that you have associated with the resource. |
Updates the details of the list of email addresses and phone numbers that the Shield Response Team (SRT) can use to contact you if you have proactive engagement enabled, for escalations to the SRT and to initiate proactive customer support
Description
Updates the details of the list of email addresses and phone numbers that the Shield Response Team (SRT) can use to contact you if you have proactive engagement enabled, for escalations to the SRT and to initiate proactive customer support.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_update_emergency_contact_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_update_emergency_contact_settings(EmergencyContactList = NULL)
Arguments
EmergencyContactList |
A list of email addresses and phone numbers that the Shield Response Team (SRT) can use to contact you if you have proactive engagement enabled, for escalations to the SRT and to initiate proactive customer support. If you have proactive engagement enabled, the contact list must include at least one phone number. |
Updates an existing protection group
Description
Updates an existing protection group. A protection group is a grouping of protected resources so they can be handled as a collective. This resource grouping improves the accuracy of detection and reduces false positives.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_update_protection_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_update_protection_group(
ProtectionGroupId,
Aggregation,
Pattern,
ResourceType = NULL,
Members = NULL
)
Arguments
ProtectionGroupId |
[required] The name of the protection group. You use this to identify the protection group in lists and to manage the protection group, for example to update, delete, or describe it. |
Aggregation |
[required] Defines how Shield combines resource data for the group in order to detect, mitigate, and report events.
|
Pattern |
[required] The criteria to use to choose the protected resources for inclusion in the group. You can include all resources that have protections, provide a list of resource Amazon Resource Names (ARNs), or include all resources of a specified resource type. |
ResourceType |
The resource type to include in the protection group. All protected
resources of this type are included in the protection group. You must
set this when you set |
Members |
The Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) of the resources to include in the
protection group. You must set this when you set |
Updates the details of an existing subscription
Description
Updates the details of an existing subscription. Only enter values for parameters you want to change. Empty parameters are not updated.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/shield_update_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
shield_update_subscription(AutoRenew = NULL)
Arguments
AutoRenew |
When you initally create a subscription, |
AWS Single Sign-On
Description
AWS IAM Identity Center (successor to AWS Single Sign-On) Portal is a web service that makes it easy for you to assign user access to IAM Identity Center resources such as the AWS access portal. Users can get AWS account applications and roles assigned to them and get federated into the application.
Although AWS Single Sign-On was renamed, the sso
and identitystore
API namespaces will continue to retain their original name for backward
compatibility purposes. For more information, see IAM Identity Center rename.
This reference guide describes the IAM Identity Center Portal operations that you can call programatically and includes detailed information on data types and errors.
AWS provides SDKs that consist of libraries and sample code for various programming languages and platforms, such as Java, Ruby, .Net, iOS, or Android. The SDKs provide a convenient way to create programmatic access to IAM Identity Center and other AWS services. For more information about the AWS SDKs, including how to download and install them, see Tools for Amazon Web Services.
Usage
sso(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- sso( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
get_role_credentials | Returns the STS short-term credentials for a given role name that is assigned to the user |
list_account_roles | Lists all roles that are assigned to the user for a given AWS account |
list_accounts | Lists all AWS accounts assigned to the user |
logout | Removes the locally stored SSO tokens from the client-side cache and sends an API call to the IAM Identity Center service to invalidate the corresponding server-side IAM Identity Center sign in session |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- sso()
svc$get_role_credentials(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Returns the STS short-term credentials for a given role name that is assigned to the user
Description
Returns the STS short-term credentials for a given role name that is assigned to the user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/sso_get_role_credentials/ for full documentation.
Usage
sso_get_role_credentials(roleName, accountId, accessToken)
Arguments
roleName |
[required] The friendly name of the role that is assigned to the user. |
accountId |
[required] The identifier for the AWS account that is assigned to the user. |
accessToken |
[required] The token issued by the |
Lists all roles that are assigned to the user for a given AWS account
Description
Lists all roles that are assigned to the user for a given AWS account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/sso_list_account_roles/ for full documentation.
Usage
sso_list_account_roles(
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
accessToken,
accountId
)
Arguments
nextToken |
The page token from the previous response output when you request subsequent pages. |
maxResults |
The number of items that clients can request per page. |
accessToken |
[required] The token issued by the |
accountId |
[required] The identifier for the AWS account that is assigned to the user. |
Lists all AWS accounts assigned to the user
Description
Lists all AWS accounts assigned to the user. These AWS accounts are assigned by the administrator of the account. For more information, see Assign User Access in the IAM Identity Center User Guide. This operation returns a paginated response.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/sso_list_accounts/ for full documentation.
Usage
sso_list_accounts(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL, accessToken)
Arguments
nextToken |
(Optional) When requesting subsequent pages, this is the page token from the previous response output. |
maxResults |
This is the number of items clients can request per page. |
accessToken |
[required] The token issued by the |
Removes the locally stored SSO tokens from the client-side cache and sends an API call to the IAM Identity Center service to invalidate the corresponding server-side IAM Identity Center sign in session
Description
Removes the locally stored SSO tokens from the client-side cache and sends an API call to the IAM Identity Center service to invalidate the corresponding server-side IAM Identity Center sign in session.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/sso_logout/ for full documentation.
Usage
sso_logout(accessToken)
Arguments
accessToken |
[required] The token issued by the |
AWS Single Sign-On Admin
Description
IAM Identity Center (successor to Single Sign-On) helps you securely create, or connect, your workforce identities and manage their access centrally across Amazon Web Services accounts and applications. IAM Identity Center is the recommended approach for workforce authentication and authorization in Amazon Web Services, for organizations of any size and type.
IAM Identity Center uses the sso
and identitystore
API namespaces.
This reference guide provides information on single sign-on operations which could be used for access management of Amazon Web Services accounts. For information about IAM Identity Center features, see the IAM Identity Center User Guide.
Many operations in the IAM Identity Center APIs rely on identifiers for users and groups, known as principals. For more information about how to work with principals and principal IDs in IAM Identity Center, see the Identity Store API Reference.
Amazon Web Services provides SDKs that consist of libraries and sample code for various programming languages and platforms (Java, Ruby, .Net, iOS, Android, and more). The SDKs provide a convenient way to create programmatic access to IAM Identity Center and other Amazon Web Services services. For more information about the Amazon Web Services SDKs, including how to download and install them, see Tools for Amazon Web Services.
Usage
ssoadmin(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- ssoadmin( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
attach_customer_managed_policy_reference_to_permission_set | Attaches the specified customer managed policy to the specified PermissionSet |
attach_managed_policy_to_permission_set | Attaches an Amazon Web Services managed policy ARN to a permission set |
create_account_assignment | Assigns access to a principal for a specified Amazon Web Services account using a specified permission set |
create_application | Creates an application in IAM Identity Center for the given application provider |
create_application_assignment | Grant application access to a user or group |
create_instance | Creates an instance of IAM Identity Center for a standalone Amazon Web Services account that is not managed by Organizations or a member Amazon Web Services account in an organization |
create_instance_access_control_attribute_configuration | Enables the attributes-based access control (ABAC) feature for the specified IAM Identity Center instance |
create_permission_set | Creates a permission set within a specified IAM Identity Center instance |
create_trusted_token_issuer | Creates a connection to a trusted token issuer in an instance of IAM Identity Center |
delete_account_assignment | Deletes a principal's access from a specified Amazon Web Services account using a specified permission set |
delete_application | Deletes the association with the application |
delete_application_access_scope | Deletes an IAM Identity Center access scope from an application |
delete_application_assignment | Revoke application access to an application by deleting application assignments for a user or group |
delete_application_authentication_method | Deletes an authentication method from an application |
delete_application_grant | Deletes a grant from an application |
delete_inline_policy_from_permission_set | Deletes the inline policy from a specified permission set |
delete_instance | Deletes the instance of IAM Identity Center |
delete_instance_access_control_attribute_configuration | Disables the attributes-based access control (ABAC) feature for the specified IAM Identity Center instance and deletes all of the attribute mappings that have been configured |
delete_permissions_boundary_from_permission_set | Deletes the permissions boundary from a specified PermissionSet |
delete_permission_set | Deletes the specified permission set |
delete_trusted_token_issuer | Deletes a trusted token issuer configuration from an instance of IAM Identity Center |
describe_account_assignment_creation_status | Describes the status of the assignment creation request |
describe_account_assignment_deletion_status | Describes the status of the assignment deletion request |
describe_application | Retrieves the details of an application associated with an instance of IAM Identity Center |
describe_application_assignment | Retrieves a direct assignment of a user or group to an application |
describe_application_provider | Retrieves details about a provider that can be used to connect an Amazon Web Services managed application or customer managed application to IAM Identity Center |
describe_instance | Returns the details of an instance of IAM Identity Center |
describe_instance_access_control_attribute_configuration | Returns the list of IAM Identity Center identity store attributes that have been configured to work with attributes-based access control (ABAC) for the specified IAM Identity Center instance |
describe_permission_set | Gets the details of the permission set |
describe_permission_set_provisioning_status | Describes the status for the given permission set provisioning request |
describe_trusted_token_issuer | Retrieves details about a trusted token issuer configuration stored in an instance of IAM Identity Center |
detach_customer_managed_policy_reference_from_permission_set | Detaches the specified customer managed policy from the specified PermissionSet |
detach_managed_policy_from_permission_set | Detaches the attached Amazon Web Services managed policy ARN from the specified permission set |
get_application_access_scope | Retrieves the authorized targets for an IAM Identity Center access scope for an application |
get_application_assignment_configuration | Retrieves the configuration of PutApplicationAssignmentConfiguration |
get_application_authentication_method | Retrieves details about an authentication method used by an application |
get_application_grant | Retrieves details about an application grant |
get_inline_policy_for_permission_set | Obtains the inline policy assigned to the permission set |
get_permissions_boundary_for_permission_set | Obtains the permissions boundary for a specified PermissionSet |
list_account_assignment_creation_status | Lists the status of the Amazon Web Services account assignment creation requests for a specified IAM Identity Center instance |
list_account_assignment_deletion_status | Lists the status of the Amazon Web Services account assignment deletion requests for a specified IAM Identity Center instance |
list_account_assignments | Lists the assignee of the specified Amazon Web Services account with the specified permission set |
list_account_assignments_for_principal | Retrieves a list of the IAM Identity Center associated Amazon Web Services accounts that the principal has access to |
list_accounts_for_provisioned_permission_set | Lists all the Amazon Web Services accounts where the specified permission set is provisioned |
list_application_access_scopes | Lists the access scopes and authorized targets associated with an application |
list_application_assignments | Lists Amazon Web Services account users that are assigned to an application |
list_application_assignments_for_principal | Lists the applications to which a specified principal is assigned |
list_application_authentication_methods | Lists all of the authentication methods supported by the specified application |
list_application_grants | List the grants associated with an application |
list_application_providers | Lists the application providers configured in the IAM Identity Center identity store |
list_applications | Lists all applications associated with the instance of IAM Identity Center |
list_customer_managed_policy_references_in_permission_set | Lists all customer managed policies attached to a specified PermissionSet |
list_instances | Lists the details of the organization and account instances of IAM Identity Center that were created in or visible to the account calling this API |
list_managed_policies_in_permission_set | Lists the Amazon Web Services managed policy that is attached to a specified permission set |
list_permission_set_provisioning_status | Lists the status of the permission set provisioning requests for a specified IAM Identity Center instance |
list_permission_sets | Lists the PermissionSets in an IAM Identity Center instance |
list_permission_sets_provisioned_to_account | Lists all the permission sets that are provisioned to a specified Amazon Web Services account |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists the tags that are attached to a specified resource |
list_trusted_token_issuers | Lists all the trusted token issuers configured in an instance of IAM Identity Center |
provision_permission_set | The process by which a specified permission set is provisioned to the specified target |
put_application_access_scope | Adds or updates the list of authorized targets for an IAM Identity Center access scope for an application |
put_application_assignment_configuration | Configure how users gain access to an application |
put_application_authentication_method | Adds or updates an authentication method for an application |
put_application_grant | Adds a grant to an application |
put_inline_policy_to_permission_set | Attaches an inline policy to a permission set |
put_permissions_boundary_to_permission_set | Attaches an Amazon Web Services managed or customer managed policy to the specified PermissionSet as a permissions boundary |
tag_resource | Associates a set of tags with a specified resource |
untag_resource | Disassociates a set of tags from a specified resource |
update_application | Updates application properties |
update_instance | Update the details for the instance of IAM Identity Center that is owned by the Amazon Web Services account |
update_instance_access_control_attribute_configuration | Updates the IAM Identity Center identity store attributes that you can use with the IAM Identity Center instance for attributes-based access control (ABAC) |
update_permission_set | Updates an existing permission set |
update_trusted_token_issuer | Updates the name of the trusted token issuer, or the path of a source attribute or destination attribute for a trusted token issuer configuration |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- ssoadmin()
svc$attach_customer_managed_policy_reference_to_permission_set(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Attaches the specified customer managed policy to the specified PermissionSet
Description
Attaches the specified customer managed policy to the specified PermissionSet.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_attach_customer_managed_policy_reference_to_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_attach_customer_managed_policy_reference_to_permission_set(
CustomerManagedPolicyReference,
InstanceArn,
PermissionSetArn
)
Arguments
CustomerManagedPolicyReference |
[required] Specifies the name and path of a customer managed policy. You must have an IAM policy that matches the name and path in each Amazon Web Services account where you want to deploy your permission set. |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the |
Attaches an Amazon Web Services managed policy ARN to a permission set
Description
Attaches an Amazon Web Services managed policy ARN to a permission set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_attach_managed_policy_to_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_attach_managed_policy_to_permission_set(
InstanceArn,
ManagedPolicyArn,
PermissionSetArn
)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
ManagedPolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Web Services managed policy ARN to be attached to a permission set. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the PermissionSet that the managed policy should be attached to. |
Assigns access to a principal for a specified Amazon Web Services account using a specified permission set
Description
Assigns access to a principal for a specified Amazon Web Services account using a specified permission set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_create_account_assignment/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_create_account_assignment(
InstanceArn,
PermissionSetArn,
PrincipalId,
PrincipalType,
TargetId,
TargetType
)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the permission set that the admin wants to grant the principal access to. |
PrincipalId |
[required] An identifier for an object in IAM Identity Center, such as a user or group. PrincipalIds are GUIDs (For example, f81d4fae-7dec-11d0-a765-00a0c91e6bf6). For more information about PrincipalIds in IAM Identity Center, see the IAM Identity Center Identity Store API Reference. |
PrincipalType |
[required] The entity type for which the assignment will be created. |
TargetId |
[required] TargetID is an Amazon Web Services account identifier, (For example, 123456789012). |
TargetType |
[required] The entity type for which the assignment will be created. |
Creates an application in IAM Identity Center for the given application provider
Description
Creates an application in IAM Identity Center for the given application provider.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_create_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_create_application(
ApplicationProviderArn,
ClientToken = NULL,
Description = NULL,
InstanceArn,
Name,
PortalOptions = NULL,
Status = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationProviderArn |
[required] The ARN of the application provider under which the operation will run. |
ClientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive ID that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
Description |
The description of the . |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the instance of IAM Identity Center under which the operation will run. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Name |
[required] The name of the . |
PortalOptions |
A structure that describes the options for the portal associated with an application. |
Status |
Specifies whether the application is enabled or disabled. |
Tags |
Specifies tags to be attached to the application. |
Grant application access to a user or group
Description
Grant application access to a user or group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_create_application_assignment/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_create_application_assignment(
ApplicationArn,
PrincipalId,
PrincipalType
)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] The ARN of the application provider under which the operation will run. |
PrincipalId |
[required] An identifier for an object in IAM Identity Center, such as a user or group. PrincipalIds are GUIDs (For example, f81d4fae-7dec-11d0-a765-00a0c91e6bf6). For more information about PrincipalIds in IAM Identity Center, see the IAM Identity Center Identity Store API Reference. |
PrincipalType |
[required] The entity type for which the assignment will be created. |
Creates an instance of IAM Identity Center for a standalone Amazon Web Services account that is not managed by Organizations or a member Amazon Web Services account in an organization
Description
Creates an instance of IAM Identity Center for a standalone Amazon Web Services account that is not managed by Organizations or a member Amazon Web Services account in an organization. You can create only one instance per account and across all Amazon Web Services Regions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_create_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_create_instance(ClientToken = NULL, Name = NULL, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
ClientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive ID that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
Name |
The name of the instance of IAM Identity Center. |
Tags |
Specifies tags to be attached to the instance of IAM Identity Center. |
Enables the attributes-based access control (ABAC) feature for the specified IAM Identity Center instance
Description
Enables the attributes-based access control (ABAC) feature for the specified IAM Identity Center instance. You can also specify new attributes to add to your ABAC configuration during the enabling process. For more information about ABAC, see Attribute-Based Access Control in the IAM Identity Center User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_create_instance_access_control_attribute_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_create_instance_access_control_attribute_configuration(
InstanceAccessControlAttributeConfiguration,
InstanceArn
)
Arguments
InstanceAccessControlAttributeConfiguration |
[required] Specifies the IAM Identity Center identity store attributes to add to your ABAC configuration. When using an external identity provider as an identity source, you can pass attributes through the SAML assertion. Doing so provides an alternative to configuring attributes from the IAM Identity Center identity store. If a SAML assertion passes any of these attributes, IAM Identity Center will replace the attribute value with the value from the IAM Identity Center identity store. |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. |
Creates a permission set within a specified IAM Identity Center instance
Description
Creates a permission set within a specified IAM Identity Center instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_create_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_create_permission_set(
Description = NULL,
InstanceArn,
Name,
RelayState = NULL,
SessionDuration = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Description |
The description of the PermissionSet. |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Name |
[required] The name of the PermissionSet. |
RelayState |
Used to redirect users within the application during the federation authentication process. |
SessionDuration |
The length of time that the application user sessions are valid in the ISO-8601 standard. |
Tags |
The tags to attach to the new PermissionSet. |
Creates a connection to a trusted token issuer in an instance of IAM Identity Center
Description
Creates a connection to a trusted token issuer in an instance of IAM Identity Center. A trusted token issuer enables trusted identity propagation to be used with applications that authenticate outside of Amazon Web Services.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_create_trusted_token_issuer/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_create_trusted_token_issuer(
ClientToken = NULL,
InstanceArn,
Name,
Tags = NULL,
TrustedTokenIssuerConfiguration,
TrustedTokenIssuerType
)
Arguments
ClientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive ID that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same |
InstanceArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the instance of IAM Identity Center to contain the new trusted token issuer configuration. |
Name |
[required] Specifies the name of the new trusted token issuer configuration. |
Tags |
Specifies tags to be attached to the new trusted token issuer configuration. |
TrustedTokenIssuerConfiguration |
[required] Specifies settings that apply to the new trusted token issuer
configuration. The settings that are available depend on what
|
TrustedTokenIssuerType |
[required] Specifies the type of the new trusted token issuer. |
Deletes a principal's access from a specified Amazon Web Services account using a specified permission set
Description
Deletes a principal's access from a specified Amazon Web Services account using a specified permission set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_delete_account_assignment/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_delete_account_assignment(
InstanceArn,
PermissionSetArn,
PrincipalId,
PrincipalType,
TargetId,
TargetType
)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the permission set that will be used to remove access. |
PrincipalId |
[required] An identifier for an object in IAM Identity Center, such as a user or group. PrincipalIds are GUIDs (For example, f81d4fae-7dec-11d0-a765-00a0c91e6bf6). For more information about PrincipalIds in IAM Identity Center, see the IAM Identity Center Identity Store API Reference. |
PrincipalType |
[required] The entity type for which the assignment will be deleted. |
TargetId |
[required] TargetID is an Amazon Web Services account identifier, (For example, 123456789012). |
TargetType |
[required] The entity type for which the assignment will be deleted. |
Deletes the association with the application
Description
Deletes the association with the application. The connected service resource still exists.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_delete_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_delete_application(ApplicationArn)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Deletes an IAM Identity Center access scope from an application
Description
Deletes an IAM Identity Center access scope from an application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_delete_application_access_scope/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_delete_application_access_scope(ApplicationArn, Scope)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application with the access scope to delete. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies the name of the access scope to remove from the application. |
Revoke application access to an application by deleting application assignments for a user or group
Description
Revoke application access to an application by deleting application assignments for a user or group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_delete_application_assignment/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_delete_application_assignment(
ApplicationArn,
PrincipalId,
PrincipalType
)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application. |
PrincipalId |
[required] An identifier for an object in IAM Identity Center, such as a user or group. PrincipalIds are GUIDs (For example, f81d4fae-7dec-11d0-a765-00a0c91e6bf6). For more information about PrincipalIds in IAM Identity Center, see the IAM Identity Center Identity Store API Reference. |
PrincipalType |
[required] The entity type for which the assignment will be deleted. |
Deletes an authentication method from an application
Description
Deletes an authentication method from an application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_delete_application_authentication_method/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_delete_application_authentication_method(
ApplicationArn,
AuthenticationMethodType
)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application with the authentication method to delete. |
AuthenticationMethodType |
[required] Specifies the authentication method type to delete from the application. |
Deletes a grant from an application
Description
Deletes a grant from an application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_delete_application_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_delete_application_grant(ApplicationArn, GrantType)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application with the grant to delete. |
GrantType |
[required] Specifies the type of grant to delete from the application. |
Deletes the inline policy from a specified permission set
Description
Deletes the inline policy from a specified permission set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_delete_inline_policy_from_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_delete_inline_policy_from_permission_set(
InstanceArn,
PermissionSetArn
)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the permission set that will be used to remove access. |
Deletes the instance of IAM Identity Center
Description
Deletes the instance of IAM Identity Center. Only the account that owns the instance can call this API. Neither the delegated administrator nor member account can delete the organization instance, but those roles can delete their own instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_delete_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_delete_instance(InstanceArn)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the instance of IAM Identity Center under which the operation will run. |
Disables the attributes-based access control (ABAC) feature for the specified IAM Identity Center instance and deletes all of the attribute mappings that have been configured
Description
Disables the attributes-based access control (ABAC) feature for the specified IAM Identity Center instance and deletes all of the attribute mappings that have been configured. Once deleted, any attributes that are received from an identity source and any custom attributes you have previously configured will not be passed. For more information about ABAC, see Attribute-Based Access Control in the IAM Identity Center User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_delete_instance_access_control_attribute_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_delete_instance_access_control_attribute_configuration(InstanceArn)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. |
Deletes the specified permission set
Description
Deletes the specified permission set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_delete_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_delete_permission_set(InstanceArn, PermissionSetArn)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the permission set that should be deleted. |
Deletes the permissions boundary from a specified PermissionSet
Description
Deletes the permissions boundary from a specified PermissionSet.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_delete_permissions_boundary_from_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_delete_permissions_boundary_from_permission_set(
InstanceArn,
PermissionSetArn
)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the |
Deletes a trusted token issuer configuration from an instance of IAM Identity Center
Description
Deletes a trusted token issuer configuration from an instance of IAM Identity Center.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_delete_trusted_token_issuer/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_delete_trusted_token_issuer(TrustedTokenIssuerArn)
Arguments
TrustedTokenIssuerArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the trusted token issuer configuration to delete. |
Describes the status of the assignment creation request
Description
Describes the status of the assignment creation request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_describe_account_assignment_creation_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_describe_account_assignment_creation_status(
AccountAssignmentCreationRequestId,
InstanceArn
)
Arguments
AccountAssignmentCreationRequestId |
[required] The identifier that is used to track the request operation progress. |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Describes the status of the assignment deletion request
Description
Describes the status of the assignment deletion request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_describe_account_assignment_deletion_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_describe_account_assignment_deletion_status(
AccountAssignmentDeletionRequestId,
InstanceArn
)
Arguments
AccountAssignmentDeletionRequestId |
[required] The identifier that is used to track the request operation progress. |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Retrieves the details of an application associated with an instance of IAM Identity Center
Description
Retrieves the details of an application associated with an instance of IAM Identity Center.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_describe_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_describe_application(ApplicationArn)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Retrieves a direct assignment of a user or group to an application
Description
Retrieves a direct assignment of a user or group to an application. If the user doesn’t have a direct assignment to the application, the user may still have access to the application through a group. Therefore, don’t use this API to test access to an application for a user. Instead use list_application_assignments_for_principal
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_describe_application_assignment/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_describe_application_assignment(
ApplicationArn,
PrincipalId,
PrincipalType
)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
PrincipalId |
[required] An identifier for an object in IAM Identity Center, such as a user or group. PrincipalIds are GUIDs (For example, f81d4fae-7dec-11d0-a765-00a0c91e6bf6). For more information about PrincipalIds in IAM Identity Center, see the IAM Identity Center Identity Store API Reference. |
PrincipalType |
[required] The entity type for which the assignment will be created. |
Retrieves details about a provider that can be used to connect an Amazon Web Services managed application or customer managed application to IAM Identity Center
Description
Retrieves details about a provider that can be used to connect an Amazon Web Services managed application or customer managed application to IAM Identity Center.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_describe_application_provider/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_describe_application_provider(ApplicationProviderArn)
Arguments
ApplicationProviderArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application provider for which you want details. |
Returns the details of an instance of IAM Identity Center
Description
Returns the details of an instance of IAM Identity Center. The status can be one of the following:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_describe_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_describe_instance(InstanceArn)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the instance of IAM Identity Center under which the operation will run. |
Returns the list of IAM Identity Center identity store attributes that have been configured to work with attributes-based access control (ABAC) for the specified IAM Identity Center instance
Description
Returns the list of IAM Identity Center identity store attributes that have been configured to work with attributes-based access control (ABAC) for the specified IAM Identity Center instance. This will not return attributes configured and sent by an external identity provider. For more information about ABAC, see Attribute-Based Access Control in the IAM Identity Center User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_describe_instance_access_control_attribute_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_describe_instance_access_control_attribute_configuration(InstanceArn)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. |
Gets the details of the permission set
Description
Gets the details of the permission set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_describe_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_describe_permission_set(InstanceArn, PermissionSetArn)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the permission set. |
Describes the status for the given permission set provisioning request
Description
Describes the status for the given permission set provisioning request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_describe_permission_set_provisioning_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_describe_permission_set_provisioning_status(
InstanceArn,
ProvisionPermissionSetRequestId
)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
ProvisionPermissionSetRequestId |
[required] The identifier that is provided by the
|
Retrieves details about a trusted token issuer configuration stored in an instance of IAM Identity Center
Description
Retrieves details about a trusted token issuer configuration stored in an instance of IAM Identity Center. Details include the name of the trusted token issuer, the issuer URL, and the path of the source attribute and the destination attribute for a trusted token issuer configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_describe_trusted_token_issuer/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_describe_trusted_token_issuer(TrustedTokenIssuerArn)
Arguments
TrustedTokenIssuerArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the trusted token issuer configuration that you want details about. |
Detaches the specified customer managed policy from the specified PermissionSet
Description
Detaches the specified customer managed policy from the specified PermissionSet.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_detach_customer_managed_policy_reference_from_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_detach_customer_managed_policy_reference_from_permission_set(
CustomerManagedPolicyReference,
InstanceArn,
PermissionSetArn
)
Arguments
CustomerManagedPolicyReference |
[required] Specifies the name and path of a customer managed policy. You must have an IAM policy that matches the name and path in each Amazon Web Services account where you want to deploy your permission set. |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the |
Detaches the attached Amazon Web Services managed policy ARN from the specified permission set
Description
Detaches the attached Amazon Web Services managed policy ARN from the specified permission set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_detach_managed_policy_from_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_detach_managed_policy_from_permission_set(
InstanceArn,
ManagedPolicyArn,
PermissionSetArn
)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
ManagedPolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Web Services managed policy ARN to be detached from a permission set. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the PermissionSet from which the policy should be detached. |
Retrieves the authorized targets for an IAM Identity Center access scope for an application
Description
Retrieves the authorized targets for an IAM Identity Center access scope for an application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_get_application_access_scope/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_get_application_access_scope(ApplicationArn, Scope)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application with the access scope that you want to retrieve. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies the name of the access scope for which you want the authorized targets. |
Retrieves the configuration of PutApplicationAssignmentConfiguration
Description
Retrieves the configuration of put_application_assignment_configuration
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_get_application_assignment_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_get_application_assignment_configuration(ApplicationArn)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Retrieves details about an authentication method used by an application
Description
Retrieves details about an authentication method used by an application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_get_application_authentication_method/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_get_application_authentication_method(
ApplicationArn,
AuthenticationMethodType
)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application. |
AuthenticationMethodType |
[required] Specifies the type of authentication method for which you want details. |
Retrieves details about an application grant
Description
Retrieves details about an application grant.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_get_application_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_get_application_grant(ApplicationArn, GrantType)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application that contains the grant. |
GrantType |
[required] Specifies the type of grant. |
Obtains the inline policy assigned to the permission set
Description
Obtains the inline policy assigned to the permission set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_get_inline_policy_for_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_get_inline_policy_for_permission_set(InstanceArn, PermissionSetArn)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the permission set. |
Obtains the permissions boundary for a specified PermissionSet
Description
Obtains the permissions boundary for a specified PermissionSet.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_get_permissions_boundary_for_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_get_permissions_boundary_for_permission_set(
InstanceArn,
PermissionSetArn
)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the |
Lists the status of the Amazon Web Services account assignment creation requests for a specified IAM Identity Center instance
Description
Lists the status of the Amazon Web Services account assignment creation requests for a specified IAM Identity Center instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_account_assignment_creation_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_account_assignment_creation_status(
Filter = NULL,
InstanceArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Filter |
Filters results based on the passed attribute value. |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to display for the assignment. |
NextToken |
The pagination token for the list API. Initially the value is null. Use the output of previous API calls to make subsequent calls. |
Lists the status of the Amazon Web Services account assignment deletion requests for a specified IAM Identity Center instance
Description
Lists the status of the Amazon Web Services account assignment deletion requests for a specified IAM Identity Center instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_account_assignment_deletion_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_account_assignment_deletion_status(
Filter = NULL,
InstanceArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Filter |
Filters results based on the passed attribute value. |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to display for the assignment. |
NextToken |
The pagination token for the list API. Initially the value is null. Use the output of previous API calls to make subsequent calls. |
Lists the assignee of the specified Amazon Web Services account with the specified permission set
Description
Lists the assignee of the specified Amazon Web Services account with the specified permission set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_account_assignments/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_account_assignments(
AccountId,
InstanceArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
PermissionSetArn
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon Web Services account from which to list the assignments. |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to display for the assignment. |
NextToken |
The pagination token for the list API. Initially the value is null. Use the output of previous API calls to make subsequent calls. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the permission set from which to list assignments. |
Retrieves a list of the IAM Identity Center associated Amazon Web Services accounts that the principal has access to
Description
Retrieves a list of the IAM Identity Center associated Amazon Web Services accounts that the principal has access to.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_account_assignments_for_principal/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_account_assignments_for_principal(
Filter = NULL,
InstanceArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
PrincipalId,
PrincipalType
)
Arguments
Filter |
Specifies an Amazon Web Services account ID number. Results are filtered to only those that match this ID number. |
InstanceArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the instance of IAM Identity Center that contains the principal. |
MaxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included in each
response. If additional items exist beyond the number you specify, the
|
NextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
PrincipalId |
[required] Specifies the principal for which you want to retrieve the list of account assignments. |
PrincipalType |
[required] Specifies the type of the principal. |
Lists all the Amazon Web Services accounts where the specified permission set is provisioned
Description
Lists all the Amazon Web Services accounts where the specified permission set is provisioned.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_accounts_for_provisioned_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_accounts_for_provisioned_permission_set(
InstanceArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
PermissionSetArn,
ProvisioningStatus = NULL
)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to display for the PermissionSet. |
NextToken |
The pagination token for the list API. Initially the value is null. Use the output of previous API calls to make subsequent calls. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the PermissionSet from which the associated Amazon Web Services accounts will be listed. |
ProvisioningStatus |
The permission set provisioning status for an Amazon Web Services account. |
Lists the access scopes and authorized targets associated with an application
Description
Lists the access scopes and authorized targets associated with an application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_application_access_scopes/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_application_access_scopes(
ApplicationArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application. |
MaxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included in each
response. If additional items exist beyond the number you specify, the
|
NextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
Lists Amazon Web Services account users that are assigned to an application
Description
Lists Amazon Web Services account users that are assigned to an application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_application_assignments/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_application_assignments(
ApplicationArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application. |
MaxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included in each
response. If additional items exist beyond the number you specify, the
|
NextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
Lists the applications to which a specified principal is assigned
Description
Lists the applications to which a specified principal is assigned.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_application_assignments_for_principal/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_application_assignments_for_principal(
Filter = NULL,
InstanceArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
PrincipalId,
PrincipalType
)
Arguments
Filter |
Filters the output to include only assignments associated with the application that has the specified ARN. |
InstanceArn |
[required] Specifies the instance of IAM Identity Center that contains principal and applications. |
MaxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included in each
response. If additional items exist beyond the number you specify, the
|
NextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
PrincipalId |
[required] Specifies the unique identifier of the principal for which you want to retrieve its assignments. |
PrincipalType |
[required] Specifies the type of the principal for which you want to retrieve its assignments. |
Lists all of the authentication methods supported by the specified application
Description
Lists all of the authentication methods supported by the specified application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_application_authentication_methods/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_application_authentication_methods(
ApplicationArn,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application with the authentication methods you want to list. |
NextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
List the grants associated with an application
Description
List the grants associated with an application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_application_grants/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_application_grants(ApplicationArn, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application whose grants you want to list. |
NextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
Lists the application providers configured in the IAM Identity Center identity store
Description
Lists the application providers configured in the IAM Identity Center identity store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_application_providers/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_application_providers(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included in each
response. If additional items exist beyond the number you specify, the
|
NextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
Lists all applications associated with the instance of IAM Identity Center
Description
Lists all applications associated with the instance of IAM Identity Center. When listing applications for an instance in the management account, member accounts must use the applicationAccount
parameter to filter the list to only applications created from that account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_applications/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_applications(
Filter = NULL,
InstanceArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Filter |
Filters response results. |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center application under which the operation will run. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
MaxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included in each
response. If additional items exist beyond the number you specify, the
|
NextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
Lists all customer managed policies attached to a specified PermissionSet
Description
Lists all customer managed policies attached to a specified PermissionSet.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_customer_managed_policy_references_in_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_customer_managed_policy_references_in_permission_set(
InstanceArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
PermissionSetArn
)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to display for the list call. |
NextToken |
The pagination token for the list API. Initially the value is null. Use the output of previous API calls to make subsequent calls. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the |
Lists the details of the organization and account instances of IAM Identity Center that were created in or visible to the account calling this API
Description
Lists the details of the organization and account instances of IAM Identity Center that were created in or visible to the account calling this API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_instances/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_instances(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to display for the instance. |
NextToken |
The pagination token for the list API. Initially the value is null. Use the output of previous API calls to make subsequent calls. |
Lists the Amazon Web Services managed policy that is attached to a specified permission set
Description
Lists the Amazon Web Services managed policy that is attached to a specified permission set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_managed_policies_in_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_managed_policies_in_permission_set(
InstanceArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
PermissionSetArn
)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to display for the PermissionSet. |
NextToken |
The pagination token for the list API. Initially the value is null. Use the output of previous API calls to make subsequent calls. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the PermissionSet whose managed policies will be listed. |
Lists the status of the permission set provisioning requests for a specified IAM Identity Center instance
Description
Lists the status of the permission set provisioning requests for a specified IAM Identity Center instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_permission_set_provisioning_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_permission_set_provisioning_status(
Filter = NULL,
InstanceArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Filter |
Filters results based on the passed attribute value. |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to display for the assignment. |
NextToken |
The pagination token for the list API. Initially the value is null. Use the output of previous API calls to make subsequent calls. |
Lists the PermissionSets in an IAM Identity Center instance
Description
Lists the PermissionSets in an IAM Identity Center instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_permission_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_permission_sets(InstanceArn, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to display for the assignment. |
NextToken |
The pagination token for the list API. Initially the value is null. Use the output of previous API calls to make subsequent calls. |
Lists all the permission sets that are provisioned to a specified Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists all the permission sets that are provisioned to a specified Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_permission_sets_provisioned_to_account/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_permission_sets_provisioned_to_account(
AccountId,
InstanceArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
ProvisioningStatus = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon Web Services account from which to list the assignments. |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to display for the assignment. |
NextToken |
The pagination token for the list API. Initially the value is null. Use the output of previous API calls to make subsequent calls. |
ProvisioningStatus |
The status object for the permission set provisioning operation. |
Lists the tags that are attached to a specified resource
Description
Lists the tags that are attached to a specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_tags_for_resource(
InstanceArn = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
ResourceArn
)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
NextToken |
The pagination token for the list API. Initially the value is null. Use the output of previous API calls to make subsequent calls. |
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource with the tags to be listed. |
Lists all the trusted token issuers configured in an instance of IAM Identity Center
Description
Lists all the trusted token issuers configured in an instance of IAM Identity Center.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_list_trusted_token_issuers/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_list_trusted_token_issuers(
InstanceArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the instance of IAM Identity Center with the trusted token issuer configurations that you want to list. |
MaxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included in each
response. If additional items exist beyond the number you specify, the
|
NextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
The process by which a specified permission set is provisioned to the specified target
Description
The process by which a specified permission set is provisioned to the specified target.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_provision_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_provision_permission_set(
InstanceArn,
PermissionSetArn,
TargetId = NULL,
TargetType
)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the permission set. |
TargetId |
TargetID is an Amazon Web Services account identifier, (For example, 123456789012). |
TargetType |
[required] The entity type for which the assignment will be created. |
Adds or updates the list of authorized targets for an IAM Identity Center access scope for an application
Description
Adds or updates the list of authorized targets for an IAM Identity Center access scope for an application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_put_application_access_scope/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_put_application_access_scope(
ApplicationArn,
AuthorizedTargets = NULL,
Scope
)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application with the access scope with the targets to add or update. |
AuthorizedTargets |
Specifies an array list of ARNs that represent the authorized targets for this access scope. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies the name of the access scope to be associated with the specified targets. |
Configure how users gain access to an application
Description
Configure how users gain access to an application. If AssignmentsRequired
is true
(default value), users don’t have access to the application unless an assignment is created using the CreateApplicationAssignment API. If false
, all users have access to the application. If an assignment is created using create_application_assignment
., the user retains access if AssignmentsRequired
is set to true
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_put_application_assignment_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_put_application_assignment_configuration(
ApplicationArn,
AssignmentRequired
)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
AssignmentRequired |
[required] If |
Adds or updates an authentication method for an application
Description
Adds or updates an authentication method for an application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_put_application_authentication_method/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_put_application_authentication_method(
ApplicationArn,
AuthenticationMethod,
AuthenticationMethodType
)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application with the authentication method to add or update. |
AuthenticationMethod |
[required] Specifies a structure that describes the authentication method to add or
update. The structure type you provide is determined by the
|
AuthenticationMethodType |
[required] Specifies the type of the authentication method that you want to add or update. |
Adds a grant to an application
Description
Adds a grant to an application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_put_application_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_put_application_grant(ApplicationArn, Grant, GrantType)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application to update. |
Grant |
[required] Specifies a structure that describes the grant to update. |
GrantType |
[required] Specifies the type of grant to update. |
Attaches an inline policy to a permission set
Description
Attaches an inline policy to a permission set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_put_inline_policy_to_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_put_inline_policy_to_permission_set(
InlinePolicy,
InstanceArn,
PermissionSetArn
)
Arguments
InlinePolicy |
[required] The inline policy to attach to a PermissionSet. |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the permission set. |
Attaches an Amazon Web Services managed or customer managed policy to the specified PermissionSet as a permissions boundary
Description
Attaches an Amazon Web Services managed or customer managed policy to the specified PermissionSet as a permissions boundary.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_put_permissions_boundary_to_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_put_permissions_boundary_to_permission_set(
InstanceArn,
PermissionSetArn,
PermissionsBoundary
)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the |
PermissionsBoundary |
[required] The permissions boundary that you want to attach to a |
Associates a set of tags with a specified resource
Description
Associates a set of tags with a specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_tag_resource(InstanceArn = NULL, ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource with the tags to be listed. |
Tags |
[required] A set of key-value pairs that are used to manage the resource. |
Disassociates a set of tags from a specified resource
Description
Disassociates a set of tags from a specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_untag_resource(InstanceArn = NULL, ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource with the tags to be listed. |
TagKeys |
[required] The keys of tags that are attached to the resource. |
Updates application properties
Description
Updates application properties.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_update_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_update_application(
ApplicationArn,
Description = NULL,
Name = NULL,
PortalOptions = NULL,
Status = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the application. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Description |
The description of the . |
Name |
Specifies the updated name for the application. |
PortalOptions |
A structure that describes the options for the portal associated with an application. |
Status |
Specifies whether the application is enabled or disabled. |
Update the details for the instance of IAM Identity Center that is owned by the Amazon Web Services account
Description
Update the details for the instance of IAM Identity Center that is owned by the Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_update_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_update_instance(InstanceArn, Name)
Arguments
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the instance of IAM Identity Center under which the operation will run. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
Name |
[required] Updates the instance name. |
Updates the IAM Identity Center identity store attributes that you can use with the IAM Identity Center instance for attributes-based access control (ABAC)
Description
Updates the IAM Identity Center identity store attributes that you can use with the IAM Identity Center instance for attributes-based access control (ABAC). When using an external identity provider as an identity source, you can pass attributes through the SAML assertion as an alternative to configuring attributes from the IAM Identity Center identity store. If a SAML assertion passes any of these attributes, IAM Identity Center replaces the attribute value with the value from the IAM Identity Center identity store. For more information about ABAC, see Attribute-Based Access Control in the IAM Identity Center User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_update_instance_access_control_attribute_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_update_instance_access_control_attribute_configuration(
InstanceAccessControlAttributeConfiguration,
InstanceArn
)
Arguments
InstanceAccessControlAttributeConfiguration |
[required] Updates the attributes for your ABAC configuration. |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. |
Updates an existing permission set
Description
Updates an existing permission set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_update_permission_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_update_permission_set(
Description = NULL,
InstanceArn,
PermissionSetArn,
RelayState = NULL,
SessionDuration = NULL
)
Arguments
Description |
The description of the PermissionSet. |
InstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance under which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
PermissionSetArn |
[required] The ARN of the permission set. |
RelayState |
Used to redirect users within the application during the federation authentication process. |
SessionDuration |
The length of time that the application user sessions are valid for in the ISO-8601 standard. |
Updates the name of the trusted token issuer, or the path of a source attribute or destination attribute for a trusted token issuer configuration
Description
Updates the name of the trusted token issuer, or the path of a source attribute or destination attribute for a trusted token issuer configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssoadmin_update_trusted_token_issuer/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssoadmin_update_trusted_token_issuer(
Name = NULL,
TrustedTokenIssuerArn,
TrustedTokenIssuerConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
Specifies the updated name to be applied to the trusted token issuer configuration. |
TrustedTokenIssuerArn |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the trusted token issuer configuration that you want to update. |
TrustedTokenIssuerConfiguration |
Specifies a structure with settings to apply to the specified trusted token issuer. The settings that you can provide are determined by the type of the trusted token issuer that you are updating. |
AWS SSO OIDC
Description
IAM Identity Center OpenID Connect (OIDC) is a web service that enables a client (such as CLI or a native application) to register with IAM Identity Center. The service also enables the client to fetch the user’s access token upon successful authentication and authorization with IAM Identity Center.
API namespaces
IAM Identity Center uses the sso
and identitystore
API namespaces.
IAM Identity Center OpenID Connect uses the sso-oidc
namespace.
Considerations for using this guide
Before you begin using this guide, we recommend that you first review the following important information about how the IAM Identity Center OIDC service works.
The IAM Identity Center OIDC service currently implements only the portions of the OAuth 2.0 Device Authorization Grant standard (https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc8628) that are necessary to enable single sign-on authentication with the CLI.
With older versions of the CLI, the service only emits OIDC access tokens, so to obtain a new token, users must explicitly re-authenticate. To access the OIDC flow that supports token refresh and doesn’t require re-authentication, update to the latest CLI version (1.27.10 for CLI V1 and 2.9.0 for CLI V2) with support for OIDC token refresh and configurable IAM Identity Center session durations. For more information, see Configure Amazon Web Services access portal session duration .
The access tokens provided by this service grant access to all Amazon Web Services account entitlements assigned to an IAM Identity Center user, not just a particular application.
The documentation in this guide does not describe the mechanism to convert the access token into Amazon Web Services Auth (“sigv4”) credentials for use with IAM-protected Amazon Web Services service endpoints. For more information, see GetRoleCredentials in the IAM Identity Center Portal API Reference Guide.
For general information about IAM Identity Center, see What is IAM Identity Center? in the IAM Identity Center User Guide.
Usage
ssooidc(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- ssooidc( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_token | Creates and returns access and refresh tokens for clients that are authenticated using client secrets |
create_token_with_iam | Creates and returns access and refresh tokens for clients and applications that are authenticated using IAM entities |
register_client | Registers a public client with IAM Identity Center |
start_device_authorization | Initiates device authorization by requesting a pair of verification codes from the authorization service |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- ssooidc()
svc$create_token(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates and returns access and refresh tokens for clients that are authenticated using client secrets
Description
Creates and returns access and refresh tokens for clients that are authenticated using client secrets. The access token can be used to fetch short-lived credentials for the assigned AWS accounts or to access application APIs using bearer
authentication.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssooidc_create_token/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssooidc_create_token(
clientId,
clientSecret,
grantType,
deviceCode = NULL,
code = NULL,
refreshToken = NULL,
scope = NULL,
redirectUri = NULL,
codeVerifier = NULL
)
Arguments
clientId |
[required] The unique identifier string for the client or application. This value
comes from the result of the
|
clientSecret |
[required] A secret string generated for the client. This value should come from
the persisted result of the |
grantType |
[required] Supports the following OAuth grant types: Authorization Code, Device Code, and Refresh Token. Specify one of the following values, depending on the grant type that you want:
|
deviceCode |
Used only when calling this API for the Device Code grant type. This
short-lived code is used to identify this authorization request. This
comes from the result of the
|
code |
Used only when calling this API for the Authorization Code grant type. The short-lived code is used to identify this authorization request. |
refreshToken |
Used only when calling this API for the Refresh Token grant type. This token is used to refresh short-lived tokens, such as the access token, that might expire. For more information about the features and limitations of the current IAM Identity Center OIDC implementation, see Considerations for Using this Guide in the IAM Identity Center OIDC API Reference. |
scope |
The list of scopes for which authorization is requested. The access
token that is issued is limited to the scopes that are granted. If this
value is not specified, IAM Identity Center authorizes all scopes that
are configured for the client during the call to
|
redirectUri |
Used only when calling this API for the Authorization Code grant type. This value specifies the location of the client or application that has registered to receive the authorization code. |
codeVerifier |
Used only when calling this API for the Authorization Code grant type. This value is generated by the client and presented to validate the original code challenge value the client passed at authorization time. |
Creates and returns access and refresh tokens for clients and applications that are authenticated using IAM entities
Description
Creates and returns access and refresh tokens for clients and applications that are authenticated using IAM entities. The access token can be used to fetch short-lived credentials for the assigned Amazon Web Services accounts or to access application APIs using bearer
authentication.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssooidc_create_token_with_iam/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssooidc_create_token_with_iam(
clientId,
grantType,
code = NULL,
refreshToken = NULL,
assertion = NULL,
scope = NULL,
redirectUri = NULL,
subjectToken = NULL,
subjectTokenType = NULL,
requestedTokenType = NULL,
codeVerifier = NULL
)
Arguments
clientId |
[required] The unique identifier string for the client or application. This value is an application ARN that has OAuth grants configured. |
grantType |
[required] Supports the following OAuth grant types: Authorization Code, Refresh Token, JWT Bearer, and Token Exchange. Specify one of the following values, depending on the grant type that you want:
|
code |
Used only when calling this API for the Authorization Code grant type. This short-lived code is used to identify this authorization request. The code is obtained through a redirect from IAM Identity Center to a redirect URI persisted in the Authorization Code GrantOptions for the application. |
refreshToken |
Used only when calling this API for the Refresh Token grant type. This token is used to refresh short-lived tokens, such as the access token, that might expire. For more information about the features and limitations of the current IAM Identity Center OIDC implementation, see Considerations for Using this Guide in the IAM Identity Center OIDC API Reference. |
assertion |
Used only when calling this API for the JWT Bearer grant type. This value specifies the JSON Web Token (JWT) issued by a trusted token issuer. To authorize a trusted token issuer, configure the JWT Bearer GrantOptions for the application. |
scope |
The list of scopes for which authorization is requested. The access
token that is issued is limited to the scopes that are granted. If the
value is not specified, IAM Identity Center authorizes all scopes
configured for the application, including the following default scopes:
|
redirectUri |
Used only when calling this API for the Authorization Code grant type. This value specifies the location of the client or application that has registered to receive the authorization code. |
subjectToken |
Used only when calling this API for the Token Exchange grant type. This value specifies the subject of the exchange. The value of the subject token must be an access token issued by IAM Identity Center to a different client or application. The access token must have authorized scopes that indicate the requested application as a target audience. |
subjectTokenType |
Used only when calling this API for the Token Exchange grant type. This value specifies the type of token that is passed as the subject of the exchange. The following value is supported:
|
requestedTokenType |
Used only when calling this API for the Token Exchange grant type. This value specifies the type of token that the requester can receive. The following values are supported:
|
codeVerifier |
Used only when calling this API for the Authorization Code grant type. This value is generated by the client and presented to validate the original code challenge value the client passed at authorization time. |
Registers a public client with IAM Identity Center
Description
Registers a public client with IAM Identity Center. This allows clients to perform authorization using the authorization code grant with Proof Key for Code Exchange (PKCE) or the device code grant.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssooidc_register_client/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssooidc_register_client(
clientName,
clientType,
scopes = NULL,
redirectUris = NULL,
grantTypes = NULL,
issuerUrl = NULL,
entitledApplicationArn = NULL
)
Arguments
clientName |
[required] The friendly name of the client. |
clientType |
[required] The type of client. The service supports only |
scopes |
The list of scopes that are defined by the client. Upon authorization, this list is used to restrict permissions when granting an access token. |
redirectUris |
The list of redirect URI that are defined by the client. At completion of authorization, this list is used to restrict what locations the user agent can be redirected back to. |
grantTypes |
The list of OAuth 2.0 grant types that are defined by the client. This list is used to restrict the token granting flows available to the client. Supports the following OAuth 2.0 grant types: Authorization Code, Device Code, and Refresh Token.
|
issuerUrl |
The IAM Identity Center Issuer URL associated with an instance of IAM Identity Center. This value is needed for user access to resources through the client. |
entitledApplicationArn |
This IAM Identity Center application ARN is used to define administrator-managed configuration for public client access to resources. At authorization, the scopes, grants, and redirect URI available to this client will be restricted by this application resource. |
Initiates device authorization by requesting a pair of verification codes from the authorization service
Description
Initiates device authorization by requesting a pair of verification codes from the authorization service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ssooidc_start_device_authorization/ for full documentation.
Usage
ssooidc_start_device_authorization(clientId, clientSecret, startUrl)
Arguments
clientId |
[required] The unique identifier string for the client that is registered with IAM
Identity Center. This value should come from the persisted result of the
|
clientSecret |
[required] A secret string that is generated for the client. This value should come
from the persisted result of the
|
startUrl |
[required] The URL for the Amazon Web Services access portal. For more information, see Using the Amazon Web Services access portal in the IAM Identity Center User Guide. |
AWS Security Token Service
Description
Security Token Service
Security Token Service (STS) enables you to request temporary, limited-privilege credentials for users. This guide provides descriptions of the STS API. For more information about using this service, see Temporary Security Credentials.
Usage
sts(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- sts( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
assume_role | Returns a set of temporary security credentials that you can use to access Amazon Web Services resources |
assume_role_with_saml | Returns a set of temporary security credentials for users who have been authenticated via a SAML authentication response |
assume_role_with_web_identity | Returns a set of temporary security credentials for users who have been authenticated in a mobile or web application with a web identity provider |
assume_root | Returns a set of short term credentials you can use to perform privileged tasks on a member account in your organization |
decode_authorization_message | Decodes additional information about the authorization status of a request from an encoded message returned in response to an Amazon Web Services request |
get_access_key_info | Returns the account identifier for the specified access key ID |
get_caller_identity | Returns details about the IAM user or role whose credentials are used to call the operation |
get_federation_token | Returns a set of temporary security credentials (consisting of an access key ID, a secret access key, and a security token) for a user |
get_session_token | Returns a set of temporary credentials for an Amazon Web Services account or IAM user |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- sts()
#
svc$assume_role(
ExternalId = "123ABC",
Policy = "{\"Version\":\"2012-10-17\",\"Statement\":[{\"Sid\":\"Stmt1\",\"Effect\":\"A...",
RoleArn = "arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/demo",
RoleSessionName = "testAssumeRoleSession",
Tags = list(
list(
Key = "Project",
Value = "Unicorn"
),
list(
Key = "Team",
Value = "Automation"
),
list(
Key = "Cost-Center",
Value = "12345"
)
),
TransitiveTagKeys = list(
"Project",
"Cost-Center"
)
)
## End(Not run)
Returns a set of temporary security credentials that you can use to access Amazon Web Services resources
Description
Returns a set of temporary security credentials that you can use to access Amazon Web Services resources. These temporary credentials consist of an access key ID, a secret access key, and a security token. Typically, you use assume_role
within your account or for cross-account access. For a comparison of assume_role
with other API operations that produce temporary credentials, see Requesting Temporary Security Credentials and Compare STS credentials in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/sts_assume_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
sts_assume_role(
RoleArn,
RoleSessionName,
PolicyArns = NULL,
Policy = NULL,
DurationSeconds = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
TransitiveTagKeys = NULL,
ExternalId = NULL,
SerialNumber = NULL,
TokenCode = NULL,
SourceIdentity = NULL,
ProvidedContexts = NULL
)
Arguments
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the role to assume. |
RoleSessionName |
[required] An identifier for the assumed role session. Use the role session name to uniquely identify a session when the same role is assumed by different principals or for different reasons. In cross-account scenarios, the role session name is visible to, and can be logged by the account that owns the role. The role session name is also used in the ARN of the assumed role principal. This means that subsequent cross-account API requests that use the temporary security credentials will expose the role session name to the external account in their CloudTrail logs. For security purposes, administrators can view this field in CloudTrail logs
to help identify who performed an action in Amazon Web Services. Your
administrator might require that you specify your user name as the
session name when you assume the role. For more information, see
The regex used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of upper- and lower-case alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include underscores or any of the following characters: =,.@- |
PolicyArns |
The Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) of the IAM managed policies that you want to use as managed session policies. The policies must exist in the same account as the role. This parameter is optional. You can provide up to 10 managed policy ARNs. However, the plaintext that you use for both inline and managed session policies can't exceed 2,048 characters. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. An Amazon Web Services conversion compresses the passed inline session
policy, managed policy ARNs, and session tags into a packed binary
format that has a separate limit. Your request can fail for this limit
even if your plaintext meets the other requirements. The
Passing policies to this operation returns new temporary credentials. The resulting session's permissions are the intersection of the role's identity-based policy and the session policies. You can use the role's temporary credentials in subsequent Amazon Web Services API calls to access resources in the account that owns the role. You cannot use session policies to grant more permissions than those allowed by the identity-based policy of the role that is being assumed. For more information, see Session Policies in the IAM User Guide. |
Policy |
An IAM policy in JSON format that you want to use as an inline session policy. This parameter is optional. Passing policies to this operation returns new temporary credentials. The resulting session's permissions are the intersection of the role's identity-based policy and the session policies. You can use the role's temporary credentials in subsequent Amazon Web Services API calls to access resources in the account that owns the role. You cannot use session policies to grant more permissions than those allowed by the identity-based policy of the role that is being assumed. For more information, see Session Policies in the IAM User Guide. The plaintext that you use for both inline and managed session policies
can't exceed 2,048 characters. The JSON policy characters can be any
ASCII character from the space character to the end of the valid
character list ( An Amazon Web Services conversion compresses the passed inline session
policy, managed policy ARNs, and session tags into a packed binary
format that has a separate limit. Your request can fail for this limit
even if your plaintext meets the other requirements. The
For more information about role session permissions, see Session policies. |
DurationSeconds |
The duration, in seconds, of the role session. The value specified can range from 900 seconds (15 minutes) up to the maximum session duration set for the role. The maximum session duration setting can have a value from 1 hour to 12 hours. If you specify a value higher than this setting or the administrator setting (whichever is lower), the operation fails. For example, if you specify a session duration of 12 hours, but your administrator set the maximum session duration to 6 hours, your operation fails. Role chaining limits your Amazon Web Services CLI or Amazon Web Services
API role session to a maximum of one hour. When you use the
By default, the value is set to The |
Tags |
A list of session tags that you want to pass. Each session tag consists of a key name and an associated value. For more information about session tags, see Tagging Amazon Web Services STS Sessions in the IAM User Guide. This parameter is optional. You can pass up to 50 session tags. The plaintext session tag keys can’t exceed 128 characters, and the values can’t exceed 256 characters. For these and additional limits, see IAM and STS Character Limits in the IAM User Guide. An Amazon Web Services conversion compresses the passed inline session
policy, managed policy ARNs, and session tags into a packed binary
format that has a separate limit. Your request can fail for this limit
even if your plaintext meets the other requirements. The
You can pass a session tag with the same key as a tag that is already attached to the role. When you do, session tags override a role tag with the same key. Tag key–value pairs are not case sensitive, but case is preserved. This
means that you cannot have separate Additionally, if you used temporary credentials to perform this operation, the new session inherits any transitive session tags from the calling session. If you pass a session tag with the same key as an inherited tag, the operation fails. To view the inherited tags for a session, see the CloudTrail logs. For more information, see Viewing Session Tags in CloudTrail in the IAM User Guide. |
TransitiveTagKeys |
A list of keys for session tags that you want to set as transitive. If you set a tag key as transitive, the corresponding key and value passes to subsequent sessions in a role chain. For more information, see Chaining Roles with Session Tags in the IAM User Guide. This parameter is optional. The transitive status of a session tag does not impact its packed binary size. If you choose not to specify a transitive tag key, then no tags are passed from this session to any subsequent sessions. |
ExternalId |
A unique identifier that might be required when you assume a role in
another account. If the administrator of the account to which the role
belongs provided you with an external ID, then provide that value in the
The regex used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of upper- and lower-case alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include underscores or any of the following characters: =,.@:/- |
SerialNumber |
The identification number of the MFA device that is associated with the
user who is making the The regex used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of upper- and lower-case alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include underscores or any of the following characters: =,.@- |
TokenCode |
The value provided by the MFA device, if the trust policy of the role
being assumed requires MFA. (In other words, if the policy includes a
condition that tests for MFA). If the role being assumed requires MFA
and if the The format for this parameter, as described by its regex pattern, is a sequence of six numeric digits. |
SourceIdentity |
The source identity specified by the principal that is calling the
You can require users to specify a source identity when they assume a
role. You do this by using the
The regex used to validate this parameter is a string of characters
consisting of upper- and lower-case alphanumeric characters with no
spaces. You can also include underscores or any of the following
characters: +=,.@-. You cannot use a value that begins with the text
|
ProvidedContexts |
A list of previously acquired trusted context assertions in the format of a JSON array. The trusted context assertion is signed and encrypted by Amazon Web Services STS. The following is an example of a
|
Returns a set of temporary security credentials for users who have been authenticated via a SAML authentication response
Description
Returns a set of temporary security credentials for users who have been authenticated via a SAML authentication response. This operation provides a mechanism for tying an enterprise identity store or directory to role-based Amazon Web Services access without user-specific credentials or configuration. For a comparison of assume_role_with_saml
with the other API operations that produce temporary credentials, see Requesting Temporary Security Credentials and Compare STS credentials in the IAM User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/sts_assume_role_with_saml/ for full documentation.
Usage
sts_assume_role_with_saml(
RoleArn,
PrincipalArn,
SAMLAssertion,
PolicyArns = NULL,
Policy = NULL,
DurationSeconds = NULL
)
Arguments
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the role that the caller is assuming. |
PrincipalArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SAML provider in IAM that describes the IdP. |
SAMLAssertion |
[required] The base64 encoded SAML authentication response provided by the IdP. For more information, see Configuring a Relying Party and Adding Claims in the IAM User Guide. |
PolicyArns |
The Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) of the IAM managed policies that you want to use as managed session policies. The policies must exist in the same account as the role. This parameter is optional. You can provide up to 10 managed policy ARNs. However, the plaintext that you use for both inline and managed session policies can't exceed 2,048 characters. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. An Amazon Web Services conversion compresses the passed inline session
policy, managed policy ARNs, and session tags into a packed binary
format that has a separate limit. Your request can fail for this limit
even if your plaintext meets the other requirements. The
Passing policies to this operation returns new temporary credentials. The resulting session's permissions are the intersection of the role's identity-based policy and the session policies. You can use the role's temporary credentials in subsequent Amazon Web Services API calls to access resources in the account that owns the role. You cannot use session policies to grant more permissions than those allowed by the identity-based policy of the role that is being assumed. For more information, see Session Policies in the IAM User Guide. |
Policy |
An IAM policy in JSON format that you want to use as an inline session policy. This parameter is optional. Passing policies to this operation returns new temporary credentials. The resulting session's permissions are the intersection of the role's identity-based policy and the session policies. You can use the role's temporary credentials in subsequent Amazon Web Services API calls to access resources in the account that owns the role. You cannot use session policies to grant more permissions than those allowed by the identity-based policy of the role that is being assumed. For more information, see Session Policies in the IAM User Guide. The plaintext that you use for both inline and managed session policies
can't exceed 2,048 characters. The JSON policy characters can be any
ASCII character from the space character to the end of the valid
character list ( For more information about role session permissions, see Session policies. An Amazon Web Services conversion compresses the passed inline session
policy, managed policy ARNs, and session tags into a packed binary
format that has a separate limit. Your request can fail for this limit
even if your plaintext meets the other requirements. The
|
DurationSeconds |
The duration, in seconds, of the role session. Your role session lasts
for the duration that you specify for the By default, the value is set to The |
Returns a set of temporary security credentials for users who have been authenticated in a mobile or web application with a web identity provider
Description
Returns a set of temporary security credentials for users who have been authenticated in a mobile or web application with a web identity provider. Example providers include the OAuth 2.0 providers Login with Amazon and Facebook, or any OpenID Connect-compatible identity provider such as Google or Amazon Cognito federated identities.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/sts_assume_role_with_web_identity/ for full documentation.
Usage
sts_assume_role_with_web_identity(
RoleArn,
RoleSessionName,
WebIdentityToken,
ProviderId = NULL,
PolicyArns = NULL,
Policy = NULL,
DurationSeconds = NULL
)
Arguments
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the role that the caller is assuming. Additional considerations apply to Amazon Cognito identity pools that
assume cross-account IAM roles.
The trust policies of these roles must accept the
|
RoleSessionName |
[required] An identifier for the assumed role session. Typically, you pass the name
or identifier that is associated with the user who is using your
application. That way, the temporary security credentials that your
application will use are associated with that user. This session name is
included as part of the ARN and assumed role ID in the For security purposes, administrators can view this field in CloudTrail logs
to help identify who performed an action in Amazon Web Services. Your
administrator might require that you specify your user name as the
session name when you assume the role. For more information, see
The regex used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of upper- and lower-case alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include underscores or any of the following characters: =,.@- |
WebIdentityToken |
[required] The OAuth 2.0 access token or OpenID Connect ID token that is provided
by the identity provider. Your application must get this token by
authenticating the user who is using your application with a web
identity provider before the application makes an
|
ProviderId |
The fully qualified host component of the domain name of the OAuth 2.0 identity provider. Do not specify this value for an OpenID Connect identity provider. Currently Do not specify this value for OpenID Connect ID tokens. |
PolicyArns |
The Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) of the IAM managed policies that you want to use as managed session policies. The policies must exist in the same account as the role. This parameter is optional. You can provide up to 10 managed policy ARNs. However, the plaintext that you use for both inline and managed session policies can't exceed 2,048 characters. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. An Amazon Web Services conversion compresses the passed inline session
policy, managed policy ARNs, and session tags into a packed binary
format that has a separate limit. Your request can fail for this limit
even if your plaintext meets the other requirements. The
Passing policies to this operation returns new temporary credentials. The resulting session's permissions are the intersection of the role's identity-based policy and the session policies. You can use the role's temporary credentials in subsequent Amazon Web Services API calls to access resources in the account that owns the role. You cannot use session policies to grant more permissions than those allowed by the identity-based policy of the role that is being assumed. For more information, see Session Policies in the IAM User Guide. |
Policy |
An IAM policy in JSON format that you want to use as an inline session policy. This parameter is optional. Passing policies to this operation returns new temporary credentials. The resulting session's permissions are the intersection of the role's identity-based policy and the session policies. You can use the role's temporary credentials in subsequent Amazon Web Services API calls to access resources in the account that owns the role. You cannot use session policies to grant more permissions than those allowed by the identity-based policy of the role that is being assumed. For more information, see Session Policies in the IAM User Guide. The plaintext that you use for both inline and managed session policies
can't exceed 2,048 characters. The JSON policy characters can be any
ASCII character from the space character to the end of the valid
character list ( For more information about role session permissions, see Session policies. An Amazon Web Services conversion compresses the passed inline session
policy, managed policy ARNs, and session tags into a packed binary
format that has a separate limit. Your request can fail for this limit
even if your plaintext meets the other requirements. The
|
DurationSeconds |
The duration, in seconds, of the role session. The value can range from 900 seconds (15 minutes) up to the maximum session duration setting for the role. This setting can have a value from 1 hour to 12 hours. If you specify a value higher than this setting, the operation fails. For example, if you specify a session duration of 12 hours, but your administrator set the maximum session duration to 6 hours, your operation fails. To learn how to view the maximum value for your role, see View the Maximum Session Duration Setting for a Role in the IAM User Guide. By default, the value is set to The |
Returns a set of short term credentials you can use to perform privileged tasks on a member account in your organization
Description
Returns a set of short term credentials you can use to perform privileged tasks on a member account in your organization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/sts_assume_root/ for full documentation.
Usage
sts_assume_root(TargetPrincipal, TaskPolicyArn, DurationSeconds = NULL)
Arguments
TargetPrincipal |
[required] The member account principal ARN or account ID. |
TaskPolicyArn |
[required] The identity based policy that scopes the session to the privileged tasks that can be performed. You can use one of following Amazon Web Services managed policies to scope root session actions. |
DurationSeconds |
The duration, in seconds, of the privileged session. The value can range from 0 seconds up to the maximum session duration of 900 seconds (15 minutes). If you specify a value higher than this setting, the operation fails. By default, the value is set to |
Decodes additional information about the authorization status of a request from an encoded message returned in response to an Amazon Web Services request
Description
Decodes additional information about the authorization status of a request from an encoded message returned in response to an Amazon Web Services request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/sts_decode_authorization_message/ for full documentation.
Usage
sts_decode_authorization_message(EncodedMessage)
Arguments
EncodedMessage |
[required] The encoded message that was returned with the response. |
Returns the account identifier for the specified access key ID
Description
Returns the account identifier for the specified access key ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/sts_get_access_key_info/ for full documentation.
Usage
sts_get_access_key_info(AccessKeyId)
Arguments
AccessKeyId |
[required] The identifier of an access key. This parameter allows (through its regex pattern) a string of characters that can consist of any upper- or lowercase letter or digit. |
Returns details about the IAM user or role whose credentials are used to call the operation
Description
Returns details about the IAM user or role whose credentials are used to call the operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/sts_get_caller_identity/ for full documentation.
Usage
sts_get_caller_identity()
Returns a set of temporary security credentials (consisting of an access key ID, a secret access key, and a security token) for a user
Description
Returns a set of temporary security credentials (consisting of an access key ID, a secret access key, and a security token) for a user. A typical use is in a proxy application that gets temporary security credentials on behalf of distributed applications inside a corporate network.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/sts_get_federation_token/ for full documentation.
Usage
sts_get_federation_token(
Name,
Policy = NULL,
PolicyArns = NULL,
DurationSeconds = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the federated user. The name is used as an identifier for
the temporary security credentials (such as The regex used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of upper- and lower-case alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include underscores or any of the following characters: =,.@- |
Policy |
An IAM policy in JSON format that you want to use as an inline session policy. You must pass an inline or managed session policy to this operation. You can pass a single JSON policy document to use as an inline session policy. You can also specify up to 10 managed policy Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) to use as managed session policies. This parameter is optional. However, if you do not pass any session policies, then the resulting federated user session has no permissions. When you pass session policies, the session permissions are the intersection of the IAM user policies and the session policies that you pass. This gives you a way to further restrict the permissions for a federated user. You cannot use session policies to grant more permissions than those that are defined in the permissions policy of the IAM user. For more information, see Session Policies in the IAM User Guide. The resulting credentials can be used to access a resource that has a
resource-based policy. If that policy specifically references the
federated user session in the The plaintext that you use for both inline and managed session policies
can't exceed 2,048 characters. The JSON policy characters can be any
ASCII character from the space character to the end of the valid
character list ( An Amazon Web Services conversion compresses the passed inline session
policy, managed policy ARNs, and session tags into a packed binary
format that has a separate limit. Your request can fail for this limit
even if your plaintext meets the other requirements. The
|
PolicyArns |
The Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) of the IAM managed policies that you want to use as a managed session policy. The policies must exist in the same account as the IAM user that is requesting federated access. You must pass an inline or managed session policy to this operation. You can pass a single JSON policy document to use as an inline session policy. You can also specify up to 10 managed policy Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) to use as managed session policies. The plaintext that you use for both inline and managed session policies can't exceed 2,048 characters. You can provide up to 10 managed policy ARNs. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. This parameter is optional. However, if you do not pass any session policies, then the resulting federated user session has no permissions. When you pass session policies, the session permissions are the intersection of the IAM user policies and the session policies that you pass. This gives you a way to further restrict the permissions for a federated user. You cannot use session policies to grant more permissions than those that are defined in the permissions policy of the IAM user. For more information, see Session Policies in the IAM User Guide. The resulting credentials can be used to access a resource that has a
resource-based policy. If that policy specifically references the
federated user session in the An Amazon Web Services conversion compresses the passed inline session
policy, managed policy ARNs, and session tags into a packed binary
format that has a separate limit. Your request can fail for this limit
even if your plaintext meets the other requirements. The
|
DurationSeconds |
The duration, in seconds, that the session should last. Acceptable durations for federation sessions range from 900 seconds (15 minutes) to 129,600 seconds (36 hours), with 43,200 seconds (12 hours) as the default. Sessions obtained using root user credentials are restricted to a maximum of 3,600 seconds (one hour). If the specified duration is longer than one hour, the session obtained by using root user credentials defaults to one hour. |
Tags |
A list of session tags. Each session tag consists of a key name and an associated value. For more information about session tags, see Passing Session Tags in STS in the IAM User Guide. This parameter is optional. You can pass up to 50 session tags. The plaintext session tag keys can’t exceed 128 characters and the values can’t exceed 256 characters. For these and additional limits, see IAM and STS Character Limits in the IAM User Guide. An Amazon Web Services conversion compresses the passed inline session
policy, managed policy ARNs, and session tags into a packed binary
format that has a separate limit. Your request can fail for this limit
even if your plaintext meets the other requirements. The
You can pass a session tag with the same key as a tag that is already attached to the user you are federating. When you do, session tags override a user tag with the same key. Tag key–value pairs are not case sensitive, but case is preserved. This
means that you cannot have separate |
Returns a set of temporary credentials for an Amazon Web Services account or IAM user
Description
Returns a set of temporary credentials for an Amazon Web Services account or IAM user. The credentials consist of an access key ID, a secret access key, and a security token. Typically, you use get_session_token
if you want to use MFA to protect programmatic calls to specific Amazon Web Services API operations like Amazon EC2 StopInstances
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/sts_get_session_token/ for full documentation.
Usage
sts_get_session_token(
DurationSeconds = NULL,
SerialNumber = NULL,
TokenCode = NULL
)
Arguments
DurationSeconds |
The duration, in seconds, that the credentials should remain valid. Acceptable durations for IAM user sessions range from 900 seconds (15 minutes) to 129,600 seconds (36 hours), with 43,200 seconds (12 hours) as the default. Sessions for Amazon Web Services account owners are restricted to a maximum of 3,600 seconds (one hour). If the duration is longer than one hour, the session for Amazon Web Services account owners defaults to one hour. |
SerialNumber |
The identification number of the MFA device that is associated with the
IAM user who is making the The regex used to validate this parameter is a string of characters consisting of upper- and lower-case alphanumeric characters with no spaces. You can also include underscores or any of the following characters: =,.@:/- |
TokenCode |
The value provided by the MFA device, if MFA is required. If any policy requires the IAM user to submit an MFA code, specify this value. If MFA authentication is required, the user must provide a code when requesting a set of temporary security credentials. A user who fails to provide the code receives an "access denied" response when requesting resources that require MFA authentication. The format for this parameter, as described by its regex pattern, is a sequence of six numeric digits. |
Amazon Verified Permissions
Description
Amazon Verified Permissions is a permissions management service from Amazon Web Services. You can use Verified Permissions to manage permissions for your application, and authorize user access based on those permissions. Using Verified Permissions, application developers can grant access based on information about the users, resources, and requested actions. You can also evaluate additional information like group membership, attributes of the resources, and session context, such as time of request and IP addresses. Verified Permissions manages these permissions by letting you create and store authorization policies for your applications, such as consumer-facing web sites and enterprise business systems.
Verified Permissions uses Cedar as the policy language to express your permission requirements. Cedar supports both role-based access control (RBAC) and attribute-based access control (ABAC) authorization models.
For more information about configuring, administering, and using Amazon Verified Permissions in your applications, see the Amazon Verified Permissions User Guide.
For more information about the Cedar policy language, see the Cedar Policy Language Guide.
When you write Cedar policies that reference principals, resources and actions, you can define the unique identifiers used for each of those elements. We strongly recommend that you follow these best practices:
-
Use values like universally unique identifiers (UUIDs) for all principal and resource identifiers.
For example, if user
jane
leaves the company, and you later let someone else use the namejane
, then that new user automatically gets access to everything granted by policies that still referenceUser::"jane"
. Cedar can’t distinguish between the new user and the old. This applies to both principal and resource identifiers. Always use identifiers that are guaranteed unique and never reused to ensure that you don’t unintentionally grant access because of the presence of an old identifier in a policy.Where you use a UUID for an entity, we recommend that you follow it with the // comment specifier and the ‘friendly’ name of your entity. This helps to make your policies easier to understand. For example: principal == User::"a1b2c3d4-e5f6-a1b2-c3d4-EXAMPLE11111", // alice
-
Do not include personally identifying, confidential, or sensitive information as part of the unique identifier for your principals or resources. These identifiers are included in log entries shared in CloudTrail trails.
Several operations return structures that appear similar, but have different purposes. As new functionality is added to the product, the structure used in a parameter of one operation might need to change in a way that wouldn't make sense for the same parameter in a different operation. To help you understand the purpose of each, the following naming convention is used for the structures:
Parameter type structures that end in
Detail
are used inGet
operations.Parameter type structures that end in
Item
are used inList
operations.Parameter type structures that use neither suffix are used in the mutating (create and update) operations.
Usage
verifiedpermissions(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- verifiedpermissions( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
batch_get_policy | Retrieves information about a group (batch) of policies |
batch_is_authorized | Makes a series of decisions about multiple authorization requests for one principal or resource |
batch_is_authorized_with_token | Makes a series of decisions about multiple authorization requests for one token |
create_identity_source | Adds an identity source to a policy store–an Amazon Cognito user pool or OpenID Connect (OIDC) identity provider (IdP) |
create_policy | Creates a Cedar policy and saves it in the specified policy store |
create_policy_store | Creates a policy store |
create_policy_template | Creates a policy template |
delete_identity_source | Deletes an identity source that references an identity provider (IdP) such as Amazon Cognito |
delete_policy | Deletes the specified policy from the policy store |
delete_policy_store | Deletes the specified policy store |
delete_policy_template | Deletes the specified policy template from the policy store |
get_identity_source | Retrieves the details about the specified identity source |
get_policy | Retrieves information about the specified policy |
get_policy_store | Retrieves details about a policy store |
get_policy_template | Retrieve the details for the specified policy template in the specified policy store |
get_schema | Retrieve the details for the specified schema in the specified policy store |
is_authorized | Makes an authorization decision about a service request described in the parameters |
is_authorized_with_token | Makes an authorization decision about a service request described in the parameters |
list_identity_sources | Returns a paginated list of all of the identity sources defined in the specified policy store |
list_policies | Returns a paginated list of all policies stored in the specified policy store |
list_policy_stores | Returns a paginated list of all policy stores in the calling Amazon Web Services account |
list_policy_templates | Returns a paginated list of all policy templates in the specified policy store |
put_schema | Creates or updates the policy schema in the specified policy store |
update_identity_source | Updates the specified identity source to use a new identity provider (IdP), or to change the mapping of identities from the IdP to a different principal entity type |
update_policy | Modifies a Cedar static policy in the specified policy store |
update_policy_store | Modifies the validation setting for a policy store |
update_policy_template | Updates the specified policy template |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- verifiedpermissions()
svc$batch_get_policy(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Retrieves information about a group (batch) of policies
Description
Retrieves information about a group (batch) of policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_batch_get_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_batch_get_policy(requests)
Arguments
requests |
[required] An array of up to 100 policies you want information about. |
Makes a series of decisions about multiple authorization requests for one principal or resource
Description
Makes a series of decisions about multiple authorization requests for one principal or resource. Each request contains the equivalent content of an is_authorized
request: principal, action, resource, and context. Either the principal
or the resource
parameter must be identical across all requests. For example, Verified Permissions won't evaluate a pair of requests where bob
views photo1
and alice
views photo2
. Authorization of bob
to view photo1
and photo2
, or bob
and alice
to view photo1
, are valid batches.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_batch_is_authorized/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_batch_is_authorized(
policyStoreId,
entities = NULL,
requests
)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store. Policies in this policy store will be used to make the authorization decisions for the input. |
entities |
Specifies the list of resources and principals and their associated attributes that Verified Permissions can examine when evaluating the policies. You can include only principal and resource entities in this parameter; you can't include actions. You must specify actions in the schema. |
requests |
[required] An array of up to 30 requests that you want Verified Permissions to evaluate. |
Makes a series of decisions about multiple authorization requests for one token
Description
Makes a series of decisions about multiple authorization requests for one token. The principal in this request comes from an external identity source in the form of an identity or access token, formatted as a JSON web token (JWT). The information in the parameters can also define additional context that Verified Permissions can include in the evaluations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_batch_is_authorized_with_token/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_batch_is_authorized_with_token(
policyStoreId,
identityToken = NULL,
accessToken = NULL,
entities = NULL,
requests
)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store. Policies in this policy store will be used to make an authorization decision for the input. |
identityToken |
Specifies an identity (ID) token for the principal that you want to
authorize in each request. This token is provided to you by the identity
provider (IdP) associated with the specified identity source. You must
specify either an Must be an ID token. Verified Permissions returns an error if the
|
accessToken |
Specifies an access token for the principal that you want to authorize
in each request. This token is provided to you by the identity provider
(IdP) associated with the specified identity source. You must specify
either an Must be an access token. Verified Permissions returns an error if the
|
entities |
Specifies the list of resources and their associated attributes that Verified Permissions can examine when evaluating the policies. You can't include principals in this parameter, only resource and action entities. This parameter can't include any entities of a type that matches the user or group entity types that you defined in your identity source.
|
requests |
[required] An array of up to 30 requests that you want Verified Permissions to evaluate. |
Adds an identity source to a policy store–an Amazon Cognito user pool or OpenID Connect (OIDC) identity provider (IdP)
Description
Adds an identity source to a policy store–an Amazon Cognito user pool or OpenID Connect (OIDC) identity provider (IdP).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_create_identity_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_create_identity_source(
clientToken = NULL,
policyStoreId,
configuration,
principalEntityType = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive ID that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same Verified Permissions recognizes a |
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store in which you want to store this identity source. Only policies and requests made using this policy store can reference identities from the identity provider configured in the new identity source. |
configuration |
[required] Specifies the details required to communicate with the identity provider (IdP) associated with this identity source. |
principalEntityType |
Specifies the namespace and data type of the principals generated for identities authenticated by the new identity source. |
Creates a Cedar policy and saves it in the specified policy store
Description
Creates a Cedar policy and saves it in the specified policy store. You can create either a static policy or a policy linked to a policy template.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_create_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_create_policy(
clientToken = NULL,
policyStoreId,
definition
)
Arguments
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive ID that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same Verified Permissions recognizes a |
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the |
definition |
[required] A structure that specifies the policy type and content to use for the new policy. You must include either a static or a templateLinked element. The policy content must be written in the Cedar policy language. |
Creates a policy store
Description
Creates a policy store. A policy store is a container for policy resources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_create_policy_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_create_policy_store(
clientToken = NULL,
validationSettings,
description = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive ID that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same Verified Permissions recognizes a |
validationSettings |
[required] Specifies the validation setting for this policy store. Currently, the only valid and required value is We recommend that you turn on |
description |
Descriptive text that you can provide to help with identification of the current policy store. |
Creates a policy template
Description
Creates a policy template. A template can use placeholders for the principal and resource. A template must be instantiated into a policy by associating it with specific principals and resources to use for the placeholders. That instantiated policy can then be considered in authorization decisions. The instantiated policy works identically to any other policy, except that it is dynamically linked to the template. If the template changes, then any policies that are linked to that template are immediately updated as well.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_create_policy_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_create_policy_template(
clientToken = NULL,
policyStoreId,
description = NULL,
statement
)
Arguments
clientToken |
Specifies a unique, case-sensitive ID that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. This lets you safely retry the request without accidentally performing the same operation a second time. Passing the same value to a later call to an operation requires that you also pass the same value for all other parameters. We recommend that you use a UUID type of value.. If you don't provide this value, then Amazon Web Services generates a random one for you. If you retry the operation with the same Verified Permissions recognizes a |
policyStoreId |
[required] The ID of the policy store in which to create the policy template. |
description |
Specifies a description for the policy template. |
statement |
[required] Specifies the content that you want to use for the new policy template, written in the Cedar policy language. |
Deletes an identity source that references an identity provider (IdP) such as Amazon Cognito
Description
Deletes an identity source that references an identity provider (IdP) such as Amazon Cognito. After you delete the identity source, you can no longer use tokens for identities from that identity source to represent principals in authorization queries made using is_authorized_with_token
. operations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_delete_identity_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_delete_identity_source(policyStoreId, identitySourceId)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store that contains the identity source that you want to delete. |
identitySourceId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the identity source that you want to delete. |
Deletes the specified policy from the policy store
Description
Deletes the specified policy from the policy store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_delete_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_delete_policy(policyStoreId, policyId)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store that contains the policy that you want to delete. |
policyId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy that you want to delete. |
Deletes the specified policy store
Description
Deletes the specified policy store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_delete_policy_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_delete_policy_store(policyStoreId)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store that you want to delete. |
Deletes the specified policy template from the policy store
Description
Deletes the specified policy template from the policy store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_delete_policy_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_delete_policy_template(policyStoreId, policyTemplateId)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store that contains the policy template that you want to delete. |
policyTemplateId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy template that you want to delete. |
Retrieves the details about the specified identity source
Description
Retrieves the details about the specified identity source.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_get_identity_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_get_identity_source(policyStoreId, identitySourceId)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store that contains the identity source you want information about. |
identitySourceId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the identity source you want information about. |
Retrieves information about the specified policy
Description
Retrieves information about the specified policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_get_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_get_policy(policyStoreId, policyId)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store that contains the policy that you want information about. |
policyId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy you want information about. |
Retrieves details about a policy store
Description
Retrieves details about a policy store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_get_policy_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_get_policy_store(policyStoreId)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store that you want information about. |
Retrieve the details for the specified policy template in the specified policy store
Description
Retrieve the details for the specified policy template in the specified policy store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_get_policy_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_get_policy_template(policyStoreId, policyTemplateId)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store that contains the policy template that you want information about. |
policyTemplateId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy template that you want information about. |
Retrieve the details for the specified schema in the specified policy store
Description
Retrieve the details for the specified schema in the specified policy store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_get_schema/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_get_schema(policyStoreId)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store that contains the schema. |
Makes an authorization decision about a service request described in the parameters
Description
Makes an authorization decision about a service request described in the parameters. The information in the parameters can also define additional context that Verified Permissions can include in the evaluation. The request is evaluated against all matching policies in the specified policy store. The result of the decision is either Allow
or Deny
, along with a list of the policies that resulted in the decision.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_is_authorized/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_is_authorized(
policyStoreId,
principal = NULL,
action = NULL,
resource = NULL,
context = NULL,
entities = NULL
)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store. Policies in this policy store will be used to make an authorization decision for the input. |
principal |
Specifies the principal for which the authorization decision is to be made. |
action |
Specifies the requested action to be authorized. For example, is the principal authorized to perform this action on the resource? |
resource |
Specifies the resource for which the authorization decision is to be made. |
context |
Specifies additional context that can be used to make more granular authorization decisions. |
entities |
Specifies the list of resources and principals and their associated attributes that Verified Permissions can examine when evaluating the policies. You can include only principal and resource entities in this parameter; you can't include actions. You must specify actions in the schema. |
Makes an authorization decision about a service request described in the parameters
Description
Makes an authorization decision about a service request described in the parameters. The principal in this request comes from an external identity source in the form of an identity token formatted as a JSON web token (JWT). The information in the parameters can also define additional context that Verified Permissions can include in the evaluation. The request is evaluated against all matching policies in the specified policy store. The result of the decision is either Allow
or Deny
, along with a list of the policies that resulted in the decision.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_is_authorized_with_token/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_is_authorized_with_token(
policyStoreId,
identityToken = NULL,
accessToken = NULL,
action = NULL,
resource = NULL,
context = NULL,
entities = NULL
)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store. Policies in this policy store will be used to make an authorization decision for the input. |
identityToken |
Specifies an identity token for the principal to be authorized. This
token is provided to you by the identity provider (IdP) associated with
the specified identity source. You must specify either an Must be an ID token. Verified Permissions returns an error if the
|
accessToken |
Specifies an access token for the principal to be authorized. This token
is provided to you by the identity provider (IdP) associated with the
specified identity source. You must specify either an Must be an access token. Verified Permissions returns an error if the
|
action |
Specifies the requested action to be authorized. Is the specified principal authorized to perform this action on the specified resource. |
resource |
Specifies the resource for which the authorization decision is made. For example, is the principal allowed to perform the action on the resource? |
context |
Specifies additional context that can be used to make more granular authorization decisions. |
entities |
Specifies the list of resources and their associated attributes that Verified Permissions can examine when evaluating the policies. You can't include principals in this parameter, only resource and action entities. This parameter can't include any entities of a type that matches the user or group entity types that you defined in your identity source.
|
Returns a paginated list of all of the identity sources defined in the specified policy store
Description
Returns a paginated list of all of the identity sources defined in the specified policy store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_list_identity_sources/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_list_identity_sources(
policyStoreId,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
filters = NULL
)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store that contains the identity sources that you want to list. |
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included in each
response. If additional items exist beyond the number you specify, the
If you do not specify this parameter, the operation defaults to 10 identity sources per response. You can specify a maximum of 50 identity sources per response. |
filters |
Specifies characteristics of an identity source that you can use to limit the output to matching identity sources. |
Returns a paginated list of all policies stored in the specified policy store
Description
Returns a paginated list of all policies stored in the specified policy store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_list_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_list_policies(
policyStoreId,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
filter = NULL
)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store you want to list policies from. |
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included in each
response. If additional items exist beyond the number you specify, the
If you do not specify this parameter, the operation defaults to 10 policies per response. You can specify a maximum of 50 policies per response. |
filter |
Specifies a filter that limits the response to only policies that match the specified criteria. For example, you list only the policies that reference a specified principal. |
Returns a paginated list of all policy stores in the calling Amazon Web Services account
Description
Returns a paginated list of all policy stores in the calling Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_list_policy_stores/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_list_policy_stores(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included in each
response. If additional items exist beyond the number you specify, the
If you do not specify this parameter, the operation defaults to 10 policy stores per response. You can specify a maximum of 50 policy stores per response. |
Returns a paginated list of all policy templates in the specified policy store
Description
Returns a paginated list of all policy templates in the specified policy store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_list_policy_templates/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_list_policy_templates(
policyStoreId,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store that contains the policy templates you want to list. |
nextToken |
Specifies that you want to receive the next page of results. Valid only
if you received a |
maxResults |
Specifies the total number of results that you want included in each
response. If additional items exist beyond the number you specify, the
If you do not specify this parameter, the operation defaults to 10 policy templates per response. You can specify a maximum of 50 policy templates per response. |
Creates or updates the policy schema in the specified policy store
Description
Creates or updates the policy schema in the specified policy store. The schema is used to validate any Cedar policies and policy templates submitted to the policy store. Any changes to the schema validate only policies and templates submitted after the schema change. Existing policies and templates are not re-evaluated against the changed schema. If you later update a policy, then it is evaluated against the new schema at that time.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_put_schema/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_put_schema(policyStoreId, definition)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store in which to place the schema. |
definition |
[required] Specifies the definition of the schema to be stored. The schema definition must be written in Cedar schema JSON. |
Updates the specified identity source to use a new identity provider (IdP), or to change the mapping of identities from the IdP to a different principal entity type
Description
Updates the specified identity source to use a new identity provider (IdP), or to change the mapping of identities from the IdP to a different principal entity type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_update_identity_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_update_identity_source(
policyStoreId,
identitySourceId,
updateConfiguration,
principalEntityType = NULL
)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store that contains the identity source that you want to update. |
identitySourceId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the identity source that you want to update. |
updateConfiguration |
[required] Specifies the details required to communicate with the identity provider (IdP) associated with this identity source. |
principalEntityType |
Specifies the data type of principals generated for identities authenticated by the identity source. |
Modifies a Cedar static policy in the specified policy store
Description
Modifies a Cedar static policy in the specified policy store. You can change only certain elements of the UpdatePolicyDefinition parameter. You can directly update only static policies. To change a template-linked policy, you must update the template instead, using update_policy_template
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_update_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_update_policy(policyStoreId, policyId, definition)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store that contains the policy that you want to update. |
policyId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy that you want to update. To find this
value, you can use |
definition |
[required] Specifies the updated policy content that you want to replace on the specified policy. The content must be valid Cedar policy language text. You can change only the following elements from the policy definition:
You can't change the following elements:
|
Modifies the validation setting for a policy store
Description
Modifies the validation setting for a policy store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_update_policy_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_update_policy_store(
policyStoreId,
validationSettings,
description = NULL
)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store that you want to update |
validationSettings |
[required] A structure that defines the validation settings that want to enable for the policy store. |
description |
Descriptive text that you can provide to help with identification of the current policy store. |
Updates the specified policy template
Description
Updates the specified policy template. You can update only the description and the some elements of the policyBody.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/verifiedpermissions_update_policy_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
verifiedpermissions_update_policy_template(
policyStoreId,
policyTemplateId,
description = NULL,
statement
)
Arguments
policyStoreId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy store that contains the policy template that you want to update. |
policyTemplateId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the policy template that you want to update. |
description |
Specifies a new description to apply to the policy template. |
statement |
[required] Specifies new statement content written in Cedar policy language to replace the current body of the policy template. You can change only the following elements of the policy body:
You can't change the following elements:
|
AWS WAF
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
For the latest version of AWS WAF, use the AWS WAFV2 API and see the AWS WAF Developer Guide. With the latest version, AWS WAF has a single set of endpoints for regional and global use.
This is the AWS WAF Classic API Reference for using AWS WAF Classic with Amazon CloudFront. The AWS WAF Classic actions and data types listed in the reference are available for protecting Amazon CloudFront distributions. You can use these actions and data types via the endpoint waf.amazonaws.com. This guide is for developers who need detailed information about the AWS WAF Classic API actions, data types, and errors. For detailed information about AWS WAF Classic features and an overview of how to use the AWS WAF Classic API, see the AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
Usage
waf(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- waf( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_byte_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_geo_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_ip_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_rate_based_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_regex_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_regex_pattern_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_rule_group | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_size_constraint_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_sql_injection_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_web_acl | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_web_acl_migration_stack | Creates an AWS CloudFormation WAFV2 template for the specified web ACL in the specified Amazon S3 bucket |
create_xss_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_byte_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_geo_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_ip_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_logging_configuration | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_permission_policy | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_rate_based_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_regex_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_regex_pattern_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_rule_group | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_size_constraint_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_sql_injection_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_web_acl | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_xss_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_byte_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_change_token | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_change_token_status | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_geo_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_ip_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_logging_configuration | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_permission_policy | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_rate_based_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_rate_based_rule_managed_keys | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_regex_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_regex_pattern_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_rule_group | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_sampled_requests | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_size_constraint_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_sql_injection_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_web_acl | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_xss_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_activated_rules_in_rule_group | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_byte_match_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_geo_match_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_ip_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_logging_configurations | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_rate_based_rules | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_regex_match_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_regex_pattern_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_rule_groups | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_rules | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_size_constraint_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_sql_injection_match_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_subscribed_rule_groups | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_tags_for_resource | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_web_ac_ls | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_xss_match_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
put_logging_configuration | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
put_permission_policy | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
tag_resource | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
untag_resource | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_byte_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_geo_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_ip_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_rate_based_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_regex_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_regex_pattern_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_rule_group | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_size_constraint_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_sql_injection_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_web_acl | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_xss_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- waf()
# The following example creates an IP match set named MyIPSetFriendlyName.
svc$create_ip_set(
ChangeToken = "abcd12f2-46da-4fdb-b8d5-fbd4c466928f",
Name = "MyIPSetFriendlyName"
)
## End(Not run)
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_create_byte_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_create_byte_match_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the ByteMatchSet. You can't change
|
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_create_geo_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_create_geo_match_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the GeoMatchSet. You can't change
|
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_create_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_create_ip_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the IPSet. You can't change |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_create_rate_based_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_create_rate_based_rule(
Name,
MetricName,
RateKey,
RateLimit,
ChangeToken,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the RateBasedRule. You can't change
the name of a |
MetricName |
[required] A friendly name or description for the metrics for this |
RateKey |
[required] The field that AWS WAF uses to determine if requests are likely arriving
from a single source and thus subject to rate monitoring. The only valid
value for |
RateLimit |
[required] The maximum number of requests, which have an identical value in the
field that is specified by |
ChangeToken |
[required] The |
Tags |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_create_regex_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_create_regex_match_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the RegexMatchSet. You can't change
|
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_create_regex_pattern_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_create_regex_pattern_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the RegexPatternSet. You can't change
|
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_create_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_create_rule(Name, MetricName, ChangeToken, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the Rule. You can't change the name of
a |
MetricName |
[required] A friendly name or description for the metrics for this |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Tags |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_create_rule_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_create_rule_group(Name, MetricName, ChangeToken, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the RuleGroup. You can't change |
MetricName |
[required] A friendly name or description for the metrics for this |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Tags |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_create_size_constraint_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_create_size_constraint_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the SizeConstraintSet. You can't
change |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_create_sql_injection_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_create_sql_injection_match_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description for the SqlInjectionMatchSet that you're
creating. You can't change |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_create_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_create_web_acl(Name, MetricName, DefaultAction, ChangeToken, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the WebACL. You can't change |
MetricName |
[required] A friendly name or description for the metrics for this |
DefaultAction |
[required] The action that you want AWS WAF to take when a request doesn't match
the criteria specified in any of the |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Tags |
Creates an AWS CloudFormation WAFV2 template for the specified web ACL in the specified Amazon S3 bucket
Description
Creates an AWS CloudFormation WAFV2 template for the specified web ACL in the specified Amazon S3 bucket. Then, in CloudFormation, you create a stack from the template, to create the web ACL and its resources in AWS WAFV2. Use this to migrate your AWS WAF Classic web ACL to the latest version of AWS WAF.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_create_web_acl_migration_stack/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_create_web_acl_migration_stack(
WebACLId,
S3BucketName,
IgnoreUnsupportedType
)
Arguments
WebACLId |
[required] The UUID of the WAF Classic web ACL that you want to migrate to WAF v2. |
S3BucketName |
[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket to store the CloudFormation template in. The S3 bucket must be configured as follows for the migration:
|
IgnoreUnsupportedType |
[required] Indicates whether to exclude entities that can't be migrated or to stop the migration. Set this to true to ignore unsupported entities in the web ACL during the migration. Otherwise, if AWS WAF encounters unsupported entities, it stops the process and throws an exception. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_create_xss_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_create_xss_match_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description for the XssMatchSet that you're creating.
You can't change |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_delete_byte_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_delete_byte_match_set(ByteMatchSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
ByteMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_delete_geo_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_delete_geo_match_set(GeoMatchSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
GeoMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_delete_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_delete_ip_set(IPSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
IPSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_delete_logging_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_delete_logging_configuration(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the web ACL from which you want to delete the LoggingConfiguration. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_delete_permission_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_delete_permission_policy(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the RuleGroup from which you want to delete the policy. The user making the request must be the owner of the RuleGroup. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_delete_rate_based_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_delete_rate_based_rule(RuleId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RuleId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_delete_regex_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_delete_regex_match_set(RegexMatchSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RegexMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_delete_regex_pattern_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_delete_regex_pattern_set(RegexPatternSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RegexPatternSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_delete_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_delete_rule(RuleId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RuleId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_delete_rule_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_delete_rule_group(RuleGroupId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RuleGroupId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_delete_size_constraint_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_delete_size_constraint_set(SizeConstraintSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
SizeConstraintSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_delete_sql_injection_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_delete_sql_injection_match_set(SqlInjectionMatchSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
SqlInjectionMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_delete_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_delete_web_acl(WebACLId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
WebACLId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_delete_xss_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_delete_xss_match_set(XssMatchSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
XssMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_byte_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_byte_match_set(ByteMatchSetId)
Arguments
ByteMatchSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_change_token/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_change_token()
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_change_token_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_change_token_status(ChangeToken)
Arguments
ChangeToken |
[required] The change token for which you want to get the status. This change token
was previously returned in the
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_geo_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_geo_match_set(GeoMatchSetId)
Arguments
GeoMatchSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_ip_set(IPSetId)
Arguments
IPSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_logging_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_logging_configuration(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the web ACL for which you want to get the LoggingConfiguration. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_permission_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_permission_policy(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the RuleGroup for which you want to get the policy. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_rate_based_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_rate_based_rule(RuleId)
Arguments
RuleId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_rate_based_rule_managed_keys/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_rate_based_rule_managed_keys(RuleId, NextMarker = NULL)
Arguments
RuleId |
[required] The |
NextMarker |
A null value and not currently used. Do not include this in your request. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_regex_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_regex_match_set(RegexMatchSetId)
Arguments
RegexMatchSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_regex_pattern_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_regex_pattern_set(RegexPatternSetId)
Arguments
RegexPatternSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_rule(RuleId)
Arguments
RuleId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_rule_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_rule_group(RuleGroupId)
Arguments
RuleGroupId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_sampled_requests/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_sampled_requests(WebAclId, RuleId, TimeWindow, MaxItems)
Arguments
WebAclId |
[required] The |
RuleId |
[required]
|
TimeWindow |
[required] The start date and time and the end date and time of the range for which
you want |
MaxItems |
[required] The number of requests that you want AWS WAF to return from among the
first 5,000 requests that your AWS resource received during the time
range. If your resource received fewer requests than the value of
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_size_constraint_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_size_constraint_set(SizeConstraintSetId)
Arguments
SizeConstraintSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_sql_injection_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_sql_injection_match_set(SqlInjectionMatchSetId)
Arguments
SqlInjectionMatchSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_web_acl(WebACLId)
Arguments
WebACLId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_get_xss_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_get_xss_match_set(XssMatchSetId)
Arguments
XssMatchSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_activated_rules_in_rule_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_activated_rules_in_rule_group(
RuleGroupId = NULL,
NextMarker = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
RuleGroupId |
The |
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_byte_match_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_byte_match_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_geo_match_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_geo_match_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_ip_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_ip_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
AWS WAF returns a |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_logging_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_logging_configurations(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_rate_based_rules/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_rate_based_rules(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_regex_match_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_regex_match_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_regex_pattern_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_regex_pattern_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_rule_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_rule_groups(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_rules/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_rules(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_size_constraint_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_size_constraint_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_sql_injection_match_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_sql_injection_match_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of SqlInjectionMatchSet objects that you want AWS
WAF to return for this request. If you have more |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_subscribed_rule_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_subscribed_rule_groups(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of subscribed rule groups that you want AWS WAF to
return for this request. If you have more objects than the number you
specify for |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_tags_for_resource(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL, ResourceARN)
Arguments
NextMarker |
|
Limit |
|
ResourceARN |
[required] |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_web_ac_ls/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_web_ac_ls(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_list_xss_match_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_list_xss_match_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of XssMatchSet objects that you want AWS WAF to
return for this request. If you have more |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_put_logging_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_put_logging_configuration(LoggingConfiguration)
Arguments
LoggingConfiguration |
[required] The Amazon Kinesis Data Firehose that contains the inspected traffic information, the redacted fields details, and the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the web ACL to monitor. When specifying |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_put_permission_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_put_permission_policy(ResourceArn, Policy)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the RuleGroup to which you want to attach the policy. |
Policy |
[required] The policy to attach to the specified RuleGroup. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] |
Tags |
[required] |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] |
TagKeys |
[required] |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_update_byte_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_update_byte_match_set(ByteMatchSetId, ChangeToken, Updates)
Arguments
ByteMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_update_geo_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_update_geo_match_set(GeoMatchSetId, ChangeToken, Updates)
Arguments
GeoMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_update_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_update_ip_set(IPSetId, ChangeToken, Updates)
Arguments
IPSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of
You can insert a maximum of 1000 addresses in a single request. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_update_rate_based_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_update_rate_based_rule(RuleId, ChangeToken, Updates, RateLimit)
Arguments
RuleId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of |
RateLimit |
[required] The maximum number of requests, which have an identical value in the
field specified by the |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_update_regex_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_update_regex_match_set(RegexMatchSetId, Updates, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RegexMatchSetId |
[required] The |
Updates |
[required] An array of |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_update_regex_pattern_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_update_regex_pattern_set(RegexPatternSetId, Updates, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RegexPatternSetId |
[required] The |
Updates |
[required] An array of |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_update_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_update_rule(RuleId, ChangeToken, Updates)
Arguments
RuleId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_update_rule_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_update_rule_group(RuleGroupId, Updates, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RuleGroupId |
[required] The |
Updates |
[required] An array of You can only insert
|
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_update_size_constraint_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_update_size_constraint_set(SizeConstraintSetId, ChangeToken, Updates)
Arguments
SizeConstraintSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_update_sql_injection_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_update_sql_injection_match_set(
SqlInjectionMatchSetId,
ChangeToken,
Updates
)
Arguments
SqlInjectionMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_update_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_update_web_acl(WebACLId, ChangeToken, Updates = NULL, DefaultAction = NULL)
Arguments
WebACLId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
An array of updates to make to the WebACL. An array of
|
DefaultAction |
A default action for the web ACL, either ALLOW or BLOCK. AWS WAF performs the default action if a request doesn't match the criteria in any of the rules in a web ACL. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/waf_update_xss_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
waf_update_xss_match_set(XssMatchSetId, ChangeToken, Updates)
Arguments
XssMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of
|
AWS WAF Regional
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic Regional documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
For the latest version of AWS WAF, use the AWS WAFV2 API and see the AWS WAF Developer Guide. With the latest version, AWS WAF has a single set of endpoints for regional and global use.
This is the AWS WAF Regional Classic API Reference for using AWS WAF Classic with the AWS resources, Elastic Load Balancing (ELB) Application Load Balancers and API Gateway APIs. The AWS WAF Classic actions and data types listed in the reference are available for protecting Elastic Load Balancing (ELB) Application Load Balancers and API Gateway APIs. You can use these actions and data types by means of the endpoints listed in AWS Regions and Endpoints. This guide is for developers who need detailed information about the AWS WAF Classic API actions, data types, and errors. For detailed information about AWS WAF Classic features and an overview of how to use the AWS WAF Classic API, see the AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
Usage
wafregional(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- wafregional( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
associate_web_acl | This is AWS WAF Classic Regional documentation |
create_byte_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_geo_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_ip_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_rate_based_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_regex_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_regex_pattern_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_rule_group | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_size_constraint_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_sql_injection_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_web_acl | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
create_web_acl_migration_stack | Creates an AWS CloudFormation WAFV2 template for the specified web ACL in the specified Amazon S3 bucket |
create_xss_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_byte_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_geo_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_ip_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_logging_configuration | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_permission_policy | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_rate_based_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_regex_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_regex_pattern_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_rule_group | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_size_constraint_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_sql_injection_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_web_acl | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
delete_xss_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
disassociate_web_acl | This is AWS WAF Classic Regional documentation |
get_byte_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_change_token | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_change_token_status | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_geo_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_ip_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_logging_configuration | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_permission_policy | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_rate_based_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_rate_based_rule_managed_keys | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_regex_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_regex_pattern_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_rule_group | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_sampled_requests | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_size_constraint_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_sql_injection_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_web_acl | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
get_web_acl_for_resource | This is AWS WAF Classic Regional documentation |
get_xss_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_activated_rules_in_rule_group | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_byte_match_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_geo_match_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_ip_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_logging_configurations | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_rate_based_rules | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_regex_match_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_regex_pattern_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_resources_for_web_acl | This is AWS WAF Classic Regional documentation |
list_rule_groups | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_rules | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_size_constraint_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_sql_injection_match_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_subscribed_rule_groups | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_tags_for_resource | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_web_ac_ls | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
list_xss_match_sets | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
put_logging_configuration | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
put_permission_policy | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
tag_resource | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
untag_resource | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_byte_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_geo_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_ip_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_rate_based_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_regex_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_regex_pattern_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_rule | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_rule_group | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_size_constraint_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_sql_injection_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_web_acl | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
update_xss_match_set | This is AWS WAF Classic documentation |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- wafregional()
# The following example creates an IP match set named MyIPSetFriendlyName.
svc$create_ip_set(
ChangeToken = "abcd12f2-46da-4fdb-b8d5-fbd4c466928f",
Name = "MyIPSetFriendlyName"
)
## End(Not run)
This is AWS WAF Classic Regional documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic Regional documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_associate_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_associate_web_acl(WebACLId, ResourceArn)
Arguments
WebACLId |
[required] A unique identifier (ID) for the web ACL. |
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN (Amazon Resource Name) of the resource to be protected, either an application load balancer or Amazon API Gateway stage. The ARN should be in one of the following formats:
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_create_byte_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_create_byte_match_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the ByteMatchSet. You can't change
|
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_create_geo_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_create_geo_match_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the GeoMatchSet. You can't change
|
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_create_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_create_ip_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the IPSet. You can't change |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_create_rate_based_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_create_rate_based_rule(
Name,
MetricName,
RateKey,
RateLimit,
ChangeToken,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the RateBasedRule. You can't change
the name of a |
MetricName |
[required] A friendly name or description for the metrics for this |
RateKey |
[required] The field that AWS WAF uses to determine if requests are likely arriving
from a single source and thus subject to rate monitoring. The only valid
value for |
RateLimit |
[required] The maximum number of requests, which have an identical value in the
field that is specified by |
ChangeToken |
[required] The |
Tags |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_create_regex_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_create_regex_match_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the RegexMatchSet. You can't change
|
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_create_regex_pattern_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_create_regex_pattern_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the RegexPatternSet. You can't change
|
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_create_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_create_rule(Name, MetricName, ChangeToken, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the Rule. You can't change the name of
a |
MetricName |
[required] A friendly name or description for the metrics for this |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Tags |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_create_rule_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_create_rule_group(Name, MetricName, ChangeToken, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the RuleGroup. You can't change |
MetricName |
[required] A friendly name or description for the metrics for this |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Tags |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_create_size_constraint_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_create_size_constraint_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the SizeConstraintSet. You can't
change |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_create_sql_injection_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_create_sql_injection_match_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description for the SqlInjectionMatchSet that you're
creating. You can't change |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_create_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_create_web_acl(
Name,
MetricName,
DefaultAction,
ChangeToken,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description of the WebACL. You can't change |
MetricName |
[required] A friendly name or description for the metrics for this |
DefaultAction |
[required] The action that you want AWS WAF to take when a request doesn't match
the criteria specified in any of the |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Tags |
Creates an AWS CloudFormation WAFV2 template for the specified web ACL in the specified Amazon S3 bucket
Description
Creates an AWS CloudFormation WAFV2 template for the specified web ACL in the specified Amazon S3 bucket. Then, in CloudFormation, you create a stack from the template, to create the web ACL and its resources in AWS WAFV2. Use this to migrate your AWS WAF Classic web ACL to the latest version of AWS WAF.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_create_web_acl_migration_stack/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_create_web_acl_migration_stack(
WebACLId,
S3BucketName,
IgnoreUnsupportedType
)
Arguments
WebACLId |
[required] The UUID of the WAF Classic web ACL that you want to migrate to WAF v2. |
S3BucketName |
[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket to store the CloudFormation template in. The S3 bucket must be configured as follows for the migration:
|
IgnoreUnsupportedType |
[required] Indicates whether to exclude entities that can't be migrated or to stop the migration. Set this to true to ignore unsupported entities in the web ACL during the migration. Otherwise, if AWS WAF encounters unsupported entities, it stops the process and throws an exception. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_create_xss_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_create_xss_match_set(Name, ChangeToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A friendly name or description for the XssMatchSet that you're creating.
You can't change |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_delete_byte_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_delete_byte_match_set(ByteMatchSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
ByteMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_delete_geo_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_delete_geo_match_set(GeoMatchSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
GeoMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_delete_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_delete_ip_set(IPSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
IPSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_delete_logging_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_delete_logging_configuration(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the web ACL from which you want to delete the LoggingConfiguration. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_delete_permission_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_delete_permission_policy(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the RuleGroup from which you want to delete the policy. The user making the request must be the owner of the RuleGroup. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_delete_rate_based_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_delete_rate_based_rule(RuleId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RuleId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_delete_regex_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_delete_regex_match_set(RegexMatchSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RegexMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_delete_regex_pattern_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_delete_regex_pattern_set(RegexPatternSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RegexPatternSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_delete_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_delete_rule(RuleId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RuleId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_delete_rule_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_delete_rule_group(RuleGroupId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RuleGroupId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_delete_size_constraint_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_delete_size_constraint_set(SizeConstraintSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
SizeConstraintSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_delete_sql_injection_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_delete_sql_injection_match_set(SqlInjectionMatchSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
SqlInjectionMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_delete_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_delete_web_acl(WebACLId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
WebACLId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_delete_xss_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_delete_xss_match_set(XssMatchSetId, ChangeToken)
Arguments
XssMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic Regional documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic Regional documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_disassociate_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_disassociate_web_acl(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN (Amazon Resource Name) of the resource from which the web ACL is being removed, either an application load balancer or Amazon API Gateway stage. The ARN should be in one of the following formats:
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_byte_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_byte_match_set(ByteMatchSetId)
Arguments
ByteMatchSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_change_token/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_change_token()
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_change_token_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_change_token_status(ChangeToken)
Arguments
ChangeToken |
[required] The change token for which you want to get the status. This change token
was previously returned in the
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_geo_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_geo_match_set(GeoMatchSetId)
Arguments
GeoMatchSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_ip_set(IPSetId)
Arguments
IPSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_logging_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_logging_configuration(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the web ACL for which you want to get the LoggingConfiguration. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_permission_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_permission_policy(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the RuleGroup for which you want to get the policy. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_rate_based_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_rate_based_rule(RuleId)
Arguments
RuleId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_rate_based_rule_managed_keys/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_rate_based_rule_managed_keys(RuleId, NextMarker = NULL)
Arguments
RuleId |
[required] The |
NextMarker |
A null value and not currently used. Do not include this in your request. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_regex_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_regex_match_set(RegexMatchSetId)
Arguments
RegexMatchSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_regex_pattern_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_regex_pattern_set(RegexPatternSetId)
Arguments
RegexPatternSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_rule(RuleId)
Arguments
RuleId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_rule_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_rule_group(RuleGroupId)
Arguments
RuleGroupId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_sampled_requests/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_sampled_requests(WebAclId, RuleId, TimeWindow, MaxItems)
Arguments
WebAclId |
[required] The |
RuleId |
[required]
|
TimeWindow |
[required] The start date and time and the end date and time of the range for which
you want |
MaxItems |
[required] The number of requests that you want AWS WAF to return from among the
first 5,000 requests that your AWS resource received during the time
range. If your resource received fewer requests than the value of
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_size_constraint_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_size_constraint_set(SizeConstraintSetId)
Arguments
SizeConstraintSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_sql_injection_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_sql_injection_match_set(SqlInjectionMatchSetId)
Arguments
SqlInjectionMatchSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_web_acl(WebACLId)
Arguments
WebACLId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic Regional documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic Regional documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_web_acl_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_web_acl_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN (Amazon Resource Name) of the resource for which to get the web ACL, either an application load balancer or Amazon API Gateway stage. The ARN should be in one of the following formats:
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_get_xss_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_get_xss_match_set(XssMatchSetId)
Arguments
XssMatchSetId |
[required] The |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_activated_rules_in_rule_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_activated_rules_in_rule_group(
RuleGroupId = NULL,
NextMarker = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
RuleGroupId |
The |
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_byte_match_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_byte_match_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_geo_match_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_geo_match_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_ip_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_ip_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
AWS WAF returns a |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_logging_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_logging_configurations(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_rate_based_rules/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_rate_based_rules(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_regex_match_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_regex_match_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_regex_pattern_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_regex_pattern_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic Regional documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic Regional documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_resources_for_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_resources_for_web_acl(WebACLId, ResourceType = NULL)
Arguments
WebACLId |
[required] The unique identifier (ID) of the web ACL for which to list the associated resources. |
ResourceType |
The type of resource to list, either an application load balancer or Amazon API Gateway. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_rule_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_rule_groups(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_rules/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_rules(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_size_constraint_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_size_constraint_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_sql_injection_match_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_sql_injection_match_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of SqlInjectionMatchSet objects that you want AWS
WAF to return for this request. If you have more |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_subscribed_rule_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_subscribed_rule_groups(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of subscribed rule groups that you want AWS WAF to
return for this request. If you have more objects than the number you
specify for |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_tags_for_resource(
NextMarker = NULL,
Limit = NULL,
ResourceARN
)
Arguments
NextMarker |
|
Limit |
|
ResourceARN |
[required] |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_web_ac_ls/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_web_ac_ls(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_list_xss_match_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_list_xss_match_sets(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
NextMarker |
If you specify a value for |
Limit |
Specifies the number of XssMatchSet objects that you want AWS WAF to
return for this request. If you have more |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_put_logging_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_put_logging_configuration(LoggingConfiguration)
Arguments
LoggingConfiguration |
[required] The Amazon Kinesis Data Firehose that contains the inspected traffic information, the redacted fields details, and the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the web ACL to monitor. When specifying |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_put_permission_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_put_permission_policy(ResourceArn, Policy)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the RuleGroup to which you want to attach the policy. |
Policy |
[required] The policy to attach to the specified RuleGroup. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] |
Tags |
[required] |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] |
TagKeys |
[required] |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_update_byte_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_update_byte_match_set(ByteMatchSetId, ChangeToken, Updates)
Arguments
ByteMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_update_geo_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_update_geo_match_set(GeoMatchSetId, ChangeToken, Updates)
Arguments
GeoMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_update_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_update_ip_set(IPSetId, ChangeToken, Updates)
Arguments
IPSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of
You can insert a maximum of 1000 addresses in a single request. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_update_rate_based_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_update_rate_based_rule(RuleId, ChangeToken, Updates, RateLimit)
Arguments
RuleId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of |
RateLimit |
[required] The maximum number of requests, which have an identical value in the
field specified by the |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_update_regex_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_update_regex_match_set(RegexMatchSetId, Updates, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RegexMatchSetId |
[required] The |
Updates |
[required] An array of |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_update_regex_pattern_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_update_regex_pattern_set(RegexPatternSetId, Updates, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RegexPatternSetId |
[required] The |
Updates |
[required] An array of |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_update_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_update_rule(RuleId, ChangeToken, Updates)
Arguments
RuleId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_update_rule_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_update_rule_group(RuleGroupId, Updates, ChangeToken)
Arguments
RuleGroupId |
[required] The |
Updates |
[required] An array of You can only insert
|
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_update_size_constraint_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_update_size_constraint_set(
SizeConstraintSetId,
ChangeToken,
Updates
)
Arguments
SizeConstraintSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_update_sql_injection_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_update_sql_injection_match_set(
SqlInjectionMatchSetId,
ChangeToken,
Updates
)
Arguments
SqlInjectionMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of
|
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_update_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_update_web_acl(
WebACLId,
ChangeToken,
Updates = NULL,
DefaultAction = NULL
)
Arguments
WebACLId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
An array of updates to make to the WebACL. An array of
|
DefaultAction |
A default action for the web ACL, either ALLOW or BLOCK. AWS WAF performs the default action if a request doesn't match the criteria in any of the rules in a web ACL. |
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation
Description
This is AWS WAF Classic documentation. For more information, see AWS WAF Classic in the developer guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafregional_update_xss_match_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafregional_update_xss_match_set(XssMatchSetId, ChangeToken, Updates)
Arguments
XssMatchSetId |
[required] The |
ChangeToken |
[required] The value returned by the most recent call to
|
Updates |
[required] An array of
|
AWS WAFV2
Description
WAF
This is the latest version of the WAF API, released in November, 2019. The names of the entities that you use to access this API, like endpoints and namespaces, all have the versioning information added, like "V2" or "v2", to distinguish from the prior version. We recommend migrating your resources to this version, because it has a number of significant improvements.
If you used WAF prior to this release, you can't use this WAFV2 API to access any WAF resources that you created before. WAF Classic support will end on September 30, 2025.
For information about WAF, including how to migrate your WAF Classic resources to this version, see the WAF Developer Guide.
WAF is a web application firewall that lets you monitor the HTTP and HTTPS requests that are forwarded to a protected resource. Protected resource types include Amazon CloudFront distribution, Amazon API Gateway REST API, Application Load Balancer, AppSync GraphQL API, Amazon Cognito user pool, App Runner service, and Amazon Web Services Verified Access instance. WAF also lets you control access to your content, to protect the Amazon Web Services resource that WAF is monitoring. Based on conditions that you specify, such as the IP addresses that requests originate from or the values of query strings, the protected resource responds to requests with either the requested content, an HTTP 403 status code (Forbidden), or with a custom response.
This API guide is for developers who need detailed information about WAF API actions, data types, and errors. For detailed information about WAF features and guidance for configuring and using WAF, see the WAF Developer Guide.
You can make calls using the endpoints listed in WAF endpoints and quotas.
For regional resources, you can use any of the endpoints in the list. A regional application can be an Application Load Balancer (ALB), an Amazon API Gateway REST API, an AppSync GraphQL API, an Amazon Cognito user pool, an App Runner service, or an Amazon Web Services Verified Access instance.
For Amazon CloudFront, you must use the API endpoint listed for US East (N. Virginia): us-east-1.
Alternatively, you can use one of the Amazon Web Services SDKs to access an API that's tailored to the programming language or platform that you're using. For more information, see Amazon Web Services SDKs.
Usage
wafv2(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- wafv2( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
associate_web_acl | Associates a web ACL with a resource, to protect the resource |
check_capacity | Returns the web ACL capacity unit (WCU) requirements for a specified scope and set of rules |
create_api_key | Creates an API key that contains a set of token domains |
create_ip_set | Creates an IPSet, which you use to identify web requests that originate from specific IP addresses or ranges of IP addresses |
create_regex_pattern_set | Creates a RegexPatternSet, which you reference in a RegexPatternSetReferenceStatement, to have WAF inspect a web request component for the specified patterns |
create_rule_group | Creates a RuleGroup per the specifications provided |
create_web_acl | Creates a WebACL per the specifications provided |
delete_api_key | Deletes the specified API key |
delete_firewall_manager_rule_groups | Deletes all rule groups that are managed by Firewall Manager from the specified WebACL |
delete_ip_set | Deletes the specified IPSet |
delete_logging_configuration | Deletes the LoggingConfiguration from the specified web ACL |
delete_permission_policy | Permanently deletes an IAM policy from the specified rule group |
delete_regex_pattern_set | Deletes the specified RegexPatternSet |
delete_rule_group | Deletes the specified RuleGroup |
delete_web_acl | Deletes the specified WebACL |
describe_all_managed_products | Provides high-level information for the Amazon Web Services Managed Rules rule groups and Amazon Web Services Marketplace managed rule groups |
describe_managed_products_by_vendor | Provides high-level information for the managed rule groups owned by a specific vendor |
describe_managed_rule_group | Provides high-level information for a managed rule group, including descriptions of the rules |
disassociate_web_acl | Disassociates the specified resource from its web ACL association, if it has one |
generate_mobile_sdk_release_url | Generates a presigned download URL for the specified release of the mobile SDK |
get_decrypted_api_key | Returns your API key in decrypted form |
get_ip_set | Retrieves the specified IPSet |
get_logging_configuration | Returns the LoggingConfiguration for the specified web ACL |
get_managed_rule_set | Retrieves the specified managed rule set |
get_mobile_sdk_release | Retrieves information for the specified mobile SDK release, including release notes and tags |
get_permission_policy | Returns the IAM policy that is attached to the specified rule group |
get_rate_based_statement_managed_keys | Retrieves the IP addresses that are currently blocked by a rate-based rule instance |
get_regex_pattern_set | Retrieves the specified RegexPatternSet |
get_rule_group | Retrieves the specified RuleGroup |
get_sampled_requests | Gets detailed information about a specified number of requests--a sample--that WAF randomly selects from among the first 5,000 requests that your Amazon Web Services resource received during a time range that you choose |
get_web_acl | Retrieves the specified WebACL |
get_web_acl_for_resource | Retrieves the WebACL for the specified resource |
list_api_keys | Retrieves a list of the API keys that you've defined for the specified scope |
list_available_managed_rule_groups | Retrieves an array of managed rule groups that are available for you to use |
list_available_managed_rule_group_versions | Returns a list of the available versions for the specified managed rule group |
list_ip_sets | Retrieves an array of IPSetSummary objects for the IP sets that you manage |
list_logging_configurations | Retrieves an array of your LoggingConfiguration objects |
list_managed_rule_sets | Retrieves the managed rule sets that you own |
list_mobile_sdk_releases | Retrieves a list of the available releases for the mobile SDK and the specified device platform |
list_regex_pattern_sets | Retrieves an array of RegexPatternSetSummary objects for the regex pattern sets that you manage |
list_resources_for_web_acl | Retrieves an array of the Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) for the resources that are associated with the specified web ACL |
list_rule_groups | Retrieves an array of RuleGroupSummary objects for the rule groups that you manage |
list_tags_for_resource | Retrieves the TagInfoForResource for the specified resource |
list_web_ac_ls | Retrieves an array of WebACLSummary objects for the web ACLs that you manage |
put_logging_configuration | Enables the specified LoggingConfiguration, to start logging from a web ACL, according to the configuration provided |
put_managed_rule_set_versions | Defines the versions of your managed rule set that you are offering to the customers |
put_permission_policy | Use this to share a rule group with other accounts |
tag_resource | Associates tags with the specified Amazon Web Services resource |
untag_resource | Disassociates tags from an Amazon Web Services resource |
update_ip_set | Updates the specified IPSet |
update_managed_rule_set_version_expiry_date | Updates the expiration information for your managed rule set |
update_regex_pattern_set | Updates the specified RegexPatternSet |
update_rule_group | Updates the specified RuleGroup |
update_web_acl | Updates the specified WebACL |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- wafv2()
svc$associate_web_acl(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Associates a web ACL with a resource, to protect the resource
Description
Associates a web ACL with a resource, to protect the resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_associate_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_associate_web_acl(WebACLArn, ResourceArn)
Arguments
WebACLArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the web ACL that you want to associate with the resource. |
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to associate with the web ACL. The ARN must be in one of the following formats:
|
Returns the web ACL capacity unit (WCU) requirements for a specified scope and set of rules
Description
Returns the web ACL capacity unit (WCU) requirements for a specified scope and set of rules. You can use this to check the capacity requirements for the rules you want to use in a RuleGroup or WebACL.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_check_capacity/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_check_capacity(Scope, Rules)
Arguments
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Rules |
[required] An array of Rule that you're configuring to use in a rule group or web ACL. |
Creates an API key that contains a set of token domains
Description
Creates an API key that contains a set of token domains.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_create_api_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_create_api_key(Scope, TokenDomains)
Arguments
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
TokenDomains |
[required] The client application domains that you want to use this API key for. Example JSON: Public suffixes aren't allowed. For example, you can't use |
Creates an IPSet, which you use to identify web requests that originate from specific IP addresses or ranges of IP addresses
Description
Creates an IPSet, which you use to identify web requests that originate from specific IP addresses or ranges of IP addresses. For example, if you're receiving a lot of requests from a ranges of IP addresses, you can configure WAF to block them using an IPSet that lists those IP addresses.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_create_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_create_ip_set(
Name,
Scope,
Description = NULL,
IPAddressVersion,
Addresses,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the IP set. You cannot change the name of an |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Description |
A description of the IP set that helps with identification. |
IPAddressVersion |
[required] The version of the IP addresses, either |
Addresses |
[required] Contains an array of strings that specifies zero or more IP addresses or
blocks of IP addresses that you want WAF to inspect for in incoming
requests. All addresses must be specified using Classless Inter-Domain
Routing (CIDR) notation. WAF supports all IPv4 and IPv6 CIDR ranges
except for Example address strings:
For more information about CIDR notation, see the Wikipedia entry Classless Inter-Domain Routing. Example JSON
|
Tags |
An array of key:value pairs to associate with the resource. |
Creates a RegexPatternSet, which you reference in a RegexPatternSetReferenceStatement, to have WAF inspect a web request component for the specified patterns
Description
Creates a RegexPatternSet, which you reference in a RegexPatternSetReferenceStatement, to have WAF inspect a web request component for the specified patterns.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_create_regex_pattern_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_create_regex_pattern_set(
Name,
Scope,
Description = NULL,
RegularExpressionList,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the set. You cannot change the name after you create the set. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Description |
A description of the set that helps with identification. |
RegularExpressionList |
[required] Array of regular expression strings. |
Tags |
An array of key:value pairs to associate with the resource. |
Creates a RuleGroup per the specifications provided
Description
Creates a RuleGroup per the specifications provided.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_create_rule_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_create_rule_group(
Name,
Scope,
Capacity,
Description = NULL,
Rules = NULL,
VisibilityConfig,
Tags = NULL,
CustomResponseBodies = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the rule group. You cannot change the name of a rule group after you create it. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Capacity |
[required] The web ACL capacity units (WCUs) required for this rule group. When you create your own rule group, you define this, and you cannot
change it after creation. When you add or modify the rules in a rule
group, WAF enforces this limit. You can check the capacity for a set of
rules using WAF uses WCUs to calculate and control the operating resources that are used to run your rules, rule groups, and web ACLs. WAF calculates capacity differently for each rule type, to reflect the relative cost of each rule. Simple rules that cost little to run use fewer WCUs than more complex rules that use more processing power. Rule group capacity is fixed at creation, which helps users plan their web ACL WCU usage when they use a rule group. For more information, see WAF web ACL capacity units (WCU) in the WAF Developer Guide. |
Description |
A description of the rule group that helps with identification. |
Rules |
The Rule statements used to identify the web requests that you want to manage. Each rule includes one top-level statement that WAF uses to identify matching web requests, and parameters that govern how WAF handles them. |
VisibilityConfig |
[required] Defines and enables Amazon CloudWatch metrics and web request sample collection. |
Tags |
An array of key:value pairs to associate with the resource. |
CustomResponseBodies |
A map of custom response keys and content bodies. When you create a rule with a block action, you can send a custom response to the web request. You define these for the rule group, and then use them in the rules that you define in the rule group. For information about customizing web requests and responses, see Customizing web requests and responses in WAF in the WAF Developer Guide. For information about the limits on count and size for custom request and response settings, see WAF quotas in the WAF Developer Guide. |
Creates a WebACL per the specifications provided
Description
Creates a WebACL per the specifications provided.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_create_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_create_web_acl(
Name,
Scope,
DefaultAction,
Description = NULL,
Rules = NULL,
VisibilityConfig,
DataProtectionConfig = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
CustomResponseBodies = NULL,
CaptchaConfig = NULL,
ChallengeConfig = NULL,
TokenDomains = NULL,
AssociationConfig = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the web ACL. You cannot change the name of a web ACL after you create it. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
DefaultAction |
[required] The action to perform if none of the |
Description |
A description of the web ACL that helps with identification. |
Rules |
The Rule statements used to identify the web requests that you want to manage. Each rule includes one top-level statement that WAF uses to identify matching web requests, and parameters that govern how WAF handles them. |
VisibilityConfig |
[required] Defines and enables Amazon CloudWatch metrics and web request sample collection. |
DataProtectionConfig |
Specifies data protection to apply to the web request data that WAF stores for the web ACL. This is a web ACL level data protection option. The data protection that you configure for the web ACL alters the data that's available for any other data collection activity, including WAF logging, web ACL request sampling, Amazon Web Services Managed Rules, and Amazon Security Lake data collection and management. Your other option for data protection is in the logging configuration, which only affects logging. |
Tags |
An array of key:value pairs to associate with the resource. |
CustomResponseBodies |
A map of custom response keys and content bodies. When you create a rule with a block action, you can send a custom response to the web request. You define these for the web ACL, and then use them in the rules and default actions that you define in the web ACL. For information about customizing web requests and responses, see Customizing web requests and responses in WAF in the WAF Developer Guide. For information about the limits on count and size for custom request and response settings, see WAF quotas in the WAF Developer Guide. |
CaptchaConfig |
Specifies how WAF should handle |
ChallengeConfig |
Specifies how WAF should handle challenge evaluations for rules that
don't have their own |
TokenDomains |
Specifies the domains that WAF should accept in a web request token. This enables the use of tokens across multiple protected websites. When WAF provides a token, it uses the domain of the Amazon Web Services resource that the web ACL is protecting. If you don't specify a list of token domains, WAF accepts tokens only for the domain of the protected resource. With a token domain list, WAF accepts the resource's host domain plus all domains in the token domain list, including their prefixed subdomains. Example JSON:
Public suffixes aren't allowed. For example, you can't use |
AssociationConfig |
Specifies custom configurations for the associations between the web ACL and protected resources. Use this to customize the maximum size of the request body that your protected resources forward to WAF for inspection. You can customize this setting for CloudFront, API Gateway, Amazon Cognito, App Runner, or Verified Access resources. The default setting is 16 KB (16,384 bytes). You are charged additional fees when your protected resources forward body sizes that are larger than the default. For more information, see WAF Pricing. For Application Load Balancer and AppSync, the limit is fixed at 8 KB (8,192 bytes). |
Deletes the specified API key
Description
Deletes the specified API key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_delete_api_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_delete_api_key(Scope, APIKey)
Arguments
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
APIKey |
[required] The encrypted API key that you want to delete. |
Deletes all rule groups that are managed by Firewall Manager from the specified WebACL
Description
Deletes all rule groups that are managed by Firewall Manager from the specified WebACL.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_delete_firewall_manager_rule_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_delete_firewall_manager_rule_groups(WebACLArn, WebACLLockToken)
Arguments
WebACLArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the web ACL. |
WebACLLockToken |
[required] A token used for optimistic locking. WAF returns a token to your |
Deletes the specified IPSet
Description
Deletes the specified IPSet.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_delete_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_delete_ip_set(Name, Scope, Id, LockToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the IP set. You cannot change the name of an |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Id |
[required] A unique identifier for the set. This ID is returned in the responses to create and list commands. You provide it to operations like update and delete. |
LockToken |
[required] A token used for optimistic locking. WAF returns a token to your |
Deletes the LoggingConfiguration from the specified web ACL
Description
Deletes the LoggingConfiguration from the specified web ACL.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_delete_logging_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_delete_logging_configuration(
ResourceArn,
LogType = NULL,
LogScope = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the web ACL from which you want to delete the LoggingConfiguration. |
LogType |
Used to distinguish between various logging options. Currently, there is one option. Default: |
LogScope |
The owner of the logging configuration, which must be set to The log scope Default: |
Permanently deletes an IAM policy from the specified rule group
Description
Permanently deletes an IAM policy from the specified rule group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_delete_permission_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_delete_permission_policy(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the rule group from which you want to delete the policy. You must be the owner of the rule group to perform this operation. |
Deletes the specified RegexPatternSet
Description
Deletes the specified RegexPatternSet.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_delete_regex_pattern_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_delete_regex_pattern_set(Name, Scope, Id, LockToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the set. You cannot change the name after you create the set. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Id |
[required] A unique identifier for the set. This ID is returned in the responses to create and list commands. You provide it to operations like update and delete. |
LockToken |
[required] A token used for optimistic locking. WAF returns a token to your |
Deletes the specified RuleGroup
Description
Deletes the specified RuleGroup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_delete_rule_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_delete_rule_group(Name, Scope, Id, LockToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the rule group. You cannot change the name of a rule group after you create it. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Id |
[required] A unique identifier for the rule group. This ID is returned in the responses to create and list commands. You provide it to operations like update and delete. |
LockToken |
[required] A token used for optimistic locking. WAF returns a token to your |
Deletes the specified WebACL
Description
Deletes the specified WebACL.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_delete_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_delete_web_acl(Name, Scope, Id, LockToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the web ACL. You cannot change the name of a web ACL after you create it. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Id |
[required] The unique identifier for the web ACL. This ID is returned in the responses to create and list commands. You provide it to operations like update and delete. |
LockToken |
[required] A token used for optimistic locking. WAF returns a token to your |
Provides high-level information for the Amazon Web Services Managed Rules rule groups and Amazon Web Services Marketplace managed rule groups
Description
Provides high-level information for the Amazon Web Services Managed Rules rule groups and Amazon Web Services Marketplace managed rule groups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_describe_all_managed_products/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_describe_all_managed_products(Scope)
Arguments
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Provides high-level information for the managed rule groups owned by a specific vendor
Description
Provides high-level information for the managed rule groups owned by a specific vendor.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_describe_managed_products_by_vendor/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_describe_managed_products_by_vendor(VendorName, Scope)
Arguments
VendorName |
[required] The name of the managed rule group vendor. You use this, along with the rule group name, to identify a rule group. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Provides high-level information for a managed rule group, including descriptions of the rules
Description
Provides high-level information for a managed rule group, including descriptions of the rules.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_describe_managed_rule_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_describe_managed_rule_group(VendorName, Name, Scope, VersionName = NULL)
Arguments
VendorName |
[required] The name of the managed rule group vendor. You use this, along with the rule group name, to identify a rule group. |
Name |
[required] The name of the managed rule group. You use this, along with the vendor name, to identify the rule group. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
VersionName |
The version of the rule group. You can only use a version that is not scheduled for expiration. If you don't provide this, WAF uses the vendor's default version. |
Disassociates the specified resource from its web ACL association, if it has one
Description
Disassociates the specified resource from its web ACL association, if it has one.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_disassociate_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_disassociate_web_acl(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to disassociate from the web ACL. The ARN must be in one of the following formats:
|
Generates a presigned download URL for the specified release of the mobile SDK
Description
Generates a presigned download URL for the specified release of the mobile SDK.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_generate_mobile_sdk_release_url/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_generate_mobile_sdk_release_url(Platform, ReleaseVersion)
Arguments
Platform |
[required] The device platform. |
ReleaseVersion |
[required] The release version. For the latest available version, specify |
Returns your API key in decrypted form
Description
Returns your API key in decrypted form. Use this to check the token domains that you have defined for the key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_get_decrypted_api_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_get_decrypted_api_key(Scope, APIKey)
Arguments
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
APIKey |
[required] The encrypted API key. |
Retrieves the specified IPSet
Description
Retrieves the specified IPSet.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_get_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_get_ip_set(Name, Scope, Id)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the IP set. You cannot change the name of an |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Id |
[required] A unique identifier for the set. This ID is returned in the responses to create and list commands. You provide it to operations like update and delete. |
Returns the LoggingConfiguration for the specified web ACL
Description
Returns the LoggingConfiguration for the specified web ACL.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_get_logging_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_get_logging_configuration(ResourceArn, LogType = NULL, LogScope = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the web ACL for which you want to get the LoggingConfiguration. |
LogType |
Used to distinguish between various logging options. Currently, there is one option. Default: |
LogScope |
The owner of the logging configuration, which must be set to The log scope Default: |
Retrieves the specified managed rule set
Description
Retrieves the specified managed rule set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_get_managed_rule_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_get_managed_rule_set(Name, Scope, Id)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the managed rule set. You use this, along with the rule set ID, to identify the rule set. This name is assigned to the corresponding managed rule group, which your customers can access and use. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Id |
[required] A unique identifier for the managed rule set. The ID is returned in the
responses to commands like |
Retrieves information for the specified mobile SDK release, including release notes and tags
Description
Retrieves information for the specified mobile SDK release, including release notes and tags.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_get_mobile_sdk_release/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_get_mobile_sdk_release(Platform, ReleaseVersion)
Arguments
Platform |
[required] The device platform. |
ReleaseVersion |
[required] The release version. For the latest available version, specify |
Returns the IAM policy that is attached to the specified rule group
Description
Returns the IAM policy that is attached to the specified rule group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_get_permission_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_get_permission_policy(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the rule group for which you want to get the policy. |
Retrieves the IP addresses that are currently blocked by a rate-based rule instance
Description
Retrieves the IP addresses that are currently blocked by a rate-based rule instance. This is only available for rate-based rules that aggregate solely on the IP address or on the forwarded IP address.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_get_rate_based_statement_managed_keys/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_get_rate_based_statement_managed_keys(
Scope,
WebACLName,
WebACLId,
RuleGroupRuleName = NULL,
RuleName
)
Arguments
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
WebACLName |
[required] The name of the web ACL. You cannot change the name of a web ACL after you create it. |
WebACLId |
[required] The unique identifier for the web ACL. This ID is returned in the responses to create and list commands. You provide it to operations like update and delete. |
RuleGroupRuleName |
The name of the rule group reference statement in your web ACL. This is required only when you have the rate-based rule nested inside a rule group. |
RuleName |
[required] The name of the rate-based rule to get the keys for. If you have the
rule defined inside a rule group that you're using in your web ACL, also
provide the name of the rule group reference statement in the request
parameter |
Retrieves the specified RegexPatternSet
Description
Retrieves the specified RegexPatternSet.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_get_regex_pattern_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_get_regex_pattern_set(Name, Scope, Id)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the set. You cannot change the name after you create the set. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Id |
[required] A unique identifier for the set. This ID is returned in the responses to create and list commands. You provide it to operations like update and delete. |
Retrieves the specified RuleGroup
Description
Retrieves the specified RuleGroup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_get_rule_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_get_rule_group(Name = NULL, Scope = NULL, Id = NULL, ARN = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
The name of the rule group. You cannot change the name of a rule group after you create it. |
Scope |
Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Id |
A unique identifier for the rule group. This ID is returned in the responses to create and list commands. You provide it to operations like update and delete. |
ARN |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the entity. |
Gets detailed information about a specified number of requests–a sample–that WAF randomly selects from among the first 5,000 requests that your Amazon Web Services resource received during a time range that you choose
Description
Gets detailed information about a specified number of requests–a sample–that WAF randomly selects from among the first 5,000 requests that your Amazon Web Services resource received during a time range that you choose. You can specify a sample size of up to 500 requests, and you can specify any time range in the previous three hours.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_get_sampled_requests/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_get_sampled_requests(
WebAclArn,
RuleMetricName,
Scope,
TimeWindow,
MaxItems
)
Arguments
WebAclArn |
[required] The Amazon resource name (ARN) of the |
RuleMetricName |
[required] The metric name assigned to the |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
TimeWindow |
[required] The start date and time and the end date and time of the range for which
you want |
MaxItems |
[required] The number of requests that you want WAF to return from among the first
5,000 requests that your Amazon Web Services resource received during
the time range. If your resource received fewer requests than the value
of |
Retrieves the specified WebACL
Description
Retrieves the specified WebACL.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_get_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_get_web_acl(Name, Scope, Id)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the web ACL. You cannot change the name of a web ACL after you create it. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Id |
[required] The unique identifier for the web ACL. This ID is returned in the responses to create and list commands. You provide it to operations like update and delete. |
Retrieves the WebACL for the specified resource
Description
Retrieves the WebACL for the specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_get_web_acl_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_get_web_acl_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource whose web ACL you want to retrieve. The ARN must be in one of the following formats:
|
Retrieves a list of the API keys that you've defined for the specified scope
Description
Retrieves a list of the API keys that you've defined for the specified scope.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_list_api_keys/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_list_api_keys(Scope, NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
NextMarker |
When you request a list of objects with a |
Limit |
The maximum number of objects that you want WAF to return for this
request. If more objects are available, in the response, WAF provides a
|
Returns a list of the available versions for the specified managed rule group
Description
Returns a list of the available versions for the specified managed rule group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_list_available_managed_rule_group_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_list_available_managed_rule_group_versions(
VendorName,
Name,
Scope,
NextMarker = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
VendorName |
[required] The name of the managed rule group vendor. You use this, along with the rule group name, to identify a rule group. |
Name |
[required] The name of the managed rule group. You use this, along with the vendor name, to identify the rule group. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
NextMarker |
When you request a list of objects with a |
Limit |
The maximum number of objects that you want WAF to return for this
request. If more objects are available, in the response, WAF provides a
|
Retrieves an array of managed rule groups that are available for you to use
Description
Retrieves an array of managed rule groups that are available for you to use. This list includes all Amazon Web Services Managed Rules rule groups and all of the Amazon Web Services Marketplace managed rule groups that you're subscribed to.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_list_available_managed_rule_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_list_available_managed_rule_groups(
Scope,
NextMarker = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
NextMarker |
When you request a list of objects with a |
Limit |
The maximum number of objects that you want WAF to return for this
request. If more objects are available, in the response, WAF provides a
|
Retrieves an array of IPSetSummary objects for the IP sets that you manage
Description
Retrieves an array of IPSetSummary objects for the IP sets that you manage.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_list_ip_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_list_ip_sets(Scope, NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
NextMarker |
When you request a list of objects with a |
Limit |
The maximum number of objects that you want WAF to return for this
request. If more objects are available, in the response, WAF provides a
|
Retrieves an array of your LoggingConfiguration objects
Description
Retrieves an array of your LoggingConfiguration objects.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_list_logging_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_list_logging_configurations(
Scope,
NextMarker = NULL,
Limit = NULL,
LogScope = NULL
)
Arguments
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
NextMarker |
When you request a list of objects with a |
Limit |
The maximum number of objects that you want WAF to return for this
request. If more objects are available, in the response, WAF provides a
|
LogScope |
The owner of the logging configuration, which must be set to The log scope Default: |
Retrieves the managed rule sets that you own
Description
Retrieves the managed rule sets that you own.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_list_managed_rule_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_list_managed_rule_sets(Scope, NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
NextMarker |
When you request a list of objects with a |
Limit |
The maximum number of objects that you want WAF to return for this
request. If more objects are available, in the response, WAF provides a
|
Retrieves a list of the available releases for the mobile SDK and the specified device platform
Description
Retrieves a list of the available releases for the mobile SDK and the specified device platform.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_list_mobile_sdk_releases/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_list_mobile_sdk_releases(Platform, NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
Platform |
[required] The device platform to retrieve the list for. |
NextMarker |
When you request a list of objects with a |
Limit |
The maximum number of objects that you want WAF to return for this
request. If more objects are available, in the response, WAF provides a
|
Retrieves an array of RegexPatternSetSummary objects for the regex pattern sets that you manage
Description
Retrieves an array of RegexPatternSetSummary objects for the regex pattern sets that you manage.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_list_regex_pattern_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_list_regex_pattern_sets(Scope, NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
NextMarker |
When you request a list of objects with a |
Limit |
The maximum number of objects that you want WAF to return for this
request. If more objects are available, in the response, WAF provides a
|
Retrieves an array of the Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) for the resources that are associated with the specified web ACL
Description
Retrieves an array of the Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) for the resources that are associated with the specified web ACL.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_list_resources_for_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_list_resources_for_web_acl(WebACLArn, ResourceType = NULL)
Arguments
WebACLArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the web ACL. |
ResourceType |
Retrieves the web ACLs that are used by the specified resource type. For Amazon CloudFront, don't use this call. Instead, use the CloudFront
call If you don't provide a resource type, the call uses the resource type
Default: |
Retrieves an array of RuleGroupSummary objects for the rule groups that you manage
Description
Retrieves an array of RuleGroupSummary objects for the rule groups that you manage.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_list_rule_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_list_rule_groups(Scope, NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
NextMarker |
When you request a list of objects with a |
Limit |
The maximum number of objects that you want WAF to return for this
request. If more objects are available, in the response, WAF provides a
|
Retrieves the TagInfoForResource for the specified resource
Description
Retrieves the TagInfoForResource for the specified resource. Tags are key:value pairs that you can use to categorize and manage your resources, for purposes like billing. For example, you might set the tag key to "customer" and the value to the customer name or ID. You can specify one or more tags to add to each Amazon Web Services resource, up to 50 tags for a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_list_tags_for_resource(NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL, ResourceARN)
Arguments
NextMarker |
When you request a list of objects with a |
Limit |
The maximum number of objects that you want WAF to return for this
request. If more objects are available, in the response, WAF provides a
|
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. |
Retrieves an array of WebACLSummary objects for the web ACLs that you manage
Description
Retrieves an array of WebACLSummary objects for the web ACLs that you manage.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_list_web_ac_ls/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_list_web_ac_ls(Scope, NextMarker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
NextMarker |
When you request a list of objects with a |
Limit |
The maximum number of objects that you want WAF to return for this
request. If more objects are available, in the response, WAF provides a
|
Enables the specified LoggingConfiguration, to start logging from a web ACL, according to the configuration provided
Description
Enables the specified LoggingConfiguration, to start logging from a web ACL, according to the configuration provided.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_put_logging_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_put_logging_configuration(LoggingConfiguration)
Arguments
LoggingConfiguration |
[required] |
Defines the versions of your managed rule set that you are offering to the customers
Description
Defines the versions of your managed rule set that you are offering to the customers. Customers see your offerings as managed rule groups with versioning.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_put_managed_rule_set_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_put_managed_rule_set_versions(
Name,
Scope,
Id,
LockToken,
RecommendedVersion = NULL,
VersionsToPublish = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the managed rule set. You use this, along with the rule set ID, to identify the rule set. This name is assigned to the corresponding managed rule group, which your customers can access and use. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Id |
[required] A unique identifier for the managed rule set. The ID is returned in the
responses to commands like |
LockToken |
[required] A token used for optimistic locking. WAF returns a token to your |
RecommendedVersion |
The version of the named managed rule group that you'd like your customers to choose, from among your version offerings. |
VersionsToPublish |
The versions of the named managed rule group that you want to offer to your customers. |
Use this to share a rule group with other accounts
Description
Use this to share a rule group with other accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_put_permission_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_put_permission_policy(ResourceArn, Policy)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the RuleGroup to which you want to attach the policy. |
Policy |
[required] The policy to attach to the specified rule group. The policy specifications must conform to the following:
For more information, see IAM Policies. |
Associates tags with the specified Amazon Web Services resource
Description
Associates tags with the specified Amazon Web Services resource. Tags are key:value pairs that you can use to categorize and manage your resources, for purposes like billing. For example, you might set the tag key to "customer" and the value to the customer name or ID. You can specify one or more tags to add to each Amazon Web Services resource, up to 50 tags for a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. |
Tags |
[required] An array of key:value pairs to associate with the resource. |
Disassociates tags from an Amazon Web Services resource
Description
Disassociates tags from an Amazon Web Services resource. Tags are key:value pairs that you can associate with Amazon Web Services resources. For example, the tag key might be "customer" and the tag value might be "companyA." You can specify one or more tags to add to each container. You can add up to 50 tags to each Amazon Web Services resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. |
TagKeys |
[required] An array of keys identifying the tags to disassociate from the resource. |
Updates the specified IPSet
Description
Updates the specified IPSet.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_update_ip_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_update_ip_set(Name, Scope, Id, Description = NULL, Addresses, LockToken)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the IP set. You cannot change the name of an |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Id |
[required] A unique identifier for the set. This ID is returned in the responses to create and list commands. You provide it to operations like update and delete. |
Description |
A description of the IP set that helps with identification. |
Addresses |
[required] Contains an array of strings that specifies zero or more IP addresses or
blocks of IP addresses that you want WAF to inspect for in incoming
requests. All addresses must be specified using Classless Inter-Domain
Routing (CIDR) notation. WAF supports all IPv4 and IPv6 CIDR ranges
except for Example address strings:
For more information about CIDR notation, see the Wikipedia entry Classless Inter-Domain Routing. Example JSON
|
LockToken |
[required] A token used for optimistic locking. WAF returns a token to your |
Updates the expiration information for your managed rule set
Description
Updates the expiration information for your managed rule set. Use this to initiate the expiration of a managed rule group version. After you initiate expiration for a version, WAF excludes it from the response to list_available_managed_rule_group_versions
for the managed rule group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_update_managed_rule_set_version_expiry_date/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_update_managed_rule_set_version_expiry_date(
Name,
Scope,
Id,
LockToken,
VersionToExpire,
ExpiryTimestamp
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the managed rule set. You use this, along with the rule set ID, to identify the rule set. This name is assigned to the corresponding managed rule group, which your customers can access and use. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Id |
[required] A unique identifier for the managed rule set. The ID is returned in the
responses to commands like |
LockToken |
[required] A token used for optimistic locking. WAF returns a token to your |
VersionToExpire |
[required] The version that you want to remove from your list of offerings for the named managed rule group. |
ExpiryTimestamp |
[required] The time that you want the version to expire. Times are in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) format. UTC format includes the special designator, Z. For example, "2016-09-27T14:50Z". |
Updates the specified RegexPatternSet
Description
Updates the specified RegexPatternSet.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_update_regex_pattern_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_update_regex_pattern_set(
Name,
Scope,
Id,
Description = NULL,
RegularExpressionList,
LockToken
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the set. You cannot change the name after you create the set. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Id |
[required] A unique identifier for the set. This ID is returned in the responses to create and list commands. You provide it to operations like update and delete. |
Description |
A description of the set that helps with identification. |
RegularExpressionList |
[required] |
LockToken |
[required] A token used for optimistic locking. WAF returns a token to your |
Updates the specified RuleGroup
Description
Updates the specified RuleGroup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_update_rule_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_update_rule_group(
Name,
Scope,
Id,
Description = NULL,
Rules = NULL,
VisibilityConfig,
LockToken,
CustomResponseBodies = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the rule group. You cannot change the name of a rule group after you create it. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Id |
[required] A unique identifier for the rule group. This ID is returned in the responses to create and list commands. You provide it to operations like update and delete. |
Description |
A description of the rule group that helps with identification. |
Rules |
The Rule statements used to identify the web requests that you want to manage. Each rule includes one top-level statement that WAF uses to identify matching web requests, and parameters that govern how WAF handles them. |
VisibilityConfig |
[required] Defines and enables Amazon CloudWatch metrics and web request sample collection. |
LockToken |
[required] A token used for optimistic locking. WAF returns a token to your |
CustomResponseBodies |
A map of custom response keys and content bodies. When you create a rule with a block action, you can send a custom response to the web request. You define these for the rule group, and then use them in the rules that you define in the rule group. For information about customizing web requests and responses, see Customizing web requests and responses in WAF in the WAF Developer Guide. For information about the limits on count and size for custom request and response settings, see WAF quotas in the WAF Developer Guide. |
Updates the specified WebACL
Description
Updates the specified WebACL. While updating a web ACL, WAF provides continuous coverage to the resources that you have associated with the web ACL.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/wafv2_update_web_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
wafv2_update_web_acl(
Name,
Scope,
Id,
DefaultAction,
Description = NULL,
Rules = NULL,
VisibilityConfig,
DataProtectionConfig = NULL,
LockToken,
CustomResponseBodies = NULL,
CaptchaConfig = NULL,
ChallengeConfig = NULL,
TokenDomains = NULL,
AssociationConfig = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the web ACL. You cannot change the name of a web ACL after you create it. |
Scope |
[required] Specifies whether this is for a global resource type, such as a Amazon CloudFront distribution. To work with CloudFront, you must also specify the Region US East (N. Virginia) as follows:
|
Id |
[required] The unique identifier for the web ACL. This ID is returned in the responses to create and list commands. You provide it to operations like update and delete. |
DefaultAction |
[required] The action to perform if none of the |
Description |
A description of the web ACL that helps with identification. |
Rules |
The Rule statements used to identify the web requests that you want to manage. Each rule includes one top-level statement that WAF uses to identify matching web requests, and parameters that govern how WAF handles them. |
VisibilityConfig |
[required] Defines and enables Amazon CloudWatch metrics and web request sample collection. |
DataProtectionConfig |
Specifies data protection to apply to the web request data that WAF stores for the web ACL. This is a web ACL level data protection option. The data protection that you configure for the web ACL alters the data that's available for any other data collection activity, including WAF logging, web ACL request sampling, Amazon Web Services Managed Rules, and Amazon Security Lake data collection and management. Your other option for data protection is in the logging configuration, which only affects logging. |
LockToken |
[required] A token used for optimistic locking. WAF returns a token to your |
CustomResponseBodies |
A map of custom response keys and content bodies. When you create a rule with a block action, you can send a custom response to the web request. You define these for the web ACL, and then use them in the rules and default actions that you define in the web ACL. For information about customizing web requests and responses, see Customizing web requests and responses in WAF in the WAF Developer Guide. For information about the limits on count and size for custom request and response settings, see WAF quotas in the WAF Developer Guide. |
CaptchaConfig |
Specifies how WAF should handle |
ChallengeConfig |
Specifies how WAF should handle challenge evaluations for rules that
don't have their own |
TokenDomains |
Specifies the domains that WAF should accept in a web request token. This enables the use of tokens across multiple protected websites. When WAF provides a token, it uses the domain of the Amazon Web Services resource that the web ACL is protecting. If you don't specify a list of token domains, WAF accepts tokens only for the domain of the protected resource. With a token domain list, WAF accepts the resource's host domain plus all domains in the token domain list, including their prefixed subdomains. Example JSON:
Public suffixes aren't allowed. For example, you can't use |
AssociationConfig |
Specifies custom configurations for the associations between the web ACL and protected resources. Use this to customize the maximum size of the request body that your protected resources forward to WAF for inspection. You can customize this setting for CloudFront, API Gateway, Amazon Cognito, App Runner, or Verified Access resources. The default setting is 16 KB (16,384 bytes). You are charged additional fees when your protected resources forward body sizes that are larger than the default. For more information, see WAF Pricing. For Application Load Balancer and AppSync, the limit is fixed at 8 KB (8,192 bytes). |